Es Vi

(i

BY

Mh Sd

Ves

Wye) ia
Vey Ue
a

Nps
Pim

iy VO i
LM a May Has

i We Ae

f Ley fy
ihe’

Si bs
Ue
ee

 

p+ ‘)
VOUT ALY
SIS

uy
Biss CatLy,

 
PG

4 Li |
Sas
1eTi

 

 

 

 

 

—
CORNELL ,

UNIVERSITY ©
LIBRARY

 

BOUGHT WITH THE.INCOME
OF THE SAGE ENDOWMENT
FUND GIVEN IN I89I BY
HENRY WILLIAMS SAGE

 

 

 

 

 
 

 

Extract

from the Literary Review (Litterarische Rundschau)
of J. B. Stamminger, Wiirzburg.

EDUCATIONAL WORKS AND CLASS-BOOKS

for the Study of modern Languages,
published by Julius Groos, Heidelberg.

 

_ Tulius Groos, Publisher at Heidelberg, has for the last
thirty years been devoting his special attention to educational works
on modern languages, and has published a large number of class-
books for the study of those modern languages most generally spoken.
In this particular departmen he is in our opinion unsurpassed by
any other German publisher. The series consists of 108 volumes of
different sizes which are all arranged on the same system, as is
easily seen by a glance at the grammars which so closely resemble
one another, that an acquaintance with one greatly facilitates the

study of the others. — This is no small advantage in these exact-
ing times, when the knowledge of one language alone is hardly deemed
sufficient.

The system referred to is easily discoverable: Ist. In the ar-
rangement of the grammar — 2nd. In the endeavour to enable the
pupil to understand a regular text as soon as possible, and above
all to teach him to speak the foreign language; this latter point
was considered ty the authors so particularly characteristic of their
works, that they have styled them — to distinguish them from other
works of a similar kind — Conversational Grammars.

The grammars are all divided into two parts, commencing with
a systematic explanation of the rules for pronunciation, and are
again subdivided into a number of Lessons. Each Part treats of
the Parts of Speech in succession,.the Ist. giving a rapid sketch of
the fundamental rules, which are explained more fully in the 2nd.
In the Ist. Part attention is given rather to the Etymology; in
the 2nd. Part more to the Syntace of the language; without how-
ever entirely separating the two, as is generally the case in Syste-
matic Grammars. The rules appear to us to be clearly given, they
are explained by examples, and the exercises are quite sufficient.
— We must confess that for those persons who, from a practi-
cal point of view, wish to learn a foreign language sufficiently well
to enable them to write and speak it with ease, the authors have
set down the grammatical rules in such a way, that it is equally
easy to understand and to learn them. —

Moreover we cannot but commend the elegance and neatness of
the type and binding of the books. It is doubtless on this ae-
count that these volumes have been received with so much favour
and that several have reached such an large circulation.

Our admiration of this rich eollection of works, of the method
displayed and the fertile genius of certain of the authors, is in-
creased when we examine the different series, especially those in-
tended for the use of foreigners. :

 

 
 

 

The first series comprises manuals for the use of
Englishmen. It consists of 28 volumes, 17 of which
are adapted for the study of German and French:
Dr. E. Otto, German Convers-Grammar and Key to it;
Dr. E. Otto, Supplement. Exercises to the Germ. Grammar;
Dr. E. Otto, Elementary German Grammar;

Dr. E. Otto, First German Book;

Dr. E. Otto, German Reader, 3 vols.;

Dr. E. Otto, Materials for transl. English into German,
Dr. E. Otto, German Conversations; [2 vols. and Keys;
Dr. K. Otto, French Convers.-Grammar and Key to it;
Dr. E. Otto, Materials for transl. English into French;
Otto-Wright, Elementary French Grammar; >
Otto-Corkran, French Dialogues;

Otto-Wright, Accidence of the german language;

C. M. Sauer, ttalian Conversation-Grammar and Key;
G. Cattaneo, lialian Reader;

P. Motti, Russian Convers.-Grammar and Key;

P. Motti, Elementary Russian Grammar and Key;

C, M. Sauer, Spanish Grammar and Key;
Sauer-Roehrich, Spanish Reader;

Sauer-Corkran, Spanish Dialogues.

The series for the use of Frenchmen comprises
21 vol., 7 of which adapted for the study of German:
Dr. E. Otto, Grammaire allemande and Key to it;

Dr. E. Otto, Petite Grammaire allemande;
Dr. E. Otto, Lectures allemandes, 3 vols.;
Dr. E. Otto. Conversations allemandes;

5 adapted for the study of English:

Dr. A. Mauron, Nouvelle Grammaire anglaise and Key;
Dr. A. Mauron, Petite Grammaire anglaise;

Dr. A. Mauron, Lectures anglaises;

F. Corkran, Conversations anglaises;

four each adapted for the study of Italian,
three for Spanish and two for Russian:

C. M. Sauer, Nouvelle Grammaire italienne and Key;
P. Motti, Petite Grammaire italienne;

G. Cattaneo, Chrestomathie italienne;

C. M. Sauer, Grammaire espagnole and Key;
Sauer-Roehrich, Lectures espagnoles;

Paul Fuchs, Grammaire russe and Key.

The series for Italians comprises 7 vols. (2
for the English, 2 for the French and 5 for the
German language):

 

 
 

 

| C. M. Sauer, Grammatica inglese;

L. Pavia, Grammatica elementare della lingua inglese;

Sauer-Motti, Grammatica francese;

Sauer-Motti, Grammatichetta francese;

Sauer-Ferrari, Grammatica tedesca and Key;

Dr. E. Otto, Piccola grammatica tedesca;

Dr. E. Otto, Letture tedesche;

P. Motti, Conversazioni tedesche.

There are five volumes for the use of Spaniards:

Otto-Ruppert, Gramatica alemana and Key.

Dr. E. Otto, Gramatica sucinta de la lengua alemana.

Dr. E. Otto, Gramatica sucinta de la lengua francesa.

Dr. E. Otto, Gramatica sucinta de la lengua inglesa.

There are three volumes for the use of Portuguese:

Otto-Prévét, Grammatica allem& and Key.

Otto-Prévét, Grammatica elementar allema.

The series for the use of Germans comprises the

French subdivision with the following books:

Dr. E. Otto, Franz. Konvers.-Grammatik u. Schliissel;

Dr. E. Otto, Franz. Konversat.-Lesebuch, in 2 parts;

Dr. E. Otto, Franz. Konversat.-Lesebuch (for the spec.
use of Schools for young ladies, in 2 parts);

Dr. E. Otto, Kleine franzésische Sprachlehre;

Dr. E, Otto, Conversations frangaises;

the English subdivision comprises:

Dr. Th. Gaspey, Engl. Konv.-Grammatik u. Schliissel;

Dr. Th. Gaspey, Englisches Konversations-Lesebuch;

Dr. Th. Gaspey, English Conversations, containing

subjects taken from daily life, & ex-
tracts from history and literature;

Otto-Runge, Kleine englische Sprachlehre;

Dr. E. Otto, Materialien z. Ubersetzen ins Englische
for proficients (short pieces of consecutive
prose, with conversational exercises).

the Italian subdivision comprises:

C. M. Sauer, Italien. Konv.-Grammatik und Schliissel;

C. M. Sauer, Italienisches Konvers.-Lesebuch;

G. Cattaneo, Italienische Chrestomathie;

C. M. Sauer, Kleine italienische Sprachlehre;

C. M. Sauer, Italienische Gespriiche (Dialoghi italiani);

Lardelli, J., Ubungsstiicke zum Ubersetzen aus dem

Deutschen ins Italienische;
in the spanish subdivision we have:
‘| C, M. Sauer, Spanische Konv.-Grammatik u. Schliissel;

 

 
 

 

C. M. Sauer, Dialogos castellanos;

Sauer-Roehrich, Spanisches Lesebuch;

Sauer-Runge, Kleine spanische Sprachlehre;

Sauer-Kordgien, Spanische Rections-Liste.
in the Portugeese subdivision:

Sauer-Kordgien, Portug. Konv.-Grammatik u. Schliissel.

G. C. Kordgien, Kleine Portugiesische Sprachlehre;
in the Dutch subdiwision:

T. G. G. Valette, Niederl, Konv.-Grammatik u. Schliissel;

T. G. G. Valette Kleine niederlindische Sprachlehre;
in the Russian subdivision:

Paul Fuchs, Russische Konv.-Grammatik u. Schliissel.

H. Arendt, Englische Handelskorrespondenz.
Oberholzer u. Osmond, Kurze Anleitung zu deutsch., franzés.,
engl. u. ital. Geschiftebriefen f. Kaufl. u. Gewerbetreibende.

The works of Dr. L. Supfie, edited by the same publisher,
do not follow the conversational method. The ,,Franzésische
Schulgrammatik*, for lower and middle Classes, a work
answering both for scientific and practical purposes, though per-
haps sumewhat too bulky for the above-mentioned classes, contains
very good exercises, and may also be useful for reference. The
9, Lesebuch** (or French Reader), and especially the ,Chresto-
mathie™, for upper Classes, contain careful selections, of pieces of
prose and poetry, from the different periods of French literature.

(These three works have been revised and enlarged by Pro-
fessor Dr. Mauron, who joined to the last a ,, Résumé (Com-
pendium) de VHistoire de la Littérature frangaise“,
and a ,,Petit Traité de la Versification frangaise™,
that enhance its value.)

The ,,Engl. Chrestomathie® of Dr. L. Supfle is a
very good companion to the French one.

In these works the chief difficulty under which several of
the authors have labored, has been the necessity of teaching a
language in a foreign idiom; not to mention the peculiar diffi-
culties which the German idiom offers in writing school-books for
the study of that language.

We willingly testify that the whole collection gives proof of
much care d& industry, both with regard to the aims it has in
view & the way in which these have been carried out, & more-
over reflects great credit on the editor, this collection being in
reality quite an exceptional thing of its kind. —

Paderborn 1881. oesale

 

The Publisher is unweariedly engaged in extending the range
of the educational works issuing from his press; a certain number
of new books are now in course of preparation.

 

 
METHOD GASPEY-OTTO-SAUER.

SPANISH

CONVERSATION-GRAMMAR

BY

CHARLES MARQUARD SAUER,

DIRECTOR OF THE SUPERIOR COMMERCIAL ACADEMY REVOLTELLA AT
TRIESTE, FORMERLY PROFESSOR AT THE COMMERCIAL ACADEMY OF
PRAGUE AND AT THE PUBLIC COMMERCIAL SCHOOL OF LEIPZIG.
AUTHOR OF THE “ITALIAN CONVERSATION-GRAMMAR”, OF
“THE SPANISH READER” ete.

FIFTH EDITION.

LONDON.

DAVID NUTT, 270 Strand.
DULAU & Co., 37 Soho Square.
SAMPSON LOW & CO., St. Dunstan’s House, Fetter Lane, Fleet Street.

AGENCIES FOR AMERICA:

NEW YORK. § CHICAGO.
E. STEIGER & Co., \ MUHLBAUER & BEHRLE,
25 Park Place. 41 La Salle Street.
THE INTERNATIONAL BOSTON.
NEWS COMPANY, CHARLES SCHCENHOF,
29 and 31 Beekman Street. & 144 Tremont Street.
HEIDELBERG.

JULIUS GROOS.
1891.
A.5 0955

 

 

The method of Gaspey~-Otto-Sauer is my own private property,
having been acquired by purchase from the authors. The text- books
made after this method are incessantly improved. All rights, espe-
cially the right of making new editions, and the right of translation
for all languages, are reserved. Imitations and fraudulent impres-
sions will be prosecuted according to law. I am thankful for com-
munications relating to these matters.

Heidelberg. Julius Groos.

 

 
Hr

Preface to the First Edition.

The so-called Conversation method, uniting at once
, theory and practice, has met with the greatest success
in Germany as well as in England, America, and France.
Hitherto, more than twelve. grammars, based on this
method, have been published, and some of them, viz. the
“Englische Conversations-Grammatik” by Dr. Gaspey,
the “Franzésische Conversations-Grammatik’, and the
“German Conversation-Grammar’ by Dr. Emil Otto,
have passed through 14 double editions, a result which
plainly shows the value of the new method. My Italian
Grammars, for English, French, and German pupils, have
likewise been successful, and my new Spanish Grammar
for Germans was so well received both by the critic and
the public, that I have ventured to produce a Spanish
Grammar for the use of English students.

Without entering into particulars as to the method,
which is sufficiently known in England and America, I
beg leave to state, that this book is no translation of my
Spanish Grammar for Germans, but a work adapted to
the genius of the English language. The grammatical
part is based on the best German works hitherto publish-
ed on the “Grammaire espagnole” by Gildo, the “Gra-
matica castellana” by D. Gird y Roma, Valencia 1852,
and on the 12‘ edition of the excellent Grammar by D.
Andres Bello, Madrid 1878. Besides these works, Salva
has been carefully consulted. The Reading Exercises of
the Second Part were selected from specimens of the best
Spanish authors given in the collection of Figueras, Bar-
celona 1857.

The arrangement of the grammatical materials is the
same as in the other Conversation Grammars. The al-
phabetical register of the irregular verbs has been placed
at the end of the Second Part, as the pupil might easily
be misled, were it to follow the First Part, which is
succeeded by an alphabetical list of the verbs with double
participles.
IV Preface.

Finally, I have to return my best thanks to Dr.
Gaspey, who kindly revised the English text, and to
Dr. von Frantzius who attended to the Spanish.

Toeplitz-Sch ;
egiewe ecacaman C. M. Sauer.

Preface to the Second Edition.

The second edition of this grammar has been care-
fully revised and considerably augmented by the addition
of numerous examples, chiefly in the Second Part, all
chosen from the best modern authors. In the First Part,
a good many annotations were added to the chapter of
the irregular and defective verbs. Concerning the accen-
tuation of the conjugation, I have thoroughly adopted,
in this second edition, the system of D. Andres Bello’s
grammar.

Dr. von Frantzius and Dr. Emil Otto at Heidel-
berg were so kind as to revise the Spanish and English
text of this new edition. I beg leave to return my best
thanks to these learned gentlemen for their careful and
assiduous co-operation.

Salzburg. C. M. Sauer.

. Preface to the Newest Edition.

In every respect, not only with regard to the gram-
matical rules, but also with reference to the English text,
the Spanish and English exercises, and the idioms in both
languages, the new Editions have been most thoroughly
and carefully revised by Prof. W. Rohrich of Stuttgart,
Dr. J. Wright of Oxford and M? Sutton F. Corkran.
May their united exertions, for which I thus publicly
beg to express my most heart-felt gratitude, again promote
the usefulness and the success of my book!

Trieste.
C. M. Sauer.
CONTENTS.

First Part.

On Pronunciation. Page
Letters of the alphabet... ........2.+--. 1
On the signs of punctuation. ..........4. 2
On the pronunciation of the vowels ........ 2
On diphthongs . 66 ss ee tee 3
Pronunciation of the consonants. ........4.. 3
Observations on the pronunciation of vowels... . 6
General remarks on the accent .......... 6
Reading Exercise. . 2... 2 1 ee ee ee ee 7
1. Lesson. Leccion primera. On the article ...... 9
2. > Leccion segunda. On the plural of substantives 12
3. a Leccion tercera. Declension of substantives . 15
a. With the definite article. ...... . 16
b. With the indefinite article. ...... 17
c. With a demonstrative adjective .... 17
4, » Leccion cuarta. Prepositions ........ 20
5. a Leccion quinta. Thesubstantive without thearticle 23
6. » Leccion sexta. Terminations modifying the
meaning of substantives ......... 26
7. » Leccion séptima. On proper names ..... 28
8. » Leccionoctava. Theauxiliary verb Haber, tohave 32
9. » Leccion nona. Tener, to have, to hold ... 385
10. » Leccion décima. Exercises ........-. 37
11. » Leccion undécima. The auxiliary verb Ser, to be 40
12. » Leccion duodécima. Estar, to be. ..... 43
13, » Teccion trecena. Exercises ........+. 45
14. » Leccion catorcena. Determinative adjectives . 48
1. Demonstrative adjectives ....... 48
2. Interrogative adjectives ........ 49
15. . > Leccion quincena. Possessive pronouns . . 51
16. » Leccion décima sexta. Numbers. ...... 54
1. Cardinal numbers... .....-+--. 55
17, » Leccion décima séptima. 2. Ordinal numbers. 60
18. » Leccion décima octava. 3. Indefinite numerals 65
19, » Leccion décima nona. On the adjective ... 68
20. » Leccion vigésima. Degrees of comparison .. 73
21. » Leccion vigésima prima. On the regular verb 79
Reading Exercise: El camello y la pulga . 87
22. » Leccion vigésima segunda. Peculiarities of some
regular verbs .... +. 2.542 . 88
Reading Exercise: El barbero de José Tm. 91
23. » Leccion vigésima tercia. On pronouns. ... 91
24, » Leccion vigésima cuarta. Conjunctive personal
Promotie ~ 6 6s % 8s ee ee ee ee 96

Reading Exercise: El Negro finjido. ... 101
VI

25.

26.

27.
28.

29.
30.

31.
32.

33.
34.
35.

36.
37.

38.

39.
40.

41.

Lesson. Leccion vigésima quinta. Demonstrative and in-

»

Contents,

Page

terrogative pronouns. .....+ ++: 102
Reading Exercise: El consejo de Luis XI. 106
Don Felipe y el abogado 106

Leccion vigésima sexta. Possessive and relative
pronouns ..... ae ee eae eee 106
Reading Exercise. El gran rey .. + + + 10
Leccion vigésima séptima. On the passive voice 111
Read. Exere.: La gallina de los huevos de oro 117

Leccion vigésima octara. Pronominal or reflec-

tive verbs . 2... ee ee te es 117
Leccion vigésima nona. Impersonal verbs . . 123
Leccion trigésima. On adverbs .. + + ++ + 126

Reading Exercise: El estornino sagaz . . . 130
Leccion trigésima prima. The adverbs continued 131
Leccion trigésima segunda. On prepositions . 136

Reading Exercise: El traidor despreciado . 139
Leccion trigésima tercia. On conjunctions . . 189

Reading Exercise: Hl amo y el criado .. 142
Leccion trigésima cuarta. On interjections . . 148

Reading Exercise: Los panaderos generosos 143
Leccion trigésima quinta. On the irregular verbs 144

First Class: Verbs conjugated like alentar

and encender ... 1... ew eae os. 145
Reading Exercise: Catinat ........ 149
Second Class: Verbs conjugated like acordar

and morder . .. 1... ee eee eee 150

Reading Exercise: Astucia de un Viajero . 154
Lecciontrigésima sexta. Theirreg. verbs continued 150
Leccion trigésima séptima. The irregular verbs

continued... 1... 2.2 eee ea a 155
Third Class: Verbs conjugated like crecer
and conduciy .. 0. 1. ee ee ee 155

Fourth Class: Verbs conjugated like pedir 157
Reading Exercise: La falsa alerta ... . 160
Leccion trigésima octava. The irregular verbs
continued . 6s 6 68 oe a ee we we 161
Fifth Class: Verbs conjugated like sentir . 161
Sixth Class: Verbs conjug.like huir and argitir 162
Reading Exercise: Muerte de Carlos de Anjou 165
Leccion trigésima nona. Verbs entirely irregular 166
Reading Exercise: Un viaje d Paris .. . 170
Leceion cuadragésima, The entirely irregular
verbs continued : . 171
Reading Exercise: Un viaje d Paris .. . . 1977
Leccion cuadragésima prima. The participle . 178

Irregular and double participles .... , 178
Alphabetical list of the verbs with double
participles . 1... es. ae te en, 179

Reading Exercise: Un viaje d Paris. . . . 184
Alphabetical list of the defective verbs . . 185
Contents.

Second Part.

Introductory Chapter. Orthography, Pronunciation and Signs
of Punctuation... 6 we ee ee ee
Ancient and modern orthography .........
THE VOWEIS® esc. ee es eB a BE Se a
The accemb 25 yess lye cae Hee GRO es ae a a
New rules on the accent given by the Spanish Aca-
COMA: 5. ae e.g ah ee de) a QR a ae eg
‘The separation of words .......-+..2..-
The signs of punctuation... ........0..
1. Lesson. The gender of substantives.........
Reading Exercise: Batalla de Lepanto
2 > The article .....-....4.
Reading Exercise: Batallade Lepanto. (Contin. J
3 » The plural of substantives .........
Reading Exercise: Batalla de Lepanto. (Fin)
4. » The possessive pronouns. .........
Reading Exercise: La Ciudad de Valencia .
5 » The adjectives... . 6 6s sea eee
Reading Exercise: La Ciudad de Sevilla
6 » Numerals: 3-4 ew ee Oe Be SS
Indefinite numerals ...+........
Reading Exercise: La Cindad de eee
(COUP: ee BSE a EY
7. » Pronouns. Personal pronouns .......
Reading Exercise: Roger de Lauria
8. » Demonstrative and interrogative pronouns . .
Reading Exercise: Roger de Lauria. (Contin,
9. » Possessive and relative pronouns ......
Reading Exercise: Roger de Lauria. (Contin,
“10. » Adverbs. The negation ..........
Affirmation and negation. .........
Reading Exercise: Roger de Lauria. (Contin,)
11. » Prepositions... 2 & 3.6 4 eb aa ewe ee
Proper prepositions ........6-+...
Reading Exercise: Roger de Lauria. (Contin)
12. » The prepositions continued. ........
Reading Exercise: Roger de Lauria. (Contin.)
13. »- . Prepositions. (Conclusion.).........
Improper prepositions ...........
Reading Exercise: Roger de Lauria. (Contin.)
14. » Conjunctions. . . 2... ee eee eee
Subordinative conjunctions ......4...
Reading Exercise: Roger de Lauria. (Fin.)
15. » The complements of the verb. The object
_ Reading Exercise: Primer sitio de Gerona .
16. » Special remarks on some English verbs
Reading Exercise: Primer sitio de Gerona.
(Continuation y fin) . 2... 2. eee
17. » ' Peculiarities of different verbs .......

Reading Exercise: Tercer sitio de Gerona

VII

Page

237
238
241
243
246
247
253
254
205
258

259
264
266
271
273
275
277
279
282
284
286
290
292

297
298
303
VII Contents.
Page
18. Lesson. On moods... . 1... 2. . eee ees 304
The indicative mood .......-.-+-55 305
The subjunctive mood .........-++-. 305
Imperative mood... . 1... 1 eee eee 307
Conditional « : «6 2 ew we es eR ES 308
Reading Exercise: Tercer sitio de Gerona.
(Continuacion). 2... 6 ee ee ee 309
19, » The use of tenses. Consecution of the tenses.
Tenses of the indicative ........-. 311
Reading Exercise: Tercer sitio de Gerona.
(Contin) 0 6s wwe HES 315
20. » The use and consecution of the tenses. (Con-
clusion): «4 3 Be sk eee Sw Ye we % 317
The tenses of the subjunctive. ....... 318
Conditional «. «5% 3 ee Ge Se Bos we 320
Reading Exercise: Tercer sitio de Gerona.
(CONN) 6 Be we 322
21. » The infinitive mood ............ 324
Reading Exercise: Tercer sitio de Gerona.
(OONEA) eee ee ew 329
22, » The infinitive. (Contin) .......... 330
Reading Exercise: Tercer sitio de Gerona.
(COMM. ao ne oo ae Ea OS 333
23. » he gerund 6 5 6 6 2 Bee a ee eR S 335
Reading Exercise: Tercer sitio de Gerona.
(COMM oe we we 339
24. » The participle. Past participle ....... 341
Reading Exercise: Tercer sitiodeGerona.(Fin) 345
Poesias. Los dos conejos .... 1... 2-2. + ee ee 347
De UW Pajarito. x. wb a ee Se Swe RE 348
El gozque y el macho de noria .......... 348
El 4rbol de la esperanza .  .. 1... 1... eee 350
EL PUISENOR aha. ogee See Ae eR we we a gs eR 350
Lag-riquezasi vc iw ee 6 PERE BRE as 352
Fantasia nocturna .. 1... 1 ee ee ee ee 353
Convite en el campo ............ . . 854
Consuelo celestial ..........0..08088. 354
MOGI Gi a> nares: Fee on Gy. we” le ehh tie es ee Rea 355
El timulo de Felipe I... 2... 2... 2... 355
A Marco Bruto. ............ -.. . 3856
Prosa. Armas y Letras ...... ...... . . 857
PNALCO gor ee 3 ge hy as ee Ree A es as 361
Costumbres francesas . .- 2... 2.00. ee ee 362
Origen del Carnaval ...........0080.4 369
Alphabetical list of the irregular verbs. ......... 372

Vocabulary referring to the Translations and Reading

Exercises contained in the Second Part ... .377—396

 

8¢——
FIRST PART

 

On Pronunciation.

§ 1. Letters of the Alphabet.

The Spanish Alphabet consists of 27 letters, which
are as follow:
Character. Name. Character. Name,
A,a, ain “father‘.*) M, m, emme (émmé).

B, b, bey (bé). N,n,  enne (€énné).

C, c, they (thé). N, fi, enn-yey.**)

Ch, ch, tshey (tché). 0,6,

D, d, dey (dé). P, p, — pey (pé).

E, e, ey (6) Q, 4, 00.

F, f, — effey (éffé). R, r, — errey (érré).

G, g, dey (guttural 8, 8s,  essey (éssé).
sound, see§ 5). T, t,  tey (té).

H, h, ahtshey. U, u, 00.

I, i, ee. V, v, vey (vé).

J, j,  otah (guttural X, x,  eykis (équisse).
sound, see§ 5). Y, y, ee greeégah.

L, 1, — elle (éllé). {Greek ee].

Ll, ll, ell-yey.**) Z, 2, theytah.

Note. Enclosed in brackets, we have added, with the
French pronunciation, the names of the letters B, C, Ch, D,
E, F, L, M, N, P, R, §, T, V, X.

Of these letters a, e, i, 0, u, y are vowels, the others
are consonants. K and W (doble v) occur only in foreign
words, as Franklin, Westminster, alwaciy (Arabian stew-

*) We shall denote this sound by ‘“ah‘*
**) y as in year, you etc.
Spanish Grammar. i
2 On Pronunciation.

ard), zalé (Arabian chief); kilégramo, kilometro; but the two
latter words may also be spelled quilégramo, quilometro.

§ 2. On the signs of punctuation.

1) The accent (‘). The Spanish language has only
the acute accent, which is used if the stress is laid on any
other syllable than the general rules of prosody would
lead one to expect; thus: briscamelo, ultimamente, dptimo,
pésimo ete.; or to distinguish words having the same
sound, as el (the) and é (he), tu (she) and ¢dé (thou) ete.

2) The so-called tilde ("). This sign, peculiar to
the Spanish language, is placed over the in order to
indicate that its pronunciation is not enne, but ennyey.
(See the pron. of x.)

3) The crema (") denotes that the vowel a, above
which it is placed, is not mute, according to the rule
stated on page +, but must be sounded; thus: averigiieis,
pron. avéree-goo-ey-is; argiiir, pron. ar-goo-ir; vergiienza,
pron. ver-gooen-tha.

4) The signs of punctuation (los signos de puntuacion)
are: the comma (,) (Ja coma), semi-colon (;) punto y
coma), colon (:) (dos puntos), period (.) (el punto final),
hyphen (-) (el guion), sign of interrogation (el interro-
gante, signo de interrogacion) (é) which is placed first
and (?) which is placed last, sign of exclamation (el ad-
mirante, signo de admiracion) written (j) at the beginning
and (!) at the end.

The apostrophe is unknown in Spanish.

§ 3. On the pronunciation of the vowels.

a, sounds like a in the English words are, father,
but never like a@ in name or ball. Examples: ama,
cama, casa etc.

E, e, sounds almost like a in the English word air

(the French @), as: perro (dog). ‘ (See § 6.)

I, i, sounds like 7 in milk, sister, children ete., but
never like the 7 in child, fire, idle. Examples:
nito (pron. néin-yo*), child; prima, cousin ete.

O, 0, is pronounced like the English o in off, loss ete.,

as: con, with; por, by, through ete. (See § 6.)

*) y as in year, you etc.
On Pronunciation. 3

U, u, sounds like 00 in boots, but never like the English
wu in union, as: uno (pron. oo-noh), one; pudo
(pron. poo- doh)s could. — Qu: see the letter Q.

Y, y, as a vowel, is only met with in the word y, and
in a few monosyllables, as: ley (pron. ley-{*), law;

ey (pron. rey-i*), king, where y sounds like a
aot 7 in English**),

§ 4. On Diphthongs.

Proper diphthongs, as met with in English (00, ou,
etc.), French (oeu, eu, eau, ai, etc.) or German (au, eu,
ai), do not exist, in Spanish, where every vowel should be
distinctly pronounced. Nevertheless, two vowels may form

& ~~ - an aos
one syllable, as in rey, peine, arduo, duefo, etc.

§ 5. Pronunciation of the consonants.

Note. Within the last fifty years, Spanish ortho-
graphy has been greatly modified and reformed. Therefore
a great many deviations from the fundamental orthoepic
rules now established may be found in the Spanish writers
of the last century. We shall mention these anomalies occa-
sionally, when speaking of the pronunciation of consonants.
B, b, sounds like English 6, but with a slight trans-
ition to v, especially in the middle of words, thus:

escribir, to write, pron. “‘es-cri- bir’: beato, blessed,

pron. “bé-ah-toh”. The correct pronunciation is
best learnt from a well educated Castilian.

C, c, 1) before a, 0, w and before consonants, is pro-
nounced like English k, as: el canto, the song;
como, like; el culto, worship; claro, clear; el criado,
the footman.

2) Before e and i its sound is like English th
in the word “thin”, as ciento***), a hundred pr.
thee-en-to; civil, pr. thee-vil; vocear, pr. vo-they-ar.

*) Short 7.

**) According to a new proposal, 1 ought to be uniformly
employed in these cases, thus ley, rey etc., but this proposal has
met with but little approbation in South America, and in Spain
with none.

***) In Spanish Southern America and in Northern Spain ¢
and 2 sound like ss.

1*#
4 On Pronunciation.

Ch, ch, like tsh or ch in church, as: Sancho, pron. San-
tsho; chicha, pron. tshi-tshah; muchacho, pr. moo-
tshah-tsho. In words derived from Greek, ch
sounds like &, as: chaos*) = kah-oss.

D, d, as in English. At the end of a word this con-
sonant is almost inaudible. Its sound greatly
resembles a very soft th. Thus: Madrid, pron.

_ Ma-drith; verdad, pron. ver-dath.

F, f, as in English.

G, g, before a, 0, u, and before consonants, like
English g in the word good, as: gato, garrafa,
grande. Before e and 7 it has the sound of
Spanish j. See this letter.

Notes. In the syllables gue and gui the « is not
sounded, being only a sign of pronunciation, which
indicates that g is not to be pronounced like J,
but like g in good. Thus: guerra, pron. ger-ra;
guia, pron. gee-ah.

If, on the contrary, « after g before e and ¢ is not
silent, a crema (‘*) should be placed over it (see
§ 2). Thus: agiiero, pron. a-goo-ey-ro; argiiir,
pron. ar-goo-ir.

Gn is not pronounced like French or Italian gn
in digne or degno, but exactly like English
gn in dignity. Thus: digno, pron. dig-no; signo,
sig-no, magnifico, pron. mag-nee-fi-co.

H, h, is almost inaudible, or rather as soft an aspira-
tion as French h aspirée in la hache. Examples:
hombre, hora, almost like omb-re, o-ra. Before
ue the aspiration is somewhat stronger, and has
a slight guttural sound, like the German & in
the word aud. Thus: huerto, pr. fhoo-er-to.

J, j, has a sharp, deep guttural sound, which cannot
be rendered by English letters, not unlike Scotch
ch in loch, or German g& in the word maden,
but stronger. Thus: Méjico, pron. Methi-ko;
Quijote, pron. Ki-iho-tey.

VB. G, before e and i, is pronounced like Span-
ish j, In modern orthography, we write j in-

*) In this case modern orthography employs c (before a, 0, u)
or gu (before e or i), a8: caos, quimera.
On Pronunciation. 5

stead of g, when this letter has the guttural sound.
For x, too, the Spaniards now substitute j. (See
the letter x.)

L, 1, sounds as in English.

Ll,

ZA

aac)

_

M<8

i,

P,
q,

sounds almost like Italian gl in meglio, or like
I in the English word postillion. Thus: Meno,
pron. lyé-no*); Wamar, pron. lyah-mar*); lanto,
pron. lyahn-to*). The sound of the W is very soft.
as in English.

(con tilde) very much resembles French gn in
the word campagnard. Thus: nifio, pron. nin-yo**) ;
duefio, pron. doo-en-yo**); dofia, pron. don-yah**).

Note. % was formerly written nn.

as in English.

only occurs. before w, gu being an equivalent for
k in English, as: querido, pron. ké-ri-do; quimera,
pron. kee-mé-rah; arquitectura. The vowel after
qu is either e or 7%.

has a very sharp, grating sound at the beginning
of a word, as: raro, rojo, and after the conso-
nants 1, n, 7, and s, thus: honra, alrota, Israel,
perro. Otherwise it sounds like English r, but
somewhat stronger, as: pero, caro etc.

sounds like ss, as: rosa, pron. ro-ssah; ruso, pron.
roo-ssoh.

Note. As Spanish s is always very sharp or
hissing, double s is superfluous. — Except cc, il,
nn (very seldom), and rr, double consonants are
not met with in Spanish.

as in English.
as in English.

was formerly much in use, and had the sound of
j. In the middle of words it now only occurs in
Latin words such as: examen, exequias, and sounds
like Latin and English x When followed by
a consonant, z is now frequently replaced by
s, in order to avoid the hard sound. Thus: es-
tremo for extremo; estranjero for extranjero.

See § 1, Part II.

*) y as in year, youth etc.
**) y as in youth, year.
6 On Pronunciation.

Y, y, as a vowel, sounds like i. Before and between
vowels it is a consonant and sounds like Eng-
lish y in the words year, youth, as: rayo, pron.
rah-yo; reyes, pron. rey-yes.

Z, z, has exactly the same sound as ¢ before ¢ and 27,
i. e. English th. Thus: zagal, pron. thah-
gal; gorra, pron. thor-rah; azul, pron. ah-thool.
Before a, 0, and w this letter now replaces ¢;
formerly, in such words, the Spaniards wrote ¢,
as: cagal for zagal; but this practice is obsolete.

§ 6. Observations on the pronunciation of vowels.

E.

1) Before ++ this vowel sounds like ai in the Eng-
lish word air, or the French é; as: perro, pron. per-ro.

2) In every other case it sounds like the French é
or the English vowel sound in there, as: el cetro, pron.
they-tro, engendrar, pron. en-then-drar; feliz, pron. fey-*)
lith.

3) Before ch the sound is somewhat longer, as:
hecho, pron. eyh-tsho.

4) At the beginning and at the end of words, e is
rapidly passed over, though distinctly heard, as: estd,
pron. (e)stih; espada, pron. (e)spdda; ese pron. éss(e).

O.

If this vowel terminates a word, and if the following
word begins with a vowel, o is scarcely heard, as: como
esta, pron. com(o) esta.

In the syllable or the sound of o is rather obscure,
and somewhat resembles 00, but 0 predominates, as: corto,

pron. cor-to; por, pron. por.

§ 7. General remarks on the accent.
(See II. Part, § 3.)
Preliminary remark: The accentuation of Spanish

words is always a pronounced one; whilst e. g. in French
the various syllables of the same word have almost a

” *) Yet ey, like ah, oh, ee in the foregoing examples, is not
so long as in English.
On Pronunciation. 7

uniform accentuation, Spanish has (like English and Ger-
man) one which is the principal bearer of the accent.

Rule 1. Words terminating in vowels have the
stress on the penultimate syllable, as: alguno, accented:
alguno; Granada, accented: Grandda; continuo, accented:
continio. =:

Rule 2. Words ending in consonants or in y have
the stress on the last svllable, as: reloj, accented: reldj;
sefior, accented: sefér; ley, accented: léy.

Rule 3. The terminations ia, ie, 10; gua, giie, guo;
cua, cue, cuo are always supposed to form one syllable;
the stress, therefore, is laid on the penultimate, thus: In-
dia, ace. india; nadie, acc. nddie; imperio, acc. wmpério.

Observat. Whenever » and s are inflections of verbs and
nouns, they cannot alter the fundamental rule. Therefore
los libros is not accented librds (as in 2), but Ubros, because
the singular el libro has the stress on the penultimate (rule 1).
Likewise, amen (they may love) is not accented amén
(which means ‘‘Amen”), but dmen (from the verb amar).
Also the proper names Cervantes, Lopez are considered as
plurals, although the names of one person, and are therefore
accented Cervdntes, Lépez, and not (as in rule 2) Cervantes,
Lopéz.

An exception to rule 3 is presented by the verbal ter-
minations in ta, as: tenia, tendria etc. As these syllables
are contracted from iba, the stress remains on the ¢%. Thus:
tenia, tendria.

Rule 4. Any deviation from the above general rules
is indicated by the written accent, Thus: continuo (adj.),
Carlos, imagen, Garcia, amé etc. This accent is a sure
guide to the pronunciation.

Reading Exercise.
ee always like e in me; ah like a in “father”; 00 as in “bloom”;
é like ey in “grey”.
Despues que Don Quijote hubo bien  satisfecho
Despooess ké Don Kidhoté ’ooboh bi-énn sahtisfétsho
su est6mago, tomd un pufio de bellotas en la mano
soo esstomahgo tomoh oon poon-yo dé bellyotass enn la mahno

y mirandolas atentamente solté la voz 4 semejantes
ee mirandohlass attentahmenté soltoh lah voth ah ssémégantess
8 On Pronunciation.

razones. Dichosa edad y siglos dichosos aquellos
rathoness. Ditshossah éda(th) ee sseegloss ditshossoss akell-yoss

A quien los antiguos pusieron nombre de dorados,
ah ki-énn loss antee-goo-oss poossi-erron nombré dé dorrahdoss,

y noporque en ellos el oro queen esta nuestra
ee no porké enn ell-yos el oro ké en esstah noo-esstrah

edad _ de hierro tanto se estima, se alcanzase en
édah(th) dé iérr-ro tanto sé esstee-mah, sé alkanthassé enn

aquella venturosa sin fatiga alguna, sino porque en-
akell-ya ventoorossah sin fahtee-gah algoo-nah, see-no porké enn-

ténces los queen ella vivian ignoraban estas dos
tonnthess los ké enn ell-yah vi-vee-an ig-nor-ahban esstas doss

palabras de tuyo y mio. Eran en aquella santa edad
palabrass dé too-yoh ee mee-o. Eran enn ahkell-yasan-tah 6-da(th)

todas las cosas comunes: 4 nadie le era necesario.
todass las cossass comooness: ah nahdi-é lé erah néthessario,

para alcanzar su ordinario sustento tomar otro trabajo
pabrah alkannthar soo ordinahrio soostentoh tomahr otro trabatho

que alzar la mano, y alcanzarle de las robustas encinas”
ké althahr la mahno, ee aleanthahrlé dé las roboosstass ennceenass

que libremente les estaban convidando con su dulce y
ké librémenté less esstaban convi-dandoh con soo doolthé ee

sazonado fruto. Las claras fuentes y corrientes
ssathonadoh froot-to. Lass klahrass foo-enntess ee corri-enntess

rios, en magnifica abundancia, sabrosas y trans-
ree-oss, enn mag-nee-fi-kah aboondannthi-ah, ssabrossass ee transs-
bet on SR.
parentes aguas les ofrecian. En las quiebras de las
parentess dahgooass less ofréthi-an. Enn lass ki-é-brass dé lass

pefias y en lo hueco de los drboles formaban su
penn-yas ee enn lo hoo-é-ko dé loss ahr-bo-less formah-ban ssoo
reptiblica las solicitas y discretas abejas, ofrecien-
ré-poob-likah lass solee-thi-tass e dis-cré-tass ahbémjass, of-ré-thien-
do 4 cualquiera mano sin interes alguno la
do ah koo-al-ki-érah mah-no sin in-té-ress al-goo-noh lah

fértil cosecha de su duleisimo trabajo.
fertil koss-étshah dé soo dool-theess-imo trabah-moh.
t
On the article. 9

~

First Lesson. lLeccion primera.
On the article. — Del Articulo.

The article indicates the gender of substantives.
The Spanish language has two genders, viz.: the mascu-
line (el género masculino), and the feminine (el género
femenino).

There are two articles in Spanish as in English:
the definite article and the indefinite article.

The definite article for masculine substantives is el;
for feminine substantives la.

Examples: el padre, the father; la madre, the mother;
‘el hijo, the son; la hija, the daughter; el soldado, the
soldier; la_abeja, the bee.

Note. “K-Wétiter gender, as in German or Latin, does not
exist in Spanish. If, however, an adjective, pronoun, or
numeral is used as a substantive in a general sense, as: the
good, the evil, the mine and thine etc., where neither a per-
son nor a thing, but the abstract idea is meant, the neuter
article lo is used. This article has, of course, no plural.

Examples : lo malo, the evil; lo hermoso, the beautiful;
lo mio, mine (i. e. property); lo tugo, thine ete.

But: el mio, mine (i. e. brother, friend etc.); el tuyo,
thine (i. e. dog etc.).

Yet we must observe that, whenever the notion is not
quite abstract, the article el should be used. Thus el mal
means a bad thing whatever, while lo malo means the evil,
in the abstract sense; el bien is a good thing, something good,
whereas lo bueno means the good in general.

The indefinite article for masculine substantives is
un, for feminine una. The plural of this article, unos,
unas, means several, any, some, a few etc.

Examples: un padre, a father; una madre, a mother;
un animal, an animal; una iglesia, a church,

Note. As we stated in § 2, the Spanish language has no
apostrophe. Therefore the final vowel of the article is never
apostrophised as in French or Italian. The only change
10 Lesson 1,

which the article wndergoes for the sake of euphony is the
following:

Rule. Before feminine substantives, beginning with
a or ha (where h is silent) and accented on the first
syllable, the article el is substituted for la. Thus: el
ave, the bird (for la ave); el agua, the water (for la
agua); @l alma the soul (for la alma); el dguila, the
eagle; el harpa, the harp.

If, however, the stress is laid on any other syllable
than the first, the article la is used, as: la abeja, the
bee, la amiga, the friend (f.).

Before all the feminine substantives which require
the definite article, el, the final a of the indefinite article
una is dropped, as: un ave, un dguillu.

In fact el, before feminine nouns, is not a masculine
article, but the contracted ancient feminine article ela.

In the following list of words the genders are indicated by
m. (mase.) and f. (fem.).

Words.
Padre, father. ave f., er
madre, mother. pdjaro m., { OT
nino m., child. honra f., honour.
libro m., book. hermano, brother.
caballo m., horse. tia, aunt.
rosa f., rose. fusil m., gun.
espejo m., looking-glass. guinda f., cherry.
pera f., pear. ~ pan m., bread.
sombrero m., hat. pluma f., pen.
drbol m., tree. rey, king.
cetrvo m., sceptre. reima, queen.
perro m., dog. oca f., goose. f
vestido m., dress. no, no.
huerto, jardin m., garden. sé, yes.
carta f., letter. mi, my.
flor f., flower. y, and.

S. yo tengo, I have*), P. nosotros tenemos, we have.
tu tienes, thou hast. vosotros teneis, you have.
él tiene, he has. ellos tienen, they have (m.).
ella tiene, she has. ellas tienen, they have (f.).

*) Ifthe verb “to have” is not an auciliary verb, i. e. used
with a past part., as: Ihave loved, we shall have found, but a principal
verb as: I have (i. e. possess) a book; he had (i. e. he possessed)
a friend, the Spaniards do not use haber, which is only an auxi-
lary, but tener; properly “to hold”. Thus: I have a book, does
On the Article. 11

Reading Exercise. 1.

Yo*) tengo la rosa.

libro. Tu tienes un libro.
tiene un espejo.
el pan. El nifio tiene el espejo.

La tia tiene una oca.
tiene un cetro.
Vosotros teneis la honra.
tengo el vestido.

hermano y una tia.

Yo tengo una rosa.
éTienes ti un libro**)? El
El padre tiene el jardin. La madre tiene

Mi hermano tiene un perro.
Nosotros tenemos una flor y una pera.
éTeneis vosotros una flor?
Ella tiene un perro.
El rey tiene un dguila.

Tu tienes el
El nifio tiene un espejo.
El rey

Yo
El nifio tiene un

Traduccion. 2.
I have the book. I have a rose***), Thou hast the dress.

Hast thou a dog?
hat.
bread?
goose.
Have they (m.) a gun?
has a rose.
dog. My mother has a pen.

We have a hat.

Hast thou a looking-glass? He has the
My father has the bird.
Have we a gun?
They (m.) have a garden.
The child has a book. The queen
My aunt has the bird. My brother has the

Has she a pear? Has he the
You have the
Have they (f.) a horse?

Conversacion.

éTengo (yo) la rosa?

é Tienes (tu) el libro?
éTeneis (vosotros) un libro?
éTiene el nifio una flor?
éTiene el hermano un fusil?
éTeneis (vosotros) el vestido?

éTienen (ellos) una pera y
una guinda?

éTiene (él) el pan?

éTiene (ella) una flor?

éTiene el hermano un amigo?

(Tu) tienes la rosa.

Si, (yo) tengo el libro.

Si, (nosotros) tenemos un libro.

Si, el nifio tiene una rosa.

Si, el hermano tiene un fusil.

No, (nosotros) tenemos el som-
brero.

Si, (ellos) tienen una pera y
una guinda.

Si, (él) tiene el pan.

Si, (ella) tiene una rosa.

Si, el hermano tiene ur amigo.

not mean “yo he un libro“, but: Yo tengo un libro, i. e. I ““hold“

a book (in my possession).

*) The personal pronouns are usually omitted’ before the
verb. We give them here, in order to acquaint the pupil with

these forms. 4
**) See § 2 Pp

*#9) Although ies 2nd pers. sing. is rarely used in English,
we give it here in order that the pupil may become accustomed

to its use in Spanish.
12 Lesson 2.

Second Lesson. Leccion segunda.
On the plural of substantives. — El plural de los
sustantivos.

The following general rules will enable the pupil to
learn the formation of the plural without difficulty:

1) All nouns ending in a single unaccented vowel

form the plural by adding s; thus:

El padre (father)

Pl. los padres.

la madre (mother) las madres.
la carta (letter) las cartas.
el libro (book) los libros.

la mano (hand) las manos.

la metrépoli (capital)

las metropolis.

: Note. Besides, the nouns ending in ¢, as: el pié, the foot,
‘os piés; el café, coffee; los cafés, coffee-houses.

2) All words ending in a consonant, in d@*), é, or in
ay (ai), ey (ei), oy (oi), form the plural by adding es;
the 7 in ai, e?, and oi being changed into y, as:

La flor (flower)

Pl. las flores.

el pan (bread) los panes.
el mar (sea) los mares.
el mes (month) los meses.
la ciudad (town) las ciudades.
el amor (love) los amores.
el batel (boat) los bateles.
el bajd the pashaw los bajdes.
el aleli gilliflower los alelies.

ay (only used as an

los ayes, wail.

interjection)
el rey (rei) (king) los reyes.
la ley (lei) (law) las leyes.
el buey (buet) (ox) los bueyes.

el convoy (convoy)

los convoyes.

Observations.

$1. Of the nouns ending in consonants, those in % form
an exception. In modern orthography, z is changed into ¢

when followed by e or 4, as:

La voz (voice)
la paz (peace)

 

 

Pl. las voees.

las paces.

*) Except: el papd, la mamd, el sofa, pl. los papds, las mamas,

los sofas.
On the plural of Substantives. 18

§ 2. A great many words have no singular. We give
those most in use:
Los viveres, the victuals;
los afueras, the outskirts; las bragas, the trowsers;
las antiparras, the spectacles; los calzoncillos, the drawers;
las despabiladeras, the snuffers; las tijeras, the scissors.-
§ 3. Some words have a different meaning in the sin-
gular and plural:
La parte, the part
la prenda, the pledge, garment
la gracia, the grace
el dnima, the soul

Pl. las partes, the qualities.
las prendas, the talents.
las gracias, the thanks.
las dnimas, the evening-

bells.
el anteajo, the spy-glass los anteojos, the spectacles.
§ 4. Some others denote in the singular a male person;
in the plural, however, male and female together, as:
Et hijo, (son) Plur. los hijos, children (but also sons).
el hermano (brother) los hermanos, brother and sister
(but also brothers).

los padres, the parents (but.also
fathers).

los reyes, kings (but also king
and queen).

(See II. Part: On the plural.)
Note. The expressions: Good morning, good afternoon, good
evening, good night are always plural in Spanish; thus:
Buenos dias, good morning!
Buenas tardes, good afternoon! good evening!
Buenas noches, good night!

Words. e

el padre (father)
el rey (king)

El cuchillo, the knife.

el médico, the physician.
la pluma, the pen.

el azucar, the sugar.

el barquero, the boatman.
el castillo, the castle.

el cuadro, the picture. *

Sefior, gentleman, Mr., Sir.
Senora, lady, Mrs., Madam.

Seforita, Miss.

el cuadro, the picture. fe
la vela, the sail.-:

el ldpiz, the pencil.

el reloj, the watch. .

la tinta, the ink.

el tintero, the inkstand.

el palacio, the palace.

rico, rich.

otro, -a, another (see 18. Less.).
mucho, -a, wach.

dos, two; tres, three; cuatro, four; cinco, five.

Verbo.
é Tuve (yo)? had I?
étuviste (t%)? hadst thou?
étuvo (él)? had he?

Yo tuve, I had. .
tu tuciste, thou hadst.
él tuvo, he had.
14 Lesson 2,

cturimos (nosotros) ? had we?
vosotros tuvisteis, you had. gtuvisteis (vosotros)? had you?
ellos tuvieron, they had. étuvieron (ellos)? had they?

Reading Exercise. 3.

Nosotros tuvimos un cuchillo. Vosotras*) tuvisteis dos
cuchillos. Mi hermano tiene las despabiladeras. El rey tuvo
cuatro caballos. ¢Tuve (yo) las bragas? El tuvo los calzon-
cillos. ¢Tuvimos los viveres? Nosotros tenemos las cartas.
Los padres tuvieron las casas. Las madres tienen los alelies
y otras flores. El médico tuvo un lapiz. Las hermanas tu-

nosotros tuvimos, we had.

vieron los ldépices. El barquero tuvo tres bateles. El batel
tiene una vela. El hermano tiene un reloj. Los hermanos
tuvieron muchos relojes. ¢Tiene ella un cuadro? Ella tuvo
cinco cuadros. El hombre rico tiene muchas casas. La her-
mana tiene las tijeras.
Traduccion. 4.
I have three flowers. Hadst thou the knives? The sister

had the snuffers. Had you the trowsers? Had we the vic-
tuals? The pashaws had the castles. The aunts had the let-
ters. Had the physician a pencil? The boatman had a sail.
Had you (f.) the pictures? We (f.) had the pictures. Had
the king many castles? The queen had many horses. Hadst
thou the pencils and the flowers? The children had the
bread. The sisters had the -breads (¢. e.:loaves). Had they
(f.) the scissors? Had the kings thé castles and the palaces?
Hadst thou my watch? I had three watches. Good evening,
Sir! Good night, Miss (N.)!**) Good morning, Mrs.!**)

Conversacion.

éTuvimos nosotros un reloj?

éTuviste los lapices?

éTiene el hermano un caballo?

éTiene la hermana las despa-
biladeras ?

éTuvo él su (his) sombrero?

éTuvieron los hijos las flores?

éTienen los bajes los cas-
tillos?

éTuvo el rey muchos caballos?

éTuvisteis (vosotras) las car-
tas?

Tuvisteis cuatro relojes.

Yo tuve los ldpices.

Si, el hermano tiene el caballo.

No, la hermana no tiene las
despabiladeras.

Si, tuvo su sombrero.

Tuvieron dos rosas y tres alelies.

Si, tienen los castillos y los
palacios.

El rey tuvo cien (100) caballos.

Nosotras tuvimos las cartas y
los libros.

*) In Spanish we, masc., is nosotros; we, fem., nosotras; you,
masc., i8 vosotros; you fem., vosotras.

ee

) In English, Mr., Mrs., Miss are invariably followed by a

person’s name; in Spanish, however, Seftor, Sefora, Senorita may

stand by themselves.
Declension of Substantives. 15

éTiene el médico una pluma? El médico tiene un Idpiz, un
t tintero y una pluma.

éTuvo el barquero wn batel? El barquero tuvo tres bateles.

éTiene mi hermano/un libro? El tiene muchos libros.

{Buenos dias, Sefionta! ij Buefios dias, Sefior!

jBuenas tardes, Sefiora! jBuenas noches, Sefiorita!

Third Lesson. Leccion cercera.

Declension of substantives. — Declinacion de los
sustantivos.

Spanish substantives form their cases by means of
prepositions. These prepositions, however, are not always
sunply placed before the article, as in English, but some-
times undergo a contraction with the article so as to
form one word, as will be seen hereafter.

1) The Nominative (Nominativo) and Accusative (Acu-
sativo) are always alike, as in English.

2) The Genitive (Genitivo), answering the question
whose? or of which? is formed by putting de (of) before
the article. Thus: la reina, the queen; Gen. de la reina,
of the queen; la pluma, the pen; Gen. de la pluma, of
the pen.

3) Only the masculine article el is, for euphony,
contracted with de into one word. Thus instead of de el
rey, of the king: del rey; of the son, del hijo, for de el
hijo. . 2

4) In the plural no contraction takes place. Thus:
de los médicos, of the physicians; de las cartas, of the
letters; de las plumas, of the pens.

5) The Dative (Dativo) is formed by putting 4 (to)
before the article. Thus: 4 la reina, to the queen; 4 la
carta, to the letter; & la hermana, to the sister.

The masculine article el is likewise contracted into
one word with the preposition 4 (of course without the
accent). Thus: al hijo, to the son; al hermano, to the
brother (for é ef hijo; & el hermano).

Observation... Quite peculiar to the Spanish language is
the use of the Dative of the person instead of the Accusative.
That is to say, if the direct complement is a person or a
16 Lesson 3.

personified thing, it should be introduced in the Dative case, and
not in the Accusative. Thus the sentence: The mother loves
the daughter, is not translated: La madre ama la hija, but:
La madre ama & la hija. — I see the man, is not: Yo veo
el hombre, but: Yo veo al hombre. The sons love the mother,
is not: los hijos aman la madre, but: los hijos aman &@ la

madre.

On the other hand, Mi hermano ha visto et palacio, las
casas, my brother has seen the palace, the houses, and not al pa-
lacio, @ las casas, because here the Accusative denotes things

and not persons.
The declensions.
a. With the definite article.

Femenino.
Singular.

lag | la madre, the mother,

Gen. de la madre, of the mother.
Dat. & la madre, to the mother (the mother).

Plural.
7 oe | tas madres, the mothers.
Gen. de las madres, of the mothers.
Dat. & las madres, to the mothers (the mothers).

Masculino.
Singular.

egg | el amigo, the friend.

Gen. del amigo, of the friend.
Dat. al amigo, to the friend (the friend).

XN Plural.
ie | los amigos, the friends.

Gen. de los amigos, of the friends,
Dat. « los amigos, to the friends,

Feminine with the Masculine article.

= Singular.
a | el ave, the bird (for la ave).
Gen. del ave, of the bird.
Dat. at ave, to the bird.
Declension of Substantives. 17

Plural.
ee |} las aves, the birds.

Gen. de las aves, of the birds.
Dat. 4 las aves, to the birds. -.

Abstract notions.

oe | to malo, the evil.

Gen. de lo malo, of the evil.
Dat. «& lo malo, to the evil. . -:

b. With the indefinite article.”

Masculino.

i } un hombre, a man.

Gen. de un hombre, of a man,
Dat. & un hombre, to.a man.

Femenino;
Nom. é
AG una mujer, a woman.

Gen. de una mujer, of a woman.
Dat. & una mujer, to a woman.

c. With a demonstrative adjective.

Masculino.
Singular.
oa \ este hombre, this man.

Gen. de este hombre, of this man.
Dat. & este hombre, to this man.

Plural,
Fae | estos hombres, these men.

Gen. de estos hombres, of these men.
Dat. & estos hombres, to ‘these men.

Femenino.

Singular.
Nom. | we : :
‘Ac, f esta myer, this woman.
Gen. de esta. mujer, of this woman..
Dat. & esta mujer, to this woman.
Spanish Grammar. 2
18 Lesson 3.
Plural.
ay \ estas mujeres, these women.
Gen. de estas mujeres, of these women.
Dat. & estas mujeres, to these women.
Masculino.
Singular.
oe | aquel hombre, that man.
Gen. de aquel hombre, of that man.
Dat. & aquel hombre, to that man.
Plural.
ig f aquellos hombres, those men.
Gen. de aquellos hombres, of those men.
Dat. & aquellos hombres, to those men.
Femenino.
Singular.
i | aquella mujer, that woman.
Gen. de aquella mujer, of that woman.
Dat. & aquella mujer, to that woman.
, Plural.
y
Bons j aquellas mujeres, those women.
Gen. de aquellas mujeres, of those women.
Dat. & aquellas mujeres, to those women.
Words.
Dios, God. la reina, the queen.
el criador, the creator, founder. el pais, the country, land.
el mundo, the world. la criatura, the creature.
el primo, the cousin (m.). el criado, the footman, servant.
la prima, the cousin (f.). el caballero, the gentleman.
el amigo, the friend (m.). pequeno, little, small, short. -
la ciudad, the town. hermoso, beautiful. :
la ventana, the window. grande, great.
el vecino, the neighbour. viejo, old.
el nifio, the child, boy. ama, (he) loves.
el suefio, the sleep, dream. - aman, (they) love.
la muerte, the, death. Vlama, calls.

 

el drbol, the tree. ve, sees.
Declension of Substantives. 19

quiere, he likes. mo, nO, not.
quieren, (they) like. es, -_, Son
doce, twelve. estd, i estan, } ante

Reading Exercise. 5.

El criador ama 4 la criatura. El suefio es el hermano
de la muerte. La prima es la amiga del primo. El vecino
llama al criado. El rey es el padre del pais. La reina ama
al rey. Dios es el criador del mundo. La casa tiene doce
ventanas. Yo no veo (see) & los hombres. ¢éTuviste los
relojes? Las ciudades del pais son grandes. Las casas de la
ciudad son pequefias. El caballero lama 4 los criados. Las
mujeres aman: 4 los nifios. Estas casas pequefias son her-
mosas. El amigo del primo ama al criado del caballero.
Los drboles del castillo son viejos. Las casas de la ciudad
no son Viejas.

Traduccion. 6.

Those men love the friends of the cousin. The death of
the king. The houses of the towns are large and old. The
small country has large towns. The cousin (f.) loves the
cousin (m.), and the cousin (m.) loves the cousin (f.). The
gentleman calls the footman. The king loves the knights,
and the knights love the king. The child of the neighbour
is. small. The windows of the house are large. The king is
the founder of the small town. The knight had two cousins
(f.) and three cousins (m.). The woman loves the child. The
children love the women. The kings are the fathers of the
countries. The footman calls the neighbours of the knight.
The castles of the queen are old. The house of the footman
is small. That man does not see*) the child of that woman.
Does he see**) those women? The neighbour loves these
men and those women.

Conversacion.
éAma el rey. 4 la reina? Si, el rey ama mucho (much)
4 la reina.
éVe el primo 4 la prima? No, el primo no ve 4 la prima.
éTuvieron los reyes el pais? Los reyes tuvieron la ciudad y
el pais.
éLlama el vecino al nifio? No, el vecino llama al caballero.

éA quién (whom) llama el ca- El caballero llama al criado?.
ballero?
éEs pequefia la ciudad? No, Sefior, la ciudad es grande.
éTiene la reina dos castillos? No, la reina tiene tres castillos
y dos palacios.

*) Transl. not sees. **) Transl. sees he?
2
20

éQuantas (how many) ven-
tanas tiene la casa?

éTiene el vecino una casa?

Ve el caballero & este hom-
bre? waa

éEs el palacio grande?

éNo son hermosas ‘estas flo-
res? ,

gA quién ama la prima?

Fourth Lesson.

Lesson 4.

La casa tiene veinte (20) ven-
tanas.

El vecino tiene dos casas.

El caballero ve & estas mu-
jereés.

El palacio es muy (very) grande.

Estos alelies son muy hermosgs,

La prima quiere al primo y al
hermano.

Leccion cuarta.

Prepositions. — Preposiciones.

Some prepositions appear. almost in every sentence,
and should therefore be learned at once. The Spanish
prepositions govern no particular case, i. e. they are
simply placed before the noun. — Full particulars. of

. prepositional locutions will be given Less. 32: On preposi-

tions.

The prepositions most in use are the following:

d, at, to, ‘im. ‘
ante, before.

con, with.

contra, against.

‘de, of, from.

desde, since.

durante, during.

en, in.

entre, between, among.

hacia, towards. -
hasta, till.

para,’ for.

por, by, from, for.
segun, conformably. -
sin, without.

sobre, on, over.

tras, after, behind.

We subjoin some general hints on the use of thes

prepositions:

1) Para corresponds generally to French pour, means
for, and implies purpose, as: Este dinero serd para los
pobres, this money will be for-the poor. Used with an
infinitive mood it corresponds to English in order to, as:
Para trabajar, in order to work. Para also denotes
direction, as: Salgo (infin. salir, to set out) para Espafia,

I set out for Spain.

2) Por corresponds generally to French par, is by
and from (denoting origin, motive, or cause), as: Por temor,
through fear; por vanidad, through vauity. It likewise?
Prepositions. OL:

means for, importing either “an equivalent, as: Doy mi
capa por la tuya, I give my cloak for yours, or as much
as «in exchange for thine» ... ., as: Hablar por alguno,
to speak in favour of somebody. Again, it vaguely
indicates time and space, as: Por la mafiana, in the morning
por la tarde, in the afternoon; por la calle, somewhere in
the street, por el jardin, somewhere in the garden. Finally,
por denotes the author of something, as: Este libro es
continuado por N., this book is continued by N.

3) Sobre is on or upon, and also over, on the other.
side of, as: Sobre las rodillas, on (upon) the knees; sobre
los montes, over (on the other side of) the mountains.

4) Contra means against, taken in a sense of opposi-
tion, whereas hacia indicates a direction, as: contra los
enemigos, against the enemies; hdcia el poniente, towards
the west, westward.

Words. |
El comerciante, the merchant. delicioso, -a, delicious.
Za region, the country. escrito, written.
Inglaterra, England. . justo, -a, just.
~ la,madera, the wood. soportar, to bear.
la mesa, the table. quieres, thou wilt. Be pies.
el rio, the river. debemos, we shall. 417627 :
el vino, the wine. vive, lives.
la vida, the life. siempre, always.
la disparidad, the diversity. nada, swims.
el temor, the fear. hablan, they speak.
el pudor, the shame. corre, runs.
la bolsa, the purse, the ex- vuelve, returns, comes back. ~
change. - conservar, to preserve.

la paciencia, (the) patience. dar, to give; dado, given.
la fruta, the fruit. mi, my.
el ano, the year. ayer, yesterday; hoy, to-day.
el mediodia the noon. - mahana to-morrow.
destinado, -a, destined. casi, almost. ~

Estoy, I am. estamos, we are.

estds, thou art. estais, you are.

estd, he (she, it) is. estdn, they are.

Note. To be means estar and ser. The proper use of
these verbs is rather difficult. For the present we only state
that estar denotes an accidental and transitory condition
or state, whereas ser expresses a lasting state or quality, thus:
Esté bueno means: he feels Es bueno means: he is good,
well, he is (now) pretty
well. (See the Auxil. verbs.)
22 Lesson 4.

Reading Exercise. 7.

El caballero esta en el café. Estoy bueno, cuando estoy
en el campo. gA quién quieres dar ese libro? A mi hermano.
Debemos soportar con paciencia los males de la vida. La
bolsa esta destinada para los comerciantes. No debes hablar
por vanidad. Esta region es deliciosa por sus (its) frutds.
He dado & mi primo mi diccionario por su gramatica. Mi her-
mano vive casi siempre en Inglaterra. La madera nada sobre
el agua. El libro esté sobre la mesa, Los malos (wicked)
hablan siempre contra los buenos. Mi padre vuelve hacia
mediodia. No pude (I could) dormir durante la noche. Desde
la mafiana hasta la noche. Desde ayer hasta mafiana. Los
hombres pueden (can) conservar su (their) vida sin vino. Es
un hombre sin pudor. Este libro trata (treats) de la agri-
cultura.

Traduccion. 8.

This book is (es) written by Mr. N. He is (pretty) well,
when he is at (en su) home (casa). Wilt thou*) give this
book to my cousin (m.)? This book is for thy brother. I
have given (to) Mr. Verguero my grammar for his dictionary.
The merchant lived two years in England. Man can (puede)
preserve his life without wine, but (pero) not without bread.
Does**) thy brother come back at (4) noon? (The) merchants
2always (talk about) 1speak of (the) exchange. Towards (the)
west there is (hay) a fine country. I give my book for thine
(el tuyo). He sleeps (duerme) from (the) evening till (to the)
morning. The fruit is on the table. The father took (tomd)
the son on his ER bis river runs (corre) through many
countries. We shall not act (obrar) through fear. This
wine is for the father and this bread is for the child. There
is a great difference between these two men. I have been
here since yesterday. He is a man without fear and without
shame. My brother comes (viene) in the morning and in the
afternoon.

Conversacion. |

éDonde (where) estd el ca- El caballero esta en el café.
ballero?

éDonde estdé el hijo de ese Esta en el colegio (at school).
(this) hombre?

*) The 2nd person sing. is more frequently used in Spanish
than in English. See remark in Lesson 1.

**) Interrogative forms with the verb to do are not admissible
in Spanish. In this language, as in German the interrogation ig
marked by placing the verb before the nominative, as: Does the
woman speak? ¢Habla la mujer? Dol think? gPienso yo? — or
merely by the interrogative accent, as: ¢Pienso?
The Substantive without the Article.

¢Vive en Inglaterra el her-
mano?

éCémo (how) debemos sopor-
tar los males de la vida?

éPara quién (whom) estd des-
tinada la bolsa?

éCudndo vuelve el padre?

éHablan los comerciantes de
la agricultura?

éTiene mi hermano el dinero
para los pobres?

éEsta el vino sobre la mesa?

éPor qué es deliciosa esta
region? :

é¢Hay mucho vino en Ingla-
terra?

23
No, vive casi siempre en Espafia.
Sin temor y con paciencia.

Esta destinada para los comer-
ciantes.

Vuelve hacia mediodia.

No, Sefior, hablan casi siempre
del comercio.

No lo sé*) (I don’t know), Se-
fiora.

No, Sefior, la fruta y el pan
estan sobre la mesa.

Es deliciosa por sus frutas.

En Inglaterra no hay vino.

Fifth Lesson. Leccion quinta.

The substantive without the article. — El
sustantivo sin articulo.

§ 1. In English the word some, (or any) often pre-
cedes a substantive when taken in an indefinite sense,
no particular kind, measure or quality being meant, as:
some wine; some bread; any ink etc.

In Spanish the noun without the article is used in
this case, thus: Give me some bread, dame pan. I
have some cheese, tengo queso etc.

§ 2. If one of these words is governed by a pre-
position, this preposition simply precedes the noun, as in
English. Ex.: We speak of money, hablamos de dinero;
with cheese, con queso etc.

8 38. In the plural some or any may be expressed
by the plural of wno or alguno, if the sense appears
somewhat limited, as:

Tengo flores, libros, perros, etc. I have flowers, books,

dogs etc. (i. e. in quite a general sense).
But:

Tengo unas flores, wnos libros (or algunas flores, al-
gunos libros), I have some flowers, a few books etc.
(in a limited sense).

: *) Lit. I know it not.
94 : Lesson ‘5.':

§ 4. What we have stated hitherto is meant of
course, of the nominative and accusative cases only. If,
however, the noun is governed by another word (substan-
tive, verb, or adjective), de comes before it (as in Eng-
Tish of ete), Ex: . ”

. A piece of bread, un pedazo de pan.
bs A bottle. of wine, wna dotella de vino.
Full of sugar, Ueno de azticar.
ae Laden with booty, curgado de presa.
Worthy of confidence, digno de confianea.

By this phrase with de English compound substan:
tives are rendered, as: The fencing-master, el maestro de
esgrima; the slave-trade, el trdfico de esclavos... Adjec-
tives denoting materials are expressed in the same way,
as: a gold watch, un reloj de oro.

§ 5. Words denoting quantity require no preposition
after them; thus: little cheese, poco queso; little hope,
poca esperanza; fewer books, ménos libros; many times,
muchas veces. (And not as in French, peu de livres;

moins de fromage etc.)

wth :

— -§ 6.. If, however, quantity is expressed by a word
preceded by the article, as: @ little of this wine etc., the
preposition de should follow. Thus: ee

* Little bread, poco pan, but: .
7 A little of this bread, wn poco de este pan.

aig Eft

La naranja, the orange. -

el limon, the lemon, citron,

la aceituna, the olive.

el género, the .kind, species.

el aceite, the oil.

el papel: the- paper. +

el barco, the ship.

la cerveza, the beer.

el trigo, the corn,

la plata, the silver,
eb.cobre, the copper.
el lino, the flax, linep lint.
la carne, the meat.

el jabon, the soap. .

el tio. the uncle.

Words.

la tia, the aunt.

el cuadro, the picture.
vergonzoso, -a, shameful.
todo, -a all, whole.
todos,;--as, all (plural).-
‘visto, seen.

produce, produces.

dame, give me (2nd sing.).
falta, wants.,
he, (I) have; ha, he (she) has.
conoces, thou. knowest. uO
piensa, thinks,

en casa de, in, at the house of.
pero, but.

que, than.
The Substantive without the Article. | 95

Verbo.
Yo soy, pe am. nosotros somos, we are.
tu eres, thou art. vosotros sois, you are.
él _es, he is. CHOSE ai hey aire
ella es, she is. asf OR ee

i
Reading Exercise. 9.

Espafia produce vino, naranjas, limones, aceitunas y todo
género de frutas. Dame papel, plumas y tinta. El pais tiene
trigo, aceite, plata, cobre y lino. Me falta (I want, lit. 1
fails me) carne y agua. Este hombre no tiene pan. ¢Tiene
el primo unos libros? El hermano tiene agua y jabon. Las
naranjas y limones son hermosas frutas. El nifio no quiere
las aceitunas. Yo he visto drboles y flores, jardines y pala-
cios. ¢Conoces al maestro de esgrima? Dame un pedazo de
pan y una botella de vino. Tengo poca esperanza. El tio
tiene ménos libros que la tia. He visto 4 mi tio muchas
vdces en casa de aquel hombre. Dame un poco de tinta y
unas plumas. El primo tiene poca tinta, pero tiene muchas
plumas. Este hombre no es digno de ‘confianza. Me falta
papel y tinta.
et Traduccion. 10.

''T want some paper and ink, pens and pencils. Dost
thott know the fencing-master? Slave-trade is shameful. We
have little cheese, but we have much bread. Give me a little
bread and a little cheese. This country has copper and silver,
oranges, citrons, and olives. I have seen flowers and fruits.
The uncle. has no sugar, and the aunt has no coffee. I have
ynever seen the king and the queen. This man has less cour-_
age than that man. Spain produces all kinds of fruits. Dost
thou’ know my uncle, and my aunt? Give me a piece of
meat and a bottle of beer. This ship is laden with sugar
and coffee. This man always thinks (is always thinking) of
(en) wine and beer, and this woman always thinks of dresses
and flowers. Has the uncle fine pictures? The aunt has
some fine pictures, but the uncle has no pictures.

Conversacion.
sQué (what) produce la Es- La Espafia produce vino, naran-
pafia? jas, limmones y aceitunas.
éQuié produce la Alemania? La Alemania produce vino, trigo
(Germany) y todo género de frutas.
iDame algunas plumas! No tengo plumas.
éQué tiene el pais? El pais tiene cobre y plata.

éTiene el primo unos libros? El primo tiene muchos libros
dy y mucho papel.
26 Lesson 6.

éQuiere el nifio las aceitunas? El nifio no quiere las aceitunas.

éQué ha visto el tio? Ha visto arboles y flores, jar-
dines y palacios.

éConoces al maestro de es- No conozco (I know) al maestro

grima? de esgrima. ‘
j;Dame un pedazo de pan! No tengo pan.
iTiene el tio muchos cua- No tiene muchos cuadros, pero
dros? tiene algunos.

gEs digno de confianza ese No, Sefior, no es digno.
hombre?
éQué falta al hermano? Le (him) falta (= he wants)
tinta y papel.

Sixth Lesson. Leccion sexta.

Terminations modifying the meaning of substantives.
De los nombres aumentativos y diminutivos.

The Spanish language, like the Italian, abounds in
terminations modifying the original meaning of substantives
as well as adjectives. Besides.the idea of augmentation
and diminution, these syllables very often express an ac-
cessory idea of tenderness or ugliness, love or contempt,
praise or derision etc. The modifications which the ori-
ginal signification may undergo, are so manifold, that
they are often utterly inexpressible in other languages,
even by two or more adjectives. Thus the proper use
of these terminations offers great difficulties to the for-
eigner; the more so, as they may not be used in-
differently with every substantive or adjective. If at this
early stage we acquaint the pupil with these syllables,
the reason is that we want him to understand the true
meaning of a great many words thus modified.

The most important of these syllables are:

1) on, azon, azo, onazo, and ote for masculine; ona,
aza and onazga for feminine nouns. These terminations
express augmentation in general.

Examples. Hombre, man; hombron, tall man. This syl-
lable can itself be augmented, as: hombronazo, tall, strong
man. Mujer, woman; augm. mujerona, second degree of
augmentation: mujeronaza. — Asno, donkey; asnazo, great
donkey. — Capa, cloak; capote, large cloak.

Note. By the addition of ote the noun becomes masculine,
Terminations modifying the meaning of Substantives. 27

2) acho, achon, and arron. Over and above the idea
of augmentation, they suggest an accessory idea of dis-
proportion, clumsiness, and disdain.

Examples. Vulgo, people; vulgacho, mob; hombre, man;
hombrachon, a fat, big fellow; bobo, a silly man; bobarron,
a stupid fool.

Observation. Frequently the termination azo does not
imply augmentation, but simply the effect of the instrument
denoted by the noun. Thus: el cafion means the gun, can-
non; el cafonazo, the detonation of a cannon; el fusil, the
gan; el fusilazo, the shot of a gun.

3) ico, illo, ito, uelo for masculine, and ica, illa, ita,
uela, for feminine nouns.

Of these syllables ico (ica) expresses simply a dimi-
nution of the person or thing, thus: perro, dog; perrico,
little dog; Juan, John; Juanico, little John, Johnny.

The termination ilo (ila) expresses diminution and
disdain, thus: hombre, man; hombrecillo, little man (of
no significance): cosa, thing; cosilla, a trifle.

The syllable ‘ito (ita) does not so much imply dimi-
nution as youth, loveliness, fondness etc. Thus: Sefora,
lady, Mrs.; Sefiorita, Miss; Sefior, Mr., Sir; sefiortito,
young gentleman, Master etc.; mujer, woman; mujer-
cita, nice, young woman.

The termination uelo (wela) is a very strong dimi-
nutive with the accessory idea of disdain, as: mujer-
zuela*), a vulgar little woman. (This word cannot be
exactly rendered in English.)

Note. The terminations asco and eton for augmentation, ete
(eta), eo, in (ino) for diminution, are less frequent and best
learned by practice.

Reading Exercise. 11**).

Los bezachos? de ese hombrecillo? son muy? asquerosos *.
He visto 4 un hombrachon? en la calle. Ese hombrazo? es
un bobarron®, y esa mujeraza® es socarrona’. La pobretona®

1) bezo lip. 2) hombre, man. 3) muy, very. 4) asqueroso,
ugly, disgusting. 5) bobo, stupid, silly. 6) mujer, woman. —
7) socarron, sly. 8) pobre, poor.

*) For the sake of euphony, as in this example, an extra
letter is often added in the final syllable.

**) As the use of the modifying terminations would be too
difficult for the beginner, we here give neither translation nor
dialogue.
28 Lesson 7.

no tiene dinero!, He dado mi capote? 4 este mozon 8. Hemos
oidot un fusilazo y un cafionazo. La sefiorita. esta con
su perrico® en la casa de Juanita. La pobrecita® habla al.
sefiorito. El pajaro est’ sobre el montecillo’. Ese torazo8
come? hieno!® y yerball, En esa aldehuela!? hay algunos
gitanos!3, ;Que hermoso pecezuelo!!* El hidalgote!’ tuvo dos
palacios y muchos jardines. La avecicalS estdé en el arbole-
cillo!?, El elefante es un animalazo!®, Mi hermana tiene
cuatro sartenejas!®, La pescadorcita2? esti en el batelejo?!.
El caballerito no quiere estudiar. Dame una pedacito?? de
este ovecico?3. Los mangotes24 de su (jer) vestido no son
hermosos. Las ovejitas?® y los conejuelos?é juegan®? en el
campo28, La sefiorita tiene hermosas manecitas 9.

1) dinero, money. 2) capa, cloak. 3) mozo, boy. 4) oido,
heard. 5) perro, dog. 6) pobre, poor. 7) monte, mountain. —
8) toro, bull. 9) come, eats. 10) hieno, hay. 11) yerba, grass. —.
12) aldea, village. 13) gitano, gipsy. .14) pié, foot. 15) hidalgo,
nobleman, knight. 16) ave, bird. 17) drbol, tree. 18) animal,
animal. 19) sarten, pan. 20) pescador, fisherman. 21) batel,
boat, ship. 22) pedazo, piece. 23) huevo, egg. 24) manga, slecve.
25) oveja, sheep. 26) conejo, rabbit. 27) guegan, play (8. Pl).
28) campo, field. 29) la mano, hand.

Seventh Lesson. Leccion séptima.
On proper names. — Los nombres propios.

§ 1. As in English,. the proper names of persons
and towns take no article, as: Carlos, Charles; Elvira,
Madrid etc. They are declined as in English:

Cirlos, Charles. : Madrid, Madrid.
de Carlos, of Charles. de Madrid, of Madrid.
«& Carlos, to Charles. | « Madrid, to Madrid.

§ 2. If, however, a proper name is qualified by an
adjective, it takes the article, as: el pobre Luts, poor
Lewis; la desdichada Elvira, (the) unfortunate Elvira.
Frequently the proper name is followed by the adjective,

as: Alejandro et grande, Alexander the Great.

_§ 3. Except the adjective Santo (San), saint, holy,
which before proper names never admits of the article,
thus: San Pablo, St. Paul; Santa Teresa, St. Theresa...

§ 4. A proper name takes the article when used
as.a common noun, thus: el Apolo del Belvedere, the
Apollo (statue) of Belvedere; el César de su siglo, the
Cesar (i. e. the foremost general) of his century. In this
On proper names. 29

signification, proper names may be plural; as: los Césares
son raros, men like Ceesar are rare.

§ 5. The names of countries, mountuins, provinces,
rivers ete. may be used with the article or without it:
Espana and la Espaita; la Andalucia and Andalucia;
Vesubio and el Vesubio (Mount Vesuvius); Tajo and el
Tajo. — Names of rivers are commonly used without the
article in the nominative case. — The names of a few
countries require the article, as: la China; el Peri, ed
Chile ete.

Observations. 1) If the name of a country,-in the ge-
nitive case, is used instead of an adjective, it takes-no article,
as: los vinos de Espaiia, the Spanish wines; la seda de Italia,
the Italian silk. If, however, the country is represented as
taking an active part in the assertion, the article may not
be omitted; thus: La situacion de la Francia es muy fa-
vorable al comercio, the situation of France is very favourable
to commerce. Here it would be improper to say: The
French situation, because the commerce we speak of is
transacted by Frenchmen.

2) Often the sense is modified by the use or the omission
of the article; thus:

El eército de la Espaia means the Spanish army
(i. e. composed of Spaniards), whereas:

El ejército de Espava means a foreign army, destined
to fight in Spain. (The same rule obtains in French.)

§ 6. The Saxon genitive, as; Frederick’s brother ete.
cannot be imitated in Spanish. Here the nominative (or
accusative) should always precede the genitive; as: Charles’s
hat, el sombrero de Carlos.

§ 7. With proper names of countries and towns
the preposition 7 or at is rendered by en,.and to by 4a;
thus: in Spain, em Espafia; in England, en Inglaterra;
at (in) Paris, en Paris; at Berlin, en Berlin. — To go
to Paris, to France, to Spain: ir &@ Paris, & Francia,
a Espatia.

Note. After the verb salir, to set out, to depart, the prepos.
para is required, thus: Salgo para Italia, I set out for Italy.
— The verb entrar, to enter, takes en; thus: entrar en casa, en
Italia ete.
380 Lesson 7.

Words. ae
La provincia, the province. la navegacion, the navigation:
Cataluvia, Catalonia. Don, Mr.
la seda, the silk. Dota, Mrs., Miss.
la valentia, the valour, bra- el siglo, the century.
very. aqui estd, here is.
numeroso, -a4, numerous. aqui estdn, here are.
Enrique, Henry. dedicado, -a, dedicated.
Guillermo, William. célebre, \ famous.
Viena, Vienna. afamado, -a,
Austria, Austria. estimado,-a, esteemed. ‘
Napoles, Naples. quiero, I will.
la capital, the capital, me- %r, to go.
tropolis. fuéron, were’ (3. pers. plur.).
la iglesia, the church. ménos, less.
He, I have. hemos, we have.
has, thou hast. habeis, you have.
ha, he (she, it) has. han, they have.

Reading Exercise. 12.

Aqui estd la capa de Don Luis. Aqui estan los guantes
de Sofia. He visto el castillo del rey de Sajonia. Alejandro
el grande fué rey de Macedonia. Viena es la capital de
Austria. ¢Dédnde esta el Sefior Herrero? ¢gDonde estan los
nifios del Sefior Herrero? Paris es una grande capital. Maria
es la hermana de Enrique. Guillermo es el primo de Carlos.
Esta iglesia esté dedicada 4 San Pablo y 4 Santa Teresa.
He visto al Apolo del Belvedere y & la Vénus de Médicis.
Don Pedro es el hermano de Dofia Elvira. Don Carlos e
una célebre tragedia de Schiller. Aqui estdn los jardines y
los palacios del rey. Napoleon fué el César de su siglo, La
Andalucia es una provincia de Espafia. Los vinos de Espafia
y la seda de Italia son estimados. Quiero ir 4 Espafia y 4
Italia. Los ejércitos de la Espafia fueron siempre afamados
por su (their) valentia. El ejército de Italia es ménos nume-
roso que el ejército de Rusia. Salgo para América. 2

Traduccion. 18.

Where is Lewis’s hat? There are Elvira’s gloves. Hast
thou seen the castles of the queen of Spain? Paris is the
capital of France, and Madrid is the capital of Spain. Henry:
is William’s brother, and Elvira is Mary’s cousin. Hast thou
seen William and Charles? To whom (dé quiénes) are these
churches dedicated? They are dedicated to St. Paul and to
St. Ann (Ana). The king of Saxony and the queen of Eng-
land are in Paris. French wool and Spanish wines are cele-

2 A A hie
On proper names. 31

brated. Wilt thou go to France or to Italy? I will go to
Spain, and to-morrow I set out for Madrid. The Spanish
army (i. e. the foreign army destined to act against Sp.) is
less numerous than the Italian army. Catalonia is a pro-
vince of Spain. Have you read (leido) the tragedies of
Schiller and the comedies (comedia) of Moliére? Italian silk
is famous. The situation England is very favourable to
navigation. Yesterday Wwe (have seen) William and Henry,
Mary and Theresa. Here are Charles’s books. (Mount)
Vesuvius is near (cerca de) Naples. Spanish wool (lana) is
much esteemed.

Conversacion.

éDonde estd el sombrero de
D. (Don) Luis?

éQué ha visto el extranjero
(foreigner)?

éComo se llama (is called) la
capital de Espafia?

éY cémo se Llama la capital
de Inglaterra? ‘

éDon Céarlos es el hermano
de Dofia Ana?

éA quién estd dedicada esa
iglesia?

éCémo se llama aquella afa-
mada tragedia de Schiller?

éAdénde (whither, where) quie-
res ir?

éDonde esta
Inglaterra?

iMariana, trae (bring) la en-
salada (salad)!

éQué se dice de los ejércitos
de la Espafia?

la reina de

Est& sobre la mesa.

Ha visto el palacio del rey y
los jardines de la reina.

La capital de Espafia se lama
Madrid.

La capital de Inglaterra es
Londres,

No, Sefior, es su (her) primo.

Esté dedicada 4 San Pablo y
4 Santa Maria.

Es intitulada: Don Carlos, in-
‘fante de Espafia.

Quiero ir 4 Italia y 4 Ingla-
terra.

Estaé en Paris.

jAqui esta, Sefior!

Qué fueron siempre afamados
por su valentia.
32 Lesson 8.

Eighth Lesson. Leccion octava.
The Auxiliary verb Haber, to have.
Indicative (Indicative Mood).

Simple Tenses.
Presente (Present).

(Yo) he, I have. (nosotros, nosotras) hemos (habe.

: mos), we have.
(tt) has, thou hast. (vosotros, vosotras) habeis, you

have.
(él, ella) ha, he, she has. (ellos, ellas) han, they have.
/ Inperfecto (1st Imperfect).
Habia, I had. habiamos, we had.
habias, thou hadst. habiais, you had.
habia, he had. habian, they had.
Definido (2nd Imperfect),
Hube, T had. hubimos, we had.
hubiste, thou hadst. hubisteis, you had.
hubo, he had. hubieron, they had.
Futuro (Future).
Habré, I shall have. habremos, we shall have.
habrds, thou wilt have. habreis, you will have.
habrd, he will have. habrdn, they will have.
Condicional (Conditional Mood).

Habria, I should have. habriamos, we should have.
habrias, thou wouldst have. habriais, you would have.
habria, he would have. habrian, they would have.

Imperativo (Imperative Mood).
Hé (habe) (ti), have (thou), Habed (vosotros), have (you).
Participio (Past participle).
Habido, had.

Compound Tenses.
Perfecto indefinido (Perfect).

He I have hemos we have

has;habido, thou hast; had. habeisthabido, you have }had.

ha | he ‘has han they have
Pluscuamperfecto (Pluperfect).

Habia |= I had habiamos) = we had

habias >=: thou hadst ; had. habiais }= you had } had,

habia J} he had habian |= they had
The Auxiliary verb Haber. 33

Perfecto anterior (2nd Pluperfect).

Hube |= I had | hubimos = we had
hubiste }S thou hadst } had. hubisteis}= you had } had
hubo J he had | hubieron | = they had
Futuro perfecto (Compound ae

Habré \= I shall ln habremos = we shall h
habrds | = thou wilt hal habreis * you will Te
habré |S he wi | 24 jabrin |= they will | 8

Condicional perfecto (Compound eee
Habria

have

I should habriamos = we should
had.

abr |= thou wouldst Me 1 habriais +S you would

habria j= he would habrian | & they would

Gerundio de presente (Present pada:
Habiendo, having.

Subjuntivo (Subjunctive Mood).

Presente.
Haya, I have. hayamos, we have. es
hayas, thou have. hayais, you have.
haya, he have. hayan, they have.
Imperfecto.
Hubiese, that I had. hubiésemos, that we had.
hubieses, that thou hadst. hubieseis, that you had.
hubiese, that he had. hubiesen, that they had.
Futuro.

(Si) hubiere, (if) I shall have. (Si) hubiéremos, we shall have.
> hubieres, thou wilt have. » hubiereis, you will have.
> hubiere, he will have. > hubieren, they will have.

Condicional.

Hubiera, (that) I should have. hubiéramos, we should have.

hubieras, thou wouldst have. hubierais, you would have.

hubiera, he would have. hubieran, they would have.

Compound Tenses.
These are formed like those of the indicative, by adding
habido to the respective form of the simple tense, thus:
Haya habido, that I have had.
hubiese habido, that I had had.
hubiere habido, that I shall have had.
hubiera habido, that I should have had.

Observations.
1) The tenses of the indicative mood are the same as in
the other Romance*) languages; the subjunctive mood, however,

*) i. e. of Latin (Roman) origin, viz. French, Italian, Spanish,
Portuguese, Provencial, etc.
Spanish Grammar. 3
34 Lesson 8,

has two tenses peculiar to the Spanish idiom. Of their es
ployment we shall speak, when treating of the reguiur vero,
and again in Less. 19, II. Part. These tenses are the Fu-
turo and the Condicional. For the present we merely state,
that the Condicional of the indicative and that of the sub-
junctive differ but little in their signification, so that they
may be used indiscriminately. Thus the sentence: He would
have had friends, is either: Habria tenido amigos or haubiera
tenido «amigos.

2) In conditional clauses the verb stands in the Imper-
fecto of the subjunctive, whereas the verb of the principal
sentence is put in the Condicional of the indicatire or of the
subjunctive; thus:

If I had had money (conditional clause), I should have
friends (principal clause).

Si hubiese*) tenido dinero habria tenido amigos, or

» > » > hubiera » re

3) For the Futuro of the subjunctive see I. Part, on
the use of tenses. =

4) Like ser (to be), the verb haber is a true auciliary,
i. e. it does but form the compound tenses of other verbs, as:
ha sido, he has been; hubo amado, he had loved. If, on the
contrary, ‘to have” is a principal verb, i. e. if it governs a
complement and signifies to possess, as: I have a house =
I possess a house, it must always be rendered by tener (pro-
perly ‘to hold”), as:

* JT have money, is not transl. he dinero, but Tengo dinero.
He had friends, is » » hubo amigos,» Tuvo amigos.

For this reason, the imperative of haber is no longer |
used in conversation.

5) In the signification of the English “there is”, “there
are” (and the French il y a), haber is still a principal verb,
but only in the 3rd person of the singular, and in this case
hay (or hai) is substituted for ha. Examples:

Hay*) (hai) hombres, there are men.

habia » > were »,

hubo » >» were »,
habra » » will be men.
habria » » would be men.

*) We may also employ the Condicional of the subj i
after st (if), as: s¢ hubiera, if I had. In this case, oo
must not use the same tense in the following principal Sentence
but only the Condicional of the indicative, thus: ;

Si hubiera tenido dinero, habria tenido amigos.

**) In the compound tense (Perfecto indefinido), however, ha
(and not hay) habido, there has been (there was). ,
The Auxiliary verb Tener. 35

Only in this signification the compound tenses with the
participle habido are admissible, as:
Habrd habido hombres, there will have been men.

6) Haber de with the infinitive following corresponds to
“must”, ,shall” etc., as: He de pagarle, I must (shall) pay
him. Tener que has the same signification, as: Tengo que
hablar con él, I must speak with him (lit. I have to speak etc.).

7) The polite mode of addressing a person (the English
you) introduces a peculiar word: Vuestra merced (your Grace)
which always requires the third person singular of the verb.
The full form of this word is no longer used, the Spaniard
speaks wsté (pronounce oostay). The word is written usted
(the d is however mute), abbreviated form V., Vd., or Vmd.
V. is the common mode of addressing all persons, without
distinction of rank, provided they are not relations of the
speaker. The Spaniard addresses even a beggar with V.
The plural form ustedes (accented ustédes), a contraction from
vuestras mercedes, shortened Vds. or VV., is used in addressing
several persons. The verb is then the third person plural. Thus:
Have you? means: gTiene V.? [pron. tiene wadte(d)/. Had
you? gTuvo V.? Shall you (plur.) have? gTendrién Vds.?
(pron. tendrdn ustedes).

Near relations commonly address each other with tu
(thou), without totally excluding V., as: (tt) Puedes decir-
melo, you may tell it me (speaking to a brother).

(As the verb haber offers too little material for Reading Exer-
cise and Translation, we at once pass on to the verb tener, which
however is no auxiliary, but a principal verb.)

Ninth Lesson. Leccion nona.
Tener, to have, to hold.

Indicativo.

, Presente.

Tengo, I have (hold). tenemos, we have (hold).
tienes, thou hast. teneis, you have.
tiene, he has. tienen, they have.
Imperfecto.

Tenia, I had (held). tentamos, we had (held).
tenias, thou hadst. teniais, you had.
tenia, he had. tenian, they had.

3*
36 Lesson 9.

Definido.
Tuve, I had (held). tuvimos, we had (held).
tuviste, thou hadst. tuvisteis, you had.
tuvo, he had. tuvieron, they had.
Futuro.
Tendré, I shall have (hold). tendremos, we shall have.
tendrds, thou wilt have. tendreis, you will have.
tendrd, he will have. tendrdn, they will have.
Condicional.

Tendria, 1 should have (hold). tendriamos, we should have.
tendrias, thou wouldst have. tendriais, you would have.

tendria, he would have. tendrian, they would have.
Imperativo.
Ten, have (thou). Tened, have (you).
Participio.
Tenido, had (held). \

Tiempos compuestos (Compound tenses).
Perfecto indefinido.

de) I have hemos we have

has \ tenido, thou hast } had. habeis } tenido, you have } had.

ha he has han they have
Pluscuamperfecto.

Habia I had hablamos we had |

habias ;tenido, th. hadst phad. habiais | tenido, you had had,

habia he had habian they had |
Per; i anterior.

Hube } I had hubimos we had

hubiste ; tenido, th. hadst a hubisteis } tenido, you had} had.

hubo | he had hubieron they had
- perfecto.

Habré ) = I shall habremos ) & we shall

habrés S. thou wilt oe habreis \&. you will have

habra } She will habrin | & they will had.

Condicional perfecto.

Habria) = I should i habriamos) + we should

habrias | =. th. wouldst hed habriais }¥. you would | bave

habria } & he would * pabrian |S they would | 224.

Gerundio de Presente.
Teniendo, having (holding).
Lesson 10. 37

Subjuntivo.
Presente.
Tenga, I have. tengamos, we have.
tengas, thou have. tengais, you have.
tenga, he have. ~ tengan, they have.
Imperfecto.
Tuviese, that I had. * tuviésemos, that we had.
tuvieses, that thou hadst.: tuvieseis, that you had.
tuviese, that he had. tuviesen, that they had.
Futuro.

(Si) Tuviere, if I shall have. (si) tuviéremos, if we shall have.
»  tuvieres, ifthou wilt have. » tuviereis, if you will have.
»  tuviere, if he will have. » tuviesen, if they will have.

Condicional.

Tuviera, that I should )..  tuviéramos, that we should have.
tuvieras, thatthouwouldst;® tuvierais, that you would have.
tuviera, that he would |  tuvieran, that they would have.

Compound tenses.

They are formed, as in the indicative mood, by adding
tenido to the respective simple tenses of haber. Thus:
Perfecto indefinido: Haya tenido, I have had.
Pluscuamperfecto:  Hubiese tenido, that I had had.

Futuro perfecto: Hubiere tenido, that (if) I shall have had.
Condicional perfecto: Hubiera tenido, that I should have had.

Observation.

The participle joined to haber is always invariable. Thus:
ella habia amado, she had loved; ellos han tenido, they have
had; las cases que he tenido, the houses which I have had.

Tenth Lesson. Leccion décima.

Exercises.

La rigueza, (the) riches, el desdichado, the unhappy man.

wealth. el holgazan, the idler.
la pobreza, (the) poverty. el hambre (f£.), (the) hunger.
el influjo, the influence. la sed, (the) thirst.
el protector, the protector. la libertad, (the) liberty, free-
la nérdida the loss. dom.
el dnimo, the courage. la mercancia, the merchandise.

el miedo, the fear. el principe, the prince.
38 Lesson 10.

la gana, a mind (to do some- recibido, received.

thing); the appetite. perdié he (she) lost.
la nacion, the nation. debe, he (she) owes.
padecido, suffered. sabido, learned.
amado, loved. poco -a, a. little.
logrado, got, obtained. mds, more.
enviado, sent. pero, but.
pagado, paid. por qué why? porque, because.

Reading Exercise. 14.

éHay dinero en esa bolsa? ¢gHubo hombres en el jardin?
Habra muchas flores en los jardines de la reina. la riqueza
y la pobreza tienen un gran influjo sobre los hombres. Tuve
protectores, pero los (them) he perdido. Hemos padecido
grandes pérdidas. jTened dnimo! {No tengais miedo! Habria
ménos desdichados, si hubiese ménos holgazanes. ¢Tiene V,
dinero? ¢Tienen Vds. hambre 6 sed? ¢Ha amado V. 4 ese
hombre? El capitan no habria logrado su libertad, si no
hubiese tenido grandes protectores. (Yo) habria enviado 4 V.
mds mercancias, si V. me (me) hubiese pagado. El no me
ha pagado el dinero que (which) me debe (owes). Cuando
(él) habia recibido su (his) dinero, lo (it) perdid. No he re-
ciido las mercancifas que V. me ha enviado. Habiendo sabido
por mi criado que el capitan estd aqui, le (him) he enviado
todos sus libros. El desdichado no tendrd protectores. ¢Ha
visto V. los castillos del rey? Los nifios de nuestro tio ten:
drain papel y plumas, tinta y lapices. Los hermanos de nuestro
jardinero han padecido una grande pérdida. gPor qué tuvo
V. miedo? Ha*) habido muchos criados en el palacio del
principe. El holgazan no tiene jamas gana de trabajar. El
Sefior Martinez tendria mds dinero, si hubiese tenido gana de
trabajar. La libertad tiene un gran influjo sobre las naciones.
El general-quiere que V. no tenga miedo. V. ha de pagar
el dinero que (V.) perdido. Tendré’ gue hablar con V.

Traduccion. 15.

1, This man had great riches. What have you to tell
me (decirme)? The footman was always thirsty (tr. had
always thirst). Riches (sing.) will always have a great in-
fluence on (the) men. Are there any large towns in this
country? There (have always been) were always men, who
(que) had no mind to work. I will not (have you lose heart)
that you have (subj. pres.) fear**). I had to speak to you

*) See page 34 the second note:

**) For the convenience of the beginner we now and then
modify the English text so that a literal translation may be
good Spanish. :
Lesson 10.

39

yesterday. We should have many friends; if we had more
money. I have lost the protectors whom (que) I had. The
unhappy man has always had poor friends. Had you
much money in the purse which you have lost? The prince
would have obtained his liberty, if he had had more pro-
tectors. Why have you not sent me (me precedes the verb)
the merchandise (pl.)? I had no mind to speak with (d) the prince.

2. The idle man is hungry (tr. has h.), but he will not
work. Have you any courage, Sir? Has the prince paid his
servant? Art thou hungry or thirsty (tr. hast thou h. or th.)?
Must you pay (for) the money, which the footman has lost?
These nations have sustained*) great losses. There are men
who love (the) liberty more than (the) riches (sing.). Why
have you not loved this man? These nations had always
good (buenos) princes. The prince had two castles and three
palaces in (the) town. Do you know (sabe V.) how many
(cudnto, -a) provinces Spain has? Has Mr. Figueredo many
books? He has more books than my father and my cousin (m.).
I had already (ya begins the sentence) paid (for) these goods
yesterday. Thou wilt have the money to-morrow. He had
had unhappy friends.

Conversacion.

éQuién ha tenido dinero?

éTiene el criado hambre 6
sed?

éHay flores en ese jardin?

éQué tiene un gran influjo
sobre los hombres?

éQue tendrdé la Sefiorita El-
vira?

. gCudntas horas (hours) tiene
el dia?

éTiene V. que hablar con mi
hermano?

éPor qué no tiene amigos el
desdichado ?

éTuvo muchos palacios el
principe?

éPor qué no me ha pagado V.?

éHa sabido V. que mi padre
ha padecido una pérdida?

éHa visto V. los castillos del
rey?

*) transl. suffered.

El comerciante ha tenido mu-
cho dinero.

No tiene hambre, pero tiene
siempre sed.

Hay en él flores y drboles.

La riqueza y la pobreza tienen
un gran influjo sobre los
hombres.

Tendrdé un hermoso espejo.

El dia tiene veinte y cuatro
horas.

No, Sefior, tengo que hablar
con V.

Porque no tiene dinero.

Tuvo dos palacios y muchos
jardines.
Porque no he tenido dinero.

‘No, Sefior, no lo he sabido.

No, pero he visto los palacios
de la reina.
40 Lesson 11.

Eleventh Lesson. Leccion undécima.
The Auxiliary verb Ser, to be.

Indicativo.
Presente.
(Yo) soy (soi), I am. (nosotros) somos, we are.
(tu) eres, thou art. (vosotros) sois, you are.
(él) es, he is. (ellos) son, they are.
Imperfecto.
Era, I was. éramos, we were.
eras, thou wast. erais, you were.
era, he was. eran, they were.
Definido.
Fui, I was. fuimos, we were.
fuiste, thou wast. fuisteis, you were.
fué, he was. fueron, they were.
Futuro.
Seré, I shall be. seremos, we shall be.
serds, thou wilt be. sereis, you will be.
sera, he will be. serdn, they will be.
Condicional.
Seria, I should be. seriamos, we should be.
serias, thou wouldst be. seriais, you would be.
seria, he would be. serian, they would be.

Imperativo.
Sé, be (thou). sed, be (you).
Participio.
Sido, been.

Tiempos compuestos.
Perfecto indefinido.

He sido, I have been. hemos sido, we have been.

has sido, thou hast been. habeis sido, you have been.

ha sido, he has been, han sido, they have been.
Pluscuamperfecto.

Habia sido, I had been. habiamos sido, we had been,

habias sido, thou hadst heen. habiais sido, you had heen.
habia sido, he had been. habian sido, they had been,
The Auxiliary verb Ser. 41

Perfecto anterior.

Hube sido, I had been. hubimos sido, we had been.
hubiste sido, thou hadst been. hubisteis sido, you had been.
hubo sido, he had been. hubieron sido, they had been.

Futuro perfecto.

Habré sido, I shall habremos sido, we shall
habrds sido, thou mat ea habreis sido, you will | tok
habré sido, he will * habrdn sido, they will | ;

Condicional perfecto.

Habria) ,, I should )),,. habriamos sido, we should ery
habrias = th. wouldst been, 2#briais sido, you would bees
habria }~ he would * habrian sido, they would °

Gerundio de Presente.
Siendo, being.

Subjuntivo. |
Presente.
Sea, I be. seamos, we be.
seas, thou be. seais, you be.
sea, he be. sean, they be.
Imperfecto.
Fuese, I were. fuésemos, we were.
fueses, thou wert. fueseis, you were.
fuese, he were. fuesen, they were.
Futuro.
Fuere, (if) I shall be. fuéremos, (if) we shall be.
fueres, » thou wilt be. fuereis, >» you will be.
fuere, » he will be. fueren, » they will be.
Condicional.
Fuera, that I should be. fuéramos, that we should be.
fueras, that thou wouldst be. fwerais, that you would be.
fuera, that he would be. fueran, that they would be.

Tiempos compuestos.

Like those of the Indicative Mood, the compound tenses
of the Subjunctive are formed by adding the Participle sido
to the respective forms of the Subjunctive of haber, thus:

Haya sido, I have been.

Hubiese sido, that I had been.
Hubiere sido, if I shall have been.
Hubiera sido, that I should have been.
42 Lesson 11.

Observations.

1) Ser is used with nouns, adjectives ete. in order to
express a permuncnt state of existence of the subject, as:
Ser hombre, to be a man; ser gencral, to be a general; ser
bueno, malo, to be good, bad etc. Here the qualities attrib-
uted to the subject appear as characteristic and, as it were,
inseparable from it. Such qualities are size, dignity, national-
ity, office, occupation ete. Thus:

Ese sefior es juez, frances, general, pintor, alto, chico ete.
This gentleman is a judge, a Frenchman, a general, a pain-
ter, tall, short etc.

2) On the contrary, estar is used, if the attribute appears
merely accidental, or if a dwelling in any place whatever is to
be expressed. Some examples will show the difference between
the two verbs:

Ese hombre es bueno, malo. This man is good, bad.
Ese hombre estd bueno”), malo. This man is well, unwell

(in good health, in bad health) ete.

In the first example, the quality is a characteristic and
permanent one; in the second example, it is accidental and
transient. -

Esta puerta es alta. This door is high (i. e. the quality
is permanent).

Esta puerta esta cerrada. This door is shut (i. e. in this
moment, but it might be open).

The pupil is requested to compare the following sentences:
El Seior N. es muy docto, Mr. N. is a very learned man.
Estamos prontos, we are ready.

El es librero, he is a bookseller.

Estoy contento, I am satisfied.

Somos fuertes, cuerdos, we are strong, prudent.

Estar en el paseo, en el café, en el campo, to be on the
promenade**), at the coffee-house, in the country.

Ser rey, to be king.

El es sabio, rico etc., he is wise, rich etc.

Ya estamos aqui, now we are here.

Don Fulano es de Paris, Mr. N.“is from Paris.

3) Sometimes ser and estér may be coupled with the
same word, as:

Ser enamorado, to be of an amorous disposition.
Estar enamorado, to be in love.

*) Estar bien means: to be’ at ease.
**) el paseo, i. e. the avenue, park, public gardens, quay, place
or street where the townspeople usually take their lounge.
The Auxiliary verb Estar. 43

But here again, in the first example the quality is a
characteristic mark of the person, in the second, however, it
is merely accidental and transitory.

4) The Passive voice of the verb is always formed with
ser, as: Ser amado, to-be loved. The compound tenses do
not differ from the English: He sido amado, I have been
loved. (See the Passive voice.)

5) The adjectives atento, attentive; contento, satisfied;
libre, free; enfadado, angry, are commonly used with estar.

6) Very often estar with the Gerundio is.an equivalent
for to be with the present participle, as:

Estoy buscando a mi hermano, I am looking for my
brother.
Estaba leyendo un libro, I was reading a book.

Twelfth Lesson. Leccion duodécima.
Estar, to be’).

Indicativo.
Presente.
Estoy, I am. estamos, we are.
estds, thou art. estais, you are.
estd, he is. estan, they are.
, Imperfecto.
Estaba, I was. estébamos, we were.
estabas, thou wast. estabais, you were.
estaba, he was. estaban, they were.
Definido.
Estuve, I was. estuvimos, we were.
estuviste, thou wast. estuvisteis, you were.
estuvo, he was. estuvieron, they were.
Futuro.
Estaré, I shall be. estaremos, we shall be.
estards, thou wilt be. estareis, you will be.
estard, he will be. estardn, they will be.
Condicional.
Estaria, I should be. estariamos, we should be.
estarias, thou wouldst be. estariais, you would be.

estaria, he would be. ( — estarian, they would be.
*) (We need_not add) that estar (like tener) is no auxiliary,
but a principal verb. © € ‘ ;

oe r

a a , é
iLhn ab gts po Bee
44 Lesson 12.

Imperativo.

Estd, be (thou). estad, be (you).
Participio.
Estado, been.

Tiempos compuestos.
Perfecto indefinido.

 

He estado, I have been. hemos estado, we have been.
has estado, thou hast been. habeis estado, you- have been.
ha estado, he has been. han estado, they have been.
Pluscuamperfecto.
Habia I had = hablamos) 3 we had 5;
habias \ estado, th. hadst} 3 habiais }3 you had + been.
habia he had |" habian } 5 they had
Perfecto anterior.
Hube I had = hubimos we had )~
hubiste } estado, th. hadst |} 8 hubisteis }estado, you had }8
hubo he had |F  hubieron they had | P
Futuro perfecto.
Habré I shall i habremos we shall h
habrds \ estado, th. wilt rao habreis estado, yquwill fo
habra he will } "°°" habran th. will }?°"

Condicional perfecto.
Habria estado, I should have habriamos estado, we should
etc. been. ete. have been.
Gerundio de Presente.
Estando, being.

Subjuntivo.

Presente.
Esté, I be. estemos, we be.
estés, thou be. esteis, you be.
esté, he be. estén, they be.

Imperfecto.
Estuviese, I were. estuviésemos, we were.
estuvieses, thou wert. estuvieseis, you were.
estuviese, he were. estuviesen, they were.

Futuro.

Estuviere, (that I shall be. — estuviéremos, (that) we shall be.
estuvieres, (that) thou wilt be. estuviereis (that) you will be.
estuviere, (that) he will be.  estuvieren, (that) they will be.
Lesson 13. 45

Condicional.

Estuviera, that I should be.

estuviéramos, that we should be.

estuvieras, that thou wouldst be. estuvierais, that you would be.

estuviera, that he would be.

estuvieran, that they would be.

Tiempos compuestos.

Like those of the Indicative Mood, they are formed
by joining the Participle estado to the Subjunctive of

haber, as:

Haya estado, I have been.

hubiese estado, that I had been.

hubiere estado, that I shall have been.
hubiera estado, that I should have been.

Rule. The past participle, used with haber, is always
invariable, as in English; thus:

Et ha estado, he has been.

ella ha estado, she has been (and not estada).
ellos han estado, they (m.) have been (and not estados).
ellas han estado, they (f.) have been (and not estadas).

Thirteenth Lesson. Leccion trecena.
Words.

El deseo, the wish, desire.

la manera, the manner.

el suefio, the dream.

la cosa, the thing.

la situacion, the situation.

el heredero, the heir.

el precio, the price.

el cabal juicio, the good sense.

el error, the mistake.

la piedra, the stone.

el duque, the duke.

el viaje, the journey.

el extranjero, the foreign coun-
try; al extranjero, abroad.

el bebedero, the trough, bird’s
trough.

la cruz, the cross.

el pdjaro, the bird.

la virtud, the virtue.

el reino, the kingdom.

2a aldea, the village.

el concierto, the concert.

la viuda, the widow.

el edificio, the building, saifice,

la plaza, the place.

el baile, the ball.

la compania, the company.

la prosperidad, the happiness,
prosperity.

lastimoso, -a, sorry, sad.

precioso, -d, precious.

gruhon, -a, growling, cross.

cierto, -a, certain.

colmado, -a, filled.

favorable, favourable.

adornar, to adorn.

mirar, to look at.

conquistar, to conquer.

alcanzar, to obtain, to get.

vivir, to live, to dwell.

muerto, died (P. p.), dead.

tarde, late.
46 Lesson 13.

léjos, far. de paso, for the time being,

por desgracia, unfortunately. actually. : :

aqui, here. en medio, in the middle, amidst,
Reading Exercise. 16. s

El deseo de alcanzar fama es activo en muchos hombres.
El suefio no es més que una cosa fantdstica, Mi situacion —
es muy lastimosa, no obstante de ser*) yo un heredero rico.
Las mercancias inglesas son de precios moderados. V. no esta
en su cabal juicio. V. estuvo en un error. ¢Estard V. en
casa mafiana? Esta cruz de oro estaba adornada de muchas
piedras preciosas. El duque y la duquesa estan aqui de paso
en su viaje al extranjero. Los nifios tendrin de cuatro 4
cinco afios. Estoy mirando (looking) si (whether) el bebedero
del pajaro tiene agua. Dofia Julia est’ muy grufiona hoy.
Por desgracia es cierto que el hijo de la pobre viuda ha
muerto. ¢Qué es aquel edificio que esta en medio de la plaza?
éEstuvieron Vds. ayer en el baile? No hubo baile ayer.
Seria muy hermoso este viaje, si no hiciese tanto calor (were
not so hot). El duque ha estado en su palacio, y la duquesa
estuvo en el extranjero. La vida es un suefio. Los nifios no
estan en su cabal juicio. Mi padre quiere que yo esté en
casa todo el dia. Es una’ cosa deliciosa vivir en la compatfiia
de un amigo. La casa de sw amigo de V.**) estd muy léjos
de la ciudad. jQuiera (would to) Dios, que sus afios de V.
sean colmados de toda (all) prosperidad! las plazas fuertes
de todo el reino estén conquistadas.

Traduccion. 17.

Where are you? Were you**) at home yesterday? No,
Sir, I have not been at home, I was at the concert. The
cross of the duchess was (set) adorned with precious stones.
A poet says (dice): (the) Error is (the) life. The duke and.
the duchess are travelling (tr. on a journey) abroad. In the.
middle of the square there is a large palace and a beautiful
garden. The building is very far from the village (la aldea).
Where was (Def.) the son of the widow? The trough of the
bird is without water. (The) Fortune is a precious thing;
but (the) virtue is more (mds) precious. Your cousin (m.)
is very cross to-day. Unfortunately it is certain, that the
emperor Maximilian (Maximiliano) of Mexico (M*jico) has
died. There were ten precious stones on the cross. The
prices of (the) English goods are very moderate. Your brother

*) no obstante de ser, although I am, In English, the Infini-
tive following no obstante should be rendered by the respective
tense of the verb,

**) you when printed in italics, is always V. Your, see the’
Note page 47. ;
47

Lesson 13.

(su hermano de V.) will have been greatly mistaken (transl.
in a great mistake). Why are you not*) satisfied with (con)
your situation? I wish you to be (tr. I wish that you be)
at home at 12 o’clock (@ las doce). If you were in Madrid,
your situation would be more favourable. Have you not been
at the concert yesterday? I should not have been at home,
if your brother had come (venido). It is already (ya) some-
what (algo) late; why (did) have you not come at ten o’clock
(4 las diez)? This man has always been very happy (feliz);
notwithstanding (sin embargo) he is not satisfied with his (sw)

situation.

I was just reading a book, when (cuando) my
brother came (vino). What are you looking for? I

am

looking (tr. searching) for my hat.
Conversacion.

éDénde esté el duque?

éCual deseo es activo en los
hombres?

éQué es el suefio?

éPor qué se lastima (complain)
V.?

éCoémo son los precios de esos
géneros (commodities)?
éEstuvo V. ayer en su casa?

éDe qué (with what) estaba
adornada la cruz del obispo
(bishop)?

éQué edad es la de V.? (How
old are you?)

éQué estds leyendo?

éEsté V. buscando su som-
brero?

2Quién ha muerto?

éNo puede (cannot) V. decirme
(tell me) qué (what) edificio
es aquel?

aQué quiere su padre de
V.9**)

éComo estéd su padre de V.?

Esté‘en el palacio de la duquesa.

El deseo de aleanzar fama y
riqueza.

El suefio es una cosa fantdstica.

Porque mi situacion es muy
lastimosa.

Son muy (very) moderados.

No, Sefior, estuve en casa de
mi primo.

Estaba adornada de muchas
piedras preciosas.

Tengo treinta afios (I am...
old).

Estoy leyendo el Don Quijote.

No, Sefiora, estoy buscando mis
guantes.

El hijo de la pobre viuda ha
muerto.

El edificio que esté en medio
de la plaza es el tribunal
real (royal).

Quiere que esté hoy en casa
hasta la tarde.

Esté un poco indispuesto (un-
well).

*) In Spanish the meaning of a verb is negatived by prefix-
ing no to it, as: I do not think, (Yo) no pienso.
**) Your (polite mode) is expressed el... de V. (the... of

you), or more elegantly su ..
following Less.)

. de V. (your...

of you). (See the
58 Lesson 16.

Words.

El peso, the dollar (= 4
shillings).

el real, the real (=2'/2 pence).

la peseta, a coin = 4 reales.

la caja, the box. .

el ternero, the calf.

el puerco, the pig.

la revolucion, the revolution.

el mes, the month.

la legua, the league.

el contorno, the outskirts; cir-
cumference.

el arrabal, the suburb.

el vecino, the neighbour; the
inhabitant.

la calle, the street.

el puente, the bridge.

el farol, the (street-) lamp;
the lantern.

el carnicero, the butcher.

el buey, the ox.

la fecha, the date.

la capital, the capital.

el zapato, the shoe.

la media, the stocking.

América, America.

varon, male.

hembra, female.

medio, -a, half.

girar, to turn round.

fallecié, he (she) died.

hace, makes, does.

descubierto, -a, discovered. *

al rededor, round (= round
about). }

todavia, also; no — todavia, (or
todavia no), not yet.

ahora, now.

. Reading Exercise. 22,
Mi tio tiene tres hijos (children), un varon y dos hembras*).

Ha tenido diez pesos.
treinta y una cajas.
la una y media.

He perdido ocho reales. He comprado,
éSabe V. qué hora es?
Son las ocho y cuarto de la noche. gA

No es todavia,

cudntos estamos del mes? Es hoy el dia diez y siete de julio.
Estamos & veinte y siete (veintisiete) de enero. Mafiana
tendremos 85 ‘bueyes, 42 vacas, 88 terneros y 76 puercos.
Saturno hace su revolucion en 380 afios; Jupiter en 2 afios,.
la tierra en 365 dias y 6 horas; Vénus en 225 dias y Mer-
curio en 3 meses. La luna gira al rededor de la tierra en
27 dias, 7 horas y 43 minutos. Esta capital tiene 9 leguas
de contorno, 18 arrabales, 1,500,000 vecinos, 2006 calles,
“50,000 casas, 83 plazas, 26 hospitales, 15 puentes y 80,000
faroles. Clodoveo, rey de Francia, fallecid de edad de 45 afios,
despues de reinado de (after having reigned) 30 afios. Tengo
una decena de zapatos, una docena de medias y 13 pares de
guantes. ¢Han dado ya las once? Las 10 estén para dar.
Mi hermano murio 4 los tres afios de su edad. He visto cien
hombres**). Hay ciento y ocho pesos en esa bolsa. Mi padre

_ *) As hijos means both sons and children, the sex must be
expressed by the addition of the words varon (male) and hembra
(female), as in the above sentence. (Italian: Ho tre figli, un
maschio e due femmnvine.)

**) The object of the person is not in the dative, but in the
accusative when preceded by a numeral.
Determinative Adjectives. 49

Mismo may also be joined to este, ese, and aquel,
and then means the very same, or this very .. ., as:

Este mismo hombre, the identical man.
Lo mismo is neuter and means the same thing.

2. Interrogative adjectives.
§ 4. gCudl? m. & f. which? what?
Plur. ¢Cudles? m. & f. which? what?

This adjective is invariable in both numbers and
genders, as:
éCudl hombre? which man? what man?
éCudl mujer? which woman?
Pl. gCudles hombres? gCudles mujeres? which men? which
women?

8 5. gQué? m. & f. Sing. and Plur. what? which?

The sense of gque? is more general than that of
geudl? thus:

éQué hombre? What man?

éCual culpa tengo? What is my fault? i. e. in what

does my fault consist?
éCudl libro tienes? Which book hast thow?

Qué is also exclamative, as:
iQué hombre! What a man!

If followed by an adjective, tan (so, so much) or més,
most (utmost) should be added, as:

Qué mujer tan hermosa! What a beautiful woman!
iQué casa mas alta! What a high house!

NB. Indirect interrogative sentences are also introduced
by qué, as:

No sabemos qué pasajeros han Wegado.

We do not know which passengers have arrived.
Preguntaba qué noticias traia el vapor.

I asked which news the steamer brought.

§ 6. The interrogative and exclamative qué, when
joined to the Accusative of a person, does not, like the
relative pronoun que (see Lesson 26), admit of the pre-
position a; thus:

éQué hombre ha visto V.? Which man have you seen?

and not: A qué hombre ha visto V.?
Spanish Grammar. 4
50 Lesson 14.

Words. face
La carta, the letter. majestuoso, -«, majestic.
el muchacho, the boy. pesado, -c, heavy.
la calle, the street. natural, native, born at.

la arquitectura, the architec- alto -a, high.
la iglesia, the church. [ture. primorosamente, first rate, very

el nombre, the name. well.

la tienda, the shop. hablo, I speak.

la sefiora, the lady. habla, he (she) speaks.

el lujo, the magnificence. mira, look! (2nd Sing. Imper.)
la carga, the burden, weight. se Tama, is named.

el oficial, the officer. comprado, bought.

el cuarto, the room. hecho, done, made.

el color, the colour. cémo, how.

Reading Exercise. 18.

Este hombre. Aquellas cartas. Esa mujer. Ese muchacho.
{Qué calle tan hermosa! Ese teatro es muy grande. Esta
casa no es grande. La arquitectura de aquella iglesia es
majestuosa. jMira estos drboles! Adquellas sefioras son habiles’
(clever) cantarinas (singers). Esta sefiora es natural de Madrid
(es madrilefia). ¢Cémo se llama este café? jQué lujo en
esta casa! jOh, qué carga tan pesada! ¢Esté bueno su
amigo de V. en esa ciudad? ¢Tiene V. el mismo libro que
tengo yo? Aquellos oficiales tuvieron un mismo uniforme.
He visto 4 las mismas sefioras que tu has visto. ¢Qué deseo
tiene tu hermano? ¢Cudl hombre estuvo en mi cuarto? No
hablo de este hombre sino (but) de aquel. El mismo color.
Las mismas personas. El hijo de este hombre es muy pequefio.
He comprado las mismas plumas en la tienda de aquel comer-
ciante. Hemos leido los mismos libros.

Traduccion. 19.

This king is rich. That boy is poor. Those women were
in my room. Have you seen that theatre? This church had
a majestic architecture. What [a] splendour in this palace!
What [a] rich man! In your (§ 1) city there was (hubo)
a merchant who (que) had the same name. These two officers
have the same uniform. This gentleman is called (has the
name) Charles, and that lady is called Elvira. Do you speak
of these gentlemen or of those? Many flowers have the same
colour. What [a] man! What [a] majestic lady! These
boys were at (the) church. I have seen the same persons.
These gentlemen are native(s) of Paris, and those ladies of
Madrid. The trees before your house are very high. This
burden is very heavy. What is the name of that boy (tr. How-
calls himself that boy)? Do you speak of this gentleman or
of that lady?
Possessive Pronouns.

51

Conversacion.

éComo se Jama este mu-
chacho ?

éY como se llaman esos hom-
bres?

és grande ese teatro?

éCémo es la arquitectura de
aquella iglesia?

2No es madrilefia esta sefiora?

eConoce V. es flor?
éY aquella?
4290n cantarinas esas sefioras?

éCémo estaban vestidos aque-
llos oficiales?
éQué hombre ha visto V.?

éQué ha hecho V. esta ma-
fiana?

Fifteenth Lesson.

Se llama Celedonio.
No sé como se llaman.

Si, Sefiora, es muy grande.

La arquitectura de aquella igle-
sia es majestuosa.

iPerdone V.! (I beg your par-
don!) Esta sefiora es natural
de Paris.

Si, es una rosa.

Es un tulipan.

No son cantarinas, pero bailan
(they dance) primorosamente.

Tenian todos un mismo uni-
forme.

He visto al padre de este mu-
chacho.

He escrito una carta.

Leccion quincena.

Possessive Pronouns,

With the possessive pronouns the first thing to
decide is whether a stress is ‘laid on them or not. If
not, the short forms are used:

Sing.
IM, my.
tu, thy.
su, his, her.

nuestro, nuestra, our.
vuestro, vuestra, your.
su, their.

84,

Plur.
Mis, my.
tus, thy.
sus, his, her.
nuestros, nuestras, our.
vuestros, vuestras, your.
sus, their.

His and her are both rendered by su, as su

amigo, his friend or her friend. —: Besides, su signifies
their, as: My brothers have sold their dog, mis hermanos

han vendido su perro.

§ 2. Mi, tu, sw have no particular form for the
feminine gender; nuestro, and vuestro however, change
the final o into a, as: nuestro amigo, our friend (m Ds
nuestra amiga, our friend (f.).

4*

’
52 Lesson 15.

§ 3. If a stress is laid on the possessive pronoun,
longer and more sonorous forms should be used, which
always follow the substantive. These special forms are
also used as possessive adjective pronouns, and are as
follows:

Sing. Plur.
Mio, mia, my. Mios, mias, my.
tuyo, tuya, thy. tuyos, tuyas, thy.
suyo, suya, his, her. suyos, suyas, his, her.
nuestro, nuestra, our. nuestros, nuestras, our.
vuestro, vuestra, your. vuestros, vuestras, your.
suyo, suya, their. suyas, suyos, their.

Examples.

Mi amigo, my friend (= a friend of mine).

j Amigo mio! my (dear) friend!

Es culpa mia y no tuya; that is my fault and not
thine. ae Lah

Te

§ 4. As in English, the possessive pronoun, when
no stress is laid on it, may be omitted, if another sub-
stantive with a possessive pronoun precedes, coupled by
the conjunction y (and) or 6 (or); thus:

Sus libros y (sus) plumas.
His books and (his) pens.

§ 5. If in English a possessive pronoun is repeated
before two adjectives expressing matter, as: wooden, gold,
silver etc. (when in Spanish, as we stated Less. 5, § 4,
the material is expressed by a substantive with de), the
Spaniard omits the second possessive adjective and puts
the definite article in its stead, as:

Neither your gold nor your silver watch.
Ni tu reloj de oro ni et de plata.

§ 6. Likewise, the demonstrative pronoun is rendered
by the definite article, if a substantive preceded by a
possessive pronoun is followed by another substantive in
the Genitive case, as:

My friend and that of my cousin.
Mi amigo 'y el de mi primo.
If we say:

El amigo mio y de mi primo, the sense is different.
In the first sentence we speak of two persons, whereas
in the second phrase the same person is meant.
Possessive Pronouns. 53

§ 7. The Engiish expression: a friend, a relation etc.
of mine, should be translated un amigo mio, etc., as:

Charles is a friend of mine.
Carlos es (un) amigo mio.

§ 8. The possessive pronoun referring to the polite
form V. is either el (la) de V. or more elegantly su de
V.; simply sw (and not su de V.), if V. precedes imme-
diately, when no misunderstanding would arise, thus:

Have you your stick? gTiene V. sw baston? (and not:
su baston de V., because V. precedes.) Whereas:

I have your stick. Tengo et baston de V., or more
elegantly: Tengo su baston de V.

Words.

La dicha, the fortune.

el conocido, the acquaintance.

el mantenimiento, the mainte-
nance, livelihood.

la educacion, the education.
la mcuria, the carelessness.

el discuido, the negligence.
la causa, the cause.

la desgracia, the misfortune.

los padres, the parents.
el hierro, the iron.
la cadena, the chain.

la edad, the age.

la ilusion, the illusion.

poético, -a, poetical.

unico, -a, sole, only.

estudiar, to study.

cuidar, to care.

apreciar, to appreciate, to esteem.

vienes, thou comest.

quieren, they like.

repasad, repeat (2. Plur. Im-
perat.).

hallado, found.

Reading Exercise. 20.

j Mira mi reloj!

{Repasad vuestras lecciones, nifios!
éTiene V. su reloj de oro 6 el de

ayer -en el jardin de V.

¢Vienes & estudiar con tu hermano?

Mis hermanos estuvieron

plata? Esta madre ha perdido su hijo y su hija*). Es culpa
mia que yo no he venido ayer. Ese hombre es mi amigo y
no el de mi hermano. Mi amigo y el de mi hermano han
muerto. jPor dicha mia he vendido mi casa! ¢No es amigo
tuyo ese sefior? Es un conocido mio. {Dadme (give [pl.] me)
mi libro y mis plumas! Estos nifios han perdido su padre.
He hallado su bolsa de V. Esta casa es mia, y aquella es
de**) mi padre. Mi tio cuida de mi mantenimiento y educacion.
Tu incuria y descuido son la unica causa de tu desgracia.
Hemos hablado de nuestro amigo y no del tuyo.

*) Ha perdido dsu hijo, would mean: “has ruined her son”.
**) To belong is usually expressed by the verb ser with
the Genitive case.
54 Lesson 16.
Traduccion. 21.
Your children are the cause of this misfortune. Hast
thou studied (estudiado) with thy brother? This ein
ese

has lost his son, and this lady has lost her daughter. |
children love their parents. It is (by) your fault, Sir, that
I have lost my gold watch. Is this lady your friend or that
of your sister? I have come with my.cousin (m.) and with
yours. Have you your silver or your gold chain? Have you
your hat? I have not mine, but (sino) I have my brother’s
hat. A friend of mine has provided for the education of the
children. My friends and acquaintances (did not) have not

come. I have found your purse in the garden.

have found their letters.

Our aunts

Conversacion.

iMire V. (look at) mi reloj!

éCudl es la causa de su des-
gracia de V.?

éQuieren esos nifios 4 sus
padres ?

¢Con quién ha venido V.?

2Qué se ha de (must one)
apreciar en un hombre?

éDonde estuvo V. ayer?

éQué tiene su criado de V.?

éEs ese sefior su. hermano
de V.?

éDe qué debe (ought, shall)
cuidar un buen padre?

éNo es ese sefior un conocido
de V.?

Amigo mio. jqué has hecho
(done)! :

Su reloj de V. no me gusta
(pleases).

La unica causa de mi desgracia
es mi descuido.

Si, Sefior, los quieren.

He venido con mi amigo y el
de mi hermano.
Su persona y sus facultades.

Estuve en el jardin de mi tio.

Tiene mi gorra (cap) y su som-
brero de V.

No, es mi primo; aquel es mi
hermano.

Del mantenimiento y de la edu-
cacion de sus nifios.

Si, Sefior, es un conocido mio.

iNo es culpa mia!

Sixteenth Lesson. Leccion décima sexta.
Numbers. — Numerales.

We distinguish: +) Cardinal numbers; 2) Ordinal
numbers; 3) Fractional numbers; 4) Multiplicative num-
bers, and 5) Indefinite numbers. The cardinal and ordi-
nal numbers are adjectives, whereas the others have the
character of substantives.
Cardinal Numbers.

1. Cardinal Numbers.

Uno (un), una, one.
dos, two.

tres, three.

cuatro, four.

cinco, five.

Seis, six.

siete, seven.

ocho, eight.

nueve, nine. -

diez, ten.

once, eleven.

doce, twelve.

trece, thirteen.

catorce, fourteen.
quince, fifteen.

diez y seis, sixteen.
diez y siete, seventeen.
diez y ocho, eighteen.
-diez y nueve, nineteen.
veinte, twenty.
veinte y uno*)\
(veintiuno),
veinte y dos, twenty two.
veinte y tres, twenty three.

veinte y cuatro, twenty four.

treinta, thirty.
cuarenta, forty.
cincuenta, fifty.

j twenty one.

55

Cardinales.

sesenta, sixty.
_setenta, seventy.
ochenta, eighty.
noventa, ninety.
mento | a hundred.

cien

ciento y uno, 101.

ciento y dos, 102.
doscientos, | 200
docientos, docientas, ;
trescientos, -as,

trecientos, -as, | 300.
cuatrocientos, -as, 400.
quinientos, -as, 500.
Seiscientos, -as, 600.
setecientos, -as, 700.
ochocientos, -as, 800.
novecientos, -as, 900.

mil, 1000.

mil y uno, 1001.

mil y dos, 1002.

mil y tres, 1003.

dos mil, 2000.

tres mil, 3000.

diez mil, 10000.

cien mil, 100000.

un millon,
un es 1,000,000.

Observations.

1) Before mil (1000) and ciento (100)

un is never

used, provided that no misconception arise by omitting
this number. Thus one thousand, one hundred and eleven
is translated mil ciento y once. But they say cuatrocien-
tos y un mil 401,000, because cuatrocientos mil (without
un) is 400,000.

2) Ciento drops the last syllable. (-to) when immedi-
ately beforg a substantive or an adjective and likewise
before mil and millon, as: a hundred men, cien hombres;
but ciento y ocho, 108. The English expressions: eleven
hundred, twelve hundred etc., must be rendered by mul

*) In modern orthography veinte is often written as one word
with the following number, thus:
veintiuno, 21; veintidos, 22; veintitres, 23 etc.
56 Lesson 16.

y ciento, one thousand one hundred ete. Ex.: mil ocho
cientos (-as), eighteen hundred.

3) Ciento in the Plural (two hundred, three hundred
etc.), is inflected like an adjective, taking s before a
masculine and changing the final o into as before a
feminine noun, as: Doscientos hombres, 200 men; dos-
cientas mujeres, 200 women.

4) When a substantive follows the numbers veite y
uno, treinta y uno etc., it is best put in the plural, as in
English, as: treinta y uno dias; cuarenta y uno pesos
etc. The form un is not allowable in this case. How-
ever, the singular is admissible, as: tremta y un dia.

5) Some before hundred and thousand is translated
unos (-as), and the numbers are, of course, put in the
plural, as: some hundred (thousand) dollars, «08 cientos
(miles) pesos; whereas unos cien pesos means, about a
hundred dollars.

6) The days of the month (except “the first”, el
primero) are expressed by cardinal numbers, commonly
with d, as: the 25th, @ veinte y cinco; the 18th of Jan-
uary, & diez y ocho de enero, We have the 18th of
January, is translated Estamos « diez y ocho de enero.
The date of a letter is either given as in English, as:
Madrid the 4th of May 1889, Madrid, (a) 4 (cuatro)
de mayo 1889, or: Madrid, y mayo 4 (cuatro) de 1889
(lit. Madrid and May the 4th of 1889).

Note. The Spanish language sometimes prefers cardinal num-
bers, where the English makes use of ordinals. The following
may serve as examples: In his third year, a los tres aios de su
edad; on the ninth day, & los nueve dias.

7) The hours of the day are expressed as in Italian,
i. e. with the cardinal numbers after the articles la or
las, and the word o'clock (properly “hour”, hora) is
omitted. Thus: \

One o'clock, la*) una (i. e. hora, hour).
Two o'clock, las dos (i. e. horas, hours).
Three o'clock, las tres ete. 4

At is a as: at four o'clock, & las cuatro.

The quarters of the preceding hour are expressed
thus:

*) The article is in the singular, because one o'clock means
one hour; with all the other hours the article should be plural,
Cardinal Numbers. 57

One o’clock, la una.

A quarter past one o’clock, la una y cuarto (= 1%).

Half past one o’clock, la una y media (= 11/2).

A quarter to 2 o'clock, las dos ménos cuarto (lit.: 2
o’clock less a quarter).

NB. It will strike directly ..., is: las..... estin para dar
or pronto dardn las ....; it strikes ..., is: dan las...., and: it
has just struck ..., is: las.....acaban de dar. Precisely at 5

o'clock, is: d las cinco en punto. Afternoon is la tarde, evening
and night la noche. The early morning (before daybreak) is
la madrugada, the morning, (also before midday) is la mafiana.

8) The expressions: a quarter of a year, half a year
etc., should be rendered by three months, six months etc.,
as: tres meses (three months); seis meses (6 months);
nueve meses (9 months) etc.

9) The age of a person is commonly expressed by
tener .... amos, as: He is six years old, tiene seis afios
(he has 6 years). The question: How old are you? is
therefore translated: ¢Cudntos afios tiene V.? or also:
éQué es la edad de V.? (which age is yours?)

10) Both is los dos, las dos, or ambos, f. ambas, or
ambos (-as) a dos, as: He visto a los dos (or ambos a
dos) en el paseo, I have seen them both on the promenade.

The most important collective numerals are:

Un par, a pair, a couple. una centena

una decena, ten. (un ciento, un |a hundred,
una docena, o dozen. centenar, un (somehundred. *
una veintena, a score. centenal),

una treintena, cuarentena etc., un millar, a thousand, some
thirty, forty (some thirty, thousand ete.

forty etc.). mt fs pe -
We here subjoin the names of the days and months:

 

Domingo, Sunday. marzo, March.

lunes, Monday. abril, April.

médrtes, Tuesday. mayo, May.

miércoles, Wednesday. junio, June.

juéves, Thursday. julio, July.

viérnes, Friday. agosto, August.

sdbado, Saturday. setiembre, September.
octubre, October.

Enero, January. noviembre, November.

febrero, February. diciembre, December.
52 Lesson 16.
Words.
El peso, the dollar (= 4. 4d carnicero, the butcher.
shillings}. el buey, the ox.

el real. the real {=2': pence. la fecha, the date.
la peseta. a com = +4 reales. la capital, the capital.

la caja, the box. el zapatos, the sbe<.

el ternero, the calf. la median. the stocking.

el puerco, the pig. Apivrica, America.

la rerolucion, the revolution. raron. male.

el mes, the month. hembra, female.

la leqgua, the league. medio, -a, half.

el contorno, the outskirts: cir-  girar, to tarn round.
cumference. fallecié, he «she» died.

el arrabal, the suburb. hace, makes, does.

el cecino, the neighbour; the = d-s-ule.rto, -a, Gseovered.
inhabitant. al rededor, round (— round

la calle, the street. about). #

el puente, the bridge. todaria, also: no — todavia, (ar

el farol, the (street-) lamp; todavia no), not yer.
the lantern. ahora, now.

_ Reading Exercise. 2.

Mi tio tiene tres hijos (childrens. un varon v dics hembras*).
Ha tenido diez pesos. He perdido ocho reales. He comprado.
treinta vy una ¢32'as. ZSabe V. qué hora es? No es todavia .
la una y media, Son las ocho y cuarto de la noche. <A
euantos estamcs del mes? Es hov el dia diez y siete de juho.
Estamos 4 veinte y siete (veintisicte: de enero. Majiana
tendremos 35 bueres. 42 vacas. >> termeros ¥ 145 puercos.
Saturne hace su revolucion en 30 afcs: Jupiter en 2 aiios,
la tierra en 365 dias vy 5 horas: Vénus en 225 dias y Mer-
eario en 3 meses. La luna gira al re?=dor de la tierra en
27 dias. + koras y 43 minutos. Esta capital tiene 9 leguas
de contorno, 1s “arrabales. 1.500.000 vecines, 2006 eaDn.
50,000 casas. 35 plazas, 26 hospitales, 15 puentes vy S160)
faroles. Clodoveo. rey de Francia, fallecié de edad de 45 amos,
despues de reinado de /ajter having reign:d) 30 aiios. Tengo
una decena de zapatos. una decena de medias y 13 pares de
guantes. ¢Han dado ya las once? Las 10 estan para dar.
Mi hermano murio 4 iss tres afes de om edad. _He visto cien
hombres**). Hay ciento y ocho pescs em esa boise. Mi padre

*) As hijos means both sons and children, the sex -225t be
expressed by the addition of the woris caron (male) and h. embra:
(female’, as in the above sentence (Italian: Ho tre figli, ua
maschio e due femmine.)

** The object of the person is not in the dative. but in the
accusative when preceded by a numeral. :
Cardinal Numbers. 59

tiene 71 afios. ¢Ha visto V. 4 mis primos? He visto ayer
ambos 4 dos en el jardin real. Un peso tiene viente reales
6 cinco pesetas. En Espafia toman generalmente 5 francos
por 19 reales.

Traduccion. 23.

1. My aunt had 7 children, 4 boys and 3 girls. Thy
brother will have a hundred dollars. I have one hundred
dollars and 11 reals. The butcher has bought 10 oxen, 37
pigs, and 17 calves. It is now 8 o'clock in the evening.
He came (has come) at noon yesterday. Have we to-day the
10th or the 11th of May? The city of Vienna has 1,201,000 in-
habitants, 38 suburbs, and +4 (German) miles in circumference.
Louis XVI, king of France, died in Paris on the 2ist of
January 1793. It has struck 9 o’clock. We have bought
16 pairs of gloves and two dozen (pairs) of stockings. My
brother was a quarter of a year at Paris and half a year at
Madrid. He came at 1 o’clock to-day. ,

2. The arch-duchess (archiduquesa) Sophia of Austria died
in the third year of her age. The letter (bears) has the date:
Vienna the 8th of May 1889. To-day we have the 23rd of
April. This town had 801,000 inhabitants. Three hundred
and eighty seven dollars and 12 reals. I ha¥e given to the
lawyer (abogado) some hundred dollars. America was dis-
covered in the year 1492. The day has 24 hours, the hour
has 60 minutes. My sister is 21 years old. June has 30
days, October has thirty-one, and February has 28 or 29
days.

Conversacion.

4.Qué edad es la de V.? Tengo 41 aiios.

éY su padre de V.? Tiene ahora 76 aiios.

¢Cudndo fallecid el rey Luis Murid (he died) el (a) 21 de

XVI de Francia? enero 1793.

éCuantos hijos tiene V.? Tengo + hijos; 3 muchachos y
una muchacha.

éQué ha comprado V.? He comprado una docena de
guantes y 18 pares de medias.

éA cudntos estamos hoy? Estamos 4 18 de enero.

¢Ha recibido V. una carta? Si, he recibido una carta con
fecha de Cadiz, 9 octubre
1888.

¢Han dado ya las doce? No, Sefior; pero dardn pronto
las 12.

éQué hora es? Acaban de dar las 9.

¢Cuantos dias tiene el afio? Un afio tiene 365 dias y 6 horas.
60 Lesson 17.

éCudntos dias tiene un mes?

éQué ha dado V. al abogado?

éEn cudnto tiempo hace Sa-
turno su revolucion al re-
dedor del sol?

éHa perdido V. algo?

Un mes tiene 30 6 31 dias.
He dado al abogado cien pesos,
En treinta afios.

He perdido 4 pesos.

Seventeenth Lesson. Leccion décima
séptima.

2. Ordinal Numbers.

El primero (el primo) , the
la primera (la prima) | first.
el segundo | the second,

la segunda

el tercero (tercio), the third.
el cuarto, the 4th.

el quinto, the 54h.

el sexto (sesto), the 6th.

el séptimo

(el sttimo) } t2e 7th.

el octavo, the 8th.

el nono

(el noveno) a Ee,
el décimo

Cl aioe) } the 10th.

el undécimo
a eines | the 11th,

el duodécimo
toon) | the 12th.
el décimo tercio

(el treceno) } the i
el décimo cuarto

(el catorceno) } the ee
el décimo quinto

(el quinceno) | the Tbth,
el décimo sexto, the 16th.
el décimo séptimo, the 17th.
el décimo octavo, the 18th.
el décimo nono, the 19th.
el vigésimo |

(el veinteno) the 20th.
(el veintésimo) |

Ordinales.

el vigésimo primo, the 21st.

el vigésimo segundo, the 22nd.

el vigésimo tercio, the 28rd.

el vigésimo cuarto, the 24th.

el trigésimo

(el tricésimo) } the 30th.

(el treinteno)

el cuadragésimo, the 40th.

el quincuagésimo | the 50th

(el cincuenteno) :

el sexagésimo, the 60th.

el septuagésimo, the 70th.

el octogésimo

(el octuagésimo) ; the 80th.

(el ochentésimo)

el nonagésimo, the 90th. -

el centésimo

(el centeno) ih: IDOE,

el centésimo primo (primero),
the 101st.

: phate segundo, the 102nd.

el ducentésimo

(el doscentésimo) she Roth

el trecentésimo, the 300th.

el cuadringentésimo, the 400th.

el quingentésimo, the 500th.

el sexcentésimo, the 600th.

a Sepiingentesino, the 700th.

el octogentésimo

(el octingentésimo) the 800th.

el nonagentésimo a

(el nongentésimo) | the 900th.
Ordinal Numbers. 61

el milésimo, the 1000th. el ultimo
el dosmilésimo, the 2000th. el postrero
el peniltimo, the last but one.

Note. The numbers in brackets are less frequent. —
Besides, there are a few archaic forms, as:
el cuarenteno, the 40th. el setentésimo
; cincuentésimo, the 50th. el setenteno the 70th.

esentesim st
al peer . eho aOt a sb ite a
a movers Ye sot,

The forms setuagésimo for septuagésimo, and octuagésimo

for octogésimo are very rare.

\ the last.

the 80th.

Observations.

1) The ordinal numbers primero and tercero are used
when they are not joined to another number, as:
Céarlos tercero, Charles III.
However: Capitulo trigésimo tercio*), 33rd Chapter.

2) The forms noveno, deceno, onceno are becoming obsolete.

3) Proper names of princes take the ordinal numbers
without an article, as: Philipp II, Felipe segundo.

‘ Ferdinand IV, Fernando cuarto.

NB. With the names of the kings of Spain and of the popes,
ordinal numbers are used up to the eleventh; thus Isabel segunda,
Cérlos III (tercero),. Charles III, ybut Alfonso doce. From the
twelfth upward, both cardinal and ordinal numbers may be used.
Thus we may say , Yidifferently: “Benedicto décimo cuarto, Pope
Benedict XIV, und, Benedicto catorce. With the names of other
foreign sovereigns, ordinal numbers are used up to the tenth or
eleventh, and then follow cardinal numbers. Thus Enrique cuarto,
Henry IV (of France); Luis once or undécinio, Lewis XI; Carlos
doce, Charles XII (of Sweden).

4) With some substantives cardinal as well as ordinal
numbers may be employed, but only beyond undécimo, the
eleventh. In this case they should follow the substantive; thus:

Chapter 15th, Capitulo décimo quinto or Capitulo quince.

Page 20, Pdgina veinte or vigésima.

5) Fractions are expressed by ordinal numbers, as in
’ English:

medio, -a, half**) (la mitad, un tercio third
the half). (unatercia, i.e. part) ® Se

 

 

*) But trigésimo tercero, too, is correct, whereas Carlos tercio
would be improper. .
**) Without article. With the article, un medio, a half (Subst.).
62 Lesson 17.

un cuarto \ ; un octavo ;
(una cuarta) J * quarter. (un tae an eighth.
un quinto, a fifth (part). un nono ;

un sexto ixth (un niet | @ ninth.
(una sesma) J ® SIX¥D- un diezmo | ‘ah
un séptimo, a seventh. (un décimo)! *® © :

un centésimo, 1{100- un’ milésimo, 4/1000,

Note. The feminine forms of fractional numbers are
used in certain expressions only, as: wna cuarta, i. e. vara,
a quarter of an ell etc. From tem upwards the fractional
numbers are formed by adding the word avo (liter. fractional
part) to the cardinal numbers, which thereby undergo some
orthographical alteration. The numbers ending in -ce change
this syllable into 4, as: tres onzavos, °/1; ocho quinzavos,
81s; — ocho drops the final -o, as: dos diez y ochavos, 2/18,
— To dos, tres, cuatro, seis, siete, and nueve the syllable avo
is added without any alteration, as: un dice y seisavo, ‘16;
cinco diez y sieteavos, ®/17, — Uno is changed into wnavo(s).
Beyond */20, the termination avo is added to the last conso-
nant, the word y (and) being written i, and the whole number
contracted into one word.

For the sake of greater clearness we subjoin all these
forms in their arithmetical order:

“11 un onzavo. 2/11 dos onzavos.

The un dozavo. 2he dos dozavos.

hs un trezavo. 2/13 dos trezavos.

M14 un catorzavo. 2h4 dos catorzavos.

jis un quinzavo. */1s dos quinzavos.

‘ie un diez y seisavo. 21s dos diez y seisavos.
‘hz un diez y sieteavo. 2h dos diez y sieteavos.
the un diez y ochavo. 2448 dos diez y ochavos.
‘fis un diez y nueveavo. 2he dos diez y nueveavos.
4/oo un veintavo. leo dos veintavos.

1/o1 un veintiunavo. 1/30 un treintavo.

1/22 un veintidosavo. 1/40 un cuarentavo etc.
1/o3 un veintitresavo. un cienavo.

Jog un veinticuatroavo. 1/100 un centavo.

1/25 un veinticincavo etc. un centésimo.

un céntimo (in South America: wn centavo)* is "fio of a
peseta, franc ete.

Beyond 1/200, the common ordinal numerals are used as
fractional numbers. Thus */225 doscientos veinte y tres
ducentésimos vigésimos quintos; *ss07 trecientos treinta y
tres cuatro milésimos quingentésimos sexagésimos séptimos.
Ordinal Numbers. 63

5 The multiplicatives are:
Simple, simple.

duplo, -a, el doble

doble } double, twofold. 7 “upto | double the ....
triple

ve -a, } threefold. el triple, the triple ete.
triplice

cuddruplo, -a fourfold.

quintuplo -a, fivefold.

séxtuplo, séptuplo, éctuplo, décuplo, céntuplo, 6-, 7-, 8-, 10-,
100fold etc.

The other multiplicatives are periphrased with de... .
veces (times) and a comparative or tanto following, as: Su
pena es de nueve veces mayor, his punishment is ninefold
(nime times greater). Catorce veces tanto, fourteenfold.

The numerals primero, tercero, and postrero, drop the final
0 before a substantive; primero always, tercero and postrero
very often. Ex.:

Ell primer dia, the first day.
Ell tercer(o) dia, the third day.

Sometimes the feminine primera drops the final a, as:
ad primer vista, at first sight. If, however, primero is coupled
by y or 6 with another ordinal number, except ¢ercero and
postrero (last), the complete form should be used, as:

El primero y el octavo libro, the first and the eighth book.
But: El primer y el tercer libro, the first and the third book.

Words.

El diente, the tooth. la semana, the week.
la edad, the age. la vara, the (Spanish) ell.
la eleccion, the choice, elec- el pavo, the cloth.

tion. el emperador, the emperor.
el maestro, the master. el tomo, the volume.
el mes, the month. mudar, to change.
la libra, the pound. Mazximiliano, Maximilian.
la onza, the ounce. _ nombrado, called.
el kilégramo, the kilogramme. sucedid, succeeded, followed.
el aztcar, the sugar. viene, comes.

Reading Exercise. 24.

El caballo (horse) muda los dientes 4 los dos afios y
medio de su edad. Felipe Augusto fue el 42°, Franciso I el
58°, Enrique IV, nombrado el Grande, el 70° rey de Francia.
Carlos IV sucediéd 4 Carlos III el 12 de agosto 1788. ¢Sabe
V. qué hora es? Todavia no es la una y media. A los
nueve dias de su eleccion le sobrevino (surprised him) la
64 Lesson 17.

muerte, que fué (which happened) el 23 de agosto, 4 log
sesenta y cuatro afios de su edad. Mi maestro de musica
viene cada (every) tercer dia. He comprado una docena de
guantes. Dadme (give me) la vigésima, la quincuagésima, la
sexagésima y la centésima parte. Un mes es la duodécima
parte del afio. Tomad (take) siete veintavos y cuarto diezi-
nueveavos. Enero es el primero, marzo el tercero, junio el
sexto y diciembre el ultimo mes del afio. El comerciante ha
recibido tres libras y media de café y tres onzas de azticar.
Cincuenta es la mitad de ciento. Quince es el quintuplo de
tres, y la décima parte de ciento cincuenta. Su padre de V.
me (mc) ha enviado un par de medias y dos pares de guantes,

Traduccion. 25.

A week is the 52nd part of a year. I was one year and
a half at Paris and two years and months in Italy. Lewis
XVI. of France died (fallecid) at Paris the 21st of January
1793. My brother is the fourteenth and my sister the ele-
venth of the class. Does your music-master come every fourth
day? No, he comes every other day (un dia st y el, otro no,
lit. one day Yes and the other No). Take the 10th, the
30th, the 70th and the 90th part. I have bought 8'/. pounds
of sugar and 2%/s pounds of coffee. Give me 5/é and ‘ls,
The first king of France, Pharamond (Faramundo), reigned
(reind) eight years. Lewis XIV. of France died the 1st of
September 1715 at the age of 77 years. I have bought 641
(yards) ells of cloth. The emperor Francis Joseph (José) of
Austria was born (nacidé) at Vienna the 18th August 1830.
The emperor Maximilian of Mexico (Méjico) was born the 6th
of July 1832. February is the second, April the fourth, May
the fifth, July the seventh, August the eighth, September the
ninth, October the tenth, and November the eleventh month
of the year. I have read the 13th, the 14th, the 15th and
the 19th volumes. <A day is the seventh part of a week.

Conversacion.
¢Cudndo muda el caballo los A los dos afios y medio de su
dientes ? edad.
¢Cudndo murié el rey Luis Murid 4 21 de enero 1793.

XVI de Francia?
éQué lugar (place) tiene su Es el octavo 6 el nono de su

hermano de V. en el co- clase.
legio?
éY su hermana de V.? Creo (I believe, I think) que es
la sexta.
éEn qué afio naciéd V.? ° Naci (Iwasborn) en el afio 1827.
éEn qué mes? En enero.

éQué dia? A 18,
Indefinite Numerals. 65

é¢De cual emperador habla Hablo del emperador Francisco

V.? José de Austria.
¢Cudndo nacid? Nacié en Viena el 18 de agosto
de 1830.
éQué ha recibido el comer- Ha recibido ocho libras y media
ciante? de azucar y doce varas de pafio.

éCudnto tiempo (how long) Afio y medio*).
estuvo V. en Paris?

éNo viene su maestro de V. No, Sefior, viene cada tercer
un dia si y el otro no? dia.

Eighteenth Lesson. Leccion décima
octava.

3. Indefinite Numerals. Numerales indefinidos.

These words are pronouns, when used without a sub-
stantive. With a substantive, however, they are adjectives.
They are:

Alguno, -a, plur. algunos, -as, any, pl. any, some.

Alguien, any, any one, anybody.

Ninguno, -a, no; none.

Nadie, nobody.

Cualquiera, pl. cualesquiera, whoever, whatever.

Quienguiera, whoever.

ae some, any, a few.

Uno (-a) y otro (-a),

plur. unos (-as) y otros Aas; | Bothy ath

Ni uno, not a single one.

Ni el uno ni el otro, neither the one nor the other.

Unos cuantos, unas cuantas, some.

Otro, -a, plur. otros, -as, other;

plur. los otros (las otras), the others.

Mismo, -a, plur. mismos, -as, same.

El mismo, la misma, the same.

Cada (in combination), every.

Cada uno (when alone), each.

Todo, -a, all; plur. todos, -as, all.

todos los (todas las), all who. . .

Tal, such; plur. tales, such.

ae | a certain; so and so.

*) In the expressions one year, hour etc. and a half, the in-
definite article is usually omitted. Ex.: Hora y media, an hour
and a half. Ano y medio, a year and a half.

Spanish Grammar. 5
66 Lesson 18.

Observations.

1) Cadu, every, each, is used for both genders and
numbers, as: Cada hombre, every man; cada semana, every
week. If used with a plural, it corresponds to the English
every followed by an ordinal number, as: Cada cinco dias,
every fifth day; cada dos pasos, every two steps. With uno
it means every one, as: Cada uno de por si, every one for
himself. .

2) Alguien, any, anybody, any one, is likewise used for
both genders and numbers, but only of persons and affirma-
tively or interrogatively, as: g Entra alguien? does anybody
enter? Nobody is ninguno, -a, or nadie, as: Ninguno
debe hablar, nobody shall speak. If minguno or nadie
follow the verb, the negation mo should precede it, as: Eso
no es de ninguna importancia, that is of no importance.

3) Cualquiera, whoever, whatever, stands for both gen-
ders; plur. cualesquiera. The final a is sometimes dropped,
but the complete form is preferable. Thus any thing means
cualquiera cosa or cualquier cosa; pl. cuatesquiera libros or
cualesquier libros. A similar form is quienquiera, whoever;
this pronoun is only used for persons and commonly followed
by que, as: Quienquiera que lo diga, whoever says so (it).

4) Nadie is the English nobody, and nada is nothing.
Like ninguno, alguno and ni uno ni otro (neither one
nor the other), these pronouns admit of no negation before
the verb when preceding it, whereas the verb should be pre-
ceded by no, if nadie and nada follow. Ex.:

Nadie lo ha visto, nobody has seen it.
But: No lo ha visto nadie, » » » »,

Nada he dicho, I have said nothing.
But: No he dicho nada,» » » 3

5) Alguno, -a, any, is used in both genders and numbers.
In the plural it means several, a few, some etc. Like uno
it drops the final o before masculine nouns, as: Algun hombre, ;
any man. Examples: alguna mujer, any woman; algunos |
hombres, several men; algunas mujeres, several women. With ;
mo and the verb preceding, it means nobody, not anybody,
not any one etc., as: No he visto (d) ulguno*), I have seen
nobody, I have not seen any one. In this case it has the
same signification as nadie, which may be used in its stead,
provided it does not precede the verb. Thus:

A nadie he visto, means: I have seen nobody, whereas

(A) alguno he visto, » :1 » » somebody.

*) The preposition d is there frequently omitted for ‘the sake
of euphony.
Indefinite Numerals. 67

Note. On Nadie with the signification anybody, somebody ete.
see IT. Part. :

6) Fulano and zutano mean a certain, so and so ete. in
quite a vague sense, as: el Seftor fulano, Mr. So and So.
Commonly they are used together, as: Fulano quiere d eu-
tana, a certain gentleman (Mr. So and So) loves a certain
lady (Miss So and So).

7) Otro, -a, other, is never used with the indefinite article
un; thus: Another has said so, Otro (not un otro) lo ha dicho.
I have another pen, tengo otra pluma. ‘

Words.

El orgullo, the pride. tratar con, to deal with, to’
la hora, the hour. treat.
la fuerza, the strength. acertar, to succeed in.
el motivo, the reason. preguntar por, to ask for.
la comida, the dinner, food. lisonjear, to flatter.
la estampa, the engraving. trabajar, to work.
el paseo, the public walk, presumir de..., to overrate.

promenade. tener hambre, to be hungry.
propio, -a, proper. tener sed, to be thirsty.
cierto, certain. hecho, done, made.
ar | A ner { to call on, to ahora, now.
venir pay a visit. junto, -a, together.
quejarse, to complain. acaso, perhaps.

Reading Exercise. 26.

Nada lisonjea mds el orgullo de los hombres que la con-
fianza de los grandes. V. tiene algunos libros. No he visto
4 nadie en casa de mi amigo. ¢Ha venido alguno? Nadie
ha venido. He visto 4 su hermano cada dia. Trabajamos
todos juntos y cada uno de por st (by himself). El mismo
hombre me ha dado el dinero. Yo mismo lo he hecho. Hasta
ahora nadie ha venido. Nadie en esta ciudad conoce 4 mi
hermano. Ninguno esté cierto de la hora de su muerte.
Ninguno debe (shall) presumir de sus propias fuerzas. Quien-
quiera que lo diga, se equivoca (he is mistaken). El uno
decia (said) que si (yes), el otro que no*). Cada seis meses
vendré (I shall come) 4 ver 4 V. De todos los (those) que
tratan conmigo (with me), g¢hay acaso uno (alguno) que tenga
motivo de quejarse? Cualquiera cosa que él haga (may do),
no puede (can) acertar en nada. Fulano y zutano han pre-
guntado por V. Todos hablan de ello (it), como si fuera
cierto. Cualquiera comida es bueno para quien (him who)
tiene hambre. Quienquiera que sea, ha hecho. mal en decirlo
(to say so). ¢Tiene V. otro caballo?

*) After decir, to say, the affirmative and negative particles
Si and No are pleonastically preceded by que. (As in French.]
5*
Lesson 19.

68

Traduccion. 27.

T have no other book. He has given me nothing. We
have some good books and some fine engravings. Nobody
has done it (eso). I have not seen anything. Whoever says
so (lo), I do not believe (creo) it. My brother Charles has
not done it, another one has done it. Has anybody asked
for (por) me? No, Sir, nobody has asked for you. I have
seen the same lady. Every one speaks (habla) for himself
(st mismo). You (ti) have done it yourself. I do not know
(conozco) anybody in this town. The one is hungry, the
other is thirsty, but neither (of them) has money. I shall
come every third day to call on you. Does Mr. So and 8o
live here? (gvive agut?) He who is hungry, says that all food
is good. Both have done it. I think that another one has
done it. Give (2. Plur.) me some books, Nobody knows
(sabe) it, because (porque) I (did not tell any one) have not
told it to anybody.

Conversacion.

éQuién (who) lo sabe?
éQuién lo ha hecho?

éQué han dicho?

éCudndo vendré V. & ver 4
mi padre?
é¢Ha venido alguien?

éA quién lo ha dicho V.?
éQuién lo ho creido (believed) ?
éNo os verdad?

éTiene V, otro sombrero?

éHa visto V. (4) alguno en el
paseo?

éQuién ha visto 4 mi amo
(master) ?

éHa visto V. 4 alguna de
aquellas sefioras?

Nadie lo sabe.

Ninguno lo ha hecho, or No
lo ha hecho ninguno.

El uno dijo que si, el otro que
no.

Vendré cada cinco dias.

Si, Sefior, fulano y zutano han
preguntado por V.

A nadie lo he dicho.

Tu mismo lo has creido.

No, Sefior, quienquiera que lo
diga, no es verdad.

No, Sefiora, no tengo otro.

No he visto 4 ninguno.

Nadie le ha visto.

A decir verdad (to speak truth),
no he visto 4 ninguna.

Nineteenth Lesson. Leccion décima nona.

On the Adjective. — Del Adjetivo.

Rule. The Spanish Adjective agrees with the word
which it qualifies, in gender and number.
On the Adjective. » 69

§ 1. The adjectives ending in 0 change this vowel
into @ for the feminine gender, as:
hermoso, beautiful, fem. hermosa.
bueno, good, >» buena.

Note. The very limited number of adjectives ending in ete
and ote follow the same rule; as:

regordete, smart, robust — regordcta.
altote, very high — altota..

§ 2. Adjectives not ending in 0, hence alsothose ending
in a consonant (1, , 7, s, 2), or in one of the vowels
a, e, 2, have only one termination for both genders. Ex.:

un hombre cortés, a polite man.
una mujer cortés, a polite woman.
un hombre grave, a serious man.
una materia grave, a serious matter.
un objeto baladé, a trivial object.
una cosa baladé, a trivial thing.

Exceptions.

Some words, being used both as substantives and
adjectives, take ain the feminine in either capacity, as:
holgazan, holgazana, idle and idler; mamanton, maman-

tona, sucking and nursling.

Besides, the adjectives denoting nationality, as:

frances, French, fem. francesa.
andaluz, Andalusian, » andaluza.
aleman, German, »  alemana.
ingles, English, »  tnglesa, etc.

Those terminating in tt, like persa, Persian, are alike
in both genders.

§ 3. Formation of the plural of the adjectives.

All adjectives ending in an wnaccented vowel. form
their plural by adding s, as:

bueno, Plur. buenos.
buena, >» buenas.
francesa, »  francesas.

Adjectives terminating in an aecenied. vowel or in a
consonant add es, as:

ruin, bad, wicked, plur. ruines.
baladt, trifling, »  baladtes.

espanol, Spanish, » ‘ espanoles.
70 : Lesson 19,

Note. We need hardly add that the orthographical rules
given Less. 2 should also be observed with the adjectives, as:
feliz, happy, plur. felices, etc.

§ 4. The adjectives ,alguno, ninguno, bueno, malo,
grande, and santo, the numerals uno, primero, tercero,
postrero, and ciento undergo a slight variation before
masculine substantives in the singular; santo and grande
dropping the last syllable, the others the final vowel.

Thus: buen hombre for bueno hombre,

mal caballero , malo caballero,
algun libro,

gran caballo,

ningun amigo etc.

Note. It may be observed that before the names Domingo,
Tomas, Tomé, and Toribio the adj. santo does not drop the last
syllable; thus: Santo Domingo, St. Dominicus*). With grande
the apocope™*) is rather arbitrary, and before substantives begin-
ning with vowels the full form is preferable, as: grande alma
(soul); grande amigo. Before feminine nouns, the omission of the
last syllable is very rare, except with grande. Thus one had
better say: la primera cosa, the first thing, than la primer cosa.

§ 5. Respecting the position of the adjectives, we
give the following rules:

1) If the adjective is shorter than the Substantive, it
commonly precedes, thus:

El buen hermano, the good brother.
El mal vino, the bad wine.

NB. The full forms, bueno, malo etc., however, follow the
noun.

2) After the substantive are placed [as in French]:
Adjectives denoting nationality, as:

La lengua castellana, the Spanish language.

La musica alemana, the German music.
3) The participles, as:

Una hija amada, a beloved daughter, ‘

4) Adjectives denoting colour, shape, taste, smell etc., as:

Un paiuelo blanco, a white pocket-handkerchief.
Una mesa cuadrada, a square table.

*) However: la isla de San-Tomas, the island of St. Th.
The pupil is requested to remember the following ‘locus memo-
rialis’: Santo Tomas nunca estaba en San-Tomas, St. Thomas was
never in St. Thomas.

**) i. e. the omission of the final de.
On the Adjective. val

NB. Grande, great, large, when implying size, follows; in
every other meaning (a great mind etc.) it precedes; thus:

una casa grande, a large house; ‘

una gran casa, a noble family; a house of great importance.

§ 6. An adjective qualifying two substantives must
be plural; thus:

El amo y el criado estén contentos.

The master and the “servant are contented.

Ei ama y la criada estdn contentas.

The mistress and the servant-maid are contented.

If the substantives are different_of genders, the ad-
jective is put in the plural masculine, provided the nouns
denote persons or living beings. Thus:

Los hombres y las mujeres fueron pequefios.
The men and women were small.

If, on the contrary, things are spoken of, the gender
of the Jast substantive prevails, thus:

Ojos y orejas abiertas, eyes and ears open, — whereas:
Orejas y ojos abiertos, ears and eyes open.

§ 7. To a noun in the plural are added several
adjectives in the singular, if each adjective would have,
when alone, the noun in the singular with it:

Las lenguas latina y griega.
The Latin and the Greek languages.

Los cantos tercero y cuarto.
The third and fourth. hymn.

Words.
La costumbre, the custom, el difunto, the dead (man), the
manner, late ....
el temor, the fear. el pintor, the painter.
el vasallo, the vassal. el perro, the dog.
el drden, the order. la hazana, the heroic deed.
la érden, the command. Burdéos, Bordeaux.
el discipulo, the pupil, scholar. glorioso, illustrious.
el autor, the author. amable, amiable.
la suerte, the fate. casado, -a, married.
la materia, the matter. feo, -a, ugly.
la cancion, the song. cuantioso, -a, considerable.
el alma, (f.), the soul. VaNO, -a, Vain.
la injuria, the offence. serio, -@, serious.
la hacienda, the estate, the alegre, merry.
fortune. trabajador, -a, laborious, diligent.

el caudal, the capital, fund. desordenado, -a, disorderly.
72 Lesson 19.

hdbil, able, clever. flucttian, they fluctuate.
célebre, famous, renowned. crid, (8. 8. Def.), (he) created,
honrado, -a, honoured. mantiene, maintains.
sonoro, -a, sonorous. perdona, pardons.
corrompen, they corrupt, they estudia, studies.

taint. aborrecido, detested, abhorred.

Reading Exercise. 28.

Una mujer hermosa, virtuosa y rica se ha casado con un
hombre pequefio, viejo y feo. Las malas compafiias corrompen
las buenas costumbres. Los hombres fluctuan siempre entre
falsas esperanzas y vanos temores. Un hombre malo es siempre
aborrecido. Un buen rey hace sus vasallos felices. El primer
hombre que Dios crié fué Adan, y la primera mujer fué Eva.
Las espafiolas son serias y las francesas alegres y amables.
Una mujer holgazana es siempre desordenada, pero una mujer
trabajadora mantiene en érden su casa. El habil maestro
tiene discipulos aplicados. Don) Miguel de Cervantes fué
el célebre autor de D. Quijote: de la Mancha. ¢Qué quiere
V. hacer con esos objetos baladies? La suerte de un hombre
es una materia muy grave. Las canciones andaluzas son muy
agradables. Una grande alma perdona facilmente (easily)
una injuria. El «Teatro Grande» de Burdeos es gran teatro.
Mi hermano estudia las lenguas francesa y alemana. Lope
de Vega fué un gran poeta. San Pablo (Paul) y Santo Tomas
han honrado la-iglesia catdlica. Una mujer regordeta no es
hermosa. j;Tenga V. las orejas y los ojos abiertos! La hacienda
y los caudales del defunto eran considerables.

Atdwaps py _
Traduccion. 29. ~

This man was poor but virtuous. (A) bad company is
a great evil (mal). False fears and vain hopes are the lot
of (the) man. Happy subjects love their king. Cervantes
was a great poet, and Murillo a celebrated painter. The
Germans are serious, and the French are merry. This idle
girl keeps (tr. has) no order in her things. Polite people
(tr. men) are very agreeable. A bad king is the misfortune.
of his subjects. Cesar (César) was a great man. You live
(vive) in a large house. One must (se debe) admire (admirar)
the manners of this people. This gentleman has very amiable
children (hijos). He studies (estudia) the history of the se-
cond Punic (piémica) and of the third Silesian war (.... de
Silesia). Our house is large, but our garden is small. A
serious man does not speak of such (tan) trifling things.
One must (se deben) admire the glorious deeds of this prince.
Men and women are small in that country. The books and
letters on the table (mesa) were open. I have at home (en
casa) a big dog and a little bitch (perra). The first man
Degrees of Comparison.

13

was a sinner (pecador), The Spanish and Italian languages
are very melodious (transl. the languages Spanish [fem. sing.]

and Italian [fem. sing.] are...

s

Conversacion.

éCoémo es la casa?

éQuién perdona facilmente
una injuria?

éCudles lenguas estudia su
hermano de V.?

éCudles canciones son muy
agradables?

¢éCudles Santos han honrado
la iglesia catdlica?

éQué sabe V. (do you know,
can you) decirme (tell me)
de Cervantes y Murillo?

éCémo se deben tratar (must
be treated) asuntos (mat-
ters) graves?

éCémo es la situacion de ese
hombre?

éCudl vestido tiene el jéven
(young man, youth)?

éQué sombrero tiene V.?

éCudles causas (law-suits) de-
fiende (defends) un abogado
recto (honest)?

La casa es muy grande,
Una grande alma.

Estudia las lenguas francesa y
alemana.
Las canciones andaluzas.

San Pablo y Santo Tomas.

Cervantes fué el célebre autor
de D. Quijote, y Murillo fué
un gran pintor.

Con dnimo sosegado | (quiet,
calm).

Su situacion es muy lastimosa.

Tiene su vestido azul (blue) y
su chaleco (waistcoat) blanco.

Tengo un sombrero ingles.

Un abogado recto defiende
siempre las causas justas.

Twentieth Lesson. lLeccion vigésima.

Degrees of Comparison. — Los grados del adjetivo.

§ 1. The comparison of Spanish adjectives is some-
what analogous to the English. The comparative degree
(Comparativo) is formed by the word mds (more), and
‘the superlative (Superlativo) by el mds, fem. la mas (the

most). Examples:
Compar. Superl.
hermoso, -a, mds hermoso, -a, el mas hermoso \ the most
beautiful; more beautiful; f. la mds lonnoeal beautiful.

A negative comparison is effected in a similar way
by the adverb ménos (less), as:
74 Lesson 20.

Compar. Superl.
poblado, -a, ménos poblado, -a, el ménos ae the least
populous; less populous, not f. Ja ménos poblada | populous,
so populous:

§ 2. Again, there is a Superlativo absoluto, by which
a high degree is expressed. It is formed by the addition
of the syllable isémo for the masculine and ¢sima for the
feminine to the positive degree of the adjective, which
then drops its final vowel, as:

docto, learned; Superl. abs. doctésimo, very learned.
santo, saint, holy; » »  santisimo, very holy.

Note. Some adjectives undergo a slight alteration in the
formation of the Superlativo absoluto. They are:

a) The adjectives ending in -io0, which drop the -? when
adding the syllable isimo; thus: amplio, wide, Superl. abs.
amplisimo.

Except: agrio, sour, frio, cold, and pio, pious, which form
agriisimo, fritsimo, pitsimo.

b) The adjectives in -ble change this termination into
-bilisimo, as: amable, amiable, Sup. abs. amabilisimo.

c) Those in -iente and -ierto drop the i before e, as:
ardiente, glowing — ardentisimo; cierto, certain — certtsimo.

d) The following adjectives form the Superl. abs. from
the Latin form, as:

acre, sharp — acérrimo.

amigo, friendly — amicisimo.

antiguo, old — antiquisimo.

dspero, rough — aspérrimo, also asperisimo.
benéfico, beneficent — beneficentisimo.
benévolo, benevolent — benevolentisimo.
bueno, good — bonisimo.

célebre, famous — celebérrimo.

fiel, faithful — fidelisimo.

fuerte, strong — fortisimo.

integro, upright — integérrimo.

libre, free — libérrimo.

magnifico, magnificent — magnificentisimo.
misero, miserable — misérrimo.
munifico, liberal — munificentisimo.
noble, noble — nobilisimo. —

nuevo, new — novisimo.

pobre, poor — paupérrimo.

sagrado, hallowed — sacratisimo.
salubre, healthy — salubérrimo.

sabio, wise — sapientisimo.
Degrees of Comparison. q5

é) The adjectives ending in -co and -go change these
terminations into guisimo and guisimo, to avoid the alteration
which the sound of ¢ and g would undergo before i; thus:
rico, rich — riguisimo; vago, empty — vaguisimo.

f) The adjectives terminating in i, J, n, r, as: turqut,
blue; paternal, paternal; ruin, wicked, bad; secular, secular,
cannot take the syllable isimo. The Superl. absol. is, there-
fore, formed by putting the adverb muy, very, before the ad-

jective; thus: muy paternal etc.

Note.

Thus:

The Superl. absol. of every adjective may be formed

by putting muy before the positive. Very faithful is fide-

lisimo or muy fiel; very learned muy docto or doctisimo.

§ 3. The following adjectives have irregular degrees
of comparison:

Superl. rel. Superl. absol.
e . la). dptimo, -d, \ver
ea a, mejor, better. at mary the Aantal, eee
el pesimo
malo, -a, bad.| peor, worse. la \ pet ie alee } he
el maximo
grande*), | mayor, mayor, the .
great. greater. | greatest. prandisino | great.
pequeno, -a, |menor, less, a menor, the | minimo, very
little, small.| smaller. least, little,
smallest. very small.
él). F Z
bajo, -a, low.| inferior, low-| 7 \ inferior, infimo, very low.
er, inferior. the lowest.
alto, -a, high. | superior, o | superior, at ia | very
higher. the highest. high.
Adjectives and adverbs.
poco, little,|ménos, less. | los ménos, least | pogutsimo, very
few. (people etc.).| little.
mucho, més, more. |los mds, most | muchisimo, very
mauch, (people ete.). | much.
many.

 

 

*) When grande implies size, its degrees of comparison are

regular.
%6 Lesson 20.

Note. Besides these irregular degrees of comparison, the
regular forms with mds, more, and muy very (for the Sup.
absol.) are in use. The difference is as follows:

Mejor and peor are more frequent than mds bueno and
mds malo. Mayor means more magnificent, more considerable,
and menor denotes the contrary of mayor. Besides, mayor
signifies elder, and menor means younger, like the Latin
«major natu» and «minor natu». — Superior, supremo and
inferior, infimo denote by preference rank, sometimes also
the situation of a place or a thing. — The regular Sup. abs.
grandisimo is more in use than mdxzimo. — Mas and menos
are adjectives and adverbs. Whep used as adjectives, they
may, of course, take the definite article; thus las mds noches,
most nights etc. Lo mds and lo ménos are neuter and mean
the most, the least (f. i. lo ménos que V. puede hacer etc., the
least you can do etc.).

§ 4. Than, after a comparative, is translated in
various ways, Viz.:

a) If “than” is followed by a substantive, a pronoun,
or another adjective, it is rendered by que, as:

Tu primo es mds rico que mi hermano.
Your cousin is richer than my brother.
Tu primo es mas rico que yo.

Your cousin is richer than I.

Ese hombre es mds desdichado que mato.
That man is more unhappy than wicked.

b) If “than” is followed by a verb, it is rendered by
de to que, as:

He is more clever than he seems (i. e. to be).
Es mds diestro de lo que parece.

§ 5. As — as = tan — como. Ex.:
Tan elocuente como Ciceron.
But if the comparison concerns quantity, number etc.,
as — as is expressed by tanto, -a — cuanto, -a or tanto, -a
— como, as:

Tiene tanta hacienda cuanta (como) tenia su vadre
He has as much wealth as his father had. si
Esta traduccion tiene tantas falias como las otras.
This translation has as many faults ag the others,

Note. It must be distinctly understood that tanto and cuanto
are adjectives and therefore agree with their respective substan- ©
tives in gender and number, as in the above sentences. Instead
Degrees of Comparison. G7

of cuanto, a, como is used if no verb follows, as in the second
instance. With the verb following (see the first sentence cuanta
tenia su padre), cuanto is preferable, though como is admissible too.
 § 6. If an accessory sentence.is introduced by “that”,
this conjunction is rendered by que, as:
He has so many books, that he cannot read them all.
Tiene tantos libros que no los puede leer todos.

Words.
La firmeza, the firmness. décil, obedient,
el capitan, the captain. cuerdo, -a,

la prudencia, the prudence. _prudente, } reasonable, prudent.

el valor, the bravery, valour. sabroso, -a, savoury, delicious.

el obispo, the bishop. dulce, sweet.

la isla, the -island. bajo, -a, low.

la almendra, the almond. sincero, -d, sincere.

la cerveza, the beer. barato, -a, cheap.

la noticia, the news. obrar, to work, to deal.

el pariente, the relation. conozco, I know.

floreciente, flourishing. vienen, they come.

cansado, -a, tired. contar, to count, to number, to
valiente, brave. tell (a story etc.).

Reading Exercise. 30.

La rosa es hermosisima. Pedro esté muy cansado. El
general es mds valienté que su hermano. Este nifio es ménos
décil que prudente. El perro es tan fiel como valiente. V.
no es tan cuerdo como su hermana. Yo no tengo tanto di-
nero, tanta firmeza y tantos amigos como V. El capitan obra
con tanta prudencia como valor. La madre de mi amigo es
_la mujer mds virtuosa que yo conozco. V. tiene un criado
fidelisimo. Estamos aqui en un lugar salubérrimo. El piisimo
obispo ha muerto. Mi reloj es mejor que el tuyo, pero el
(that) del doctor es el mejor de todos. Jorje tiene buen vino,
Francisco lo*) tiene mejor, pero José es guien*) tiene el mejor
vino. Esta isla es mds grande que aquella. Mi primo esta
en la clase superior, y mi hermano en la clase inferior. Lag
frutas mds sabrosas se hallan en la Andalucia baja. Mi vecino
es un hombre integérrimo. La Gronlanda es un pais friisimo.
Las almendras son dulces, pero el azucar es mds dulce. Mi
primo es el hombre mas sincero del mundo, y mi prima es la
mujer mds hermosa de la ciudad. Esta cerveza es mds cara

*) Some, referring to a preceding substantive, and followed
by an adjective, is rendered by the accus. of the personal pro-
noun; thus: lo tiene mejor, has some better (i. e. wine). — The
next sentence: José es quien tiene el mejor, means: J. has the best,
literally: is he who has the best.
78 Lesson 20.

que el vino, pero es malisima. Las pérdidas por (by) mar
son mas considerables que por tierra. Las manufacturas
inglesas son mas baratas que las (those) que vienen de Francia.
El comercio de Sevilla es ménos floreciente que el (that) de
Cadiz. Europa es la parte mas pequefia del mundo, y Asia
la mds grande.

Traduccion. 31.

This rose is more beautiful than that; it is the most
beautiful of all my flowers. My book is very old; it is older
than thine (el tuyo). Mrs. (la Sefora) Muntafiola is very
amiable; she is the most amiable lady (that) I know. This
news is quite certain (Sup. abs.). Murillo was a very celeb-
rated Spanish painter. That bishop was very beneficent; now
(ahora) he is very poor. Is your (tu) brother older or younger
than you (#%)? He is taller than I, but he is younger. A
very rich man is not always a very happy man. This fruit
is more sweet than sour. This translation is more difficult
than it seems. The captain was as brave as generous. He
has so many relations that he cannot count them all. That
is the richest man of the town. The island of Madeira is
finer than the island of Mallorca. Galicia is the coldest pro-
vince of Spain, [it] is a very cold country. Are you in the
upper or in the lower class? This wine is very bad; the
beer is better. We were all very tired, but my sister was
the most tired of all. Why are you (t%) not so obedient as
your (tu) brother? ‘You would have been more reasonable,
if you had read this beautiful book. Do you know a fruit
which is better.tasting than this? That book had as many
mistakes as the other. God is the Supreme Being (Ser).

Conversacion.

éComo fué el comercio de esta Fué muy floreciente.
ciudad ?

éEs fuerte tu hermano? Si, es un hombre fortisimo.

éQuién ha muerto ayer? El piisimo obispo.

Como era el capitan? Era tan valiente como sincero.

éHs pequefia esta casa? Al contrario, es mas grande de
lo que parece.

éTiene V. tantos criados Yo tengo mas.

cuantos tenia su padre?

éEs cierta esta noticia? Si, Sefior, es certisima,

éCual camino es muy dspero? El camino de la virtud es aspér- :
rimo. a

éComo es la almendra? Ks duleisima, pero ménog dulce |

que el azticar.
On the regular Verb. q9

éTiene V. buenas almendras? Las (see the Note, p. 77) tengo
buenas, pero mi vecino es
quien las tiene mejores.
éQuién es Murillo? Murillo es un celebérrimo pin-
: tor espafiol.
éConoce V. 4 un hombre sin- Conozco 4 un hombre muy sin-
cero? cero, conozco 4 V.

Twenty-first Lesson. Leccion vigésima
prima.

On the regular Verb. — Verbos regulares.

By the termination of the infinitive mood we dis-
tinguish three different forms of conjugation, viz.:

The first conjugation, with the infinitive mood ending
in ar, as: amar, to love.

The second conjugation, with the infinitive ending
in er, as: barrer, to sweep.

The third conjugation, terminating in é7, as: batir,
to beat. /

Note. The vowel preceding the final r is characteristic

of the whole conjugation. The inflections after these charac-
teristic vowels are nearly alike in all three conjugations.

I. Conjug. Il. Conjug. | IL. Conjug.
Infin. Infin. Infin.
Am-ar, to love. || Barr-er, to sweep. | Bat-ir, to beat.
(Charact. vowel a.) | (Charact. vowel e.) | (Charact. vowel i.)

Indicativo.
Presente.

Yo am-o, I love. | Barr-o, I sweep. Bat-o, I beat.
tt —as, thou lovest. | —es, thou sweepest. , —es, thou beatest.
él —a, he loves. —e, he sweeps. —e, he beats.
nosotros —amos, —emos, we sweep. | —-tmos, we beat.

we love.
vosotros —dais, —eis, you sweep. | —és, you beat.

you love.
ellos —an, —en, they sweep. | —en, they beat.

they love.
80

Amaba, I loved.
—abas, thou lovedst.
—aba, he loved.

—dbamos,we loved.
—abais, you loved.
—aban, they loved.

Amé, I loved.
—aste, thou lovedst.
—6, he loved.

—amos, we loved.
—asteis, you loved.
—aron, they loved.

Amaré, I shall
love.

—ards, thou wilt
love.

—ard, he will love.

—aremos, we shall,
love.

—areis, you will
love.

—ardn, they will
love.

Amaria, I should
love.

—arias, thou
wouldst love.
—aria, he would
love.

—ariamos, we
should love.

Lesson 21.

Inperfecto.
Barria, I swept.
—ias, thou sweptest.
—ia, he swept.

—iamos, we swept.
—iais, you swept.
— ian, they swept.

Definido.

Barri, I swept. -
—iste, thou sweptest.
—ié, he swept.
—imos, we swept.
—isteis, you swept.
—ieron, they swept.

Futuro.

Barreré, I shall
sweep.
—erds, thou wilt
sweep.
—erd, he will
sweep.
—eremos, we shall
sweep.
—ereis, you will
sweep.
—erdn, they will
sweep.

 

Condicional.

| Barreria, I should |
sweep.

—erias, thou
wouldst sweep.

| —eria, he would

sweep.

—eriamos, we
should sweep.

 

Batia, I beat.
—ias, thou beatest.

—ia, he beat.

—iamos, we beat.
—iais, you beat.
—ian, they beat.

Bati, I beat.
—iste, thou beatest,
—ié, he beat.

—imos, we beat.
—isteis, you beat,
-—ieron, they beat.

Batiré, T shall beat.

—irds, thou wilt
beat.
—ira, he will beat.

—iremos, we shall
beat.

—itrets, you will
beat.

—irdm, they will
beat.

Batiria, I should
beat.
—irias, thou
wouldst beat,
—iria, he would
beat.

—triamos, we
should beat. .

—ariais, you would | —eriais, you would | —érias, you would

love.

sweep.

beat.

—arian, they would | —erian, they would | —irian, they would

love.

sweep. |

beat. .
Ama, love (thou)!
amad, love (you)!

Ame V.*), love!
(polite form.)

No ames,*), do (thou)
not love!

No ameis*) do (you)
not love!

No ame ¥V.*), do not
love! (pol. form.)

Ame, I love.
—es, thou love.
—e**), he love.

—emos, we love.
—eis, you love.
—en, they love.

Amase, if I loved.

—ases, if thou
lovedst.

—ase, if he loved.
—dsemos, if we
loved.
—aseis, if you
loved.
—asen, if they
loved.

 

On the regular Verb.

Im perativo.

Barre, sweep (thou)!
barred, sweep (you)!

Barra V.*), sweep!
(pol. form.)

Negatively.

No barras, do (thou)
not sweep!

No barrais, do (you)
not sweep!

No barra V., donot
sweep! (pol. form.)

Subjuntivo.
Presente.

Barra, I sweep.
—as, thou sweep.
—a, he sweep.

—amos, we sweep.
—dis, you sweep.
—an, they sweep.

Imperfecto.

Barriese, if I
! 7 swept.
—teses, if thou
sweptst.
—iese, if he
swept.
—iésemos, if we
swept.
—ieseis, if you
swept.
—iesen, if they

 

swept.

 

 

81

Bate, beat (thou)!
batid, beat (you)!

Bata V.*), beat!
(pol. form.)

No batas, do (thou)
not beat!

No batais, do (thou)
not beat!

No bata V., do not
beat! (pol. form.)

Bata, T beat.
—as, thou beat.
—a, he beat.

—amos, we beat.
—ais, you beat.
—an, they beat.

Batiese, if I beat.

—ieses, if thou
beatst.
—iese, if he beat.

—iésemos, if we
beat.

—ieseis, if you
beat.

—iesen, if they
beat.

*) These forms are taken from ane present of the subjunctive
mood (see the following note).
*#) The 3rd pers. sing. of the pres. subj. is of great impor-
tance, because used with V., it replaces the imperative of the

polite form, thus:

a Spanish, Grammar.

Ame V.! (Do) love! Barra V.! (Do) sweep!
Bata V.! (Do) beat!

The difference from the affirmative and
whole construction would be: (Quiero que) V. ame. The dif-
ference from the affirmative and interrogative form with which

#6
82

Amare, if I shall
love.
—ares, if thou
wilt love.
—are, if he will
love.
—dremos, if we
shall love.
—areis, if you
will love.
—aren, if they
will love.

Amara, if I should
love.
—aras, if thou
wouldst love.
—ara, if he would
love.
—dramos, if we
should love.
—arais, if you
would love.
—aran, if they
would love.

Amando, loving.

Amado, loved.

 

Lesson 21.

Futuro.
Barriere, if I shall
sweep.
—ieres, if thou
wilt sweep.

.—iere, if he will

sweep.
—iéremos, if we
shall sweep.
—iereis, if you
will sweep.
—ieren, if they
will sweep.

Condicional.
Barriera, if should
sweep.
—ieras, if thou
wouldst sweep.
—iera, if he
would sweep.
—iéramos, if we
should sweep.
—ierais, if you
would sweep.
—ieran, if they
would sweep.

» Gerundo.
Barriendo, sweep-
ing.

Participio.

| Barrido, swept.

 

Batiere, if I shall
beat.
—ieres, if thou
wilt beat.
—iere, if he will
beat,
—iéremos, if we
shall beat.
—iereis, if you
will beat.
—ieren, if they
will beat.

Batiera, if T should
beat.
—ieras, if thou
wouldst beat.
—iera, if he
would beat.
—iéramos, if we
should beat.
—ierais, if you
would beat.
—ieran, if they
would beat.

Batiendo, beating.

| Batido, beaten.

the so-called imperative of the polite form is easily confounded,
will be seen best in the following table:

| IT. Conjug.
You sweep, V. barre.

I. Conjug.

You love, V. ama.
Do you love? gAma V.?
Do love! ; Ame V.!f

IIL, Conjug.

You beat, V. bate.
Do you beat? gBate V.?
Do beat! ; Bata V.!

Do you sweep? ¢ Barre V.?
Do sweep! ; Barra V.!
On the regular Verb. 83

Compound Tenses. Tiempos compuestos.

Indicativo.

Perfecto indefinido.
He I have
has } amado, barrido, batido, thou hast; loved, swept, beaten,
ha he has é
ete. ete.

Pluscuamperfecto.
Habia ee I had
alive | ee A thom: hodst | yes swept,
habia. | atido, eho: eaten,
etc.

Perfecto anterior.
Hube amado, barrido, batido, I had loved, swept, beaten,
etc. etc.

Futuro perfecto.
Habré amado, barrido, batido, I shall have loved, swept,

beaten.
Condicional perfecto.
Habria amado, barrido, I should have loved, swept,
batido, beaten.
Subjuntivo.
Perfecto indefinido.
Haya amado, barrido, that Ihave loved, swept,
batido, beaten.
Pluscuamperfecto.
Hubiese amado, barrido, if I had loved, swept,
batido, beaten.
Futuro.
Hubiere amado, barrido, if I shall have loved, swept,
batido, beaten.
Condicional.
Hubiera amado, barrido, that I should have loved,
batido, swept, beaten.

By way of practice the pupil should conjugate the
following regular verbs:
After the first Conjugation.

Arreglar, to order, put in order. criar, to create, breed.
bajar, to descend. emplear, to apply.
67
84 Lesson ‘21.

enganar, to deceive. Uevar, to carry.
fumar, to smoke. olvidar, to forget. Ad
gastar, to spend. representar, to exhibit.
dlustrar, to illumine. trabajar, to work.
llegar, to arrive. viajar, to travel.

After the second Conjugation.
Aprender, to learn. emprender, to undertake.
comer, to eat. esconder, to conceal.
conceder, to concede, grant. sorprender, to surprise.

deber, to be obliged, to be vender, to sell.
indebted to.

After the third Conjugation,

Acudir, to hasten to. percibir, to penetrate, look

exigir, to demand. subir, to ascend. (through.

hundir, to sink (trans.). vivir, to live, dwell.
Observations.

Although the use of the tenses will be taught in the
Second Part, we think it desirable to give ‘here a few hints
on those tenses which offer the greatest difficulties to the
beginner.

1) In conditional clauses beginning with ‘if’, the Spaniard
uses the Imperfecto of the subjunctive or the Condicional of
the same mood, and the principal sentence follows (or precedes)
with the Condicional of the indicative mood, thus:

Imperf. Subj. Cond. Indic.
Sisamases (or amaras) los buenos libros, serias mis
instruido.

If you loved good books, you would be more instructed. |
Condit. Subj. Impf. Subj.
Si las riquezas hubieran (or hubiesen) podido saciar
Condit. Ind.
mis deseos, las habria amado.
If riches could have satisfied my wishes, I should have
loved them.

2) In exelamations expressing desire ete., the imperfecto
of the subjunctive is used as well as the Condicional of the
same mood, as:

iOjalad eso fuera (or fuese) asi!

Would to God that (it) were so!

3) After to tell, to say, to think, and similar verbs. the
Condicional of the indicative is used, if the principal sentence
is affirmative. If, on the contrary, the principal sentence ig
negative, interrogative, or expresses doubt, the Condicional or
On the regular Verb. 85

the Imperfecto of the subjunctive should be employed in the
accessory sentence, thus:
He said (had said) that he would come.
Cond. Ind.
Decia (dijo) (habia dicho) que vendria.
I did not think that they would overtake us.
Cond. Subj. Impf. Subj.
No creia que nos alcanzaran or alcanzasen.

4) After the verbs “to be willing, to desire, to wish, to
pretend” etc., the Condicional of the Indicative should never
be used; the Condicional of the subjunctive or the Imperfecto
of the same mood are alone admissible, as:

I wished he would come.
Queria que viniera or viniese (but never vendria).

5) The Futuro of the subjunctive refers to a Futuro or
Imperativo in the principal sentence, as:

You will come if you can (properly: if you will be able
to come).
Vendrds si pudieres (or puedes, pres.).

This is commonly the case, if the accessory sentence is
introduced by “he who”, ,,that which”, ,,all that”, where in
English, too, the Future might be used instead of the Pre-
sent, as: ,

Choose of these places that which pleases you best.
Elige de estos puestos el que més te agradare (or agrade

pres. subj.).
Words.

Los estudios, the studies. estudiar, to study.
el jéven, the young man, creer, to believe, to think.

youth. comprender, to understand.
da escoba, the broom. meter, to put.
la capa, the cloak. temer, to fear.
el negocio, the business. ofender, to offend.
el negociante, lea enchant. partir, to depar® to set out.
el comerciante,J- trabajar, to work.
piadoso, -a, pious. llegar, to arrive.
diligente, diligent. dicho, said (pp.).

Reading Exercise. 32.

éQué busca V.? Yo busco mi sombrero, y estos nifios
buscan sus libros. Amamos 4 nuestros padres (parents) y
parientes (relations). Hablabas siempre de tus flores y pajaros.
Este rey ama 4 su pueblo. Amaremos siempre 4 los que
(those who) son virtuosos. Hablaré mafiana al médico. Ha-
86 Lesson 21,

blarias mas de tus estudios, si fueses mas diligente. 4Cree
V. que nuestro vecino Hegue hoy? Creo que Ilegaré mafiana.
¢Ha comprendido V. lo que he dicho? No lo he comprendido
todo. El criado metié la escoba sobre la mesa, cuando habia
acabado (done) de barrer el cuarto. ¢Vendera V. sus perros?
Venderé mis caballos, pero no venderé mis perros. Venderia
mi capa, si no temiese ofender 4 mi madre. Estos negociantes
no venderian sus casas, si hubiesen hecho (done) mejores
negocios. ¢A quién ha vendido V. sus libros? ¢Cuando
partira su padre de V. para Madrid? Partird esta tarde.
éDesde (since) cudndo vive V. en esta casa? Desde siete %
(inst. of 6, or; see the Conjunctions) ocho dias. ¢Cudndo ha
recibido V. su dinero? Recibi mi dinero ayer.

Traduccion. 33.

Will you (tit) look for (tr. search) my books and pens?
I should look for them (los), if I had more time. We zalways
ispeak of our friends. Shall you (V.) speak to the physician
to-morrow? I should speak to the physician to-day, if he
were here. The good king always loved his (su) people. Do
you understand (entiende V.) the book which I have given
(dado) you? I have understood all*) very well (muy bien).
The footman has put the hat on the table. If you (V.) were
more diligent, you would oftener speak of your studies. God
loves those who-are pious and virtuous. My friend always
spoke of his horses and dogs. I do not think that the Spanish
merchant has (Subj.) already (ya) arrived. The young man
studied the whole day. I should depart this afternoon, if
the weather were not so bad. Do you think (that) you will
set out to-day? I should depart at once (desde luego), if I
had received my money. We have been living for three
months in this house. The footman has not swept the room
to-day.

Conversacion.
éAma V. 4 mi hermano? Amo mucho 4-su hermano de V.
éA quién arfla Dios? Dios ama al que (him who) hace

bien 4 los desdichados.
éQué buscaba su criado de V.? Buscaba mi sombrero y mis
guantes,
é¢Ha tomado V. mi corta- No he tomado nada.
plumas (penknife)?

éHablaré V. hoy al rey? He hablado ayer al rey y dla.
reina.

éTrabajara V. esta tarde? No trabajaré, porque no tengo
tiempo.

*) (everything.)
On the regular Verb.

éPor qué llora (cries, weeps)
este nifio?
2Vive aqui su tio de V.?

éCree V. que el criado llegue
(see Less. 22, 2) pronto
(soon) ?

éQué ha vendido su amigo
de V.?

éDesde cudndo vive V. en
esta calle?

éHa recibido V. una carta
de Sevilla?

éDonde viven las hijas desu
tia?

87

Porque no tiene nada que (to)
comer (eat).

No, Sefior, vive en casa (at)
de Don Casimiro Verguero
(Mr. Vs).

No creo que llegue hoy.

Ha vendido sus caballos y sus
perros.
Desde afio y medio.

Aun (yet) no he recibido nada.
Viven en una quinta (country-

house, cottage) muy léjos (far)
de la ciudad.

Reading Exercise.

El camello y la pulga.

En una larga jornada

Un camello muy cargado
Exclamdé ya fatigado:

iOh, qué carga tan pesada!
Dofia Pulga, que montada
Iba sobre él, al instante
Se apea, y dice arrogante:
iDel peso te libro yo!

El camello respondid:
Gracias, sefior elefante.

La pulga, the flea.

el camello, the camel.
largo, long, far.

la jornada, the journey.
_cargar, to load.
exlamar, to exclaim.

a, already.
fatigar, to fatigue.
lacarga, the burden, charge, load.
que — tan, whata..
pesado, heavy.

dona, Lady, Mrs.

montar, to mount; ir montado,
to ride.

al instante, directly.

apearse, to alight.

dice, says.

arrogante, arrogant(ly).

el peso, the burden.

librar, to deliver, to free from...

responder, to answer. :

gracias, thank you.
88 Lesson 22.

Twenty-second Lesson. Leccion vigésima
segunda.

Peculiarities of some regular Verbs.

Certain classes of regular verbs undergo various or-
thographical modifications in order to retain their regular
pronunciation. These are as follow:

1) Verbs ending in -car, as: tocar, to touch, change
the ¢ into qu before e, thus: Def. Togué, I touched.
; Toque V.! (Do) touch! — Whereas: ¢ Toca V.? Do you
touch?

2) Those in -gar insert u after g before e, as: pagar,
to pay; Def. Pagué, I paid. ;Pague V.! (Do) pay! —
But: ¢Paga V.2 Do you pay?

3) Verbs in -cer and -cix change ¢ into 2 before a
and 6 in order to preserve the hissing sound of the
consonant, as: vencer, to conquer; venzo, I conquer (venco
would be pronounced «venko»); ;vengza V.! (do) conquer!
whereas gvence V.? do you conquer? —5 resarcir, to
compensate, to make amends for; resar#o, I compensate;
whereas resarces, thou compensatest; resarce, he com-
pensates.

4) The verb delinquir, to offend against... changes
qu: into ¢ before @ or 0, as: Pres. Yo delinco; but: th
delinques, el delinque etc,

5) Verbs ending in -ger and -gir change g into f
before @ or 0, as: escoger, to choose; Pres. yo escojo;
Pres, Subj. escoja, escojas, etc.; but tz escoges, el escoge;
regir, to direct; yo rigo, tu riges, el rige; rifja ete.

6) Verbs in -zar, as: rear, to pray, change z into
¢ before e, thus: reeé, I prayed; jrece V./ do pray!
Whereas: greza V.? do you pray?

7) An unaccented 7 can never stand between vowels,
it is always changed to ¥. We thus write eia, I read;
letamos, we read; because 7 is here accented, on the other
hand leyé, he read; leyera, leyese, I, he would read, because
le--6, le-i-era, le-t-ese, when pronounced quickly, changes
into leyd, leyera, leyese.
Peculiavities of some regular Verbs. 89

Words.
El cuarto, the room. olvidar, to forget.
la sencillez, the simplicity. ignorar, not to be aware.
el tema, the task. viajar, to travel.
el error, la falta, | sentir, to be sorry.
el defecto, j the fault. padecer, to sae
el deber, the duty. herido, wounded*),
el canbe the counting- Ilegar, to arrive.
el despacho, house. marcharse, to go away, to
la cuenta, the account. depart.
el sastre, the tailor. subir, to go up stairs.
el abuelo, the grandfather. registrar, to examine (an ac-
la abuela, the grandmother. count etc.).
da gaceta, the newspaper. adquirir, to obtain.
el colegio, the school. despreciar, to detest.
la pasion, the passion. huir, to flee, to fly (French: fuir).
la pereza, idleness. buscar, to search, to look for.
estimable, respectable. dejar, to let, to cease, to leave off.
atentamente, attentively. pegar, to beat.
creer, to believe. es preciso, it is necessary; I,
acabar, to finish. he, we etc. must.
aumentar, to increase. faltar, to fail.
decaer, to decay. traer, to bring, to carry.

Reading Exercise. 34.

El padre amo 4 su hijo. El criado barria el cuarto de
la prima. ¢Pegais (vosotros) mi perro? Los hombres aman
mas el lujo que la sencillez. gAcabaré V. hoy su tema? V.
aumenta su fortuna y la mia decae. Olfvidamos ficilmente
nuestros defectos, creyendo que el mundo los ignore. Yo via-
jaba con su hermano de V. Mi padre creyd que V. pegase
al pobre muchacho. He sentido en ver (to see) al soldado
herido. ¢Ha hablado V. al ministro? Llegué ayer de Madrid
Y me marcharé mafiana para Salamanca. Suba V. al eseri-
torio; hallard una carta para V. jRegistremos. la cuenta!
éHa pagado V. 4 su sastre? jPdguele (him) V.! Es preciso
que yo hable 4 tu tio. Esa es la iglesia de que nos hablaba
tanto la abuela. El hombre reforma sus costumbres, adqui-
riendo cada dia nuevas virtudes. Los hombres aman natural-
mente lo bueno y desprecian lo malo. ¢Por qué no paga V.
lo que V- ha comprado? El sastre quiere que V. pague su
vestido. Mi abuelo estd leyendo la gaceta. ¢Lee V. cada
dia en ese libro? Lei ayer, pero no he leido hoy. jHuya
V. la mala compafiia y busque V. la buena! No dejes de
repasar (to look over, to peruse) tus lecciones antes de ir (be-
fore going) al colegio.

 

 

*) = férir in French: sans coup férir, without striking one blow.
90 Lesson 22.

Traduccion. 35.

(Do) choose one of these rooms! Did you sweep (Def:)
the room yesterday, or have you swept it the day before
yesterday (antes de ayer)? Why do you beat my dog? I
did not beat him (le, precedes the verb), but 1 think that
the footman has beaten him. Thinking that my father was
(estaba) reading the letter, I forgot (Def.) to bring the news-
paper. I never (jdmas) fail in my duties. The man who
conquers his passions, is estimable. Look over your lessons
before you go to school! Do not beat the poor boy, Sir! He
has suffered much in (= during) his life*). Why don’t you
pay (transl. Why not pay you) your tailor? Do pay him!
One must pay one’s (sus) bills. Did you think I would read
this book (Condic. de Subj.)? The wounded soldier has suffered
much. Did you arrive (Def.) from Paris? No, I have arrived
from Madrid; (the) last time I arrived from Paris. I attri-
buted his faults to his bad company. I attribute it only
(solamente) to your (2 Sing.) idleness, that you have not
finished your task. You forget everything (= all); yesterday
you forgot (—have forg.) the newspaper, and to-morrow you
will forget your books. I make amends for my fault; do
(thou) also (tambien) redress (2. Sing.) yours (el tuyo). I
always detested bad company. Do not fail (= omit) to
examine the account! If you (2. Sing.) did not love (the)
idleness so much (tanto), you would be more respectable.
Would to God, the war were over! Do you wish (quiere V.)
me to come (venga)? I would (quisiera) that your brother
came (see Less. 21, 3). Choose (2. Sing.) of these rooms that
which (el que) pleases (Subj.) you most!

Conversacion.
éQué ha hecho el criado? Barrié el cuarto de su amo.
jAcabe V. su tema! No tengo tiempo para acabarlo.

¢Acabara V.sutema mafiana? Sin duda lo acabaré mafiana.

éQué creyd su padre de V.? Que V. pegd & ese pobre mu-
chacho.,

éQué queria V.? Que V. viniese (viniera) 4 mi
casa para hablar conmigo.

éQué dijo el soldado herido? Ha dicho que no tiene hambre,
sino sed.

jPague V. 4 su sastre! No tengo dinero para pagarle
(pay him).

éQuién es estimable? El hombre que domina (governs)
sus pasiones.

éCree V. 4 la paz? No creo que tendremos la paz
este afio.

*) (lifetime).
On Pronouns.

éHa hablado V. al ministro?

éQué olvidamos facilmente?

4Cudndo Megd V.?

91

No he hablado al ministro mis-
mo, sino he hablado 4 su
secretario.

Olvidamos facilmente nuestros
defectos.

Llegué ayer de Paris.

Reading Exercise.
El barbero de José II.

Un dia, habiendo legado el emperado:
antes que su acompafiamiento, le pregun
si pertenecia al séquito del emperador.
Sin embargo, con tan lacdnica respuesta no quedd

principe.

José & una ciudad
el ama de la posada,
«No», respondid el

satisfecha la curiosidad de la buena mujer. Buscdé un pretexto
para entrar en su cuarto, y viéndole ocupado en afeitarse, le

preguntd, si tenia algun cargo cerca del emperador.

«Si>,

respondidé el monarca, «algunas veces le afeito».

Barbero, the barber.

llegar, to arrive.

el emperador, the emperor.

dntes, sooner, before.

el acompanamiento, the atten-
dance.

preguntar, to ask.

el ama, the landlady (see Les-

la posada, the inn.

pertenecer, to belong.

el séquito, the attendance, suite.

responder, to answer.
el principe, the prince.

[son 1).

sin embargo, notwithstanding,
nevertheless.

la respuesta, the answer.

quedo satisfecha, was satisfied,
contented.

buscar, to seek.

el pretexto, pretext.

entrar, to enter.

viéndole, seeing him (part. pres.
of ver, to see).

afeitar, to shave.

cargo, place, office.

cerca, near.

la vez, the time (in phrases like “three times, sometimes’ etc.).

Twenty-third Lesson. Leccion vigésima
tertia.

On Pronouns.

De los pronombres.

Pronouns are used to avoid the repetition of substan-

tives. There are six kinds,

viz.: 1) the Persunal; 2) the

Demonstrative; 3) the Possessive; 4) the Interrogative;
5) the Relative, and 6) the Indefinite pronoun.

Personal pronouns.

Pronombres personales.

There are two kinds of personal pronouns, viz.:
absolute (absolutos) and conjunctive (conjuntivos). The
92 Lesson 23,

latter are only employed in the dative and accusateve
cases. The Spaniards consider a personal pronoun as con-
junctive (i. e. closely joined to the verb), if no stress Is
laid on it, and if it is not preceded by a preposition. Ex.:
Give me a book; here the stress is laid on the word book
and not on the pronoun me, which therefore is considered
to be a conjunctive pronoun. In the sentence, however:
Give this book to me and not to my sister, the stress is
laid on the word to me. Therefore to me is an absolute
pronoun.

The former of the above sentences is rendered thus:

Dadme un libro (here the pronoun and verb are even
contracted into one word).

The latter example is translated as follows:
Dadme un libro & mé y no & mb hermana.

Note. The reason why the Romance languages have two
kinds of personal pronouns is, because those little words, like me,
te, se etc. (Ital.: mi, ti, si etc.; French: me, te, se etc.), are, as it
were, not strong enough to bear the stress, when laid on the
pronoun. In French and Italian more sonorous forms are chosen
in such a case, as moi for je: toi for tu etc.; Ital. let for la; lu
for lo etc. In Spanish the stress is laid on the absolute pronoun
(4 mé ete.) which is superadded, as shown in the above sentence.

We begin with the absolute personal pronoun.

1st Person.
Sing. Plur. Femin.
Yo, I. Nosotros (nos). | Nosotras (nos), we.
de mt, of me. de nosotros. de nosotras, of us.
ad mi, tome, me*). 4d nosotros. ad nosotras, to us, Us.
2nd Person.
Sing. . Plur. Femin.
tu, thou. Vosotros (vos). Vosotras (vos), you.
de tt, of thee. de vosotros. de vosotras, of you.
a ti, to thee, thee. « vosotros (0s). dé vosotras (os), to you,
you.
8rd Person.
/ (Masculine.)
Sing. El, he. Plur, Ellos, they.
de él, of him. : de ellos, of them,
@ él, to him, him, @ ellos, to them, them.

*) As we stated Less. III, the personal accusative ig y cd
in Spanish by the dative. ee
On Pronouns. 93

(Feminine)
Sing. Ella, she. Plur. Ellas, they.
de ella, of her. de ellas, of them.
a ella, to her, her. dé ellas, to them, them.
(Neuter)

Sing. Ello, it.
de ello, of it.
& ello, to it.

For both genders and numbers.

Gen. de st, of himself, herself, itself, themselves. ,
Dat. and \ ad si, to himself, herself, itself, themselves.
Accus. himself, herself, itself, themselves.

Observations.

1) The forms de él, de ella, de ello, etc. were formerly
. contracted into del, della, dello etc. These contractions are
now obsolete.

2) Nos and vos, instead of nosotros, -as, vosotros, -as,
are only used in official style, mos expressing the so-called
“plural of Majesty”. Ex.: Nos Don N., Obispo de.... os
mandamos. We NN. bishop of . . . bid you.

Contrary to the practice of other Romance languages, in
Spanish we and you have a masc. and fem. gender. Thus:
Nosotros (masculine); vosotras (feminine).

_ 8) The Spanish language has no form similar to the
French en or the Italian ve. The English forms thereof, none,
some, any, etc. are either omitted or rendered by the genitive
of the absolute personal pronouns, sometimes also by a con-
junctive personal pronoun, as:

Have you any books? ¢ iene V. libros?

I have more than you"). Tengo mds de ellos que V.
Hast thou some wine? 4g Tienes vino?

I have none. No lo tengo. (Lit. I have it not.)

This mode of expression is rather stiff and the Spaniard
generally avoids it either by leaving out the locution altogether
when possible, thus: gTiene V. libros? Tengo mas que V. —
or by repeating the noun: ¢ Tienes vino? No tengo vino (or
Vino no tengo).

(See the following. Lesson.)

4) Ello may only be used as the subject of the sentence,
and should be placed at the beginning. In the middle of the
phrase, Jo is used instead of ello; as:

*) French: J’en ai plus que vous.
94 : Lesson 23.

(Ello) parece dificil, mas no bo es.
It seems (to be) difficult, but it is not. 3
5) The preposition con (with) is contracted with m4, ti,
st into conmigo, contigo, consigo, with me, with thee, with
him ete.
6) The English expressions “I myself’ or “my own self”,
“he himself’, “your own self” etc. are always rendered by
yo mismo, fem. yo misma; él mismo, V. mismo, -c, etc.

Words.
El dinero, the money. no tener razon, to be wrong.
ver, to see. alabar, to praise.
luego, adv., soon. acusar, to accuse.
tener razon, to be right. llevar, to carry.

Reading Exercise. 36.

éQuién lo (it, so) dice? Yo, — él — ella — nosotros —
vosotras. Nosotros tuvimos razon; vosotras lo vereis (will
see) luego. gQuién lo ha dicho, él 6 ella? ¢Vienes tu con-
migo? He venido contigo. ¢Quién estuvo aqui, él 6 ella?
No hablo de él, sino de ellas. Hablamos de vosotros y de
vosotras. ¢Habla V. de ellos 6 de ellas? sos hombres se
alaban 4 si mismos (themselves). Las mujeres se acusan 4 si
mismas. Harias*) mejor (you had better) ocuparte (care) de
ti mismo (mind your own business). Llevo todo mi dinero
conmigo. ¢Quién ha hablado de mi? Yo he hablado de V.,
de él y de ella. jNo hable V. siempre de si mismo! ¢Ha
dado V. el dinero 4 mi 6 4' mi amigo? Lo he dado 4 él.
Vosotros teneis razon.

Traduccion. 37.

Who is there? He,-she, we, you, they. Do you give
(da V.) the money to me or to her? I love (quiero) thee,
but- I do not love him. Have you seen me or her? You
carry all about (com) you. Has (from llevar) he money about
him? She has no money about her. We (m.) are poor, but
you (f.) are rich. We (m.) speak of you (f.), and you (f,)
speak of us (m.). Have you any money? I have more (of
it) than you. Have you any friends? J have none. That
(it) seems [to be] very difficult, but it is very easy. I have
seen you (m. Pl.) and them (f. Pl.). She loves thee, but
she does not love me. He and she were here; they have
spoken (to) with him and (to) with her. I did not speak of
you, but (sino) I spoke of them (Pl. fem.). This lady praises
herself. Why do you accuse her, and not him? Shall you

*) from hacer, to do.
On Pronouns. 95

take all your money with- you? He would have taken all
his books with him, if he had had time (el tiempo).

Conversacion.

.éQuién ha hecho eso? Yo, tu, él, ella.

éQuién ha hablado de mi? Yo he hablado de V.
éQuién ha venido conmigo? Yo he venido contigo.

¢Tiene V. dinero? Tengo mds dinero que él.

éQué tiene ella? Tiene muchas cosas.

¢Me llamas (dost thou call) No te llama 4 ti, llamo 4 él
& mi? y 4 ella.

éQuién se acusa d si mismo? Mi amigo se acusa 4 si mismo.

éHs él rico 6 pobre? El no es rico, es paupérrimo

(very poor).
éDe quién habla él? Habla de nosotros y de vosotras.
éHa ella Iegado sola? No, ha Hegado conmigo.

éTiene ella otro sombrero? No, Sefior, no tiene otro.

Reading Exercise.

Luis catorce preguntéd un dia 4 uno de sus cortesanos:
«gSabe V. el castellano?» — «No, Sefior», respondid el cor-
tesano, «pero lo aprenderé». Se aplicd mucho para aprender
aquel idioma, y despues de haber tomado muchisimo trabajo,
porque le parecia que el rey tenia intencion de nombrarle
embajador en la.corte de Espafia, dijo un dia 4 Luis catorce:
«Sefior, ahora ya sé el castellano». — «Muy bien», respondid
el rey, «en ese caso puede V. leer el Don Quijote en su
original. »*)

El cortesano, the courtier. le parecia, it seemed to him; he
ésabe V.? do you know? thought.
aplicarse, to take pains. la intencion, the intention.
aprender, to learn. el embajador, ambassador.
el idioma, the language. dijo, he said.
despues de, after. sé, I know.
tomarse trabajo, to apply one’s puede V., you can.

‘self to.... leer, to read. { (language).
nombrarle, to appoint him. en su original, in the original

*) The same story is told of Frederick the Great, king of
Prussia.
96

Twenty-fourth Lesson. Leccion vigésima
cuarta.

Conjunctive personal Pronouns. Pronombres
personales afijos.
As we observed in the foregoing lesson, these _pro-

nouns have only the dative and accusative cases. They
are:

Sing.
Dat. me, me (to me); te, thee (to thee);
Acc. me, me; te, thee; himself
‘Dat. le, him (to him); le, her (to her); amsenr
Ace. lo, him; la, her; — lo, it. herself,
itself,
Plur. sed hen
Dat. nos, us (to us); os, you (to you); salva
Acc. 0s, us; os, you; ete
Dat. les, them (to them) (in.); les,them(tothem) (f.); ‘
Acc. los, them (m.); las, them (f.).
Observations.

1. The rule given in lesson 3, that the object of the per-
son is put in the dative, holds good also for the pronouns,
but in this case it is not employed with the same consistency
by all Spanish writers. Thus when speaking of persons we
find le and lo for the sing. and les and los for the pl. mase.;
for the fem. sing. Ja, more rarely le, and for the pl. Jas, more
rarely les. On the other hand la and las occur occasionally
beside le (to her), Jes (to them) for the dat. feminine; e. g.
ta doy, I give to her; but le is better for both genders.

Examples.

Nuestro amigo salia de su casa, cuando te (or to) asal-
taron unos ladrones.

Our friend left his house, when several robbers assaulted
him.

éDonde estan sus hermanos de V.? No tes or los he
visto.

Where are your brothers? I have not seen them.

Creen las mujeres, que los hombres las (acc.) aprecian
particularmente por sw hermosura; pero lo que les
(or las) asegura para siempre una estimacion verda-
dera, es la modestia, la virtud ete.

Women think that men appreciate them particularly
for their beauty; but what for ever secures them
real esteem, is modesty, virtue ete.
Conjunctive Personal Pronouns. 97

In speaking of inanimate objects le and lo are equally
often used e. g.:

He comprado este libro, pero no lo (or le) he leido
todavia.
I have bought this book, but have not yet read it.

2. Concerning the construction of these pronouns, the
following rules are of the utmost importance:

a) The conjunctive pronouns precede the verb in the
Indicative, the Subjunctive mood and in the Imperative mood,
when negatively employed, as:

Lo doy, I give it.

Lo he dado, I have given it.

Te mando, I command thee.

Le conocemos, we know hin.

Os ha visto, he has seen you.
Me diga, he may (shall) tell me.
iNo lo dé V.! do not give it!

b) When two of these pronouns, one in the dative, the
other in the accusative case, meet in the same sentence, they
both precede the verb, the dative being invariably placed
before the accusative case, as:

Te lo doy, I give it thee.
Te lo he dado, I have given it thee.
Me lo ha mandado, (lt.) he has ordered it to me.

A very remarkable anomaly is presented by the pronouns
of the third person. Whenever a dative of this person (mascu-
line or feminine, singular or plural) meets with an accusative
of the same person, the dative, for the sake of euphony, is
rendered by se. Thus instead of:

_ _ Sing. Plur.
le lo, { a | se lo, les lo, it them, — se lo.
le la, { ts 2 | se la, les la, her them, — se la.

le los, { 8 ee a ’ \ se los, les los, them (m.) to them,

— se los.
him them (f-), )
le las, { hin them (60, J se las, les las, them (f.) oS
It makes no difference, whether the pronouns precede or
follow (see d.) the verb. Thus:
Se lo prometi, I promised it him, for: le lo prometi.
Se los enviaré, I shall send them (m.) to them, for:
les los enviare.
Prometiéndoselo, promising it him,—for: prometiéndolelo.
Spanish Grammar. 7
98 Lesson 24.

In order to avoid a misconception, or if a particular
stress is laid on the pronoun, the absolute pronoun or the
substantive in its respective case may be superadded, as:

Se lo prometi & él, I promised it to him.

Se lo prometé & ella, I promised it to her.
Se lo prometi & mi hermano, I promised it to my brother.*)
Se la prometi d mi hermana, I promised it to my sister.

c) The conjunctive personal pronouns follow the verb in
the Imperativo (except the negative Imperative, see a), In-
finitivo and Gerundio. In this case they are contracted with
the verb into one word. The conjunctive personal pronouns
stand also after a present, a participle or any other of the
verbal forms mentioned under a, in case that the form in
question begins the sentence.

Déjame, let me; whereas: no me dejes, do (thou) not let me.
Dinos, tell (thou) us.

Visitarme, to pay me a visit.

Quererse, to love one’s self.

Escribiéndolo, writing it.

Venridole. (having) conquered him,

Note. Avdient w:iters contract the pronoun with the Infini-
tive mood in a peculiar manner. Instead of tomarla, to take her,
they say tomalla; instead of tenerle — tenelle etc. In the 2. Pl.
of the Imperative wieri, which ends in -d, this consonant was
put before the /-— of the pronoun. Thus instead of tomadlo, take
(you)-it, they said: tomaldo; instead of decidle, (tell it), decide.
This metathesis, or transposition, is frequently met with, for
instance in Cervantes, but is now quite obsolete.

d) If the Infinitive, the Gerundio, or the Participle is
coupled with an auxilideyz verb, or with a verb which may
be considered as an auxiliary, like hacer, to make, dejar de,
to cease, volver d, to do again etc., the pronouns very often
precede these verbs, as:

Se deja ver, liter. he lets himself see — he shows him-
self (inst. (of deja verse).
No me vuelvas & hablar, do not speak to me again (inst.
of no vcuelvas « hablarme).
(Euphony alone decides where the pronoun should be placed
in this case.) :
¢) For euphony’s sake, a slight alteration is originated .
by the pronouns mos (us) and os (you), viz.:
1) When zis is affixed to » form ending in -s, the final
-s of the verb is dropped, thus:

_ *) If preceding, the verly: the substantive is followed imme-
diately by the dative of th: pronoun. as: A mi hermano se lo
prometié, he promised it~ ving, ‘rotiner,
Conjunctive Personal Pronouns. 99
Amémonos, let us love one another, for: amémosnos.
Vémonos, we see each other, for: vémosnos.
2) When os meets with the final -d of the Imperative
mood, this consonant is dropped; thus:
Amdos, love (you) yourselves, for: amados.

Note. The only exception is id, go (you). Thus: idos, go
away, begone! *) :

Words.

El nombre, the name. ‘parecer, to seem.
la libertad, the liberty. esperar, to expect, to wait for.
el estado, the state, condition. sentarse, to sit down.
el lacayo, the footman. prometer, to promise.
la impaciencia, (the) impa- ir db isp to come, to see, to

tience. et ’ call, to visit**).
la hora, the hour. vencer, to conquer.
comenzar, to begin. anunciar, to announce, to im-
lamentar, to lament. part.
encomendar, to recommend. estar enterado, to be acquainted.
saber, to know. mucho tiempo hd, it is a good
afligir, to afflict. while.
ver, to see. dt, tell (thou).
hallar, to find. apénas,scarcely ; algo,something.

Reading Exercise. 38.

iDinos la verdad! jEnviadle esta carta! Le conocemos.
No le conocemos. La conozco mucho tiempo hé Estuve
enterado de la muerte de su padre, pero no he querido
anunclarsela por no afligirle muy sensiblemente. Puedes ha-
blarle. No te he de decir mi nombre. ¢No sabes, quién es
esa mujer? ¢No te la he encomendado? Te lo he dicho 4
ti y no 4 él. El pobre muchacho se comenzé 4 lamentar de
su suerte. El caballero halléd 4 su enemigo; y vencidole (after
having conquered him) en batalla singular (duel) y despues
perdonddole generosamente, le did la libertad. ¢Han venido
Vds. & verme? Ella no se lo ha prometido 4 él. Apénas
me hubo visto uno de los tres pastores, cuando me Maméd.
Hallabame ***) en este estado, cuando supe (knew, learned) que

*) French: Allez-vous-en!

**) In the Romance languages “to go” (Fr. aller; Ital. andare;
Span. ir) denotes a motion towards the person spoken to, whereas
“to come” (Fr. venir; It. venire; Sp. venir) implies a motion towards
the speaker. “Come to see me” is therefore Fr. Venez me voir;
It. Venga a trovarmi; Sp. Venga V. d verme. “Tl call on you"
is: Fr. J’irai vous voir; It. André a trovarla; Sp. Iré a ver a V.

***) Tf the principal verb is the first word of the sentence,
the pronouns may be affixed to it in the cases enumerated under 1).

Vid
100 ‘Lesson 24.

el Sefior Gil Blas estaba sin lacayo. Sentdmonos 4 la mesa
mi hermana y yo. Esperdébamos con impaciencia la hora para
vernos y hablarnos. ¢Tiene V. algo que decirnos? é Conoce
V. & estos hombres? Les he visto ayer en casa de mi amigo,
pero no les conozco. Dime la verdad, que (and) no te ar-
repentiras (you will repent) de haberlo hecho. Se lo dijeron
(told) & mis hermanas. A mi amo (master) le parecié bien
este consejo.
Traduccion. 39.

Tell (thou) me! Tell (taou) it us! Iexpected you. Ido
not expect him. Had you expected it? He has given it him,
There are the books; has he given them to them (fem.)? He
has given them to the daughters of the neighbour. Leave
them (to) them! I promised them to them. Has my brother
seen you (Plur.)? Why will you not impart it to him, if
you are acquainted (with) of it? Hast thou afflicted him? I
have afflicted him, but I have not afflicted you. Hast thou
told (him so) it him? I have told it to her, but not to him.
We were not able (lit. in the state) to promise it him. Why
hast thou promised it her? I should not have promised it
(to) her, if you had not given it to me. Begone! I do not give
you so much money as I gave you (the) last time (veg).
Love one another, oh men! He was very sorry (tr. to afflict
one’s self), when he heard (transl. knew) that you had not
recommended him. Have you known this gentleman? I did
not know him, but I knew his sister (transl. but his sister,
I knew her). He has recommended her to me. We came
(tr. have come) to visit him, but as we do not find him at
home, we shall (wait for) expect him. I have something to
tell you. Did you know (supo V.) it? I am acquainted with
his condition, and I (did tell him so) have also told it him,
but he will not believe it (me). Do you know, that I will
send them (masc.) to them?

Conversacion.
{Dinos la verdad! La digo siempre.
éConoce V. 4 ese sefior? Le conozco muy bien; es el
primo de la Sefiorita Figuers.
aEspera V. 4 su criado? Espero 4 mi tio: me ha pro-

metido venir 4 verme hoy.
éSe lo ha dicho V. 4 é1 6 4 Se lo he dicho 4 ella y no 4
ella? él,
éPor qué lo han hecho? Lo han hecho para honrarle (in
his honour, lit. to honour him).
éA quién lo dijeron (told they)? Se lo dijeron & mis hermanos.
éLo ha prometido ella 4 su Si, se lo ha prometido.,
esposo?
Conjunctive Personal Pronouns. 101

éQuién ha venido ayer? El pintor ha venido 4 verme.

4 Qué nos manda (orders, com- Nos manda amarnos como her-
mands) el. Evangelio? manos y socorrernos («ssist)

en la desgracia.

¢Ha enviado V. las cartas Se las enviaré por el correo
4 la marquesa? (post).

éPor qué no te da (gives) di- No puede darme dinero, por-
nero tu padre? que no lo*) tiene.

éQuiere V. dar los libros al Si, Sefior, quiero darselos.
pobre estudiante (student)?

Reading Exercise.
El Negro finjido.

Dos jévenes hermanos, cerrajeros de oficio, se embarcaron,
hace cuarenta afios, para la Jamaica.

Luego que llegaron, buscaron alguna ocupacion: pero no
la hallaron en su profesion, porque necesitaban algun dinero
para establecerse. Viéndose sin auxilio alguno, hallaron un
partido bastante extraordinario, y fué el siguiente. Uno de
ellos, que tenia los cabellos muy crespos, se disfrazd de negro,
se tifio la cara y todo el cuerpo, y fué conducido por su her-
mano 4 la casa de un banquero, 4 quien suplicd le prestase
cincuenta doblones sobre la venta de aquel negro. Como este
era fuerte y vigoroso, logréd el hermano el préstamo que
deseaba; y recibido el dinero, se escapd el finjido negro de
casa del prestamista. Volvid 4 casa de su hermano, y se
lavé de -piés 4 cabeza. En vano ofrecieron los periddicos
recompensas al que le presentase, pues era imposible hallarle.

Los dos hermanos formaron su establecimiento de cerra-
jeros con los cincuenta doblones, ganaron mucho dinero y
volvieron 4 su pais ricos; pero es de advertir, que antes de
ausentarse de la Jamaica restituyeron el préstamo con los
intereses al banquero, y dandole gracias recorddndole la
anéedota del negro.

.

Negro, negro. establecerse, to establish one’s self.

finjido, false, sham. viéndose, seeing (finding) them-

cerrajero, locksmith. -auxilio, help, means. (selves.

embarcarse, to embark, to set hallar un partido, to hit on an
out for. - expedient.

hace, ago (lit. it does). bastante, rather.

luego, as soon as. y fué, and [this] was.

hallar, to find. el siguiente, the following, i. e.

profesion, profession. as will be seen, as we are

necesitar, to want. going to relate.

*) As the Spanish language has no precise equivalent for
sone or any, the personal pronoun is often used instead as in the
above sentence. Thus: gNo come V. fruta? Do you not eat fruit?
Nunca la como, I never eat any (lit. it).
102 Lesson 25.

cabellos crespos, curly hair. escaparse, to escape.

disfrazarse, to disguise one's el prestamista, the money-lender.
self. volvid, he returned.

tenir, to paint. lavarse, to wash one’s self.

la cara, the face. de piés d cabeza, from top to toe,

todo, whole. en vano, in vain.

cuerpo, body. ofrecer, to offer.

conducido, lead. los periddicos, the newspapers.

banquero, banker. al que, to him who....

a quien, to whom, whom. pues, as, because.

suplicar, to beg. ganar, to earn, to make.

le prestase, he might lend him. el pais, the country, native land.

la venta, the sale. es de advertir, it must be oh-

fuerte, strong. served.

lograr, to obtain. antes de ausentarse, before going

el préstamo, the loan. away.

desear, to desire, to wish. restituir, to restore, to give back.

recibido el dinero, after having ddndole gracias, thanking him.
received the money. establecimiento, establishment.

Twenty-fifth Lesson. Leccion vigésima
quinta.
Demonstrative and inter- Pronombres demostrativos
rogative pronouns. 6 interrogativos. |

As we stated Less. 14, these words are pronouns,
when used in lieu of a Substantive, i. e. alone. They are
declined with de and d. They are;

Sing. Plur.
Este, esta, this; esto, (n.), this; estos, estas, these.
Ese, esa, this; eso (n.), this; esos, esas, these.

Aquel,aquella,that; aquello,(n.), that; aquellos, aquellas, those.

Note. The forms aqueste, aquesta, aquesto for este, esta, esto;
aquese, aquesa, aqueso for ese, esa, eso, are now somewhat obsolete.
This is also the case with the compounds of este and ese with
otro: estotro, estotra, this other = the other. Aquel is never con-
tracted into one word with otro.

Again, the articles el, Ja, and lo are frequently used
as demonstrative pronouns, thus:

Mi caballo y et de mi hermano.
My horse and that of my brother.

The English phrases he who ..., Pl. those who...,

are rendered by the definite article with que following,
because the Spanish language has no proper demonstrative
Demonstrative and Interrogative Pronouns, 108

pronouns like the French celui, celle etc. or the Ital.
quel, quello, quella ete. Ex.:

Los que no moderan sus pasiones son infelices.

Those who do not moderate their passions are unhappy.

The neuter lo should be added, where the English
that is commonly omitted, as:

No sabe lo que dice.
He does not know what (that which) he says.

He who, especially in the singular, is often trans-
lated by quien and not by el que, e. g.:

Quien calla, otorga, he who is silent, gives consent.
(French: Qui ne dit mot, consent).
The neuter forms esto, eso, aquello, are only used
substantively, i. e. without a noun following, as:
He hablado de esto, de eso, de aquello.
I have spoken of it (that).

As the Spanish language has no pronouns like the
French en and y (the Italian ne and ci [vi]), the relation
to a foregoing substantive is expressed as in English.
Thus:

Tiene poca fortuna pero estd contento con ella.
He has but a small fortune, nevertheless he is satisfied
with it.

. Tengo buenas uvas; enviaré d V. unas (algunas).

I have fine grapes; I shall send you some.

éCudntos hijos tiene V.? Tengo cuatro.

How many children have you? I have four.

Estos drboles son pequefios; pero sus frutas son sabrosas.
These trees are small, but their fruits are delicious.
Beberé vino si lo hay.

I shall drink some wine, if there is any.

Interrogative pronouns.

The interrogative pronouns do not differ in their
form from the relative pronouns, only in as much as they
have the written accent. Besides those enumerated Less.
14, § 4, 5 and 6 (cudl and qué), we should mention:

Quién, plur. quiénes, who?
Cudl, plur. cudles, which? and
Ciyo, f. cya, whose?

a) Quién, pl. quiénes is never used with a substan-

tive. It has a plural: quiénes, who? but the singular
104 Lesson 25.

may be used instead of the plural, This pronoun is

declined with de and d. Examples:
gQuién habla? Who speaks? Plur. gQuiénes hablan?
aDe quién (de quiénes) habla V.? Of whom do you speak?

b) Cual, Plur. cudles never takes the article and
thus differs from the relative pronoun el cual. Thus:

gCudl es el mds rico? Who is the richest? Whereas:

La ciudad en ta cual estaba, the town where (in which)

I lived.

c) Cryo, fem. ctiya, pl. criyos, f. ertyas, corresponds
with the English whose and agrees in gender and number
with the noun to which it refers. However, the pupil
should be cautioned against the use of this interrogative_
pronoun which very rarely occurs, and advised to replace
it by: de quién, plur. de quiénes. Thus:
éDe quién es este libro? rather than Cayo libro es este?
éDe quién es esta carta? rather than gCiya carta es esta?
é@De quiénes son estos libros? r. th. gCtvyos libros son estos?
éDe quiénes son estas cartas? r. th. gCtyas cartas son estas?

Whose book is this?
Whose letter is this?
Whose books are these?
Whose letters are these?

Words.
El vicio, the vice. el oficial, the officer.
el carpintero, the joiner. el vaso, the glass.
el extranjero, the foreigner. la manzana, the apple.
el muchacho, the boy. pernicioso, dangerous.

Reading Exercise. 40.

éQuien se lo ha dicho 4 V.? ¢Cudl es el enemigo mas
pernicioso del hombre? El vicio. ¢De quién (ctiya) es esta
casa, y de quiénes (ciyos) son esos jardines? ¢Cudles son
los sefiores que han venido? Vendrdan (will come) unas mujeres.
éQuiénes? — La del jardinero y la del carpintero. ¢A
quién ha hablado el extranjero? A un muchacho que estaba
en casa. ¢Tiene V. mi sombrero 6 el del oficial? He tomado
sus flores de V. y las de la jardinera. No he hallado lo que
he buscado. Hemos hablado de esto y de aquello. gSon esos
sus hermanos de V.? No, Sefior, estos son mis primos, pero
aquellos son mis hermanos. ¢Es hermosa su casa de V.? No
es hermosa, pero estoy contento con ella. V. tiene mucha
fruta; jdeme V. alguna! No puedo darsela a V., porque no
es mia. ¢Tiene V. muchos vasos? Tengo cinco 6 seis. Yo
Demonstrative and Interrogative Pronouns. 105

comeria unas manzanas, si las hubiera (if there were any).
El egoista busca amigos, pero no les halla. ¢Ha estado V.
en Paris? Si, Sefior, vengo de alli. He ido ayer 4 Sevilla;
éha ido V. tambien alli? Fulano estuvo aqui.

Traduccion. 41.

Who was (tr. has been) there? Which of these men has
done it? I have some bread; have you some, too? No, I
have none. To whom do these flowers belong? Whose dog
is this? That is the dog of our neighbour. Were you at (the)
church yesterday? Yes, I was there, and I shall also go
[there] to-day (I shall go, iré). Does your sister also go
there? Which is the finest of these flowers? To whom have
you given the’bill? I do not know the gentleman to whom
I have given it. Who (plur.) has come? The children of
Mrs. N. have come. How many children has she? She has
five, two boys and three girls. To which girls have you
given the cherries? ‘To the daughter of the joier and to
that of the tailor. Who has seen the foreigner? Have you
my watch or that of the officer? Do you find what-you are
looking for (¢r. that w. y. search)? Are these the sisters of
~ the boy? To whom have you given your knife? I gave (ér.
have given) it to nobody; I have it here. Tell me (dime)
with whom thou goest (andas, 2. Sing.), and I shall (diré)
tell thee, who thou art.

Conversacion.

éQuién esté aqui? El hermano del oficial.

éA quién ha hablado V.? He hablado 4 tu primo, que ha

, venido acd.

éTiene V. mi libro 6 el de Tengo el de su hermano de V.

mi hermana?

éDe quién es esta casa? No sé de quien es esta casa.

éDe quién son esos vestidos? Son los de los nifios.

De quien son estas flores? Son las de la jardinera.

éBeberé V. vino? Si, Sefiora, si lo hay.

éPensaré V. en mi dinero? Si pensaré en ello.

éSon esos sus nifios de V.? No, son los del oficial frances.

éDe quién ha hablado V.? He hablado de los extranjeros
que han venido ayer.

éComeria V. unas manzanas? Las comeria de buena gana (I
should like to eat some), si
las tuviera.

éHa estado V. en Madrid? He estado alli dos afios.
106 Lesson 26,

Reading Exercises.
El consejo de Luis XI.

Luis XI solia decir que llevaba en su cabeza todo el
consejo, porque no se aconsejaba de nadie. Viéndole un dia
el almirante de Bréze montado en un burro muy débil, dijo:
«Preciso es que ese animal sea mds fuerte de lo que parece,
para poder llevar encima al rey y & su consejo».

. Soler, to use. el burro, the donkey, ass.

decir, to say. débil, weak.

aconsejarse, to consult. preciso es que... sea, must be.
el almirante, the admiral. poder, to be able. {back
montado, riding. llevar encima, to carry on one’s

Don Felipe y el abogado.

Un célebre abogado declamé publicamente contra la per-
sona y el gobierno de Felipe II, y le metieron en la carcel.
Habiéndose presentado despues este asunto al consejo real,
le did el rey la libertad, diciendo: «Es un loco, pues habla
mal de un principe que no conoce, y que jamas le hizo dafio
alguno».

Célebre, famous, celebrated. el asunto, the case.

el abogado, the lawyer. dar, to give. .
declamar, to abuse, to revile. diciendo, telling, saying.
el gobierno, the government. el loco, the fool.

meter, to put. hizo, did (from hacer).
la edrcel, the prison. el daiio, the harm.

Twenty-sixth Lesson. Leccion vigésima

sexta,
Possessive and relative pronouns.

The rules given Less. 15 on the possessive adjec-
tives are also applicable to the possessive pronouns. ‘We
have only to add here one observation, reserving full par-
ticulars on this part of speech for the Second Part.

‘If two sentences have the same substantive for a
predicate, the repetition of which is avoided by the use
of a possessive pronoun, the Spanish language requires
the neuter indefinite article before the verb of the fol-
lowing sentence, thus:

Charles is my friend, and I am his (friend),
Carlos es mi amigo, y yo lo soy suyo.
Possessive and Relative Pronouns. 107

Relative pronouns.

1) As we said Less. 25, these pronouns differ from
the interrogative pronouns only in their use, except cwal,
which, when a relative pronoun, commonly takes the
article. They are:

que (el que, la que, los que, las que), which, who.

quien, who, pl. quienes.

el cual, f. la cual; pl. los cuales, f. las cuales, who, which.

cuyo, f. cuya; pl. cuyos, f. cuyas, whose.

cual, m. & f., pl. cuales (without article mostly with
preceding tal, tales), which as, like etc.

These pronouns are declined with de and d, but the
relative que only takes d, when preceded by the definite
article (al que, & la que, & los que, & las que); without
the article it can also be used to express the accusative
of the person, but then it does not take d. Que is alike
in sing. and plur. and used both of persons and things, as:

Un libro que he comprado, a book which I have bought.

V. es el hombre que yo buscaba, you are the man whom I
sought (was seeking).

Los muebles de que esta adornada la casa que habitamos.

The furniture with which the house which we live in is
adorned.

2) Quien, plur. quienes, is used of persons only,
without difference of gender, as:

El hombre & quien V. debe la vida.
The man to whom you owe your life.

If a particular stress is laid on a personal pronoun
(where in French the periphrase c'est mot, cest tot, Cest
lui ete. qui is used), the Spanish language always employs
the nominative of the pronoun with the verb, followed
by quien, as:

To him you owe your life, inverted:
Tt is he, to whom you etc.
El es (or es el) & quien V. debe la vida.

-8) Cual, pl. cuales, when relative pronouns, are
preceded by the article, as:

El hermano*) de mi madre, et cual. _
My mother’s brother, who... .

Notes. a) Que adds to the preceding sentence one of

secondary importance, whereas cual joins to the foregoing

*) Hermano latin germanus.
108 Lesson 26.

thought a new one of equal weight. For this reason el cual
is always preceded by a comma, and que is not*).

b) If cual introduces an indirect interrogative sentence,
it is used without the article, as:

Es dificil determinar, ewdl de los dos ha hablado mejor.

It is difficult to decide which of the two has spoken better.

4) Cual is likewise used without the article, when
expressing a comparison, in which case the English employ
as, like etc. Ex.:

Esa una mujer cwat la podia desear.

She is such a woman, as he could wish for.

Cual furioso leon, like a furious lion.

La mujer hay que aceptarla tal, cual es**).

One must take the woman, as she is.

5) If the relative pronoun refers, not to a single
word, but to a whole sentence preceding, lo que (French:
ce qui; It. il che, locché) is substituted for que, as:

Los reos fueron condenados, lo que causd un sentimiento
general.

The criminals were condemned which (i. e. their being
condemned) caused a general sensation. .

6) If the relative pronoun que is preceded by several
substantives, so that it might become doubtful to which
it refers, the definite article is added to que. Ex.:

La relacion de las aventuras de Don Quijote en la que
los lectores vulgares sélo ven un asunto de entreteni-
miento etc.

The narration of Don Quixote’s adventures, in which
superficial readers only see a matter of amuse-
ment etc.

7) Cuyo, -a, pl. cuyos, -as, when a relative
pronoun, means whose, and does not differ in its form
from the interrogative pronoun (see the preced. Less.), as:

Ll padre & cuyos nifos he visto.

The father whose children I saw.

NB. But here too, as with the interrogative pronoun
cuyo, the cases of quien or el cual etc. are preferred; the
above sentence being much better translated:

El padre de quien he visto los nifos, or

El padre a los nifios det cual he visto.

As to the further. use of cuyo, see Part II, lesson 9.

*) In English the relative pronouns, though understood, are
often omitted after the noun. In Spanish they must be added.
Ex.: The letter you have written. Za carta que V. ha escrito.

**) Tal, cual, latin talis qualis.
 

Possessive and Relative Pronouns. 109.

Words.

La circunstancia, the circum- respetable, respectable.

stance. admirable, admirable, wonderful.
el deudor, the debtor. locamente, in a foolish way.
estar deudor, to be indebted, prudentemente, prudently.

to owe. reluce, shines.
el puesto, the place, situation. queria, loved.
el favor, the kindness. matar, to kill.
la amistad, the friendship. gastar,to spoil, to spend, to waste.
la estacion, the season. desconfiar, to distrust.
el olor, the smell. alentar, to encourage.
la modestia, the modesty. lograr, to obtain.
el literato, the learned man. andar, to have intercourse with,
la primavera, the spring. to associate with.
suave, lovely. podemos, we can.
brusco, harsh. desear, to wish, to desire.
digno, worthy. es preciso, it is necessary, one
verdadero, true. ° must.

Reading Exercise. 42.

El era quien lo queria. El fué quien le matd. Quien
gasta locamente su dinero, no conoce su valor. De si mismo
es de quien uno debe desconfiar. Hay circunstancias en que
es preciso obrar prudentemente. La casa que V. ha comprado
vale mas que aquella. Hl joven de quien he hablado 4 V.
es digno de ser alentado. ¢Sabe V. 4 quien esté deudor del
puesto que ha logrado? Dime con quien andas y te diré
quien eres. Me ha hecho un favor cual lo esperaba de su
amistad. Hstas.son frutas cuales las podemos desear en la
estacion en la cual estamos. Tengo aqui flores cuyo olor es
muy suave. El sefior Galvache es un literato cuya modestia
es admirable. Ellos son quienes lo han hecho. No es oro
todo lo que reluce. Los nifios cuyo padre ha muerto, estén
en la casa de mi vecino. Yo soy quien he hecho todo para
mis amigos. Lo que agrada (pleases) seduce (seduces). Su
hermano de V. me dijo unas palabras bruscas, lo que me
afligid mucho.

Traduccion. 43.

I have done it (fr. it is I who...). Thou hast not
said so. To her we owe (debemos) (everything) all. I do not
know which of these gentlemen (has) said so. The youth
who (has) wasted his money in such a foolish way, is not
worthy of being assisted. The friends of my father who were
here, have gone (ido) to France. Do you know which of the
two has done it? Is it you that spoke (has spoken, that has
always spoken)? On the contrary, I have never (nunca)
spoken, it is Miss Gorbefia who is always speaking. The flowers

'
110 Lesson 26,

whose smell is so sweet, are the children of (the) spring. Be
my friend, and I shall be yours (thine). The generous prince
to whom I owe my situation, encourages me where (ever) he
can. The soldiers (that) we have seen on (en) the road
(camino), were very tired. The circumstances in which I
found him, were very sad. We cannot expect favours of these
strangers, as we expect them of our friends. We are those
to whom you owe your life. What (tr. that which) is true,
is also estimable. The young man obtained the situation,
which (see 5) delighted (fr. alegrar) his mother.

Conversacion.
éQuién es aquel sefior? Es mi amigo de quien he ha-
blado 4 V.
éDe quién son estas tijeras Son de la jéven viuda (widow).
(scissors)?

éDe quién es ese perro? Es mio.
éCudl es su opinion de V.? No tengo una opinion en esta
materia.

éQuién ha escrito esta carta? El capitan frances cuya her-
mana ha venido ayer.

4Cual de esos sefiores ha Es dificil determinar cual de los

hablado mejor? dos ha hablado mejor.
éA quién debo (must I) ha- Es a4 Pedro 4 quien V. debe
blar? hablar.

éQuiénes son aquellos hom- Los criados de la marquesa.
bres?

éDe quién debe uno descon- De si mismo es de quien uno

fiar? debe desconfiar.
éQuién es digno de ser alen- El jéven de quien he hablado
tado? a V. ‘

Reading Exercise.

El gran rey.

Uno de los wltimos reyes de Espafia, 4 quien la suerte
de las armas habia privado de varias plazas considerables,
recibia sin embargo de la mayor parte de sus cortesanos el
titulo de Grande. «Su Grandeza», dijo un espafiol, «se pa-
rece 4 la de los fosos, que se hacen mayores en proporcion
de la tierra que les quitan.»

Ultimo, last. la plaza, fortress, town.

la suerte, lot, fortune. recibir, to receive.

las armas, arms, war. sin embargo, nevertheless.
privar, to deprive. la mayor parte, the greatest

vario, different. part, the majority.
On the Passive Voice. 111

el cortesano, the courtier. se hacen, become (3. Pl).

la grandeza, greatness, la proporcion, the proportion.
dijo, he said. la tierra, the earth, ground;
se parece, resembles, country.

el foso, the ditch. quitar, to take away. .

Twenty-seventh Lesson. Leccion
vigésima séptima.
On the passive voice,

The Spaniards form the passive voice by joining the
auxiliary ser, to be, to the past participle of the active
verb. This past participle, when coupled with sev, is
always considered an adjective, and consequently agrees
in gender and number with the noun or pronoun to which
it refers.

Infinitivo.
Ser amado, -a; Plur. ser amados, -as, to be loved.

Indicativo.
Presente.
Sing. Plur.

Soy amado, -a, I am loved. somos amados, -as, we are loved.
eres amado, -a, thou art loved. sois amados, -as, you are loved.

es amado, he is loved. son amados, they are loved (m.).
es amada, she is loved. son amadas, they are loved (f.).
Imperfecto.

Era amado, -a, I was loved etc.

Definido.

Fui amado, -a, I was loved etc.
Futuro.
Seré amado, -a, I shall be loved.

Condicional.
Seria amado, -a, I should be loved.

Imperativo.

Sing. Sé amado, -a, be (thou) Plur. Sed amados, -as, be (you)
loved. loved.
Lesson 27.

Subjunctivo.
Presente.
Sea amado, -a, I (may) be loved.

Imperfecto.
Fuese amado, -«, I were loved.

Futuro.
Fuere amado, -a, that T shall -be loved.

Condicional.
Fuera amado, -a, that I should be loved.

Gerundio.
Siendo umado, -a, being loved.

Tiempos compuestos.
Infinitivo.
Haber sido amado, to have been loved.

Indicativo.
Perfecto indefinido.
He sido amado, -a, I have been loved.

Pluscuamperfecto,
Habia sido amado, -a, I had been loved.

Perfecto anterior.
Hube sido amado, -a, I had been loved.

Futuro perfecto.
Habré sido amado, -a, I shall have been loved.

Condictonal perfecto.
Habria sido amado, -a, I should have been loved.

Subjuntivo.
Haya sido amado, -a, I have been loved.

Pluscuamperfecto.
Hubiese sido amado, -a, (that) I had been loved.
Futuro perfecto.
Hubiere sido amado, -a, (that) I shall have been loved.
Condicional perfecto.
Hubiera sido amado, -a, (that) I should have been loved.
On the Passive Voice. 113

Remarks.

It is a peculiarity of the Spanish language that the
passive voice may frequently be expressed by the active form
with the pronoun se, i. e. reflectively. Thus:

Estas mercancias son vendidas, these goods are sold;
but also:

Estas mercanciis se venden, literally: these goods
sell themselves.

Fué prometida una recompensa, a reward was promised;
or reflectively:

Prometiése una recompensa, lit. a reward promised
tiself*).

In English such sentences are translated with the words:
people, they, one etc.. or with the passize voice, thus:

& cree, ane believes. they believe, people believe etc.,
it is believed.
S asegura, one affirms, they. people ete. affirm.

2) The construction with se is frequently impersonal, as
in the above sentences se cree. se asegura, where no accusa-
tive follows the verb. In this case se is used with the sin-
gular of the verb, as in the preceding examples. But whenever
an accusative follows in English, as in the sentence: One
sells (people seil) these goods, the verb, in Spanish. agrees
with its nominative; thus:

Estas mercancias se cenden, or s¢ venden (céndense)
estas mercancias.

3) Where the reflective form might seem ambiguous, as
in the sentence: Ome loves the children, reflectively: The
children love themselves = Los sifies se aman, this mode of
expression should be avoided, and the sentence rendered br
the passive voice, as:

Los nifics son amados;
or a convenient nominative may be used with the active
verb, as in English; thus:

Amamos d los nifios. we love the children.

man @ lis nifios, they love the children.

Cro ama @ Tos nifics. some one loves the children.

This is also the case. when the English one, people ete.
is.used with a reflective verb. Thus a mode of speaking like
se s¢ ama, one loves one’s self, is quite inadmissible, because

*) Se with the verb commonly precedes the subject of the
sentence.

Spanish Grammar. $
114 Lesson 27,

here the sentence would have 7o nominative case, but in its
stead a double accusative. Sentences like: Une flatters one's
self should, therefore, be rendered:
(Nosotros) nos lisonjerinos, we flatter ourselves, or:
(Vosotros) os lisonjeais, you flatter yourselves, or:
Los hombres se lisonjean, men flatter themselves, or:
Alguno se lisonjea, somebody flatters himself, or:
V. se lisonjea, you flatter yourself.
4) If in English the complement is a personal pronoun,
the subject being one, people etc., the passive voice should
be preferred in Spanish, as:
One loves him, El es amado;
or one of the above Nominatives may be chosen, as:
Alguno (V.) le ama ete.
5) Dative cases of the personal pronouns likewise occur
with this reflective form, as:
Se me cree, one believes me, or: I am believed, people
believe me etc.
Se le quiere, one loves him.
Se me contestd negativamente, people denied it to me.
6) Whenever the speaker is not included, sentences of a
vague or comprehensive import, as: “they say’, “people will
talk”, “at is whispered about”, “it is generally believed”,
“he is generally beloved” etc., are frequently rendered by
the 3. pers. plur. without the personal pronoun, a nominative
like los hombres (people) being understood. Ex.: Creen, it is
believed; aseguran, people affirm; se lisonjean, they flatter
themselves; prometieron una recompensa, a reward was offered;
le aman, he is liked; venden estas mercanctas, these goods
are selling; me han robado, I have been robbed.

Neuter verbs.

They denote either a state of rest, as dormir, to sleep,
or an action which does not pass over to an object, as
Wega, to arrive, caer, to fall etc. Their use is very
simple, the compound tenses being always formed with
the auxiliary haber; thus:

Hube legado, I had arrived.
Ha muerto, he has died.
He dormido, I have slept etc.

‘

Words.
Los preliminares, the preli- cl embustero, hypocrite, cheat.
minaries. la lana, the wool.

la paz, the peace. el cuero, the leather.
On the Passive Voice.

_el asunto, the object, matter.

la memoria, a report, the
memoir, memory.

G | the master.

la felicidad, the happiness.

el volumen, the volume, cir-
cumference, extent.

el nombre, the name.

el apuro, the want, necessity.

la fortuna, the fortune.
el poder, the power, might.
el ladron, the thief, robber.
el imperio, the empire.
el viajero, the traveller.

el compasero, the companion.

soberbio, -a, proud.
herido, -a, wounded.

feroz, ferocious, wild.

matar, to kill, slaughter.

asesinar, to murder.

derrotar, to put to flight, to
rout (an army).

asegurar, to assure.

firmar, to sign,

quejarse, to complain.

pedir, to ask, to demand.

ser pedido, to be in demand.

encumbrar, to raise.

buscar, to seek.

acabar, to finish, to terminate
(= achever in French).

corregir, to correct, to mend.

convidar, to invite.

maltratar, to treat badly, rudely.

concluir, to conclude.

sostener, to maintain, to sustain.
mucho tiempo hay, it is a good while.

Reading Exercise.

44,

Dicen que los alemanes han derrotado 4 los franceses.

Aseguran que los preliminares de la paz se han firmado. Se

“quejan de V. Somos umados de*) todos nuestros amigos. El
embustero es aborrecido. La lana de Espafia es muy pedida.
Los cueros son muy buscados. Gustavo Adolfo, rey de Suecia,
fué matado en la batalla de Liitzen. El militar que ha sido
herido, ha muerto esta’ noche. Cuando nuestras traducciones
serén acabadas, serdn corregidas por*) el maestro. Fut con-
vidado por el ministro 4 escribir una memoria sobre este
asunto. ¢Han Iegado esos sefiores de Madrid? Este perro
es muy maltratado por*) su duefio. La operacion fué con-
cluida con gran felicidad. El libro que he dado 4 mi prima
es compuesto por*) un hombre muy docto. El imperio de los
Césares se ha sostenido mucho tiempo sdlo por su extension
y su nombre. Si tu padre no hubiera muerto, no te verias
(thou wouldst not see [find] thyself) en tanto apuro. El so-
berbio y feroz Atila fué vencido por*) los francos y los godos.
Julio César, encumbrado por la fortuna al mds alto grado
‘del poder, fué asesinado por Bruto y sus compafieros.

Traduccion. 45.

Wallenstein was murdered’ by two of his officers. The
hypocrite is despised by all, and is loved by none. Leather

 

 

*) By with the passive voice is de, if a moral, and por, if a
- material action is meant. [The same as in French de and par.]
: ge
Lesson 27.

116
and wool were much in demand. By whom has the letter
been signed? We were invited a long time ago, but we had
no time to come. The traveller and his companions were
murdered by the robbers. (The) king Gustavus Adolphus of
Sweden (has) died at Liitzen. They say that a great many
(muchos) soldiers have been wounded in the battle. Do they think
(believe) that the preliminaries of (the) peace have been signed?
They assure that these goods are selling well. One is
mistaken, if one flatters one’s self. My father (has) said that
all the goods have been sold (tr. have sold themselves).
When did the gentleman arrive? The friends of the mer-
chant had all been invited. By whom have the Goths been
conquered? This book has been written by one of the first
Spanish poets. Frequently one does not believe what one
affirms (before) to others. The pupils would have been praised
by their masters, if they had done their translations without

any mistakes (falta).

Conversacion.

éPor quién fué asesinado
Julio César?

éHa llegado ayer su amigo
de V.?

éCudndo ha muerto el rey
Luis XVI de Francia?

éPor quiénes fué vencido
Atila?

éCémo fué concluida lo ope-
racion?

éPor quién es compuesto este
libro?

é Cuando
Adolfo?

é¢Ha muerto el militar que ha
sido herido?

éPor quién serdn corregidas
nuestras traducciones?

éQuién es aborrecido?

muriéd Gustavo

éCudndo se ha tenido el baile
(ball) ?

éQué se dice de nuevo en la
ciudad?

Por Bruto y sus compafieros,
No, Sefior, ha legado hoy.
Ha muerto 4 21 de enero 1798.

El soberbio y feroz Atila fué
-vencido por los francos y los
godos.

Fué concluida. con gran feli-
cidad.

Es compuesto por un hombre
muy docto.

Este rey fué matado- en la ba-
talla de -Liitzen.

No ha muerto; al contrario,
esta mejor hoy que ayer.

Serdn corregidas por nuestro
maestro,

El embustero eg aborrecido de
todo el mundo.

Se ha tenido ayer,

Dicen. que Su Majestad el em-
perador ha llegado,
Pronominal or Reflective Verbs. 117

Reading Exercise.
La gallina de los huevos de oro.

Erase una gallina que ponia

Un huevo de oro al duefio cada dia.
Aun con tanta ganancia mal contento
Quiso el rico avariento

Descubrir de una vez la mina de oro,

Y hallar en ménos tiempo mds tesoro.
Matéla, abridla el vientre de contado;
Pero despues de haberla registrado,

éQué sucedid? que, muerta la gallina,
Perdid su huevo de oro*y no halldé mina.

Erase, there was (see Less. 28,1). hallar, to find.

la gallina, the hen. ménos, less.

poner, to lay. mds tesoro, a greater treasure.

el huevo, the egg. matola = la maté, he killed her.
el dueno, the master. abridla = la abrié, he opened her
cada dia, every day. (see Less. 24, 1).

aun, yet. el vientre, the belly, womb.

la ganancia, gain. de contado, directly.

mal contento, not satisfied. despues de haber, after having.
el avariento, the miser. registrar, to search, to examine.
quiso (fr. querer), wished. suceder, to happen.

descubrir, to discover. muerta la gallina, the hen died.
de una vez, at once. perder, to lose.

la mina, the mine.

Twenty-eighth Lesson. Leccion vigésima
octava.

Pronominal or reflective verbs.

These verbs are called pronominal or reflective, because
their complement is a personal pronoun, referring to, and
identical with the subject. In the simple tenses this
pronoun, with very few exceptions, may either precede
or follow the verb. In the latter case it is affixed.

Reflective verbs are very frequent in Spanish, a
great many of them being rendered by neuter verbs in
English, that is to say, by verbs without any comple-
ment whatever.

Me alegro (or alégrome), I rejoice.
118

Sing.

Plur.

Sing.

Plur.

Sing.

Plur.

Lesson 28.

Example.
Infinitivo.

Alegrarse, to rejoice.
Indicativo.

Presente.
Me alegro (alégrome), I rejoice.
te alegras (alégraste), thou rejoicest.
se alegra (alégrase), he rejoices.
Nos alegramos, we rejoice.
os alegrais, you, rejoice.
se alegran (alégranse), they rejoice.

Imperfecto.
Me alegraba (alegradbame), I rejoiced.
te alegrabas (alegrdbaste), thou rejoicedst.
se alegraba (alegrabase), he rejoiced.
Nos alegrdbamos, we rejoiced.
os alegrabais, you rejoiced.
se alegraban (alegrdbanse), they rejoiced.

Definido.
We alegré (alegréme), I rejoiced.
te alegraste, thou rejoicedst.
se alegré (alegrése), he rejoiced.
Nos alegramos, we rejoiced.
os alegrasteis, you rejoiced.
se alegraron (alegréronse), they rejoiced.

Futuro.
Me alegraré, I shall rejoice.
te alegrards thou wilt ‘rejoice.
se alegrard, he will rejoice ete.

Condicional.
Me alegraria, I should rejoice.
te alegrarias, thou wouldst rejoice ete.

Imperativo.
Alégrate, rejoice (thou)!
alegrdos, rejoice (you, plur.)!
alegrémonos, let us rejoice! (See Less. 24, page 99.)

Polite mode.

Sing. alégrese V., rejoice (you)!
Plur. alégrense Vds., rejoice (you)!
Pronominal or Reflective Verbs. 119

Subjuntivo.

Presente.
Ve alegre, I rejoice.
te alegres, thou rejoice ete.

Imperfecto.
Me alegrase, I might rejoice.
te alegrases, thou mightest rejoice etc.

Futuro.
ile alegrare, (that) I shall rejoice.

Condicional.
we alegrara, (that) I should rejoice.

Gerundio.
Alegrandose, rejoicing.
Tiempos compuestos.
Indicativo.
Perfecto indefinido.
Me he alegrado, I have rejoiced.
te has alegrado, thou hast rejoiced etc.

Pluscuamperfecto.
Me habia alegrado, I had rejoiced etc.

Perfecto anterior.

Me hube alegrado. 1 had rejoiced etc.
Futuro perfecto.

Me habré alegrado, I shall have rejoiced ete.

Condicional perfecto.
Me habria alegrado, I should have rejoiced etc.

Subjuntivo.
Perfecto indefinido.
Me haya alegrado, I have rejoiced ete.
Pluscuamperfecto.
Me hubiese alegrado, (that) I had rejoiced etc.
; Futuro.
Me hubiere alegrado, (that) I shall have rejoiced.
Condicional.
Me hubiera alegrado, (that) I should have rejoiced.
120 Lesson 28.

Notes.

1) Very often the Spanish reflective form of the verb
implies separation or isolation. Thus: estar is ‘to be’, estarse,
to be alone; ir ‘to go’, arse, ‘to go away’*).

2) Likewise, verbs denoting a state of transition are
very frequently rendered by the Spanish reflective verb,
Thus: dormir, to sleep, dormirse, to fall asleep; morir to die,
_morirse, to die away (French: “se mourir”); ahogarse, to be
drowned; qguemarse, to burn down etc.

3) Again, the reflective form modifies the meaning of
the verb in a way which, in English, must be periphrased by
an adverb or in some other mode: thus:

reir, means “to laugh” — reirse, ~‘to laugh scornfully, to
sneer’;

comer, » “to eat” — comerse, “to eat by one’s self,
alone”’;

hallar, » “to find” — hallarse, ‘to find and to keep”.

Sometimes the meaning of the verb is rendered more
emphatic by the reflective form. Thus: saber means “to
know”; saberse, to mind.

4) Finally, in the plural, the Spanish reflective verb
expresses reciprocity; thus: se aman means “they love them-
selves” and also “they love each other” or ‘one another.”
Where a misconception might arise, the word mismo, -a, should
be added to correspond with “self’, and el wno al otro etc.;
for “one another, each other” ete.

5) In English a great many verbs are neuter or passive,
which in Spanish require the reflective form. Such verbs are:

llamarse, to be called or named (French: s’appeler).
enojarse, to grow angry.

levantarse, to rise.

acostarse, to go to bed.

pasearse, to take a walk.

sentarse, to sit down, to take a seat.

Words.
La érden, the order. el jefe, the chief.
la razon, the reason. la mesa, the table.
la marcha, the march. los naipes, the cards.
el bolsillo, the pocket, the la bondad, the goodness.
purse. el camino real, the main-road.

*) In familiar language, the Imperfect of ser, to be, used
reflectively, corresponds with the English there was in days of
yore, there was in olden times etc. Ex.: Erase un rey etc. There
was in olden times a king etc. ,
Pronominal or Reflective Verbs. 121

el juego, the game (Frenchjeu). apartarse, to stand away, to

engaharse, to be mistaken. keep back.

jugar, to play. sacar, to take oft ....

se juega, one plays, they play acomodarse, to conform one’s
ete. self to. ...

sentarse, to sit down. saber, to know.

imcomodarse, to take pains, to did (8. Sing. Def.), gave. .
trouble one’s self. muy de manana, very early.

ordenar, to order. ad orillas, at the side, brink,

retirar, to draw back. border, edge ete.

divertirse, to amuse one’s self. luego que, as soon as.

Reading Exercise. 46.

V. se engafia.. Los hombres se han engafiado los unos
4 los otros. Unas veces se juega 4 los naipes y otras veces
se habla sobre alguna cosa. jTenga V. la bondad de sentarse!
No se incomode V. ¢Cémo se ha divertido V. ayer en el
baile? Me alegro mucho que V. se haya divertido con todo
su gusto (so well). V. se ha acostado tarde, pero yo me he
levantado muy de mafiana. Didse 4 un tiempo la érden y
la razon de la érden, con que (therefore) todos se dispusieron
(prepared themselves) & la marcha. El jefe ordend 4 los sol-
dados que se apartasen del camino real. Sentéme al pié de
un drbol que estaba 4 orillas del camino, y para divertirme
saqué (see Less. 22, 1) un libro que tenia en el bolsillo. Si
no te acomodares 4 la vida que hago (I lead) serds duefio
(to be at liberty) de retirarte. Sdbete que no te he traido
(brought) aqui para que (that) te mueras de hambre. Luego
que nos levantamos (Def.) de la mesa, el criado me did la
carta.

Traduccion. 47,

My mother was (transl. has been) mistaken, when she
gave (tr. dando... giving . . .) you the letter. IfI had been
mistaken, I should have told (you so) it you. Get up, child!
Rise, Sir! I gave myself much trouble to pull the book out
of my pocket. We did not deviate from the main-road. Leave
(from apartarse de...) this society! * Shall we sit down at
the foot of that tree? We should draw back, if the chief
(gave the order) ordered it. Did they not state (tr. was not
given) (fr. darse) the reason of this order? Do they play at
cards (fr. jugarse) every night at your cousin’s?*) Cards are
seldom played (¢. e. they seldom play) there, but they (talk*
about) speak of (a great) many things. Do not trouble (your-
self), Sir, I have already (ya, prec.) taken [a] seat (fr. sentarse).

*) en casa de su primo. The English phrase with the Saxon
genitive: at my brother's, cousin's, butcher's, tailor’s etc. should
be rendered with en casa de, at the house of .....
122 Lesson 28.

Yesterday I rose at 4 o’clock, and to-morrow I shall likewise
(tambien) rise at + o'clock. Are you not afraid to abuse
(abusar de...) my goodness? I was alone (see 1) in my
room, when the footman gave me the letter. There was once
& woman who had fourteen children, seven boys and seven
girls. Alas (Ayme)! the unhappy man will be drowned! We
love ourselves and we love one another. How can you laugh
at (de) the misfortune of others?

Conyversacion.
éV.°se ha engafiado, Sefior? Perdone V., no me he engafiado.
éA qué hora se levanta V. Me levanto a las cinco 6 seis

cada dia? de la mafiana.

éCuando se ha levantado V. Me he levantado a las seis y
ayer? media,

éY cudndo se acuesta*) V. A las diez u**) (or) once de
ordinariamente? la noche.

éQuiere V. pasearse conmigo? Gracias, Sefior, no tengo tiempo

ahora.

éNo se ha divertido V. ayer Al contrario, me he divertido
en el teatro? ‘con todo mi gusto.

éQué ordend el jefe 4 sus Que se apartasen del camino
soldados? real.

éCudndo le did 4 V. la carta Luego que nos levantamos de
el criado? la mesa.

éDénde se sentd V.? Sentéme al pié de un arbol.

éPor qué no juega V. 4 los Porque me acaloro (JI fly into a
naipes? passion) demasiado (too much

= casily) en el juego.

Reading Exercise.

Estando en Rusia un espafiol, pasd por un pueblo durante
el invierno, y se vid acosado por algunos perros. Bajdse para
coger una piedra 4 fin de ahuyentarlos: pero estaba tan fuer-
temente agarrada con el hielo, que no pudo arrancarla. «jOh,
maldito pais!» exclamé, «donde atan las piedras y sueltan los
perros. » ;

Pasar, to pass trough. a fin de, in order to.

el pueblo, the village. ahuyentar, to frighten.

el mvierno, the winter. estar agarrado con el hielo, to be
vid, he saw. frozen to the ground.

acosar, to pursue. pudo, he could.

el perro, the dog. “arrancar, to break off.

bajar, to stoop down. maldito, confounded,

coger, to seize. atar, to tie, to fasten.

la piedra, the stone. sueltan (from soltar, they), unchain.

*) See Less. 36. — **) See Less. 33, 2.
Impersonal Verbs. 1238

Twenty-ninth Lesson. Leccion vigésima
nona.

Impersonal verbs. — Verbos unipersonales,

1) These verbs are either really impersonal, 1. e. they
are only used in the third person singular, as Ilweve, it
rains, and therefore called in Spanish wnipersonatles, 1. e.
of one person*); or they are used as impersonal verbs,
as parece, it seems etc.

True impersonal verbs are:

Llover**), to rain — llueve, it rains.
helar, to freeze — hiela, it freezes.
nevar, to snow — nieva, it snows.
tronar, to thunder — truena, it thunders.
escarchar, to be a glazed frost — escarcha, it is a glazed frost.
relampaguear, to lighten -—— relampaguéa, it lightens.
Uoviznar, to drizzle — lovizna, it drizzles.
granizar, to hail — graniza, it hails.
amanecer***), to dawn, to — amanece, it dawns.

grow light
anochecer, to grow dark ~- anochece, it is growing dark.

2) Many others are coupled with hacer, to make,
ser, to be, haber, to have, valer, to be worth etc., as:

Es preciso, it is necessary, one must (see 4).
es justo, it is just.

es verdad, it is true.

es cierto, it is certain, sure.

hace calor, it is hot (il fait chaud).

hace frio, it is cold (il fait froid).

hace luna, the moon shines. .

ocho dias hace, it is a week ago.

mucho tiempo hace, it is a long while.

hay un ano, it is a year ago.

hay muchos hombres, there are many persons.
mis vale tarde que nunca, better late than never.
mds valdria, it would be better.

3) As we said Less. 8, 5, there is, plur. there are,
is rendered by hay. In all the tenses of this impersonal

*) In French: verbes unipersonnels = impersonnels.
*8) Tlover,=lat. plusre; pluit (pluvit), it rains.
*#+) Amanecer and anochecer are also personally used as:
Amanect en Paris, I arrived in Paris at daybreak.
124 Lesson 29.

verb, the 3rd pers. sing. of haber is used, whether follow-
ed by a singular or by a plural, as:
Hubo un hombre, there was a man. (Il y avait un
homme.) ;
Hubo hombres, there were men. (Il y avait des
hommes.)

(When speaking of time, hay corresponds with ago, as we
hinted before; thus: hay dos afios, two years ago.)

If some or any, joined to “‘there is’ or ‘‘there are”,
refer to a foregoing substantive (where the French use
en, and the Italians ne), the Spanish language requires
the accusative of the personal pronoun, which then agrees
with the preceding substantive in gender and number.
Thus:

I shall give you some books, if there be any.
Te daré libros, si los hay.

We shall eat cherries, if there be any.
Comeremos guindas, si las hay.

4) The English verbs must, to be obliged etc. are
commonly rendered by deber, as:

Debes escribir, you (thou) must write.

Very often their meaning is expressed by haber de .. .,
tener que... (see Less. 8, 6) or es preciso, es necesario,
es menester with que and the subjunctive mood, thus:

You must expect my brother.

V. ha de esperar & mi hermano, or:

V. tiene que esperar & mi hermano, or:

Es preciso (menester, necesario) que V. espere & mi
hermano. (= It is necessary that you... .)

If, however, the nominative is the indefinite pronoun
one, as: One must wait etc., the infinitive is used, as in
English; thus:

Es menester esperar, one must wait.

Words.
El remedio, the remedy. callar, to be silent.
la puerta, the door*). aprender, to learn.
el nombre, the name. creer, to believe.
el calor, the heat. ensenar, to teach [enseigner].
el cuarto, the room. adiwinar, to guess.
la ciencia, the science. demasiado, too, too much, too
el almacen, the shop. large ete.

la borrasca, the thunder-storm. pronto, quick, swift, prompt.

*) el puerto, the harbour; French: la porte, le port.
Impersonal Verbs. 125

Reading Exercise. 48.

éLilueve? No, graniza. Hay un mes que estuve en su
casa. No hay otro remedio que esperar. Jamas hubo rey
tan bueno como él. ¢Hay alguno 4 la puerta? Mas vale el
buen nombre que muchas riquezas. Mas vale callar que hablar
mal. Hace demasiado calor en su cuarto de V. Este pobre
muchacho tiene hambre y frio. Es preciso estudiar mucho
para aprender bien una lengua. Te daré dinero, si lo hay.
Hay hombres que creen que habia una ciencia que ensefiaba
4 adivinar lo futuro. Hacia buen tiempo ayer cuando legd
mi hermano. Ha helado hoy y ayer ha escarchado. Hay un
afio que no he visto 4 mi hermana. Ocho dias hace que
estuvimos en Viena. ¢Qué debemos hacer? Debemos ir al
mercado para comprar pan y frutas. Es preciso que la criada
barra mi cuarto. V. ha de venir pronto para ir al almacen.

Traduccion. 49.

Did it rain yesterday? No, it snowed. I think (creo)
(that) it will snow. It thunders and lightens. It has
thundered and lightened. Does it rain? No, it does not
rain, it drizzles. I arrived at night (anochecer) at Prague.
Tt was day-break when we arrived (amanecer) at Toledo.
There are many friends who are no (ér. not) better than
enemies. Was there much money in that purse? I think
there were 10 doHars in it. It is too hot (tr. warm) to-day;
we shall have a thunder-storm. It is too cold in this room.
I should give you some money, if I had some (any). He has
given him no money, because he had none. I must write a
few letters to-day; yesterday I was obliged to write six. It is
necessary to work if one wishes to learn something. My brother
must wait, till (hasta) my sister comes. Where were you last
year? A year ago I was at Sevilla, and two years ago I
was at Rome. Is it true (verdad) that you have written this
letter? I have written it a long time ago.

Conversacion.
éHace frio hoy? Al contrario, hace mucho calor.
éTiene V. hambre? No tengo hambfre, pero tengo
sed.
éEs verdad, que su hermano No ha Ilegado esta mafiana;
de V. ha legado esta ma- llegard esta noche.
fiana?
éEs cierto, que el rey ha Todavia no (not yet) ha muerto,
muerto? pero esté malisimo.

¢Hay alguno en este cuarto? No, Sefior, no hay ninguno.
éCudnto tiempo hay que V. Dos afios hay que estuve alli.
estuvo en Paris?
126 Lesson 30.

Es preciso que yo espere 4 No es menester esperarle.
su padre de V.?

éDebe V. ir al mercado? Debo ir alla.
éEs verdad que V. ha com- No, Sefior, no es verdad, no
prado algunos libros? he comprado nada.

gCuantos afios hay que V. Hay tres afios y algunos meses.
esta en esta ciudad?

Reading Exercise.

En medio de la gran crisis de la guerra de Siete afios,
un soldado de Federico el Grande desertd; le cogieron y se
le presentaron. «¢Por qué me has dejado?» le dijo Federico,
— «Sefior», le respondiéd el desertor, «vuestros asuntos van
tan mal, que he creido era preciso abandonarlos.» — «Pues
bien, quédate todavia hasta mafiana», le dijo Federico (era la
vispera de una batalla), «y si no van mejor, desertaremos

juntos.»

Em medio, in the middle. creer, to believe, to think.

la guerra, the war. ser preciso, to be necessary.
desertar, to desert. abandonar, to abandon, forsake.
coger, to seize. pues bien, well.

dejar, to leave, to abandon. quedarse, to stay, remain.

los asuntos, business, affairs. la vispera, eve.

van, they go, they are. juntos, together.

Thirtieth Lesson. Leccion trigésima.
On Adverbs.

Adverbs modify verbs, adjectives, or other adverbs.
They denote manner, time, place, motion, order, quantity,
quality ete.

They are either proper adverbs (see next lesson), as
bien, well; demasiado, too, too much etc., or formed from
adjectives or participles by the addition of the termina-
tion —*mente.

Rules.
1) If the adjective ends in —o, the adverb is formed
by adding —imente to the feminine form in —a, thus:
docto, learned, fem. docta, adv. doctamente.
diestro, dexterous, » diestra, » diestramente.
2) If the adjective does not end in —o, —mente is simply
added to the termination, thus:
facil, easy, adv. fdcilmente.
constante, constant, » constantemente.
On Adverbs. 127

Note. Here-we state at once a peculiarity of the Spanish
language, concerning the adverb. If several adverbs ending
in -mente follow each other, this termination is, for the sake
of euphony, added to the last only.. .Thus:

Ciceron escribid clara, concisa y elegantemente.
Cicero wrote distinctly, concisely, and elegantly.

(Instead of: claramente, concisamente y elegantemente.)

An adverb in —mente, not derived from an adjective en-
ding in —o, may not come between adverbs derived from
adjectives in —o, but should, for the sake of euphony, be
placed at the end. Thus the sentence:

Cicero wrote learnedly, elegantly, concisely, and distinctly,
may not be translated:

Ciceron escribié docta, elegantemente, concisa y claramente,
but only:

Ciceron escribid docta, concisa, clara y elegantemente*).

3) The Spanish adverb takes its place after the verb;
thus:

El discipulo estudia siempre su leccion.
The pupil always studies his lesson.

In compound tenses the adverb cannot be placed between
the verb and the auxiliary, as in English, but it must always
follow the past participle, thus:

El discipulo ha estudiado siempre su leccion.
The pupil has always studied his lesson.

4) Adverbs form their comparative like adjectives (see
Less. 20), as:

Compar.

Doctamente, mds doctamente, ménos doctamente.

The superlative, used to express comparison, does not
differ in form from the comparative, and thus has no article;
it can always be gathered from the context, whether the com-
parative or superlative of the adverb is to be put in English;
e.g:

Manuelito lee el frances peor que su hermana.

The little Emanuel reads French worse than his sister.

But: De’ todos los discipulos tu eres el que te portaste peor.
Of all the pupils, thou art he who behaves the worst.

Adverbs are also derived from the Superl. absoluto of
the adjectives, by changing isimo in isimamente, as:

Doctisimo, adv. doctisimamente, in a very learned manner.

*) Likewise, if two or more adverbs in —mente, not derived

. from adjectives in —o, follow each other, the termination —mente

of all the adverbs, except the last, may be dropped; thus instead

of prudentemente y lealmente we may as well say prudente y
‘lealmente (prudently and loyally).
128 Lesson 30.

(We need not add that here also the termination — mente is
affixed to the feminine form in a.)
5) Irregular are: Comp. f
Bien, well, mejor, better (also adiect., see this);
mal, badly, peor, worse (also adj.);
mucho\ , sa
ea } very, mds, more;
poco, little, ménos, less.
Superl. absol.
éptimamente, very well;
pésimamente, very badly.
The following are both adjectives and adverbs:
Bastante, enough, but also adv. bastantemente;
cierto, certain, >» »  » etertamente, certainly;
demasiado, too, too much etc., but also adv. demasiadamente;
derecho, right, but also adv. derechamente, rightly;
solc*), alone, >» » » solamente, only, solely;
temprano, early, » » >»  tempranamente.

The signification of the following adverbs differs from
that of the corresponding adjectives:

Alto, high, aloud — altamente, magnificently, proudly.

bajo, low — bajamente, basely, vilely.

caro, dear — caramente, dearly.

primero, first, before — primeramente, firstly. [promptly,

pronto, direct, forthwith — prontamente, (also = pronto),

recio, lively — reciamente, (also recio), rashly,
roughly.

Words.

£1 orador, the orator. proximo, -a, near, next,

el verano, the summer. — propio, -a, proper.

el embajador, the ambassador. capaz, capable.

el actor, the actor. digno, -a, worthy.

el deseo, the desire. ancho, -a, broad, large.

el gozo, the pleasure. estrecho, -a, narrow.

el lugar, the village. constante, constant.

la razon, the reason. generoso, -a,. generous.

tener razon**), to be right. aro, -a, rare, seldom.

el consejo, the advice. perdonar, to pardon.

la voluntad, the will. levantarse, to get up.

la honradez, the honesty, de- ver (irr.), to see.

la obra, the work. [cency. Uenar, to fill.

el inventor, the inventor. siga, subj. pres. of seguir, to
la bota, the boot. follow.

*) solo, alone (adjective) without accent, sdlo, only (adverb)
with accent.
**) Tener razon french: <Avoir raison.
On Adverbs. 129

vestir, to clothe, to dress. continuar, to continue.
conservar, to preserve. incomodar, to molest, incommode.
tratar, to treat. venir bien, to fit.

Reading Exercise. 50.

Este hombre habla muy elocuentemente. El habla mejor
que el otro orador. V. me ha dado demasiado dinero. Yo
no tengo bastante. En verano me levanto cada dia temprano.
El actor no habla bastante alto. jHable V. bajo! El autor
ha escrito clara, concisa y elegantemente. El deseo de ver
la ciudad y principalmente el palacio del rey me Ilend de
gozo. Los lugares préximos 4 una gran ciudad venden bien
sus frutos. La razon quiere que el hombre siga mds los pru-
dentes consejos gue no (than) su propia voluntad. El rey
did ordenes para vestir ricamente 4 los extranjeros. La hon-
radez se conserva tratando siempre derechamente con los
hombres. Cervantes hizo ver (showed, proved; lit. made see) que
otra pluma no era capaz de continuar dignamente su obra,
que la de su inventor. Este vestido me incomoda mucho;
no es bastante ancho. Mis botas son demasiado estrechas;
no me vienen bien. Cuando uno quiere hablar de una obra,
es menester haberla visto primero.

Traduccion. 51.

This author writes well. The orator has spoken distinctly,
concisely and elegantly. He has sent me too much money.
You write too little, Sir; if you wrote more, you would write
more elegantly and more distinctly. This actor speaks too
low. Do speak loud, Sir! I rosé (have risen) very early to-
day. He has certainly done it. The lawyer spoke very
learnedly, but not distinctly enough. My coat is better made
than yours; it fits me very well. I gave (have given) money
enough to my son. Why have you followed more your own
will than (que no) the wise advice of your uncle? The am-
bassadors were all very richly dressed. I always learn my
lesson, and I have always learned it well. He spoke of a
work which he had never seen before. Nobody is always
happy in this world. The king has generously pardoned his
enemies. Which man has always spoken well? We (have)
arrived to-day very early. (The) rich people are seldom happy.

Conversacion.
éCémo ha hablado este hom- Ha hablado elocuentisimamente.
bre?
é¢Cémo escribid Ciceron? Ciceron escribid concisa, clara
y elegantemente.
Ha estudiado V. su leccion? He estudiado siempre mi lec-
cion.

Spanish Grammar. 9
130 Lesson 30.

éQuién es siempre feliz en Nadie.
este mundo?
jHa dado V. bastante dinero Le he dado demasiado.
a su hijo? ;
éQue quiere la razon? Que el hombre siga los pru-
dentes consejos.
4Cémo se conserva la hon- Tratando siempre derechamente
radez? con los otros.
éQue hizo ver Cervantes? Que otra pluma no era capaz de
continuar dignamente su obra.
éPor qué le incomoda 4 V. Porque no es bastante ancho.
su vestido?
éNo le vienen bien 4 V. sus No, son demasiado estrechas.
botas?

Reading Exercise.

El estornino sagaz.

Un estornino sediento hallé una garrafa lena de agua,
é*) inmediatamente procurd beber, pero el agua apénas Negaba
al cuello de la garrafa, y el pico del pdjaro no podia al-
canzarla.

Se puso luego 4 picar la garrafa 4 fin de hacer un
agujerito; pero se esforzd en vano, porque el vidrio era muy
grueso. Entdénces intenté voltear la garrafa para derramar
el agua; pero no pudo hacerlo, porque era muy pesada.

Al fin concibid una idea, que se le logré; eché poco 4
poco en la garrafa una cantidad tan grande de pedrecitas,
que hicieron subir el agua 4 la distancia que su pico podia
alcanzar, y luego apagd su sed.

Mas vale mafio que fuerza; la paciencia y la reflexion
hacen faciles muchas cosas, que parecian imposibles 4 primera
vista.

El estornino, starling. podia, could,

sagaz, sly. - aleanzar, to reach.
sediento, thirsty. se puso (from ponerse), he began.
hallar, to find. luego, then.

la garrafa, bottle. picar, to peck, to pick.
lleno, filled, full. a fin de, in order to.
inmediatamente, immediately. hacer, to make.
procurar, to try. el agujerito, a little hole.
beber, to drink. esforzarse, to take pains.
dpénas, scarcely. en vano, vainly.

el cuello, neck. el vidrio, glass.

el pico, bill. grueso, thick.

*) é, instead of y, because the following word begins with —i.
(See Less. 33, 1.)
The Adverbs continued. 131

enténces, thereupon, Hee, la cantidad, quantity.
intentar, to try. la pedrecita, little stone.
voltear, to turn upside ‘down, hicieron, made, caused.
derramar, to pour out. subir, to rise.
concibid, he conceived (from apagar, to satisfy.

concebir). la mana, ability, skill; dexterity.
que se le logré, in which he la fuerza, strength.

succeeded. hacen, make, render (8rd. pl.).
echar, to throw. parecian, seemed (fr. parecer).
poco d poco, by degrees. ad primera vista, at first sight.

A

 

Thirty-first Lesson. Leccion trigésima
prima.

The Adverbs continued.

In the foregoing lesson we observed, that besides the
adverbs derived from adjectives or participles by addition
of the termination —mente, there are a great many true
adverbs denoting manner, order, time, place etc. Thus
we have 1) Adverbs of place. 2) Adverbs of time. 3) Ad-
verbs of manner. 4) Adverbs of quantity. 5) Adverbs
of affirmation, negation, and doubt.

There are also adverbial expressions, i. e. compounds
of substantives, adjectives etc. with prepositions, as: por
fuerza, on compulsion, en poco tiempo, soon etc.

1, Adverbs of place.

Aqui, here. debajo, beneath.

ahi, there. enfrente, opposite.

alld, there (= thither). fuera :

acd, here (= hither). afuera Gutauds,

donde, where. adelante, forward, on.

adonde \ J... atras, backward, behind.

é donde | Whither. junto, near, next to...

de donde, whence. encima, upon, on.

arriba, up, above. léjos, far.

cerca, near, about. dentro, within, inside.

abajo, down, below. adentro, towards the interior.
2. Adverbs of time.

Hoy, to-day. tarde, late.

manana, to-morrow. despacio, slowly.

ayer, yesterday. temprano, early.

luego, directly, immediately. siempre, always.
gr
132 Lesson 31.

presto \ ya, already.

pronto | quickly. pues, then, afterwards.
aun, yet. todavia, still. 3
ad menudo, often. aprisa, apriesa, quickly.
entonces, then, afterwards. ahora, now.
despues, after. interin, meanwhile.

3. Adverbs of manner.
Bien, well. quedo, quietly.
mal, badly. medianamente, middling, tole-
ast, so, thus. rably.
alto, aloud. casi, almost, nearly.
bajo, low, softly, gently. quied

recio (reciamente), violently, auicas | perhaps.
aparte, separately. [severely. talvez

’ 4, Adverbs of quantity.

Muy very, much. ademas, besides.

mucho, much. tan, tanto, so much.
mds, more. cuan, cuanto, how much.
bastante, enough. harto, enough.

poco, little. apénas, scarcely.

demasiado, too, too much.

5. Adverbs of affirmation and negation.

Si, yes. a jamas, ever, never.
no, NO. nunca jamas*), never.
cierto (ciertamente), certainly. ya no eee
nunca, never. no... yas

6. Adverbial expressions.
Por fuerza, on compulsion. en poco tiempo, soon, in a short

sin falta, surely, assuredly. time.
por desgracia, unfortunately. sobremanera, immoderately.
ad pierna suelta, carelessly. de buena gana, willingly.

por extenso, in detail, amply, fully.
al pié de la letra, literally etc.

Observations.

1) The difference between mucho and muy is as follows:

a) Mucho, like the English “much”, is used with the
verb in simple tenses or with the auxiliary haber, as:

Le amo mucho, I love him much.
Le he amado mucho, I have loved him much.

#) most emphatic.
The Adverbs continued. 1383

b) If, on the contrary, ser, estar, or tener are coupled
with the past participle, or if this participle is used like an
adjective, muy should be employed, thus:

Ell rey es muy amado, the king is much beloved.
Muy amado amigo, dearest friend.

c) With an adjective or another adverb muy only is ad-

missible, like the English ‘very’, as:
Muy bien, very well.
Muy grande, very great.

ad) Muy is but an abbreviation of mucho. It is used, as
we observed, before adjectives and adverbs. Besides, it stands
before adverbial locations, as: muy en peligro, in a great
danger (liter. much in a danger); muy & la vista, much in
sight. The student may notice at once, that mucho should
be used instead of muy when the English “much” follows
the adjective or participle, as:
Fueron aplaudidos, pero no mucho.
They were applauded, but not much.
Esta enfermo y mucho.
He is (indeed) very ill; (lit. He is ill and much [i. e. ill]).

Observe the form of address in commercial letters:
Muy Sefior mio, Dear Sir.

2) Tan and tanto follow the same rules as muy and
mucho, thus:

Le he estimado tanto, I have esteemed him so much!
Whereas:

El es tan estimado como ..., he is no less esteemed than...

’ (Gt. quite as much as....).

8) The adv. recientemente, recently, drops its last three
syllables before participles and adjectives used instead of par-
ticiples, as:

Un nino récien (= recientemente) nacido.
A new-born child.

Los récien llegados.

The new comers.

Se embarcaron con cuatro personas de las récien libres
(= libradas). Cerv.
They embarked with four persons of the recently rescued*).

4) The negative terms nunca, jamas, nada (nothing),
ninguno and nadie (nobody) require no, if they follow the
verb, but not, if they precede it, as:

*) —. from among those who had been recently rescued.
134 Lesson 31.

No hay ninguno, there is none; but: Ninguno hay.
No se dice nada, nothing is said; but: Nada se dice.
No lo crei jamas, I never believed it; but: amas lo erel.
5) With ni — ni (neither — nor) the negation is like-
wise indispensable, thus:
No tengo ni amigos ni dinero.
I have neither friends nor money.
Sometimes, however, the first mi may be omitted, as:
No es bueno ni mato.
He is neither good nor bad.

Words.
La gloria, the glory. aborrecer, to abhor, to detest.
el subdito, the subject. atreverse, to dare.
el temor, the fear. venir & las manos, to come to
el correo, the post. blows.
el trabajo, the labour, work. arriesgar, to be at stake, to risk.
los viveres, the victuals. dudar de, to doubt about.
campestre, rural. vino, he (she, it) came (fr. venir).
agradecido, -a, thankful, grate- lograr, to obtain, to earn, to
coronar, to crown. [ful. gain, to win.
agradar, to please. muestra, shows, proves.

conceder, to allow, to concede. demas, other.

Reading Excercise. 52.

América estd cerca de Asia, y léjos de Europa. De buena
gana viviria en Madrid, porque alli tengo muchos amigos.
Los enemigos se coronaron de gloria, donde pocos dias antes
habian sido derrotados. No me agrada la mucha libertad que
V. concede 4 su hijo. Un escritor tan celebrado como Cal-
deron. El discipulo se muestra agradecido 4 su maestro,
estudiando mucho. Un rey tirdnico es muy aborrecido de
todos sus subditos. Siempre he amado mucho la vida cam-
pestre. Ni el uno ni el otro se atrevieron 4 venir 4 las
manos por el temor de no arriesgarlo todo. ¢De dénde*)
viene V.? Aun no llegado el correo; ni ayer tampoco vino.
Apénas hubo llegado mi amigo, cuando recibi las cartas. El

*) Donde, where, sometimes prefixes the prepositions d, en,
de, and por, and thus forms the adverbs: adénde (also written a
dénde), whither; endénde (en donde), wherein; dedénde (de dénde),
whence; porddénde (por dénde), where through (French: par ow).
Occasionally another preposition may be added, as:

Si vuelves presto de & donde pienso enviarte (Cerv.).
If you soon come back from where I have a mind to send
you (to).
The Adverbs continued. 135

fruto de su trabajo no pudo lograrlo*) jamas. La carne y
demas viveres eran demasiado caros.

Traduccion. 43.

I am very fond of (ér. I love much) my parents. Thou
speakest too loud; speak lower! Cervantes is a very celebrat-
ed Spanish (tr. of Spain) poet. He will never have seen
so many towns as I have (seen). Why have you come so
soon? I have written this letter in a hurry. Perhaps you
have not received my letter. This man is so despised, that
nobody will speak to him. I have always esteemed you so
much that I shall never doubt (of) your word. He has already
sent me twelve dollars, and now he sends me twenty. Your
son studies too much; six hours a (por) day are more than
enuugh. Unfortunately I have neither friends nor money;
how can you expect me to be (ér. will you that I be) satis-
fied with (contento con) my situation? It is now almost two
years that (since) I am in this town. Yesterday I have been
(tr. come) too late; to-day I come (vengo) sooner. Sometimes
we are quite as unjust towards ourselves as towards (the)
others. I have given you enough money; you have received
the price of your work. A town where (tr. in which) the
victuals (provisions) are too dear, cannot please a foreigner.
3So 4learned 12 2man must have studied much.

Conversacion.
éPor qué quiere V. vivir en Porque tengo alli muchos ami-
Madrid? gos.
éQuién es Calderon? Un escritor espafiol muy cele-
brado.
éCome se muestraundiscipulo Se muestra agradecido, estu-
agradecido 4 su maestro? diando mucho.

éPor qué es aborrecido este Porque es muy tirdnico.
rey?
éNo ha Iegado hoy el cor- No ha llegado hoy ni tampoco

reo? ayer.
éNo te ha pagado el mer- Me ha prometido frecuentemente
cader? darme mi dinero, pero hasta

hoy no me ha cumplido (kept)
su palabra (word).
éVendra V. (will you come) Gracias; lo siento’ (I am very
mafiana 4 mi casa 4 comer sorry), pero tengo compromiso
(dine) conmigo? (I am engaged) con unos ami-
gos para mafiana.

*) If the accusative precedes the verb, the respective personal
pronoun (here Jo referring to fruto) should be affixed.
136 Lesson 32.

éEs verdad que su amigo de Por desgracia es cierto.
¥. ha muerto?
éCémo, todavia esti V. en Perdone V., me acosté (went

cama (bed)? to bed) ayer muy tarde.
éQué se dice en la ciudad? No se oye (hews) nada de
nuevo.

éHa recibido V. mi carta? = He recibido su carta de V. 4 las
ocho y entonces la de su her-
mano.
éCudénto tiempo hay que V. Aun no hace dos meses.
aprende el castellano?

Reading Exercise.

Un regidor de Saumur, diputado para arengar al rey,
did principio 4 su discurso de esta suerte: «Sefior, los habi-
tantes de la villa de Saumur se tienen por tan dichosos en
ver 4 Vuestra Majestad, que....que...». Y no pudo
decir mds. «Si, Sefior», dijo el duque de Bréze, «los habi-
tantes de Saumur se tienen por tan dichosos en ver 4 Vuestra
Majestad, que no pueden expresar su gozo.»

El regidor, the alderman. se tienen por, esteem themselves.

diputado, sent, deputed. dichoso, happy.

arengar, to address, to ha- pudo, he could. a
rangue. el duque, the duke.

dar principo, to begin. pueden, they can.

el discurso, the speech, expresar, to express.

de esta suerte, in this way. el gozo, the pleasure.

Thirty second Lesson. Leccion trigésima
segunda.
On Prepositions.

In Lesson 4 we have enumerated the prepositions
most in use. The Spanish prepositions are either simply
placed before the noun (see page 20), as: con el padre;
para el hermano; en la ciudad; or they require one of
the prepositions de and 4 following, as:

Junto & la casa, near the house.
Encima de la cama, on (upon) the bed.
Esta delante de mi, he stands before me.

They are either adjectives, like junto, or compounds
of prepositions with other words, like encima = en cima
(on the top). Reserving all particulars fer the Second
On Prepositions. 187

Part, we now subjoin the prepositions and prepositional
locutions which are in general usage.

a) followed by de:
Acerca de, for, because of, by dentro de, within.

reason of. despues de, after.
ademas de, above. detras de, behind.
a lado de, aside. en casa de, at the house.
ad cabo de, at the end. en cima de, on, upon.
dntes de, before. enfrente de, opposite.
a espaldas de, behind. fuera de, except. ‘
a pesar de, notwithstanding. por el medio de, through, across.
debajo de, under. respecto de, concerning.

delante de, before.

b) followed by &:
En cuanto a\ asfor,concern- conforme d, conformably.

en orden & J ing. respecto &, with respect to.
tocante dé, concerning. sin atencion d, without regard.

junto d, near, next to...

Words.
El pueblo, the people. la seguridad, the safety, security.
la fuerza, the force. la casa de ayuntamiento, the
el temor, the fear. town-hall.
la hacienda, the fortune. la costa, the coast.
el espacio, the space. lindo, lovely, sweet.
la potencia, the power. valiente, brave, gallant.
‘la criatura, the creature. desear, to desire.

el conciudadano, the citizen. enojarse, to become angry.
el cumplimiento, the compli- premiar, to reward.

ment(s). , es excusado, is superfluous.
el vencedor, the conqueror. hace, does.

Reading Exercise. 54.

El pueblo deseaba que premiaran 4 los vencedores y 4
los sabios. Han legado dos batallones que estaban de guar-
nicion en Madrid. Los padres y las madres trabajan para
sus hijos. El hombre valiente no hace nada por fuerza 6 por
temor. ¢Quién soy yo para con (in comparison) os? El
vino (came) antes de mi 4 la iglesia, y se puso (sat down)
delante de mi. Ademas de sus libros tenian todo lo que es
necesario para escribir. El capitan me llamé por mi nombre.
Detras de la casa hay un jardin muy ameno. Dentro de una
hora estaremos en seguridad. Los malos se enojan siempre
contra los buenos. ¢ Qué tal (what) es este hombre para con
138 Lesson 32.

sus conciudadanos? Desde el dia que los demas (the others)
se fueron (tent away), se fué tambien él. La lampara esté
encima de la mesa. El perro durmié debajo de la cama,
Para entre amigos es excusado el cumplimiento.

Traduccion. 55.

Near the town-hall there are some beautiful palaces.
Shall you come (vendrd V.) (still) before night? I shall come
after sunset (ponerse el sol). The world was created (hecho)
by God. What (quién) is the creature in comparison with
the creator? We speak about (the) affairs (las cosas) of
our nation. There might be (habrd) above two hundred per-
sons. Concerning this matter (asunto), I do not know (sé)
anything certain. Opposite the church there were three very
high trees. (The) man was (ha) not born (nacido) for him-
self alone. I am not ashamed always to speak the truth.
I was occupied from (the) morning till (to the) evening. The
father distributed (def. of repartir) all his fortune among his
children. (The) war is (esté) declared (fr. declarar) between
the two powers. The whole honour of the victory is for the
general. The thief hid himself behind the door. The ship
was wrecked (fr. naufragar) near (cerca de) the coast of
Sicily. (The) Mount Pico rises (fr. levantarse) above the other

mountains.

The king did not wish (quiso) that his sons

should reign (Imperf. Subj. of reinar) after him.

Conversacion.

éQué deseaba el pueblo?
éHa partido su amigo de V.?

éQué no quiso el rey?

éPor quiénes trabajan los pa-
dregs y las madres?

éQué ha publicado este au-
tor?

éDonde se escondid el perro?

éCuadl virtud es sobre todas
las virtudes? ;

¢éCudntos
amigo?

éIremos por el correo 6 por
el ferro-carril (rail-road)?

éQué no hace el hombre va-
liente?

afios tendra su

Que premiaran 4 los vencedores.

Si, ha partido ayer sin despe-
dirse (saying good bye).

Que sus hijos reinasen despues
de él.

Trabajan por sus hijos.

Ha publicado muchas invectivas
(libels) contra sus mismos
amigos.

Debajo de la cama.

La caridad.

Ahora tendré sobre cuarenta
afios.

Creo que haremos mejor en
tomar (if we take) el correo.

No hace nada por fuerza 6 por

temor.
ead
On Conjunctions. 139

Reading Exercise.
El traidor despreciado%).

Fué rogado un espafiol por Carlos quinto para que cediese
su palacio, el mds hermoso de Madrid, al condestable de
Borbon. Viendo el emperador que resistia, le dijo que debia
mirar como un honor el alojar en su casa 4 tan gran capitan,
El espafiol respondiéd que eran muy conocidas las altas pren-
das de aquel principe; pero que su traidora conducta para
con la Francia su patria las habia borrado todas. «Le cederé
mi palacio por obediencia>, afiadid, «mas suplico 4 Vuestra
Majestad (que) me permita darle fuego en cuanto el duque
haya salido de él. No podré yo resolverme 4 ocupar la misma
casa en que ha vivido un traidor.»

Despreciar, to despise. para con..., against...
rogar, to request. borrar, to efface, to expunge.
ceder, to cede. la obediencia, the obedience.
el condestable, the general of mas, but.
the crown, connétable. permitir, to permit.
viendo, seeing, el capitan, the general.
resistir, to resist. anadir, to add.
debia, he must, he ought to. suplicar, to beg.
mirar, to regard. e dar fuego d..., to set on fire.
dlojar, to lodge. en cuanto, aS soon as.
conocido, known. salir de..., to leave.
las alias prendas, the eminent resolverse, to resolve.
qualities. ocupar, to live in..
traidor, traitor, treacherous. vivir, to live.

la conducta, the conduct.

Thirty-third Lesson. Leccion trigésima
tercia.
On Conjunctions.

Conjunctions either join words and sentences together
or put them in opposition. We therefore distinguish co-
pulative and adversative conjunctions.

There are also simple and compound conjunctions.
The conjunctions most in use are:

a) Simple conjunctions:

Y (@), and. ni — ni, neither — nor.
6 (%), or. que, that.

 

 

*) See the poetical treatment of the same subject in «Un
castellano leal» por el Duque de Rivas, in the «Spanish Reader».
140 Lesson 38.

ya — ya, now — now. cuando, when, if.

mas*), but. si, if.

pero, but, yet. pues, as, because.
mientras, whilst.

b) Compound conjunctions:

Aunque, although, though. asi que, so that, as soon as,
por qué, why. con tal que, provided, on con-
porque, because, as. dition that.

bienque, though, although. por mds que, as much as.

supuesto ie, . entretano que, whilst.
ine me provided that. & ménos a unless.
para que, in order to, so that. hasta que, until.

pues que, as, because.

Some of these conjunctions govern the subjunctive
mood, if the idea expressed by the verb appears uncer-
tain, dubious, or merely possible. Such are dntes- que,
before; aunque, though; hasta que, until; para que, in
order that etc. For further particulars see Part II,
Lesson 14: On Conjunctions.

Notes.
1) For the sake of euphony, y (and) is replaced by é
before words beginning with i or hé (but not hie), as:
Padre é hijo, father and son.
2) In a similar way, @ is substituted for 6 before words
beginning with o, as:
Siete t& ocho, seven or eight.
3) Porque means both why? and because, as:

éPor qué no habla V.? why do you not speak?
Porque no quiero, because I do not choose.
In order to mark the difference, por qué, why? is written
in two words and with the accent, and porque, because, in
one word and without it.

Words.
El ministro, the minister. afable, kind, friendly.
el embajador, the ambassador. dichoso, happy.
el juez, the judge. Severo, severe, strict.
el amo, the master. sujeto, subject.
la ignorancia, the ignorance. perseguir, to persecute.
la sabiduria, the science. velar, to watch.

el discipulo, the pupil, scholar. recompensar, to reward,

 

*) mas, but, without accent; més, more, with accent.
On Conjunctions. 141

ganar, to earn, to gain. no tener ningun inconveniente, to
cansar, to tire; cansarse, to have no objection.
_ descansar, torepose. [gettired. dormir, to sleep.

Traduccion. 56.

The ministers and the ambassadors thought that the
proposal of (tr. what proposed [fr. proponer]) the emperor
would please (convenia) neither the king nor the people.
Peter or [an]lother' shall do (hard) it. I should be glad
(quisiera) to reward thee, but*) I cannot. I earn money
enough, but I am not satisfied. I cannot walk so far, because
I get tired. Provided they are (se muestren) kind, I have
no objection to pay them a visit (en ir ad verles). Money
makes (hace) rich, but not happy. (The) virtue, although
persecuted, is amiable. If I get (si me entrare) my money,
I shall pay you. I waked (Imperf.), whilst he slept. If it
brought (importar a) me a kingdom, I would not commit (haria)
an injustice. The judge, though severe, is just. (The) virtue
renders men happy (felices) in this world and blessed (bien
aventurados) in heaven. I say (digo) it now, that (para que)
he may hear (sienta) it himself. Wait (espere V.) in this
room, Sir, until my master comes (venga)! (The) men often
say (dicen) that they do not wish for (apetecen) riches.
Science and ignorance are opposed things. The girl under-
stands (sabe) sewing (coser) and spinning (hilar)**). He rests
neither by (de) day nor by night. Men or women, we are
all liable to passions. One should not (no se ha de) live in
order to eat, but one should eat in order to live. The master
takes pains (se afama) that he may bring forward (Subj.
pres. of adelantar) his pupils.

Conversacion.
éQuién ha lMegado hoy? El conde de Aguilar y su
sefiora (lady). :
éQué vende este negociante Vende plomo (lead) y hierro.

(merchant)?

éCudnto dinero ha, dado V. Le he dado siete t ocho duros
al criado? (dollar).

éPor qué no ha escrito V. 4 Porque no tengo el tiempo ne-
su padre? cesario para escribir.

gCudndo recibid V. la res- Despues de haber escrito esta

1, puesta (answer)? carta (letter).

éNo ha querido (did not like) Ni mi tio ni mi tia ha querido

venir aqui su tio de V.? venir.

*) But is pero, seldom mas. After a negative sentence but
is sino. — **) French: filer.

F
142 Lesson 33.

éQué dice un poeta de la Dice que la imitacion es como
imitacion (imitation)? el alma de la poesia.

éPor qué no pudo el capitan Porque estaba ausente.
asistir (assist) 4 la funcion

(solemnity) ?
éIra V. conmigo? Tré contigo, pues lo quieres.
éHa visto V. en verdad (veal- Cuando le aseguro 4 V. que le
ly) & mi hermano? he visto, puede creerme (be-
lieve me).
éQuiere V. d ese hombre? Aunque no me ha hecho (done)
nada, no le quiero.
éCudndo me pagara V.? Pagaré a V. si me entrare (lit.

to enter, tr. if I get) mi dinero.

Reading Exercise.
El amo y el criado.

Tenia un criado mucho que (fo) sufrir con el caracter
original de su amo. Volvid un dia este sefior 4 casa de muy
mal humor, se sentd 4 la mesa para comer; pero hallando la
sopa fria, y cediendo 4 su cédlera, cogié el plato y lo arrojé
por la ventana. Ocurridle enténces al criado ir echando tras
la sopa la carne que habia puesto.en la mesa, luego el pan,
el vino y en fin los manteles. «Qué haces ahi, temerario?»
dijo el amo irritado, levanténdose furioso de su _asiento.
«Perdéneme usted, Sefior», respondid con seriedad el criado,
«si no he comprendido bien su intencion. He creido que V.
queria comer hoy en el patio. jEl aire es tan apacible! el
cielo esté tan sereno! Mire V. el manzano jcudn hermoso
esté en flor! y con qué gusto buscan las abejas su alimento en
él!» El amo reconocié su falta, corrigidse de ella, y did gracias
interiormente al criado por la leccion que acababa de darle.

Tener que..., to have to.... la carne, the meat.

sufrir, to suffer. puesto, put.

volvid d casa, came home. luego, then.

de mal humor, in a bad temper. los manteles, the napkin,
sentarse, to sit down. hacer, to do.

la mesa, the table. temerario, you impudent fellow.
la sopa, the soup. levantarse, to rise.

frio, cold. el asiento, the seat.

ceder, to yield. la seriedad, earnestness, serious-
la célera, the anger. ‘ comprendido, understood.  [ness.
coger, to take. creer, to believe, think.

el plato, the dish. querer, to wish.

arrojar, to throw. el patio, the court-yard.

la ventana, the window. el aire, the air.

ocurridle al...,itoccurredto... apacible, quiet.

uw echando, to throw out. el manzano, the apple-tree.

tras, behind, after. buscar, to search.
On Interjections. 143

la abeja, the bee. corregirse, to reform one’s manners.
reconocer, to acknowledge. dar gracias, to thank.
acababa de darle, he had just given him. (See IL. P. Less. 17, 1.)

Thirty-fourth Lesson. Leccion trigésima
cuarta.
On Interjections. Interjecciones.

These words express some emotion of the speaker,
as joy, surprise, grief etc. Those most in use are:

Ha! he! hala! to denote joy.

Ah! ay! aymé! 6! to denote grief.

O! to denote surprise.

Ha! hé! hola! hé! to attract attention.
Chito! quedo! to command silence.
Ea! Sus! Animo! to encourage.

Ta! tate! to threaten.

Besides there are many compound expressions, as:
Ojala (properly Oh Allah), Would that God.
Valgame Dios! Good gracious!
Caramba! O dear me! etc. \
which are also used as interjections. TheSpanish language
abounds in such interjectional locutions.

Reading Exercise. 57.

jAh, qué desgracia (misfortune)! jAy, qué pena (pain);
6, desdichado de mi (how unhappy I am)! {0O, cielos! jHe,
qué es lo que decias (saidst)! Hola, muchacho, vendrds
luego (soon)? jHola, quién lo hubiera creido (thought,
believed)! jChito, ninguno hable, y todos oigan (shall listen)!
jEa, hijo mio, buen dnimo! jTa, ta; qué es lo que veo!
iVaya (Up), que ya es tiempo de lavantarse! jAy, qué gozo
(pleasure)! {Ah, deventurada mujer! {0, dolor! {Mira
(look), que infamia! jGracias 4 Dios! jBendito (praised)
sea Dios!

Reading Exercise.
Los panaderos generosos.

Presentdse el gremio de los panaderos ante el magistrado-
encargado de la policia de una ciudad, pidiéndole permiso
‘para encarecer cl pan, y al retirarse, dejaron los enviados
_diestramente encima de la mesa un bolsillo con cincuenta
onzas de oro. Volvieron algunos dias despues, no dudando
que el bolsillo habria abogado poderosamente por su causa;
144 ‘ Lesson 35,

pero el magistrado les dijo: «Sefiores, he pesado sus razones
en la balanza de la justicia, y no las he encontrado de bas-
tante peso: no me ha parecido justo el hacer sufrir 4 un
pueblo entero por un alza de precio mal entendida. Ademas
he hecho distribuir el dinero que me dejaron entre los dos
hospitales que hay en esta ciudad, no dudando fuese tal el
uso que Vds. deseaban se hiciera de él. He creido que siendo
bastante ricos para hacer semejantes limosnas, no deben per-
der en su oficio como lo dicen.»

El gremio, corporation. la causa, the cause.
el panadero, baker*), pesar, to weigh,
encargar, to charge. se hiciera, that’ should be made.
pedir, to ask, to demand. la balanza, the balance.
el permiso, permission. encontrar, to find.
encarecer, to sell dearer. bastante, sufficient.
al retirarse, when going away. el peso, the weight.
dejar, to leave. parecer, to seem.
el enviado, the deputy. entero, whole.
diestro, clever; adv. diestramente, el alza (f) de precio, the rise in
dextrously. price.
el bolsillo, the purse. entender, to understand.
la onza, the ounce (old Spanish ademas, besides.
gold- coin = § 16 or 80 pe- distribuir, to distribute.
setas [francs)). el uso, the use.
volver, to return, to come back. semejante, similar.
abogar, to plead. la limosna, the alms.
poderoso, powerful. el oficio, business; perder, to lose.

Thirty-fifth Lesson. Leccion trigésima
quinta.

On the irregular Verbs.

Irregular verbs are those which deviate in their con-
jugation from the regular verbs; unless this deviation be
a merely orthographical one, as with the verbs enume-
rated in Lesson 22, where the anomaly is only seeming,
because the alterations in the orthography are necessary
in order to maintain the original pronunciation of the verb.

A very considerable number of Spanish verbs are
only in so far irregular as to undergo an alteration of
the radical syllable in certain persons of the present in-
dicative and subjunctive, and in the ‘mperative, all the
other persons and tenses being perfectly regular.

*) Derived from pan, bread, French: pain. Latin: panis.
On the irregular Verbs. 145

This alteration of the radical vowel is originated by
the stress being laid on this vowel which is, as it were,
not strong enough to support alone the full weight of
the accent, and is, therefore, changed into two vowels,
whilst the other persons, where the stress is not laid on
the radical vowel, remain unaltered. Thus in the verb
alentar, to breathe, the 1. sing. pres. indic.. ought pro-
perly to be alénto*). Now this e (the. radical vowel)
cannot support by itself the weight of the accent, and
is, therefore, changed into ¢e. Thus aliénto*), instead
of alento. The 1. pers. plur. of the same tense, however,
is alentamos, and not alientamos, because here the stress
is laid on a (alentémos), and not on the e of the root.

Observ. Yet this transition of the radical vowel into
the diphthongs ie and we is not confined to the aforesaid
forms, but also occurs in the infinitive mood of some verbs.
Hence we have double forms, like diezmar, and dezmar, to
pay tithe; adiestrar, and adestrar, to direct; amueblar and
amoblar, to furnish (a room) etc. The conjugation of such
verbs with diphthongs for their radical vowel is regular. The
Spanish Academy recognises both forms, yet prefers the form
with the diphthong.

As the aforesaid deviation is found equally with verbs
of the first and of the second conjugation, we may bring
them both under the

First Class.
Character: The radical e is changed into ée.

Examples.
I. II.

Alentar, to breathe. Encender, to set on fire,

to light.
Presente.

Indicat. Subjunt. Indicat. Subjunt.
Aliento, I breathe Aliente Enciendo, llight Encienda
alientas alientes enciendes enciendas
alienta aliente enciende enctenda

alentamos alentemos encendemos encendamos
alentais alenteis encendeis encendais
alientan. alienten. encienden. enciendan.
Imperativo. Imperativo.

Alienta (ti). Aliente (V.). | Enciende (t%). Encienda(V.).

*) The accent is only used here to indicate the vowel on
which the stress is laid and must not be written.

Spanish Grammar. 10
146 Lesson 35.
Alphabetical list of the verbs liable to the same deviations:

Remark. In this and the following lists are many less
common verbs which are not so important for the beginner. It
will therefore be enough, if he learn those first which are printed

in spaced type.
Verbs in —ar.
Acertar, to guess.
acrecentar, to increase.
adestrar, to direct, to put to
rights.

alentar, to breathe.

apacentar, to graze, to pasture.

apretar, to press together.

arrendar, to lease, to rent.

asentar, to set.

aserrar, to saw.

asestar, to point (a gun).

atentar, to grope, to fumble’).

aterrar, to fling, to knock down’).

atestar, to fill with . . .8).

atravesar, to perforate, to
bar, to block.

aventar, to fan, to kindle; —se,
to run away.

Calentar, to warm.

cegar, to blind, to dazzle.

cercar, to surround,

cerrar, to shut.

cimentar, to cement, to lay the
foundation.

comenzar, to begin, to com-
mence.

concertay, to arrange; —se, to
concert.

confesar, to confess.

confesarse con, to confess to.

Decentar, to cut.

denegar, to deny.

dentar, to indent, to teeth.

derrengar, to lame.

desacertar, to cheat.

desalentar, to discourage.

desapretar, to loosen.

desasosegar, to trouble.

desatentar
desconcertar
desempedrar, to unpave (a street
etc.).
desencerrar, to free, to set at
liberty.
desenterrar,
dig out.
deshelar, to thaw [helar, to freeze].
desherrar, to unfetter, to take off
a horse-shoe.
desmembrar, to dismember.
despernar, to cut off a leg, to
lame a leg.-
despertar, (disp2rtar), to awake.
desplegar*), to unfold.
desterrar, to banish, to exile.
dezmar, to pay tithe.

to disconcert.

to disinter, to

Empedrar, to pave.

empezar, to begin.

encensar, to perfume.

encerrar, to imprison, to com-
prehend.

encomendar, to recommend.

encubertar, to cover.

enhambrentar, to starve.

enhestar, to raise, to put upright.

enmendar (emendar), to cor-
rect, to mend.

ensangrentar, to stain with blood.

enterrar, to bury.

errar, to be mistaken (Pres.
yerro etc.).

escarmentar, to sharpen one’s
wit.

estercar, to manure.

estregar, to rub.

Fregar, to rub, to itch.

1) Regular in the signification “to attempt the life of somebody”.

2) » >» » »
3)» » »

“to terrify”.
“to testify”.

»
4) Desplegar, forms desplego and despliego; even as desple-

garse, to retire in good order (milit.).

follows plegar.

Replegar, to fold again,
On the irregular Verbs.

Gobernar, to govern.

Helar, to freeze [French:
geler’).

herrar, to shoe a horse /ferrer].

Incensar, to incense, to perfume.

infernar, to send to the devil,
to make angry.

invernar, to pass the winter.

Manifestar, to manifest.

mentar'!), to mention.

merendar, to take one’s after-
noon collation (lunch).

Negar?), to deny.

nevar, to snow.

Pensar®), to think.

perniquebrar, to break one’s
legs.

plegar*), to fold.

Quebrar, to break.

Recomendar, to recommend.

regar, to water.

remendar, to mend.

remesay, to pull out the hair.

renegar, to abjure, to forswear.

requebrar, to break into little
pieces, to flirt.

rvetemblar, to tremble again.

retentar, to threaten with a
new fit (of illness etc.).

reventar, to burst.

Sarmentar, to gather cut off
vine-wood.

147
segar, to mow, to cut.
sembrar, to sow.
Sentar, to put; —se, to sit
down’).

serrar, to saw.
Sosegar, to tranquillize.
soterrar, to bury.

Temblar, to tremble.

tentar, to touch, to try.

trasegar, to pour over, to trans-
fuse.

tropezar, to stumble.

 

Verbs in er.

Ascender, to ascend.
atender, to pay attention to.
Cerner®), to bolt (meal).
Defender, to defend.
descender, to descend.

Encender, to light, to set on
fire.
entender, to understand.

Heder, to stink.
hender, to split.
Perder, to lose.

Reverier, to pour.

Tender’), to tend, to extend.
trascender, to mount over, to pass.
Verter, to shed.

Words.

To be right, tener razon.

to be wrong, no tener razon.
the bet, wager, la apuesta.
the cigar, el cigarro.

the rampart, la valla.
the sea, la mar.
the family, la familia.
the cow, la vaca.

1) The compounds, like comentar, dementar etc., are regular.
ramentar, to adorn, is not derived from mentar, but from pa-

ramento.

2) Anegar, to drown, is not derived from negar and is regular,

although in America spurious
occur.

forms like aniego, aniegas may

3) Compensar, recompensar etc. are regular.
4) See Foot-note 4. Page 146.
5) Presentar and representar, being no compounds of sentar,

are regular.

6) Discernir, to distinguish, formerly discerner, follows the
conjug. of cerner. — Concernir, to concern, is a defective verb.
7) Pretender, is regular. The other compounds like tender.

10*
148 Lesson 35.

the fault, mistake, la falta. { la lene.

likewise, tambien, igualmente. the wood, \ le madera.

to read, /eer. the blow, el golpe [Fr. le coup].
I say, digo. the valley, el valle.

not yet, aun — no. the noise, el ruido.

Traduccion. 58.

What do you think of this matter, Sir? I think that
you are wrong, and that your friend is right. Think what _
you please! I know (se) that my friend will lose this wager.
We lose our time, and you (Vds.), too, lose yours. I confess
my faults; why do you not confess yours? We confess that
you were right. I awake every morning at six o’clock. He
eats his afternoon collation at 5 o’clock. The child és teething
(pres.). When do we begin? I shall begin directly, and my
brother also begins. The poor soldier breathes. I am not
mistaken when I say that he does not understand me. Light
your cigar; there is a match (fésforo, m.). The ramparts
defend the town against the enemies. We now (ahora) begin
to read; dost thou also begin? I do not yet begin. I do
not deny that you have given me the money. The sun
dazzles me. The river falls (desembocar) into the sea. He
descends from an old Castilian family. I lose too much money
with [at] this game. We lose 10 dollars (peso, m.), and
that gentleman loses 15 dollars. The sun warms the earth.
I split this wood with one blow. The cows graze in the
valley. Correct the mistakes in your translation! Thou dost
not know what thou sayest (dices). I understand everything.
This noise troubles (disturbs) me.

Conversacion.
éPiensa V. en su tarea (task)? Pienso siempre en mis tareas.
éPierde V. mucho dinero? He perdido 5 duros, pero mi

hermano pierde mas.
éNo quiebra V. el vaso (glass)? No quiebro nada.
é¢Niegan Vds. que tenemos No negamos que Vds. tengan
razon? razon, pero negamos que ha-
gan bien (do well) en este
caso (case).

éPor qué no empieza V.? No empiezo, porque no tengo
gana de hacer lo que V.
quiere.

éA quién defiende V.? Defiendo 4 la pobre viuda (wi-
dow) que no tiene proteccion
(protection).

éEsta enfermo el nifio? Un poco; él dienta.

éPor qué no despierta V. asus Porque aun no es tiempo.
compafieros (companion)?
On the irregular Verbs.

jSiéntese V.! Mi ama legara
en un instante!

iCierre V. la puerta del cuarto!
¢Mi primo niega lo que V.
ha dicho?

149

No me siento, porque no tengo
tiempo.

Ya esta cerrada.

Pues niegue él (he may deny tt);
con todo eso (nevertheless) es

verdad lo que he dicho.

Reading Exercise.
Catinat.

Pasedbase un dia por su hacienda el mariscal de Catinat,
reflexionando como era su costumbre. Viene 4 él un fatuo
con el sombrero puesto y, mientras Catinat le escuchaba con
el sombrero en la mano, le dice: «Buen hombre, yo no sé
de quien es esta hacienda, pero puedes decir 4 su duefio que
me he tomado la libertad de cazar en ella». Como algunos
aldeanos que se hallaban alld cerca se rieron 4 carcajadas,
el joven cazador les preguntd con tono altanero de qué se
reian: «De la insolencia con que habla V. al mariscal de
Catinat», le respondieron. Vuélvese entdnces con el sombrero
muy bajo y se excusa diciendo que no conocia al mariscal.

«No sé», respondid Catinat,
& un hombre para quitarse
espaldas.

Pasearse, to take a walk.

la hacienda, the estate.

el mariscal, the marshal.

reflexionar, to reflect, to muse.

la costumbre, the use, manner.

el fatuo, the fop, coxcomb.

con el sombrero puesto, with his
hat on.his head.

miéntras, whilst.

escuchar, to listen.

sé, I know (fr. saber).

tomar, to take.

cazar, to hunt, shoot.

el aldeano, the peasant.

alld cerca, in the neighbourhood.

serieron, they laughed, fr. reirse.

@ carcajadas, outright.

«qué necesidad hay de conocer
el sombrero», y ie volvid las

joven, young.

el cazador, the hunter, sports-

el tono, the tone. (man.

altanero, supercilious.

la insolencia, the insolence.

volver, to turn.

entoénces, then.

con el sombrero bajo, with his
hat off.

excusarse, to apologise.

conocer, to know.

qué necesidad hay, why it is ne-
cessary.

quitarse el sombrero, to take off
one’s hat.

las espaldas, the shoulders, the
back. [French: épaules.]
150

Thirty-sixth Lesson. Leccion trigésima
sexta.
The irregular verbs continued.

A great many partly irregular verbs of the first and
the second conjugation change the radical vowel 0 into

ue. They form the
Second Class.

Character: 0 is changed into we.

I, Examples. Il.

Acordar, to agree. Morder, to bite.

Presente.

Indie. Subj. Indic. Subj.
Acuerdo, I agree Acuerde Muerdo, I bite Muerda
acuerdas acuerdes muerdes muerdas
acuerda acuerde muerde muerda

acordamos acordemos mordemos mordamos
acordais acordeis mordeis mordais
acuerdan. acuerden. muerden. muerdan.
Imperativo. Imperativo.
Acuerda (tu), agree (thou). Muerde (tt), bite (thou).
acordad, agree (you). morded, bite (you).
Acuerde V., do agree. Muerda V., do bite.

All the other tenses are regular.
Alphabetical list of the verbs that follow this example:

Verbs in —ar. amoblar, to furnish, see: Moblar.

Acordar, to agree; —se, to «molar, to grind, to sharpen.

recollect), aporcar, to cover with earth.
acostar, to convey to bed; a@portar, to go ashore, to land.

—se, to go to bed. apostar®), to bet.
afollar, to blow against, to @probar, to approve.

breathe at... asolar, to waste, to desolate.
aforar, to invest, to rent, to sonar, to accord, to chime in.

farm 2). avergonzar, to shame (avergiienzo).
afotar, to enfeoff, to rent. azolaur, to work with the axe.
agorar, to foretell, to prophesy. Colar*), to filter, to wash; to
almorzar, to breakfast. confer an academical] dignity,

1) Acordar, to tune (instruments) is regular.
. 2) Aforar, to invest, to rent, to farm, to enfeoff, is irregular;
in all the other significations (to adjust {weights etc.]) it is regular.
3) Apostar, to place, to station, is regular. ;
4) Verbs not derived from colar, but from cola, tail, glue
like descolar, to cut the tail off; encolar, to glue together are
regular. :
The irregular Verbs continued.

colgar, to hang, to suspend,

comprobar, to prove.

concordar, to accord, to agree.

consolar, to console, to com-
fort.

consonar, to accord (see sonar).

contar, to count, to tell.

costar, to cost.

Degollar, to behead.

denostar, to offend, to injure.

derrocar’), to fling down, to
render downcast. ,

desacordar, to disagree, to put
out of tune.

desaforar, to deprive of a right -

ete.
desaprobar, to disapprove.
descolgar, to take down (from a
hook etc.).
descollar, to overtop, to tower
over.
desconsolar, to afflict deeply, to
render disconsolate.
descontar, to discount. e
descornar, to break off the
horns.
desengrosar, to diminish.
desflocar, to unravel.
desolar, to desolate, to waste.
desollar, to flay, to excoriate.
desovar, to lay eggs, to spawn.
despoblar, to depopulate.
destrocar, to break off a barter,
a bargain.
desvergonzarse, to behave
in a shameless manner.
discordar, to be discordant.
disonar, to be dissonant.
Emporcar, to soil.
enclocar, to fish with a hook,
to cluck (like a hen).
encobar, to sit on the eggs.
encoclar (better cloquear), see:
enclocar.

151

encontrar,
meet.
encorar, to cover with leather;
—se, to heal, to cicatrize.
encordar, to string, to chord.
encovar, to put in the cellar.
engrosar, to become stout.
enrodar, to break upon the
wheel.
ensalmorar, to mingle the ore
with salt.
entortar, to render tortuous.
esforzar, to encourage.
esforzarse, to take pains.

Follar?), to blow with the bellows.
forzar, to force, to compel, to
oblige.

Holgar, to repose. {on.
hollar, to tread upon, to trample

Improbar, to disapprove.
Jugar), to play.
Moblar*), to furnish.
mostrar, to show.

Poblar, to populate.
probar, to prove.

Recontar, to count again.

recordar, to remind, to awake,
—se, to recollect.

recostarse, to lie down on one
side.

reforzar, to reinforce.

renovar, to renew.

reprobar, to reprobate, to scold.

rescontrar, to balance (an ac-
count), to compare.

resollar, to breathe, to fan.

resonar, to resound.

revolar, to flee, to flee again.

revolcarse, to welter, to roll,
to wallow.

rodar, to roll.

rogar, to beg, to pray).

to encounter, to

1) Derrocar, forms derroco and derrueco. ’
2) Follar (afollar), when meaning “to put in sheets’, is re-

gular

3) Conjugar, to conjugate, and enjugar, to dry up, do not

derive from jugar, and are regular.

4) Besides moblar, and amoblar, there are also the regular
forms mueblar and amueblar (see Less. 35 the Note).

5) The compounds of rogar are regular.
152

Solar), to sole.

soldar, to solder.

soltar, to loosen.

sonar), to sound; —se, to blow
one's nose.

sonar, to dream.

Tostar, to roast.

trascolar, to bolt.

trascordarse, to forget.

trasonar, to form a visionary
scheme of smth., to dream.

trocar, to exchange [Fr. troquer).

tronar, to thunder®).

Volar, to fly.

volecar, to upset (a carriage
etc.); — se, to welter.

Lesson 36.

devolver, to give back.
disolver, to dissolve.
doler, to ache, to give pain.

Envolrer, to envelop, to wrap
up, to involve.

Llover, to rain.

Moler, to grind.

morder, to bite.

mover, to move.

Oler, to smell (pres. heele etc,
olemos etc.).
Promover, to promote.
Remover, to remove.
resolver, to resolve.
retorcer, to re-wrap, to crook,
tortuous

 

Verbs in —en.
Absolvey, to absolve.
Cocer, to cook (cuezo).
condoler, to condole, to pity.
Demoler, to demolish, to

destroy.
desenvolver, to develop.
desmoler (obsolete), to digest.

to curve, to render
(pres. retuerzo).
Soler, to use.
solver, to loosen, to untie.
Torcer, to turn, to.wring, to
wrest (pres. tuerzo).
Volver, to turn back.

volver & (with the Inf), to do
a thing once more.

Words.

The intention, la intencion.

the place, el lugar.

the bill of exchange, la letra
de cambio.

the behaviour, la conducta.

the farrier, el herrador*).

the movement, el ejercicio.

the promise, la promesa.
to dine, comer.

to doubt, dudar.

blunt, boto, -a.

furious, enfurecido.

the pipe, la pipa.

the tobacco, el fabaco.

to smoke, fumar.

Traduccion 59.

I bet (that) I guess (adivinar) what you are thinking,
and that you do not guess (Subj.) what I think. This man

1) Like solar the verb consolar, to console, though not derived

from solar.

2) Sonar and its compounds are irregular, except consonar
which in Spain is commonly regular, whereas in America the

irregular forms consueno etc. are preferred.

with asonar.

This is also the case

Verbs derived from persona, like apersonarse, to

behave with dignity, are regular.
3) Verbs derived from trono, throne, like entronar, destronar,

etc., are regular.

4) From ferrum (Latin), French: le fer; maréchal-ferrant.
The irregular Verbs continued.

153

shows good intentions. I breakfast at eight o’clock, I dine
at one, and go to bed at eleven. (The) war depopulates the
countries, and stains with blood the places which are its
theatre. Do discount me this bill of exchange! I fear that
you will not approve my conduct. I do not think that these
gentlemen will agree. I doubt that [if] you recollect me (Gen.).
He wishes (me to) that I exchange my watch against [for]
his. I doubt whether it (will) also rain(s) in the afternoon.
I do not think (that) this farrier shoes my horse well. Take
(Haga) more exercise, lest you (transl. that you do not) be-
come too stout. I approve all (cuanto) he has done. Do not
forget (tr. recollect) your promises, my friend! Go to bed;
you are very tired. We breakfast at the same (mismo, -a)
hour that (que) my father breakfasts. Do grind this ‘knife,
it is too blunt. How much does thig book cost? My book
costs seven dollars. The furious soldiers destroyed the whole
house. Do not be afraid, Sir, the dog does not bite. We
disapprove of your sister’s conduct; why do not you dis-
approve it? Why do you not play with us? Pray, Sir, tell
me whether (tr. gue me diga) we return at eight o’clock or
at half past eight? Come back (return) at half past eight
o'clock. This flower smells (fr. oler) very nicely (tr. agreeably).
In the morning I (use to) smoke a pipe of tobacco, and in
the evening a couple of (alguno, -a) cigars.

Conversacion.
gAcuéstate, amigo mio! iGracias! No tengo gana de
acostarme.

¢Cudnto cuesta ese chaleco?

éNo desaprueba V. la con-
ducta de su criado?

éCudl es el efecto de la
guerra?

éQué espera V.?

1Yo no tengo la culpa! ¢Por
qué me reprueba V.?

éMuerde ese perro?

¢Truena?

éNo se acuerda V.
criado Juan?

éA qué hora se acuesta V.?

de mi

Cuesta dos duros.

Verdad es que (certainly) la
desapruebo; pero ¢qué puedo
hacer?

La guerra demuele las ciudades y
despuebla los estados (states).

Espero que encuentre 4 mi
deudor (debtor).

No te repruebo 4 ti, sino 4 tu
primo que ha cometido (com-
mitted) 1a boberia (stupidity)*).

jCuidado! (Take care!) El perro
es muy bravo (savage).

No he oido (heard) tronar.

Me acuerdo muy bien de él; esta
ahoraen casa del general Nufiez.

Ordinariamente me acuesto 4
las once y media.

*) who has made a fool of himself.
154

éQué le ha contado a V. el
eriado?

éCudnto cuestan estos guan-
tes?

éRuégole 4 V., me diga que

Lesson 36.

Nada. Jamas me cuenta cosa
alguna.

Me cuestan dos pesetas y al-
gunos céntimos.

Han dado las cinco.

hora es? ;
éA qué hora almuerza V.? Yo almuerzo 4 las once, y mi
padre almuerza i las once y

media,
Reading Exercise.
Astucia de un Viajero.

Un viajero eed & una posada en una noche de las mis
frias de diciembre, y al pasar por la cocina vid que todos los
asientos estaban ocupados por la mucha gente que habia al
rededor del fuego, causdéndole la mayor pena el no poder
acercarse 4 calentar las ufias.

«Mozo», dijo en voz alta al criado; «dards al momento
& mi caballo dos docenas de ostras.»

El mozo obedecié; y todas las personas que estaban en
posesion de la lumbre, no pudieron resistir al deseo de ver
un animal tan extraordinario: se levantaron y marcharon en
tropel 4 la caballeriza.

Entretanto el viajero tomdé el mejor asiento al fuego, y
un instante despues llegd el mozo 4 decirle, seguido de los
curiosos, que el caballo no queria comer las ostras.

«jCémo! gno las quiere?» pregunta muy serio el viajero;
«Pues, ponme aqui la mesa, y me las comeré yo 4 su salud.»
La astucia, trick, slyness. alto, -a, loud.
el viajero, the traveller. la ostra, the oyster.
al pasar, when passing through. obedecer, to obey.
la cocina, the kitchen. apoderarse, to take possession.
wid (fr. ver), he saw. la lumbre, the fire (of the stove).
el asiento, the seat. el deseo, the desire.

estar ocupado, to be taken, oc-

la gente, people. [eupied.

habia, there were.

al rededor de, round.

el fuego, the fire.

causar, to cause; here: to give.

la pena, the trouble.

acercarse, to approach.

calentar las unas, to warm his
hands.

el mozo, the waiter.

la voz, the voice.

*) Latin: Comedere.

 

levantarse, to rise.
marchar, to go.

en tropel, in a body.

la caballeriza, the stable.
entretanto, nneanwhile.
despues, after, afterwards.
seguido, followed.

curtoso, inquisitive, curious.
servo, serious.

ponme, give me, put me.
comer, to eat (see Less. 28. 3%).
la salud, the health.
155

Thirty-seventh Lesson. Leccion trigésima
séptima.
The irregular Verbs continued.
The verbs of the third and fourth class are more
irregular than those of the two foregoing classes. The
third class is composed of verbs ending in acer, ecer,

ocer, and weir. With this class*) ¢ is always changed
into 2c, if @ or Oo follows.

Example.
Crecer, to grow.
, Presente. ;
Indicat. Subjunt.
Crezco, I grow Crezca, I grow
ereces crezcas
crece crezca
crecemos crezcamos
creceis crezcuis
crecen. crezcan.
Imperativo.
Crece (tt), grow (thou). creced, grow (you).

Crezca, V., do grow.
Conducir, to lead.

Presente. ;

Indicat. Subjunt.
Conduzco, I lead Conduzca, I lead
conduces conduzcas
conduce conduzca
conducimos conduzcamos
conducis conduzcais
conducen. conduzcan.

Imperativo.
Conduce (ti), lead (thou). conducid, lead (you).

Conduzca V., do lead.

A peculiar anomaly is presented by the definido of
the verbs in ucir.**) Here eis added for the first pers.

*) Exceptions are hacer, to make, to do (see page 172), and
cocer, to cook (see page 152). Again mecer, to stir up, and empecer,
to damage, to hurt, which form mezo and empezo.

**) Only lucir, to shine, has a regular /definido.
156 Lesson 87.

sing. instead of 7, o instead of 7 for the therd pers.
sing., and evon in lieu of zeron for the third pers. plur.
A further anomaly is offered by the root of the verb:
cis changed into j in the definido, and this new con-
sonant is retained not only throughout the whole tense,
but also in the imperfecto, futuro, and condicional of the

subjuntivo. Thus:

Conducir.

| Subjuntivo.

rae
Definido. Imperfecto. | Futuro. | Condicional.

Hs we a not #), Tled|| condujese, | condujere, | condujera,
condujiste that Lled| that I that I
condujo (and not id) condujeses | shall lead| should
condujimos ete, condujeres, | lead
condujisteis | ete. condujeras,
condujeron (and not iero7). |) ete.

The same anomalies occur in the following verbs*):
The following verbs must all be learnt by heart.

Abastecer, to supply with pro-
visions, to victual (a ship).

aborrecer, to abhor.

acaecer, to happen; —se, to be
present.

acontecer, to happen.

adormecer, to lull to sleep;
—se, to fall asleep.

agradecer, to owe.

amanecer, to dawn, to be or
to arrive somewhere in the
morning.

apetecer, to wish, to desire.

Carecer de, to want, to be in
want of...

compadecer, to pity.

conocer, to know.

Desconocer, not to know, to
know badly.

Empobrecer, to become poor.

encarecer, to render dear; to
rise in price.

ennegrecer, to blacken.
enriquecer, to enrich.

establecer, to establish.
extremecer, to tremble.

Favorecer, to favour.
florecer, to blossom, bloom.

Guarnecer, to adorn.
Merecer, to merit.
Nacer, to be born.

Obedecer, to obey.
ofrecer, to offer.
oscurecer, to become dark.

Padecer, to suffer.
parecer, to seem.
perecer, to perish.
permanecer, to remain.

Keconocer, to recognize,
renacer, to be born, to regenerate.
resplandecer, to shine.

Like conducir are conjugated: traducir, to translate;
producir, to produce: deducir, to deduct; inducir, to induce;
introducir, to introduce; reducir, to reduce; seducir, to seduce.

— Aducir is obsolete.

*) Of pacer, to pasture, and repacer, to pasture again, the

respective forms are not in use.
The irregular Verbs continued. 157
_ Formerly the pres. ind. and subj. of the verbs in
uciy terminated in uzgo and uega (traduzgo, traduzga)
instead of weco and uzca.
_ The fourth Class of irregular verbs consists en-
tirely of verbs belonging to the third conjugation. They
change the ¢ of the root into ¢, as will be seen by the
following example. All the forms not mentioned below
or not marked by bolder type, are regular.

Pedir, to ask.
Gerund. Pédiendo, asking.

 

 

Indicativo. | Subjuntivo.
Presente. Presente.
Pido, I ask Pida, J ask
pides pidas
pide pida
pedimos pidamos
pedis pidais
piden. pidan.
Definido. Imperfecto. | Futuro. Condicional.
Pedi, I asked || Pidiese, that | Pidiere, that Pidiera, that
pediste I asked I shall ask I should ask
pidid pidieses pidieres pidieras
pedimos pidiese pidiere pidiera
pedisteis pidiésemos pidiéremos pidiéramos
pideron. pidieseis pidiereis pidierais
pidiesen. pidieren. pidieran.
Imperativo.

Pide (tu), ask (thou). pedid, ask (you).
pida V., do ask.

The following verbs are conjugated like pedir:

NB. Verbs in —gir (unless they are written —jir, conform-
ably to modern orthography, as: colegir or colejir, to gather)

change g into f before a and o.

Cenir, to gird.

colegir, to gather.

comedirse, to moderate one’s self.

competir, to emulate, to
compete.

concebir, to conceive.

constrenir, to constrain, to oblige.

corregiv, to correct.

Derretir, to melt.

descenir, to ungird.

descomedirse, to become .
naughty.

deservir, to be disobliging.

desleir, to dissolve.

despedir, to discharge (a ser-
vant etc.).

despedirse, to bid farewell.

destenir, to lose colour, to stain.
158

Elegir, to select.

embestir, to attack.

engreir, to intrude; —se, to
bleat, to swell.

envestir, to invest, to clothe.

estrenir, to obstruct.

expedir, to forward.

Freir, to fry.

Gemir, to lament, to groan.

Henchir, to fill.

henir, to knead, to mould.

Temir, 8. gemir.

Medir, to measure.

Pedir, to require, to order.

perseguir, to persecute,

Note.

Lesson 37.

proseguir, to continue.

Regir, (rejir) to govern (Pr.
riJ0).

reir, to laugh*).

vendir, to render, to surrender.

renir, to fight (cocks etc.), to
scold.

repetir, to repeat.

retenir, to dye again, to sound,
to tinkle**).

revestir, to clothe anew.

Seguir, to follow.

servir, to serve.

sonreir, to smile.

Tenir, to dye.

Vestir, to clothe.

For the sake of euphony, all the verbs in which

the termination of the infinitive —ir is preceded by fi, ll,
or ch, drop the i, whenever one of the aforesaid consonants

would otherwise be followed by ie or io. Thus:
Infinitivo. Gerundio.
Renir riftendo (and not riniendo).
Henchir hinchendo ( »  »  hinchiendo).

Definido.

vino
hinché ( »

(and not rifid).

» hinchio).

Futuro Subj.

rifere.
hinchere.
Words.
The chase | the sword, la espada.
hunting J Lee, the workman, el obrero.
the way, el camino. the power, el poder.

the opportunity, la ocasion.
the position, la posicion.

the expense, el gasto, el des-

embolso.

the neighbourhood, el paraje.

the payment, el pago.

the cloak, la capa.:
the glass, el vaso.

the lie, la mentira..
southern, meridional.
noxious, dafioso, nocivo.

it is cold, hace frio.

*) The verbs in eir, whenever in conjugating two 7’s should

meet, drop one 7; thus: riendo, laughing (instead of riiendo);
viese, that he laughed (instead of ritese).

**) Retenir, in the signif. “‘to sound, to tinkle’, is also written
retinir (fr. taner). The conjugation is the same.
The irregular Verbs continued. 159

Traduecion. 60.

Where do you take (tr. lead) this dog? I take (lead)
him to the chase. Where do you think (that) this way
leads (Subj.), if it does not lead to Barcelona? Where do
you think (that) this plant grows (swbj.)? It grows in South-
America. I do not spoil (empecer; more usual: ecar é perder)
the wine, if I stir it up. I obey my parents: do obey
yours! Do obey me! I offer you the best opportunity to
remain in your situation. Where did you lead (Def.) me
yesterday? The master did not wish (xo quiso) me to trans-
late (tr. that I translated) the story. I limit (¢r. reduce) all
my expenses. My brothers also limited (Def.) theirs. I
recognize the country where I was born (Def.). What do
you want of me? We often want things which would be
very dangerous to us. I asked (Def.) (for) my payment, and
the other workmen asked (for) theirs likewise. Ask what
(lo que) you please (tr. wish), I shall give it you. I bade
farewell (Def.) to (de) my friends, who followed (Def.) me
sighing to the (street-door) door of the house. (It is God’s
will) God wishes that we serve all men as much as [it] is in
our power. Take (¢. clothe yourself with) your cloak, it is
cold. The foreigner filled (Def.) his glass and promised
(prometié) laughing that he would correct himself. I detest
(the) lies! Do not laugh! Why do you not wish me to
laugh (¢r. that I laugh), if all the others laugh? I serve my
king; serve (2. pl.) yours also! If I did not fear that you
would Jaugh (fr. retrse), I should beg you to tell me this
story once more. I wish (deseo) (you to) that you (tw) repeat
(subj.) your lesson. The general girt (Def.) his sword.
Obliging his friends to remain (quedarse) in the room, he
found the opportunity to say a few words to me.

Conversacion.
éQué me pidid V.? Pedi & V. un favor que puede
muy fécilmente hacerme.
éQuién (hinché) llenédmivaso? No sé, pero me parece que el
s criado lo ha enado.
éPor qué rie V.?—, Rio, porque V. no entiende lo
que dice.
iA quién sigue este perro? Sigue al cazador del conde.
éEs preciso (is it necessary, V. hard bien en seguirlo.
must I) que yo siga lo que
su hermano de V. me ha
aconsejado (advised)?
éQué corrigié el maestro? Corrigio las faltas que sus dis-
cipulos habian hecho (made)
en la traduccion.
160 Lesson 37.

ijRepita V. la leccion que to- Ya la he repetido.
maremos mafiana!

gA quién expide V. estos gé- Los expido al mercader frances.
neros (goods)? :

éSe vistieron las sefioras (la- No, Sefiora, aun no Se Vis-
dies)? tieron. ;

De qué rio el oficial (officer)? Rid de la ineptitud (awkward-

ness) del recluta (recruit).

éQuién tifid este pafio? Es el tintorero (dyer) que lo
ha tefido.
éYa (already) es tiempo para Si, es preciso que V. se vista
irse (to go)? al instante (directly).

Reading Exercise.
La falsa alerta.

Durante el sitio de Gibraltar, en el momento en que los
ingleses esperaban de un instante 4 otro un ataque general,
una centinela que habian colocado 4 boca de noche frente 4
la torre del Diablo, estaba 4 lo ultimo de la muralla, silbando
y fijando sus miradas sobre las lineas espafiolas, no sofiando
mds que fuego, bombas, minas, brecha y fuego de fila. Al
lado de su garita tenia un puchero donde habia ocultado su
comida, que consistia en un potaje de garbanzos.

Una mona muy grande (sabido es que la cima de esta.
roca estaba enténces cubierta de estos animales), alentada por
el silencio de la centinela, y Ilevada del olfato, se acercd al’
puchero y metid su cabeza para regalarse, con lo que con-
tenia; pero despues que satisfizo su necesidad, cuando quiso
escaparse, no pudo sacar la cabeza, y se levod el puchero por
gorro, marchando con los piés de atrds.

Esta terrible aparicion apénas se presenté d los ojos del
centinela, cuando el militar convirtid al pobre Beltran (el
mono) en un granadero espafiol ensangrentado y herido mor-
talmente. Ya exaltada su imaginacion con esta idea, y lleno
de miedo, dispard su fusil gritando con todas sus fuerzas,
que el enemigo habia escaladado la muralla.

La gran guardia toméd al momento las armas con este
aviso, el tambor resonéd por todas partes, y en diez minutos
estuvo toda la guarnicion formada para la batalla.

El supuesto granadero, 4 quien incomodaba mucho el
sombrero, y que estaba casi ciego con el peso y el potaje,
no estuvo mucho tiempo sin ser descubierto, y su prision
restablecié la tranquilidad en el campo que se habia creido
sorprendido.

La alerta, alarm. el ataque, the attack.
el sitio, siege. el and la centinela, the sentinel.
esperar, to expect. colocar, to place, to put.
The irregular Verbs continued. 161

& boca de noche, at nightfall. regalarse, to feast.

frente @..., opposite. satisfizo, Def. of satisfacer, to
la torre, the tower. satisfy.
lo ultimo, the last. la necesidad, the hunger.
la muralla, the wall. quiso, Def. of querer, to be will-
silbar, to whistle. _ing,
fjar, to fix. escaparse, to escape.
las miradas, the looks, eyes. sacar, to draw forth.
no — mds que, only, but, noth- Jlevarse, to take.
ing but. el gorro, the bonnet. /
sonar, to dream. los piés de atras, the hind legs.
la brecha, the breach. terrible, terrible.
el fuego de fila, file firing. la aparicion, apparition.
la garita, the sentry-box*). convertir, to change.
el puchero, the pot. Beltran, (the monkey) Bertram.
ocultar, to hide. ensangrentado, bloody ***),
la comida, the meal. herido, wounded.
el potaje, the dish. exaltar, to exalt.
garbanzos, Spanish peas. lleno, fulit).
elmono,lamona,theape,monkey. el miedo, fear.
sabido es, it is (well) known. disparar, to fire.
la cima, the summit, top **). gritar, to cry.
la roca, the rock. escaladar, to scale, to ascend.
cubierto, covered. la gran guardia, the main-guard.
alentar, to encourage. el aviso, the news.
llevar, to allure. - supuesto, presumed,, supposed.
el olfato, the smell. ciego, blind.
acercarse, to draw near. la prision, the capture.
meter, to put. sorprendido, taken by surprise.

Thirty-eighth Lesson. Leccion trigésima
octava.

The irregular verbs continued.

The fifth class of the partly irregular verbs consists
entirely of verbs belonging to the third conjugation.
Like those of the fourth class, they have e before the
final consonant of the root, and change this e in some
tenses into ée, in other tenses into‘é, as will be seen
by the following example:

Sentir, to feel, to hear etc.
Gerund. Sintiendo, feeling.

*) French: la guérite. — **) French: la cime. — ***) French:
ensanglanté. — +) plenus (Lat.), plein (French).

Spanish Grammar. 11
162

Indicativo.

Presente.
Siento, I feel
sientes
siente

sentimos

sentis
sienten.

Definido.

Senti, I felt
sentiste
sintio

sentimos
sentisteis
sintieron.

Siente (tu), feel (thou).

 

Lesson 38.

Subjuntivo.
Presente.
Sienta, I feel
sientas
sienta
sintamos
sintais
sientan.
Imperfecto. Futuro. Condicional.

Sintiese, (that) | Sintiere, (that) | Sintiera, (that)

I felt I shall feel I should feel
Ssintieses sintieres sintieras
sintiese sintiere sintiera
sintiésemos sintiéremos sintiéramos
sintieseis sintiereis sintierais
sintiesen | Sintieren. | séntieran.

Imperativo.

Sentid, feel (you).
Sienta V., do feel.

To this class belong the following verbs:

Adherir, to adhere.
advertir, to inform, to ad-

vise.

arrepentirse, to repent.
asentir, to consent.

Concernir, to surround.
conferir, to confer.

controvertir, to quarrel.
convertir, to convert.

Deferir, to confer, to yield.
diferir, to defer.

digerir, to digest.

discernir, to distinguish.
disentir, to be of another opinion.
divertir, to divert.

Herir, to wound.
hervir, to glow, to seethe*).

Inferir, to follow.

ingerty, to intrude.

inquiriy, to inquire.

invertir, to turn round, to invert.

Mentir, to lie, to tell a false-
hood.

Pervertir, to pervert.

preferir, to prefer.

presentir, to forebode.

proferir, to proffer.

Referir, to refer.

requerir, to request.

resentirse, to resent, to be angry.

Sentir, to feel, to hear, to regret.

subvertir, to subvert.

sugerir, to suggest.

Trasferir, to transfer.

Zaherir, to scold.

The séath and last class of the partly irregular
verbs comprises the verbs in wir and wir, in which u is
not mute before i, as in the verb erguir, but where this
vowel is pronounced. They change the ¢ of the infinitive,
whenever it should come between two vowels, into y, as:

*) French: fervent, glowing.
The irregular Verbs continued.

Huir, to flee*).

Gerund. Huyendo, fleeing.

Presente.

Indic. v Subj.
Huyo, I flee | Huya, I flee
huyes huyas
huye huya
huimos huyamos
huis huyais
huyen. huyan.

Definido.

Hui, I fled

huiste
huyod

huimos

huisteis
huyeron.

Subjuntivo.

Inperfecto. ’ Futuro.
Huyese, (that) | Huyere, (that)

I fled I shall flee
huyeses huyeres
huyese huyere
huyésemos huyéremos
huyeseis huyereis
huyesen. huyeren.

Condicional.

Huyera, (that) I should flee
huyeras
huyera
' huyéramos
huyerais
huyeran.
Imperativo.
Huye (ti), flee (thou).

Huid, flee (you).
huya V., do flee.

 

163

Argitir, to argue.
Ger. Arguyendo**), arguing.

Presente.
Indie. Subj.
Arguyo, I ar- | Arguya, I ar-
gue gue
arguyes arguyas
arguye arguya
argiimos | arguyamos
argitis arguyais
arguyen. arguyan.
Definido.
Argiii, T argued
argiiiste
argiyd
argtiimos
argiiisteis
arguyeron.
Subjuntivo.
Imperfecto. Futuro.
Arguyese, Arguyere,(that)
(that) largued| I shall argue
arguyeses arguyeres
arguwyese arguyere
arguyésemos |crguyéremos
arguyeseis arguyereis
arguyesen. arguyeron.
: Condicional.

Arguyera, (that) I should argue
arguyeras
arguyera
arguyéramos
argwyerais
arguyeron.
Imperativo.
Arguye (tu), argue (thou).

Argiiid, argue (you).
arguya V., do argue.

*) French: fuir. — **) In all the forms where % is not follow-
ed by i, the dieresis (crema), being superfluous, is dropped.

i
164 Lesson 38.

The same rules apply to:
Altribuir, to attribute. incluir, to include.
Concluir, to conclude. influir, to ee
constituir, to constitute. instituir, to institu e
construir, to construe. instruir, to instruct.
contribuir, to contribute. ; Luir, to free from taxes.
Desminuir (dis—), to diminish. .
destituir, to render destitute.  Obstriir, to obstruct.

destruir, to destroy. Sie Fd eattinte:
distribuir, to distribute. Prostituir, - PEO,
Excluir, to exclude. Recluir, to include.

restituir, to restore.

Fluir, flow. age ‘
tS vee retribuir, to reward, to answer.

Imnbuir, to imbue.

—se, to appropriate. Sustituir, to substitute.
Words.
The picture, el cuadro. the diligence, 7a diligencia.
the engraving \ la estampa, the condition, la condicion.
(copperplate), J la lamina. the levity, frivolity, la ligereza.
the superior, el jefe. _ the attention, la atencion.
the absence, la ausencia. just, justo.
the stomach, el estémago. sage, wise, sabio.
the projectile, ef proyectil. lively, vivo.
the vice, el vicio. feeble, débil.
the punishment, el castigo. despicable, despreciable.
the knowledge, el conoci- to accept, aceptar.
miento. to escape, escapar.

Traduccion. 61.

I prefer these pictures to those engravings. We prefer
(the) virtue to (the) beauty. Did (Def.) you prefer wine or
beer? I should prefer beer, if it were good. I inform my
superior by letter, that I cannot (podré) depart to-morrow.
These gentlemen felt very well that they were wrong (to
be wrong, o tener razon). I did not think that he would
feel so hard (from vivo, lively) the absence of his best friend.
God distributes all his gifts justly and wisely. To whom do
you attribute your misfortune (desgracia), to yourself or to
others? Many people never feel the rudeness (lo inconveniente)
of their behaviour. My stomach is very weak; it digests
almost (casi) nothing. A man who lies, is always contemp-
tible. We never lie; why will you not believe us? Good’
children always cling (¢r. adhere) to their parents (padres).
The new projectiles wounded (Def.) a great many soldiers.
Restore me what you have taken (me)! We (avoid) flee bad
company (pl.). Flee (from, tr. the) vice, for it makes thee
unhappy. I conclude from your letter that you will not
accept my conditions. I fled (Def.) when I saw the hostile
(enemigo) vider come. The culprit (el reo) was well aware
The irregular Verbs continued. 165
(ir. felt [Def.] well) that, although he denied, he could (podia)
not escape (the) punishment. We. all feel that we want (tener
menester) one another (gen.). I repent (of) my levity, and
I beg you to pardon me this time. Misfortune better con-
verts than the best sermons (sermon, m.). We divert our-
selves much to-day; do you also enjoy yourself? Thou liest,
child! Do not lie, because (the) lies offend (ofender) God. We
attain knowledge only by great diligence and great attention.

Conversacion.

éQué arguye V. de lo que
he dicho?

éQué hard V. con este di-
nero?

éPor qué huye V.?

éEn qué instruye V. 4. los
nifios ?

éHa restituido V. el dinero
que mi primo le ha pres-
tado (lent)?

éPor qué destruye V. ese her-
moso cuadro?

éComo se divierte V. en esta
compafiia?

éSiente V. mucho dolor?

éSe divirtié su hermana ayer
en el concierto?

‘¢Prefiere V. partir hoy 6 ma-
fiana?

éHierve el agua?’

éPor qué se quejé (complained)
el militar (soldier)?

Arguyo de sus palabras de V.
que no tiene razon.

Lo distribuiré entre (among) los
pobres.

Huyo, porque tengo miedo de’
que el perro me muerda.

En la historia y en la geogra-
fia.

Ya se lo he restituido ayer.

No lo destruyo; quiero sdlo
limpiarlo (¢o clean).

Me divierto mucho, pero el afio
antes me diverti mas.

Ahora no siento nada.

Se divirtid muchisimo.

Prefiero partir mafiana, porque
hoy no estoy bueno.

Todavia no hierve, pero hervira
luego. /

Se quejé, sintiéndose herido.

Reading Exercise.
Carlos de Anjou.
A principios del afio mil doscientos ochenta y cinco murid

en Foggia el rey Carlos, rendido al dolor que le causaban
tantas desgracias. Hombre -esforzado, guerrero ilustre, ha
manchado sus hazafias y su fama con la inhumanidad y la
fiereza que manifestd en toda su vida. Se hacian estos vicios
tanto mds extrafios en él, cuanto mds se comparaban 4 la
moderacion y dulzura de su hermano el rey de Francia, San
Luis. Gan6 grandes batallas, se apoderé de grandes estados,
y de simple conde de Provenza se vid rey de Napoles y de
Sicilia, drbitro de Italia y objeto de espanto en Grecia, adonde
ya amagaba su ambicion.
166 Lesson 39.

La muerte, the death. los vicios, the vices.

a principios, at the beginning. extrayo, strange.

rendido, yielding. cuanto mds, the more.

murid, died (fr. movin). comparar, to compare. ;
la desgracia, the misfortune. la moderacion, the moderation.
esforzado, gallant, brave. la dulzura, the kindness.

la fama, the glory, renown. ganar, to gain.

el guerrero, the warrior. apoderarse, to usurp.
manchar, to blemish. ver, to see.

las hazahas, the deeds. el estado, the state. ‘
la fiereza, the cruelty. el drbitro, the arbiter, umpire.
manifestar, to manifest. el espanto, the horror.

se hacian, appeared. amagar, to aspire, to tend.

Thirty-ninth Lesson. Leccion trigésima
nona.

Verbs entirely irregular.

Besides the verbs hitherto enumerated, there are
others in Spanish, which must be considered entirely
irregular, as their deviations from the regular verbs
are too manifold and too considerable, to be comprised
in classes. We therefore give them in their alphabetical
order, as is usual in most Spanish grammars; still some
of these quite irregular verbs show a certain simi-
larity in their conjugation and it will be rather advan-
tageous for the pupil to learn those together which are
similarly conjugated. The order in which they ought to
be learnt is indicated by the number in brackets after the
English word. The forms not indicated or not distin-
guished by bolder type are regular.

1, Adquirir, to acquire, to obtain. (1.)
Pres. Ind. Adquiero, adquieres, adquiere, adquirimos, ad-
quiris, adguieren.
Pres. Subj. Adguiera, adquieras, adquiera, adquiramos, ad-
quirais, adguieran.
Imperativo. Adgqwiere (tu); adquiera V., adquirid.
Thus: inquirir, to enquire.

2. Andar, to walk. (2.)

Pres. Indic. Ando, ete.

Imperf. » Andaba, etc.

Defin. »  <Anduve, andwiste, anduvo, anduvimos, andu-
visteis, anduvieron.
Verbs entirely irregular. 167

Imprf.Subj. Anduviese, anduvieses, anduviese, anduviésemos, etc.
Futuro. » <Anduviere, anduvieres, etc.
Condic. » Anduviera, anduvieras, etc.

3. Asir, to seize. (21.)

Pres. Indic. Asgo, ases, ase, asimos, asis, asen.
Pres. Subj. Asga, asgas, asga, asgamos, asgais, asgan.
Imperativo. Ase (tu); asga V.; asid.

4. Caber, to give way, to contain. (5.)

Pres. Indic. Quepo, cabes, cabe, cabemos, cabeis, caben.

Defin. »  Cupe, cupiste, cupo, cupimos, cupisteis, cupieron.

Futuro » Cabré, ete.

Condic. »  Cabria, ete.

Pres. Subj. Quepa, quepas, quepa, quepamos, quepais,
quepan.

Imperf. » Cupiese, cupieses, cupiese, cupiésemos, etc.

Futuro »  Cupiere, cupieres, ete.

Condic. » Cupiera, cupieras, etc.

Imperativo. Cabe (tu)! quwepa V.! cabed!

5. Caer, to fall. (7.)

Pres. Indic. Caigo, caes, cae, caemos, caeis, caen.
Pres, Subj. Caiga, caigas, caiga, caigamos, caigais, caigan.
Gerundio. Cayendo. Part. past Caido.

6. Oir, to hear. (9.)
Pres. Indic. Oigo, oyes, oye, oimos, ois, oyen.
Defin. » Oi, oiste, oyd, oimos, oisteis, oyeron.
Pres. Subj. Oiga, oigas, oiga, cigamos, oigais, oigan.
Imperf. >  Oyese, oyeses, etc.
Futuro »  Oyere, oyeres, etc.
Condic. »  Oyera, oyeras, etc.
Imperativo. Oye (tu)! oiga V.! oid! *)
Gerundio. Oyendo. Part. past Oido.

7. Dar, to give. (3.)
Pres. Indic. Doy, (doi), das, da, damos, dais, dan.
Imperf. » Daba, dabas, daba, dabamos, dabais, daban.
Defin. » Di, diste, did, dimos, disteis, dieron.
Pres. Subj. Dé, des, dé, demos, deis, den.
Imperf. » Diese, dieses, diese, diésemos, dieseis, diesen.
Futuro » Diere, dieres, etc.
Condic. » Déiera, dieras, etc.
Imperativo. Dé (tu)! dé V.! dad!

*) Compare the old French word Oyez hear you, from the
verb Ouir.
168 Lesson 39.

8. Decir, to say, to tell. (20.)
Pres. Indic. Digo, dices, dice, decimos, decis, dicen.
Imperf. »  Decia, decias, decia, deciamos, deciais, decian.
Defin. »  Dije, dijiste, dijo, dijimos, dijisteis, dijeron.
Futuro » Diré, dirds, dird, diremos, dircis, dirdn. |
Condic. »  Diria, dirias, diria, diriamos, diriais, dirtan.
Pres. Subj. Diga, digas, diga, digamos, digais, digan.
Imperf. » Dijese, dijeses, dijese, ete.
Futuro » Dijere, dijeres, etc.
Condic. » Dijera, dijeras, ete.
Imperativo. Dé (tu)! diga V.! decid!
Gerundio. Diciendo. Part. pas. Dicho.

Like decir are conjugated the compounds of this verb,
as contradecir, to contradict; desdecir, to countermand; pre-
decir, to predict; only in the 2. Sing. Imperat. they do not
form -di but -dice, thus: desdice (tu). The two verbs bendecir,
to bless, and maldecir, to curse, form the Futuro, Condicional,
and Imperativo regularly, as: Fut. bendeciré and maldeciré;
Cond. bendeciria and maldeciria; Imperat. bendice (ti) and
maldice (ti). They have a double form for the past parti-
ciple, viz. bendecido and maldecido, which, being a real Par-
ticiple, obtains in the compound tenses of the verb (with
haber); whereas the second past participle maldito and bendito
is a verbal adjective, and therefore used with ser and estar.
(See Less. 41.)

Words.
The youth (young man), el the ear, la oreja.

joven. ‘ (el arribo
the army, el ejército. the arrival, | ( ee
the purse, la bolsa. .the cook (f.), la cocinera.
the policeman, el alguacil. the mutton, el carnero.
the word, la palabra. the beef, lu vaca. i
: el cunpli- the beggar, el mendigo.
the accomplish- miento, the ea el aban
ment, el colmo. pitiful, charitable, piadoso, -a.
the thunderbolt, el trueno. respectable, honest, honrado.
Dies accel | la boda, to keep, to fulfil, cumplir con.
& | las nupeias. to care, { andar con
the cask, la bota. to march carefully, | cuidado.
the ewer, gallon, el cubo. to descend, bajar.

to order, command, manduar.

Traduccion. 62.
A young man acquires friends, if he is diligent and
honest. We seldom acquire anything in this world without
pains (Sing.). He obtained (Def.) the accomplishment of his
Verbs entirely irregular. 169

desire. Napoleon passed (tr. went) (over) the Alps (los Alpes)
with his army, Where did (Imperf.) you go last night? My
friend told me that he was going (Imperf.) to Paris. It is
not yet (aun no...) sure (seguro), whether I shall go (Fut.)
to my cousin’s (f.) wedding. How much did this cask hold?
It held (Def.) six gallons of wine. I do not think (that)
this theatre will hold 3000 persons. How much do you think
(that) this purse will hold? I fall from the tree. Do not
fall; there lies (esté) a stone! The child will fall, if you do
not (take) care. Do you hear the noise? I do not hear any-
thing (tr. I hear nothing); we also hear nothing. Do you
hear (Def.) what this man says? Many people have ears,
yet they do not hear. Yesterday I heard (Def.) the news of
the: queen’s arrival. Listen, my friend! Was not this (a)
thunder? I heard nothing. The policeman seizes the thief
(el ladron) in (en) the street. If I heard that you did not
keep your word, I should be very sorry. When I heard
(Gerund.) the thunder, I went down the mountain. What
does the cook (f.) boil? I boil beef and mutton. What do
you give me to (para) eat? I give you ham (jamon), bread,
and wine. He gave (Jmperf.) me thirty dollars. Last week
I gave (Def.) you a hundred dollars. The charitable girl
gave (Def.) the beggar some money. Do give me a cigar
and some matches! I have given you nothing. What dost
thou say, child? I say that my father sent (Def.) you the
money yesterday. Tell me, Sir, will you give me my salary
or not? We always speak (the) truth, but you have not
spoken it. Tell me, shall you obey your master, if he orders
you [to do] something? Do not say that you are right, for
the whole world knows (sabe) that you are wrong (fr. that
you are [have] not right).

Conversacion.

¢Adénde anduvo ayer suamigo Fué a ver (to sec, to pay a
de V.? visit) & la marquesa M., que
ha legado ayer, y nosotros
. fuimos tambien.
¢Andaré V. mafiana 4 la §8i hace mal tiempo tomaré un
iglesia? coche.
éQué me da V.? Le doy 4V. los perifolos (ribbons)
que el mercader ha enviado.
iDé V. algo 4 la desdichada Ya le di ayer algun dinero.
madre!
éQué le dieron 4 V. mis Me dieron algunos libros que mi
hermanas? hermano les dié el otro dia.
éQué quiere V.? Le ruego 4 V. que me dé lo
que me ha prometido.
170

aQué dice V.?

éV. dijo que yo no habia
hecho mi deber; es verdad?

éQué dice V. de este tiempo?

éQué hace V. en la cocina
(kitchen)?

iOiga V.! gNo ha oido V. el
trueno? :

éEn qué manera adquirimos
utiles conocimientos?

Lesson 39,

No digo nada. :
{No es verdad! jNo he dicho
nada! ‘ * ;
:Qué quiere V. que diga, sino
pe Ae mal dia (it is bad

weather)?

Cuezo la carne (meat) para la
comida de mediodia (dinner),

No, Sefior, no oigo nada.

V. adquiere conocimientos estu-
diando con atencion y dili-

gencia, y frecuentando lacom-

pafiia de gente erudita..
é¢A quién ha bendecido Je- A todos los pueblos del mundo.
sus?

Reading Exercise.

Un viaje 4 Paris.

jAntonio!.... — Qué manda V.? —
En donde estas, jhombre!*) ¢No oyes que estén tocando la
campanilla? — Ya voy, sefior, ya voy. (Abre la puerta y entra
un joven.)

— Buenos dias, amigo, gcémo va? — jHola! Carlos,
bien venido! gqué me proporciona la dicha de verte por acd?
Ciertamente, no te esperaba en este momento — ! Hombre!**)
voy 4 hacer un viajecito y vengo 4 proponerte que me acom-
pafies, si acaso no tuvieres nada que hacér en este momento.
— Bien, amigo; no podias venir en mejor ocasion. Cabal-
mente me hallo libre, y me fastidio de no saber en qué pasar
el tiempo. ¢Y addnde piensas ir? — jQué pregunta! 4 Paris.
éAdénde se va cuando se fastidia uno en la provincia? —
jBellisima idea has tenido! Yo que no he estado jamas en
Paris.... gY 4 cuando el viaje? — En seguida, hoy mismo,
ya tengo yo todo preparado; asi de ti solo depende el que
partamos al momento. — Bueno, en ese caso voy 4 hacer
disponer mis maletas y podremos salir con el tren de las
cinco y diez minutos. jAntonio, Antonio! — Me parece que
tu criado se ha vuelto sordo de algun tiempo acd. — Es
verdad, no es tan despejado ni tan listo como antes. — Vaya
pues hasta luego. — ¢Volverds aqui? — No; 4 las cinco
ménos cuarto estaré én la estacion del ferro-carril. — No me
hagas esperar; 4 Dios.

*) Hombre (for females: mujer) is very often used as a mere
interjection and should be rendered by: my man, lad, boy ete. (for
females: girl etc.). or by: I say! or something similar.

**) Here hombre might be translated: Well, my boy! ete.
|

The entirely irregular Verbs continued. 171

J

— jAntonio! .... Antonio! .... Decididamente, ese

muchacho tiene algo en los oidos. (Tira el cordon de la campanilla tres
veces consecutivas.) ‘

El muchacho, boy. depender, to depend.

mandar, please. hacer disponer, to have put in
tocar la campanilla, to ring. order.

ya voy, directly, it.I go already. las maletas, the luggage.

abre, he opens (fr. abrir). salir, to depart.

jbien venido! welcome! el tren, the train.

proporcionar, to procure. volverse, to become.

la dicha, the good fortune. sordo, deaf.

ver, to see. de algun tiempo acd, of late.

el viajecito, a trip. despejado, lively.

vengo, I come (fr. venir). listo, quick.

‘proponer, to propose. vaya pues, well then.
acompanar, to accompany. hasta luego, to see you soon again
si acaso, if perhaps. (French: au revoir).

podias, you could (fr. poder). la estacion, the railway terminus,
cabalmente, exactly. station.

fastidiar, to annoy. el ferro-carril, the rail-road.

en qué, with, what, how? no hagas, do not make (fr. hacer).
pensar, to think. decididamente, decidedly.

uw, to go. los oidos, the ears.

la pregunta, the question. terar, to pull.

va (fr. w, to go), goes. el cordon, the string.

a cudndo? when? la campanilla, the bell.

el viaje, the journey, trip. tres veces consecutivas, three times
en seguida, directly. running.

Fortieth Lesson. Leccion cuadragésima.

The entirely irregular verbs continued.
9. Dormir, to sleep. (12.)

Pres. Indic.
Defin. »
Pres, Subj.

Imperf. »
Futuro »
Condic. »
Imperativo.
Gerundio.

Duermo, duermes, duerme, dormimos, dormis,
duermen.

Dormi, dormiste, durmid, dormimos, dormisteis,
duermieron.

Duerma, duermas, duerma, durmamos, durmais,
duerman.

Durmiese, durmieses, durmiese, etc.

Durmiere, durmieres, etc.

Durmiera, durmieras, etc.

Duerme (ta)! dwerma V.! dormid.

Durmiendo. Part. pas. Dormido.
172 Lesson 40.

10. Hacer, to do, to make, to let. (10.)

Pres. Indic. Hago, haces, hace, hacemos, haceis, hacen.
Defin. » Hice, hiciste, hizo, hicimos, hicistets, hicieron.
Futuro » Hart, hards, hard, haremos, hareis, heardn.
Condic. » Haria, harias, haria, hariamos, hariais, harian.
Pres. Subj. Haga, hagas, haya, hagamos, hagais, hagan.

* Imperf. » Hiciese, hivieses, hiciese, etc.

Futuro » AHiciere, hicieres, hiciere, ete.

Condic. » Hiciera, hicieras, hiciera, ete.

Imperativo. Hag (tu)! haga V.! haced.

Gerundio. Haciendo. Part. past Hecho.

All the compounds follow hucer. Satisfacer (to satisfy)
is also conjugated like hacer, except in the Imperat., which
forms satisface. The Condic. Subj. is satisfuciera rather than
satisficiera, and the Imperf. Subj. satisfaciese rather than
satisficiese.

11. Ir, to go; irse, to go away. (4.)
Pres. Indic. Voy (voi), vas, va, vamos, vais, can.
Imperf. » Iba, ibas, iba, ibamos, ibais, iban.
Defin. » Fut, fuiste, fué, fuimos, fuisteis, fueron.
Futuro »  Iré, irds, ird, iremos, ireis, iran.
Condic. » Tria, irias, iria, iriamos, iriais, irian.
Pres. Subj. Vaya, vayas, vaya, vayamos, vaydis, vayan.
Imperf. »  uese, fueses, fucse, etc.
Futuro » Fuere, fueres, fuere, etc.
Condic. » Fuera, fueras, fuera, etc.
Imperativo. Ve (tu)! vaya V.! id!
Gerundio. _ Yendo. Part. past Ido.

12. Morir, to die, like Dormir. (13.)

Pres. Indic. mero; Pres. Subj. mera; Defin. mori etc., él
auevid; Futur. Subj. meriere; Condic. Subj. mriera;
Imperf. Subj. mariese, etc.; except the Part. past, which
is ameerto.

13. Poder, to be able. (14.)

Pres. Indic. Puedo, puedes, puede, podemos, podeis, pueden.
Defin. »  Pude, pudiste, pudo, pudimos, pudisteis, prdieron.
Futuro » Podré, etc.

Condie. » Podria, ete.

Pres. Subj. Puedu, puedas, puedu, podamos, podais, paedan.
Imperf. » Purliese, ete.

Futuro » Pudiere, etc.

Condic. » Pudiera, etc.

Gerundio. Pudiendo. Part. past Podido.
The entirely irregular Verbs continued. 173

14. Poner, to put, to place. (15.)

Pres. Indic. Pongo, pones, pone, ponemos, ‘poneis, ponen.
Defin. »  Puse, pusiste, puso, pusimos, pusisteis, pusieron.
Futuro »  Pondré, pondrds, pondrd, ete.

Condic. »  Pondria, pondrias, ete.

Pres. Subj. Ponga, pongas, ponga, ete.

Imperf. »  Pusiese, pusieses, pusiese, ete.

Futuro » Pusiere, pusieres, etc. .

Condic. »  Pusiera, pusieras, ete.

Imperativo. Pon (tu)! ponga V.! poned.

Part. past Puesto.

Likewise the compounds, as: componer, to compose;
deponer, to depose etc.

15. Podrir, to rot (obsolete). (18.)

Pres. Indic. Pudro, pudres, pudre, podrimos, podris, pudren.

Defin. » Podri, podriste, pudrid, podrimos, podristeis,
pudrieron.

Pres. Subj. Pudra, pudras, ete.

Imperf. »  Pudriese, etc.

Futuro » Pudriere, etc.

Condic. »  Pudriera, etc.

Gerundio. Pudriendo. Part. past Podrido.

NB. Some grammarians prefer the Condicional Indic.
pudria, (inst. of podria), to distinguish it from the correspon-
ding form of poder. The derivate repudrirse, to long, to wish
ardently, is regular.

16. Querer, to be willing, to wish, to love. (i7.)

Pres. Indic. Quiero, quieres, quiere, queremos, quereis, quieren.
Defin. »  Quise, quisiste, quiso, quisimos, quisisteis, quisieron.
Futuro » Querré, querrds, querii, ete.

Condic. » Querria, querrias, etc.

Pres. Subj. Quiera, quieras, quiera, ete.

Imperf. »  Quisiese, etc.

Futuro » Quwisiere, etc.

Condic. »  Quisiera, etc.

Imperativo. Quiere (tu)! quiera V.! quered!

Gerundio. Queriendo. Part. past Querido.

17. Saber, to know, to be able. (16).
Pres. Indic. Sé, sabes, sabe, sabemos, sabeis, saben.
Defin. » Supe, supiste, supo, supimos, supisteis, supteron.
Futuro »  Sabré, sabrds, sabrd, sabremos, sabreis, sabran.
Condic. »  Sabria, sabrias, etc.
174 Lesson 40.

Pres. Subj. Sepa, sepas, etc.

Imperf. »  Supiese, etc.

Futuro » Supiere, ete.

Condic. » Supiera, etc.

Imperativo. Sabe (tu) sepa V.! sabed!
Gerundio. Sabiendo. Part. past Sabido.

18. Salir, to go out; to arise. (19.)
Pres. Indic. Salgo, sales, sale, salimos, salis, salen.
Defin. » Sali, saliste, salid, salimos, salisteis, salieron.
Futuro » Saldré, saldrds etc.
Condic. »  Saldria, saldrias, etc.
Pres. Subj. Salga, salgas, etc.
Imperf. »  Saliese, etc.
Futuro »  Saliere etc.
Condic. » Saliera, etc.
Imperativo. Sal (tu)! salga V.! salid!

19. Valer, to be worth (20), is conjugated like salir,
as also all the compounds of salir and valer, as:
sobresalir, to surpass, to trespass; eqguivaler, to
be equivalent.

The Imperativo of valer, however, is more rarely val than
vale. The compounds of salir and valer form a regular
Imperative mood. Thus: Sobresale tu; prevdlete! (avail
thyself!)

20. Traer, to draw, to bring, to fetch. (8.)

Pres. Indic. Traigo, traes, trae, traemos, traeis, traen.
Imperf. » Traia, traias, traia, traiamos, traiais, traian.
Defin. » Traje, trajiste, trajo, trajimos, trajisteis, trajeron.
Futuro » Traeré, etc.

Condic. » Traeria, etc.

Pres. Subj. Traiga, traigas, etc.

Imperf. »  Trajese, ete.

Futuro » Trajere, etc.

Condic. »  Trajera, etc.

Imperativo. Trae (tu)! traiga V.! traed!

Gerundio. Trayendo. Part. past Traido.

21. Venir, to come. (19.)
Pres. Indic. Vengo, vienes, viene, venimos, venis, vienen.
Defin. » Vine, viniste, vino, vinimos*), vinisteis, vinieron.
Futuro » Vendré, vendrds, vendra, etc.
Condic. » Vendria, etc.

*) Old and rare forms: veniste, venimos, venisteis.
The entirely irregular Verbs continued. 175

Pres. Subj. Venga, vengas, etc.

Imperf. »  Viniese, vinieses, etc.

Futuro » Viniere, etc.

Condic. »  Viniera, ete.

Imperativo. Ven (tui)! venga V.! venid!
Gerundio. Viniendo. Part. past Venido.

Likewise all the compounds of venir, as: convenir, to
meet, to be convenient; revenir, to come back, etc.
The Imperative Mood of these verbs occurs but seldom.

22. Ver, to see. (22.)

Pres. Indic. Veo, ves, ve, vemos, veis, ven.
Jmperf.» Veia*), veias, veia, veiamos, veiais, veian.
Defin. » Vi, viste, vid, vimos, visteis, vieron.
Futuro »  Veré, verds, ete.

Condic. » Veria, verias, etc.

Pres. Subj. Vea, veas, etc.

Imperf. »  Viese, vieses, etc.

Futuro » Viere, etc.

Condic. » Viera, ete.

Imperativo. Ve (tu)! vea V.! ved!

Gerundio. Viendo. Part. past Visto.

Likewise the compounds, as prever, to fore-see, rever, to
meet again, etc., whereas proveer, to provide, is regular.

Words.
The straw, la paja. sick, ill, enfermo.
the camp, el campo. slowly, lentamente, despacio.
la hacienda, uick, ligero, de prisa.

the ortane; | los bienes. wallinalye with pleasure, con
the cage, la jaila. mucho gusto.
the favour, el favor. too, too much, demasiado.
th Aut j el asno, to distribute, distribuir.

€ ass, donkey, | ef burro. to order, to command, mandar.
the flower-pot, el florero. ~ to afflict, afligir.
the window, la ventana. to quarrel, to scold, refir, re-
the chair, la silla. ganar.
the coat, el vestido. to comply with (a wish), Wenar.
infamous, infame. to accept, aceptar.

Traduccion. 63.
1. Do the children sleep? They do not yet sleep, but
I thought (that) they slept. Do you think that I sleep? Do
not sleep the whole day! The dog slept on the straw before
the house. How**) will you that I sleep, if you make (fr.
hacer) so much noise? The soldiers slept (Jinperf.), when

*) Old form: vid, etc. — **) am I to sleep...
176 Lesson 40.

the general came into the camp. I die of hunger. af you do
not give me something to eat. Napoleon died (Jef.) on (en)
the island of St. Helena the 5th of May 1821. Leonidas and
his gallant companions died (Def) at Thermopylae. Die,
infamous (man)! At his death (Gerand. of morir) the father
distributed his fortune among (entre) his sons. What are you
doing (Pres. Ind.) here? I make a cage for the bird of my
little sister. I did (Def.) all (that) I could (Jmperf.) do
for a friend. Wilt thou do what I have ordered thee? No,
I will not do it, because I cannot do it. I should [like to]
do it, if you would also do me a favow. Do (thou) always
thy duty, and thou wilt be contented and happy.

2. My friend did (Def.) what his father wished. Where
do you go, my friend? ~- I go to see my brother, who is
ill. It is (already) time; let us go uway (1. pers. plur. Im-
perative from irse)! You go too slowly; go more quickly!
Sancho Pansa rode (Imperf. of ir) on his donkey like a Pa-
triarch. I went (Def.) to tell him that I could not come.
Do go home! There is nothing more to (que) (be doné) do.
I cannot tell you how much (cuanto) the behaviour of this
man afflicted me. We cannot do all (that) we like. I could
(Def.) not come. Could not the merchant give you back the
money which you had lent him? I put (Pres.) these books
on the table; put yours on it too! I put (Def.) the flower-
pots in (ér. on) the window. Where (do you want me to)
will you that I put my hat? Put it on the chair! If you
put (Imperf.) it on the table, (papa) the father would scold
(you). God did not wish (Def.) that the desire of the poor
man should be accomplished (reflective: that the d. ete.
accomplished itself, fr. cwmplirse). I wish that you do not
go out to-day. If he wished that we went out, he would
tell (us so) it us.

3. The enemies will not accept our conditions. I know
that you have done what you could (do). Do you know that
the countess (has) arrived yesterday? I did not know it,
but the footman (has) told (me so) it me. If I knew that
you would go out to-night, I should not come. How much
is this coat worth? It will be worth about 20 dollars. Bring
(in) the flowers which I (have) bought this morning! I shall
bring them directly. Do you come at last, my friend? As
you see, I come; but I should not have come, if the tailor
(el sastre) had not brought my coat. He did not come (Def:),
because you had not invited him. Do come! JI shall intro-
duce you to my cousin (f.). Yesterday I saw a Turk or a
Persian on the promenade. Do you see what I have written?
I would not see it, because I was too sad. I shall see what
I shall be able to do for you.
The entirely irregular Verbs continued. 177

Conversacion.

éDuerme V.?
éPor qué esta V. triste?

éDe cudntos afios (at what
age) murid su tia do V.?
éQué haces en mi cuarto?

¢Por qué no hace V. lo que
le he dicho?

éQué haremos mafiana?

éHizo frio (cold) en su cuarto

“de V.?

éPor qué no se levanta V.
(do you rise)?

éPodra V. comenzar sus lec-
ciones mafiana?

éQuién puso aqui el florero?

éLe gusta (pleases) & V. la
comida (meal)?

éQuieres mucho 4 tu_her-
mana?

Ya no duermo. ¢Qué tiene V.
que decirme?

Porque mi mejor amigo ha
muerto.

Murié de treinta y seis afios.

No hago nada. ¢Cémo haria
alguna cosa en un cuarto
que no es mio?

No lo hago, porque no es justo.

Haced lo que quereis.

Si, hizo mucho frio, pero ahora
hace calor (t is warm).
No puedo levantarme, porque

estoy enfermo.

Me parece que todavia no puedo
comenzar, porque no tengo
tiempo.

El criado lo puso en la silla.

Me gusta muchisimo.

Si, la quiero mucho, porque es
muy afable (amiable).

Reading Exercise.
Un viaje 4 Paris.
En una fonda.

Vaya gqué te parece de Paris? — Todavia no he visto
mucho, sin embargo, me parece una ciudad encantadora. — Y
lo es en efecto; pero todo su encanto no impide el que no se
pueda vivir sin comer. — Yo tambien tengo apetito; llévame
& una fonda donde se coma bien. — Vamos al Palacio Real.

jMozo! dénos usted dos docenas de ostras, una botella de
vino blanco, y una lista de lo que hay para comer. — Aqui
ienen ustedes la lista. — Gracias. Luego pediremos lo que
nos convenga. ~- Ahora leamos esta lista y sepamos lo que
hemos de comer ... pero, ese mozo se ha equivocado; no
esté escrita en frances. — A ver, ddmela. Tienes razon, esta
en espafiol. Dichosamente yo sé ese idioma y puedo compren-
der lo que dice perfectamente bien. — jHombre! tanto mejor.
No me disgustaré el saber como se pide de comer en la
lengua de Cervantes. —- Vaya pues, escucha. Voy 4 decirte
el nombre de cada manjar.

Spanish Grammar. 12
178 Lesson 41.

La fonda, the inn, hotel. luego, directly.

vaya, well now *). pedir, to ask.

qué te parece, what doyouthink? convenir, to fit.

el encanto, the charm. leer, to read.

encantador**), charming. saber, to know. :

en efecto, indeed, equivocarse, to be mistaken.

impide (fr. impedir, to hinder). d ver, let me see.
lérame, conduct me, take me. dichosamente, fortunately.

vdmos, let us go (fr. ir). el idioma, the language.

el Palacio Real, the Palais Royal. disgustar, to be disagreeable.
el mozo, the waiter, escuchar, to listen, to hear.
dénos, give us. voy a decirte, I'll tell you.
la ostra, the oyster. el nombre, the name.

la lista, the card. el manjar, the dish, meal.

Forty-first Lesson. Leccion cuadra-
gésima cuarta.

The Participle.

Out of the very limited number of the Spanish de-
fective verbs some have already been mentioned among
the irregular verbs. As they are very seldom met with,
we shall but enumerate them at the end of the I. Part,
and proceed at once to the

Irregular and double Participles.

The Spanish language has a few irregular participles
belonging to verbs which are otherwise regular; viz.

Part. pass.
Abrir, to open. . . . . abierto.
cubrir, to cover . . . . cubierto.
escribir, to write . . . . eserito***),
imprimir, to print. . éimpreso.
resolver, to resolve. . resueltot).
satisfacer, to satisfy . . . satisfecho.

NB. Bendecir and maldecir have been mentioned before.

Concerning the so-called double participles, the pupil
should bear in mind, that the regular forms in —ado

*) Pres. subj. of ir (p. 172). In French, allons! is used in a
similar way.
**) In French: enchanteur.
***) Likewise all its derivates, as: inscrito, proserito, ete.
t) Resoluto is obsolete.
The Participle. 179

and —ido are proper participles, i. e. they form (with
haber) the compound tenses of the verb, as:

He omitido, I have omitted,

whereas the contracted irregular forms are adjectives,
which may only be used with ser and estar, as:

Una palabra esté omisa, a word is omitted.

Alphabetical list of the verbs with double participles.
Participle. Verbal Adjective.

Absortarse O.*), to wonder .. . Absortado O. Absorto.
absorber, to absorb. . . .. . . absorbido. absorto
(amazed).
abstraer, to abstract, to conclude. abstraido. abstracto.
acender O., to light, to set on fire. acendido O. acenso O.
aceptar, to accept ..... =. . aceptado. acepto.
adquirw, to gain, to acquire . adquirido. adquisito O.
aducir O., to sweeten, to soften . aducido O. aducho and
adujo O.
adurir O., to burn. ..... . adurido O. adusto O.
aficionarse, to be fond of . . . . aficionado. afecto.
afar, to fix, to nail... .. . afijado O. afijo.
aflijir, to afflict, to be sorry . . aflizido. aflicto S.**)
aguzar, to sharpen, to grind . . aguzado. agudo.
ahitarse, to disorder one’s stomach. ahitado. ahito.
alertarse, to become watchful . -. alertado. alerto.
anevar, to annex ...... . anexado. anexo.
angostar, to narrow .. . - . angostado. angosto.

. aprehender O., to seize... . aprehendido O. aprehenso O.
arrepentirse, to repent ... . . arrepentido. arrepiso O.
asegurar, to assure, to insure . asegurado. aserto O.
astrinjir O., to astringe. . . . . astringido 0. astricto.
asumir O., to assume. . . . asumido O, asunto O.
atender, to observe, to expect . . atendido. atento.
avertir O., to separate; to dissuade. avertido O. averso O.
Bendecir, to bless . .... . . Bendecido. Bendito.
bienquerer, to like, to love . . . bienquerido. bienquisto.
Cansarse, to grow tired ... . Cansado. Canso O.
cenir, to gird, to surround .. . cefido. cinto O.
colmar, to heap . . as colmado. colmo O.
combarse, to bend, to pow . . . combado. combo.

“ campajinar, to join. . . i compajinado. compacto.

“compeler, to compel, to oblige . . compelido. compulso.
completar, to complete . .. . . completado. completo.
comprender, to comprehend, to

understand ....... +. comprendido, comprenso.

*) (), means obsolete. **) S. means seldom used. sine
180

comprimir, to compress
conceder, to concede, to grant .
concluir, to conclude é
concretar, to join, to unite
confesar, to confess
confundir, to confound .
conquerir O., to conquer
constituir, to constitute
consumirse, to consume .
contener, to contain -
contentarse, to be contented with,
contraer, to contract, to conclude.
controvertir, to quarrel
contundir, to squeeze . :
convelerse, to contract (of nerves),
convencer, to convince 7
convertir, to convert, to change ‘
convulsarse, to convulse
correjir, to correct . 3
corromper, to corrupt, to waste
corvar, to crooken, to bend .
crespar ©., to curl, to crisp. .
cruentar 0., to stain with blood,
to become blood- -thirsty
cuadrar, to make square
cultivar, to cultivate

Defender, to defend
densar, to condense
deprehender O., to seize :
descalzar, to take off the shoes 5
descinjir O., to ungird
desertar, to "desert
desnudar, to denude
despertar, to awake sak
desquitarse, to make up for one’s 8
loss (at play), to repair .
destruir, to destroy .
desyunciy O., to unyoke ‘
devover O., to vow, to dedicate
difundir, to pour out, to shed.
duerir, to digest . ;
dirijir, to direct .
dispersar, to disperse .
distinguir, to distinguish
dividir, to divide .

Efundir, to pour out .

elejir, to elect

embriagarse, to intoxicate one’s

self .

emprestar, to lend

Lesson 41.

Participle.
comprimido.
concedido.
concluido.
concretado.
confesado.
confundido.

conquerido O.

constituido.
consumido.
contenido.
contentado.
contraido.

controvertido.

contundido.
convelido.
convencido.
convertido.
convulsado.
correjido.
corrompido.
corvado.
crespado O.

cruentado O.
cuadrado O.
cultivado.

Defendido.
densado.

deprehendido Q.

descalzado.
descinjido O.
desertado.
desnudado.
despertado.

desquitado.
destruido.
desyuncido.
devovido O.
difundido.
dijerido.
dirijido.
dispersado.
distinguido.
dividido.

Efundido.
elejido.

embriagado.
emprestado.

Verbal Adject.

compreso.
conceso O.
concluso.
concreto.
confeso.
confuse.
conquiso.
constituto O.
consunto.
contento O.
contento.
contracto.
controverso O.
contuso.
convulso.
convicto.
converso.
convulso.
correcto.
corrupto.
corvo.
crespo.

cruento.
cuadro.
culto.

Defenso O.
denso.
deprehenso O.
descalzo.
descinto O.
desierto,
desnudo.
despierto.

desquito O.
destructo.
desyunto.
devoto O.
difuso.
dijesto O.
directo.
disperso.
distinto.
diviso.

Efuso.
electo.

embriago O.
empresto O.
The Participle.

Participle.
enhestar, to set up . enhestado.
enjugar, to dry. enjugado.
entecar, to be feeble entecado.
entregar, to remit, to deliver entregado.
eryjir, to erect . erijido.
esculpir, to engrave esculpido.
espesar, to thicken . espesado.
estrechar, to narrow estrechado.
estrenir, to stop estrenido.
exceptuar, to except exceptuado.
excluir, to exclude . excluido.
exentar, to free exentado.
expeler, to expel . expelido.
experimentar, to try experimentado.
expresar, to express expresado.
extender, to extend . extendido.
extinguir, to extinguish . extingudo.
extraer, to draw out extraido.
eximir, to exempt . eximido.
Falsear, to falsify Falseado.
faltar, to want. faltado.
favorecer, to favour . seks favorecido.
fechar, to date, to seal . fechado.
fijar, to fix ; fijado.
finjir, to sham. . finjido.
freir, to fry... freido.
Hartar, to satiate . Hartado.
Iludir O., to cheat . ; Tludido O.
improvisar, to improvise, to ex. p

temporise eee ew ee ee we Umprovisado.
imeluir, to include . . - . » + ineluido.
ameurriy, to incur. . .. . incurrido.

wndecidirse S., to be undecided indecidido 8.

indefender s. to be without de-

fence indefendido 8.
pee to obstruct infartado.
infecir O., to infect infecido O.
infectar, to infect infectado.
infestar, to infest infestado.
inficionar, to infect . inficionado.
impujir, to inflict . inflijido O.
infundir, to pour in infundido.
injerir, to meddle with . injerido.
imjertar, to mix. . . injerdado.
inserir §., to insert . inserido.
insertar, to insert insertado.
imstruir, to instruct . instruido. |
interrumpir, to interrupt interrumpido.
introducir, to introduce . introducido.

181

Verbal Adject.

enhiesto.
enjuto.
enteco.
entrego O.
erecto.
esculto O,
espeso.
estrecho.
estricto.
excepto.
excluso.
exento.
expulso.
experto.
expreso.
extenso.
extinto.
extracto.
exento. .

Failso.
falto.
favorito.
fecho.
fijo.
ficto.
frito.

Harto.
Tluso.

improviso.
incluso.
incurso.
indeciso.

indefenso.
infarto.
infecto.
infecto.
infesto.
anfecto.
inflicto O.
infuso.
injerto.
injerto.
inserto.
anserto.
instructo O.
interrupto.
introducto O.
182

intrusarse, to intrude .
wmvertir, to invert
ainyunjir, to join .
juntar, to join .

Lasarse O., to grow tired

leudar, to rise, to swell (of dough).

limpiar, to clean .

listar, to inscribe, to order . .

Maldecir, to curse .

malquistar, to disunite; to become

odious . -
mancar, to be wanting .
manifestar, to manifest .

manumitir, to manumit, to set free.

marchitar, to wither
merecer, to merit, to earn .
mondar, to shear.

mutilar, to mutilate

Nacer, to be born .
nublar, to cloud

Ocultar, to hide .
omitir, to omit .
oprimir, to oppress .

Pagar, to pay .

pasar, to pass . :
perfeccionar, to perfect A
permitir, to permit. . .
pervertir, to pervert
pintar, to paint
polucionar §., to pollute’
poseer, to possess
premitir O., to premise .
prender, to take, to seize .
presumir, to presume .
pretender, to pretend .
prisar O., to arrest
producir, to produce
proferir, to proffer .
profesar, to profess
propender, to impend .

prostituirse, to render one’s, self
ridiculous, to prostitute one’s

self .
proveer, to foresee

provenir, to draw one’s origin .

Lesson 41.

Participle.

intrusado.
invertido.
inyunjido O.
juntado.

Lasado 0.
leudado.
limpiado.
listado.

Maldecido.
malquistado.

mancado.
manifestado.
manumitido.
marchitado.
merecido.
mondado.
mutilado.

Nacido.
nublado.

Ocultado.
omitido.
oprimido.

Pagado.
pasado. °
perfeccionado.

- permitido.

pervertido.
pintado.

. polucionado 8.
- poseido.

- premitido O.

- prendido.

presumido.
pretendido.
prisado O.

- producido.
- proferido.

profesado.
propendido.

prostituido.

» proveido.

provenido.

Verbal Adject.

intruso.
inverso.
inyuncto O.

junto.

aso.
leudo.
limpio.
listo.

Maldito.
malquisto.

manco.
manifiesto.
manumiso.
marchito.
mérito O.
mondo.
mattilo.

Nato.
nublo.

Oculto.
omiso.
opreso.

(fami-

Pago
[liar).

‘paso.
perfecto.
permiso O.
‘perverso.
pinto.
poluto.
‘poseso.
premiso 8.
preso.
presunto.
pretenso.
priso O.
producto.
proferto O.
profeso.
propenso.

prostituto.
provisto.
provento O.
The Participle. 183

Participle. Verbal Adject.
Querer, to be willing, to 1 ,

to like .... - » Querido. Quisto O,
quitar, to take; to impeach . - quitado. quito.
Raer, and rasar, to raze. . . Raido and Raso.

rasado.
ranciarse, to become rancid . . . ranciado. rancio.
rarefacerse, to become rarefied . rarefacido. rarefacto.
reasumir, sO reassume se es reasumido. reasunto O.
recluir, to seclude ... recluido. recluso.
recocer, to boil too much, to boil

once more. . + + + + + recocido. recocho.
reflejar, to reverberate... reflejago. reflejo.
refringir, to refract tet nee refrinjido. refracto.
remitir, to remit - : remitido. renviso.
repeler, to push back . repelido. repulso O.
repletar, to fill . repletado. repleto.
requerir, to require, to prove requerido. requisito.
responder, to answer . respondido. respuesto O.
restrinjir, to restrain restrinjido. restricto.
rizar, to curl - rizado. rlZ0.
romper, to break . rompido. roto.
Salar, to salt ‘ Salado. Salso O.
salpresar, to salt, to pickle : salpresado. salpreso.
salvar, to save . ents salvado. salvo.
secar, to dry. . . secado. seco.
selejir 8., to select . selejido 8. selecto.
‘sepultar, "to bury . . . . sepultado. sepulto.
situar, to situate, to place . . . situado. sito.
soltar, to.solve .. soltado. suelto.
subtender, to submit (to. one’s in--

spection) woe ee ee ee es 6Subtendido. subtenso.
sujetar to subdue . . .. . sujetado. sujeto.
suprimir, to suppress. . . . . suprimido. supreso.
surjir, to come forth, to rise . . surjido. surto.
suspender, to suspend ... . . suspendido. suspenso.
sustituir, to substitute . . . . . sustitwido. sustituto.
Tender, to extend ... ... Zendido. Tenso or teso.
tefir, to dye . 2 tenido. tinto.
torcer, to wring, to wrest, to turn, torcido. tuerto.
Vaciar, to empty, to evacuate . Vaciado. Vacio.
Yuntar, to put oxen into harness. Yuntado. Yunto.
Zafarse, to run away. . . Zafado. Zafo.

NB. Of these verbal “gijectives the follower: admit of
the auxiliary haber: :

Frito. prescrito.
injerto. provisto.
opreso. roto.

preso. supreso.
184 Lesson 41.

Besides their passive signification some past participles
have an active one, as:

Un hombre leido*), a man, who has read much =
well-read man.

Reading Exercise.
Un viaje 4 Paris.
Continuacion.

Sopa de pan (bread-soup), sopa de fideos (vermicelli-soup),
caldo (broth), caldo de puchero (consommé-soup), vaca (beef),
carne asada (roast-beef), pierna de carnero asada (roast leg of
mutton), ternera (veal), tocino (bacon), jamon (ham), pastel
(pie), leche (milk), huevos (eggs), huevos pasados por agua
(soft eggs), huevos estrellados (fried eggs), una tortilla (pan-
cake), mantequilla (or manteca, butter), lomo (loin), una ta-
jada de melon (a slice of melon), ensalada (salad), una pava
(turkey), un pollo (fowl), mostaza (mustard), perdices asadas
(roast partridges), codornices trufadas (quails with truffles),
alondras en aceite (larks in oil), pato asado (roast-duck), sal-
mon frito (fried salmon), sardinas frescas (fresh sardels);
lenguado frito (fried plaice [sole]), anguila (eel), rifiones de
carnero (sheep’s kidneys), pichones en salsa (pigeons in sauce),
menestras y legumbres (vegetables), aleachofas (artichokes), coli-
flor (cauliflower), setas (mushrooms), habichuelas verdes (fresh
beans), esparragos (asparagus), peregil (parsley), lechuga (let-
tuce), espinacas (spinage), zanahorias (carrots), lentejas (len-
tils), guisantes (green peas), nabos (turnips), berros (cresses),
patatas (potatoes), los postres (dessert), queso (cheese), dulees
(sweets), dulce de membrillo (preserved quinces), fruta (fruit),
peras (pears), ciruelas (plums), cerezas (cherries), manzanas
(apples), camuesas (rennet-apples), albaricoques (apricots), me-
locotones (peaches), higos (figs), naranjas (oranges), limones
(lemons), uvas (grapes), pasas (raisins), aceitunas (olives),
vino (wine), vino generoso (dessert-wine), vino afiejo (old wine),
vino tinto (red wine), vino blanco (white wine), aguardiente
(spirits), ron (rum), café (coffee), té (tea).

Gracias, amigo, por tu complacencia! Ahora ocupémonos,
de comer y luego iremos 4 dar un paseo por los Bulevares.’.

La complacencia, the kindness. ir d dar un paseo, to take a
ocuparse, to busy one’s self. walk.
los Bulevares, the Boulevards (at Paris).

 

 

*) Like the German belejen.
List of defective Verbs. 185

Alphabetical list of the defective verbs.

Abolir, to abolish, wants the Ist, 2nd, and 3rd pers. sing. of the

_ pres. indic., the pres. subj., and the imperat.*).

Antojarse, to covet, to long for, has only the 3d persons of the
sing. and plur. 7

Arrestrse, to become numb, has no pres. and seldom a fut. indie.

Asir, to seize, the pres. indic. 1. pers. azgo is obsolescent; the
other tenses are rare, exc. the fut. subj. (see Less. 39).

Cocer, to cook, to fry, seldom occurs in the irregular forms.

Concernir, to concern, is, conformably to the Academy, only used
in the 8rd persons: concierne, ‘conciernen; concernia, concer-
nian, and the Gerund. concerniendo. However, the forms
concerm6é and concernieron; concierna, conciernan: concerniese;
concerniera, concernieran ; concerniere and concernieren are also
met with. .

Erguir, to erect, is nearly obsolete in the pres. indic. and subj.
and in the fut. subj. Authors of the XVII. century, however,
make sometimes use of the forms Yergo, -es, -e, -en; Yerga,
-as, -a, -an; def. Irguid, -eron; subj. Irguiese, -era; fat. subj.
Irguiere, etc.; imperat. Yergue, ger. Irguiendo.

Incoar, to begin, and
Loar, to praise, are not used in the 1st sing. pres. indice.

Pesar, when meaning to repent and to regret, has only the 3rd
pers. sing. The verb is complete, when meaning to weigh
and to consider.

Placer, to please, has of the pres. and imperf. ind. only the 3rd
persons (place, placen, placia etc.). The irregul. forms plugo
(Def), plegue, and plega (geld. plazca) of the pres. subj., plu-
guiere (Fut. Subj.), pluguese* (Imperf. Subj), and plugmera
(Cond. Subj.) are met with, as well as the regular forms of
the fut. and condic. (placeré and placeria). Of the compounds,
aplacer, to please, is obsolete, complacer and deplacer are
in use.

Pacer, t0 pasture, has no 1. pers. sing. of the pres. indic. and
fut. subj.

Raer, to shave, has only the pres. subj. raya.
Reponer, to answer, has only the def. repuse etc. When meaning
to set back etc., it is regular.

 

 

*) The following verbs of the 3rd Conj. offer the same ano-
maly: arrecirse and aterirse, to grow stiff (by cold), empedernir,
to petrify; colorir to paint, to colour; garantir, to warrant; manir,
to render mellow (of meat); to wear out (clothes ets.), and a few
others of less importance. With all these verbs the forms ending
in ¢ and those where the termination begins with i, are out of
use. — Formerly blandir, to flatter, showed the same anomaly;
but at present the forms blande and blanden are sometimes met
with,
186 Lesson 41.

Roer, to nibble, offers the same anomalies as Pacer. The pres.
is either roa ete. or roya, but the comp. corroer forms only
corroa.

Soler, to use, to be in the habit, has only the pres. and emperf,
indic.: suelo, sueles etc., solemos etc., suelen; imperf. solia ete.
The def. soli is rare. Very seldom occur the fut. ind. and
the subj. of the pres. and imperf.

Taiter, to play on a stringed instrument, is quite obsolete. The
pres. tango sometimes occurs in ancient writers.

Yacer, to lie, to rest, has only yace (Pres.) and yacia (Imperf),
the former mostly in the expression aqui yace, here lies (on
epitaphs)*). Rare forms of this verb are the Gerund. yaciendo,
the pres. yazgo (yago is quite obsolete), yaces etc., imperf.
yacia, fut. yaceré and a few others.

Ee eee to

*) In French: ci-git.
187

SECOND PART.

Introductory Chapter.

 

Orthography, Pronunciation, and Signs
of Punctuation.

§ 1. Ancient and modern orthography.

Not until modern times was Spanish orthography
based on simple and general principles. From the year
1763 down to the year 1846 the Academy of Madrid has
successively established a radical reform, and where this
learned society still hesitated to introduce necessary inno-
vations, practice continued the work, mostly in Spanish
America, so that modern Spanish orthography appears
now quite as simple as the Italian.

In Spanish books, printed at different periods, a
great many deviations from the general and now univer-
sally adopted rules may be found, by which the beginner
is easily misled. It -will be well, therefore, to state the
most important of these anomalies:

1) g with its guttural sound (th) is now commonly
replaced by j. Thus one writes mujer instead of muger;
majestad instead of magestad; finjido instead of fingido.
Some authors prefer g where the Latin word has this
letter, but the majority use j everywhere.

2) According to a new proposal é should be substi-
tuted for y where it is not pronounced like the English
y in year, but only has the value of an 7. Thus mu,
hoi, rei instead of muy, hoy, rey. This orthography
~ however, suitable as it is, has had success in Spanish
188 The Vowels.

America only, while it has been adopted neither in modern
Spanish literature nor in newspapers, so that we also
have not taken account of it in the new edition of this
grammar. Between two vowels, where y is a consonant
and pronounced like y in year, it cannot be replaced by
2, thus: el rei, the king, pl. los reyes.

3) w with the guttural sound of j. (tj), is now
everywhere replaced by j. Thus veloj instead of relox;
ejército in lieu of exército. But where « has the sound
of cs, it is retained, as: ewayerar, pr. ec-sagerar. In
Spanish America cs is commonly substituted for a, as:
eeselencia = excelencia. When, as in the word eztran-
yjero, foreigner, x is sounded like s, this letter is often
used in its stead, thus: estranjero, Estremadura, ete.

Note. In the Latin prefix ex, where x has the sound of
cs, as in English, 'v is retained; thus: exrey, Ex-king; ez-
ministro, Ex-minister. Commonly these words are written
with a hyphen, as in English: ex-rey, ex-ministro.

4) # is now also retained in the plural (see Less. 2,
I. Part) where it should properly be replaced by ce. Thus
felizes instead of felices. This practice, however, is not
yet universally adopted.

Note. In conformity with the general rule, z before e
and ~ ought to be replaced by c. Notwithstanding, it is re-
tained by etymological laws in the following words and their
derivatives:

Zelo, zeal. zedilla, the cedilla. zipizape, an uproar-
rezelo, suspicion. —_géfiro, the zephyr. ious scuffle, a row.

zenit, zenith. giléroand, a certain zirigana, flattery.

zénzalo, gnat; fly. stringed instru- @éczaque, a trench
zequi, zechin (Ve- ment not unlike 1 Zlg-zag.

netian gold coin). a spinet. zizaia, weed, tare;
zeda, the letter z. zine, zinc. dissension,

and a few others which are found in every dictionary.

§ 2. The vowels.

a. Simple vowels.
The most important remarks on the vowels have
been made at the beginning of the first part. We now
add some peculiarities:
The Vowels. 189

e has a double sound, a somewhat.obscure one, if
this vowel terminates the syllable, as mé-nos, pe-ro; and
a clearer one, if the syllable is closed by a consonant,
as ver, ven-do.

o has a clear sound, if the stress is laid on it, as:
-s6mos, pOdbre, Oro; if no stress is laid on it, the sound
is obscurer (see page 6).

b. Diphthongs.

As we stated in the I. Part (§ 4), the Spanish lan-
guage has no proper diphthongs, 1. e. combinations of
vowels, which form only one sound, as f. e. the English
ai in the word laid*). If two vowels meet, the stress is
laid on the principal of them, and the others are rapidly
but distinctly pronounced.

The diphthongs of the Spanish language are in their
alphabetical order: ;

Ai, au; Ei (ey), ew: Ia, ie, io, iu; Ot (oy), ow (only in
foreign words and in dialects); Ua, ue, ui (uy),
and x0. ’

». If these combinations of vowels are true (Spanish)

_ diphthongs, the stress is laid on the first vowel, as: dire,

air; réino, kingdom; cdusa, cause, etc. Only if the first
“vowel is 7, as in viuda, widow; Dios, God, the stress is
laid on the second vowel; thus vida, Dzds ete.**). This
is also the case, if the word containing the diphthong
is a nominative case or a verb in the infinitive mood, or
an indeclinable word, as: pais, country; oir, to hear;
aun, still, etc.

The diphthong is also resolved into two independent
vowels, if the second vowel belongs to a verbal inflection,
as leido, read (past part. = le-ido); oido, heard (= o-ido);
oimos, we hear (= o-imos). In this case we have no
diphthong, but two independent syllables.

*) It must be’ well understood that in this limited sense
there would be no diphthongs at all in Spanish. Here a combi-
nation of vowels is called diphthong, if the two vowels of which
it consists, form only one syllable, as: aé-re; cau-sa etc.

**) If, however, the stress is laid on i, as in certain verbal
terminations like vendréia, envio, or in some substantives as
mania ete., the combination of voweis is no diphthong.
190 The Accent.

This also happens, if the eritten accent is on one
of the vowels, as in fluctiéo, desafio, or if one of the
vowels has the crema, as insiniiar, alianza*).

If the prefix re— precedes a word beginning with a
vowel, the e of re forms no diphthong with the follow-
ing vowel; thus scintegrar is pronounced re-integrar (and

=
not rein-tegrar).

In the very limited number of words beginning with

dei and diu, et and iw are pronounced as two syllables;
thus detdad, pron. de-idad; diurno, pron. di-urno.

c. Triphthongs.

The only compounds of three vowels, forming but.
one syllable, are the following: iat, ze?, waz, and wet (uey).
Here, too, the stress is laid on one vowel, as: compartidis,
aliviéis, buéy (buei), Paragudé ete.

§ 3. The Accent.

As we stated I. P. § 7, the accent, i. e. the stress
which is laid on a certain syllable of every word, requires
no distinct sign in Spanish, if the pronunciation follows
the rules established at the beginning of this grammar.

The written accent ('), (el acento ortogrdfico) however,
is used:

1) if two vowels which seem to form a diphthong
are separated in pronunciation; thus: paraiso, fluctia,
heroina, envio, vacien etc.

Note. Nevertheless, the terminations of the past parti-
ciple are written without the accent, although the vowel of
the root is distinctly separated from the vowel of the inflec-
tion, as: caido, fallen (pr. ca-ido); oido heard (pr. o-ido). (See
§ 2, b.) This is also the case with the verbal termination
—ia, as: decia, diria etc., although the pronunciation is deci-a,
diri-a ete.

2) In the present and imperative of the verbs ending
in —iar and — uar, the stress is laid on 7 and uw, which
form no diphthong with the following vowel, and are,

*) The crema is also employed in some words in order to
indicate that two vowels, of which neither is accented, should not
be pronounced in one syllable, as: balaiistrada, embaidor, which
are pronounced: bala-ustrdda, emba-idor.
The Accent. 191

therefore, written with the accent, as: envid, fluctio,
colictia (see the above rule, 1).

Note. If, however, in these verbs the stress is not laid
on i or 0, but on the vowel of the root, no written accent
is admissible, as: estudio, pronuncio (accent. estddio, pro-
nimeio).

3) Again, the written accent is used, if in words
terminating in vowels (diphthongs excepted, see § 2, b).
the stress is not laid (conformably to the general rule
I. P.: On pronunciation, § 7, 1) on the penultimate, but
either on the antepenultimate or on the last syllable.
Thus alguno has no accent, after the general rule, nor
elegancia either, because in the latter word ia is a diph-
thong. Haré, on the contrary, is written with an accent,
because here, in opposition to the general rule, the stress
is laid on the final vowel, and principe, wiltimo, trigésimo
etc. should likewise be accented, because in these words
the stress is laid on the antepenultimate.

4) In words ending in consonants the stress is laid
on the last syllable, as we stated I. P. on Pron. § 7.
The seeming exceptions to this rule have been mentioned
‘in the same chapter. Real exceptions are:

a) Arbol, tree. cardcter (but in the pl. caractéres),
dingel, angel. crisis, crisis. [character.
dntes, before. exdmen, examination.

alférez, ensign. imdgen, image.
alcdzar, fortress. ménos, less.
cércel, prison. numen, divinity, talent.
régimen (in the pl. regimenes), government,
and a few others of less importance.

b) Verbal inflections like amdbamos, perderiamos etc. In
the terminations of the 2. pl. imperative, as: mirad, look
(you), some authors write the accent (mirdd), others omit it.

NB. Yet in this respect the accentuation is rather arbitrary
with the modern authors.

c) With proper nouns ending in consonants, the accent
is sometimes employed, if the stress is laid on any other
syllable but the last, as: Sdnchez, Carlos. This practice,
however, is not generally adopted.

d) If a personal pronoun is affixed to an accented verbal
termination, the accent remains, as: habléme (= me habld);
miréla, I looked at her (= la miré). The accent should be
written , if by the addition of the personal pronoun the stress
192 The Accent.

seemingly recedes to another syllable. Thus haciendo (doing)
has no written accent, because the stress, conformably to the
general rule, is on the penultimate. Haciéndolo (doing it),
however, should be accented, because now the stress is on
the antepenultimate.

e) Finally, the Spanish language makes use of the accent,
in order to distinguish certain words, which are written alike,
but differ in their signification. The most important of these

words are the following:
Unaccented.

Como, as, like.

cual, which (relat.).

cuando, when, as.

cuanto, -a, so much as...

da, he (she) gives.

de, of.

di, I gave.

donde, whereof, wherefrom
(relat.).

el, the (article).

hacia, I did.

he, I have.

mas, but.

mi, my. :

porque, because, as etc.

que, that, which (relat.).

quien, who (relat.).

se, himself, herself, itself etc.

si, if.

sus, his, her etc.
tal, such a one.

te, thee.

tu, thy.

ve, he (she) sees.

Accented.
¢Cémo? how?
gcudl? which? (interrog.)
cudl — cudl, the one — the
écudndo? when? (other.
écudnto? how much?
jdda! give (there)! \
dé, pres. subj. of dar, to give.
jdi! tell (thou)!
é donde? where?

él, he (pron.).

hacia, towards.

jhé! look there!

mds, more.

mt, me.

épor qué? why?

é qué? what? which? (interr.)
équién? which?

quién — quién, the one — the
sé, I know. [other.
st, yes; him- (her-, it-) self.
jsus! well! go on!

tdl_so.

té, tea.

tu, thou.

jvé! go (thou)!

Further, the following words are accented este, esta,
ese, esa, aquel, aquella, and other words, which in them-
selves are unimportant, when they are used emphatically,

e. g.:

éCudl es el principe Don Fernando? — Ese, ése, ése,
dijo Gutierre de Cardenas « la princesa Dota Isabel.

Which is prince Ferdinand? — The one there, said G.
de C. to princess Isabella.
The Separation of Words. 193

In conclusion we give the rules of accent, as prescribed
by the last edition*) of the “grammar of the Spanish
Academy”, so far as they differ from those stated above;
we have not however adopted them in the present
grammar, because we wished to wait and see whether they
will be generally accepted by the Spanish public; we have
not yet seen a Spanish book in which these rules have
been adopted.

According to the grarnmar of the Spanish Academy
there must be added to our chief rule 1, given on page 6
and 7, also the words in » and s; the words in nm and s
are excepted from our chief rule 2, so that by our chief
rule 4 the written accent would have to be put in the
following cases:

a) in polysyllabic words, having the accent (tone) on the
last syllable (voces agudas), if they end in a vowel or n, s;

b) in polysyllabic words, having the tone on the last
syllable but one (voces llanas), if they end in any other
consonant than » or s (if they end in » or s, they require
no accent),

Remark. The accent is now accordingly required in words
like corazén, opinién, ningiin, jamds, segin, etc., on the other
hand the accent is now left out in words like virgen, volumen,
jueves, carmen. The accentuation of plural forms as padres,
jardines, and that of verbal forms (as amas, amamos, amais, aman,
amabais, amaban, amards, amardn, etc.), thus come under the gene-
ral rule and need not be given as exceptions.

c) in words, which have the tone on the last syllable
but two (voces esdrijulas), or on the last syllable but three
or four (voces sombreesdrujulas), as ultimo, débilmente, décimo-
cuarto.

The Spanish Academy even prescribes that two accents
should be employed in case of compound words, as
vigésimoséptimo.

§ 4. The separation of words.

Rules.
1) If a simple consonant comes between two vowels,
this consonant begins the following syllable. Thus:
a-legre; a-mi-go etc.

*) Gramatica de la Lengua Castellana por la Real Academia
‘Espafiola. Madrid 1880.

Spanish Grammar. 12
194 The Separation of Words.”

Note. Ch, U, % are considered to be simple consonants,
and are thus subject to the preceding rule. Thus:

pu-chero; mu-iieca; o-lla; ca-lWar.

2) If two consonants come between two vowels, the
first of these consonants closes the preceding syllable
and the second begins the following. Thus:

per-r0; en-noblecer; ac-cidente; aletar-gar; ad-herir etc.*)
On the contrary, é and 7, if preceded by another conso-
nant (i. e. combinations like bl, br, cl, cr, pl, pr), are always
given to the following syllable. Hence the separations are
as follows: ,
a-pricto; ha-blar; a-clamacion; enno-blecer etc.
NB. Exceptions:
a) Those combinations, where s precedes / or 1, as:
is-la; Is-rael etc.
b) The combination ¢ in words beginning with at, as:
at-leta; ,at-lante etc.

3) Compound substantives do not follow the above
rules. They should always be separated conformably to
their components. Thus desacordar is not separated de-sa-
cordar but des-acordar, because acordar is the main
component, whereas des is only a prefix, like the English
nus in misconception or dis in distrust. Further examples:
ab-rogar (fr. rogar); a-delante (fr. delante); sab-arriendo
(fr. arrendar).

As, however, no word and no syllable may begin
with s and another consonant following, we are obliged
to separate in spite of etymology, ims-pirar; cos-tar;
ins-tituir**).

Note. With a great many words, that are originally
compounds, this fact has in course of time been lost sight
of. These words now follow the general rules. Thus subir.
is not separated etymologically sub-ir, but su-bir; peregrino .
is separated pe-regrino; imicial = énicial; abundar = ar’
bundar etc. :

*) H, though mute, is in such a case considered as a con-
sonant. F

**) The Spanish language avoids so carefully at the beginning
of a word or a syllable combinations of s and another consonant
following, that an e is invariably prefixed to st, sp etc. in order
to render the pronunciation feasible. Thus: esptritu (fr. the Latin
Spiritus), especie (fr. species), esfera (fr. sphera), etc.
The Signs of Punctuation. 195

4) If three consonants meet, the last of them, / and
y excepted, belongs to the following syllable. Thus:
ims-pirar; pers-picazg; cons-tar.

§ 5. The signs of punctuation.

The most striking difference between the Spanish and
other languages is the use of the note of interrogation
and the note of exclamation. To the preliminary remarks
contained in the I. Part we subjoin the following obser-
vations:

1) If another part of the sentence precedes the
actual question or exclamation, the respective signs are
placed immediately before that part of the sentence to
which they refer, as:

Y bien mirado, gvalgo yo lo que ella? (Hartzenbusch.)
And well considered, — am I as worthy as she?

Con que, gbajard V. al patio? (Id.)

I say, do you come down to the court-yard?

2) If short questions or exclamations succeed each
other immediately, the inverted signs are used but
once, as:

j Senor! mi Senor! Don Diego! (de Castro.)

3) A comma is put between the principal and the
accessory sentence, if the latter begins with a preposition,
or if the subordinate clause is an apposition, as:

Don Fernando salid de Sevilla con un lucido ejército,
en que se contaban diez mil caballos. (Id.)

Don F. went forth from (left) Sevilla with a brilliant
army in which there were ten thousand horse.

Podreis convencer & aquellos hombres timidos, que des-
lumbrados por una supersticiosa ignorancia, condenan
el estudio de la naturaleza.

You may persuade those timid people who, blinded by
a superstitious ignorance, condemn the study of
nature.

4) The colon (:) is used, if a sentence of general
import is followed by various other clauses developing
its meaning, as:

Eran en aquella santa edad todas las cosas comunes:
d nadie le era necesario para alcanzar su ordinario
sustento tomar otro trabajo que alzar la mano, y

13*
196 Lesson 1.

aleanzarle de las robustas encinas que liberalmente
les estaban convidando con su dulce y sazonado fruto.
(Cervantes.)
The colon is also used instead of a conjunction, by
which the following sentence, containing a reason, a
consequence, or a contradiction, ought properly to be
joined to the preceding phrase, as:

Por eso yo me hago & veces el remolon para pagar:

claro es, que él que no paga es porque no puede 6
no quiere. (Hartzenbusch.)

This is the reason why I sometimes delay paying, for

it is evident, that he, who does not pay, either
cannot or will not pay.

Finally, the colon is employed after the initiatory
address in a letter, unless the writer prefers writing this
address in a separate line, which however, is only due
to a person of higher rank. Ex.:;

aZuy Sefior mio: en fin soy tan dichoso etc.

Dear Sir, — At length I am so happy ete.

First Lesson.

The Gender of substantives.
(See I. Part, Less. 1.)

§ 1. Feminine substantives beginning with a or
ha and having the stress on the first syllable, which for
the sake of euphony take the article e/ in the singular,
as: el alma, the soul, have in the plural the article
las, as:

tas almas, the souls; las habas, the beans.

If the word beginning with a— is no substantive,
the article la should be used, thus:

ta aldea*), la alta sierra.

Note. In Less. 1, I. Part we stated that this article ef
is but an abbreviation of the ancient demonstrative pronoun
ela, as:

De las buenas costumnes nasce ela paz et ela concordia.
‘(Translat. of Fuero Juzgo.)

 

 

*) But los .... que les traian del aldea (Cerv. D. Qj.
Cap. XII).
Gender of Substantives. 197

In the century of Cervantes, el was used before feminine
nouns mot accented on the first syllable, as: el alegria, the
joy; el arena, the sand; el acémila, the beast of burden; el
alta sierra, the high ridge of mountains. Formerly el also
occurred before words beginning with other vowels, as et
espada etc.

With words beginning with al—, modern authors, for
euphony’s sake, substitute @ el for al in the dative, thus

a el alma (for al alma); & et alcance (for al alcance),
- attainability.

§ 2. Masculine by their signification are:

a) The names of all male beings, as: Carlos, Charles;
el poeta, the poet; el leon, the lion.
Except.: la haca (or jaca), the nag, pony.

b) The names of rivers, mountains, and winds; as: el
Tajo, el Guadiana, el Cducaso, el Vesuvio; el levante,
the east-wind; el sur, the south-wind; el poniente, the
west-wind.

Except.: la Esguéva and la Huerva, two Spanish rivers,
which, however, are also sometimes masculine. Again, la
tramontana, the north-wind, and Ja brisa, the north-east-wind.

c) The nares of countries, towns, and villages not

ending in —a; besides, the names of months and days, as:

El Brasil, Brazil; el Peru, el gran Madrid, el Toboso

ete.; enero, January; abril, April; domingo, Sunday;
miércoles, Wednesday.

Whereas: la Espafia; la Andalucia, because these
names of countries terminate in a. Names of towns not
ending in —a may be used with the feminine gender,
if the word ciudad (town)*) or villa is understood.

8 3. Feminine by their signification are:

a) All names of female persons and animals, as:
Maria, Mary; la reina, the queen; la hermana, the
sister; la leona, the lioness; la yegua, the mare, etc.

b) Names of countries, provinces, towns, and villages
ending in —a, as:
la Mancha; ta Francia, France, etc.

*) from civitas (Latin); cittd (Ital.), cité (French), city (Engl.).
198 Lesson 1.

c) The names of arts, sciences, and profess‘ons termi-
nating In @— or —céon, as:
la jurisprudencia, jurisprudence; la lectura, reading, etc.
Except those ending in —o, as: el derecho, the right;
el dibujo, drawing, etc.
d) The names of the letters of the alphabet (because
here the word letra, letter, is understood), as:
la jota, the letter J; la équis, the letter X.
Note. If the sex of animals is not distinguished by dif-
ferent words or terminations, macho, (male) and hembra (fe-
male) are prefixed, as in English. Thus milano, heron, has
no form for the feminine, which is therefore expressed: un
milano hembra, a female heron. Paloma, pigeon, on the
other hand, has no masculine form, and thus a male pigeon
is called una paloma macho.

§ 4. The gender of substantives may also be known
by their termination. But here numerous rules are coun-
terbalanced by still more numerous exceptions, so that
the benefit they afford is rather dubious.

’

Formation of female appellations.

§ 1. Masculine substantives and adjectives in —o
form their feminine in —a, as:

El vecino, the neighbour, la vecina.
bueno, good, buena.

Except.: el testigo, the witness, which only changes the
article: la testigo.

Irregular are:

El candnigo, the dean (of a cathedral), — la canonesa.
el didcono, the deacon, — la diaconisa.
el gallo, the cock, — la gallina.

§ 2. Substantives and adjectives ending in d, n,
and r form the feminine by adding —a, as:

Sefior, Sir, Mr., — Sefora, lady, Mrs.,
el huésped, the guest, (m.), — la huéspeda, the guest, (f.), °
el bailarin, the dancer, — la bailarina, the (fem.) dancev.
Exceptions: Emperador, emperor, — emperatriz.

cantador, singer, — cantatriz.

abad, abbot, — abadesa.

don, Mr., Sir, — doia.

elector, elector, — electriz.
Gender of Substantives. 199

§ 3. Masculine substantives in —e form their femi-
nine in —esa, those in —a form —is«a, as:

El duque, the duke, — la duquesa.

el principe, the prince, — la principesa.

el poeta, the poet, — la poetisa.

el profeta, the prophet, — la profetisa.

Exceptions: Hl monje, the monk, — la monja.

el pariente, the relation, — la parienta.
el héroe, the hero, — la heroina.
el sacerdote, the priest, — la sacerdotisa.

el elefante, the elephant, — la elefanta.
regordete, corpulent, fat, — regordeta.
altote, very, high, huge, — altota.

§ 4. Invariable are the comparatives in —or, as:

Mayor, larger, fem. mayor.
peor, worse, >» peor.
Likewise, the adjectives of one termination, like feliz etc.
(See I. Part, Less. 19.)

§ 5. Irregular are the following:

Dios, god, fem. diosa.
coronel, colonel, »  coronela.
rey, king, >» rend.

jabali, wild boar, »  jabalina.

§ 6. The following have a double gender:

El compatriota, the countryman, fem. la compatriota.

el cémplice, the accomplice, >» la cémplice.
el indigena, the native, — » ta indigena.
el persa, the Persian, >» la persa.

Likewise el testigo, the witness, mentioned § 1.
§ 7. The following are either masculine or feminine:

Centinela, sentinel.

cisma, schism (in ecclesiastical matters).

erisma, holy oil.

epifonema, spittle, saliva.

epigrama, epigram.

espia, spy.

guia, guide, leader.

puente, bridge,
and a few words of rarer occurrence, such as: hermafrodita,
hermaphrodite; hibrida, hybrid, mongrel; nema, seal (of a
letter); newma, gesture; and anatema, anathema.
900 Lesson 1.

§ 8. Arte (art) is in the singular commonly fem?-
nine, although for euphony's sake, requiring the article
el, thus el arte. In the plural it is masculine, if no
adjective follows or precedes, as: los artes de la pintura
y de la escultura, the arts of painting and sculpture,
whereas: las artes mecdnicas etc.

With mar (sea) the masculine gender predominates. In
poetry, however, the singular is commonly feminine, as: Mi
unica patria la mar (Espronceda), especially if the adjective
used with- mar has only ome termination, as: la mar espu-

mante, the foaming brine.

Nada, nothing, used substantively, is masculine, if no

article precedes.

Employed with the article it is feminine,
as: una nada, a mere nothing.

Pro, behalf, benefit, is feminine in the expression buena
pro! much good may it do you! In other significations it is

masculine.

§ 9. The following words have a different significa-
tion, when used in the masculine or feminine gender.

They are:

1. With the termination —a:

‘ Masculine.
dguila, sea-eagle.
aroma, perfume.
atalaya, warder of a tower.
ayuda, assistant, help-mate.

barba, the old man (in the play).

bestia, blockhead, dunce.
cabecilla, chieftain.

calavera, a thoughtless fellow.
corneta, the bugler, bugleman.

célera, the cholera-morbus.
cometa, comet.

consueta, the prompter.
cura, clergyman.

fantasma, chimera, fancy, whim.

gallina, coward.
guarda, watchman.
guardia, guard (man).
hortera, shopman.
justicia, judge.

lengua, interpreter, dragoman.

levita, Levite.
llama, the lama.

Feminine.
eagle.
acacia-flower.
watch-tower.
help.
beard.
beast, animal.
little head.
skull.
horn.
anger.
paper-kite.
note-book.
cure, healing.
scare-crow, crow-keeper.
hen.
heed, care; female guardian.
guard (woman).
trough, bucket.
justice.

tongue, language.

coat.
the flame.
Gender of Substantives.

Masculine.
mdscara (el and la), a masked
person.
mapa, map (of geography).

planeta, planet.

tema, the theme.

trompeta, the trumpeter.
vista, the custom-house officer.
gaga, the last of a rank or file.

201

Feminine.
mask.

the most excellent part of a
thing.

an ecclesiastical dress.

stubbornness, obstinacy.

trumpet.

sight.

step at the back of a carriage.

2. With the termination —e.

Masculine.

consonante, rhyme.
corriente, the present month.
corte, edge.
ereciente, crescent (arms).
descendiente, descendant.
falange, finger-joint.
frente, front.
menguante, wane of the moon.
mimbre, willow-branch (rare).
parte, report, statement.
pendiente, ear-ring.
secante, varnish.
tilde (el and la), the sign on

the n (fi).

38. With other

Masculine.
canal, strait.
capital, funds; fortune.
moral, mulberry-tree.
vocal, voter.
érden, order (arrangement).

doblez, fold, plait, wrinkle.
haz, bundle.

pez, fish.

Feminine.
consonant.
river, current.
court.
half-moon, flood.
slope, declivity.
phalanx.
forehead.
ebb.
willow.
part, deal.
slope.
secant (Geom.).
trifle.

terminations.
Feminine.
channel, kennel.
metropolis.
moral.
vowel.
order
rule
order.
falsehood.
surface (of the earth); the
_ smooth side of a cloth ete.
pitch.

(badge); commission;
of an ecclesiastical

Gender of compound substantives.

Like the other Romance languages, Spanish has
only a very limited number of compound substantives.

Their gender depends:
202 Lesson 1.

1) On the signification, as: el guardacabras, the
goat-herd; el azotacalles, the lounger, idler (Amer. loaf
er); la azotacalles, the female lounger, etc.

2) On the gender of the last component, provided
it be a noun in the singular; as: et mediodia, noon
(= half-day), because the last component dia, day, is
masculine; whereas: la medianoche, midnight (= half-
night), because noche, night, is feminine.

Exceptions are:

El contrapeste, a remedy La aguachirle, the last after-

against the plague.
cortaplumas, penknife.
guardamano, the sword-

hilt, guard.
guardavela, the sail-rope.
pasacalle, the  street-

march (played on the

wine.
aguapié, the after-wine.
bajamar, the lowest ebb.
pleamar, the highest flood.
altamar, the high sea.
estrellamar, the lily of the
valley.

guitar).
» pasamano, the bannister.
» sacabotas, bootjack.
» tapaboca, the box on the ear.
> trasmano, the after-hand (at cards).
» trasluz, the semi-darkness.
» verdeesmeralda, emerald-green.
» verdemontafia, mountain-green, chrysocolla) (both also
» verdevejiga, sap-green J feminine).

Gender of words used as substantives.

1) If an adjective is used substantively, we must
distinguish whether it denotes a person, abstract idea,
or a concrete thing. In the first case the article is, of
course, employed conformably with the sex of the per-
sons, as: el viejo, the old man; la@ vieja, the old woman.
If an abstract idea is intended, the article Zo is used, as
stated Less. 1, I. P. Thus lo bueno, the good; lo ajeno,
other people’s property etc. If, however, the adjective
imports a concrete thing, we employ the masculine article
el. Thus el espafol, Spanish (i. e. the Sp. language);
el azul, the azure or sky-blue. -

2) All words that are not adjectives, if substantively
employed, require the masculine article, as: el porque,
the Why; el no, the No; el estudiar, the study(ing). -
Gender of Substantives. 208

Traduccion. 1.*)

1. The village, where we live during the summer, has
a beautiful situation at the foot of the high mountains. The
soul of (the) man, says Goethe, resembles (to) the water.
The nag you (have) bought, is too dear. The west-wind is
cooler than the south-wind and usually brings rain. The
north-wind and the north-east-wind are very cold. Peru
was formerly a colony of Spain. (The) proud Madrid has no
healthy situation. (The) right does not want (the) science
in order to be known and practised. ' This word is not spelt
(tr. does not write itself) with a Y, but with a J. Is that
a he- or a she-pigeon? The male witness as well as the
fMale witness did not know what to say definitely. My uncle
is a dean, and the aunt of my friend is a deaconess. Have
‘you spoken to the lodger (m.) or the lodger (f.)? The em-
peror and the empress ordered (fr. hacer) the singer (m.) [to]
come to the castle. The duke and the duchess dined with
the prince and the princess. Caballero is a Spanish poetess.
Prophets and prophetesses are rare in our age (time). Is
this young nun a relation of yours (tr. a 7. your)? The Cid is
one of the greatest heroes of Spain. The maid of Saragossa
is celebrated by the poets as a great heroine.

2. Hero was a priestess of Venus. This female elephant
is very fat. The ancient heathens had many gods and
goddesses. The queen of Spain signs her orders: I, the queen.
This gentleman is my countryman, and this lady is my
country-woman. The Persian woman was the accomplice of
the native (m.). The guide was arrested by the sentinel as
a spy. Lewis XIV, king of France, was a protector of (the)
arts and (the) sciences. The mechanical arts are mostly a
matter of practice. The Greeks on their retreat greeted the
foaming brine with exultation. Nothing is beautiful enough
for the discontented (m.). A dream is a mere nothing. The
watch-tower stands at the entrance of the harbour. The
(help-)mate of the tower-warder is either a dunce or a
thoughtless fellow. The boys played with kites. The comet
of the year 1858 was a beautiful star. At the end of the
present month you will receive my report. The order of
Charles the Third is a Spanish order. The hilt of this sword
is worked with great art. You have here a very fine penknife.
The Better is often the enemy of the Good. He knows neither
(the) How nor (the) Why.

*) Henceforth the words of the translations are given in the
vocabulary at the end of this Grammar.
204 Lesson 1,

Reading Exercise.

Batalla de Lepanto
(7 de octubre de 1571).

Luego que Don Juan de Austria did vista 4 la armada
enemiga, mandé enarbolar en lo mds alto de su galera la
bandera de la santa cruz; y con un cafionazo hizo la sefial
de que se previniesen todos 4 la batalla. Inmediatamente
entré en una galera mds pequefia, y recorriendo toda la ar-
mada, exhorté 4 todos 4 pelear valerosamente, diciéndoles que
en aquel dia se trataba de la suerte de la religion, y de la
patria, y de los padres y parientes; que en su diestra lleva-
ban la victoria, y que el no conseguirla seria ignominioso 4
unos hombres tan fuertes; por lo cual era preciso vencer
valerosamente 6 perder la vida con honra. Habl6 en parti-
cular & cada una de las naciones, las recorddé sus mds herdicas
hazafias, y las animd 4 la pelea. Otro tanto hicieron los
generales de las armadas, y al mismo tiempo se publicdé por
los sacerdotes la induljencia plenaria concedida por el pontifice
a todos los que muriesen en tan piadosa empresa. La armada
otomana navegaba en forma de media luna con viento en
popa; pero la incomodaban mucho los rayos de sol que les
daba de frente. Mandaba el ala derecha Mahomet Siroc, la
izquierda Uluc- Ali, y el cuerpo del centro Ali. Amurates
fué destinado para que sirviese de auxilio con algunas galeras
y treinta fragatas que tenian muy pocas fuerzas. Al] tiempo
mismo de dar el combate, advirtid Don Miguel de Moncada
al austriaco, que en aquel dia se celebraba con mucha de-
vocion la fiesta de Nuestra Sefiora de los Remedios en la
iglesia de los Trinitarios de Valencia. Como aquel principe
era tan devoto de la madre de Dios, se encomendé 4 ella con
fervorosa piedad, y habiendo hecho el enemigo la sefial de la
batalla, le correspondié con un cafionazo. Dispuestas ya todas
las cosas se encaminaron 4 la pelea. Luego que estuvieron
a tiro de cafion, las seis galeazas venecianas descargaron su
artilleria sobre la armada enemiga, y la desordenaron, ha-
ciendo en ella grande estrago, echando 4 fondo algunas galeras
y destrozando otras.

Conversacion.
¢gCudndo mandé Don Juan de Austria enarbolar la bandera
de la santa cruz?
éQué sefial hizo?
éDoénde entrd?
éQué dijo 4 los marineros?
éQué era preciso?
éA quién hablé Don Juan de Austria en particular?
éQué las recordé?
The Article. 205

éQué se publicd por los sacerdotes?

éEn cual forma navegaba la armada otomana?

éQué la incomodaba mucho?

éQuién mandaba el ala derecha?

éY quién la izquierda y el centro?

éA qué fué destinado Amurates?

éQué hizo Don Miguel de Moncada al tiempo mismo de dar
el combate?

¢A quién se encomendd el principe?

éQué hicieron las galeazas venecianas?

éCon cual efecto?

Second Lesson.

The Article.
(See the first part of this grammar.)

In general the article is more frequently used than
in English.

The definite article is employed:

1) After the verb tener, if particular qualities of an
organic body are mentioned*), as:
El nifio tiene los cabellos negros.
The child has black hair.
El tiene los ojos azules. He has blue eyes.
After con, too, the definite article is used in this case, as:
Ella respondio con tos ojos abajados.
She answered with downcast eyes.
_ Note. If, however, only one limb is mentioned, the de-
finite article as well as the indefinite may be used, as:

Tengo un dedo malo or tengo el dedo malo.
I have a sore finger.

2) Before the name of a thing, which is the only
one of its kind, as:
El sol y ta tierra. Sun and earth.
Also before Dios, God (Sing.), if followed by an apposi-
tion, as:
El dios de Jacob. The God of Jacob.

#) As in French: Cet enfant a les cheveux noirs.
206 Lesson 2.

3) Before abstract notions, when taken in their
general meaning, as:

La riqueza y la pobreza son cosas relativas.
Wealth and poverty are relative things.

4) Before the names of materials, if taken in their
full extent, as:

El oro es mis pesado que la plata.
Gold is heavier than silver.

5) Before the titles Seftor, Senora, and Seforita the
article should be employed, unless they are used in ad-
dressing & person, as:

El sefior Figuera ha Wegado. Mr. F. has arrived.
Whereas: Si, Sefor, V. tiene razon.
Yes, Sir, you are right.

Note. Before the titles Don and Dofia no article is used,

as: Don Juan Guzman, Dona Elvira, etc.

6) After nosotros and vosotros, if followed by a collec-
tive noun without a numeral, as:

Nosotros los espaioles. We Spaniards.
Vosotros los actores. You actors.

If, on the contrary, a numeral follows, the article is
omitted, as in English; thus:

Nosotros tres hermanas. We three sisters.
7) After the verb dar, when meaning “to wish” in
certain locutions, as:

Dar los buenos dias, to wish a good morning (day).
Dar tas buenas tardes, to wish a good evening, good
night.

Likewise: dar el parabien, to congratulate, dar el pésame*),
to, condole.
8) With the indications of time (except the date), as
Volveré & tas ocho, I shall be back at 8 o’clock.
La semana proxima, next week.
Murié @ los treinta afios, he died 30 years of age.

Note. The days of the week are used without the article,
if no particular determination is added, as:
Llegard mirtes, he will arrive on Tuesday, whereas:
El mirtes de la semana proxima, next week on Tuesday.

*) pésame = ine pesa, it afflicts me.
The Article. 207

9) After ¢odo, all, if the following word has a con-
crete signification, as: todo el dinero, all the money. If,
however, the following word is an abstract idea, without
any further attribute, the article is omitted after todo, as:

Con toda consideracion, with all consideration.

10) When speaking of languages, we must distinguish
whether the language is to be considered in its totality,
as in the sentence: he reads and writes Spanish, i. e. he
possesses the language fully, or whether the idiom is
only meant in contradistinction to another language, as:
these ladies speak Spanish (and not Italian or French).
In the first case the article is employed, in the second
it is omitted; thus:

Mi hermano lee y escribe el espanol.
My brother reads and writes Spanish.

Whereas: Esas sefioras hablan italiano.
‘Those ladies speak Italian, i. e. just now, and not
English etc.

The definite article is omztted in Spanish.

1) With the apposition (i. e. an explanatory addition
to the nominative or accusative case), as:

Bernardo Taso, padre de Torcuato.
B. Tasso, the father of T. ‘

Isabel, reina de Espana.
Isabel, queen of Spain.
But the article should be used with the apposition:
a) If it is introduced by a numeral, as:
Cérlos, Félix y Juan, los tres discipulos mejores de su clase.
Charles, Felix; and John, the three best pupils of their class.
b) If the apposition is qualified by a superlative
which takes its place with the article after the substan-
tive, as:
Shakespeare, poeta dramdtico el mds famoso de la Ingla-

terra.
Sh., the most celebrated dramatic poet of England.

‘Note. If, however, the superlative terminates in —or, it
should precede the substantive, of course with the article, as:

Dante, el mayor poeta de la Italia.
D., the greatest poet of Italy.
208 Lesson 2.

¢) If a characteristic predicate (but no numeral) is added
to an historical name, as:
Luis et grande. Carlos et atrevido.
Lewis the Great. Charles the Dauntless.
But: Carlos tercero. Charles II.

Note. If in the last example the full title El rey Don
precedes the name of the prince, the article must be used;
thus:

El rey Don Cérlos el tercero, King Ch. the Third.

2) The article is omitted after the verbs to be, to
become, to seem, to name, to call etc., if these verbs are
followed by a word denoting rank, dignity, office, natio-
nality ete., as:

Es hijo de un principe ruso.

He is the son of a Russian prince.

La reina nombré al general por ministro.
The queen appointed the general her minister.

3) With the names of the days of the week, of the
months (see 8, the Note), and with the numbers denoting
the date. Likewise, with the names of grammatical forms,
used as attributes, as:

Enero y febrero son meses muy frios.
January and February are very cold months.
Miércoles & diez y ocho de octubre.
Wednesday the 18th of October.

La primera persona de singular.
The first person of the singular.

Note. On the contrary, the article should be used, if
the date is not indicated by 4d, as:
El doce de enero, the 12th of January.

4) Attributive additions to a substantive take no
article, as:
El dictado de justo, the surname of the Just.

Las falias de sed y de hambre.
The requirements of thirst and hunger.

5) In a great many adverbial locutions and idioms, as:

Morir & hierro, to perish by the sword.

A porfia, in emulation.

Morir de fiebre (de calentura), to die of (a) fever.
Por desdicha, unfortunately.

Estar en dncoras, to ride at anchor, ete.
The Article. 209

Note. With these expressions, however, the article is
not totally excluded. Thus we may as well say: ir en socorro,
as ir al socorro, to hasten to some one’s assistance; traducir
en frances as al frances, to translate into French.

6) Very often a simple verb is periphrased by tener
with a substantive, as in English: to have the intention
= to intend. In all these locutions the substantive ad-
mits of no article, as:

Tener costumbre, to use (to have the habit),

tener sed, to be thirsty,

tener intencion, to have the intention.

Likewise: mudar de semblante, to change colour (of the
face); hacer numero, to make up a sum, ete.

Note. Very often the idea is essentially modified by the
omission or the use of the article. Thus:

Dar alma, means: to give life, and dar el alma, means: to expire.
dia de juicio, » law-day, day of » dia del juicio, » doomsday.

trial,
hacer cama, » to be confined » hacer lacama, » to make
to one’s bed, the bed.

tomar hdbito, » totakeahabit, » tomarelhdbito, » to become
a nun or a monk.

7) With the words casa and palacio (the latter in
the signification ‘“town-hall’), used in quite a general
sense, the article is omitted after the prepositions de, 4,
and en, as:

Voy & casa de mi tio. I am going to my uncle’s.

Viene de palacio. He comes from the town-hall (i. e.
where he was on business).

Mi hermana vive en casa demi prima. My sister lives
at my cousin’s.

If, on the contrary, the place is specified, the article
should be added, as:

El militar salié de ta casa del aldeano.
The soldier left the house of the peasant.

8) In familiar style, the article is omitted before the
names of relations, as;

Papa no esté (i. e. en casa). Papa is not at home.
Spanish Gra mmar. 14
210 Lesson 2.

Likewise, with fines (end), mediados (half, middle),
principios (beginning), if denoting a certain period, as:
A fines de abril, at (towards) the end of April.

A mediados del aiio pasado, towards the middle of last
year.
9) The article is used with the names of persons, if
‘not the person itself, but the work of an artist_or poet
etc. is meant, as:

He comprado el Don Quijote.
I bought Don Quixote (i. e. the romance).

10) Certain names of towns and countries always
require the article. Such names are: ef Japon (Japan),
el Canada, el Brasil (Brazil), la Corufa, el Cairo, el
Potosi, el Ferrol. If, however, two places or countries
of the same name are distinguished by the addition of the
adjectives nuevo and viejo, these adjectives with the article
follow the name, as:

Castilla la nueva (ta vieja), New (Old) Castile.

11) If several words connected by y, 6 etc. follow
each other, no particular stress being laid on either of
them, the article may be omitted after the first, even if
they are of different genders. This is also the case, if
the same substantive is qualified by two or more ad-
jectives, as:

Las lenguas*) alemana y francesa..

The German and French languages.

kl primero y segundo canto. The first and second canto.
Los palacios, aldeas y casiillos.

The palaces, villages, and castles.

NB. But the article should be added, in speaking of
diving beings of different sexes, as:

Los hombres y las mujeres, the men and women.
Las hermanas y los hermanos, the sisters and brothers.

The indefinite article is omitted:

1) If a substantive is used either as a predicate or
as a complement with the import of a predicate, i. e.
where the whole stress is laid on the quality, as:

 

oe a the substantive precedes, as in this sentence, it should
The Article. 211

Es hdébit misico, he is a clever musician.
Lo creian traidor, they believed him (to be) a traitor.
Esta flor da buen olor, this flower has a good smell.

: Note. In these sentences the speaker does not consider
the individuality, but only the quality. If I say, “he is a
clever musician”, of course I do not mean to say, that he is
but ove musician, but that he is very musical. The substan-
tive is therefore used instead of an adjective, and the article
denoting individuality, being superfluous, is omitted in Spanish.

But the indefinite article is required, if the quality
is represented as a particularly remarkable or striking
one, or if the substantive used as a predicate is followed
by another determination. The learner is requested to
compare the following examples:

Es un loco, he isamadman. Fs loco, he is a fool (a foolish
fellow).
Es un bobo, he is a dunce. Es bobo, he is stupid.
El marques es general, the El marques es un general de
marquis is a general. mérito, the marquis is a
general of great merit.

2) With the apposition (see p. 207, § 1) and with
words denoting officc, rank, social position, or any other
particular quality, as:

El desden con el desden, drama de Moreto.

Disdain with disdain, a drama of M. (here ‘a drama”
is the apposition).

Ef titulo de gobernador, the title of governor.

El nombre de padre de los pobres, the name of “father
of the poor’.

3) Before the adjectives tan (so), tal (such), otro
(other), semejante (similar), igual (equal), medio (half),
cierto (certain), tanto, tamafo (so great), and before the sub-
stantives meéimero (number), parte (part), porcion (portion),
cantidad (quantity), multitud (many), where the expres-
sion becomes more emphatic by the omission of the
article. Examples:

Tan noble accion, so noble an action.
Tamatio esfuerzo, so great an exertion.

Gran parte de los infelices, a great number of the un-
happy men etc.
14%
212 Lesson 2.

Otra*) vez, another time.
Media hora despues, half an hour afterwards.
Tanta virtud, such (so great a) virtue.

4) In exclamative and interrogative sentences, where
the interrogation or exclamation is used in lieu of a
negation, as:

¢Hay mujer mds arrogante? I
Is there a more arrogant woman to be found (that is to
say: there is mo woman more arrogant than . . .).

Likewise, in megative sentences after verbs denoting a
doubt, as:
Dudo que V. encuentre mejor calidad.
I doubt if you will find a better quality.
Nunca vi hombre mds impertinente.
I never saw a more impudent man.

Observation. It must be well understood, that the pre-
positions de and d cannot be contracted with the article, if
this article precedes a word which is taken as a title or a
name of a book, of a opera, or of a similar work. Thus:

Rodrigo Diaz de Vivar es generalmente conocido con el
sobrenombre de el Cid (and not del Cid). ’
R. etc. is commonly known by the surname of the Cid.

Pocas comedias de Calderon aventajan & El wostrer
duelo de Espana.

There are but few comedies of Calderon superior to
“The Last duel of Spain”.

Traduccion. 2.

1. Has your daughter blue or black eyes? The culprit
answered bending his head. What is the matter with your
brother? Has he a sore eye or a sore ear? Heaven and
earth proclaim the glory of God. I swear by the God of my
fathers, that I have spoken (the) truth. My elder brother
studies philosophy, my younger theology. Hatred and love
are two powerful motives of (the) human actions. Lead is
heavier than iron, but iron is more useful than lead. Has
Mr. Verguero already written to you from Paris? No, Sir,
Mr. Verguero has not yet written, but Miss Verguero has
written to a friend (f.) of hers in our town. You French
are the vainest of all nations. We authors have more to do
than you actors. We three brothers found ourselves in a
desperate situation at our uncle’s death. I have con-

*) Otro is never preceded by the indefinite article,
The Article. 213

doled with the captain. Go and wish the young lady good
evening!

2. Will you come back at nine or at ten o’clock? Last
week I (had) received a letter from my friend at Madrid. My
- grandfather died 85 years of age. Shall you depart [on]
Thursday or Friday? The ship starts on Tuesdays. Why did
you not bring (tr. have y. nu. b.) all the cloth? With all
respect for your word, Sir, I beg leave to doubt the thing.
I do not know, whether the ladies spoke Spanish or Italian;
I was too far off to be (tr. for being) able to understand
them. My brother speaks French better than English. Gre-
gory VII, the son of a peasant, was one of the most cele-
brated popes. Alexander, Cesar, and Napoleon, were the
three greatest generals of all ages. Schiller, the greatest
dramatic poet of Germany, died in the year 1805. Lewis XIV
of France is also sometimes called Lewis the Great.

3. Charles the Dauntless was duke of Burgundy. King
Philip II. of Spain was the father of Don Carlos. Do you
know this gentleman? Yes, he is the son of a rich American
‘merchant. The prince appointed the lieutenant, captain. July
and August are usually very warm months. December was
very cold last year. We arrived at Prague (on) Tuesday the
14th of October. The second person of the plural of the
French verbs usually ends in zg, and the second person of
the singular in s. Aristides had the surname of the Just.
Unhappily my best friend died of (the) fever, a few days
after his arrival. The awkward footman let the cup fall
on the floor. J have never lost sight of (de vista) this
gentleman. The ship rides at anchor in the harbour of Cadiz.
_ IL have translated this book into French.

Traduccion. 3.

1. Many people have the habit to sleep an hour after
dinner. Have you the intention to offend me (ér. to tell me
an injury) with these words? Are you hungry or thirsty?
The poor child, has the fever (la calentura). The criminal
turned pale, when the judge appeared. The unfortunate man
expired at 10 o’clock in the evening. The enthusiasm for a
great cause enlivens our endeavours. On the day of the trial
(d. of justice) (there) appeared more than thirty persons.
Dooms day is the day of the end of the world. Has the servant
(f.) made the bed? I was confined to bed for a fortnight. The
young lady will become a nun. One easily takes the habit
of sleeping long. I go to my aunt’s, in order to dine with
her. Do you live with your aunt or with your cousin (f.)?
When we left the house of the judge, it began to thunder.
Towards the middle of May we hope to be in London.
214 Lesson 2.

2. Have you read (the) Don Juan by Lord Byron? No,
but I have read (the) Childe Harold. Canada is a British
colony in North-America. Corufia and Ferrol are Spanish
towns. There are two Castiles, Old-Castile and New-Castile.
I study the English and Italian languages. The fourth and
fifth® cantos of this poem are most beautiful (seperl.). The
boys and girls greeted the prince on his entering (¢. at his
entrance of) the castle. This young man is a clever physician,
but a bad poet. He obtained the title of aulic counsellor for
his merits. Such a man can never be my friend. Half an
hour afterwards everything had disappeared. Is there a more
distrustful man than your brother? I doubt if (tr. that)
there is a good theatre in that town. Do you speak of (the)
Disdain with disdain by Moreto?

Reading Exercise.
Batalla de Lepanto.

Continuacion.

Para evitar tan terrible impetu, y la luvia de balas que
caia sobre ellos, los turcos dividieron su armada en muchas
escuadras; y juntdndose otra vez, acometieron con una feroz,
griteria, y los nuestros los recibieron con mucho ruido de
trompetas. Las naves capitanas trabaron una pelea atroz y
sangrienta, y 4 su ejemplo las galeras se embistieron unas
contra otras, con grande estruendo de la artilleria. El humo
de la pdlvora forméd una niebla tan espesa, que obscurecid
enteramente el sol, y el dia parecia noche. Acaecid entdénces
una cosa admirable, y fué que de repente calmoé el viento
que soplaba 4 los turcos por la popa, y levantandose el de
poniente, que era favorable 4 los nuestros, arrojé el humo
hacia el enemigo. En el espacio de hora y media fueron
rechazados por tres veces los genizaros por los espafioles de
la capitana, y haciendo en ellos mucha mortandad; pero en-
trando por la popa otros de refresco en Iugar de los heridos,
rechazaron 4 los espafioles otras tres veces. Cayo el almirante
Ali herido en la frente de un balazo, y los espafioles renovaron
el combate con mucha griteria; derribaron y destrozaron todo
cuanto les servia de estorbo para la victoria; y se apoderaron
de la capital enemiga. Un historiador dice que al tiempo que
un espafiol se aceleraba 4 llevar al austriaco la cabeza de
Ali, fué arrojado al mar; pero otros muchos afirman, que se
clavé en la punta de una lanza, para que sirviese de espectit-
culo 4 todos, y este undnime testimonio me parece digno de
mayor, crédito. Fueron hechos cautivos los dos hijos de Ali,
el uno de diez y siete afios, y el otro de trece. Levantése
en toda la armada un gran clamor de los que con animo
alegre proclamaban la victoria, aunque todavia se peleaba
\ Plural of Substantives. I15

\ ’
atrozmente en muchos parajes. Todo cuanto se ofrecia 4 la
vista era triste y lastimosa; pues por todas partes sdlo se
oian los gritos de los que peleaban, y los jemidos de los que
calan: no se veia otra cosa que muertos, heridos, y sangre,
galeras apresadas en gran numero y otras despedazadas y
echadas 4 fondo con sus defensores y remeros. Peleaban los
venecianos intrépidamente en el ala derecha; pero habiendo
sido herido Barbarigo en un ojo con una saeta, se abatieron
de tal suerte los dnimos de los soldados, que estuvo muy 4
pique de ser tomado su galera.

Conversacion.
éPor. qué dividieron los turcos su armada?
éCémo los recibieron los cristianos?
éQué hicieron las naves capitanas?
éQué formoé el humo*) de la pdlvora?
éQué cosa admirable acaecid entdénces?
éPor qué era favorable a los espafioles el viento poniente?
éEn cuanto tiempo fueron rechazados los genizaros?
éQuién cayd en primer lugar?
¢Como renovaron el combate los espafioles?
éQué dice un historiador ?
éQué afirman muchos otros?
éQuiénes fueron hechos cautivos?
éQué clamor se levanté en la armada?
éQué era triste y lastimoso 4 ver?
éQué se oia por todas partes?
dY qué se veia?
éCémo peleaban los venecianos?
éPor qué se abatieron los dnimos de los soldados venecianos?

Third Lesson.

Plural of Substantives.

The prinéipal rules on the formation of the plural
have been given Less. 2, I. P. (page 12). We repeat
them here in a more enlarged and complete form.

§ 1. The following words take s in the plural.

1. Substantives terminating in a single unaccented
vowel, as:

*) From the Latin root fum, by the change of f into h, so
frequent in Spanish; French: la fumée, fumer; filius = fils =
hijo; filia = fille = hija ete.
216 Lesson 3.

la carta (letter) Plur. las cartas.

el padre (father) » los padres.
la metrépoli (capital) » las metrépolis.
la mano (hand) » las manos.

el espiritu (spirit) > los espiritus.

2. Substantives terminating in one of the accented
vowels é, 6 or ti, as:

el pié (foot) Plur. los piés.
el rondé (rondo) » los rondos.
el (la) tribé (tribe) » los (las) tribus.

There belong also a few words which seldom occur
and whose use cannot always be clearly fixed, but are
often employed quite indiscriminately, thus el birici,
shoulder-belt, makes its plural los biricies.

The following substantives:

el papa Plur. papds.

la mama >» mamds.

el sofa » sofas.

el maravedi (farthing = » maravedis (maravedies
1/34 part of 1 peseta) or maravedises).

el bisturt (bistoury) >»  dbisturis.

el zaquizamt (uppermost loft) » eaquizamis,
and a few others seldom used.

§ 2. The following words take es in the plural:
1. Substantives terminating in a consonant, as:
la flor (flower) Plur. las flores.
el dngel (angel) » los angeles.

Remark 1. Substantives in x (if sounded like ks) and ¢
change their final consonant into ¢ before es, as:

la veg (time) Plur. las veces.

la voz (voice) > las voces.

la cruz (cross) » las cruces.
fénices.

el fénix (phenix) » los } fenices.
fenix.

el dnix (onyx) » los dnices.

la sardénix (sardonyx) » los sardénices.

2. Substantives terminating in ay (ai), cy (ei), or oy
foi); in the plural 7 is changed into y; as:
ay (interj. woe to!) Plur. los ayes (wail).
el buey (buei) (ox) »  bueyes.
Plural of Substantives. 217

3. Substantives ending in a or ¢ accented, as:

el bajé (bashaw) Plur. los bajdes.
el alelé (stock [flower]) » los alelies.
el rubi (ruby) » los rubies.
un st (yes) » los stes.

el tahalé (sword-belt) » los tahalies.

Except.: papa, mamd, sofa, bisturt, zaquizamt (see ante).

§ 3. The following words are in singular and plural
alike.

1. Substantives in es and 7s unaccented on the last

syllable:
el mdértes (Tuesday) Plur. los martes.
el extasis (ecstasy) » los éxtasis.
la andlisis (analysis) » las andlisis.
Proper names in 2, as:
Gutierrez Plur. los Gutierrez.
Sanchez » los Sanchez.

Remark 2. With some modern authors, words of Greek
origin ending in is change this termination into es, as:

la metamérfosis (metamorphosis) Plur. metamérfoses.

la tésis (thesis) » las téses.

8 4. Irregular Plurals.

Observation. Sometimes the accent is displaced in the
plural.
Plur, { 108 caractéres,
"| los cardcteres.
el régimen (government, object, diet) » los regimenes.
el lord (lord) los lores.

el cardcter (character)

, . los fldmines,
el flémen (Roman priest) » { Joa) dninnta,
la testudo (testudo) > las testudines.
el val (sewer, drain) » los valles.
el frac (dress-coat) » los fraques.

Properly speaking, the plural of frac is not irregular,
c being of necessity changed into gu before e, according to
a well-known orthographical rule.

§ 5. Plural of Compound Substantives.

The question whether a compound substantive is
changed in the plural or not, must be decided by looking
at its components.
218 Lesson 3.

1. Both components are changed in the plural, if
each, when taken separately, would undergo such an
alteration, as:

la casamata (casemate) Plu. las casasmatas.

el gentilhombre (nobleman) » los gentileshombres.
el ricohome (member of the » los ricoshomes.

el A nor| high aristocracy) » os ricoshombres.

la medigcaiia (semi-circular tools) » lus mediascahas.

la bocacalle (street entrance) » las bocascalles.
Exceptions: ,

el padrenuestro (the Lord's Prayer) PI. los padrenuestros,

el ferrocarril (railway) » los ferrocarviles.

la vanagloria (vainglory)  Plur. las vanaglorias.

la barbacana (barbacan) » las barbacanas.

el viaducto (viaduct) » los viaductos.

2. Only one component is changed in the plural,
if the other, when taken separately, could not undergo
such an alteration, as:

cualquiera | Plur. cualesquiera.
quienquiera J >  gquienesquicra.
el hijodalgo*) » los hijesdalgo.

3. Singular and plural are alike, if both compo-
nents, when taken separately, could not undergo any
alteration in the plural, or (and this case applies to the
majority of the Spanish compound substantives) if one
component is plural and has added s¢ or es, even in the
singular of the compound substantive; thus:

el and los sacabotas, boot-jack.

el » los mondadientes, toothpick.

el » los guardapiés (or guardapieses), petticoat.

el » los limpiabotas, shoe-black.

el -» los quitamanchas, man who takes off stains (from

clothes etc.).

el » los besamanos, kissing of hands.

el » los azotacalles, lounger.

el » los catalejos, spy-glass (lit. “look-far’’).

§ 6. Besides the words enumerated on page 13, the:
following are likewise used in the plural only:

Los alrededores, outskirts. los bofes, \
las arras, earnest(-money)**). los chofes, | lungs,
los livianos,
*) = hijo de algo, lit. the son of something, i. e. the son of

= a person “who is somebody”, viz. who holds some rank in society.
**) French: les arrhes.

(whoever)
Plural of Substantives. 219

las carnestolendas, carnival. los modales, behaviour.

los calzones, trowsers. los pertrechos, utensils, furni-
las pinzas, pincers, nippers. ture.

las espensas, expense. las visperas, vespers.

las esponsales, betrothal. los postres, dessert.

las exequias, obsequies. las tinteblas, obscurity.

las nupcias, nuptials. los viveres, victuals,

and a few others of less importance.

§ 7. The following words change their signification
in the plural:

El alfiler, the needle Pl. los ailfileres, the pin-money.

la baqueta, the ram-rod » las baquetas, the gauntlet.

la corte, the court » las Cortes, the Spanish parlia-
ment.

la mano, the hand » las manos, the handiwork*),

el zelo, zeal » los zelos, jealousy.

§ 8. The following substantives denote the male sex
in the singular, both the male and female in the plural.
Besides those enumerated on page 13, they are as follow:

El amo, the master PI. los amos, master and mistress.
el conde, the count » los condes, count and countess.
el padre, the father » los padres, the parents.

el rey, the king » los reyes, king and queen.

§ 9. If a geographical name is plural, as los Arcos,
las Navas, Dos Barrios, the verb remains in the singular,
since the word denotes but one object, as:

Los Arcos es una ciudad en Espana.
L. A. is a town in Spain.

Traduccion. 4.

1. On the sofas in the salon the different Papas and
Mamas were seated and watched the amusements of the young
folks. The upper parts of the lofts of these houses are usu-
ally entirely empty. How many maravedis have you paid
for this wooden box? The flamens of the ancient Romans
were priests. Of how many members does the English House
of (the) Lords consist? It is very difficult to know exactly
the different characters of men. The principles of govern-
ment have a great influence on the prosperity or the decay
of (the) empires. Three consecutive Mondays we could not
get our box at (¢r. in) the theatre. You (had better not care)
do best, Sir, if you do not care for the boastings of that
man. The casemates of this fortress are extremely strong.

*) but also “the hands”.
220 Lesson 3.

The noblemen at the court of this unhappy prince all shared
the fate of their master. The members of the high nobility
of Spain have all the title (of) Grandee. By foreigners the
noblemen of inferior rank in Spain are commonly called
«Hidalgos», contrary to the rules of the language. The out-
skirts of Paris are finer than those of Madrid.

2. Have you given the earnest money to the merchant?
(The) Carnival was very long this year. To what sum does the
expense of your journey amount? In a fortnight we shall
celebrate the betrothal of my cousin (f.). These trowsers are
very handsome; which tailor has made them? Why (did) has
not the footman put the desert on-the table? The origin of
his family is lost in the obscurity (darkness) of history. (The)
vespers were chanting, when we returned from our walk.
The Estates of the country will not assemble this year, be-
cause the queen and her court are abroad. My master and
mistress will have no reason to complain of my behaviour.
The king and queen refused to receive the count and countess.
Do your parents know that you are here? Can you tell me
in which province «Las Navas» is situated? Give me the
tooth-picks! I bought two boot-jacks yesterday. This petti-
coat is finer than the petticoats which are sold in that shop.

Reading Exercise.

Batalla de Lepanto.
Fin.

El marques de Santa Cruz conociendo el peligro en que
se hallaban sus socios, acudid prontamente al socorro, y
reprimid el furor de los enemigos que ya habian derrotado
ocho galeras. Reanimdronse los venecianos con su ejemplo y
pelearon con nuevo esfuerzo; y habiéndose mudado la fortuna,
se apoderaron de muchas galeras enemigas; otras huyeron
hacia tierra, de las cuales encallaron veinte en la playa, y
abandondndolas sus tropas, las incendiaron los vencedores.
Doria que en el ala izquierda hacia frente 4 Uluc-Ali para
pelear, habia extendido su escuadra (separada de la armada)
para evitar que le rodease el enemigo. Este para librarse de
la artilleria de las galeazas, que tenia mucho aleance, se retirdé
del lugar de la pelea, y acometiendo repentinamente 4 nuestras
galeras dispersas, apresd doce de ellas, con mucho estrago de
su gente. La capitana de Malta fué muy mal tratada; pere-
cieron casi todos sus soldados y cincuenta caballeros, y su
capitan Justimiani recibid muchas heridas, y perdié la bandera.
Pero viendo Uluc que venia contra él la escuadra de Doria,
se echo 4 huir en alta mar para evitar la pelea, y abandond
la presa. Salidle al encuentro Don Juan de Cardona con
Plural of Substantives. 221

ocho galeras sicilianas, de las que era almirante, para que
no quedase impune su audacia. La pelea fué desigual con
un enemigo que se hallaba en muy superiores fuerzas, y Car-
dona hubiera pagado su temeridad; pero el barbaro viendo
que se dirijia hacia él la escuadra vencedora del austriaco,
se puso en fuga 4 vela y remo dejando libre 4 Cardona. Los
vencedores procuraron seguirle el alcance, mas no pudiendo
conseguirlo, se tornaron 4 recojer los despojos.

A esta feliz batalla se siguid el saqueo de las naves ene-
migas en las cuales encontraron gran cantidad de oro y plata
en moneda, y muchos vestidos y otras cosas de valor. Fueron
hechos cautivos siete mil novecientos y veinte de los enemigos,
sin contar los que oculté el soldado, y las naves apresadas
ciento sesenta y siete, algunas de las cuales quedaron entera-
mente inttiles; las despedazadas y quemadas pasaron de
setenta, y mds de trece mil cautivos cristianos que estaban
al remo fueron puestos en libertad. La armada vencedora
perdid diez y siete galeras, y siete mil setecientos cincuenta
y seis hombres; y es constante opinion que el numero de los
enemigos muertos en el combate, abrasados y sumerjidos,
Ileg6 & treinta y cinco mil. Sucedio esta batalla un domingo
4 siete de octubre, la que se sostuvo con suma fuerza desde
la hora de sexta hasta la de nona, 4 cuyo tiempo comenzaron
4 decaer los turcos; y desde aquella hora, mas fué una carni-
ceria que un combate. Refiérese que las aguas del mar se
tifieron de sangre, y que todo él se hallaba cubierto de antenas,
mastiles, caddveres y todo género de instrumentos navales.

Mariana.
Conversacion.
éQuién acudid prontamente al socorro?
éPor qué?
éQué hicieron los venecianos?
éQué sucedid entdnces?
éPor qué habia Doria extendido su escuadra?
éPor qué se retird el enemigo del lugar de la pelea?
¢Cudntas galeras apres?
éCudntos hombres perecieron en la capitana de Malta?
éQué hizo Uluc, viendo que la escuadra de Doria venia con-
tra él?
éQué hizo D. Juan de Cardona para que no quedase impune
la audacia de Uluc?
éCémo fué la pelea?
éPor qué se puso en fuga el barbaro?
éQué siguid 4 esta feliz batalla?
éQué encontraron los vencedores?
éCudntos cautivos fueron hechos?
éCuadntas naves fueron apresadas?
222 Lesson 4,

¢Cudntos cautivos cristianos fueron puestos en libertad?
éCudntos hombres y navios perdid la armada vencedora?
Cuando sucedid esta batalla?

éQué se refiere?

Fourth Lesson.

Possessive Pronouns.
(See I. P. Less. 15.)

The most important observations on the possessive
pronouns have been made in the earlier pages of this
grammar. We now subjoin some special remarks.

§ 1. As we stated Less. 15, § 4, the possessive
pronoun is, as in English, commonly expressed but once,
if two or more nouns, connected by y or d, follow each
other, thus:

Su persona y (sus) facultades. His person and qualities,

If, however, these substantives denote persons, or if
they are of different numbers, or if a particular stress
is laid on each word, the possessive pronoun should be
repeated; as:

Sus fueros, sus brios, sus pramiticas, su voluntad.
(Cerv.)

His privileges, his courage, his deeds, his will.

He perdido mi sombrero y mis guantes.

I have lost my hat and my gloves.

Mi aniga y mi prima.

My friend (f.) and my cousin (f.).

NB. Mi amiga y prima would be: my friend and cousin
(i. e. the same person).

§ 2. If the substantive is preceded or followed by
an adjective, the short as well as the longer and more
sonorous form of ‘the possessive pronoun may be used.
The latter is preferred, if a stress is laid on the adjec-
tive, or if the expression is exclamative; thus:

MMi querido amigo, my dear friend; whereas:
i Querido amigo mio! Dear friend!

§ 3. The sonorous form should be used, if not pos-

session, but a mere personal reference is intended, as:

Es costumbre suya, that is his habit (a custom of his).
Possessive Pronouns. 223

§ 4. By using the indefinite article together with
the possessive pronoun, the expression is rendered more
emphatic. Thus:

Es amigo mio, means: he is living on friendly terms
with me.
Whereas:

Es un amigo mio, means: he is a friend of mine.

§ 5. Sometimes a demonstrative pronoun is added to
the possessive pronoun, -as: this book of yours. In this
case the short as well as the longer and more sonorous
form may be used indifferently, as:

Esta tu culpa or esta culpa tuya. This fault of yours.

§ 6. Very often the possessive pronoun of the 3rd
person is rendered by the genitive of the personal pro-
noun, especially if a misconception might arise from the
possessive pronoun being alike for both genders. Thus:

My pen, his, and hers.

Mi pluma, la suya y la de ella (lit. that of her).
This is her book, and that is his.

Liste es su libro y aquel es el de él.

§ 7. The possessive pronoun of the polite form (your)
has been mentioned I. P. page 53, § 8. If it is used
substantively, i. e. if it is not connected with any sub-
stantive as an adjective, as: my house and yours, or if
this pronoun follows the substantive: the genitive of
the personal pronoun should be used with the respective
‘article, as:

Mi casa y ta de V. My house and yours.

Mis flores y las.de V. My flowers and yours.

NB. The same mode of expression should be employed,
if “yours” is preceded by the auxiliary verb “to be”, as:

These gloves are yours. Estos guantcs son los de V.

In this case the article before de V. may be omitted, as:

Estos guantes son de V. (lit.: these gl. are of you)*).

Traduccion. 5.

1. We speak of the same gentleman; I have always
(vespected him for his) esteemed his diligence and punctua-
lity. This poet is distinguished for his profoundness and

*) The English verb “to belong to” is generally translated
by ser de.
224 Lesson 4. ;

clearness, Have you found your knife and gloves? I have
found them, but I have lost my pocket-handkerchief and my
ear-rings. My friend and cousin (m.) has no idea, how much
he owes me. Last night my aunt and cousin (f.) have ar-
rived by (the) train. Dearest sister! You (tr. thou) [do
not know how much I love you (¢r. thee), else you would
think better of your (thy) brother and friend! It is an
arrogance on (tr. of) your part (possess. pronoun) to pronounce
(a) judgment on a matter that does not concern you. No
prudence on my side (mia) could have prevented (prevenido)
that danger. So much the worse for him (é. It is his da-
mage), if he does not follow (the) good advice. It is your
fault, if we do not succeed. It is a habit of mine to call
everything by its right name. This gentleman is a friend
of mine.

2. Mr. Ferrer isea relation of mine, but he is not a friend
of mine. (This) your levity will do you the greatest prejudice.
(This) my behaviour needs not to be concealed from anybody.
Next year my uncle and yours will (go to) visit the exhibition
in Paris. Your brother and his have settled the conditions
of the sale. Our house, his, and hers will be newly painted
this year. My uncle has always provided for his sister and
her children like a father. This is his pen; where (did Agnes
leave) has Agnes hers? Whose are these beautiful steel-
pens? They are yours, Miss (N.)!| My children and yours
have done great mischief in our neighbour’s garden.

Reading Exercise.
La ciudad de Valencia.

Valencia esta situada en aquella parte de Espafia que
se llamé Tarraconense, en la comarca que habitaron antigua-
mente los Edetanos: su asiento, en una gran llanura fértil y.
abastada de todo lo necesario 4 la vida y al regalo, aunque
el trigo le viene de acarreo y de fuera del reino para susten-
tarse. Es rica de armas y de soldados, abundante de mer-
caderias de toda suerte: de tan alegre suelo y cielo, que no
padece frio de invierno, y el estio hacen muy templado los
embates y los aires del mar. Los: edificios magnificos y gran-
des, sus ciudadanos honrados; de suerte, que vulgarmente se
dice hace 4 los extranjeros poner en olvido sus mismas patrias
y sus naturales. Las huertas y jardines muchos y muy fres-
cos, viciosos en demasia: los drboles por su érden concerdados,
en especial todo género de agrura y de cidrales, cuyos ramos
entretejen de manera, que ya representan diversas figuras de
aves y de animales y diversos instrumentos, ya los enlazan 4
manera de aposentos y retretes, cuya entrada impide la fuerte
trabazon de los ramos, la vista, la muchedumbre y espesura
Adjectives. 225
2
de las hojas, que todo lo cubren y lo tapan 4 manera de una
graciosa enramada, que siempre esta verde y fresca: tales eran
los campos Elisios, paraiso y morada de los bienaventurados,
segun que lo fingieron los poetas antiguos. Tal y tan grande
la hermosura de esta ciudad dada por beneficio del cielo, que
puede competir en esto con las mds principales de Europa.
A mano izquierda la bafia el rio Guadalaviar, que pasa
entre el muro y el palacio del rey que Ilaman el Real, y
esté por la parte de levante pegado con la ciudad con una
puente, por donde se pasa de la una parte 4 la otra. Sangran
el rio con diversas acequias para regar la huerta y para beber
los ciudadanos. Junto al mar cae la Albufera, distante por
espacio de tres millas, de aire no muy sano, pero que recom-
pensa este dafio con la abundancia de toda suerte de peces
que cria y da. Los muros de la ciudad eran entdénces de
figura redonda, mil pasos en contorno, cuatro puertas por
donde se entraba: la primera Boatelana, entre levante y me-
diodia; la segunda Baldina, 4 septentrion; la tercera Tem-
plaria (que tomo este nombre de una iglesia que alli edifi-
earon los Templarios), 4 la parte’de levante; la cuarta Jarcana,
entre la cual y Ja Boatelana fortificd el rey sus estancias,
por ser el lugar mds cémodo para la bateria y los asaltos, 4
causa de cierto dngulo 6 esconce que el muro hacia por aquella
parte. ; Mariana.
Conversacion.
éEn donde esta situada Valencia?
éQué dice el autor de la situacion de la ciudad?
éDe donde le viene el trigo?
éComo es el clima del pais?
éQué se dice vulgarmente de Valencia?
éQué dice el autor de la hermosura de la ciudad?
¢Cual rio la bafia 4 mano izquierda?
éCon qué sangran el rio?
¢Cémo eran entdnces los muros de la ciudad?
éCudntas puertas tenia Valencia?
éCudles son los nombres de estas puertas?
éPor qué es Hamada la tercera puerta «Templaria» ?

Fifth Lesson.

Adjectives.

Concerning the position of the Spanish adjective we
have given some general hints in the I. P., and now
add full particulars.

Spanish Grammar. 15
226 Lesson 5.

§ 1. If a substantive is qualified by more than one
adjective, these adjectives follow the noun, as:

A broad and fine street. Una calle ancha y hermosa.

§ 2. This is also the case, if the adjective itself is
qualified by an adverb or by any other part of speech, as:

A very hard stone. Una piedra muy dura.

The money requisite for the journey.

El dinero necesario para el viaje.

§ 3. When taken in a figurative sense, a good many
adjectives alter their original position, as:

Un hombre pobre, a poor (i. e. indigent) man.
Un pobre hombre, a poor (i. e pitiable) man.

Un sombrero negro, a black hat.
Un negro presentimiento, a gloomy (dark) presentiment.

Un caballo grande, a big horse.
Un gran caballo, an excellent horse.

El padre santo, the holy father (i. e the pope).

Los santos padres, the apostolic fathers.

§ 4. If a particular stress is laid on a quality, the
adjective, which otherwise would follow, precedes, as:

La mds discreta y mds hermosa mujer del mundo.

The most prudent and most beautiful woman in the world.

§ 5. In superscriptions, the date etc., the numeral
adjective commonly follows its substantive, as:

Capitulo segundo, the second chapter.

El dia siete de enero, the 7th of January.

El ano mil ochocientos y seis, the year 1806.

§ 6. Very often, euphony alone decides whether the
adjective should precede or follow. Thus a short adjective
commonly precedes, and a longer one follows the noun, as:

La dwra necesidad, hard necessity.

El bien piblico, the public welfare.

7. Mayor and menor, when meaning elder and
younger, follow their substantive, as:

El hermano mayor, the elder brother.

La hermana menor, the younger sister.

But if they are superlatives, they precede, as well
as mejor and pejor; thus:

La mayor falta, the greatest fault.
Adjectives. 927

La peor excusa, the worst excuse.

El mejor libro, the best book.

Observation. If these comparatives are followed by a
Genitive case, they may precede or follow their substantive,
and in this case they denote either the comparative or the
superlative degree; as:

La mejor obra or la obra mejor de este autor.

The best work of this author.

But if one of the indefinite pronouns alguno, ninguno, or
otro precedes the substantive, the aforesaid comparatives
should follow, as:

No hay en toda la coleccion ninguna obra mejor que esta.
There is no better work in the whole collection than this.

Degrees of Comparison.

1) Maximo, greatest, is not applied to space, but
to the value or importance of a person or thing; as:

La maxima renta no le bastaba.
The greatest income was not sufficient for him.

2) The regular forms bonisimo and malisimo have
almost the same signification as dptimo (best) and pésimo
(worst), whereas el menor (the least) expresses the acces-
sory idea of comparison, el minimo denoting absolutely
the lowest degree. Of pequefio (little), there exists a re-
gular superl. absol. pequenisimo, meaning the “‘very least”,
the ‘most trifling” etc. Supremo corresponds with the
English adjective ‘“‘supreme’, as: el consejo supremo, the
supreme council. Smo means the highest, i. e. the
greatest, as:

- Con sumo gusto, with the greatest pleasure.

3) Infimo, minimo, pésimo, and sumo although super-
latives, may nevertheless undergo a further comparison
with the aid of the words mds, which corresponds to
the English “very” used before a Superlative, as:

El mas infimo vulgo, the very lowest populace.

4) If a number forms the second part of a comparison,
the English ‘‘than” is not rendered by que (see page 76)
but by de [as in French]. Thus:

Cayeron mds de cincuenta hombres.
There fell more than fifty men.
998 Lesson 5.

If, however, the first part of the comparison is xe-
gative, “than” is translated que, as:

No tengo mis que cinco duros.
I have not more than five dollars.

5) If the second part of the comparison is an ac-
cessory sentence (see page 76, § 4 b), “than” is rendered by
de, as:

Mi amigo tiene mds libros de los que puede leer.

My friend has more books than he can read.

If, on the other hand, the comparative is an adverb,
que is employed, as:

Habla el espanol mejor que lo escribe.

He speaks the Spanish language better than he writes it.

6) The English ‘“‘the more..... the more” and “the
less..... the less’ is rendered by cuanto mds (ménos)....-
(tanto) mds (ménos), as:

Cuanto mds dinero tiene (tanto) mds quiere tener.

The more money he has, the more he would have.

Note. The first part of the comparison may likewise be
expressed by miéntras mds (ménos), but then in the second
part only mds (and not tanto mds) follows, whereas after
cuanto mds the corresponding tanto may, or may not be ex-
pressed, as shown by the above sentence.

If cuanto or tanto are followed by a substantive, they
become adjectives, and therefore agree with their noun, as:

Era tanto mds aplicado, cuanta mds facilidad tenia

para estudiar.

He was the more diligent, the more; talent he had for
study.

7) If in English a superlative immediately follows_a
numeral, as: “one of the greatest men” etc., the sub-
stantive should, in Spanish, be placed directly after the
numeral, the superlative following, as:

One of the most cruel kings.

Un rey de los mds crueles (lit. A king of the most
cruel).

8) The adjectives most and least are rendered as
follows:

a) By la mayor (menor) parte, if a substantive follows,
as:

Most men = La mayor parte de los hombres.
Adjectives. 929

b) If these words are neuter, i. e. if they are them-
selves substantives, as: “the least’, “the most’, they are
rendered to mds (lo ménos), as:

That is the least you can do.
Esto es lo ménos que V. puede hacer.

c) As in English, no article is used, when ménos or
mds are real adverbs, as:
It is he who speaks least.
El es quien ménos habla.

d) If the substantive following most or least denotes
not persons but things, los (los) mds (ménos) may be
-used, as well as la mayor (menor) parte de .. ., as:

(The) most houses of this town.
Las mds casas de esta ciudad.

9) The highest degree of comparison is rendered in
Spanish :
a) By the Superl. relat. preceded by the definite ar-
ticle, as:
An extremely clear river. Un rio el més limpio*).
b) By the verb poder (to be able), or, less frequently,
by caber, as:
He shouted as loud as possible.
Grité lo mds que podia.
I shall do my utmost.
Haré cuanto pueda (todo cuanto cabe en mi).
c) By lo posible, if a substantive without another ad-
jective follows, as:
With the utmost correctness.
Con la posible correccion (or con la correccion posible).
da) By hasta no mds (lit. ‘till no more”), in which case
the substantive with its adjective, should precede, as:

An extremely timid woman.
Una mujer timida hasta no mds**).

Traduccion. 6.

1. You have an agreeable and profitable situation here.
This is a very bad excuse, my dear friend; if you have no

*) As in Italian: Un suolo él pit fertile.
**) In French: On ne peut plus timide.
230 Lesson 5.

better, I shall not pardon you. I have put in into your trunk
the clothes necessary for your journey. My poor mother would
not believe that I was ill. Have you given (to) the poor
man a dollar? The Holy Father has beatified the Apostolic
Fathers. Your cousin is the finest and the best (most) in-
structed girl of our. town. Where shall I begin to read?
Begin with the second Act, fifteenth Scene. The ship left
the harbour on the 22nd of July. Is it your younger or your elder
brother who has married the earl’s daughter? Lying is the
worst excuse of a fault. Wallenstein is the best dramatic
work of Schiller. In the whole town there is no worse lod-
ging than ours. The greatest sum does not suffice to satisfy
his wishes. I have read the new novel with the greatest
pleasure. One hears such abominable words only amongst
(tr. with) the lowest populace. Have you paid more than 200
reals for this coat? No, Sir, I have not paid more than 180.
This lady has more whims than she can satisfy. You write
English better than you speak it.

2. The more wealth we possess, the more we wish to
possess. The more faults we have, the less we are inclined
to confess them. These people are the more presumptuous,
the less knowledge they possess. The more talent he has for
learning, the less diligent he is, Frederick Barbarossa was
one of the most powerful emperors of Germany. (The) most
young people like pleasure (better) more than work. Ten
dollars are the least you can give. It is you, my friend, who
always speak most and act (do) least. The greatest number
of the trees of this garden are old and do not bear any more
fruit. Few (tr. the least) things please us long, as soon as
we possess them. Italy has an extremely agreeable climate.
I said as much as I could, but he would not believe me.
The prince promised him to do his ztmost (fr. poder). Write
this letter with the utmost care! An extremely impudent
beggar followed me through several streets.

Reading Exercise.
La Ciudad de Sevilla.

En lo postrero de Espafia hacia el poniente esta asentada
Sevilla, cabeza del Andalucia, noble y rica ciudad entre las
primeras de Europa, fuerte por las murallas, por las armas
y gente que tiene. Los edificios publicos y particulares, 4
manera de casas reales son en gran numero; la hermosura y
arreo de todos los ciudadanos muy grande. Entre la ciudad
que esté 4 mano izquierda, y un arrabal lamado Triana, pasa
el rio Guadalquivir acanalado con grandes reparos, y de hondo*)

*) Lat. fundus, French le fond.
Numerals. 231

bastante para naves gruesas, y por la misma razon muy 4:
proposito para la contratacion y comercio de los dos mares
Océano y Mediterraneo. Con una puente de madera fundada
sobre barcas se junta el arrabal con la ciudad, y se pasa de
una parte 4 otra. En la ciudad esta la casa Real en que los
antiguos reyes moraban: en el arrabal un alcdzar de obra muy
firme que mira el nacimiento del sol. Una torre estd levan-
tada cerca del rio, que por el primor de su edificio la aman
de Oro vulgarmente: otra torre edificada de ladrillo, que esta
cerca de la Iglesia mayor, sobrepuja la grandeza de las demas
obras, por ser de sesenta varas en ancho y cuatro tanto mds
alta; sobre la cual se levanta otra torre menor, pero de bas-
tante grandeza, que al presente de nuevo estdé toda blanquea-
da, y al rededor adornada de variedad de pinturas, hermosas
4 maravilla 4 los que la miran.

Conversacion.
éEn qué parte de Espafia estd asentada Sevilla?
éDe qué provincia es cabeza?
éQué dice el autor en honra de Sevilla?
éComo son sus edificios?
é Qué sabemos de los ciudadanos?
éQué dice Mariana del rio Guadalquivir?
éEn qué manera se junta el arrabal, Mamado Triana, con
la ciudad ?
Donde moraban los antiguos reyes?
éQué estd en el arrabal?
éDonde estd levantada la torre de Orro?
éPor qué la llaman asi?
éQué torre estd cerca de la Iglesia mayor?
éCudntas varas tiene en ancho?
éQué se levanta sobre esta torre?

Sixth Lesson.

Numerals.

The most important observations on this part of
speech have been presented I. P. Less. 16 and 17. We
now add further particulars.

§ 1. Both is often expressed (see p. 57, 10) by uno
y otro and negatively ni uno ni otro. Seldom “both” is
rendered by el uno y el otro. Likewise, dos occurs with
the signification ‘both’, as:

Sus dos primos, both his cousins.
232 Lesson 6.

éTiene V. pan y vino? Tengo uno y otro.

Have you (some) bread and wine? I have both,

NB. Both used adverbdially, as: He is both prudent and
valiant, is tan(to) — como, or negatively no menos — que, as:

El es tan prudente como valiente, or negatively:

El no es ménos prudente que valiente.

§ 2. Some peculiar expressions may be noted:

A “tltimos de cada mes. In the last days of every month,
A primeros de enero. In the first days of January.
A mediados de junio. About the middle of June.

We need not add that in these examples the word dias (days)
is understood,

§ 3. Frequently primero is used adverbially with the
signification first(ly) and sooner, or it is periphrased by
to like better, to prefer etc.

Primero quiero comer, first I will eat.

Primero me quedo con el libro que venderlo tan barato.

I'll sooner keep the book (I prefer keeping the b.) than

sell it so cheaply.

§ 4. The adverb first and last are frequently trans-
lated primero and wltimo, preceded by the respective ar-
ticle, as:

Los nifios se recogicron los primeros (los ultimos).

The children went away first (last).

Indefinite Numerals.
(See Less. 18, I. P.)

1) Alguno, followed by que otro means “whatever”
or “whichever”. It is equivalent to the plur. of alguno, as:

Déme V. alguna que otra pluma (or algunas plumas)*).
Give me any pen you like.

A
2) The contrary of alguno is ninguno (none). This
word requires the negation, if following the verb. If it
precedes the verb, the negative particle is not admissible, as:

Su opinion no es de ningun valor.
His opinion is of no importance.

*) If alguno, mucho, poco, tanto, harto are used adverbially
before mds, they become true adjectives, as: Alguna@ (mucha, poca)
mds agua, Some (much, a little) more water. — Only cuanto and
tanto are invariable in this case,
Indefinite Numerals. 233

Whereas: En ningun pais de Europa hay tantos ladrones
como en Grecia.

In no country of Europe are there so many rob-
bers as in Greece.

3) Nadie (nobody) and nada (nothing) follow the
same rules as ninguno. When following the verb, they
require the negation. In the following cases they are
expressed in English by the affirmative words one, any-
body, anything.

a) In rhetorical questions e. g.:
j Demos & la nueva poblacion el nombre de Santa Fé!
éCabe en el mundo ninguno tan glorioso?

Let us give to the new town the name Santa Fé! Is
there a more renowned one in the world?

éHay nada mds formidable?
Is there anything more terrible?
b) After a comparative e. g.:
V. lo sabe mejor que nadie.
You know it better than any one else.

Also the preposition sin, without, and the conjunction
derived from it sin que, without (that) change the follow-
ing indefinite numeral into a negative one, e. g.:

Sin ningun amigo, without any friend.
Sin que nadie los sabia, without, any one knowing it.

4) Quienquiera is only used substantively (i. e.
without a substantive), whereas cualquiera is either
an adjective or a substantive, as:

He de salir con cualquier tiempo.

I must go out in any weather whatever.
Lo diga V. 4 quienquiera.

You may tell it to whom you please.

Note. If cualquiera or quienquiera introduce an adverbial
accessory sentence, they should be followed by que, as:

Cualquier tiempo que haga, he de salir.
Whatever the weather may be, I must go out.

5) Lodo (all, whole, every) is either an adjective or
a substantive. In the former case, it should be followed
234 Lesson 6.

by the (definite or indefinite) article (as in French and
Italian), or by its substitute, as:

Todo et mundo, the whole world.

todo un dia, a whole day.

toda mi casa, my whole house.

On the other hand, the article is omitted before pro-
per names or in adverbial expressions, as:
Por toda Espafa, all over Spain (lit. through the
whole Spain). .
Con toda puntualidad, with all punctuality = however
punctually ....

If every one or all is followed by a relative pronoun,
this pronoun is rendered either by the respective form
of cuanto or by que preceded by the article, as:

Todo lo que tengo, all (that which) I have.

Todo et que lo ha dicho, every one that said so, or

(Todos) cuantos lo han dicho (but not cuanto lo ha
dicho).

El principe ha hablado con (todos) cuantos esiaban
presentes.

The prince spoke to all those who were present.

If todo means “every” and is used adjectively, it ad-
mits of no article, as:

Todo hombre culto, every well-bred man.

Todo is also neuter and corresponds to the English
everything, as:

El habla de todo, he speaks of everything.

Very often todo is used adverbially, and then means
“as much as”, “entirely” etc. In this signification, todo
is, of course, invariable and is commonly followed by lo
que, as:

La condesa llamé todo lo que pudo.

The countess called as loudly as she could.

6) Mismo, same, self, is used adjectively, as: la misma
cosa, the same thing. Sometimes it occurs as a Superl.
absol., as: la mismésima cosa, the very same thing,
and frequently it corresponds to the English even, as:

La misma reina lo ha dicho.
Even the queen said so.
Indefinite Numerals. 235

In Spanish, if ‘myself, himself” ete. is preceded by:

a personal pronoun, as: I. . . myself, she . . . herself,
only the absolute personal pronoun is allowable; thus:
Nosotros mismos. we .... ourselves.
Vosotras mismas. you ... yourselves (fem.).

If the personal pronoun is a datire or accusative
case, both the conjunctive and the absolute form of the
same pronoun should be used, as:

He will give it to me (to myself).

Me lo ddra & mt mismo.

Observe the expressions:

Hoy mismo, this very-day.

atiana mismo, on the (very) morrow itself.

Self, same, used adjectively, when not referring to
persons is translated by propio, e. g.:

Al propio tiempo, at the same time.

lL las & de la manana del propio dia.

At 9 o’clock in the morning of the same day.

7) Demas (from de — mds), “other”. is invariable
and used both adjectively and substantively, as:

Las demas hermanas. the other sisters.

Los demas no han hablado.

The others did not speak (have not spoken).

A derivate of demas is demasiado, “too much”,
which (like the Italian troppo) is used both adjectively
and substantively, as:

Demasiada gente, too many people.

Bebié demasiado vino, he drank too much wine.
Somewhat stronger than demasiado is sobrado, as:

Ha dado a su hijo sobrado dinero.

He gave his son too much money.

NB. From sobrado is formed the adverb sobradamente.

8) Bastante and harto (enough) are used both
adjectively and substantively and sometimes even adver-
bially, as:

Tengo bastante dinero, I have money enough.

Me ha dicho bastante (harto), he has told me enough.

9) Otro, -a (other) is both adjective and substantive.
As we stated p. 67, 7, it never takes the indefinite ar-
236 Lesson 6.

ticle. Coupled with wno, as: wno con otro or uno ¥ otro,
pl. wnos y otros, it corresponds to the English both, uno
a otro with one another, each other, as:

Salicron uno con otro, they both went out.

Mirdronse unos @ otros, they looked at each other.

Followed by tanto, it means just as much or quite
as much (as many), as:

Yo tengo dos varas, y V. tiene otras tantas*).

I have two ells, and you have just (quite) as much,

10) atl (such) is both substantive and adjective. It
also means the aforesaid, the same etc., as:

El tal Diego, the aforesaid D.
Joined to ano, it means a certain etc., as:

Un tal lo ha dicho, a certain gentleman said so.

Habla de una tal Elvira, he speaks of a certain E.
Preceded by cwal it means as — so; thus:

Cual es el padre tal es el hijo.

As the father so is the son.

In proverbial expressions tal is often used instead of
cual, as:

Tal amo, tal criado, like master, like man**),
Idioms with tal are:

Por tal, therefore.

Tal y tambien, always.

No hay tal, no such thing!

Con tal que, on condition that ....

Es tal cual, middling!

Tal vez, perhaps.

11) Fulano has often an accessory idea of con-
tempt, as:

Fulano no quiere pagar, that fellow won't pay.

Tiene en su casa & fulano y & zutano.

He has a nice set of people in his house.

Traduccion 7.

1. Both my sisters are now at Paris. Here is ice and
lemonade; you may have both, if you like. The ship will
arrive here in the last days of June. We left the town in

 

 

*) In this case otro tanto should agree in gender and number
with the word to which it refers.
**) In French: Tel maitre, tel valet.
Indefinite Numerals. 2387

the first days of January. Will you write a letter or give
me your orders by word of mouth? I prefer (see p. 282, § 3)
keeping my old servant to (tr. than) taking (Inf.) another
(one). The gentleman entered last and the ladies went out
first. Have you found any (see page 232, 1) book that you
could recommend me? In no town of this country there are
so many foreigners as in the capital. These jewels are of no
value. None of your friends (has) said that you had not done
your duty. He arrived in this town, without having (Inf.)
any acquaintance here. Is there anything more precious than:
the friendship of a virtuous man?

2. You know me better than anybody else; how can you
say that I have cheated my friends on (en) any occasion?
Whatever excuse he may proffer, I shall not pardon him.
The whole town speaks of this accident. All over Europe
travelling Englishmen are to be found. I have listened to
him with the greatest (toda) attention. Everybody that has
seen it will say that I am right. All he said was the purest
truth. Every sensible man will be of my opinion. Here you
have your poems; I (have) read them all, but none has pleas-
ed me. You speak of everything, you judge of everything,
and yet you know nothing. That is all (which) I have heard.
The child screamed with all its might, and nevertheless the
nurse did not awake.

3. The count (has) told me so himself. Has the footman
given it to you(thee) himself? No, he has not given it to me
himself, the (maid-) servant gave it to me. Where are the other
books? Have you not (got) them all? Yes, you (thou) have
given them to me yourself. The coachman got five dollars and
the cook (f.) as much; the ,others got nothing. You want
(pide) too much, my friend. That is too much money for so
little work. He has shown (to) his children too much tender-
ness. Have you wine enough? Thank you, Sir, I have enough.
Yesterday he lost ten dollars, and I gained (gamé) just as
much. Yesterday they spoke (with) me of a certain count
Fabian; is he still here? The proverb says: «As the mistress,
so the maid; as the prince, so the court». Shall you come
with me? Yes, (but) on condition that we return soon.

Reading Exercise.
La ciudad de Sevilla.

Continuacion.
éQué necesidad hay de relatar por menudo todas las co-
sas y grandezas de esta ciudad, tan vaga y llena de primores
y grandezas? Hay en la ciudad en este tiempo mds de veinte
y cuatro mil vecinos, divididos en veinte y ocho parroquias
6 colaciones. La primera y principal es de Santa Maria, que
938 Lesson 7.

es la Iglesia mayor, con el cual templo en anchura del edificio
y en grandeza ninguno de todo Espafia se le iguala. Vulgar-
mente se dice de las iglesias de Castilla: la de Toledo la rica,
la de Salamanca la fuerte, la de Leon la bella, la de Sevilla
la grande. Tiene su fabrica de renta treinta mil ducados en
cada un afio; la del arzobispo Mega 4 ciento y veinte mil;
las canongias y dignidades, asi en ntimero como en lo demas,
responden 4 esta grandeza. Los campos son muy feértiles,
Manos y muy alegres por todas partes; por la mayor parte
plantados de olivos, que en Sevilla se dan muy bien, y el
esquilmo es muy provechoso: de alli se llevan aceitunas ado-
badas, muy gruesas, de muy buen sabor, 4 todas las demas
partes. El trato es tan grande y la grangeria tal, que en los
olivares lamados Ajarafe en tiempo de los moros se contaban
cien mil, parte cortijos, parte trapiches 6 molinos de aceite;
y dado que parece gran numero, la autoridad y testimonio de
la historia del rey Don Alonso el sabio lo atestigua. El nu-
mero de extranjeros y la muchedumbre de mercaderes que
concurren es increible, mayormente en este tiempo, de todas
partes d la fama de las riquezas, que por el trato de las In-
dias y flotas de cada un afio se juntan alli muy grandes.
Mariana.
Conversacion.

¢Cudntos vecinos hay en esta ciudad?

éHn cudntas parroquias estdin divididos?

¢Cudl es la primera?

éQué dice Mariana de la Iglesia mayor?

éQué se dice vulgarmente de las iglesia de Castilla?

éA cudnto llega la renta de la fdbrica en cada un afio?

éY la del arzobispo?

éCémo son los campos?

éCudntos molinos de aceite se contaban en los olivares de
Sevilla?

4Cudl autoridad atestigua este gran numero?

éHubo muchos extranjeros en este tiempo en la ciudad?

Seventh Lesson.
Pronouns.
(See Less.. 24, I. P.)
Personal Pronouns.

§ 1. From numerous examples the learner will have
observed, that the personal pronoun in the nominative
case is usually omitted before the verb, provided no
Personal Pronouns. 939

stress be laid upon it, or that no misconception can pos-
sibly arise by this omission. Thus we should say: Yo
trabajo mds que tt, I work more than you (thou), be-
cause here the comparison requires the personal pronoun.

§ 2. The form of address usted (V.) or its plural
ustedes (VV., Vmds., Vds.), is only omitted, if it has
been employed immediately before, so as to avoid every
chance of a misconception, as:

V. ha venido y me ha hablado mucho.

You have come and (you) have spoken much with me.

§ 3. Concerning the position of the dative and accu-
sative case of the conjunctive personal pronouns we have
given the general rules page 97, 2. b. We here add
further particulars.

a) Contrary to the general rules, the conjunctive pro-
nouns are affixed to the verb, if the latter begins the
sentence, as:

Alégrome, I rejoice.

Parecidle ser ya tiempo oportuno.

It seemed to him that it was the right time (to be ther. t.).

b) These pronouns are rarely applied to the first and
second person plural. If the accent is on the antepenil-
timate of the verb, they can never be affixed. Thus: los
mandartamos, we should send them, but never «mandaria-
moslos».

c) In the case of auxiliary verbs used in a wider sense,
the pronoun can either be put before these or be attached
to the following gerund or infinitive; e. g.:

Iba buscdndolo or Lo iba buscando.

He sought it (cp. Lesson 33, on the gerund).

No me lo quiere decir, or:

No quiere decirmeto, he won't tell me.

Se estaba levantando, or:

Estdbase levantando, or:

Estaba levantandose, he was rising.

NB. In a loftier style, this practice is also admissible
in the tenses compounded with haber, as:

Habianto hallado, they had found it,
but in conversation the auxiliary is always preceded by the

pronoun:
Lo habian hallado.
240 Lesson 7.

d) If an accessory sentence refers to a conjunctive per-
sonal pronoun in the dative or accusative case, the ac-
cessory sentence should be preceded by the absolute form
of the same pronoun, as:

Declirote por mi heredero & té que has tenido ingenio
para entender el sentido de la inscripcion.

I declare thee for my heir that hadst sagacity enough to
understand the meaning of the inscription.

e) Sometimes a substantive in the dative or accusa-
tive, for the sake of greater emphasis, is placed before
the verb, contrary to the general arrangement of words.
In this case the respective personal pronoun should be
added, as:

al mi padre no te conoci. As to my father, I did not
know him (instead of: I did not know my father).
Eso no lo sé, I do not know that (and not eso no sé).

§ 4. Very frequently, even with good authors, the
accusative cases Jo and Je are used indiscriminately. When
speaking of things, we may, as we observed page 96, 1,
substitute Jo for le; thus:

éHa visto V. mi libro? No lo (or le) he visto.

Have you seen my book? I have not seen it.

If, however, the preceding substantive denotes a person,
te is decidedly preferable, as:

éQuiere V. & su hermano? Si, le quiero mucho.
Do you love your brother? Yes, I love him much.

§ 5. It isa peculiarity of the Spanish language that
personal pronouns cannot be connected with substantives,
as: “Ye English”, nor with numerals, as: ‘We... both’.
In Spanish, the pronoun is replaced by the article, and
the respective person is expressed by the termination of
the verb, as:

Mase. Vamos los dos juntos, let us go both (together).
Fem. Vamos las dos juntas, » » »  » »
Las mujeres quereis hablar todo el dia.
Ye women like to chatter all day long.
_ The same, if a relative accessory sentence follows a
personal pronoun, as:

You that know nothing.
Los (fem. las) que no sabeis nada.
Personal Pronouns. 241

§ 6. Whenever in an exclamation an adjective or
an interjection is joined to a personal pronoun, the pro-
‘noun should be preceded by de, as:

i Desdichado de mi! Unhappy man that I am!
i Desdichada de ti! Unhappy woman that you are!
jAy de mi! Woe to me!

Traduccion. 8.

1. Have you studied the song which I (have)’ brought
you yesterday? Yes, it is very pretty; I (have) sung it twice
this morning. You have written more than J, but I have
drawn more than you. You have asked me, and you have
got the answer (which) you have desired; what more do you
wish? I am very glad to see you here. I told (fr. referir)
him the accident, but he would not believe me. Let us go
(fr. irse)! If we had already received the books, we should
have sent them to you. Have you found your hat? No, I
was looking (§ 8. c) for it in my room and in yours, but I
cannot find it. The governor of the count was just rising,
when I knocked at the door, in order to ask him, if he had
already breakfasted. I asked him three times, but he would
not tell (it) me.

2. Courage is wanting (fr. faltar) to you who had the
boldness to resist him so long! To that famous Greek, called
Ulysses, they gave the surname of the Prudent. As for his
brother, I never saw him. Have you read this novel? No,
I have not yet read it. Have you (already) seen the author
of the new play? I have not yet seen him; but the play,
—I have seen it. We shall both go to Paris, said the girls;
there we shall visit our uncle and aunt. Ye men are often
more loquacious than (the) women. We, who always work,
we do not know ennui, but you, who do nothing the whole
day, you are always complaining of ennui. Woe to you,
reprobate (fem.), if you dare to enter this house! Alas (ér.
Woe to me)! cried the peasant, I have lost all my money!

Reading Exercise.

Roger de Lauria*).

Cuando el infeliz Conradino, ultimo resto de la casa de
Suevia, oy6 la sentencia de muerte 4 que le condend su in-

*) Es grande la variedad con que se escribe este nombre,
producida acaso por el diferente valor que se da al primer
diptongo. Los italianos le llaman Loria unos, y otros dell’ Oria:
los catalanes Luria, y en su testamento tambien esta escrito asi.
Los franceses y los castellanos escriben Lawria.

, Spanish Grammar. 16
242 Lesson 7.

humano vencedor Cérlos de Anjou; despues de reclamar
contra la iniquidad de aquel juicio, dicese que savindose un
anillo, que traia al dedo, le arrojé en medio del concurso que
asistia al funesto espectaculo, dando con él la investidura de
sus estados al principe que lo vengase. No faltdé alli quien
recogiese esta prenda de discordia, y trayéndola al rey de
Aragon Pedro III, le hiciese entender con ella las voces del
principe moribundo, y le recordase el derecho que tenia a
los reinos de N&poles y de Sicilia, usurpados por los franceses.
Estaba Pedro casado con Constanza, hija de Manfredo, tio
natural de Conradino; que sefior de aquellos estados, habia
sido antes vencido y muerto por Carlos en los campos de
Benevento: y esta alianza daba mds peso 4 las pretensiones
del monarca aragones, que enténces se hallaba en el vigor de
la edad, leno de valor, y codicioso de gloria y poderio.

Mas la ambicion de este principe quizd se habria ejerci-
tado solamente contra los sarracenos, sin la conducta que
tuvieron los franceses en el pais conquistado. Su petulancia,
avivada con el orgullo de la victoria, y apoyada en la per-
suasion que tenian de la santidad y justicia de su causa, no
conociendo limites ni freno, se abandond 4 los mayores ex-
cesos, y atropell6 todos los derechos domésticos y civiles.
Enténces la indignacion rompidé los lazos del miedo, y ensefid
4 los hombres oprimidos las fuerzas que en su abatimiento
desconocian. Un insulto hecho 4 una dama por un frances
en las calles de Palermo, did ocasion 4 aquella matanza hor-
rible, que se conoce en todas las historias con el nombre de
visperas sicilianas. Los franceses, sus hijos y sus mujeres,
aunque fuesen del pais, cayeron 4 manos de la venganza, sin
que les quedase en toda Sicilia mds que un pueblo de corta
consideracion llamado Esterlinga.

Conversacion.

éComo llama el autor al infeliz Conradino?

éQué oydé Conradino?

éQué hizo despues?

éA quién quiso dar la investidura de sus estados?

éQuién tenia derechos 4 los reinos de Napoles y de Sicilia?
éCon quién estaba casado D. Pedro de Aragon?

éPor quién habia sido vencido Manfredo?

éQué dice el autor del cardcter del monarca aragones?
éQué conducta tuvieron los franceses en el pais conquistado?
éQué ensefid la indignacion 4 los hombres oprimidos?

éQué did ocasion 4 las visperas sicilianas ?

éQuiénes cayeron 4 manos de la venganza?
Demonstrative Pronouns. 943

Eighth Lesson.

Demonstrative and Interrogative Pronouns.
(See Less. 25, I. P.)

§ 1. The principal difference between este and ese
is, that este refers to the speaker, whereas ese refers to
the person addressed*). The opposite of both is aquel.
From this difference, it results that este should always
be rendered by ‘“‘this’, and that ese frequently corresponds
to the English ‘‘this here’, whereas aquel is ‘that’.
Este and ese can never be used as contrasts. Examples:

Esta casa es mds alia que aquella.
This house is higher than that (house).

Déme V. ese libro. Give me that book near you, or:
which you have in your hand.

§ 2. In English 7 (or that) is very often used ab-
solutely, i. e. as the seeming subject of a sentence whilst
the real subject follows, as: J¢ is my sister. In Spanish
the neuter form may only be used, if ‘that’ refers to
a whole sentence preceding, as:

Eso es increible, it (that) is incredible (viz.: what I
heard or: what I have been told etc.).

But, as in English:
Esta es mi hermana, this (that) is my sister.
Estas son mis esperanzas, these are my hopes.

Esta es la Sefora A. y aquella es la Senora N.
This is Mrs. A. and that is Mrs. N.

§ 3. We noticed (page 102) that the Spanish lan-
guage often substitutes the article for the demonstrative
pronoun. This is the case, if the demonstrative pronoun
refers to a preceding substantive, as:

My house and that of my neighbour.
Mi casa y la de mi vecino.

§ 4. If the real subject of the sentence is no single
word, but an infinitive with its complement, as: To see you
happy is my greatest felicity, this infinitive in Spanish
commonly follows and, if so, should be introduced by the
article, which, of course, agrees with the preceding pre-
dicate. Thus:

*) The Italian cotesto.

 

16*
244 Lesson 8.

Mi tunica felicidad es la de ver & V. dichoso.
My sole felicity is to see you happy.
§ 5. The article used in lieu of the relative pronoun
may also appear as a genitive or dative case, as:
Prefiero este libro at que V. ha leido ayer.
I prefer this book to that which you read yesterday.

NB. Formerly the preposition de was often contracted with
este and ese into one word, as: deste = de este; destos = de estos;
desa = de esa. These contractions are now obsolete.

§ 6. In English the reference to a foregoing sub-
stantive or adjective is often not expressed. In Spanish
we use the article in such a case, which agrees, in
gender and number, with the substantive to which it
refers, as:

gEs V. la hermana de este sefor?

Are you the sister of this gentleman?

Si, la soy. Yes, I am (i. e. the sister).

éSois los criados del conde?

Are you the servants of the count?

Si, los somos. Yes, we are (i. e. the servants).

If, on the contrary, an adjective precedes, or a sub-
stantive without article, the reference is expressed by
lo, as:

Todos se precian de patriotas; y sin embargo de que
muchos lo parecen, jcudn pocos lo son!

All boast of being patriots, and though many seem to
be such, how few are so!

Hermoso fué aquel dia, y no lo fué ménos la noche.

Beautiful was the day, and no less (i. e. beautiful) was
the night.

Likewise, the reference to a preceding adverb is ex-
pressed by lo, as:

Amadis fué el sol de los valientes. Siendo pues esto
asi como lo es etc. ,

A. was the star of the gallant (knights), This being
as it is etc.

Interrogative Pronouns.

_ 1) Like que in French, the interrogative qué, what?
is often accompanied by de, if the following adjective is
used substantively, as:
Interrogative Pronouns. 245

éQué hay de nuevo? What is the news? (Qu’y a-t-il
de nouveau ?)

2) If in an exclamation qué precedes a substantive,
it should likewise be followed by de, as:

i Qué de invidia! What envy!

(Qué de locuras! What follies!

3) If qué precedes a substantive qualified by an ad-
jective, ¢an is often inserted for the sake of emphasis, as:

i Oh, qué carga tan pesada! Oh, what a heavy burden!

(Qué es tan hermosa esta muchacha!
How beautiful that girl is!
NB. Yet tan may be omitted.

4) As we mentioned on page 104, cziyo*) occurs as
an interrogative pronoun (whose?); but the proper inter-
rogative pronoun is preferable. Thus:

Whose books are these?
éCuyos libros son estos? Or rather:
éDe quién son estos libros?

Traduccion. 9.

1. These flowers and yours (see § 1) are finer than
those. Which hat do you want, this or that? Give me that
which you have in your hand. I have seen this picture and
that; that pleases (fr. gustar) me better (mds) than this.
These gentlemen and those have not been present at the act.
Is this your sister or your cousin? Neither one nor the other;
(she) it is my aunt. If these are all your wishes, they are
very easily fulfilled (tr. to fulf.). Those are remarks which
are not becoming to a young man. He said he would not give
the workman his wages; that is abominable. My cloak and
that of my cousin Paul are made after the newest fashion.
You say that he has told you (that) he came at 3 o’clock,
but that is impossible. Who is that lady? (She) it is Miss
Vallarino, and her companion is my sister’s governess.

2. He has sold his garden and that of his uncle. You
have lost your money and that of your sister. My most
ardent wish was always to see you friends. Do you speak
of Mr. Estrella? I do not speak of (the) Mr. Estrella who
lives here, but of him (tr. that) who is in Mexico. I prefer

*) The relative cuyo is sometimes separated from its substan-
tive, by the verb as:
El caballero, cuya era la espada.
The knight to whom the sword belonged.
Yet de quien is much to be preferred in such a case.
®
246 Lesson 8,

this wine to that which we had (tr. have drunk) yesterday. What
news have you heard? Nothing of importance. What nonsense?
How can anybody believe (such a thing) something like that?
Oh, what a horrible crime! What meanness to do such a deed!
How charming are the banks of this river! How majestic
are the summits of these mountains! Whose gloves are these?
They are those of the young officer who arrived with me
yesterday. Are you the daughters of my old friend Sagasta?
Yes, Sir, we are. Were you satisfied (plu. f.) with your
new dresses? Yes, Mrs. (N.), we were. Is this man really
happy? To be sure, he is.

Reading Exercise.
Roger de Lauria.
Continuacion.

Cogieron estas alteraciones al rey Carlos en medio de
los preparativos formidables que destinaba 4 la conquista det
imperio griego; y parecia humanamente imposible que los
infelices sicilianos pudiesen resistir 4 estas fuerzas, que al
instante vinieron sobre ellos. Mesina es sitiada, embestida,
y & pesar del ardor de sus defensores, conoce su flaqueza, y
trata de capitular; pero el implacable enojo del rey se niega
a todo concierto, y sdlo quiere entrar en la plaza rodeado de
suplicios y de verdugos. Los mesineses enténces juran deses-
perados comerse primero, unos 4 otros, que entregarse 4 sus
duros opresores, y dan con esto lugar 4 que llegue el defensor
y vengador de Sicilia.

El célebre negociador Juan Prochita, que no perdonaba
medio ni fatiga para traer socorros 4 su desvalida patria,
habia podido confederar entre si al Papa Nicolao III, al
Emperador de Grecia y al rey de Aragon. ‘Tres afios antes
se habia hecho esta alianza en ruina y odio del poderio
francés, ofreciendo el Papa para la empresa socorros espiri-
tuales, que valian mucho en aquel tiempo, el emperador dinero,
y el rey tropas y su persona. La muerte de Nicolao, y la
adhesion de su sucesor 4 los intereses de la Francia, no pu-
dieron estorbar los efectos de la liga; y Pedro III desde la
costa de Africa, donde se habia acercado con pretexto de hacer
guerra 4 los moros, aportd con su escuadra 4 Palermo, cuando
ya los pobres mesineses se hallaban en el mayor aprieto y
agonia. Los habitantes de Palermo le alzaron al instante
por su rey, y él envid 4 Mesina un corto refuerzo de almu-
gavares, que en diferentes salidas que hicieron ahuyentaron
siempre al enemigo. El déspota estremecido conoce enténces
que la fortuna se le trueca, y temeroso de alguna alteracion
en Napoles, no se atreve 4 medirse con su rival, y le aban-
dona la Sicilia.
Possessive and Relative Pronouns. 947

Conversacion.

gCudndo cogieron -estas alteraciones al rey Carlos?

* ¢Qué parecia imposible?

¢Cual es la condicion (state) de Mesina?

éQué quiere hacer el rey?

éQué juran entdnces los mesineses?

gA qué dan lugar con esto?

éQuién quiso traer socorros 4 su patria?

4Cudles fueron los monarcas que Juan de Prochita habis con-
federado entre si?

éCudndo se habia hecho esta alianza?

éQué ofrecieron los monarcas para la empresa?

4Con qué pretexto se habia acercado el rey Pedro III a la
costa de Africa?

éCudndo aporté con su escuadra 4 Palermo?

éQué hicieron los habitantes de Palermo?

éQué hizo el rey?

éQué conoce enténces el déspota?

éPor qué no se atreve 4 medirse con su rival?

Ninth Lesson.

Possessive and Relative Pronouns.
(See Less. 15 and 26, I. P.)

Concerning the possessive pronouns we need add but
one observation to what we stated in the first part of
this Grammar, viz.:

As the possessive pronoun of the third person singular
is alike in the masculine and feminine, a misconception
might often arise, as in the sentence:

This is his book and that is hers,

Este es su libro y aquel es el suyo,
where it seems doubtful whether “el suyo” means /zs or
hers. Hence the above sentence should be translated:

Este es su libro y aquel es el de ella.
This is his book, and (lit.) that is the (book) of her.

Relative Pronoun.
1) The relative pronoun que is used for all cases,
if referring to things; with reference to persons, however,
it may only be employed in the nominative and accusa-
248 Lesson 9,

tive case, que also does not take d, if it is accusative
and refers to persons. Besides de and d, other prepo-
sitions may likewise be coupled with que, provided they
are monosyllables. The preposition por, however, cannot
.be used before que*). Hxamples:

Nom. La sefiora que viene, the lady who comes.
Las seforas que vienen, the ladies who come.

Acc. La carta the letter ‘ah I xendived
Las cartas the letters | pleas Ceuta

Las seftoras que he visto, the ladies whom I have seen.

\ que recibi,

With prepositions: La casa de que le hablé d V.
The house of which I spoke to you.
El jardin en que he visto d V.
The garden where (in which) I saw you.

2) Que also occurs with the article, especially if
preceded by ¢wo substantives, in which case it is used
instead of el (la) cual, as:

La senora me envid & un colegio en Cartagena, del
que era rectora una parienta suya.

The lady sent me to a school in C., the head-mistress
of which was a relation of hers.

Note. Usually no comma is put before the relative
pronoun. If it is, the meaning of the accessory sentence
undergoes a slight variation. [A similar rule obtains in
French.] The pupil is requested to compare the following
sentences:

Las seforas, que deseaban descansar, se retiraron.
The ladies who wished to repose, withdrew (here all’
the ladies wished to repose).

Whereas:

Las sehoras que deseaban descunsar, se retiraron, means:
(Only) those ladies who wished etc. withdrew.

It is a peculiarity of the Spanish language that if que
refers at once to two foregoing nouns of different gender,
demonstrative pronouns should be added in order to distinguish
these words, as:

 

 

*) Que corresponds to the French que and the Italian che,
with the sole exception, that these relative pronouns only refer
to the nominative and accusative, whilst the Spanish que admits
of other prepositions. Por is avoided before que, because por que
(= porque) means “because” and por qué, why?
Relative Pronouns. 249

Adornaron la nave con fldmulas y gallardeses que ellos
-azotando el aire y ellas besando las aguas, vistosi-
sima vista hacian (Cerv.).

They adorned the ship with pennons and flags which,
the latter beating the air and the former kissing
the waves, offered a splendid sight.

3) Quien (like the Italian ch?) often corresponds
to the English he who, people who, as:

Hay quien”) dice, there are people who say.

A quien estd contento nada le falta.

To him who is satisfied, nothing is wanting.

Quien — quien is an equivalent for the English the
one — the other, as:

Quien quiere leer, quien escribir.

The one wishes to read, the other to write.

(Cual — cual is likewise used in this sense.)

4) Cual (without the article) expresses a comparison
(see Less. 26, I. P., page 107—108), whilst el (la) cual
develops the meaning of the preceding sentence. In the
former signification, it supposes a preceding tal, which,
however, may be omitted, as:

Esos hombres no son (tales) cuales se muestran.
These people are not (such) as they show themselves.

5) Cuyo, —a, pl. —os, —as, as a relative pronoun,
renders the English whose, and, like this, requires a
substantive following, with which it agrees in gender and
number, as:

La madre cuya hija es tan laboriosa.
The mother whose daughter is so diligent.
El caballero cuyos amigos han llegado.
The gentleman whose friends have arrived.

Note. Sometimes cuyo is also separated by the verb from
the substantive to which it belongs, as:

El caballero cuya era la espada. ;
The knight whose sword this was (i. e. to whom this

sword belonged).
But at any rate it is better, in such a case (i. e. when
speaking of persons or personified beings), to use de quien
instead of cuyo.

*) Also in the plural, as: Hay quienes no tienen vergitenza,
there are people who are,so shameless... .
250 Lesson 9.

If the substantive after whose is the predicate of the
accessory sentence, another relative pronoun must be
substituted for cuyo. Thus we cannot say:

El nifio cuyo tutor él es, the child whose guardian he is,
but only: El nifio de quien or del cual es tutor.

Observations. 1) If the relative pronoun is followed by
a numeral referring to a preceding substantive, as in the
sentence: The child looked at its apples which were seven
(i. e. apples), que is coupled with the respective article in the
nominative case, as:

He counted the dollars in his purse, which were eight.
Conté los duros en sw bolsillo los que eran ocho.
2) Quien (see 8) may refer to things, especially with
ancient writers, as:
Es un bdlsamo de quien tengo la receta en la memoria.
(Cerv.)
It is an unguent whose receipt I have in my memory.
This mode of expression is not to be imitated.

3) Donde is used instead of a relative pronoun, provided
that it denotes a local circumstance, as:

La ciudad donde or en donde vivo.
The town where (or in which) I live.

4) Cuyo connects more closely an apposition with the
word to which it refers, as:

Un porquero tocd un cuerno, d cuya sefal se recogen
los puercos. (Cerv.)

A swine-herd blew a horn, at which signal the pigs go
home. 4

Vinieron algunas embajadas, por ewyo motivo se detuvo.

There came several embassies, for which reason he re-
mained longer.

5) It is a peculiarity of the Spanish language to employ
relative sentences, where the English use indirect questions
or exclamations, as:

V. no puede figurarse el dolor con que recibi esta
noticia.

You cannot imagine how much grieved I was to learn
this news.

Sé lo bien*) que me quiere.

I know how much he loves me.

*) Querer bien, to love, lit. to wish the good ‘of somebody.
French: Le bien qwil me veut. Ital. Ll bene che mi vuole.
Relative Pronouns. 251

6) The English frequently use a periphrase with a sub-
stantive, sometimes also the present participle, where the
French employ en ce que, to express the reference to some-
thing following, as in the sentence:

The animals differ from the plants in that they feel
and move, or: by their being capable of feeling and
moving, or: by sensation and motion. (French: en
ce qwils sentent et se meuvent.)

In Spanish we introduce en qwe in such a case, as:

Los animales se diferencian de las plantas en que
sienten y se mueven.

If, on the contrary, the reference to something preceding
shall be expressed, en lo que must be used, as:

Pueden los relativos no sélo reproducir un concepto pre-
cedente sino anunciar un concepto subsiguiente; en
lo que no se diferencian de los otros demostrativos.

The relative pronouns are not only capable of reprodu-
cing a preceding idea, but they can also indicate a
following notion, wherein they do not differ from
the demonstrative pronouns.

7) If the relative sentence is but a periphrase of a sub-
stantive in the nominative case, the definite article el should
precede que, as:

Parecieron estas condiciones duras; ni valid, para hacer-
las aceptar, el que Colon propusiese contribuir con
la octava parte.

These conditions seemed hard, and in order to have
them accepted, it was of no avail that Columbus
proposed (= Columbus’ proposal was of no avail)
to contribute with the eighth part.

Again, relative sentences which imply an accusative case,
are introduced in this way, as:

No podia yo mirar con indiferencia el que se infamase
mi doctrina.

I could not see with indifference that (or how) they
calumniated my doctrine (= the calumniation, de-
traction etc. of my doctrine).

8) If which refers to.a whole foregoing sentence, it is
rendered by lo que (French: ce qui; It. il or lo che), as:
Los reos fueron condenados al ultimo suplicio lo que
causé un sentimiento general.
The culprits were condemned to death, which caused a
general sensation.
252 Lesson 9.

9) The exclamative “how” or “how’ much” is very often
lo ... que, and then the adjective takes its place between
lo and que. Now it may occur that the adjective is feminine,
when the pupil might easily be misled to consider the some-
what strange form (lo ..@) incorrect, which is by no means
the case. Example:

Asi se ve lo generosa que eres.

Thus one sees how generous (fem.) you are.
This must be understood thus:

Asi se ve lo que (how much) tz eres generosa.

Note. Antiquated forms are asaz, tolerably, and nonada,

nothing, as:

Se le ofrecié con asaz de discretas razones. (Cerv.)

He presented himself to her with rather reasonable words.

Tenia que decir muy poco 6 nonada. (S. Teresa.)
He had very little or nothing to say.

Traduccion. 10.

1. Yesterday I saw your friends and mine. I cannot at
once comply with his wishes and with hers. He wrote a
long letter to his relations and to hers. These are his flowers
and those are hers. Who are the gentlemen that come there?
They are the two merchants of whom I spoke to you. I
thank you for the kindness with which you have always
treated me. To him who is hungry, pleases (le gusta) every
meal. Have you thought of (en) what you have promised
me? Mr. Silvela lives at the beginning of the street in
which the house of (the) General Moya is situated (fr. hallarse).
You behave like a man (pronoun) who knows nothing. He
who flatters you, has probably the intention (fr. querer) to
cheat you. (The) one prefers (the) working, the other (the)
idleness. (The) one pretends this, the other something else.
These people are as you have depicted them to me. The
workman whose child is so ill, is (fr. finds himself) in the
greatest distress.

2. The tulips whose ‘colours are so brilliant, have no
smell. The girl whose aunt is a friend of mine, will now
live in our house. The boy whose godfather he is, gives
him much trouble (dar pena). He attentively observed the
members of the family, who were seven. The little girl
joyfully counted her dolls of which she had received four.
The house where we live, stands in the middle of a beautiful
garden. He had to pay seven hundred dollars, which sum
he could not raise for the moment. She asked her money
from him, from which reason he resolved to (4) sell his house.
You cannot imagine with how great a joy I accepted this
proposition. If you knew how much (lo bien) I love you,
Relative Pronouns. 253

you would not doubt (of) my sincerity. Now one could see,
how malicious the servant (f.) had been. I cannot picture
to you, how afflicted my mother was at this news.

Reading Exercise.

Roger de Lauria.
Continuacion.

Los sicilianos y aragoneses acometieron al instante las
costas de Calabria, y 4 vista de Regio se did la primera ba-
talla naval entre ellos y los franceses, siendo estos vencidos,
con pérdida de veinte y dos galeras y cuatro mil prisioneros.
Mandaba 4 la sazon la escuadra aragonesa, como almitante,
Don Jaime Perez, hijo natural del rey: Mevado del ardor
juvenil quiso embestir 4 Regio, contra la drden expresa de
su padre, y perdid en aquella faccion algunos soldados, sin
poder ganar la plaza; de lo que irritado el rey, le quité el
mando de la armada, y nombro por almirante de ella 4 un
caballero de su corte, llamado Roger de Lauria.

Era nacido en Scala*), pueblo situado en la costa occi-
dental de la Calabria superior; y su padre, Sefior de Lauria,
habia sido privado del rey Mantredo, y muerto 4 su lado en
la batalla de Benevento. Roger fué traido 4 Hspafia por su
madre Dofia Bella, ama de leche, segun unos, y dama, segun
otros, de la reina de Aragon Dofia Constanza, 4 quien vino
asistiendo cuando su cagamiento con Pedro III. Cridse en la
cémara de este principe; el rey Don Jaime le heredé en el
reino de Valencia; y por su educacion, y por las mercedes
que habia recibido, estaba incorporado 4 la nobleza aragonesa.
Los historiadores no sefialan los hechos y los méritos que le
sirvieron al empleo eminente 4 que fué elevado, y el diploma.
del rey no habla de otra cosa que de su probidad, de su
prudencia, y de su amor 4 los intereses de su corona. Asi
puede presumirse que la primera mitad de su vida nada
ofrecid & la curiosidad y al ejemplo; aunque es fuerza con-
fesar tambien que semejante obscuridad est’ ampliamente
compensada con el lustre que sus hazafias dieron 4 la segunda.

Conversacion.

éQué hicieron los sicilianos y aragoneses?
éDonde se did la primera batalla?
éQuiénes fueron vencidos?

éQuién mandaba la escuadra aragonesa?
éQué quiso hacer?

éQué hizo despues el rey irritado?

*) Asi consta de una carta latina que se conserva en el archivo
real de la Corona de Aragon, escrita por Roger al rey Don Jaime II.
254 Lesson 10.

éDonde habia nacido Roger de Lauria?

éQuién habia sido su padre?

éPor quién fué traido 4 Hspafia?

éQué no sefialan los historiadores ?

¢De qué habla solamente el diploma del rey? :
éQué se puede presumir de la primera mitad de su vida?
éQué dice el autor de semejante obscuridad?

Tenth Lesson.
Adverbs. The Negation.

In Less. 30, I. Part we have given all the rules
concerning adverbs derived from adjectives, and in the
following Lesson we enumerated the proper adverbs most
in use, i.e. those which are not derived from any other
part of speech.

Note. Adonde instead of donde, where? is now obsolete.
In modern speech it means only where-to, as: El lugar adonde
nos encaminamos, the place where we go to; whereas: el lu-
gar donde residimos, the place where we live.

Pordonde (French par ow) is written in one word, when
referring to a foregoing substantive, as:
La ciudad pordonde transitdbamos, the town through
which we passed.
‘Whereas:
Transitdbamos por donde nos pareciéd ménos denso el
gentio,
We passed where the crowd seemed less dense,

because here por donde does not refer to a preceding sub-
stantive.

Regarding the position of the adverb i. e. the place
which it occupies in the sentence, we add the following
rules:

1) Proper adverbs are placed after the verb and
before the direct complement i. e. the accusative case
{see Less. 15, II. P.; on the Complement). Thus:

Mi amigo no ha llegado todavia.
My friend has not yet arrived.

Su amigo de V. ha ganado siempre mucho dinero (here
mucho dinero is the direct complement).
Adverbs. Affirmation and Negation. 955

Observation. It must be distinctly understood, that, if
the verb is in a compound tense, the adverb can never be
placed between the auxiliary and the past participle, but
always follows the latter. A construction like: ha siempre
ganado, would therefore be erroneous.

2) Adverbial locutions, i. e. compounds of substantives,
adjectives etc. with prepositions, follow the direct comple-
“ment, as:

He leido su carta de V. con mucha atencion.
I have read your letter with great attention.

Here su carta de V. is the accusative, i. e. direct complement,
and con mucha atencion the adverbial locution, equivalent to a
proper adverb like muy atentamente (very attentively).

The above observations are understood of the regular
construction. As, however, the Spanish language abounds
in iversions, i. e. deviations from the regular con-
struction, many exceptions are met with in the works of
Spanish authors, because emphasis, euphony, distinctness,
and elegance of speech often require another arrangement
of the words, than that of the regular construction.

Affirmation and Negation.

The simplest affirmation is Si, yes. Si and no are
seldom used alone, but are generally accompanied by
sehor, senora, scfiorita, hijo, hija, hombre, mujer, amigo
etc. according to the degree of respect, or familiarity
between the speaker and the person spoken to. Instead
of Si the word ya (already) is also used as an affirmation
(like g¢a@ in Italian), if the speaker supposes that the
meaning of his answer is already known to the person
addressed, as:

Yes, I recollect. Ya me acuerdo.

The simple affirmation or negation is made more
emphatic by the addition of que, as:
I say neither Yes nor No.
No digo ni que si ni que no.
Note. The learner will not forget that, as we hinted
p. 184, the first negative particle mi may be omitted with
neither — nor, as:
V. no debe (ni) decirlo ni escribirlo.
You shall neither tell nor write it.
956 Lesson 10.

Observation. The pupil should carefully bear in mind
that the English practice of answering simply with “Yes, I
do” or “No, I do not” etc. is by no means admissible in
Spanish. Here the answer is either simply Si, Sefor or No,
Seior, or a complete sentence added to the negative particle, as:

Did you see my brother yesterday? Yes, I did.
No, I did not.

éHa visto V. ayer d mi hermano? Si, Seftor, le he visto.
No, Sefior, no le he visto.

Only the verbs ser, estar and hacer sometimes show a certain
resemblance, though only a seeming one, with the English con-
struction. Examples:

Are you the mother of this child? Yes, I am.
éEs V. la madre de este niiio? Si, la soy.

Are you ready? Yes, I am.

éEsté V. pronto? Si, estoy pronto.

Did the shoemaker make my shoes? Yes, he did.
¢Hizo el zapatero mis zapatos? Si, los hizo.

It is easily understood that in Spanish these verbs are not
auxiliaries, a8 in English, but principal verbs, governing their
own complements, which is not the case in English; and therefore
the English and Spanish constructions are totally different.

As we observed, Less. 31, I. P., in Spanish the ne-
gations never, nothing, none, nobody etc. require the
preceding particle mo. But this is only the case with
the regular construction. As soon as the negation itself
begins the sentence (by inversion), zo is omitted as
superfluous; thus:

No como jamas en esa fonda. I never eat at this inn.
Ese vil perezoso no hace nada.

This vile idler does nothing at all.

V. no verd hoy & nadie.

You will not see anybody to-day.

Whereas:

Jamas como en esta fonda.

A nadie le gusta recibir consejos.
Nobody likes to’ receive advice.

Nada me agrada. Nothing pleases me.

Note. If the English mo or not amy is rendered by nin-
guno or (no) alguno, the position of these two words should
be carefully observed. Ninguno always precedes, alguno follows
the accusative to which it belongs. Thus:

No le confiaré &@ V. ningun secreto, or:
> » > » » secreto alguno.
I shall not entrust you with any secret.
Affirmation and Negation. 257

No more, if the verb has an accusative (direct com-
plement), is ya no, as: Ya no tengo dinero, I have
no more money. If, on the contrary, the verb governs
no accusative case, it is no — més, as: I shall lie
(tell a falsehood) no more, no mentiré mds; or, rendered
more emphatic by the addition of nunca (never): yo no
mentiré nunca mas.

If no more (or not... any more) means as much as
“not again’, it may be rendered by no with the cor-
responding tense of volver with cd, as: I shall lie no
more, no volveré & mentir; do not come to my house
any more, no vuelvas a entrar en mi casa.

If only or but refers to a number, as: “I have only
siz dollars’, it is translated no — mds que, as:

I have but (only) ten dollars.
No tengo mds que diez duros. (Je wai que...)

In all other cases but (or only) is no -— sino, as:
I travel but rarely. No viajo sino rara vez.

NB. But and only are also rendered by solamente, sdélo,
meramente etc. In exclamations mas que is also met with, as:
i Mas que nunca vuelva!
If he but never returned! (God forbid, he might ever
return!)
Traduccion. 11.

1. Have the flowers not yet been brought by the gardener?
I beg your pardon, he (has) brought them already yesterday.
He always brings them in the morning, when he comes from
the garden. He has done his task with great assiduity. I
should have done mine better, if I had had more time. Are
you here at last? Yes, I am ready. How do you think about
(tr. what do you say of) this demand? I say neither Yes nor
No, for I do not know, whether Mr. Moreno is right or wrong.
I never got a letter from you, and I never (have) heard that
you had written to me. I never write in twilight, because I
am afraid to injure me eyes. Did you write to Mr. Marifio?
Yes, I did. Shall you come this evening? Yes, I shall. Are
you the tutor of these young gentlemen? Yes, I am. Never
shall I forget what you have done for me! Why do not these
young people work? They have nothing to do, because you
have not given them anything to do. I saw nobody, when
I entered the house.

2. Nobody has arrived by (con) (the) train. Tell
nobody that I have spoken with you. You are ‘a queer fel-

Spanish Grammar. 17
258 Lesson 10.

low, my dear friend; nothing pleases you, you do not feel
sympathy with anybody, you treat every one unkindly, and
yet you want every one to treat you (tr. that every one treat
[Subj.] you) politely and affectionately. I always avoid inter-
course (tr. the commerce) with a man that has no friend.
Have you some wine left (tr. still some wine)? I have no
more. You have cheated me; therefore I shall not believe
you any longer (more). Pardon me, Sir. I shall not do it
again (7. no more). I had but two hundred dollars. I write
only in the morning; in the evening I have no time to write.
Have you given him only 12 pesetas? He has not asked
for more; if he had asked for more, I should have given
him more.

Reading Exercise.
Roger de Lauria.
Continuacion.

Fué bien glorioso para el monarca aragones que su ene-
migo, no atreviéndose 4 hacerle frente en Sicilia, buscase
todos los pretextos de la politica para alejarle de alli. Carlos
le desafid personalmente, y Pedro aceptd el duelo, que debia
verificarse en Burdeos, autorizindole el rey de Inglaterra,
Sefior enténces de aquella parte de Francia. El papa Mar-
tino IV, tan adicto 4 los franceses como contrario les habia
sido su antecesor Nicolao, descomulgé al rey de Aragon, puso
entredicho en sus estados, y segun el extrafio derecho publico
que reinaba enténces en Europa, le privé de ellos, y did su
investidura & uno de los hijos del rey de Francia. Pedro
partid de Sicilia 4 conjurar esta nube: mas para asegurar 4
sus nuevos vasallos con la confianza do su proteccion, hizo
venir 4 la isla 4 la reina su esposa, y 4 Jaime y Fadrique
sus hijos; declaré por sucesor suyo en aquel estado al pri-
mero; y dejando 4 Lauria la instruccion sobre el orden que
habia de guardarse en el armamento de la escuadra que debia
defender 4 Sicilia, se hizo 4 la vela para Espafia.

Las aguas de Malta fueron el teatro de la primera vic-
toria de Roger. Tuvo aviso de que las galeras francesas na-
vegaban la vuelta de aquella isla, para socorrer la ciudadela
sitiada por los aragoneses, y al instante se dirigid con las
suyas & encontrarlas. Holldlas descuidadas en el puerto; y
aunque pudo acometerlas de improviso sin ser sentido, quiso
mas bien esperar el dia para la batalla, y les envid un es-
quife 4 decirles que se rindiesen, 6 se apercibiesen 4 la pelea.
Sin duda que quiso dar crédito 4 sus armas, manifestando 4
los enemigos que desdefiaba los medios da la astucia, y sdlo
queria servirse del esfuerzo; mas el éxito unicamente podia
absolver de temeraria esta bizarria, Eran las galeras enemigas
Proper Prepositions. 259

veinte, y las suyas diez y ocho: al rayar el dia embistieron
las unas con las otras, y pelearon con tanto teson y encar-
nizamiento, como si de aquella jornada dependiese la restitu-
cion de la Sicilia.
Conversacion.

éQué fué bien glorioso para el monarca aragones?

éQué hizo D. Carlos?

éEn donde debia verificarse el duelo?

éQuién era entdnces sefior de aquella parte de Francia?

éQué hizo el papa Martino IV?

éA quién did su investidura?

éQué hizo D. Pedro para asegurar 4 sus nuevos vasallos?

éA quién declard por sucesor suyo?

éQué dejéd 4 Lauria?

éQué aviso tuvo Roger de Lauria?

éDénde hallé las galeras francesas?

¢Las acometié de improviso?

éQué hizo decir 4 los franceses?

éCudl era el numero de las galeras?

éCémo fué la batalla?

Eleventh Lesson.

Prepositions.

As we stated in the I. Part, the Spanish prepositions
are either proper prepositions being simply placed before
the word to which they refer, as: sobre los montes, over
the mountains, or they are adjectives, substantives, par-
ticiples etc. coupled with a preposition, and thus properly
prepositional locutions. We consider first the

Proper Prepositions.
Among these d, de, en, para, and por offer the
greatest difficulty, and we therefore consider each of
them separately.

,

A, at, in, to etc.
1) The dominating idea of this preposition is direction,
aiming at a point, therefore motion, as:
Ir al correo, to go to the post.
Volverse al principe, to address one’s self to the prince.
2) Again, it implies the manner of an action or

state, as:

A mi modo, in my (own) way. 4
260 Lesson 11.

A la turca, after the Turkish fashion.
1 sangre fria, coolly, in cold blood.
Cara d@ cara, face to face.

3) Time and place of an action or state, as:
El mendigo esté é la puerta, the beggar stands at the door,
wl las diez, at ten o’clock.
Al anochecer, at nightfall.

4) The price of something, as:
A doce pesos la vara, 12 dollars the (Spanish) ell.

5) Instrument, means, and cause, as:
Matar 4 hierro, to kill with the sword (lit. iron),
A fuerza de armas, by dint of arms.
A instancias de sus amigos, at the request of his friends,
6) A with the infinitive replaces an accessory sentence
beginning with when or if, as:
A verla V. diria, if you could see her (or when you saw
her) you would say. [French: A la voir, vous dirieg.}
7) Besides, @ is met with in a great number of pecu-
liar expressions, mostly adverbial locutions, to be found
in every good dictionary. Such are:
A sabiendas, wittingly, purposely.
A ojos cerrados, blindfold (lit. with closed eyes).
A salga lo que saliere, at random, at hap-hazard.

De.
_1) De is frequently the opposite of d. Its predomina-
ting idea is possession, motion towards the speaker, ma-
terial, and origin. Examples:
El jardin de mi tio, the garden of my uncle.
Mi primo viene de Madrid, my cousin comes from M.
Un reloj de oro, a gold watch.
El hijo det capitan, the son of the captain.
2) Likewise, de denotes the cause of an action or state,
as:
Ciego de furor, blind with fury.
3) Extent:

Este cuarto tiene 16 piés de ancho y 12 de largo.
This room is 16 feet wide and 12 feet long.
Proper Prepositions. 261

4) Qualities belonging to a person under certain cir-
cumstances*), as:

Trabajar de sastre, to work as a tailor.
Hacer de intérprete, to officiate as an interpreter.

De is preferred, if a peculiar distinction of a person or
thing is denoted, as:
El hombre de la. capa verde, the man with the green coat.

La nifia de los ojos azules, the girl with the blue eyes.
Francoforte del Meno, Frankfort on the Main.

5) After the names of days, months, titles, dignities etc.
Examples:
La ciudad de Toledo, the city of Toledo.
El mes de enero, the month of January.
El titulo de conde, the title of count.
NB. With mountains and rivers de is only used, if the
attribution is a proper name or an appellative noun, as:
El rio de San Lorenzo, the river St. Lawrence.
El rio de la Plata, the river la Plata (silver).
If this is not the case, de is omitted, as:
El rio Duero, the river Duero.

6) It is a peculiarity of the Spanish language**), that
in exclamations a substantive is often joined by de to
the following proper name or appellative noun, denoting
a person, as:

j El pobre de Rocinante! Poor R.
{La loca de Elvira! That foolish E.!
j El ladron det***) criado! That thief of a footman!

7) With de are formed a great many locutions, as:
de balde, gratis; de miedo, for fear; de veras, in truth;
de verano, in summer; de camino, on the way etc.

8) The cases, where de is coupled with a foregoing
adjective, substantive, or verb, are so manifold, that we
refer the pupil to his dictionary. For those who are

*) Chiefly after the verb estar, as: Hl conde de R. esta de
embajador en Paris, count R. is ambassador at P.
**) In German likewise: ,Der Zilpel von Rutider!” Das
Sammerbild von Mtenfden!" Der Rader von Staat!"
*#%) With appellative nouns the article is commonly affixed
to de.
262 Lesson 11.

somewhat acquainted with the idiom, we recommend the
excellent work of V. Salva *),

En.

1) The dominating idea of this preposition is residence

in some place. It therefore denotes a state of repose, as:
Estoy en mi cuarto, I am in my room.
En su casa de V., in your house. _
Mi primo vive en Paris, my cousin lives at P.

2) It likewise denotes direction, but differs from the
synonymous 4 in so far, as it also conveys the secondary
idea of penetration into, as:

El criado entré en mi cuarto.

The footman entered (into) my room.
La piedra cae en el agua.

The stone falls into the water.

3) Moreover, en denotes an epoch at or within which
something happens, as:

En el mes de enero, in (the month of) January.
En el aio de 1880, in the year 1880.
En breve, in a short time.

Note. Em is not used, if a demonstrative adjective, a
numeral, or the definite article precedes the respective day of
the week, the month etc., as:

El diez de octubre, the 10th of October.
élra V. & ver & mi tio (el) miércoles?
Shall you come to see my uncle this Wednesday?

4) Again, en denotes the cause gas well as the purpose
of an action, as:

Lo hizo en provecho de su patria.

He did it for the benefit of his country.
Le maté en venganza del ultrage**).
He killed him in revenge of the offence.

Un discurso en. memoria del rey.
A speech in memory of the king.

5) The manner and kind of an occupation, as:
Se ocupa en cazar, he is busy with hunting.

*) The full title of Salv4’s Work is, Gramdtica de la lengua
castellana segun ahora se habla, ordenada por Don Vicente Salva;
Paris, Garnier Hermanos.

**) = “outrage” (French and English).
Proper Prepositions. 2638

Trabajar en plata, en oro, to work in silver, in gold.
Negociar en tabaco, to deal in tobacco.

6) En precedes the infinitive governed by a substantive
with haber (where the French use il y a), as:
Hay dificultad en decirlo.
There is a difficulty in telling it.
7) When before a substantive which occurs twice, it
denotes continuation or repetition, as: :

De dia en dia, from day to day.
De hora en hora, from hour to hour.

8) Finally, en is used after a great many adjectives
and verbs, of which we give those most in use. The
adjectives are: lento and tardo, slow; versado, versed,
experienced; exacto, exact; and the verbs: comerciar and
traficar, to deal, to transact; insistir, to insist; meditar,
to reflect; pensar, to think (of something); perseverar, to
persevere; tardar, to tarry; vacilar, to stagger, to totter;
alucinarse, to be mistaken; emplearse and ocuparse, to
occupy one’s self; mezclarse, to meddle with.

9) Idioms with en are:
En los espafoles, with the Spaniards (i. e. when living
in Spain).
Em voz baja, in a low voice.
Beber en una taza, to drink out of a cup (in a cup*) ete.

Traduccion. 12.

1. Shall you go (fut.) to the theatre to-night? No, I am
going to the concert and afterwards to my friend Bastinos’s
who gives a ball to-day (en casa de quien hay baile hoy). The
dog stood before the door and barked. At nightfall we arri-
ved at Madrid. The ladies were dressed after the English
fashion. I should like to speak with you (in private) face to
face. These cherries are sold (reflect.) (at) one real a pound.
At the prompting (d instancia) of my friends I have bought
the house. If one hears him, one thinks that he is right. I
should find the way to your house blindfold. Stay with
us for supper? He could not move for the cold. This tower
is (has) 200 feet high and 40 feet wide. His brother worked
long (tr. much time) as (a) joiner at Paris. We shall disguise
ourselves (disfrazarse) as gardeners, and go to the ball in
this costume. The president’s brother is (estar) interpreter

*) French: boire dans une tasse.
264 Lesson 11.

at the embassy at Athens. The girl with the fair hair has
spoken to the gentleman with the brown cloak. _

2. In the month of March he obtained the title of Mar-
quis. This rogue of a lawyer (has) made me pay two hun-
dred dollars. In my room you will find ink, pens, and paper.
Last year in (the month of) May we travelled to Paris. Ere
long (in a short time) I shall write to my cousin (f.). On
Tuesday there will be (habrd) a ball at the count’s. It is
generous to speak in behalf of the oppressed. You have done
it to your own damage. The merchant deals in sugar and
coffee, wine and oil. Why will you give vent (desfogar) to
your anger on me? I did not think of offending you. (There
was danger) it was dangerous (in speaking) to speak the truth
to a favourite. I am waiting from day to day, but there (is)
arrives no letter (forthcoming). He waited hour after hour
for the return of his friend. The just man is always slow
to punish. It is a disgrace, if one is not acquainted with (tr.
experienced in) the history of one’s country. Do you still
think of going (Infin.) to Italy? It is sometimes a dangerous
thing to meddle with other people’s affairs.

Reading Exercise.
Roger de Lauria.
Continuacion.

Medio dia era*) pasado, y aun duraba la accion, cuando
el general frances vid que sus galeras cedian, y se inclinaban
a huir. Llamdbase Guillermo Corner, y estaba dotado de un
valor extraordinario: encendido en safia por la flaqueza de
los suyos, quiso aventurarlo todo de una vez, y con denuedo
terrible acometiéd la capitana de Lauria. creyendo librada su
victoria en tomarla 6 destruirla. Aborddla por la proa: él
con una hacha de armas empezé 4 hacerse camino por medio
de sus enemigos, hiriendo y matando en ellos: Roger le salid
al encuentro, y los dos pelearon entre si con el esfuerzo que
los distinguia, y el furor que los animaba. En medio de su
refriega una azcona arrojada clava 4 Roger por un pié 4 las
tablas del navio, y una piedra derriba 4 Guillermo el hacha
que tenia en la mano: entdénces el general espafiol, que habia
podido desclavarse la azcona, la arrojé 4 su contrario, que
atravesado con ella, cayé sobre la cubierta sin vida. Su
muerto acabé de declarar la victoria por los nuestros, que con
diez galeras apresadas, rendidas las islas de Gozo, Malta y
Lipari, volvieron triunfantes 4 Sicilia.

Alzado con esta ventaja el dnimo 4 mayores cosas, Roger,
armando cuantas galeras habia en la isla, costed con ellas

*) They would now say: habia pasado.
The Prepositions continued. 265

toda la marina de Calabria, y se dirigid 4 Napoles, en cuyas
cercanias se puso como provocando al enemigo. Para més
irritarle se acercé 4 los muros, y lanzé sobre la ciudad toda
clase de armas arrojadizas. Despues recorrid la marina occi-
dental de Pausilipo, infestando la costa, saqueando los lugares,
y talando y destruyendo los jardines y vifiedos de la ribera.
Miraban los napolitanos desde sus murallas esta devastacion,
y ardian ya por salir 4 castigar la soberbia insolente de sus
contrarios. El rey Carlos no se hallaba alli enténces; mas el
Principe de Salerno, su hijo, 4 quien habia dejado el gobierno
del estado en su ausencia, ansioso de vengar aquella afrenta,
hizo armar los varones y caballeros que con él estaban; y
Ilenando de gente y pertrechos bélicos las galeras que habia
en el puerto, salid é1 mismo en persona en busca de los
nuestros. No concuerdan los historiadores en el nimero de
galeras que habia de una parte y otra, aunque todos afirman
que eran muchas mds las enemigas. Roger, viéndolas venir,
hizose 4 la vela, como que rehusaba el combate, para alejarlas
del puerto: lo cual visto por los napolitanos, les acrecentd el
orgullo en tal manera, que ya denostaban 4 los catalanes y
sicilianos, y les mostraban de léjos las sogas y cuerdas que
habian de servir 4 su esclavitud y 4 sus suplicios. Cuando
ya estuvieron en alta mar, saltd Roger en un esquife, y
recorriendo con él por los buques de su armada, exhortaba 4
los suyos 4 la pelea, y les sefialaba la pompa y la riqueza
de los varones y caballeros franceses, como despojos ciertos
de su aliento y su destreza: hecho esto volvid 4 subir 4 su
galera, puso con ligereza increible la escuadra en drden de
batalla, y partid furiosamente 4 encontrar con la enemiga.

Conversacion.
éQué vid el general frances?
éComo se llamaba él?
éQué quiso hacer?
éQué hizo Roger?
éEn qué manera fué herido Roger?
éQué hizo enténces el general espafiol?
éQué fué la consecuencia de la muerte del frances?
éEn donde se puso enténces Roger?
éQué hizo para mds irritar al enemigo?
éCon qué sentimientos miraban los napolitanos esta de-
éQuién se hallaba en Ndpoles? [vastacion ?
éQué hizo el principe de Salerno?
éCudl fué el ntiimero de las galeras?
iPor qué hizose 4 la vela Roger?
éCudl fué el efecto de este estratajema (stratagem)?
éQué hizo Roger, cuando los napolitanos estuvieron en
alta mar?
266 The Prepositions continued.

Twelfth Lesson.

The prepositions continued.
Para and Por, for by, through etc.

As we observed I. P. page 20, these prepositions are
easily confounded; it is therefore of importance to dis-
tinguish them carefully. The principal difference is, as
we said, that para denotes an exterior purpose, whilst
por indicates the instrinsic motive of an action. Thus para
is used:

1) To indicate destination and purpose, advantage and
prejudice, as:

Este libro es para ti.

This book is for you (destined for you).

Partiré para Espana, I shall set out for Spain.
La casa esté para vender, the house is to be sold.
Lo he hecho para un amigo.

I have done it for (the benefit of) a friend.

Lo hizo para engaharme.

He did it in order to deceive me.

NB. After ir (to go) dé should be preferred; after partir
and salir, to depart, to set out, hacer vela, to set sail, a like-
wise obtains, but para is preferable, as:

Ir & Inglaterra, to go to England.

Salgo para Madrid, I start for Madrid.

Hizo vela para Mdlaga, he sailed for Malaga.
Partir para (seldom &) Inglaterra, to set out for E.

2) To denote the time, when an action will be per-

formed or something will happen, as:
V. me pagard para San Juan.
You will pay me on St. John’s day (Midsummer).
Para siempre), for ever.

3) Frequently para restrains the meaning of the
predicate to a certain subject or object, as:
Lengo para imi, I for my part am of opinion.
El general leyo la relacion para st.
The general read the report to himself (in private).
4) “In proportion” or “‘comparatively” is commonly
rendered by paru, as:
El nifio es pequetio para su edad.
The child is small for its age.

*) But also: Por siempre.
The Prepositions continued. 267

NB. Para should be preceded by con, if the comparison
lies between two different subjects, as:

What are you in comparison to your brother!
i Quién eres tt para con tu hermano!
Para con likewise signifies for or towards, with reference

to a person*), as:

No tengo reserva para con mi madre.

For my mother I have no secret. ;

Era muy paternal su conducta para con Francisco.

To Francis he behaved very much like a father.

If “in proportion” or “proportionally” is not followed by
a substantive, but by an accessory sentence, para lo que is
employed, as:

V. no pagé el sombrero para lo que vale.
You have. not paid for the hat in proportion to what
it is worth.

5) Coupled. with estar, the preposition para denotes
that something is impending**), as:

Estamos para salir, we shall go out directly.
Estoy para acabar, I shall have done presently.

6) Frequently para is joined to an infinitive or par-
ticiple, in lieu of an accessory sentence denoting condi-
tion, as:

Para decir verdad no he visto a V.

To speak the truth (= if I shall speak the truth), I
have not seen you.

Es dificil para aprendido de memoria.
It is difficult to learn by heart.
If para with the infinitive does not replace an ac-
cessory sentence, it means ‘in order to”, as:
Para escribir es menester .. .
In order to write, it is necessary .. .
Por denotes:
1) The instrinsic motive or the criterion of an action, as:

La mujer lo hizo por vanidad.
The woman did it from vanity.
Lo sé por experiencia, I know it by experience.
NB. Where por denotes purpose, the preposition para
may be used in its stead, as:

*) Where the French often use vis-d-vis and envers.
**) In Italian essere per or essere in procinto, sul punto di...
268 Lesson 12.

Callaré por (or para) no dar disgusto d V.
I shall be silent, that I may not vex you.
2) A certain quality attributed to a person or a
thing, as:
Tomar la mar por patria, to take the sea for one’s home,
Recibir & uno por maestro, to take one as a tutor.
Tener & uno por docto, to consider a person to be
learned.
3) The price of anything, barter, or in general an
act of exchange, as:
éCudnto pide V. por este sombrero?
How much do you ask for this hat?
Compré mi casa por 10000 duros ?
I bought my house for 10000 dollars.
No daré mi lapiz por tu pluma.
I shall not give my pencil for your pen.
Trabajo por mi amigo.
I work in place of my friend.
Trabajo para mi amigo, would be: I work in behalf
of my friend.
4) A certain place, direction as well as repose, as:
Pasar por la calle, to go through the street.
Fut por Paris a Londres.
I went by Paris to London.
Echar por tierra, to throw to the ground.
Perdi mi dinero por esta calle.
I lost my money in this street.

5) Por used with the passive voice*) indicates the
means and is translated by by or through, as:

Fué matado por una punalada.
He was killed by a thrust with a poniard (he was
stabbed).

With the active verb, por has the same signification, as:
Matd & su enemigo por una punalada.
He killed his enemy by a thrust with the poniard.
If the English passtve voice is rendered by the reflec-
tive verb, por should be used, as:

Aquel busto se hizo por un gran escultor.
That bust was made by a great sculptor.

*) Generally speaking, por is an equivalent for the French
par, whereas para corresponds to pour.
The Prepositions continued. 269

6) Again, por denotes time, answering to the ques-
tions “when?” and “how long?” as:
Por la tarde, la manana, la noche. ~
In the afternoon, the morning, the night.
Hemos hablado por una hora.
We talked for an hour.

He prestado & V. el tibro por wna semana.
I lent you the book for a week.

7) Certain members of the body may be denoted by
por, as:
Coger por la mano, to seize by the hand.
Asir por el brazo, to seize by the arm.
El perro cogiéd el toro por la oreja.
The dog seized the bull by the ear.

8) Por frequently answers to the question how? thus
implying manner or means, as: :
Por orden alfabético, in alphabetical order.
Por fuerza, on compulsion.
Lo supo por el criado, he knew it from the servant.
Marchar por diez, to march ten (men) deep.

9) Por often corresponds to the English for, when
it means im favour of, as:

Combatir por la patria, to fight for one’s country.

10) After verbs importing motion, as ir, enviar etc.,
por indicates the object of the motion, as:

Ir por pan, to go for bread.
Enviar por el vidriero, to send for the glazier.

11) Whilst estar para implies an impending futurity,
something about to happen, estar por expresses that some-
thing will happen at some may be rather distant period, as:

Las peras estin por madurar, the pears are not yet
ripe (i. e. must still ripen).

Las casas estan por alquilar*), the houses must first
be let (they are at present not yet let); on the
other hand:

Las casas estan para alquilar, the houses are to let
(they can be had at any moment).

(See under para No. 5).

*) Estar por used with the 1. person, expresses a desire of
, this person to do something, as:

Estaba por bofetear al palurdo.

I had a mind to give the impudent fellow a box on the ear.
270 Lesson 12.

12) With an adjective, por corresponds to the Eng-
lish “however”, and requires the subjunctive of the verb
following with que, as:

Por hermosa que sea esta senora.

However beautiful this lady may be.

Por grandes que sean los reyes, Dios es superior G ellos.
However great kings may be. God is greater than they.

13) Por with the infinitive mood, is an equivalent

for an accessory sentence denoting cause, as:

Por ser yo tu amigo, as1 am your friend (being y. f).

Se le recompensard por haber cumplido con su obligacion.

He will be rewarded for having done his duty. (because

he etec.).

Here just as in the example under n. 1:

(Callaré por no dar disgusto a V.)
por expresses the reason, and the whole infinitival sentence
takes the place of a single substantive, as is frequently the
case in Spanish by Lesson 21, I.

Traduccion. 13.

1) On para. Are these flowers for thee or for thy sister?
This garden is not to be sold (active voice). Shall you travel
to France or to Italy? I do not say the word, that I may
not betray myself (tr. me). Do you go to Toledo or to Madrid?
I shall go to Madrid. He has bid me farewell for ever. I
shall write to you at Christmas, if you are still at Paris then.
The girl read the letter by herself. I find that it is little
money for (in comparison with) such great pains (sing.). What
is the creature in comparison with the creator? I am a
beggar in comparison with that prince of the exchange. For
(one’s) friends one must not have secrets. What he spends
(gastar) is little in comparison with what he earns. We were
on the point of (leaving) departing by (the) rail (road), when
we got your letter. I was on the point of setting out, when
your aunt arrived. I do as much as I can, in order to gain
the esteem of my equals (mis semejantes). For being (i. e.
considering it was) sung by heart, the song was very cor-
rectly performed. If I am to speak my mind (ér. to speak
freely), the comedy did not please me. — In order to please,
it is necessary to be amiable and good-natured. He who
works for his family is an honest man.

2) On por. He acted thus from pride and supercilious-
ness. For God’s sake (por amor de...), do not speak in this
way! One might think that you said so only from envy. In
order to (give) do my friend (a) pleasure, I at once im-
The. Prepositions continued. 271

parted (to) him this guod news. He may say what he pleases
(what he will), I shall not believe him. The Count has
adopted his nephew as [a] son. I sold my library for 800
dollars. I gave him my Cervantes for his Lope de Vega.
This morning (on passing by) when I passed the great square,
I met my tailor who had promised (me) to bring my new
coat yesterday. Why (did) have you thrown the glass on the
ground? I did it by accident. He wounded the boy by a
blow with the knife. We were invited to (the) dinner by
the aid-de-camp of the prince. The works of this poet are
admired by everybody. I have lent him the money for two
months. He seized me by the shoulder, and pretended that
I had taken the money. You must not take the dog by the
tail, else he will bite you. With mildness we- often obtain
more than with severity. I knew of your arrival from my aunt.
The soldiers marched six deep. Do you go for wine or for
beer? Send for the physician; the child is ill. The house
and the garden are to be sold. The linen must still dry.
However rich (the) men be, they are seldom satisfied. How-
ever nice this child be, it also has its faults. I was just going
to give him a piece of my mind (fr. make him some down-
right observation), when he humbly begged my pardon. As
there is [a] great deal (copia) of wine in this country, the
commerce in this article is very lively.

Reading Exercise.

Roger de Lauria.
Continuacion.

Trabése el combate, que ya por las fuerzas que concur-
rian, ya por la animosidad de los combatientes, ya por las
consecuencias importantes que tuvo, fué el mds ilustre de los
que hasta enténces se habian dado por mar en aquel tiempo.
Animaba 4 los nuestros el deseo de conservar el dominio y
gloria recientemente ganados, miéntras que los franceses ardian
en ansia de vengar las afrentas y dafios recibidos. Embestianse
con furor, procurando romper con el impetu y la fuerza la
muralla que oponian los contrarios; y aferradas las galeras
por las proas revolvianse de una parte 4 otra 4 buscar el lado
en que mds pudiesen ofender, sin que en tal conflicto y en
semejante cercania se disparase tiro que no fuese mortal.
Pero aunque Jas fuerzas del principe eran superiores 4 las de
Roger, se vid muy desde el principio del combate cuanta
ventaja Ilevaban los soldados practicos en las maniobras na-
vales 4 los cortesanos y caballeros, poco ejercitados en ellas.
Algunas de las galeras enemigas, que pudieron desasirse, to-
maron la vuelta de Nadpoles con el genoves Enrique de Mar,
que logré al fin escaparse. Volaron 4 su alcance las catalanas,
272 Lesson 12.

y tomaron diez de ellas con todos los guerreros que contenian.
Roger, desde su navio, animaba 4 los suyos al seguimiento,
y cuando los sentia flaquear los amenazaba furioso, $1 dejaban
escapar la presa. Entretanto se peleaba terriblemente al rede-
dor de la galera de Capua, donde iba el principe de Salerno.
Alli estaba la mejor gente, alli los mas bravos caballeros:
unidos, apifiados entre si, formaban un muro delante de su
caudillo; y peleando desesperados, contrastaban la industria
y esfuerzo de los nuestros, y ponian en balanzas la victoria,
Roger, cansado de esta resistencia, mandé barrenar la galera,
y desfondarla para echarla 4 pique: entdénces el principe, te-
meroso ya de su muerte, le hizo amar, y le entregd su
espada, pidiéndole la vida y la de los que iban con él. Roger
le did la mano, y le pasd & su galera, quedando hechos al
mismo tiempo prisioneros el general de la escuadra enemiga
Jacobo Brusson, Guillermo Stendardo, y otros ilustres caba-
lleros italianos y provenzales.

Ganada la batalla, los nuestros, fieros con el suceso,
dieron la vuelta & Ndpoles, y presentdndose delante de la
ciudad con toda la arrogancia de su triunfo, empezaron 4
excitarla 4 la sedicion y 4 la novedad. Tumultudronse los
moradores, unos por miedo, otros con deseo de sacudir el
yugo frances, y en altas voces gritaban: / Viva Roger, muera
Carlos! Costé mucho afan & los ciudadanos, amigos del drden,
contener esta agitacion; y Roger, perdida la esperanza de
que el movimiento siguiese, hizo vela para Mesina. Entre tanto
en la isla de Capri mando cortar la cabeza 4 dos caballeros
de los que se habian rendido, por desertores del partido
aragones: ejemplo de rigor, que desluce el lustre de su vic-
toria, por mds que se autorizase en la necesidad del escar-
miento. Mas noble accion fué la de pedir al principe que
pusiese en libertad 4 la infanta Beatriz, hermana de la reina
Constanza, custodiada en prision desde la muerte de Manfredo
su padre. Con ella y con sus prisioneros entré triunfante en
Mesina, y se presentdé 4 la reina; que para disminuir al prin-
cipe la humillacion vergonzosa de su situacion, tuvo la aten-
cion delicada de alejar 4 los infantes sus hijos al tiempo de
recibirle. Despues mandd que se le custodiase en el castillo
de Matagrifon, y en la misma fortaleza hizo guardar 4 todos
los caballeros de su comitiva.

Conversacion.

éPor qué fué este combate el mas ilustre de los que se
habian dado por mar en aquel tiempo?

éQué deseo animaba 4 los espafioles?

éCual fué la intencion de los franceses?

éQué vidse muy desde el principio del combate?
Prepositions. 273

éQué hicieron algunas de las galeras enemigas?
éQuiénes volaron 4 su alcance?

éQué hizo Roger desde su navio?

éDdéne estaba la mejor gente?

éComo pelearon?

éQué manddé Roger, cansado de esta resistencia?
éQué hizo enténces el principe ?

?En qué manera fué recibido por Roger?
éQuiénes quedaron hechos prisioneros?

éQué hicieron entdnces los espafioles?

éQué escenas se vieron en Napoles?

éPor qué mandé Roger cortar la cabeza 4 dos caballeros?
éQué dice el autor de este ejemplo de rigor?
¢Cudl fué mds noble accion suya?

éQué atencion delicada tuvo la reina?

éDonde hizo guardar 4 los prisioneros?

Thirteenth Lesson.
Prepositions.
(Conclusion.)

We now add the other simple prepositions in their
alphabetical order. They are:

1) Ante, before, i. e. in presence of, as: ante el rey,
in. presence of the king; ante sus ojos, before his eyes.
Ante denotes time and order only in ante todo or ante
todas cosas, before any other thing, before all.

Aquende (obsol.), here, on this side, and allende, there, on the
other side, are properly adverbs and are not used as prepositions,
as: Aquende el mar, on this side of the sea; allende el rio, on
the other side of the river. (Allende de is quite antiquated. It
means more than = ademas de etc.).

2) Contra, against, implies opposition or resistance,
as:
No hay remedio contra la muerte.
There ig no remedy against death.
It rarely refers to place, as:
Mi casa esté contra el (better frente al) palacio.
My house is situated opposite the palace.
3) Desde, from, is the contrary of hasta (see 6)
and denotes the point of departure, as:
Desde Paris hasta Viena, from Paris to Vienna.
Spanish Grammar. 18
OTA Lesson 13.

Desde may be used of time as well as place:
Desde ayer; from yesterday (till. . .).

NB. If not the point of departure, but duration, is intended,
de is used. instead of desde; in which case to is rendered by a:
e. g. from 3 to 4, de las tres & las cuatro.
4) Entre, among, between, from, denotes space,
time, and number (French parm), as:
Entre hoy y ayer, between to-day and yesterday.
Entre doce y veinte, from (between) twelve to twenty,
Entre el jardin y la casa, between’the garden and house.
5) Hacia, towards, denotes direction, but without
the accessory idea of aim; also an approximative tume, as:
Hicia el poniente, towards the west.
Hacia medianoche, towards midnight.
6) Hasta, till, as far as, denotes a certain aim, as:
Hasta el mar, to the sea.
Hasta las once, till 11 o’clock.
NB. When used as an adverb, hasta means even, as:
Hasta las mujeres pelearon, even the women fought.
Hasta no més signifies to the utmost.

7) Segun, according to, conformably, agreeably,
expresses the conformity of a circumstance, as:
Segun las historias, conformably to the histories.
Segun las circunstancias, according to circumstances.
8) Sin, without, differs from the English preposition
in so far, as it may never be used as an adverb:
Sin duda, without doubt.
9) S6, under, is now almost obsolete, and occurs
in but few locutions, as:
S6 capa, sd color, sé pretexto, under pretext.
Sé pena, upon pain of ....
10) Sobre, on, upon, denotes height and superiority,
in the proper sense as well as figuratively, as:
Sobre la mesa, on the table.
Sobre todos los vicios, worse than all vices.
Sobre cien duros, more than a hundred dollars.
When used with the names of places, it likewise
denotes vicinity, as:

Anochecer sobre Valladolid.
To arrive at nightfall near Valladolid.
Improper Prepositions. 275

Lil rey D(on) Sancho murié sobre Zamora.
King Sancho died before (i. e. at the siege of) Zamora.

Moreover, it expresses the subject of a book, an essay
etc., as:
Un libro sobre la inmortalidad del alma,
A book on the immortality of the soul.
A higher rate of something, as:
Sobre et salario, over and above the salary.

A security or warrantship, as:
Creer sobre palabra, to believe upon (one’s) word.

A repetition with the accessory idea of reinforcement, as:
, Escribir carta sobre carta, to write letter after letter.

And finally an approximative time, as:
Sobre tarde (= hacia la tarde), towards evening.

11) Tras, behind, after, implies time and space, as:

Tras los montes, behind the mountains.
Tras el verano viene el otono.
After (behind) the summer comes the autumn.

Improper Prepositions.

These words are originally either adjectives or sub-
stantives with prepositions or adverbs. With the sole
exception of bajo (see 2), they all require de after them.
They are:

1) Antes, before, denotes time and order, as:

Antes del otowo, before autumn.

antes del dia, before daybreak.

dntes del rey, before the king (e. g. marching before

the king).
2) Bajo, under, underneath, below, beneath, as:

Bajo protesto, under protest.

Bajo la rodilla, beneath (under) the knee.

NB. Bajo may be followed by de, as:

Bajo del brazgo, under the arm.

3) Delante de..., before, of space, but also in pre-
sence of, as:

Delante de testigos, before witnesses.

Delante de la puerta, before the door. i
276 Lesson 138.

4) Dentro de..., within, as:
Dentro de las murailas, within the walls.
Dentro de si mismo, within him- (her-, it-) self.
Dentro de ocho dias, within a week (8 days).

5) Despues de, after, behind, imports time and order, as:

Despues de sus dias, after his death. :
Uno despues det otro, one after another; one behind the
other.

(The adj. despos instead of despues is obsolete.)
6) Encima de, on, upon, as:

Encima de la mesa, on (upon) the table.
Encima de la carta, above (upon) the letter.

7) Fuera, without, beside, as:
Fucra de la puerta, without the door.

Fuera de hora, out of time.
Estar fuera de si, to be beside one’s self.

As we observed when speaking of para con (p. 267),
a preposition may be coupled with another preposition,
in order to modify the original idea. Thus:

,

De d, each of, as: Dos barriles de a cien libras, two casks,
each of 100 pounds.

De debajo, from under, as: De debajo la mesa, from under
the table.

De entre, from between, as: De entre las piedras, from
between the stones.

De hacia, from, as: De hdcia los montes, from the moun-
tains (i. e. in the direction from the m.).

Por entre, between, as: Por entre la reja, between the
trellis or grating (direction).

Por encima de, over, as: Por encima de la mesa, (to pass,
to throw etc.) over the table.

Por detras de, from behind, as: Por detras del drbol, from
behind the tree.

Traduccion. 14.

1. He dare not (no se atreve) (to) appear before my
eyes! Before all things I tell you that you are mistaken.
The maniac thrust (did) (with) his (tr. the) head against the
wall. Quinine is an excellent remedy against fever. He has
married the lady against the desire of his family. I accom-
panied him from his house to the bridge. We must suffer
from the cradle to the grave. Even among robbers there
Improper Prepositions. 277

is still a law. There is a great difference between thee and
thy father. There came between (from) 50 to 60 soldiers.
The suburb is situated towards [the] west. Go on (adelante)*);
there you will find room enough. Towards 9 o’clock I shall
come home. We stayed with your brother till 8 o'clock,
Lo meet soon again! (hasta luego). Even the children laughed
at the nonsense (which) he told us. One must always act
conformably to (the) circumstances. In consequence of the
treaty, the town belongs to the king. According to the law,
he deserves a severe punishment. Your father will be now
above 70 years old (tendré). That is insipid beyond [all]
measure (manera). (The) vice exercises a great dominion
(dominio, m.) on (the) man. Is this a book about hunting
or about fishing? The church is built in (sobre) the Gothic
style. Besides their salary, the actors sometimes receive a
special payment (i. e. gratification), if they perform (trabajar).
He lent me 10 dollars on my ring.

2. We sent one messenger after another, but he did
not come. Beyond (tr. behind) the mountains there are also
people, my dear friend. Why do not you shut the door
behind you? Ihave come even (ér. still) before the appointed
time. Three pages walked before the duke. The garrison
did not surrender on (ér. under) such conditions. The soldier
was wounded below the elbow. What shall you do before
the trellis? He confirmed the truth before witnesses. Do
write to me within a fortnight (¢r. 15 days)! Within my
house I am king. After an absence of seven years I returned
(fr. volver) to Vienna. After the Po, the Tiber is the greatest
river of Italy. Put the books on the chest of drawers! Do -
you see that little bird on the roof? God be thanked, now
we are out of danger! He tugged the dog from under the
bed. The thunder-storm came from the direction (de hdcia)
of Valencia. The robber stepped forth from behind a column.

Reading Exercise.
Roger de Lauria.
Continuacion.

Vidse enténces un acontecimiento, que manifiesta la ne+
cesidad de respetar la justicia en la victoria, y el peligro de
ultrajar insolentemente 4 los pueblos. El de Sicilia, 4 pesar
de los triunfos y victorias que conseguia, guardaba vivo en
su memoria el mal que habia recibido de los franceses.
Creyeron los sicilianos que aquellos barbaros, que tan indigna-
mente abusaron de sus antiguas victorias, no merecian estar

*) “Adelante con juico (= judgment)!” == “Drive on cau-
tiously! — words of Ferrer, the governor of Milan, to his coach-
man during the riot (Manzoni, “Promessi sposi”).
978 Lesson 18.

al abrigo del derecho de gentes; y amotindndose furiosos,
rompieron los encierros donde se guardaban los prisioneros,
y antes que los magistrados pudiesen atajar el alboroto, ya
eran muertos mds de sesenta de aquellos infelices. No con-
tentos con esta demostracion tumultuaria, se juntaron en
Mesina los sindicos de las ciudades, y en Cortes generales de
la isla decretaron que el principe cautivo debia pagar con su
cabeza la muerte que su padre habia ejecutado en Conradino,
Cuando Carlos de Anjou hizo morir 4 este principe, estaba
bien léjos de pensar que llegaria un dia en que su hijo y
heredero se veria tratado con la misma severidad; y que en
tal aprieto sdlo deberia la vida 4 la generosa hija de aquel
Manfredo, 4 quien despues de vencido y muerto habia tratado
tambien con una barbdrie sin ejemplo. Con efecto, la reina
Constanza hizo entender 4 los feroces sicilianos que un negocio
tan grave no podia tratarse sin conocimiento del rey Don
Pedro; y al mismo tiempo mando trasladar al prisionero 4
otra fortaleza mds segura, donde estuviese guarecido de todo
insulto popular. Asi le salvé, gandndose con esta accion
magndnima la veneracion de su siglo y (de) la posteridad, al
paso que con ella hacia mds detestable la conducta sanguinaria
del rey Carlos, condenado 4 la infamia en todos los tiempos
y por todos los escritores.

Tres dias despues de la derrota de su hijo llegé 4 Gaeta
con grande refuerzo de galeras y gente de guerra, al tiempo
que Ndpoles estaba alterada de resultas de aquel suceso. In-
dignése tanto, que tuvo propdsito de entegar la ciudad 4
las llamas y duré mucho tiempo en él, hasta que 4 ruegos
“del legado del Papa se templdo algun tanto, y se content
con hacer perecer en los suplicios ciento cincuenta ciudadanos
de los mds culpados. Despues, sin entrar alli, se dirigid con
todas sus fuerzas 4 la Calabria para cobrar todo lo que los
aragoneses habian ganado en la costa, y hacer la guerra 4
Sicilia.

Conversacion.

éQué acontecimiento vidse enténces?

éQué guardaba vivo en su memoria el pueblo de Sicilia?
éQué creyeron los sicilianos?

éQué hicieron?

éEstuvieron contentos con esta demostracion tumultuaria?
éQué decretaron en Cortes generales de la isla?

éQué no habia jamas pensado Carlos de Anjou?

éQué hizo entender la reina Constanza 4 log sicilianos?
éPor qué mando trasladar al prisionero 4 otra fortaleza?
éQué se gand con esta accion magndnima?

¢Cudndo llegé el'rey 4 Gaeta?
Conjunctions. 279

éQué propdsito tuvo?
éCon qué se contentd?
éCon qué intencion se dirigiéd despues 4 la Calabria?

Fourteenth Lesson.

Conjunctions.

According to their signification the conjunctions are
divided into two general classes:

1. Coordinative and
2. Subordinative conjunctions.

The former are subdivided into:
a) Copulative (copulativas). They are:

Y (é, see Less. 30, I. P.), and; tambien, also; ni,
nor, and not; ni — ni, neither — nor, tampoco, nor —
either.

Note. Ni is used after a negation, as:

No quiere comer ni beber.

He will neither eat nor drink.

If, however, an affirmation precedes, ‘“‘and not” should
be rendered by que no, as:

Hablo & tu hermano, que no & ti.
I speak to your brother and not to you.

b) Disjunctive (disyuntivas); 6 (%, see Less. 30, I. P.),
or; 6 — 6, sea — 6 (sea — sea), either -— or:

c) Adversative (adversativas); aunque (bienque),
though, although; awncuando, even if, although, albeit;
mas, pero, but, yet; sino*), but; sin embargo, no obstante,
no por eso, con todo, nevertheless, notwithstanding; sdlo
que, slo si que, only that. :

Observations. 1) Pero is “but”. This word is used at
the beginning of the sentence and requires an affirmation
preceding, as:

Somos los servidores del rey, pero no sus esclavos.
We are the king’s servants, but not his slaves.

2) On the contrary, sino*) should be used, if a negation

precedes, as:

*) Sino, but, must not be confounded with si no, else.
280 Lesson 14.

La buena crianza no es obra de la naturalvza, sino el
fruto de una buena educacion.
Good behaviour is no work of nature, but the result of
a good education.
No — sino corresponds to the English but or only, as:
No viene sino raramente, he comes but seldom (Ital.
Non viene se non raramente).

No espero sino que te vayas, I only wait till you are
gone. As seen by this example, the principal sentence should
likewise be negative.

Sino should be followed by que, if this conjunction
introduces a whole sentence, as:

No sélo habla bien, sino que escribe muy elegantemente.
He does not only speak well, but he also writes very
elegantly.

Sino que also means if, or as, but in this case the ex-
pression cannot be rendered literally in English, as:

éComo puede V. pensar que venda mi casa? Sino que
la tengo solamente un ano.

How can you suppose that I shall sell my house, if I
have it only this twelvemonth?

3) Mas denotes either opposition to what immediately '' '

precedes, or a consequence differing from that which one
might have expected, as:
Lo dice Tacito, mas no convienen con él los otros
historiadores.
Tacitus says so, but the other historians do not agree
with him.
Mas no porque las ciencias sean el primero, deben ser
el unico objeto de vuestro estudio.
But although the sciences be the first object of your
study, they must not be the only one.

d) Conditional (condicionales); sz, if; como, as;
cuando, when; con tal que, provided that, on condition
that, if only... .

Note. Si requires the subjunctive of the condicional or
imperfecto, if the condition appears only possible or dubious, as:

Si estudiaras (estudiases), te quisiera mucho mis.
If you would study (learn), I should love you (much)
more.

In this case the sentence expressing the condition may
be contracted into an infinitive with d, as:

A ser esto asi, yo lo consentiria.
If it were so (it being so), I should consent.
Conjunctions. 281

If, on the contrary, the condition appears as something
certain or universally known, the indicative follows, as:
Si aspiras d ser docto, estudia.
Study, if you wish to be learned.
Como, when signifying if, requires the subjunctive, as:
Como aprendas la leccion, la sabrds.
If you learn your lesson, you will know it.

e) Causative (causales); porque, because; pues (pues
que), as, since; puesto que (supuesto que), because, as if;
que, for, as ete.

Observation. Pues supposes the reason to be already
known, which is not the case with porque*), as:

Iré contigo, pues**) lo quieres.

I shall go with you, since you wish it.

No pude asistir 4 la funcion, porque estaba ausente.

I could not assist at the solemnity, because I was

absent.

Puesto que, as well as con tal que, imports a supposition,
and commonly requires the subjunctive mood, as:

Puesto (supuesto) que te favorezcan, muéstrate agradecido.

If they favour you, show yourself thankful.

Diviértete, con tal que cumplas con tu obligacion.

Enjoy yourself, provided you do your duty.

Very often pues corresponds to the English well, well
now, why, only etc. with a question or a command, and fre-
quently it expresses opposition, being rendered by yet, never-

. theless etc. Examples:
Pues gcomo he de salir? Well, how shall I get out?
i Pues digaselo V.! Only tell him so!
Dice que no tiene dinero, pues le he dado ayer 10 duros.
He says that he has no money; yet I gave him 10
dollars yesterday.

The conjunctions ya (si), es que, si es que, and si must
often be periphrased in English, as a literal translation would
be impossible. Ex.:

i ¥a (or si) lo dije! Did not I say so!
i Si hablé con ella ayer!
I spoke with her but yesterday!

*) French puisque and parce que. Ital. poiché and perché.
**) If pues indicates the reason subsequently, it is often ren-
dered by for, as: :
No puedo creer d V. pues ha mentido.
I cannot believe you, for you have told me a falsehood.
982 Lesson 14.

iEs que se lo dije esta manana!
This very morning I told him so!

These sentences are all more or less exclamative, and
either confirm or contradict what has been said before.

f) Continuative (continuativas); asi, so, thus; ast que,
so that; demas de (a mds de), besides; entre tanto, mean-
while; pues, thus; lwego, con que, por (de) consiguiente,
therefore, consequently.

Note. Lwuego, like the Latin ergo and the French donc,
draws a conclusion from what precedes, as:

Pienso, luego existo, I think, therefore I exist*),

Con que**) and por consiguiente express the same
idea, but less positively. In conversation, con que seldom
introduces a proper logical conclusion, but rather sums
up what has been going before, as:

iCon que, hasta luego! well then, I hope to see you
soon again! [In French: Sur cela, je vous salue!]

iCon que, vendré d& las ocho!

Well, so I shall come at eight o’clock!

g) Comparative (comparativas); asi, so, thus; como,
how, as.

h) Conclusive (finales); porque, para que, & fin que,
so that, that.

Subordinative Conjunctions.
To these belong que, that, and segun with the signi-
fication: as, in conformity, agreeably etc, as:
Dice que no quiere venir conmigo.
He says that he will not come with me.
Habla, segun lo entiende.
He speaks as he understands it.

Observation. As in Italian, que often immediately follows
a past participle, in which case it replaces a compound con-
junction, like lwego que, despues que etc., the arrangement
of words being inverted. Thus:
Dicha que fué esta palabra.
(Ital.: Detta che fu questa parola.)

Scarcely had this word been uttered.
The regular order would be:

Luego que esta palabra fué dicha.

*) Cogito, ergo sum.
**) German alfo.
Subordinative Conjunctions. 283

In the first sentence, dicha is feminine, because it must
agree with the following subject in gender and number (see:
‘The passive voice).

Again, ‘‘when” and “as”, referring to an adverb or ad-
verbial phrase of time immediately preceding, are rendered
by que. In English, the present participle is frequently
introduced, the conjunction being omitted as:

Un dia que estuve en una tertulia.
Once (one day) when I was at a party.
» » » being at a party.

Note. In such a case the conj. cuando is not admissible.
If, however, a sentence containing an adverbial phrase of
time (as: At 5 o’clock he entered my room) is turned into a
principal sentence importing the sense of that adverbial phrase,
and an accessory clause introduced by when, cuando should
be used, not gue. Thus:

At 5 o’clock etc. == it might be five o’clock, when he
entered my room.

Serian las cinco, cuando entré en mi cuarto.

Que often replaces a conjunction compounded with
que, in order to avoid repetition, as:
Despues que el ejército fué desbaratado y que (for
despues que) el general hubo entrado en la ciudad...
After the army was beaten and (after) the general had
entered the town.

Before the subjunctive, too, que is frequently omitted,

as in English. Ex.:
No quiso (que) le alcanzase.
He did not wish (that) he might overtake him.

This is almost always the case with the verb rogar,
to beg, request, which is never used with de and the infini-
tive, but always with the subjunctive with omission of
the conjunction que, e. g.:

Ruego & V. me diga el motivo de su proceder.
I beg you to tell me the reason of your manner of
proceeding.

Traduccion. 15.*)
1. I was never ambitious, and I never thought of
soliciting (en solicitar) official situations. I want sincerity

*) As the English and Spanish expressions often greatly differ,
we occasionally prefer, for the convenience of the pupil, writing
the English so that a literal translation will be good Spanish.
984 Lesson 14.

and no lies and subterfuges. I am your friend, but not your
servant. You are my beloved sister, but not my mistress.
(The) good taste is not the produce of erudition, but an in-
nate talent of (the) man. I encounter many difficulties in
my studies, but I will not let myself be (fr. dejarse) dis-
couraged (Infin. acobardar) by them. You affirm it, but your
master affirms the contrary. Not only is he a good painter,
but he is also familiar with literature. I have not given the
book to you, but to the secretary of the president. How can
you think that I will already go away (now), if I have come
only an hour ago? If you had asked me, I should have
answered you directly. If you write to me, I shall also
write to you. I shall give him the money, because you find
the account in order. I am staying here, because you wish
it. I could not come yesterday, because I was ill. If I am
told to do such a thing, I shall at once refuse. I shall lend
you the money, provided (on condition) that you give it me
back within a month. What is to be done now? What do
you think of the matter?

2. Give him the money! I shall give it you back
afterwards. Have not I (tr. But I have) told you to-day
that I shall not go to the play? But I brought you the
newspaper yesterday evening. You refuse, so we shall (drop
the subject) not speak any longer of the matter. You will
not pay me, so I shall send the note to your uncle. Well,
you come to dine with us [on] Sunday? So you will not
come with us to the promenade? So I shall depend upon
it (cwento con V.). I tell you so, that you may know it.
I declare (you) that I have not deserved these injuries, As
(it) seems to me, you have not done your task. Relate me
the accident as it happened (sucedidé). The field brings fruit
according as it is cultivated (reflect. fr. cultivar). As soon
as (the) supper was over (tr. finished), the gentlemen went
away. As soon as I shall have paid (subj.) my bills, I shall
depart. One morning, when I took my chocolate, some one
knocked at the door. It might be nine o’clock, when we
heard a great noise in the street. As soon as all was put
in order and the room shut, we left the house. We feared
(lest) our enemies should be victorious (tr. conquer).

Reading Exercise.

Roger de Lauria.
Fin.

La escuadra de Roger, reforzada con las galeras que el
rey Don Pedro le habia enviado para que pudiese hacer frente
4 las de Carlos, se hizo 4 la vela, y costed la Calabria.
Avist6 4 los enemigos en el cabo Fallerin, y no osando los
Subordinative Conjunctions. 285

franceses venir 4 batalla, el almirante espafiol salté en tierra
de nocho, y atacéd y saqued 4 Nicotera, plaza fuerte y bien
guarnecida, con tal celeridad, que sin ser sentido dt la escua-
dra enemiga, ya al alba se hallaba en el cabo unido al grueso
de su armada. De este modo, y con igual felicidad, saqued
a Castelvetro, tomd 4 Castrovilari y otros pueblos de la
Basilicata, en tanto numero, que ya fué preciso enviar de
Sicilia un gobernador, que por parte del rey de Aragon de-
fendiese y mandase toda aquella parte de Calabria. Despues
de estas facciones Roger, dejando aquella costa, acercdndose
& la de Africa, lego a4 la isla de los Gerbes, y saltando en
tierra con su gente, los moros, que entduces la poseian, no
pudieron resistirle, y se la rindieron. Alli mando alzar una
fortaleza, y dejé6 un capitan que la guardase. Para colmar
su fortuna, una galera catalana hizo cautivo 4 un régulo
berberisco, y con el y los despojos de los Gerbes did la vuelta
& Mesina, con igual gloria que otras veces.

A principios del afio de mil doscientos ochenta y cinco
murié en Foggia el rey Carlos, rendido al dolor que le causa-
ban tantas desgracias. Hombre esforzado, guerrero ilustre, si
no hubiera manchado sus hazafias y su fama con la inhumani-
dad y la fiereza que manifestéd en toda su vida. Se hacian
estos vicios tanto mds extrafios en él, cuanto mds se com-
paraban 4 la moderacion y dulzura de su hermano el rey de
Francia San Luis. Gand grandes batallas, se apoderd: de
grandes estados: y de simple conde de Provenza, se vid rey
de Napoles y de Sicilia, arbitro de la Italia, y objeto de
espanto 4 Grecia, adonde ya amagaba su ambicion. la for-

. tuna, que le habia acariciado tanto al principio de su carrera,
le guardo al fin de ella los amargos desabrimientos que van
referidos, frutos todos de la fiereza implacable de su cardcter,
y de la insolencia de su gente. Porque si él hubiera regido
los pueblos subyugados con alguna especie de moderacion y
justicia, su dominio apoyado en la benevolencia de sus stib-
ditos, sostenido por los papas, y defendido con todo el poder
de la Francia, no era posible que se resintiese de los débiles
embates de un rey de Aragon. Leccion insigne dada 4 los
ambiciosos, para que se acuerden que los hombres no disi-
mulan ni sufren la usurpacion y la conquista sino 4 quien
los hace mds felices. El murié en fin, y el odio que se le
tenia publicéd que se habia ahogado 4 si mismo por no poder
con su rabia. Pedro, su rival, al saberlo, elogid mucho sus
prendas militares, y dijo que habia muerto el mejor caballero
del mundo. Por su falta un hijo del principe prisionero tomd
la gobernacion del estado, auxilidndole el conde de Artois,
primo de su padre, y Gerardo de Parma, Legado de la Santa
Sede. Quintana.
256 Lesson 15.

Conversacion.
éPor qué reforzd el rey D. Pedro la escuadra de Roger?
éQué hizo’el almirante espafiol?
¢Adonde se hallaba al alba?
éQué fué la suerte de los otros pueblos de la Basilicata?
éQué fué preciso hacer?
éQué hizo Roger despues de estas facciones?
éQué sucedié para colmar su fortuna ?
¢Cudndo murid el rey D. Carlos?
éQué dice el autor de Carlos de Anjou?
éQué dice del rey de Francia, San Luis?
éQué guard la fortuna al rey D. Carlos al fin de su carrera?
éCon qué reflexiones concluye el autor su descripcion del
caracter del rey?
éQué dijo D. Pedro, el rival de D. Carlos, cuando supo la
muerte de su enemigo?
éQuién tomé la gobernacion del estado?

Fifteenth Lesson.

The Complements of the Verb.
The object.

The most striking difference between the Spanish
and other languages is exhibited by the direct complement
of the verb, as we observed in the First Part (see De
clensions, p. 15). There we stated that the direct comple-
ment (accusative), when importing a person, is not ex-
pressed by the accusative case in Spanish, but bv the
dative case, i, e. by the preposition « preceding the noun.
Thus: The mother loves the daughter, is not: La madre
ama la hija, but: La madre ama & la hija.

To this general rule we now add the following re-
marks:

1) Not only names of persons, but also names of.
countries and towns without article, and personified ideas,
are connected by @ with the preceding verb, as:

Amar & la patria, to love one’s country.
Los frances conquistaron & Espana.

The French conquered Spain.

El almirante atacd y saqueé & Nicotera.
The admiral attacked and plundered N.
The Complements of the Verb. 287

. Note. The prepos. d may be omitted before proper names,
if the accusative is taken in a general sense. Thus:

Aguardar & un criado, to expect a (certain) footman.
“Whereas:
Aguardar un criado, to expect a footman (any person of
that class).

This is also the reason, why substantives, taken in a general
sense (the French sens partitif), are not preceded by @ in the
accusative, as:

Busco criados, I am on the look-out for servants (Fr. Je
cherche des domestiques).

Es preciso que el ejército tenga oficiales inteligentes. The
army must have intelligent officers.

No conozco mujer mds arrogante, I do not know a more
arrogant woman. .

2) If a verb governs two direct complements (accu-
sative cases), of which the second is properly the predi-
cate of the first, the former is ‘rendered by the dative
case and follows the latter, as:

He calls his caprice character.
Llama cardcter & su capricho.

3) If the accusative of the person, which according
to the general rule ought to be expressed with the dative
case, is followed by another attribute with «, the first @
is omitted, as:

jEnvie V. et jardinero 4 la plaza!
Send the gardener to the market!

NB. If, however, the personal complement is a proper
name, and the following attribute denotes a place, both take
a, as:

jEmie V. & Carlos & la plaza!
Send Charles to the market!

But if both complements denote a person, the first d@ is

dropped, as:
éPrefiere V. Cervantes d Calderon?
Do you prefer Cervantes to Calderon?

4) If by the use of @ a misconception could arise,
this preposition is omitted, as:
Mi amigo me recomendé el general.
My friend recommended the general (accus.) to me.

(Me recomendd al general, would be “recommended me [acc.]
to the general” (dat.]).
288 Lesson 15.

5) Again, @ is suppressed before nemerals (except
wo), as:
Conoct seis senoras de la compania.
I knew six ladies of the society.
(But: Conoct & una sefiora etc. I knew a lady... .)

6) After the verbs to name, to elect, to choose, the
accusative case is used, and not the dative (with 4).
Thus:

Espana ha producido grandes poetas.
Spain has produced great poets.

El principe nombra los empleados*).
The prince appoints the functionaries.

If, however, the personal complement is a proper
name, the dative should be used, as:

Espatia ha producido &4 Cervantes y d Calderon.
Spain has produced Cervantes and Calderon.

7) Occasionally the omission of @ is required by
cuphony. Thus: Mira aquel hombre, look at that man,
because Mira & aquel hombre, would grate on the ear.
The latter also however is occasionally found, in fact in
the best writers we meet with numerous exceptions to
the rules given above on the omission of 4 when the
object is a person.

8) With some verbs the signification is altered by
the omission or the use of @ Thus:

robar alguno, means: to kidnap somebody;

robar & alguno, » to-rob somebody;

dejar alguno, > to leave behind (a son etc.);
dejar & alguno, » to desert somebody ;

*) If another personal accusative follows, as: The prince ap-
pointed him general, this accusative is, as in English, added
without the article, or with por (after to recognize, to acknowledge
etc.), or else with como (after to consider, to depict etc.), as:

El principe le nombré capitan.

The prince appointed him captain.

Los soldados le reconocieron por general.

The soldiers recognized (acknowledged) him as their general.
Le considero como bribon.

I consider him as a scoundrel.

If these verbs are passively used, the accusative case is turned
into a nominative, as:
Frué nombrado capitan, he was appointed captain.
The Complements of the Verb. 289

pierde sus hijos, means: he loses his sons;
prerde & sus hijos, » he ruins his sons.

9) In Spanish several verbs always govern the accu-
sative case (except names of persons, which follow in the
dative), whilst in English they are introduced by prepo-
sitions. In English some of them may govern the accu-
sative. .They follow in alphabetical order:

Acechar, to lie in wait meditar, to meditate on.
for... mirar, to look at.

cortejar, to pay one’s court obsequiar, to render homage to.
to, to render homage to. pedir, to beg (of).

escuchar, to listen to. rogar, to beg (of).
encontrar, to meet (with). tratar, to treat with.
extranar, to wonder at. violentar, to offer violence to,
huir, to flee from. and many others.

As these verbs are all transitive in Spanish, they
may, of course, also be used passively, as:

Fuimos escuchados por el juez.
« We were listened to by the judge.

If another complement, denoting a person, is added
to these verbs, it is rendered by the dative of the pro-
noun or the substantive, thus:

Me pide un favor, he asks me a favour.
Pide un favor at rey, he asks a favour of the king.

10) As we stated p. 120, 3, verbs are often used re-
flectively in Spanish, in order to modify the original idea.
In such a case, the complement denoting a person is put
in the dative, whereas the complement importing a thing
remains in the accusative case, as:

Tragarse, to devour; Las fieras se tragan a los

, hombres, the wild beasts
devour the men.

. Uevarse, to take away; Se llevd el dinero, he took
, away the money.

11) As we stated before, if, for the sake of greater
emphasis, the accusative precedes the verb, the respective
personal pronoun should be added.

A mt no me puedes decirlo.
To me you cannot say so (for: no puedes decirmelo).
Aquellas siete medalias las hallaré.
_I shall find those seven medals.
Spanish Grammar. 19
290 Lesson 15.

Traduccion. 16.

1. If we love our country, we only do our duty. The
Greeks conquered Troy, after a siege of ten years. You call
your nonsense jokes, and your impertinence witticisms, I
(have) sent the footman to the mill and the (maid-)servant
into the garden. I prefer Souvestre to Lamartine, and Dante
to Petrarca. He recommended me his servant, but I have not
taken him. I have known seven or eight wealthy families in
that town. Do you know a more talented author than
Dickens and Thackeray? The king appointed the Marquis
captain-general of the Island of Cuba. The minister appoints
the officers, and the king confirms them. I consider every-
body an impostor who does not speak the truth in such a
case. Napoleon was elected emperor by the French. Ger-
many has produced great philosophers, and France great ge-
nerals. The city of Mayence produced Gutenberg, the inven-
tor of the art of printing. Look at that lady; what do you
think of her tasteless dress? Napoleon the First left a son,
the Duke of Reichstadt. If I must leave my country, I am
very unhappy.

2. The robbers have stolen (me) my whole fortune. (The)
gipsies have often kidnapped children. We should never
flatter the great in order to obtain a favour. Thank your
father for his great kindness. I have dissuaded your friend
from his project. Obey thy parents, if thou wilt become
happy. We have prevented the danger in time. I renounce
(to) all my claims to (tr. at) the estates of that family. I
could not resist his entreaties. Serve your neighbour on
every occasion. Assist the unhappy man lest he be lost! It
is a great misfortune, if a young prince is always flattered
by his companions. I was helped, when it (was not too late)
still was time. Happily the danger was avoided! I remind
you of your promise. The beggar asked me for alms. Ask
the peasant the way! What are you doing here? I am put-
ting on my boots (tr. calzarse). Why do not you put on (tr.
vestirse) the waistcoat which the tailor (has) brought you
yesterday? I shall read this letter (precedes the verb), though
you have forbidden it tome. You cannot deceive me (see 11),
my dear friend! I know you better than you know yourself!

Reading Exercise.
Primer sitio de Gerona.
En la mafiana del 10 junio de 1808 continuaron los fran-
ceses la marcha sobre Gerona. En su _transito dejaron san-
griento rastro por las muertes, robos y destrozos con que

afligieron & todos los pueblos. En tanto grado convierte la
guerra en hombres inhumanos 4 los soldados de una nacion
The Complements of the Verb. 291

culta. Habia solamente de guarnicion en Gerona 300 hombres
del regimiento de Ultonia, y algunos artilleros, los que con
gente de mar de la vecina costa dirijieron los fuegos de
aquella arma. Limitadisimo numero si los nobles, el clero y
todos los vecinos sin excepcion, inflamados de ardor patrio,
no hubiesen sostenido con el mayor brio los puntos que se
confiaron 4 su cuidado. Era gobernador interino D. Julian
de Bolivar.

A las nueve de la mafiana del propio dia 20 se presento
el enemigo en las alturas de la aldea de Paulasacosta, mas
‘incomodado con algunos cafionazos del baluarte de la Merced
y fuerte de Capuchinos se replegé 4 Salt y Santa Eugenia,
cuyas aldeas saqued 4 sangre y fuego. Por la tarde despues
de varios reconocimientos atacéd formalmente, dirigiendo su
‘Izquierda por los lugares que acabamos de mencionar, al paso
que su derecha cruzando el Ofid acometié con impetu é intent
forzar la puerta del Carmen. Los sitiados le repelieron con
valor y serenidad. Sefialdse Ultonia, cuyo -teniente coronel
Don Petro O’Dally qued6é herido. Atacd en seguida el fuerte
de Capuchinos en donde fué igualmente repelido, habiendo
experimentado considerable pérdida. Burladas sus esperanzas
colocd una bateria cerca de la cruz de Santa Eugenia, no
léjos de la plaza: causé algun dafio en el colegio tridentino
y otros edificios, y respondiendo con acierto 4 sus fuegos las
baterias de la plaza, la noche puso término al combate.

Conversacion.

¢4Cudndo continuaron los franceses su marcha sobre Gerona?
éQué rastro dejaron en su transito?

éCudntos hombres habia de guarnicion en Gerona?
éQué dice el autor de este numero?

éQuién era gobernador de la fortaleza?

éCudndo se presenté el enemigo?

éA dénde se replegs?

éQué hizo por la tarde?

éPor dénde dirigié su izquierda?

éQué hizo su derecha?

éQuién sefialdse en esta pelea?

¢Cudl fuerte atacd en seguida?

éCon qué suceso?

éDénde colocé el enemigo una bateria?

¢Causdé mucho dafio?

19*
292 Lesson 16. |

Sixteenth Lesson.

Special Remarks on some English Verbs.

1) As we stated before, to be, when used as an
auxiliary to form the passive voice, is rendered by ser,
as: to be loved, ser querido. However, the learner should
always bear in mind that the passive voice is much less
used in Spanish than in English, the reflective verb being
commonly used instead.

Note. We must carefully distinguish whether the tense is a
real imperfect of the passive voice, or whether the past participle
is employed as an adjective. The pupil is requested to compare
the following sentences:

The house was built, i. e. was building, Latin: edificabatur,
and: The house was built, i. e. was finished, » edificata erat.

In the former instance, we have a real imperfect, and there-
fore the sentence is translated:

La casa era edificada.

In the latter case, “built’’ is an adjective. Here estar is
required. Thus:

La casa estaba edificada.

If the action or state expressed by the passive voice
is represented as frequently repeated and therefore habi-
tual, the verb ¢r (to go, like andare in Italian) is pre-
ferred to ser, as:

Este verbo va conjugado ast.
This verb is conjugated thus.

2) To become (sometimes also ‘to grow”) is ren-
dered:

a) By ser, if the state is represented as a lasting
one, as:
Es menester estudiar mucho para ser sabio.
One must study much in order to become learned
(i. e. if a man és learned, he remains so).
Mi hijo serad comerciante.
My son will become a merchant.

Note. Bearing some analogy to the French C'est que...
était que ...etc., que is coupled with ser to give the following
verb a greater emphasis. Such expressions should be periphrased
in English, as: ‘

i Es que no quiero! But I won't! (French: C’est que je ne
veux pas!)

i Es que no se trata de eso! We do not choose to speak
of such a thing!

iSt no fuere que teme ser descubierto! If it were not for
his being afraid of discovery!
Special Remarks on some English Verbs. 993

b) Ponerse, if the transition from one state to another
is to be denoted, as:
Se puso triste, he became sorry.
El café se ponara frio, the coffee will become cold.

c) Volverse, if the. idea of an alteration predominates,
as:

Volvidse alegre, he became merry (i. e. having before
been sad).

d) Crecer, hacerse, nacer, and salir, if the stress is laid
on the development of the action or state, as:
Se me hace cada dia mds desagradable.
He becomes every day more disagreeable to me. ,
e) Llegar a ser, ponerse, meterse (cd), venir a ser, when
implying ¢ntention or aim, as:
Quiere meterse (4) soldado, he will become a soldier.

Vino a ser infeliz por el descuido de su hijo.
He became unhappy by the imprudence of his son.

Llegara & ser el primero de todos.
He will become (he will be) the first of all.

f) Ir & parar, venir 4 parar, parar en... ., pasar a
ser, pasar de (&) salir, when importing a final aim, as:
éEn qué ira & parar esta cosa?
What will in the end become of the matter?
Salio un afamado actor.
He turned out a famous actor.
NB. The same idea is expressed by ser de, as:
2Qué fué de él? What became of him? (Ital. Che fu
di lui?)
g) Quedar, if the alteration is represented as merely
accidental or involuntary, as:
A esta noticia quedé muy afligido.
At this news he became very sorry.

Observation. Besides-these verbs, there are some others
which convey the notion of development or transition, but with
an accessory idea, as: anochecer, to grow dusky; enverdecer,
to become green; empeorarse, to grow worse, to deteriorate,
to degenerate; envejecer, to grow old ete. With these verbs
(in the gerundio) estar is often used, in order to express an

_ accessory idea of duration, as:
El ruido esta& creciendo.
The noise is growing louder and louder. .
(See: on the Gerundio.)
294 Lesson 16.

3) To be able, I can etc. See II. Part, Lesson
17, 15.

4) To have with the accusative and past participle
following, as: I shall have a codt made, means hacer
hacer [in French: faire faire], as:

Se hizo hacer wn sombrero. He had a hat made.

Sometimes in such a sentence, to have is not translated, if
the person who performs the action is not mentioned, as:

He has his books printed at Madrid. ;
Estampa sus obras en Madrid (= he prints his b. at M.).

5) Zo cause, to order, is hacer and sometimes
mandar, as:
Haga V. entrar al criado. ,
Order (tell) the footman to come in.

Mando al soldado acompanar al prisionero*).
He ordered the soldier to accompany the prisoner.

6) To let, when meaning ‘to permit”, “‘to allow”,
is commonly dejar, as:
No me dejo engafar, lit. I do not let me cheat = I do
not let myself be cheated**).

No deja cerrar la puerta.
He does not allow the door to be shut.

Dar likewise occurs in this signification, as:
Déme V. esta carta é escribir. Let me write this letter.

Note. “Let me know” = send me word, is rendered by
enviar & decir, as:
Send me word, if you can come.
Envie V. d& decirme, si puede venir.
To be let (= hired) is alquilar, as:
This house is to be let. Esta casa esta para alquilar.

7) To get is also frequently rendered by hacer. Yet
this verb has so many other significations in Spanish,
that we advise the learner, whenever it occurs, to peri-

*) If “to order” or “to cause” etc. is followed by the infini-
tive of the passive voice, as in the sentence: He ordered the sol-
dier to be shot, the complement should be placed after the infini-
tive of the active verb. Thus: Mando fustlar al soldado.

**) In Spanish, the use of the passive voice after the verbs
“to permit”, “to“allow”, is strictly forbidden. Dejar should always
be followed by the infinitive of the active verb.
Special Remarks on some English Verbs. 295

phrase it, for instance: Have you got your money = have
you received your money? ¢Ha recibido V. su dinero? I
cannot get over this difficulty = I cannot overcome or
conquer th. d. No puedo vencer esta dificultad etc.

8) Zo be obliged, to be compelled, I must, likewise
present some difficulties.

a) If the Subject of the sentence is expressed by one,
people etc., we employ es menester, es preciso, es necesa-
rio, hay que (conviene) with the infinitive and without a
nominative case; thus:

Es menester (necesario, preciso) trabajar para ganar
la vida.

One must work in. order to gain one’s livelihood.
(Zit. It is necessary to work etc.)

No hay que decirselo. One (you) must not tell him so ete.

b) If, on the contrary, the subject is distinctly express-
ed, an accessory sentence is introduced by que, as:
You must work in order to gain your subsistence.
Es preciso (necesario etc.) que V. trabaje para ganar
su vida.
Women must work in order......

¢) Instead of es menester etc. we may as well use deber

(de) or haber de, nor does it make any difference whether
a moral necessity or a compulsion by some material force
be intented. In this latter case, tener que may be used.

He de estar en mi cuarto, I must stay in my room.

Debe de hacer frio, it must be cold.

Tengo que escribir muchas cartas.

I have many letters to write.

Su hermano de V. ha de estar enfermo.

Your brother must be ill.

Observations. 1) A construction rarely met with is the
dative of the personal pronoun with es memester, followed by
the infinitive, as:

Me fué preciso hacer esto. I was obliged to do so.
(French: il me fallut faire cela.)

2) The English “ought” is likewise rendered by es me-

nester etc. or by deber etc. If this verb is followed by the

*) In French: Il faut travailler and: Il faut que les femmes
travaillent.
296 ~—(C« Lesson 16.

infinitive perfect (as: you ought to have given), it is trans-
lated with the imperfecto del indic. or with the condicio-
nat del subj.:

He ought to have told me so.

Debia (or debiera) habérmelo dicho.

Traduccion. 17.

1. This game is played thus, my dear friend; pay atten-
tion, I shall show it you. In order to become clever, it is ne-
cessary to have intercourse with clever people. The boy said:
I will become an officer. Drink your chocolate, else it will
become [too] cold. My sister was (tr. became) very glad, when
she heard this news. At first he was sad (afligado), and after-
wards he became merry, without any reason. Not every
acorn becomes an oak-tree, and not every soldier a general. This
man became richer every year. Who will be (become) the first of
the class? If you will become (a) merchant, you must first
of all learn order and diligence. You will turn out a spend-
thrift, if you (go on like that) continue in the same way.
Jacob Lafitte was (became) at last a great banker. Tell me,
what has become of the servant (whom) you had last year?
When we heard this, we were (became) much surprised. (The)
spring is coming; the trees are getting green. Do you know
that your father grows rather (mucho) old? Do not be de-
ceived (tr. Do not let yourself deceive) by (the) appearances.
Why do you not let the dog come in? Tell the footman to
come in; he will say, whether I was (tr. have been) not here
to-day. The emperor ordered the culprit to be put into prison.

2. By whom (4 quién) have you your linen washed
(i, e. who washes y. 1.)? I shall send him word, that I am
(estoy) engaged. It is to be hoped (ér. it lets itself hope),
that we shall have fine weather. That is easy to assert (lit.:
it is easy, to assert that), but difficult to prove. It is not
said (Uit.: it cannot be said), that you are not right, but
yet I do not believe it. Where have you had this coat
made? My neighbour will have his house fresh painted.
One must always speak (the) truth. You need*) only com-
mand (mandar), and it will be done (tr. hacerse) directly.
The children must go to bed at eight o’clock and get up at

*) “To need” and “to want” are often rendered as shown by
the following examples:
Necesitamos dinero, we want some money.
No hay mas que hablar, one only needs to speak.
“Ought” is sometimes translated necesitar, as:
V. hubiera necesitado descansar.
You ought to have reposed.
Special Remarks on some English Verbs. 297

six. I must stay at home to-day, for I have yet to do my
task. The count must be abroad, for his house is shut up.
You ought to have waited for me, for you knew for certain
(ér. certainly) that I should come. You ought not to have
a so (it), if you did not wish deeply to afflict your poor
ather.

Reading Exercise.
Primer sitio de Gerona.
.Continuacion y fin. ‘

Fué aquella sumamente lébrega, y confiados los franceses
en la oscuridad se acercaron calladamente al muro, y de tal
manera y con tanto arrojo que hasta hallarse muy cerca no
fueron sentidos. Peledse enténces por ambos lados con bra-
veza, alumbrados solamente por los fogonazos del cafion, y
no interrumpido el silencio sino por su estruendo y los ayes
de los heridos y moribundos. jEspantosa noche! El enemigo
osé arrimar escalas al baluarte de Santa Clara. Algunos de sus
soldados pusiéronse encima de la misma muralla, y apresura-
damente les seguian sus compafieros, cuando una partida del
tegimiento de Ultonia matando 4 los ya encaramados, preci-
pitéd 4 los otros y estorbé 4 todos continuar en aquel intento.
El fuego sin embargo no cesé hasta que el baluarte de San
Narciso tirando 4 metralla destrozé 4 los acometedores y los
dispersé, dejando el campo como despues se vid sembrado
de caddéveres y heridos. No cansados todavia los franceses
renovaron el ataque 4 las doce de la noche, queriendo asaltar
el baluarte de San Pedro, pero fueron rechazados de modo que
desistieron de proseguir en su empresa, retirdndose temprano
por el camino de Barcelona en la mafiana del 21. Aunque

. corta fué notable esta primera defensa de Gerona, cuya plaza
tanto lustre adquiriéd despues en otra inmediata acometida, y
sobre todo en el célebre sitio del siguiente afio. Los somatenes
molestaron por todas partes al enemigo, habiendo impedido
con su ayuda que pasase al otro lado del Ter. No fué ménos
que de 700 hombres la pérdida de los franceses, la de los
espafioles mucho mds reducida. Toreno.

Conversacion.
éComo fué aquella noche?
éQué hicieron los franceses?
éCémo describe Toreno la pelea que tuvo lugar?
éQué hicieron algunos soldados franceses?
éQué sucedid entdnces?
¢Cudndo cesé el fuego?
éCudndo renovaron los franceses el ataque?
zAsaltaron el baluarte de San Pedro?
298 Lesson 17.

éCudndo se retiraron?

éQué hicieron los somatenes?

~Cudntos hombres perdieron los franceses?
.Cual fué la pérdida de los espafioles?

 

Seventeenth Lesson.

Peculiarities of different Verbs.

With some verbs idioms are formed, which in Eng-
lish must commonly be periphrased with adverbs etc.
Those most in use are:

1) Acabar, to finish, to terminate, is commonly ren-
dered by just, just now, also by to have done, as:
Acabaron de Uegar. They had just arrived.
Acabo de leer. I have done reading.
Sometimes acabar corresponds to the English finally,
at last, and fully, as:
Acabar de resolverse, to resolve finally, at last.
» de entender, to understand fully, entirely.
» de conocer, to know at last.
No acabar may be rendered in different ways, as:

No acababa de maravillarse*), lit.: He could not leave
off wondering = he was quite amazed etc.

2) Acertar, to gain, to carry one’s point, answers to

the English “‘to be able”, as:

No acerté a resolver qué hacer.

He could not determine what he was to do.
_ Sometimes it expresses a casualty or contingency, and
is an equivalent for to happen, as:

Acerté & pasar, I happened to pass.

Acertar con alg. c.**) means: to guess.

3) Alcanzar, to reach, to overtake, has very nearly
the same meaning as acertar; thus:

No aleancé & persuadirle.
I was not able to (I could not) persuade him,

 

 

*) In French: Jl ne finissait pas de s’émerveiller.
**) alg. c. == alguna cosa, something.
Peculiarities of different Verbs. 299

4) Cansarse, to get tired, when negatively employed,

implies (like no acabar) that an action is going on, as:

No se cansaba de hablar, literally: He did not grow

tired of speaking — He went on or kept speaking.

5) Dar, to give, like echar (see this verb, 7), expresses

the sudden and instantaneous beginning of an action or
a state, as:

El nifio did reir, the child began (suddenly) to laugh,

(Besides, dar forms a good many idioms, for which we
refer the pupil-to the dictionary.)

6) Dejar, to let, joined to the participle, chiefly in
commercial style, is equivalent to an auxiliary verb, as:
Dejé acreditado en cuenta, I have credited the account.

(On dejar, to let, see the preceding Lesson.)

7) Echar, to throw, is often synonymous with dar
(see 5), as:
Eché & Uorar, he began (all at once) to cry.
Echar de ver means “to behold, to get a sight of”;
echarla de escritor, to follow literary pursuits, to write.
(Echar, too, forms a great many idioms.)

8) Estar para, followed by the infinitive corresponds
to the English “to be about’, “to be upon the point
of’, “to be going to’, as:

Estaba para decirle, I was going (I was about) to tell
him (see p. 267, 5).

9) Gustar, to please, to relish, when negatively em-

ployed, means ‘“‘to dislike”, as:
No me gustaba estar més alld.
I did not like to stay there any longer.

10) Haber de (see the preceding lesson), is sometimes
an equivalent for the English ‘ought’, as:

V. habia de saber, you ought to know.
But: V. ha de saber (tu has de saber), know then!

V. ha de saber que estoy aqut.
Know then that I am here.
When used impersonally (hay — que), it should be
periphrased, as in the following sentence:
Hay mucho que desear. There is much to be wished for.

Note. Haber, though commonly an auxiliary, is sometimes
a principal verb, especially in poetry, as:
300 Lesson 17.

Heroes hubieron Inglaterra y Francia. England and France
had their heroes.

Los hijos que de Isabel hubo el rey D. Fernando, the children
that king Ferdinand had from Isabella.

He « 5 amigo por excusado, I consider your friend as excused.

Conviene que se haya@ como hombre que no sabe ni oye (Granada).
He must behave like a man who does neither know nor hear,

Also in the expressions he agui, here is, there is, haber is an
independent verb: he aqui & nuestro héroe, here is our hero.

Besides, haber is used absolutely in certain erclamative ex-
pressions, as:
Bun haya! Happy he who. .
Mal haya! Woe to him who...
we Dios haya! God give him eternal repose!
11) Ir a, like the English ‘to be going to’, denotes
impending futurity, as:
Toy & decirle, I am going to tell him.
Vamos 4 ver, let us see!

12) Llegar, to arrive, like acabar, frequently answers
to the English ‘‘at last, finally, in fine” etc., as:
Ha lUegado ¢ comprender, at last he understands.
Llegar & oir, @ entender means: to hear for the first
time; llegar « saber, is “to come to know, to be informed,
to learn, to hear” etc.

13) Llerur, to bring, to carry, to wear, joined to
the participle expresses, like dejar (see p. 299, 6), past
time in general, has thus the function of an auxiliary,
as: llerar sabido, to have known; llevar estudiado, to have
studied, learned; Merar hecho, to have done. The learner
must not forget, that if the past time is expressed by
dejar, llevar. tener (see 17) or traer (to bring), the past
participle should agree in gender and number with the
substantive to which it refers.

14) Ponerse a, meterse d, correspond to the Eng-
lish “‘to begin” (French: se mettre a), as:
Se puso a escribir, a hablar, a comer.
He began to write, to speak, to eat ete.
(Poner forms a great many idioms.)
15) Saber, to know, to be able, denotes an acquired
ability, as:
ZSabe V. hablar castellano?
Can you speak Spanish (i. e. have you learnt it)?
Peculiarities of different Verbs. 801

. Poder, on the contrary, expresses an innate faculty, as:
No puede hablar, porque es mudo.

16) Tardar, is to tarry, to defer, to delay, as:
Tarda mucho en responder, he tarries a good deal before
he answers.
No tardar is commonly rendered by soon, as:
No tardard en responder, he will soon answer“).

17) Tener, to have, to hold, as we stated I. P. page
10, is commonly used for the auxiliary “to have”. The
difference between tener and haber has been explained.
Tener implies the lasting effect of an action, as: te he
dicho, I told you; but: te tengo dicho, I told you once
for all. Thus: he eserito la carta, I have written the
letter, simply denotes the past tense, whereas: tengo
escrita la carta, lays a particular stress on the word
written. — Me ha ofendido, means: he has offended me,
but me téene ofendido, is:. he has oftended me and I
still resent the offence. — La casa que ha comprado, the
house he (has) bought; Ja casa que tiene comprada, the
house he has bought and séill possesses. — The learner
will notice at once, that the participle used with tener
agrees in gender and number with the word to which it
refers. — Without an accusative following, tener seldom
occurs with the past participle, as:

Tengo, acabado, I have done (see on participles).

Tener que..., to be obliged, has been mentioned before.

(Tener likewise forms a great many idioms.)

18) Tratar, to treat, to deal, to purpose, to set about,
if emphatically denoting a design or purpose, is followed
by de, as:

, Los conjurados trataban de asesinar al ,rey.
The conspirators set about killing the king. a

19) Venir de. . ., like acabar, intimates that an action
has just been performed, or that a condition began or
ceased immediately before; thus:

Viene de verla (or: acaba de verla), he has just seen her.
Venir & ser (or: Wegar a ser), simply means “to be”.
However, venir de is less frequent thau acabar de.

*) In French: Il ne tardera pas & répondre.
302 Lesson 17.

20) Volver a@..., is an equivalent for again or
once more, as:
Vuelvo d decir & su hermano de V.
I once more (again) tell your brother.

Volver without the infinitive following, is “to return, to
come back”, as:
Volveré a& las once, I shall be back at 11 o’clock.

NB. The repetition of an action or state is seldom ex-
pressed by the prefix re—, as:
Animar, to animate; reanimar, to reanimate.

Observation. The cases where duration etc. of an action
or a state is expressed by the verbs andar, estar, wr, and
venir with the gerundio, will be explained when we shall
treat of this part of speech.

Traduccion. 18.

1. We had just entered the house, when we heard the
noise. He could not wonder enough at the impudence of the
footman. Have you at last resolved to come with us? I was
not able to dissuade him from his project. You have hit
(guessed) it, my friend! I met him by chance in the street.
You will never be able to render me unfaithful to my pro-
mise. He could not cease telling me of (imperf. of acabar)
the wonders he had seen in the town and in the theatre.
Woe to him, who depends on such men! Why did the girl
begin to cry? When we saw him at last, it was too late to
give him a call. I was on the point of writing to you, when
I got your letter. I did not wish to speak to him any longer,
for he bored me dreadfully. I cannot go out to-day, I must
stay at (tr. (guardar, to watch) the shop. You must send me
the book (still) to-day. There is (a good deal more) still
much to be (tr. dejarse) said about your behaviour, but I have
no mind to scold any longer.

2) What are you about (to do) there, Charles? I want to
open the window, for it is very warm in the room. Have
you at last understood that I cannot comply with your request?
He just began to work, when his friend came into the room.
Can you dance? No, I cannot dance, but I can fence and
ride. You cannot ride to-day; the horse is ill. You can
never get your task done (¢r. You always tarry to finish y.
t.), because you are always wandering with your thoughts.
Never mind! I shall soon come back. As I have bought
the article, I shall not send it back again. We tell you
again, that you are wrong in acting thus. Mr. Gayoso has
sold the house which he bought two years ago. I would
Peculiarities of different Verbs. 3038

get rid of this disagreeable occupation, but my master told
me that he could not get on without me. Do not trouble
me. You see that I have no time to talk to you. You have
insulted me, Sir, and I shall never forgive you again for
this insult. I shall not sell the garden again which I bought.
I have already dressed myself this morning and now I must
(es menester) dress myself once more. I never saw my poor
brother again!

Reading Exercise.
Tercer sitio de Gerona.

«Sera pasado por las armas el que profiera la voz de
capitular 6 de rendirse.» Tal pena impuso por bando al
acercarse los franceses 4 Gerona su gobernador Don Mariano
Alvarez de Castro. Resolucion que por su parte procuré cumplir
rigurosamente, y la cual sostuvieron con inaudito teson y
constancia la guarnicion y los habitantes.

Preludio fueron de esta tercera y nunca bien ponderada
defensa las otras dos ya relatadas de junio y julio del afio an-
terior. Los franceses no consideraban importante la plaza de
Gerona, habiéndola calificado de muy imperfecta el general
Manescau comisionado para reconocerla: juicio tanto més
fundado, cuanto prescindiendo de lo defectuoso de sus fortifi-
caciones, estaban entdénces estas unas cuarteadas, otras cu-
biertas de arbustos y malezas y todas desprovistas de lo mds
necesario. Corrijiéronse posteriormente algunas de aquellas
faltas sin que por eso creciese en gran manera su fortaleza.

Gerona cabeza del correjimiento de su nombre, situada
en lo antiguo cuesta abajo de un monte, extendidse despues
por las dos riberas del Ofd, llamdndose el Mercadal la parte
colocada 4 la izquierda. la de la derecha se prolonga hasta
donde el mencionado rio se une con el Ter, del que tambien
es tributario por el mismo lado, y despues de correr por
debajo de varias calles y casas el Galligans formado de las
aguas vertientes de los montes situados al nacimiento del sol.
Comunicanse ambas partes de la ciudad por un hermoso puente
de piedra, y las circuye un muro antiguo con torreones, cuyo
débil reparo se mejord despues, afiadiendo siete baluartes,
cinco del lado del Mercadal y dos del opuesto: habiendo sdlo
foso y camino cubierto en el de la puerta de Francia.

Dominada Gerona en su derecha por varias alturas, ele-
vdronse en diversos tiempos fuertes que defendiesen sus cimas.
En la que mira al camino de Francia y por consigniente en
la mds septentrional de ellas se construyd el castillo de Mon-
juich*) con cuatro reductos avanzados, y en las otras separadas

*) In Catalanian ch is pronounced like &, and j as in French.
304 Lesson 18.

de esta por el valle que riega el Gilligans los del Calvario,
Condestable, Reina Ana, Capuchinos, del Cabildo y de la Ciudad,
Antes del sitio se contaban algunos arrabales, y abriase
delante del Mercadal un hermoso y fértil Mano que baflado
por el Ter, el riachuelo Giiel y una acequia, estaba cubierto
de aldeas y deleitables quintas.

La poblacion de Gerona en 1808 ascendia 4 14,000 al-
mas, y al comenzar el tercer sitio constaba su guarnicion de
5673 hombres de todas armas. Mandaba la plaza en calidad
de gobernador interino Don Mariano Alvarez de Castro, na-
tural de Granada y de familia ilustre de Castilla la Vieja,
quien con la defensa inmortalizé su nombre. Era teniente
de rey Don Juan Bolivar que se habia distinguido en las dos.
anteriores acometidas de los franceses, y dirigian la artilleria
y los ingenieros los coroneles Don Isidro de Mata y Don
Guillermo Minali: el ultimo trabajd incesantemente y con
acierto en mejorar las fortificaciones.

Conversacion.

éQuién fué gobernador de Gerona?

éCudl pena impuso él por bando?

éFué este el primer sitio de Gerona?

éConsideraban los franceses la plaza importante?

éHra fundado el juicio del general Manescau?

éCual es la situacion de Gerona?

éHasta donde se prolonga la parte derecha? .

éPor qué medio comunicanse ambas partes de la ciudad?
éQué las circuye?

éDonde se constray6 el castillo de Monjuich?

éA qué numero ascendia la poblacion de Gerona en 1808?
éDe cudntos hombres constaba su guarnicion?

éQuién mandaba la plaza en calidad de gobernador interino?
éQuién era teniente de rey?

éQuiénes dirigian la artilleria y los ingenieros?

Eighteenth Lesson.

Moods.

Like the English, the Spanish language has four
moods, viz.:
1) the Indicativo,
2) the Subjuntivo,
3) the Condicional,
z the Imperativo.
Indicative Mood. 305

1. Indicative Mood.

This mood represents an action as positive and beyond
all doubt. In this regard the English and Spanish
language offer no remarkable difference. In accessory
clauses, no less than in the principal sentence, the indica-
tive mood is employed, as:

El criado dice que ya esté pronto.
The footman says that he is ready.

Mi amigo me escribid que ya habia visto d su primo.
My friend wrote me that he had already seen his cousin.

2. Subjunctive Mood.

Any action or state that does not appear to be quite
certain, but is represented as possible or doubtful, as well
as consequences resulting, not from any fact, but from
mere thought or feeling, should be expressed by the sub-
junctive mood. In Spanish this mood, commonly neglect-
ed by the English, is strictly observed, and is one of
the greatest beauties of the language, as it modifies the
expression far more than is possible with the English
subjunctive. For this reason the English verbs could,
would, should, may, might, must ete. are usually not
translated, but rendered by the Spanish subjunctive. The
learner who is acquainted with the French and Italian
languages, will find a great analogy between these idioms
and the Spanish, and will be seldom mistaken in using
the Spanish subjunctive (except the futuro and condicional)
where he would employ the subjunctive in French or
Italian.

We distinguish:

1) The dependent subjunctive.
2) The absolute subjunctive.

The dependent subjunctive is used:

1) After the conjunctions dntes que, before, ere;
aunque, although, though; cwando, when; con tal que,
on condition that; dado que, caso que, puesto que, provided °
that; para que, in order to, so that; por nuis que, how-
ever..... : st, if; como si, as if; sin que, without. . .;
and after the exclamation Ojald, God grant it, and a
few others. Examples:

Vendré aunque Uueva, I shall come, though it may rain.
Spanish Grammar. 20
306 Lesson 18.

Haré mi deber, sin que V. me acuerde de ello. ‘
I shall do my duty, without your reminding*) me of it.
Por mds que hagas, no te perdonare.

‘Whatever you may do, I shall not pardon you.

Note. If, however, a fact admitting of no doubt is
stated, the indicative mood is required even after these con-
junctions, as: Be

He venido aunque Wuere. I have come though it rains,

2) After verbs importing order, fear and apprehension,
permission, desire, doubt ete.. as:
Temo que mi tio no venga.
I am afraid my uncle will not come.
El maestro quiso que yo diese mi libro d mt hermano.
The master wanted me to (== wished that I should)
give my book to my brother.
Dudo que V. cwumpla con su palabra.
I doubt that you will keep your word.
NB. But after dudar de si.... to doubt, the indicative
should be used, as: .
Dudo de si V. esta ad su palabra.
I doubt that you will keep your word.

8) Decir, when meaning “to order’, and esperar,
when meaning “to hope’, govern the subjunctive mood;
with the signification “to relate’ respectively ‘“‘to wait’
or “to expect’, however, they govern the indicative, as:

Me dice que venga. He tells (orders) me to come.

Espero que V. venga. I hope (that) you will come.
Whereas:

Me dijo que mi tio vendria.

He told me that my uncle should come.

Espero que V. vendrd. I expect that you will come.

4) The subjunctive is also used in relative sentences,
if the action, expressed in them, is not meant to imply
something as definite, but as negative, unknown, doubt-
ful, intended in the future; e. g.

Que diga lo que quiera, no le creeré.
He may say, what he likes, I shall not believe him.

 

 

*) We need not add that the English present participle, when
used, as in the above sentence, in lieu of accessory clauses, should
always be rendered by the respective person and tense of the
verb with the conjunction requisite. Thus: without your remind-
ing me == without that you remind me.
Subjunctive Mood. 307

No encontrards d quien te perdonase semejante injuria.
Thou i find no one who will pardon thee such an
insult.

Donde quiera que fueres, haz lo que vieres (Trueba).
Whereever thou mayest be, do what thou seest (others do).
The absolute subjunctive is used:

1) In lieu of the those persons of the imperative,
which are wanting; in Spanish here the subjunctive must .
be introduced by que, unless accompanied by V. In
English these persons of the imperative are periphrased
with “let” or with “may” etc., as:

iQue diga lo que quiere!
He may say what he pleases! or: Let him say what,
he pleases!
j Vamos! Let us go! — j Levantémonos! Let us get up!
Whereas:
jDiga V.! Do tell! i Venga V.! Do come!

2) Again, que with the subjunctive is used as an
exclamation, Viz.:
i Que me haga este favor!
If he only would do me this favour!
Note. Que is frequently dropped in such expressions, as:
(Quiera Dios! God grant it!
jQuiera el cielo! Please heaven!

3) In negative orders with the second person, as:

j No digas que estoy aqui! ~
Do (thou) not say that I am here!

jNo vengas acié! Do not come here!

j No me niegues tu favor!

Do not deny me your (thy) favour!

Observation. In sentences of this kind, as well as in
those introduced by que, a verb importing a wish or desire
is understood, so that the construction is properly elliptical.
The whole phrase would run:

(Quiero) Que me haga este favor!

I wish that he would do me this favour!

(Exijo que) No hagas rwido! Do (thou) not make a
noise! (i. e. I wish that thou do not m. a n.!)

3. Imperative Mood.

This mood offers no matter for specialremark. Only the

learner should bear in mind that the Spanish imperative
20*
308 Lesson 18.

never admits of a negation. Whenever in English a negative
imperative occurs, it must be rendered in Spanish by the
subjunctive mood (see 3). The polite mode as well as
the first person plural of the imperative are only a
seeming imperative, being in fact nothing else but the
subjunctive mood, as the pupil will have seén by the
foregoing examples.

4. Condicional.

This mood presents some difficulties to the foreigner.
In the I. Part on the Auziliaries the most important
observations may be found. As we shall yet have to
speak of the conditional mood when treating of the
Consecution of tenses (Lesson 20), we need only add that
the absolute condicional of the indicative is often used,
in order to express an approximative time or number,
as well as any uncertain assertion whatever, as:

Serian las 5, cuando el Sefior A. llegé.
It was about 5 o’clock, when Mr. A. arrived.

Tendria en aquel tiempo la ciudad de Leipsique 60,000
vecinos.

The city of Leipsic might then have 60,000 habitants.

2No se equivocaria V.?

But might you not be mistaken?

Traduccion. 19.

1. I (am at) work now, that I may have finished (haber
acabado) at 6 o’clock. These people looked at me, as if I
were a criminal. Before (i. e, sooner than) doing (ér. I do)
that, I had rather (tr. I will) die. I shall come at all events,
even if I have no news from you. I lend you the money
on condition that you give it me back soon. In case (that)
Mr. Barrera should depart to-day, let me know (tr. avisar)
by telegraph. I entered the saloon without the others noticing
(tr. notar) it. God grant that I find my family in good
health! I was afraid (that) your mother would not find us
at home. I wish that you always obey the orders of your
superiors. I doubt (very) much that he will come (still) to-
day. I (have no doubt, but) do not doubt that every one
of your words is the strictest truth. Tell the footman to
come (i. e. that he comes) directly. I tell you that I have
not received your letter. I hope (that) you will send me
another (¢r. again a) basket of cherries. I still expect (you
to keep) that you will keep the promise which you have
given me.
Condicional. 309

2. Do come, my dear friend, it is much too cold in this
room! Never mind (ér. that may not give you trouble). I
shall put all to rights! Tell him that I am ready! I am looking
for a book in order to send it to my cousin (f.). I seek a footman
that may serve me well. God grant (that) it were true!
Let him speak out (tr. speak), if he wishes that we do him
a favour. Do not tell your brother that we are here. Do
not come here! Here is no room for you! Do not tell him
the truth! He would be too much afflicted (tr. he would
afflict himself too much). Do speak to me with (en) con-
fidence! I shall do all that is in my power! Be patient!
The physician will come directly! Fear (thou) my wrath!
Do (thou) not fear anything! I shall assist thee! Let us
take (vamos d dar) a walk! It might be 10 o’clock, when
the train arrived. The village might have 200 houses.

8. I shall do my duty, come what may. If it please
God, I shall go to Sevilla next month. I should give you
your money, if you had done your duty. If you were less
discontented, you would not always be complaining. I should
very much like to learn something new. If we do our duty,
no one can blame us. I have ordered (fr. that you go not
out) you not to go out to-day; why have you not obeyed
me? He has advised (tr. that I may not write) me not to
write in the twilight, because my eyes are too weak. I
should have asked you to do me this service, if I had not
known that you were absent. Do you doubt (de), that (que)
I am an honourable man? No, but I doubt that you are
able to do what you have promised me. I expect you to
tell me the truth. I am waiting for my brother to come, in
order to speak with him about (de) your proposal. He has
told me, he cannot do what: you wish. I tell you, be quiet
(silent)! do you understand? Do not speak with thy friend
about what I have been telling thee. Do not stay here.
Do not interrupt me, if I speak. Do not trust him with thy
secrets, he is a prattler. Let us go, we must get on our
way.

Reading Exercise.

Tercer sitio de Gerona.
Continuacion.

Por la descripcion que acabamos de hacer (see p. 298. 1.) de
Gerona y por la noticia que hemos dado de sus fuerzas, se
‘ve cuan flacas eran estas y cuan desventajosa su situacion.
Ensefioreada por los castillos, tomado que fuese uno de ellos,
particularmente el de Monjuich, quedaba la ciudad descubierta,
siendo favorables al agresor todos los ataques. Ademas si
atendemos 4 los muchos puntos que habia fortificados, y 4 la

\
310 Lesson 18.

extension del recinto, claro es que para cubrir conveniente-
mente la totalidad de las obras, se requerian por lo ménos
de 10- & 12,000 hombres, numero lejano de la realidad, A
todo suplid el patriotismo. .

Animados los gerundenses con antiguas memorlas, y re-
ciente en ellos la de las dos ‘ultimas defensas, apoyaron
esforzadamente 4 la guarnicion, distribuyéndose en ocho com-
pafiias que bajo el nombre de Cruzada instruyd el coronel
Don Enrique Odonell. Compusiéronla todos los vecinos sin
excepcion “de clase ni de estado, incluso el clero secular y
regular, y hasta las mujeres se juntaron en una compafiia
que apellidaron de Santa Barbara, la cual dividida en cuatro
escuadras llevaba cartuchos y viveres &% los defensores, re-
cogiendo y ausiliando 4 los heridos.

Al comenzar junio fué la plaza del todo circunvalada,
Colocdése la division westfaliana de los franceses al mando del
general Morio desde la mdrgen izquierda del Ter por. San
Medir, Montagut y Costa Roja: la brigada de Juvhan en
Pont-Mayor, y los regimientos de Berg y Wurszburgo en las
alturas de San Miguel y Villa-Roja hasta los Angeles: cu-
brieron el terreno del Ofid al Ter por Montebili, Palau y el
llano de Salt tropas enviadas de Vique por Saint-Cyr, ascen-
diendo el conjunto de todas 4 18,000 hombres. Hubiera pre-
ferido el ultimo general bloquear estrechamente la plaza 4
sitiarla; mas sabiéndose en el campo frances que no gozaba
del favor de su gobierno, y que iba & sucederle en el mando
el mariscal Aujereau, no se atendieron debidamente sus
razones, llevando Verdier adelante su intento de embestir 4
Gerona.

Reunido el 8 de junio el tren de sitio correspondiente,
resolvieron los enemigos emprender dos ataques, uno flojo
contra la plaza, otro vigoroso contra el castillo de Monjuich
y sus destacadas torres 6 reductos. Mandaban 4 los ingenieros
y artilleria francesa los generales Sanson y Taviel. Antes de
romper el fuego se presenté el 12 un parlamentario para in-
timar la rendicion, mas el fiero gobernador Alvarez respondié
que no queriendo tener trato ni comunicacion con los enemigos
de su patria, recibiria en adelante 4 metrallazos 4 sus emi-
sarios. Hizolo asi en efecto siempre que el frances quiso
entrar en habla. Criticdronle algunos de los que piensan que
en tales lances han de llevarse las cosas reposadamente, mas
lodle mucho el pueblo de Gerona, empefiando infinito en la
defensa tan rara resolucion cumplida con admirable tenacidad.

Los enemigos habian desde el 8 empezado 4 formar una
paralela en la altura de Tramon 4 600 toesas de las torres
de San Luis y San Narciso, dos de las mencionadas de
Monjuich, sacando al extremo de dicha paralela un ramal de
Tenses of the Indicative. 311

trinchera, delante de la cual plantaron una beteria de ocho
cafiones de a 24 (see p. 276) y dos obuses de 4 nueve pul-
gadas. Colocaron tambien otra bateria de morteros detras de
la altura Denroca 4 360 toesas del baluarte de San Pedro
situado 4 la derecha del Ofié en la puerta de Francia. Los
cercados, 4 pesar del incesante fuego que desde sus muros
hacian, no pudieron impedir la continuacion de estos trabajos.

Conversacion,

éQué se ve por la descripcion antecedente?

¢Como quedaba la ciudad, si uno de los castillos fuese tomado?

éCudntos hombres se requerian por lo ménos para cubrir to-
das las obras?

éQué dice el autor de los gerundenses?

éQuiénes compusieron la «Cruzada» ?

éQué hicieron las mujeres?

éPor qué formaron la compafiia de Santa Barbara?

éCudndo fué circunvalada la plaza?

éAdonde se colocé la division westfaliana de los franceses?

aY la brigade de Juvhan y los regimientos de Berg y Wursz-
burgo?

éQué hubiera preferido el general Saint-Cyr?

éQué stipose en el campo frances? *

éQué resolvieron los enemigos ?

éQuiénes mandaban 4 la artilleria francesa?

éQuién se presentd el 12?

éQué respondid el gobernador Alvarez?

éEstaba Alvarez 4 su palabra?

éPor qué lodle mucho el pueblo de Gerona?

éQué habian los franceses empezado 4 formar desde el 8?

éQué plantaron delante de la paralela?-

éA donde colocaron otra bateria?

éQué no pudieron impedir los cercados?

Nineteenth Lesson.
The use of tenses. Consecution of the tenses.
Tenses of the Indicative.
§ 1. In animated language the presente is often
used instead of the pasado. This presente is called
historical present, as:

Camina, pues, el inocente Isaac al lugar del sacrificio
con su carga tan pesada. (Granada.)
312 Lesson 19.

§ 2. In conversation the presente is occasionally
used for the feturo, as:
Voy (instead of iré) & misa mafiana.
I shall hear mass to-morrow.

§ 3. The perfecto indefinido differs somewhat
from the respective English tense*), It represents an
action, perfected some time ago, but whose consequences
extend to the present time, and therein it differs from
other past tenses. If I say, for instance: Los Faraones
han fabricado las pirdmides, I tacitly suppose that
the effect of the action is still enduring, i. e. that the
pyramids are still existing; whereas in the sentence: Los
Faraones edificaron las pirdmides, the action is without
any reference to the present, so that the pyramids may
have ceased to exist. The pupil is requested to compare
the following examples:

He perdido mi bolsa, I have lost my purse (i. e. I
have it no longer).

Perdi ayer mi bolsa, yesterday I lost my purse (but
I may have found it again).

The perfecto indefinido is more frequently used in Spa-
nish than the perfect tense in English.

§ 4. Sometimes, as in English, the futuro expresses
an order, as:

éNo callards? Will you not be silent? — Be silent!

Darts al momento el dinero & tu tia. :

You will at once give the money to your aunt! — Give
t. m. to y. aunt!

8 5. Again, the futuro denotes a desire to do
something, as:

Con que, tu serds militar!
Well, so you want to be a soldier!

§ 6. The tenses of the pasado are: the imperfecto,
the definido, the pluscuamperfecto, the perfecto anterior,
and partly the futuro perfecto.

§ 7. The emperfecto is used:

1) In descriptions of character, opinion, state, manners,
and customs, representing an action as often repeated, as:

*) It never has the meaning of the English perfect in the
sentence: Mr. Scrooge has been dead these seven years (Dickens).
Tenses of the Indicative. 313

Tenia en su casa un ama que pasaba de los cuarenta,
y una sobrina que no Uegaba 4d los veinte, y un
mozo de campo que asi ensillaba el rocin. ‘

(Cerv. D. Q.)

He had in his house a house-keeper that was more than
forty years old, a niece who had not yet reached
her twentieth year, and a field-hand who also used
to saddle the nag.

2) If two actions are represented as being performed
at, or as lasting, the same time, as:

Miéntras yo escribia, mi tia daba una vuelta.
Whilst I was writing, my aunt took a walk.

' 38) If one action is interrupted by another, the imper-
fect denotes the action that was going on when the other
began; the latter requiring the definido. Ex.:

Miéntras yo escribia, él entré en mi cuarto.
Whilst I was writing, he entered into my room.

Note. The learner will be sure to know which tense
he should employ, if he tries to translate by means of the
English present participle with the auxiliary to be. Thus in
the first of the above sentences, both verbs, escribia and daba,
may be rendered thus:

Whilst I was writing, my aunt was taking a walk, but
in the last sentence a similar translation (he was entering)
would be improper.

4) The imperfecto is used for all actions that do not
ammediately belong to the relation, but are added by the
speaker in order to express his accessory circumstances or
own meaning. Ex.:

El clamor que aquel desafuero causé es mds facil
imaginarlo que describirlo. Todos los capitanes pedian
d una voe salir d castigar tamaiia osadia; quien
alegaba sus servicios, quien imploraba el favor de
la reina; quien dejaba traslucir el propdsito de
pelear con el moro, aun cuando el rey castigase con
pena de vida la desobediencia. Toda la prudencia
del principe se hubo menester.... hasta que
anuncié por udtimo el monarca que...

(Martinez de la Rosa.)

The uproar which this outrage caused is more easily
imagined than described. All the chiefs unanimously
asked permission to step forth in order to. chastise
so enormous a boldness. The one referred to his
314 Lesson 19,

(former) services; the other implored the favour of
the queen; another alluded to his intention to fight
the Moor, though the king should punish the dis-
obedience with the penalty of death. The prince
needed all his prudence....... until at last the
monarch announced that... . .

Here the definidos causd, hubo menester, and anuncid
belong to the main part of the tale, whilst the imperfectos
pedian, alegaba, imploraba, and dejaba help to explain and
illustrate it.

5) Moreover the imperfecto is used where the English
often employ the imperfect of the auxiliaries could, should,
and ought etc., as:

Debia (or debiera) habérmelo dicho.
He should have told me so (= He ought to have told
me so. See page 295, Observ. 2).

§ 8. The definido is used to express actions
following one another. It is the historical tense, being
peculiarly appropriated to the narrative style, and there-
fore used:

1) To mark a time positively fixed, entirely elapsed,
that has nothing to do with the present time. Ex.:

Fallecié Napoleon el 5 de mayo 1821.

Napoleon died the 5th of May 1821.

En la manana del 8 renovaron el asalto.
On the morning of the 8th they renewed the assault.

2) The definido may mark duration, but without any
reference to another action or state, as:

Napoleon fué un gran general.
Napoleon was a great general.

3) Very frequently the definido occurs instead of the
perfecto indefinido or the pluscuamperfecto, if the speaker
considers less the action or the state itself, than the
final result, as:

éCudndo ha visto V. & mi madre?
When have you seen (did you see) my mother?
La vi ayer. I saw her yesterday.

Me did érden de esperarte a él.
He gave me orders to wait for him.
Tenses of the Indicative. 315

NB. The Spaniards often substitute, for euphony, the
definido for the pluscuamperfecto or perfecto anterior, if one
of these tenses immediately precedes. Thus:

Habia admirado las tablas que mi tio compré (for
habia or hubo comprado).
I had admired the pictures which my uncle had bought.

Traduccion 20.

1. I enter my room; the windows are open and the
cage of the bird is empty! Do you go to the theatre to-
night? No, I go to the concert. Is it a long time since
you have this house? No, I bought it last autumn. This
summer I bought a garden, but as it did not please me, I
sold it. Yesterday my son found a precious ring in the
street. May I offer (fut.) you a glass of wine? No, thank
you, I have (had some) already drunk some. Tell your bro-
ther that he must pay me. The Lord’s commandment says:
Thou shalt not kill! When we were in the country, we took
a walk every day; after breakfast we read or played, and
after dinner we took a nap. Napoleon was born on the island
of Corsica. The Greeks besieged the city of Troy, and finally
took it by assault.

2. Schiller and Gcethe were the greatest poets of Ger-
many. Did you pay a visit to Mr. Januartus Sepulveda last
week? Yes, I was there, but I could not speak to him.
Whilst the young gentlemen and ladies danced, the papas and
mammas played at cards or looked at the amusements of the
young folk. Italy had her greatest poets in the 18th and
15th centuries. For three years I received no news of my
brother. The ball lasted till 6 o’clock in the morning.
Was the count last year in Italy or in France? How much
have you paid for this coat? I do not recollect whether I
paid 24 or 26 dollars. When I got your letter, I had already
read all the books which you had sent me. When he had
related him all (which) his father had told us, he grew (tr.
quedar) very sad. After I had done the task which the
‘master had (set) given me, I went down into the garden.

Reading Exercise.
Tercer sitio de Gerona.
Continuacion.

Progresando en ellos y recibida que fué por los franceses
la repulsa del gobernador Alvarez, empezé el bombardeo en
la noche del 18 al 14, y todo resond con el estruendo del
cafion y del mortero. Los soldados espafioles corrieron 4 sus
puestos, otro tanto hicieron los vecinos, acompafidndoles 4
todas partes las doncellas y matronas alistadas en la com-
316 Lesson 19.

pafiia de Santa Barbara. Sin dar descanso prosiguieron en
su porfia los enemigos hasta el 25, y no por eso se desalen-
taron los nuestros ni aun aquellos que entdénces se estrenaban
en las armas. El 14 incendidse y quedd reducido a cenizas
el hospital general: gran menoscabo por les efectos alli per-
didos y dificiles de reponer. La junta correjimental que en
todas ocasiones se porté dignamente, repard algun tanto el
dafio, coadyuvando & ello la diligencia del intendente Don
Carlos Beramendi, y el buen zelo del cirujano mayor Don
Juan Andrés Nieto, que en -un memorial historico nos ha
transmitido los sucesos més notables do este sitio.

Al rayar el 14 tambien acometieron los enemigos las
torres de San Luis y San Narciso, apagaron sus fuegos,
descortinaron su muralla, y abriendo brecha obligaron 4 los
espafioles 4 abandonar el 19 ambas torres. Lo mismo acon-
tecid el 21 con la de San Daniel que evacuaron nuestros
soldados. Este pequefio triunfo envalentond 4 los sitiadores,
causindoles despues grave mal su sobrada confianza.

En la noche del 14 al 15 desalojaron los mismos 4 una
guerrilla espafiola del arrabal del Pedret situado fuera de la
puerta de Francia; y levantando un espaldon trataron de
establecerse en aquel punto. Temeroso el gobernador de que
erijiesen alli una bateria de brecha, dispuso una salida com-
binada con fuerza de Monjuich y de la plaza. Destruyeron
los nuestros el espaldon, y arrojaron al enemigo del arrabal.

En tanto el general en gefe frances Saint-Cyr habiendo
enviado 4 Barcelona sus enfermos y heridos aproximése 4
Gerona. En su marcha cojid ganado vacuno, que del Llo-
bregat iba para el abasto de la ciudad sitiada. Sentd el 20
de junio su cuartel general en Caldas, y extendiendo sus
fuerzas hacia la marina se apoderd el 21 aunque 4 costa de
sangre de San Feliu de Guixols*). Con su llegada aumentdése
el ejército frances 4 unos 30,000 hombres. Los somatenes y
varios destacamentos molestaban 4 los franceses en los alrede-
dores, y antes de acabarse junio cojieron un convoy conside-
rable y 120 caballos de la artilleria que venian para el
general Verdier. Corrid asi aquel mes sin que los franceses
hubiesen alcanzado en el sitio de Gerona otra ventaja mds
que la de hacerse duefios de las torres indicadas.'.

Pusieron ahora sus miras en Monjuich*). Guarnecianle
900 hombres a las dérdenes de Don Guillermo Nasch*), estando
todos decididos 4 defender el castillo hasta el ultimo trance.
Al alborear del 3 de julio empezaron los enemigos & atacarle
valiéndose de varias baterias, y en especial de una llamada
«imperial» que plantaron 4 la izquierda de la torre de San Luis

 

 

2 P : P e
) In Catalanian names, x is pronounced like English sh. ;
in French, ch like k (sch like sk). Pee Oy dae
The use of Tenses. 317

compuesta de 20 piezas de grueso calibre y 2 obuses. En
todo el dia aportilldse ya la cara derecha del baluarte del
norte, y los defensores se prepararon 4 resistir cualquiera
acometida practicando detras de la brecha oportunas obras.
El fuego del enemigo habia derribado del dngulo flanqueado
de. aquel baluarte la bandera espafiola que alli tremolaba.
Al verla caida se arrojé al foso el subteniente Don Mariano
Montoro, recobrdla y subiendo por la misma brecha la hincd
y enarbolé de nuevo: accion atrevida y digna de elogio.

Conversacion.
¢Cudndo empezd el bombardev?
éQué hicieron los espafioles ?
¢Hasta cudndo prosiguieron los franceses en su porfia?
éQué acontecid el 14 del mes?
éQué hizo la juata correjimental ?
éQuiénes coadyuvaban 4 ello?
éQué dice el autor de D. Juan Andrés Nieto?
éQué hicieron los franceses el 14?
éQué acontecid el 21?
éQué acaecid en la noche del 14 al 15?
éPor qué dispuso el gobernador una salida?
éQué hicieron los espafioles ?
éQué cojid Saint-Cyr en su marcha?
éQué acontecid el 20 y el 21 de junio?
2A cudntos hombres aumentése el ejército frances?
éQué hicieron los somatenes?
éQué cojieron antes de acabarse junio?
¢Cudntos hombres guarnecian el castillo de Monjuich?
éEn qué manera atacaron los franceses el castillo?
éCudl fué la accion atrevida del subteniente D. Mariano
Montoro?

Twentieth Lesson.

The use of Tenses. Consecution of the Tenses.
(Conclusion.)

Of the tenses of the indicative mood we have still
to consider the pluscuamperfecto, the perfecto anterior,
and the futuro perfecto, all compound tenses.

The pluscuamperfecto and the perfecto an-
terior, being compounds of the imperfecto and definido,
are distinguished in a similar way.

Thus the perfecto anterior expresses an historical
fact, or a time positively fixed. Such is the case after
318 Lesson 20.

adverbs and conjunctions denoting time, as: cuando, luego
que, asi que, apénas (scarcely) etc. Ex.:
Cuando hubo amanecido sali.
When it had grown light, I went out.
Here the two actions are closely connected and both of
short duration.

If, on the contrary, the actions do not appear so
closely following one another, the pluscuamperfecto
should be used. Ex.:

Los israelitas desobedecieron al Sewor que los habia
sacado de la tierra de Egipto.

The Israelites were disobedient to the Lord, who had
led them out of the land of Egypt.

In this sentence, there is no immediate connection
between the two actions (desobedecieron and habia sacado),
and the time in which the latter took place; is simply
previous to the former.

The futuro anterior marks an action or a state
that is to follow another future one, as:

Procura verme pasados algunos dias, quizd te habré
procuradoe acomodo.

Call on me in a few days; perhaps I shall have found
you a situation.

Observation. After dicese, it is said, they say etc., where
in English the infinitive mood follows preceded by to, the
futuro should be used in Spanish, as:

The general is said (expected) to come to-day.
Dicese que el general llegard hoy.

‘

The Tenses of the Subjunctive.

As the subjunctive is the mood of dependence, the’
theory of its tenses at once comprises the most important
rules concerning the consecution of the tenses.

1) The presente del subj. is used in the subordinate
clause, if a presente, futuro, or an imperativo precedes in
the principal sentence [the same rule as in French], as:

Deseo que estudies el derecho.
I wish you to study law*).

*) The “accusative with the infinitive”, e. g. I wish you to
study ..., should always be rendered by the subjunctive mood.
Tenses of the Subjunctive. 319

Te diré que estudies el derecho.

I shall tell you that you may study law.
Dile que estudie el derecho.

Tell him he may study law.

2) The émperfecto del subj. must be used in the
subordinate clause, if a tense of the pasado precedes in
the principal sentence, [the same rule as in French, as:

Deseé que estudiases (or estudiaras, see the cond.) el
derecho.

I wished you to study law.

Su padre no ha permitido que él estudiase el derecho.

His father has not permitted him to study law.

This tense is also used in conditional clauses with
si, if, where the conditional precedes in the principal
sentence, as:

Conseguiria sin duda el empleo si tuviese poderosos
valedores.

He would undoubtedly obtain the situation, if he had
mighty protectors.

3) The futuro del subj. in the subordinate clause
refers to a futuro, presente del subj., or imperativo in the
principal sentence. In English this tense is wanting,
being commonly rendered by the present subjunctive. Ex.:

Si el-cielo diere fuerzas, cantaré aqui el dulce canto.
(Valbicena.)
If heaven grant me strength, I shall sing here the
sweet song ....

En lo que tocare d defender mi persona, no tendré
mucha cuenta con esas leyes.

Concerning the defence of my person, I shall not care
much for these laws.

Hazlo si pudieres.
Do it, if you can (== if you will be able to... .).
NB. Very often the futuro del subj. may be replaced

by the presente del subj. without any essential alteration
of the meaning. Thus we may as well say (in the second
of the above sentences): en lo que toque @.... Only if, as
in the first sentence, the futuro del subj. is introduced by
si, this exchange is not admissible. The learner should be
careful not to mistake conditional clauses like these for those
‘which admit of the conditional. To be quite certain, he need
but try whether they may be rendered by the presente or
not. Thus the sentence:
320 Lesson 20.

Si ella fuere de tanta hermosura, de buena gana con-
fesaremos la verdad. (Cervantes.)
If she be so beautiful, we shall willingly confess the truth:
— might quite as well be expressed:
Si ella es de tanta hermosura....

With the condicional, however Gf she were or would
be etc.), the sense would be quite different.

With the feturo anterior del subjuntivo, which occurs
very rarely, the same rules are to be observed as with the
simple futuro, of course taking into consideration the difference
of the time.

4) The perfecto indefinido del subj. is used in the
subordinate clause*), if a presente or futuro precedes in
the principal sentence, [the same rule as in French], as:

Espero que el correo haya UWegado para fines de la
semana. »

I hope the post will have arrived by the end of the
week.

5) The pluscuamperfecto del subjuntivo, as far as
this tense is not concerned with the condicional (see this),
is used in the subordinate clause, if the verb of the
principal sentence obtains in one of the past tenses, [the
same rule as in French], as:

Deseaba que hubieses estudiado el derecho,
He wished you might have studied law.

Condicional.

In the I. Part (on the “auxiliaries”) we gave some
general hints on the use of this mood. We now add
further particulars, observing at once, that everything
we said there concerning the simple tenses must also be
understood of the compound forms.

*) We need not observe that these compound tenses may
quite as well be used absolutely as the simple tenses (see on the
subjunctive), as:

a haya venido 6 no el socorro, ha de capitular la
plaza.

To-morrow, succour may have come or not, the place must
surrender.

Or: El gobernador de la plaza era de opinion que, viniese 6 no

el socorro, era necesario rendirse. . :

The governor of the place was of opinion that he must
surrender, the succour might come or not.
Condicional. 321

1) The condicional del subj. may bo used in all
cases instead of the imperfecto del subjuntivo, as:

Deseé que estudiaras (instead of estudiases).
I wished that you might study.

2) Very often the simple condicional replaces the com-
- pound, as:
Esta noticia me desazond tanto como si estuviera (for
hubiera estado) enamorado de veras. (Isla.)
This news exasperated me as much, as if I had been
indeed enamoured.

3) Instead of the pluscuamperfecto of the indicative,
the condicconal del subjuntivo is sometimes used, chiefly
with ancient writers, as:

Pasaron (for habian pasado) ya tres semanas desde
nuestra Uegada.
Three weeks had passed since our arrival.

4) To the rule 3, p. 84, L. P. we add, that after verbs
importing “to believe, to think, to tell’ ete., provided
they are used affirmatively, the condicional of the indi-
cative and subjunctive as well as the imperfect of the
subjunctive may be employed. Thus:

vendria.
Decia yue} viniera. | He said, hat he would come.
viniese.
NB. For these verbs when used negatively, and for those
implying order, desire, request etc., see I. P. p. 84 and 85.

Traduccion. 21.

1. I did not yet know that the letter had arrived. The
news (which) we had received, set us at rest as to (tr. on)
the fate of the fugitive. Scarcely had he entered the drawing-
room, when the prince took his arm and began a conversa-
tion with him. As soon as the bear had been seen (tr. dejarse
ver) in the forest, they resolved to give him a general chase.
As soon as we had learned that your cousin had arrived, we
went to pay him a visit. The general reconquered (tr. recu-
perar) all the fortresses of the country which the enemy had
taken. When you will have done your duty, you may quietly
await, what then will happen. The judge wants the wit-
ness to speak the truth. Ask him to pay (fr. ask that he
pay) you your money.

2. The judge wanted the witness to speak the truth. I
have not said that you had written to me; it was my foot-
man who told your father so. The colonel permitted the sol-

Spanish Grammar. 21
822 Lesson 20.

diers to give a ball at the barracks. You would work more
easily, if you studied more carefully. You may’ do (subj. pr.)
what you please, I shall not obey you. You will tell me all
(which) he will impart you. ,Zhe matter (lo) ,may be 3as
(que) [it] ,be, I do not believe that he has told a falsehood.
Cost what it may, I shall revenge myself. I hoped you would
call on us more frequently (mds 4 menudo). He did not know
that we waited for him in the grand square. My unele
wished (tr. that) his son should at once set out for Paris.

Reading Exercise.

Tercer sitio de Gerona.
Continuacion.

No tardaron los enemigos en intentar el asalto del cas-
tillo- Emprendiéronle furiosamente 4 las diez y media de la
noche del 4 de julio: vanos fueron sus esfuerzos, inutilizdn-
dolos log nuestros con su serenidad y valentia. Suspendieron
por entdénces los contrarios sus acometimientos; mas en la
mafiana del 8 renovaron el asalto en columna cerrada, y
mandados por el coronel Muff. Tres veces se vieron repelidos
haciendo en ellos grande estrago la artilleria cargada con
balas de fusil, particularmente un obus dirigido por Don Juan
Candy. Insistid el jefe enemigo Muff en llevar sus tropas por
cuarta vez al asalto, hasta que herido él] mismo desmayaron
los suyos y se retiraron. Perdieron en esta ocasion los sitia-
dores unos 2000 hombres, entre ellos 11 oficiales muertos y
66 heridos. Mandaba en la brecha 4 los espafioles Don Miguel
Pierson que perecié defendiendola, y distinguidse al frente
de la reserva Don Blas de Fournds. Durante el asalto tuvie-
ron constantemente los franceses en el aire contra el punto
atacado 7 bombas y muchos otros fuegos parabdlicos. Grandes
y esclarecidos hechos alli se vieron. Fué de notar el del
mozo Imciano Ancio, tambor apostado para sefialar con la
caja los tiros de bomba y granada, Llevdle un casco parte
del muslo y de la rodilla, y al quererle transportar al hospital
opusose, diciendo: «No, no, aunque herido en la pierna tengo
los brazos sanos para con el toque de caja librar de las bom-
bas & mis amigos».

Enturbid algun tanto la satisfaccion de aquel dia el ha-
berse volado la torre de San Juan, obra avanzada entre
Monjuich y la plaza. Casi todos los espafioles que la guar-
necian perecieron, salvando 4 unos pocos Don Carlos Bera-
mendi, que sin reparar en el horroroso fuego del enemigo
acudié 4 aquel punto, mostrandose entdénces, como en tantos
otros casos de este sitio, celoso intendente, incansable patriota
y valeroso soldado.
Condicional. 323

Los sitiadores despues del malogrado asalto de Monjuich
prolongaron sus trabajos, y abrazando los dos frentes del
nordeste y noroeste se adelantaron hasta la cresta del glasis.
Nuevas y multiplicadas baterias levantaron sin que los detu-
viesen nuestros fuegos ni el valor de los sitiados. Perecieron
el 31 muchos de ellos en la torre de San Luis, que volé una
bomba arrojada de la plaza, y en una salida que voluntaria-
mente hicieron del castillo en el mismo dia varios soldados.

Entrado agosto continuaron los franceses con el mismo
ahinco en acometer 4 Monjuich, y en la noche del 3 al 4
quisieron apoderarse del rebellin del frente de ataque. Frustrése
por enténces su intento; pero al dia siguiente se hicieron
duefios de aquella obra, alojandose en la cresta de la brecha:
800 hombres defendian el rebellin, 50 perecieron, y con ellos
su bizarro jefe Don Francisco de Paula Grifols. Ni aun asi
se ensefiorearon los franceses de Monjuich. Los defensores
antes de abandonarle hicieron una salida el 10 en dafio de
los contrarios.

Sin embargo previendo el gobernador del castillo Don
Guillermo Nasch que no le seria ya dado sostenerse por mds
tiempo, habia consultado en aquellos dias 4 su jefe Don
Mariano Alvarez, quien opuesto a todo género de capitulacion
6 retirada tardé en contestarle. Nasch entdénces junté un con-
Sejo de guerra y con su acuerdo evacud 4 Monjuich el 12 de
agosto 4 las seis de la tarde, destruyendo dntes la artilleria
y las municiones. Ocuparon los franceses aquellos escombros,
siendo maravillosa y dechado de defensas la de este castillo,
pues los sitiadores sdlo penetraron en su recinto al cabo de
dos meses de expugnacion, y despues de haber levantado diez
y nueve baterias, abierto varias brechas, y perdido mds de
38000 hombres. De los 900 que componian la guarnicion
espafiola murieron 18 oficiales y 511 soldados, sin quedar
apénas quien no estuviese herido.. . ¥

No obstante el gobernador Don Mariano Alvarez, activo
al propio tiempo que cuerdo, no desaprovechaba ocasion de
molestar al enemigo y retardar sus trabajos, y 4 un oficial que
encargado de una pequefia salida le preguntaba que addnde
en caso de retirarse se acogeria, respondidle severamente, al
cementerio.

Mas lnego. que vid atacado el recinto de la plaza puso
su mayor conato en reforzar el punto principalmente amena-
zado: para lo cual construyendo en parajes proporcionados
varias baterias, hasta colocé una de dos cafiones encima de
la béveda de la catedral. Aunque los enemigos desencaval-
-garon pronto muchas piezas, ofendiales en gran manera la
fusileria de las murallas, y sobre todo las granadas, bombas
y polladas que de lugares ocultos se lanzaban 4 las trincheras

21*
324 Lesson 21.

y baterias vecinas. Los apuros sin embargo crecian dentro
de la ciudad, y se disminuia mds y mas el numero de de-
fensores, siendo ya tiempo de que tuese socorrida

Conversacion.
éCudndo emprendieron los franceses el asalto del castillo ?
éCuando renovaron el asalto?
éEn qué insistid el coronel Muff? 2
¢gCuadntos hombres perdieron los franceses en esta ocasion ?
éQuién mandaba en la brecha a los espafioles?
éQuién se distinguid el frente de la reserva?
éQué hecho fué de notar?
éQué dijo el tambor Luciano, cuando quisieron transportarle
al hospital?
éQué enturbid algun tanto la satisfaccion de aquel dia?
éQué fué la suerte de la guarnicion de la torre 8. Juan?
éQué dice el autor de D. Cadrlos Beramendi?
éQué hicieron los sitiadores despues del malogrado asalto de
Monjuich?
éQué acontecio el 31?
éQué hicieron los franceses en la noche del 3 al 4?
¢Cuantos hombres perecieron en la defensa del rebellin?
éCudndo evacud D. Guillermo Nasch 4 Monjuich?
gCuantos oficiales y soldados de la garnicion espafola
mnurieron? :
éQué preguntaba un oficial 4 D. M. Alvarez?
éQué le respondid el gobernador?
éQué hizo Inego que vid atacado el recinto de la plaza?
-¢Qué dice el autor de la condicion de la ciudad?

Twenty-first Lesson.
The Infinitive Mood.

I. The Absolute Infinitive.

__ The infinitive, when called absolute, is used as a
substantive, and appears with or without the article.
Though considered a noun, this mood does not lose its
nature as verb, and may therefore govern any complement,
like a real verb. In English the absolute infinitive is
rendered either by the infinitive mood or, more frequently
by the present participle. The absolute infinitive appears:

1) As a substantive with the article, as:
£1 escribir, writing; el hablar, speaking.
'

The Infinitive Mood. 325

2) Likewise as a substantive, but without the article,
and as a predicate, as:

Et reino de Dios no es comer ni beber, mas paz y
justicia. (Granada.)

The kingdom of God is neither eating nor drinking, but
peace and justice. ;

3) With adjectives and adverbs, as:
El hablar bien, to speak well.
El vivir mio, my life (lit. living).
El levantarse temprano, to rise early, rising early.

4) With complements, like the personal forms of the
verb. These complements may be either direct or indirect
complements (i. e. English). Ex.:

El comer manjares exquisitos, to eat choice food.
El murmurar tas fuentes, the babbling of the brooks.

5) With an adverbial, as:
El escribir con atencion, to write with attention.

Observations. 1) It is a peculiarity of the Spanish lan-
guage, that the Infinitive very rarely governs a genitive case,
as the present participle (‘‘the babbling’’) does in English in the
above example (‘‘the babbling of the brooks’’), where the ge-
nitive has properly the value of a nominative (who babbles?
the brooks, nomin.). Whenever in English such a genitive
occurs with the present participle, it must be placed after the
infinitive as a nominative, as: At the entering (entrance) of
the foreigner (who enters? — the foreigner, nom.) al entrar
el extranjero. The eclipse (darkening) of the sun, (who dar-
kens? — the sun, nom.), el eclipsarse el sol.

Whenever in Spanish the infinitive governs the genitive
case, this is to be considered as an irregularity which must
not be imitated, as:

El murmurar de las fuentes.
Al alborear dét 3 de julio.
(Reading Exercise page 316, last line but two.)

2) The infinitive cannot be put in the plural. If, never-
theless, the infinitive appears with the plural terminations,
it has entirely lost its verbal nature and becomes a true sub-
stantive. Such are:

Los placeres, the pleasures; los dares y tomares, things
given and taken; los cantares, Solomon’s Song, etc.

Note. The infinitive with the article preceded by the prepo-
sition d imports simultaneousness, whereas the infinitive with d
without the article expresses 4 condition, as:

Al cefirle la espada, whilst girding on his sword.
326 Lesson 21.

But: < saber yo, If I knew or: If I had known or: As far as I
know.
A oirle, if one hears him.

A no ser que esté dotado de... :
If he is not endowed with... (Trueba.)

Il. The Dependent Infinitive.

The infinitive, when depending on another word, is
used either with or without a preposition.

1) Without a preposition after those verbs which take
their complement likewise without a preposition. Such
are: alegrarse, gustar, to be glad; deber, to be obliged,
must; dejar, to let; desear, to desire, to wish; degnarse,
to deign; figurarse, to imagine; esperar, to hope, to ex-
pect; hacer, to make, to cause (smthg. to be done); Wa-
marse, to be called; oir, to hear; mandar, to order; pa-
recer, to seem; pensar, to think; poder, to be able; pro-
poner, to propose; procurar, to endeavour (French tdcher);
querer, to be willing; saber, to know; sentir, to feel, to
resent; ser, to be; servirse, to have the kindness, to
please; soler, to use; temer, to fear; ver, to see etc. Ex.:

Le veo salir, I see him go out.

Pienso salir, I have a mind to go out.

i Déjame dormir! Let me sleep!

Quiero imitar al pueblo en el vestido,

En las costumbres sdélo & los mejores. (Rioja.)
In (my) dress I'll imitate the people,

In manners (I shall imitate) only the best.

NB. Frequently the infinitive with que is used elliptically,
nada or algo being understood, as:

Déme V. que comer (= algo que comer).
Give me something to eat.
Aqui no hay que ver (= nada que ver).
Here is nothing to be seen.

2) The infinitive with de is used after those verbs
and adjectives etc. which take their complement likewise
with this preposition, as:

Luego que fueron capaces de amar.

As soon as they were able to love.

No dejaba el principe de lograr alguna ocasion.

The prince did not omit (forget) to avail himself of any
opportunity. ;

E's tiempo de irse. It is time to be gone.
The Infinitive Mood.’ 327

Observations. a) The locutions with acabar and venir de,
mentioned Less. 17, II. P., fall under the same rule. Ex.:

Vengo de hacerlo, I have done it just now.
Acaban de dar las 8, it has just struck 8 o'clock.

b) De obtains after deber, haber, and ser, with the signifi-
cation “must”, “ought”, “to be obliged” etc. Ex.:
Debe de ser enfermo, he must be ill.
Es de presumir, it is to be presumed.
He de dar, I must (shall) give*).

(After deber, however, de may also be omitted without altering
much the signification.)

c) If despues (after) precedes an infinitive, it should be
followed by de, as:

Despues de haber escrito la carta.
After having written the letter.

3) The infinitive with @ is used (besides the case we
enumerated when speaking of this preposition, Less. 11,
II. P.) after verbs importing to teach or to learn, to
begin**), and to continue, as:

Aprende & escribir, he learns writing.

Continud & hablar, he continued to speak.

Comienza & nevar, it begins to snow.

Liste ministro se dedicé a dar & E. una ensefianza. (Isla.)
This minister tried to give HE. an education.

Observation. As we said before, the infinitive with d is
used after iv, in order to express a future, close at hand, as:

Voy @ oir misa, I shall go to (hear) mass.

 

 

*) Haber de . ... with an infinitive following, very often ex-
presses futurity. In all Romance languages this tense is nothing
eise but the infinitive coupled with the Latin verb habere, to have,
and contracted with it into one word. Thus:

Spanish: anaré = amar-he, literally: I have to love =
I shall love.
Italian: sentiréd = sentir-ho, » I have to feel =
I shall feel.
French: parlerai = parler-dt, » I have to speak =
I shall speak.
Portuguese: partiret = partir-hei, » I have todivide=

I shall divide.
**) Tf, on the contrary, the starting point of an action or its
final point is indicated (the latter with acabar), the prepos. por
should be used, as:
Comenzé por decirme, he began by telling me (= first he
told me). .
Acabé por decirme, be finished by telling me.
8328 Lesson 21.

The infinitive with @ is used after words implying evrelu-
sion, like solo, zltimo, primero etc. Ex.:
Fut el solo a hablar.
I was the only one to speak.

4) The infinitive with por is often used instead of
an acecssory sentence beginning with porque, because,
as ete. Ex.:

Por ser pobre esta muchacha. As the girl is poor (in
lieu of porque esta muchacha es etc.).
NB. 1) For por with dejar, estar, and quedar, as well as
para after estar see Lesson 12, IL. P.
2) It sometimes occurs that a whole accessory sentence is
inserted between the infinitive and its preposition, as:
Tenia una tropa de caballeria de respeto para, en caso que
perdiese la jornada, poderse, salvar (Herrera).
He held a troop of cavalry in reserve, that he might save
himself, in case he should lose the battle.

Traduccion. 22.

1. Writing and drawing are useful accomplishments. Too
much sleeping is quite as injurious as too much eating or
drinking. Rising early is very wholesome (tr. conducive for
[the] health). We heard the babbling of the rivulets and the
singing of the birds in the wood. Reading bad books is a
very bad thing (¢r. very prejudicial) for young people. At
the entrance (infin.) of the (nom.) monarch the whole assem-
bly rose. At daybreak (to break, rayar), the enemy began
to bombard the fortress. The sowing of the grain takes place
in (the) autumn, after the harvest. You must not tell your
brother that I (have been) was here to-day. I wish to speak
to your uncle; is he at home? Let me eat in peace! When
I shall have had my dinner (tr. after having eaten), I shall
tell you everything you want to know. Please (tr. servirse)
to (walk in) enter, Sir! Why do not you let (go) out'the dog?

2. I saw the footman entering (in) the house, but I do
not know whether he is still there. Come, children, it is time
to go to bed! The intention to do one’s duty is not suffi-
cient, for we do not judge the intention (infin. querer), but
the action (tr. the doimg). What o’clock is it? It has just
struck 9 o’clock. The king had just arrived, when the can-
nonade began. A priest must be adorned with all the virtues.
I have nothing to do. Do give me something to do! I had
still to write three letters, when the servant told me that the
post had (already) departed. After having read the novel, I
sent the book to my sister. After having shut the door, he
also shut the windows of the room. Does the child begin to
speak? Who teaches your sister smging? He began with
The Infinitive Mood. 3829

calling the footman a thief; and concluded by giving him
a box on the ear. As he is an impostor, he will be punished.
He has been punished for having been an impostor.

Reading Exercise.
Tercer sitio de Gerona.
Continuacion.

Dispuso el 15 Don Mariano Alvarez una salida con in-
tento de retardar los trabajos del sitiador y aun de destruir
algunos de ellos. Dirigiala Don Blas de Fournds, y aunque
al principio todo lo atropellaron los nuestros, no siendo des-
pues convenientemente apoyadas las dos primeras columnas
por otra que iba de respeto, tuvieron que abrigarse todas de
la plaza sin haber recojido el fruto deseado.

Aportilladas de cada vez mds las brechas, y apagados
los fuegos del frente atacado, trataron los enemigos de dar
el asalto. Pero dntes enviaron parlamentarios, que segun la
invariable resolucion de Alvarez, fueron recibidos 4 cafionazos.

Irritados de nuevo con tal acojida corrieron al asalto 4
las cuatro de la tarde del 19 de setiembre, distribuidos en
cuatro columnas de 4 2000 hombres. Enténces brillaron las
buenas y previas disposiciones que habia tomado el gober-
nador espafiol: alli mostré este su levantado dnimo. Al toque
de la generala, al tafiido triste de la campana que llamaba 4
somaten, soldados y paisanos, clérigos y frailes, mujeres y
hasta nifios acudieron 4 los puestos de antemano y 4 cada
uno sefialados. En medio del estruendo de doscientas bocas
de cafion y de la densa nube que la pdlvora levantaba, ofrecia
noble y grandioso espectdéculo la marcha magestuosa y orde-
nada de tantas personas de diversa clase, profesion y sexo.
Selenciosos todos se vislumbraba sin embargo en sus sem-
blantes la confianza que los alentaba. Alvarez 4 su cabeza
grave y denodado, representdbase 4 la imaginacion en tan
horrible trance & la manera de los héroes de Homero, superior
y descollando entre la muchedumbre, y cierto que si no se
aventajaba 4 los demas en estatura como aquellos, sobrepu-
jaba & todos en resolucion y gran pecho. Con no menor orden
que la marcha se habian preparado los refuerzos, la distribucion
de municiones, la asistencia y conduccion de heridos.

Presentése la primera columna enemiga delante de la
brecha de Santa Lucia que mandaba el irlandes Don Rudolfo
Marshall. Dos veces tomaron en ella pié los acometedores y
dos veces rechazados quedaron muchos de ellos alli tendidos.
Tuvieron los espafioles el dolor de que fuese herido grave-
mente y de que muriese 4 poco el comandante de la brecha
Marshall, quien dntes de expirar prorumpid diciendo «que
moria contento por tal causa y por nacion tan brava».
330 Lesson 22.

Otras dos columnas enemigas emprendieron arrojadamente
la entrada por las brechas mds anchurosas de Alemanes y
San Cristébal, en donde mandaba Don Blas de Fournas. Por
algun tiempo alojdronse en la primera, hasta que al arma
blanca los repelieron los rejimientos de Ultonia y Borbon,
apartandose de ambas destrozados por el fuego que de todos
lados Novia sobre ellos. No ménos padecid otra columna
enemiga que largo rato se mantuvo quieta al pié de la torre
de la Gironella. Herido aqui el capitan de artilleria Don
Salustiano Gerona, tomd el mando provisional Don Carlos
Beramendi, y haciendo las veces de gefe y de subalterno
causd estrago en las filas enemigas.

Conversacion.
éCon qué intento dispuso D. Mariano Alvarez una salida?
éRecojieron los espafioles el fruto deseado?
éCuando trataron los franceses de dar el asalto?
éCémo fueron recibidos los parlamentarios?
éCudndo corrieron al asalto?
éQué hicieron los sitiados al toque de la generala?
éQué noble y grandioso espectaculo se ofrecia entdnces?
{Como representdbase Alvarez 4 la imaginacion?
éDonde presentdése la primera columna enemiga?
éQué dolor tuvieron los espafioles?
éQué dijo Marshall antes de expirar?
éDonde emprendieron otras dog columnas de los franceses
la entrada?
é8e alojaron en la primera brecha?
éQuién fué herido al pié de la torre de la Gironella?
éQuién tomé el mando provisional?

Twenty-second Lesson.
The Infinitive (continued).

III. The Infinitive taking the place of an acces-
sory sentence.

As the infinitive specifies neither person nor number,
it is peculiarly suited for the contraction of such acces-
sory sentences where the references to person and num-
ber are self-evident and therefore need not be expressed. __
This contraction is admissible:

1) If both the principal and the accessory sentence
have the same subject (the same as in French), as:
The Infinitive. 331

Figurdbase ver & Enrique ya en el trono.
Lit. He fancied to see Henry already on the throne.

(Without contraction: He fancied that he saw etc.)

2) If the subject of the subordinate clause obtains in
the principal sentence as a dative or accusative case:
Castigué al niiio, por haberme dicho una mentira.
I punished the child for having told me a falsehood.
(Without contract.: I punished the child, because it had
told me etc.)

Here the subject of the subordinate clause (it) occurs as
an accusative (the child) (in Spanish a dative: al nifio) in
the principal sentence.

NB. After the verb decir, to say, to tell, this contrac-
tion is not allowable; just as in English; thus:

Dice que ha visto & tu primo en el teatro (and not haber

visto etc.).

He says he has seen your cousin at the theatre.

Observation. It must *be well understood, that the con-
traction of a subordinate sentence by means of the infinitive
is not indispensable, but only feasible. If the speaker wish
to lay a greater stress on the accessory idea, he will prefer
employing a subordinate sentence. Thus the phrase: He did
not know whom to apply to, may be translated:

No supo & quién volverse,
i. e. with a contraction, as in English, or:
No supo & guién debia volverse.
He did not know to whom he should apply.

3) Though the subject of the accessory clause does not
obtain in the principal sentence, the so-called subjective
and objective sentences i. e. sentences which take the
place of the subject or of the object of the principal
sentence, may yet be contracted. If I say, for instance: It
is known that this man is a knave (or passively contrac-
ted: This man is known to be a knave), the subordinate
clause: that this man is a knave, appears as the subject
of the whole sentence which might be thus expressed:
The knavery of this man is known. Here the con-
traction is admissible, and the whole sentence is
translated:

Es notorio ser este hombre un picaro.

(A misconception cannot arise in such a case, because the
contracted subordinate clause has its own subject: este hombre.)
332 Lesson 22.

4+) With other subordinate sentences the contraction
is possible, though the subject of the accessory clause
does not obtain in the principal sentence, provided no
misconception can thereby arise. Ex.:

Su misantropia proviene de no haber nunca tenido un
verdadero amigo.

His misanthropy is caused hy his never having had a
true friend.

Here the subject of the principal sentence, ‘“misan-
thropy”, could not possibly be considered as the subject
of the contracted accessory clause.

If, however, a misconception could arise, the subject
of the subordinate sentence ought to be added to the in-
finitive, as in 3) (see ante); thus:

Antes de salir yo, llegd mi amigo.
Before I went out, my friend arrived.
(Antes de salir lleg6 mi amigé, before going out my friend
arrived, would not make sense.) ‘

VB. After despues (after) the infinitive should be pre-
ceded by de, as:

Despues de haber pesado bien las razones....
After having well weighed the reasons....

Traduccion. 23,
(The subordinate sentences are to be rendered by the infinitive.)

1. I gave (have given) the gardener a fee, because he has
taken my letter to the post. I do not know how J shall get
rid of this tedious company (how to get. ..). My poor friend,
you never know how to spend your time! I know my bro-
ther too (muy) well, to think he could have done such
a thing. Did not you tell me yesterday, that your cou-
sin (f.) had gone to England? I have told you that you
must be quiet. The footman affirmed that he had not seen
his master (all day long) the whole day. You will do well
of you (en) do not send him more money than he wants for
his journey. It is well known (admitido) that Cervantes and
Calderon are the greatest poets of Spain (or: C. and C. are
known to be.  .). When I arrived in Paris, I did not
know which of my relations I should go to see first. Bring
me something to drink! Is there anything to be seen in
this church? Before I have received his letter, I cannot go
away. Before my uncle has arrived, I cannot depart.

2. After having arrived, we visited the cathedral, the
museum, and the public gardens of the town. As (por) the
The Infinitive. 333

rain was too heavy, my friend lent me his umbrella. By (con)
always doing our duty, we gain the esteem of our superiors.
If (a) you take (tomar) this way, you will attain your end.
If («) one hears you, you know everything better than other
people. If (4) I had not seen it with my own eyes, I should
not believe it. It is not enough that he (sobre) does not work, he
also wants to be paid better than the others. If (para) one
wishes to attain one’s end, one must carefully examine every
circumstance. After having teazed me long, he finally desisted
from his request. It is enough for me, that I know it. Be-
fore the physician arrived, the patient had died. You have
offended me too much*), that I could (para) forgive you this
injury.
Reading Exercise.
Tercer sitio de Gerona.
Continuacion.

Amenazaron tambien estas durante el asalto los fuertes
* del Condestable y del Calvario igualmente sin fruto.

Tres horas duré funcion tan empefiada, todas las brechas
quedaron llenas de caddveres y despojos enemigos; el furor
de los sitiados era tal, que dejando 4, veces el fusil, sus
membrudos y esforzados brazos cojian las piedras sueltas de
la brecha y las arrojaban sobre las cabezas de los acomete-
dores. Don Mariano Alvarez animaba 4 todos con su ejemplo,
y aun con sus palabras precavia los accidentes, reforzaba los
puntos mds flacos, y arrebatado de su celo no escuchaba la
voz de sus soldados que encarecidamente le rogaban no acu-
diese como lo hacia 4 los parajes mds expuestos. Perdieron
los enemigos varios oficiales de graduacion y cerca de 2000
hombres: entre los primeros contaron al coronel Floresti que
en 1808 subid & posesionarse del Monjuich de Barcelona en
donde enténces mandaba Don Mariano Alvarez. De _ los
espafioles cayeron aquel dia de 300 4 400, en su ntmero
muchos oficiales que se distinguieron sobremanera y algunas
de aquellas mujeres intrépidas que tanto honraron 4 Gerona.

Escarmentados los franceses con leccion tan rigorosa,
desistieron de repetir los asaltos 4 pesar de las muchas y
espaciosas brechas, convirtiendo el sitio en bloqueo, y con-
tando por auxiliares, como dice Saint-Cyr, el tiempo, las ca-
lenturas y el hambre....

En aquel dia Uegd igualmente al campo enemigo el
mariscal Augereau, habiendo partido el 5 el general Saint-Cyr.
Con el nuevo jefe frances, y posteriormente, acudieron 4 su
ejército socorros y refuerzos estrechandose en extremo el blo-

*) Too much with that following is simply translated muy or
mucho.
33d Lesson 22.

queo. Levantaron para ello los sitiadores varias baterias,
formaron reduetos, y Negé a tanto su cuidado, que de noche
ponian perros en las sendas y caminos, y ataban de un espacio
4 otro cuerdas con cencerros y campanillas; por cuya arti-
mafia cojidos algunos paisanos, atemorizdronse los pocos que
todavia osaban pasar con viveres 4 la cuidad.

La escasez por tante tocaba al witimo punto. Los mis
de los habitantes habian ya consumido las provisiones que
cada uno en particular habia acopiado, y de ellos y de los
forasteros xefugiados en la plaza veianse muchos caer en las
calles muertos de hambre. Apénas quedaba otra cosa en los
almacenes para la guarnicion que trigo, y como no habia
molinos. supliase la falta machacando el grano en almireces
6 cascos de bomba, y 4 veces entre dos piedras; y asi y mal
cocido se daba al soldado. Nacieron de aqui y se propaga-
ron todo género de dolencias, estando henchidos los hospitales
de enfermos y sin espacio ya para contenerlos. Sdlo de la
guarnicion perecieron en este mes de octubre 793 individuos,
comenzando tambien 4 faltar hasta los medicamentos mds co-
runes. Inutilmente D. Joaquin Blake traté por tercera vez
de introducir socorros. De Hostalrich aproximdse el 18 de
octubre a Bafiolas, y aguanté el 20 un ataque del enemigo,
cuya retaguardia picd despues O’Donnell hasta los anos de
Gerona. Acudiendo el mariscal Augereau con nuevas fuerzas,
retirdse Blake camino de Vique, dejando solo 4 O'Donnell en
Santa Coloma, quien 4 pesar de haber peleado esforzadamente,
cediendo al numero tuvo que abandonar el puesto y todo su
bagage. Quedaban asi 4 merced del vencedor las provisiones
reunidas en Hostalrich que pocos dias despues fueron por la
mayor parte destruidas, habiendo entrado el enemigo en la
villa, si bien defendida por los vecinos con bastante empefio.

Conversacion.

éQué dice el autor del furor de los sitiados?

éQué hizo Don Mariano Alvarez?

¢Cudntos hombres perdieron los enemigos?

é-Quién fué muerto entre los oficiales de graduacion?
éCuantos cayeron de los espafioles aquel dia?

éQué hicieron entdnces los franceses?

éQué conto el general frances Saint-Cyr por sus auxiliares?
éQuién llegé en el campo enemigo?

éCudndo hubo partido el general Saint-Cyr?

4Qué hicieron los sitiadores para estrechar el bloqueo?
éA qué punto Hegd su cuidado?

éCual fué el efecto de esta artimafia? ~

é2Qué dice el autor de la escasez en la viudad?

éQué quedaba en los almacenes para la guarnicion?
The Gerundio. 885

¢Como supliase la falta de molinos?

éQué fué la consecuencia de tal alimento (food)?

éCudntos individuos de la guarnicion perecieron en este mes?

éQué traté inutilmente Don Joaquin Blake?

éQué tuvo lugar el 18 y el 20 de octubre?

éQué hizo Blake, cuando el mariscal Augereau acudié con
nuevas fuerzas?

éQué tuvo que hacer O’Donnel?

éQué hicieron los franceses de las provisiones reunidas en
Hostalrich ?

Twenty-third Lesson.

The Gerundio.

§ 1. This invariable form either replaces an acces-
sory sentence introduced by one of the conjunctions be-
cause, as, whilst, if etc., or it corresponds exactly to the
English present participle*). It commonly refers to the
‘subject of the principal sentence, and expresses an action
simultaneous with that which the principal sentence im-
plies. At the same time it loses nothing of its verbal
nature and may, therefore, govern complements. If we
consider the following sentence:

Los cabreros, tendiendo por el suelo unas pieles de

ovejas, aderezaron su rustica cena.

The goat-herds, spreading on the ground some sheep-

skins, prepared their rural meal,

we observe:

1) that the gerundio tendiendo (spreading) refers to
the subject, los cabreros (the goat-herds);

2) that the action expressed by tendiendo is simul-
taneous with that which the principal sentence, Los ca-
breros aderezaron su rustica cena, imports;

3) that the gerundio has retained its verbal nature,
and thus governs its own complements, wnas pieles (some
sheep-skins).

It must be distinctly understood that the gerundio
cannot take the place of the English present participle,

*) Or rather to the English gerund, commonly misnamed
. “pres, part.”, because it bears the same form.
836 Lesson 23.

if this latter be*) an equivalent for an adjective, in the
sentence:
He sent four parcels containing 20 pieces of cloth.
lt is true, that the Spaniard likewise often says:
Envié cuatro fardos conteniendo veinte piazas de pano,
exactly as in English, but this mode of speaking is in-
correct and must be considered a Gullicism.

§ 2. Where no misconception can possibly arise, the
gerundio may quite as well refer to the accusative case*),
especially if this accusative is a personal pronoun and no
substantive. Thus:

Le hallaron durmiendo, they found him sleeping.

Here “sleeping” can by no means refer to the subject “they”,

as this would be nonsense, but only to “him”, i. e. the accusative
case, and thus a misconception added is impossible.

§ 3. If the gerundio is used instead of an accessory
sentence whose subject is a substantive, this substantive
should be added to the gerundio, as:

Faltindoles los viveres, los sitiados sc rindieron a dis-

crecion.

As provisions were wanting, the besieged surrendered at

discretion.

(Here the subordinate clause: as provisions etc. has its own
subject, which is therefore added to the gerundio.)

§ 4. If the gerundio refers to the subject (nomina-
tive), it takes its place before the verb; when referring
to the accusative, it follows the verb, as:

Saliendo me dijo. Going out, he told me (saliendo

refers to the nominative él [he], suppressed in dijo).
Whereas: :

Le oigo hablando con un hombre desconocido,

I hear him speaking with an unknown man (hablando

refers to the accusative le [him]).

Note. In the latter case, however (i. e. where the gerundio
refers to the accusative case), the infinitive mood is preferred,
provided no peculiar stress be laid on the duration of the action
(see 8),

*) No gerund, but a participle.

**) The gerundio often does refer to the-accusative in Spanish,
whilst in Italian such constructions (see my Italian Grammar,
5th edit.: On the gerundio) are carefully avoided, being now quite
obsolete. — In English the present participle frequently refers
to the accusative, as in the above sentence: They found him
sleeping.
The Gerundio. 337

§ 5. Commoniy the gerundio is used in lieu of the
imfimitive mood with the verbs importing seeing, hearing,
feeling etc. But it cannot be employed with these verbs,
if the verb of the principal sentence is in a past tense,
or if the accusative is a substantive (see § 2). Thus:

La vi*) escribir (and not la vi escribiendo).
I saw her writing (Vi is a past tense).
Oigo hablar dé mi hermano (and not oigo hablando di... .).

I hear my brother speaking. (The accus. my brother is
a substantive.)

§ 6. Sometimes the infinitive conveys another mean- -
ing than the gerundio: the former being passive, the
latter active. Thus:

Le vi dibujando, I saw him drawing = as he drew.
Le vi dibujar, I saw him as he was drawn.

8 7. The English participles present and past are
often preceded by a preposition. as: On seeing him; whilst
reflecting; after having said; when born etc. In Spanish
en is the only preposition that sometimes precedes the
gerundio (like en the French gérondif), thus denoting that
the action imported by the principal sentence is closely
joined to the action expressed by the gerundio. Ex.:

Lo primero que en naciendo**) hacemos, es llorar.
The first thing we do, on being born, is to cry.

§ 8. In order to express duration, the verbs andar,
estar, ir, ser, and venir are joined to the gerundio; if
the continuation of the action is to be marked, caminar,
continuar, and seguir are used in the same way. Ex:.:

Le acconsejaba redoblase su ternura para ir disponiendo
el corazon de Blanca.

He advised him to redouble his tenderness, in order to
soften Blanca’s heart.

La grave enfermedad que le iba consumiendo.
The severe illness by which he was consumed (which
was consuming him).

*) If the duration is to be marked with a past tense, the
respective tense of estar is coupled with the gerundio of the
principal verb (see 8). nee

#*) In Italian the gerundio with in only occurs with ancient
writers. Thus:

Se Vardor fallace. .
Duré molt’? anni im aspettando un giorno. (Petrarca, Son, 21.)
Spanish Grammar. 2
338 Lesson 23.

Los grandes del reino esttn aguardando vuestras
ordenes.
The grandees of the kingdom are awaiting your orders.

Se va haciendo tarde. It is growing late.
il ave vino volando, The bird flew hither.
Siguieron durmiendo.

They slept on (they continued sleeping).

Poco « poco fué haciéndose rico.

Little by little he became rich.

$ 9. Very seldom the gerundio takes the termina-
tions of diminution, as: corriendito, running a little;
callandéto, being silent for a little while. These Gerunds
have lost their signification as verbs and are simply adverbs.

Observation. In modern Spanish, the Gerund, which by
its nature can only express a time preceding to, or simuita-
neous with, the time of the principal sentence, is also some-
times erroneously employed in such cases, where the action
denoted by the gerundio must be logically considered as
following that implied by the principal sentence. If we examine
the sentence:

Las tropas se hicieron fuertes en un convento, teniendo
pronto que rendirse, despues de una vigorosa resis-
‘tencia....

The troops intrenched themselves in a convent, being
soon obliged to surrender, after a vigorous resi-
stance ....,

we easily perceive, that the action of “intrenching them-
selves’ must be previous to the action of “surrendering”. The
gerundio teniendo que.... is therefore incorrect. A logical
construction of the sentence would be:

Despues de una vigorosa resistencia las tropas, hacién-
dose fuertes en un convento, tuvieron pronto que
rendirse.

After a vigorous resistance the troops, intrenching them-
selves in a convent, were soon obliged to surrender.

Or still more exactly:

Despues de una vigorosa resistencia las tropas, habién-
dose hecho fuertes en un convento, tuvieron pronto que
rendirse.

After a. v. r. the troops having intrenched themselves
in a convent, were soon obliged to surrender.
The Gerundio. "1 839

Traduccion. 24.

1. Handing me the book, he requested me to send it
at once to the bookbinder. Whilst uttering these words, she
began to sob. I found him smoking his cigar. Napoleon,
‘after having conquered half Europe, began the war against
Russia. These people pass their nights (with) gambling.
Whilst we were (estar) talking, we heard an alarm of fire.
If we always speak (ger.) the truth, we obey the voice of
our conscience. Jf you study (ger.) with zeal, you will soon
make great progress in the sciences. As he entered (ger.),
he told me to shut the window. I saw him talking to your
aunt. This is your father’s portrait; I saw him sitting for
it. Yesterday the painter was in this drawing-room; I saw
him painting. Yesterday I heard the new singer singing. Whilst
(miéntras) I listened to the singer (f.) [tr. Whilst I heard (with
estar) the singer singing], the footman entered (in) the room.

2. This man is a sluggard; in order to avoid working
[tr. for (para) not working (infin.)], he will (tr. ir) sell (ger.)
all (cuanto) he possesses. The agent is (tr. andar) running
about the town all day long. By following your advice,
I have sustained a great loss. As (en) I went out (de) of
the room, I saw him shutting (inf.) the door. After having
read the letter to the end (tr. acabar), he turned round and
ordered me to be silent. As the singer (m.) is ill to-day,
the opera cannot be performed. Speaking thus to me (gerund.
with en), he gave me his (the) hand. I looked everywhere
(ir with, ger.) for my hat, but I could not find it. I have
been (fr. estar) waiting for you three hours, but you did not
come. What are you doing there (tr. estar)? I am waiting
for my master. The wearied soldiers slept through the whole
(seguir with gerund.) night. The heat is increasing (ir with
ger.) from hour to hour. Let us go; it is growing (tr. irse-
haciendo) night.

Reading Exercise.

Tercer sitio de Gerona.
Continuacion.

Dentro de Gerona no did noviembre lugar 4 combates
excusados y peligrosos en concepto de los sitiadores. Reno-
varonse si de parte de estos las intimaciones, valiéndose de
paisanos, de soldados y hasta de frailes que fueron 6 mal
acojidos 6 presos por el gobernador. Pero las ldéstimas y ca-
lamidades se agravaban més y mds cada dia. Las carnes de
caballo, jumento y mulo de que poco antes se habian empezado
& echar mano, ibanse apurando ya por el consumo de ellas,
ya tambien porque faltos de pasto y alimento los mismos ani-
males se morian de hambre comiéndose entre si las crines.

22%
340 ‘ Lesson 23.

Cuando la codicia de algun paisano arrostrando riesgos
introducia comestibles, vendianse estos 4 exorbitantes precios:
costaba una gallina diez y seis pesos fuertes, y una perdiz
cuatro, Adquirieron tambien extraordinario valor aun los
animales mas inmyndos, habiendo quien diese por un raton
cinco reales vellon, por un gato treinta. Los hospitales sin
medicinas ni alimentos, y privados de luz y fuego, habianse
convertido en un cementario en que sdlo se divisaban no
hombres sino espectros. Las heridas eran por lo mismo casi
todas mortales y se complicaban con las calenturas contajiosas
que a todos aflijian, acabando por manifestarse el terrible
escorbuto y la disenteria ... .

La larga y empefiada resistencia de Gerona did ocasion
a que la Junta central concediese 4 sus defensores iguales
gracias que a los de Zaragoza, y provocé en el principado de
Catalufia el deseo de un levantamiento general para ir a
socorrer la plaza. Con intento de levar 4 cabo esta ultima
medida, se junté en Manresa antes de concluirse noviembre
un congreso compuesto de individuos de todas clases y de
todos los puntos del principado.

Pero ya era tarde. Tras del triste y angustiado verano
en el que ni las plantas dieron flores, ni cria los brutos, legdé
el otofio que humedo y Iuvioso acrecié las penas y desastres.
Desplomadas las casas, desempedradas las calles, y reman-
sadas en sus hoyos las aguas y las inmundicias quedaron
los vecinos sin abrigo, y respirdbase en la ciudad un ambiente
infecto, corrompido tambien con la putrefaccion de cadaveres’
que yacian insepultos en medio de escombros y ruinas. Ha-
bian perecido en noviembre 1578 soldados y casi todas las
familias desvalidas. La naturaleza toda parecia muerta.

Conversacion.

éTuvieron lugar combates dentro de Gerona en noviembre?

éQué hicieron los sitiadores?

éEn qué condicion (state) halldbase la ciudad?

éComo describe el autor el hambre que reinaba (reigned, pre-
vailed) en Gerona?

éCudnto costaba una gallina?

¢Cudnto costaba una perdiz?

éA qué precio pagdbanse ratones y gatos?

éQué dice el autor de los hospitales?

éA qué did ocasion la empefiada resistencia de Gerona?

éQué provocé la junta central en el principado de Catalufia?

éComo fué compuesto el congreso de Manresa?

éCual era la condicion de la ciudad?

¢Cudntos soldados habian perecido en noviembre?
The Participle. 841

Twenty-fourth Lesson.

The Participle.

The Spanish gerundio so fully represents the present
participle, that the latter has entirely lost its verbal na-
ture, and has become a mere adjective or substantive,
as: doliente (fr. doler, to hurt), ‘ill’, or a “sick person”.
For this reason we have never given the present participle
in the conjugation. We therefore pass at once to the

Participio pasado.
§ 1. As we stated Less. 28, I. P., the past parti-
ciple coupled with haber is always invariable*), as:
He visto una hermosa comedia.
I have seen a fine comedy.

Les he referido el suceso y no me lo han creido.
I have informed them of the success, and they have not
believed me.

Las cerezas que he comprado son buenas.
The cherries which. I have bought, are good.

§ 2. If, on the contrary, the participle is joined to
ser or estar, or to one of the auxiliaries dejar, llevar,
(see II. P., Less. 17), it becomes on adjective, and must
therefore agree with the substantive in gender and number,
aS: La casa es edificada. The house is built.

La carta esta acabada. The letter is finished. _
Los asesinos fueron muertos. The robbers were killed.
Yo quedé muy agradecida a tus beneficios.

I (f) was very thankful for your benefits.

§ 3. If the participle is coupled with tener instead
of haber, it likewise agrees in gender and number with
its complement, as:

Tengo leida la carta. I have read the letter.
Tengo comprados algunos libros.
I have bought some books.

*. In ancient Spanish, however, examples are met with where
the past participle, coupled with haber, agrees with its foregoing
complement, as in French and Italian. Thus:

Ayquellas (= aquellas) lees (= leyes) que habemos (= hemos)
fechas (= hechas).
These laws which we have made.
(Partidas del rey D. Alfonso X.)
342 Lesson 24.

§ 4. Tener may be used with a participle that
governs no accusative; in which case the participle is
mrariable, as:

Les tengo escrito largamente sobre esta materia.
I have written them in full about this matter.

Vote. The learner should be well aware, that in such a
case tener may only be used with verbs that are not ge-
nerally neuter, but which are only used as such, so that the
proper complement of the verb results from the context. In
the above sentence, the complement of tengo escrito would be
lo que era menester, that which was necessary, or lo que
convenia, or something similar. As this complement is no
word, but a proper subordinative sentence, the participle cannot,
of course, agree with it. The whole sentence would be
properly:

Les tengo escrito largamente sobre esta materia lo que
era menester.

Neuter verbs do not admit of the construction with
tener, as such verbs can never govern a complement. Thus
it would be utterly impossible to say: Tengo sido cénsul
en Hamburgo, I have been consul at Hamburg. or tenian
adolecido de la epidemia reinante, they were taken ill with
the prevailing epidemy; but the only correct mode would be:
He sido cénsul etc. and habian adolecido.

Note. Nor is the construction with tener admissible with
reflective verbs. Thus we may say: Les tiene instruidos, he has
instructed them, but never: El se tiene instruido, be has instructed
himself. The sentence may only be: El se ha instruido.

§ 5. Very often the participle replaces an accessory
sentence (the Latin Ablativus absolutus). In such a case
the participle agrees in gender and number with the word
to which it refers, and the auxiliary is omitted. Ex.:

Recobrados*) los espiritus, volvid Blanca en si.

After having recovered her senses, B. became again
conscious of herself.

Abrazada esta idea, quedé un poco mds tranquilo.

After having taken this resolution, he became a little
more quiet.

§ 6. Very often these participles are preceded by
despues de.... (less frequently by dntes de, before and
luego de, as soon as), for the sake of greater emphasis, as:

*) Properly: habiendo recobrado ete.
The Participle. 3438

La hija de aquel Manfredo, & quien despues de ven-
cido y muerto el padre, habia tratado con una
barbarie sin ejemplo... .

The daughter of that Manfred whom, after having con-
quered and killed her father, he had treated with a
barbarity without example... . °

Antes de dada la orden, before the order was given.

Luego de acabada la misa, as soon as mass was over.

Again, the personal pronoun in the nominative case
sometimes occurs with such participles, as:

Despues de yo muerta. (Santa Teresa.)

When I shall be dead.

§ 7. Constructions like: Tomado que fuese uno de
ellos (i. e. castillos, as soon as one of them would have
been taken) have been explained Less. 14, II. P. (“On
the saubordinative conjunctions.”) It must be distinctly
understood, that this is no instance of an absolute par-
ticiple, like those mentioned under 5, but simply of an
inversion, where que is used instead of a compound con-
junction. The ordinary construction of the above sen-
tence would be:

Iuego que uno de ellos fuese tomado ete.

Finally, we add an alphabetical register of the participles
mentioned p. 184, I. P., which, besides their passive form,
have an active signification, and are therefore adjectives.
Those most in use are the following:

Acostumbrado, wont, accustomed.

agradecido, thanked and grateful.

atrevido, dared » bold.

cenado, supped » having supped.
comido, eaten » having eaten.
hablado, spoken » eloquent.
callado, (having) been silent » taciturn.
cansado, fatigued, tired » tiresome.
comedido, measured » prudent.
desesperado, despaired » desperate.
disimulado, concealed » malignant.
entendido, understood » intelligent.
esforzado, encouraged » bold.
fingido, feigned » fallacious.

leido, read

medido, measured
mirado, looked
moderado, moderated
ocasionado, caused

learned, well-read.
cautious.
circumspect,
moderate, temperate.
litigious.
344 Lesson 24.

osado, dared and daring, dauntless.
parado, arrested » slow, lazy.

parecido, seemed » similar, seeming.
partido, devised » liberal, munificent.
pausado, paused, put » considerate.
porfiado, persisted, quarrelled » stubborn.

precavido, taken care or heed » cautious.

preciado, appreciated » vain, affected.
presumido, presumed » presuming, haughty.
recatado, concealed » chaste, modest, cautious.
sabido, known » intelligent, prudent.
sacudido, hit, hurt ete. » harsh, audacious.
sentido, felt » sensible.

sufrido, suffered » suffering.
transcendido,| investigated,

eo transcended » sharp, acute.

valido, esteemed » beloved, favourite.

NB. With ancient authors, and even now sometimes in
poetry, some verbal adjectives derived from intransitive verbs,
like nacido, born; muerto, died, dead; ido, gone; venido, come;
vuelto, come back, returned; Uegado, arrived, occur with the
auxiliary ser. The difference is exactly as in English. Ex.:

Son idos, they are gone; han ido, they have gone.

es vuelto, he is returned (a good while); ha vuelto, he
has returned.

es muerto, he is dead; ha muerto, he has died.

son llegados, they are arrived; han llegado, they have
arrived.

Traduccion. 25.

1. Have you read the letter (which) my sister wrote
(has written) to me? No, I have not yet read it. The apples
which the (maid-) servant -has bought, are finer than those
which you have bought. Is the new church already conse-
crated? No, it will be consecrated next Sunday. At these
words he became (tr. quedar) very sad. The enemies were
pursued to the very ramparts of the fortress. Have you
read the book which I (have) sent you by the footman? No,
I have bought several new novels which I shall read before
I begin (infin.) reading your book. . He has spoken much
with my father about the matter, but I do not know which
resolution he has taken. After supper was (part.) over, we
all went home. After the king had died (part.), bis son
ascended the throne. When I was informed of this accident,
I at once departed for Paris. After (despucs de. ..) having
eo your curiosity, you might at once have done your
task.

2. After that the town had been conquered, the heroic de-
fenders left the place of their glory. Though we are forsaken
The Participle. 3845

by all our friends, we shall nevertheless do our duty. Tor-
mented by remorse, the criminal at last confessed his guilt.
It is difficult to reconcile people offended (hurt) in their
vanity. Ill-bred children are the hardest punishment of their
parents. After (the) peace had been re-established, the troops
returned to their homes. Scarcely had the word been spoken,
when the whole assembly broke forth into an enormous uproar.
Have you spoken to the judge? I spoke (have spoken) to
him yesterday, but he gave me little hope for the prisoner.
After having paid (arreglar) the bill, I told the waiter to
send my trunk to the station. After these preparations had
been made, we went to (meet) the company.

Reading Exercise.
Tercer sitio de Gerona.
Fin.

Los enemigos aunque prosiguieron arrojando bombas é
incomodando con sus fuegos, no habian renovado sus asaltos
escarmentados en sus anteriores tentativas. Mas el mariscal
Augereau viendo que el congreso catalan excitaba 4 las armas
& todo el principado, recelése que Gerona con su constancia
diese tiempo 4 ser socorrida, por lo que en la noche del 2
de diciembre, aniversario de la coronacion de Napoleon, em-
prendié nuevas acometidas. Ocupdé de resultas el arrabal del
Carmen, y levantando aun mds baterias, ensancho las anti-
guas brechas y abridé otras. El 7 se apoderd del reducto de
-la ciudad y de las casas de la Gironella, en donde sus sol-
dados se atrincheraron y cortaron la comunicacion con los
fuertes, 4 cuyas guarniciones no les quedaba ni aun de su
eorta racion sino para dos dias. Imperturbable Alvarez, si
bien ya muy enfermo, dispuso socorrer aquellos puntos, y
eonsiguidlo enviando trigo para otros tres dias, que fué cuanto
pudo recogerse en su extrema penuria....

Dudaban todos qué resolver, jtanto les pesaba someterse
al extrangero! pero habiendo recibido aviso del congreso ca-
talan de que su socorro no llegaria con la deseada prontitud,
tuvieron que ceder 4 su dura estrella, y enviaron para tratar
al campo enemigo 4 Don Blas de Fournds. Acogid bien 4
este el mariscal Augereau, y se ajusté entre ambos una
capitulacion honrosa y digna de los defensores de Gerona.
Entraron los franceses en la plaza el 11 de diciembre por la
puerta del Areny*), y asombraronse al considerar aquel monton
de caddveres y de escombros, triste monumento de un malo-
grado heroismo. Habian alli perecido de 9- a 10,000 personas,
entre ellas 4000 moradores.

*) In Catalanian ny is pronounced like Spanish fi.
346 Lesson 24.

Carnot nos dice que consultando la historia de los sitios
modernos, apénas puede prolongarse mds alld de 50 dias la
defensa de las mejores plazas; jy la de la débil Gerona duré
siete meses! Atacdronla los franceses conforme hemos visto
con fuerzas considerables, levantaron contra sus muros 40
baterias de donde arrojaron mds de 60,000 balas y 20,000
bombas y granadas, valiéndose por fin de cuantos medios
seflala el arte. Nada de esto sin embargo rindié 4 Gerona,
«solo el hambre», segun el dicho de un historiador de los
enemigos, «y la falta de municiones pudo vencer tanta obsti-
nacion», Toreno.

Conversacion.

éRenovaron los enemigos sus asaltos?

éQué vid el mariscal Augereau?

é4Qué hizo en la noche del 2 de diciembre?

éQué ocuparon los franceses ?:

éQué acontecid el 7 del mes?

éEn qué condicion se hallaban las guerniciones de los fuertes?
éQué dispuso Alvarez ?

Qué consiguid el gobernador ?

4Qué aviso recibieron los sitiados del congreso catalan?
«Quien fué enviado al campo de los franceses?

4Cémo acogid el mariscal al parlamentario?

Qué se ajusté entre ambos?

4Qué hubo lugar el 11 de diciembre?

4Cuadntas personas habian perecido en Gerona?

éQué dice Carnot de los sitios modernos?

4Cudnto tiempo duré la defensa de Gerona?

éCual fué el numero de las baterias francesas?

éCudntas balas y bombas arrojaron en la ciudad?

éQué dice un historiador frances del tercer sitio de Gerona?

‘
347

Poesias,

Los dos conejos.

Por entre unas matas!,
Seguido de perros,
(No diré corria),
Volaba un conejo.

De su madriguera2
Salid un compafiero,
Y le dijo: tente3,
Amigo, égqué es esto?

éQué ha de ser? responde:
Sin aliento lego.....
Dos picaros galgos#
Me vienen siguiendo.

Si (replica el otro)
Por alli los veo....
Pero no son galgos. —
éPues qué son? — Podencos5, —

Qué gpodencos dices?
Si, como mi abuelo.
Galgos, y muy galgos:
Bien visto lo tengo —
Son podencos: vaya§,
Que no entjendes de eso —
Son galgos te digo —
Digo que podencos.

En esta disputa
Llegando los perros,
Pillan descuidados
A mis dos conejos.

Los que por cuestiones
De poco momento
Dejan lo que importa,
Llévense? este ejemplo. Iriarte.

 

1 Thicket, cluster of bushes. 2 burrow. 3 tente == ten-te,
stop. * infamous greyhounds. 5 bloodhounds, limers. § forsooth!

Tmay take an example.
348 Poesias.

De un pajarito.

Yo vi sobre un tomillo!
Quejarse un pajarillo,
Viendo su nido amado,
De quien era candillo?,
De un labrador robado:
Vile’ tan congojado4,
Por tal atrevimiento,
Dar mil quejas al viento,
Para que al cielo santo
Lleve su tierno Manto®
Lieve su triste acento.
Ya® con triste armonia
Esforzando el intento,
Mil quejas repetia,
Ya® cansado callaba,
Y al nuevo sentimiento
Ya sonoro volvia:
Ya circular volaba,
Ya rastrero’ corria,
Ya pues de rama en rama
Al rustico seguia,
Y saltando en la grama8,
Parece que decia:
Dame, rustico fiero,
Mi dulce compafiia:
Y que le respondia
El rustico: no quiero. Villegas.

El gozque® y el macho” de noriat'.
Bien habrd visto el lector
En hosteria 6 convento
Un artificioso invento
Para andar el asador?2.

Rueda de madera es
Con escalones: y un perro
Metido ew aquel encierro
La da vueltas!8 con los piés.

Parece que cierto can}
Que la maquina movia,
Empez6 4 decir un dia:

Bien trabajo; y équé me dan?

1 Thyme. 2 properly: chieftain, here: master. 38 Vile ==
le vi, I saw it. # sorrowful. 5 sorrow, grief, French: plainte,
Lat. plango. & ya.... ya, now .... now. 7 fr. rastro, trace:
following the trace. S herb. 9 little dog. 10 mule. 11 scoop-wheel
(of a waterwork). 12 Andar el asador, to turn the spit. 18 La
da vueltas, turns it. 14 dog.
Poesias. 349

iCémo sudo! ay, infeliz!
Y al cabo por grande exceso,
Me arrojaran algun hueso.
Que sobre! de esa perdiz.

Con mucha incomodidad
Aqui la vida se pasa:
Me iré, no sdlo de casa,
Mas tambien de la ciudad.

Apénas le dieron suelta?,
Huyendo con disimulo3,
Llegé al campo, en donde un mulo
A una noria daba vuelta.

Y no le hubo visto bien,
Cuanda dijo: ¢Quien va alld?
Parece que por acd
Asamos carne! tambien.

No aso carne; que® agua saco®,
El macho le respondié.
Eso tambien lo haré yo,
Saltd7 el can, aunque estoy flaco.

Como esa rueda es mayor,
Algo mds trabajaré.
éTanto pesa? ... Pues gy qué?
éNo ando la de mi asador?
Me habrian de dar, sobre todo,
Mas racion, tendré mas gloria.....
Entéuces el de la noria
Le interrumpid de este modo:
Que se vuelva le aconsejo
A voltear su asador;
Que esta empresa es superior
A las fuerzas de un gozquejo®.
jMiren el mulo bellaco 9,
Y qué bien le replicé!
Lo mismo he leido yo
En un tal Horacio Flaco,
Que 4 un autor da por gran yerro!?
Cargar con lo que despues
No podra llevar: esto es,
Que no ande la noria el perro. Iriarte.

1 Subj. pres. of sobrar, to be left. 2 Dar suelta, to set free.
3 con disimulo, by stealth; huir c. d., to abscond. * Here, too,
we roast meat. 5 que instead of sino que, but. 6 agua saco (tr.
sacar), I pump up water. 7 saltar, to cry in a passion. 8a
disdainful, diminutive of gozque, a miserable little dog. 9° cun-
ning, sly. 1° Dar por yerro, to consider a fault.
350 Poesias.

El drbol de la esperanza.

Al pié nace de una cunal
El arbol de la esperanza;
Y al son del viento se mece?,
Fragil cual trémula cafia:

S6lo un instante por dicha
Manso’ el cétiro le halaga‘,
Que el cierzo5 helado lo seca,
Y el austro§ ardiente lo abrasa.

Crece, da vistosas flores,
Y el fruto rara vez cuaja’:
Cual tierna flor del almendro,
Muere por nacer temprana.

Cuanto mds alto se encumbra8,
Mas peligros le amenazan;
Como el cedro que descuella,
Los rayos del cielo llama;

Reposa el aguila altiva
En su copa!? soberana:
Miéntras insectos traidores
Estéin royendo su planta:

Hondas echa las raices!!;
Léjos extiende sus ramas;
Y apénas da escasa sombra!2,
La Muerte su tronco tala?3,

Martinez de la Rosa.

Un ruisenor".

jCon qué alegres cantares,
O ruisefior, celebras
Tu dicha; y de tu amada
El tierno afan recreas!

Ella del blando nido
Te responde halagiiefia 1
Con piadas1® suaves;

Y se angustia, si cesas.

1 Construct: EI drbol de la esperanza nace al pié de una
cuna. 2to move gently. 8 soft. 4 to flatter, to caress. 5 the
north-wind. 6 south-wind. ‘ripens. 8 it rises. 9% is prominent.
10 top. it is firmly rooted (lit. strikes deep roots). 12 dar
sombra, to cast a shade. 13 to fell, to hew down. — 14 nightingale.
15 flattering, caressing. 16 chirping.
Poesias. 351

Las otras aves callan;
Y el eco tus querellas1
Con voz aduladora
Repite por la selva?:

Miéntras el cefirillo
De envidioso te inquieta,
Las hojas agitando
Con ala? més traviesa?.

Tu cesas y te turbas:
Atento 4 donde suena
Te vuelves; y cobarde
De ramo en ramo vuelas>.

Mas luego ya seguro,
Los silbos® le remedas’,
El triunfo solemnizas,
Y tornas® 4 tus quejas.

Asi la noche engafias.
Y el sol, cuando despierta,
Aun goza la armonia
De tu amorosa vela?.

iO avecilla felice!®
O! jqué bien la fineza1!
De tu pecho encareces!2%
Con tu voz lisonjera!

Ya pias1® carifioso!;
Ya mds alto gorgeas 15;
Ya al ardor que te agita,
Tu garganta enagenas.

O! no ceses, no ceses
En tan dulce tarea,
Que en delicias de oirte
Mi espiritu se anega1é.

Asi el cielo tu nido
De aschanzas!? defienda,
Y tu amable consorte
Fiel por siempre te sea.

1 The complaints. 2 wood. 3 ala, wing, here flap of the
wing. 4 active, not still. 5 volar, to fly. 6 the whistling (of
the wind). 7 remedar, to imitate. ®to return. °% waking. —
10 poet. for feliz. 11 faith. 12 to advance (the price). 18 thou
chirpest. 14 tenderly. 15 gorgear, to warble. 16 lit. to drown one’s
self: to be lost. 1% pursuits.
352

Poesias.

Yo tambien soy cautivo:
Tambien yo, si tuviera
Tu piquito! agradable,

Te diria.mis penas;

Y en sencillos? coloquios
Alternando las letras?
Tu cantdras tus glorias
Y yo mi fé sincera.

Que los malignos hombres
Burlan de la inocencia;
Y expdnese 4 su risa
Quien su dicha les cuenta. | Melendez.

Las riquezas.

Ya de mis verdes afios5
Como un alegre suefio
Volaron diez: y nueve,

Sin saber donde fueron.

Yo los llamo afligido;
Mas pararlos® no puedo
Que cada vez mds’ huyen
Por mucho que les ruego:

Y todos los tesoros,
Que guarda en sus mineros
La tierra, hacer no pueden
Qué cesen un momento.

Pues léjos8, ea, el oro:
éPara qué el afan necio®

De enriquecerse 4 costa
De la salud y el suefio?

Si mds gozosa vida
Me diera 4 mi el dinero,
O con él las virtudes
Encerrdéra en mi pecho,

Buscdralo, ay! entdénces
Con hidrépico anhelo!;
Pero si esto no puede,
Para nada lo quiero. Melendez.

1 Little bill. 2 simple. 8 here = las coplas, the verse;

the nightingale and the poet singing a verse in turn, 4 for.
5 verdes afos, the years of youth. 6 parar, to retain. 7 cada vez
mds, (they flee) ever further. S away with.... 9% afan necio,
the foolish trouble. 10 with a feverish desire.
Poesias. 353

Fantasia nocturna.

«Para mi da la tierra tantos frutos;
Nada! el pez, pace el bruto, el ave anida;
Dos mundos cifie el mar; luce la luna,
Alumbra el sol, y las estrellas brillan . . .»
Asi en la humilde grama? reclinado3,
Vuelta‘ al cielo la frente envanecida
Sofiaba el hombre, y de natura toda
Sefior, arbitro y duefio se imagina.

En la copa de un dlamo® cercano
Un aguila caudal posaba altiva;

Tal como ardiendo el rayo’? entre sus garras§
Al pié de Jove se ostentara® un dia: ©

«gQuién como yo? (con su ademan!0 clamaba)11
Las aves por su reina me apellidan:

Si me place abatirme hasta la tierra,

Cruzo de un vuelo la region vacia;

Y el rumor de mis alas al ganado!2

Y al misero pastor atemoriza:

Si me place, remdntome hasta el cielo;

Clavol’ en el sol la penetrante vista;
Y la nube que aterra al débil hombre,

Miro bajo mi planta suspendida.»

Al pié del arbol mismo, entre la yerba,
La luciérnaga!> apénas relucia;
Mas no ménos sus titulos de gloria
Recordaba 4 la par!6 desvanecida:
«Los prados me did el cielo por recreo,
Las flores por morada y por delicia;
Para mi sola el céfiro las abre,
Las tifie el sol, y el alba las rocia:
Me apaciento en la tierra como el bruto:
Las alas bato como el ave altiva;
Doy luz al hombre, que camina’d ciegas1’;
Y alguna estrella mi esplendor envidia.»

Entre tanto los astros lentamente
Por el cielo su curso proseguian;
La tierra reposaba silenciosa;

El mar en la ribera se dormia....

1 Fy. nadar, to swim. 2 grass. 3 lying. 4 Part. pas. of volver.
5 fel hombre] se imagina senor, drbitro y duefio de toda [la]
natura. 6 poplar. 7 lightning. § fang, talon. 9° subj. condic. fr.
ostentarse: may have appeared. 10 mien. 11 clamar, obsol. for
Uamar, to call. 12 cattle." 13 clavar, to fix. 14 planta, sole of the
foot. 15 glow-worm. 16 dla par, equally, quite as... 17 blind-folded.

Spanish Grammar. 23
354 Poesias.

Mas con un soplo el viento mecidé! el arbol,
Y al aguila ahuyenté despavorida;
Desgajése? una rama, y turbé el suefio
Del que® sefior del orbe se creia;
Y al miserable insecto hundid# en el polvo
Una hojilla® del arbol desprendida®.
Martinez de la Rosa.

Convite’ en el campo.

Debajo de aquel arbol
De ramas bulliciosas8,
Donde las auras suenan,
‘Donde Favonio® sopla;

Donde sabrosos trinos 1°
El ruisefior entona,

Y entre quejuelas rie
La fuente sonorosa,

La mesa, 6 Nise, ponme
Sobre las frescas rosas,
Y de sabroso vino
Llena, lena la copa.

Y bebamos alegres
Brindando!2 en sed beoda!%
Sin penas, sin cuidados,
Sin sustos, sin congojas.

Y deja que en la corte,
Los grandes, en buena hora,
De adulacion servidos
Con mil cuidados coman.

Iglesias.

Consuelo celestial.

Dime, padre, comun, pues eres justo,
éPor qué ha de permitir tu providencia,
Que, arrastrando!* prisiones la inocencia,
Suba! la fraude 4 tribunal augusto?

é Quién da fuerzas al brazo, que robusto
Hace 4 tus leyes firme resistencia?

1 Shook. 2 was wrenched from the trunk. 3del que, of
him who. 4 threw, cast. 5a little leaf; Lat. folium, Fr. feuille.
6 fallen. 7 feast, dinner. 8 rustling. 9 West-wind (poet.).
10 trills. ll entre quejuelas rie, laughs between low moans, i.
e. laughs and complains at the same time. 12 drinking.
13 drunken. 14 arrastrar prisiones, to imprison. 15 subir a tri-
bunal, to sit in judgment.
Poesias. 355

éY qué el celo, que mas fas reverencia,
Gima! 4 los piés del vencedor injusto?

Vemos, que vibran? victoriosas palmas
Manos inicuas’; la virtud gimiendo
Del triunfo en el injusto regocijo4.
Esto decia yo, cuando riendo
Celestial ninfa® aparecié, y me dijo:
éCiego, es la tierra el centro de las almas?
Argensola.

Judit.

Cuelga® sangriento de la cama al suelo
El hombro, diestro del feroz tirano,
Que opuesto al muro de Betulia en vano
Despidis” contra si rayos8 al cielo.

Revuelto con el ansia® el rojo velo
Del pabellon!! 4 la siniestra!? mano,
Desrubre!® el espectdculo inhumano
Del tronco! horrible convertido en hielo},

Vertido Baco!® el fuerte arnés!’ afeals,
Los vasos y la mesa derribada,
Duermen las guardas que tan mal emplea;

Y sobre la muralla coronada
Del pueblo de Israel, la casta Hebrea
-Con la cabeza resplandece armada.
Lope de Vaga.

El] timulo” de Felipe II.

Viva Dios, que ma espanta esta grandeza,
Y que diera un doblon por describilla?0:
Porque ¢& quién no suspende y maravilla
Esta maquina?! insigne, esta braveza?

Por Jesucristo vivo, cada pieza
Vale mds de un millon; y que es mancilla2?
Que esto no dure un siglo. jO gran Sevilla!
Roma triunfante en dnimo y riqueza:

1 Gemir, to groan. 2 vibrar, to wave. 3 wicked. 4 festi-
val. 5nymph. 6 Colgar, to hang down. 7 provoked. 8 flashes
of lightning. 9% anxiety. red. tent. 12 left. 18 discloses,
reveals. 14 trunk. 15 convertido en hielo (yelo), converted into
_frost == grown cold and dead. 16 Vertido Baco, the spilt Bacchus,
i.e. wine. 17 harness. 18 stains. 19 Catafalque. 20 descridilla ==
describir-la. 71 magnificent building, pile. 22 es maneilla, it is

a pity. aad
356 Poesias.

Apostaré que la ae del muerto
Por gozar este sitio hoy ha dejado
El cielo de que goza eternamente.

Esto oyé un valenton; y dijo; «es cierto
Lo que dice voacé!, seor? soldado,
Y quien dijere lo contrario, miente».

Y luego en continente®
Cald4 el chapeo®, requirid la espada,
Mir6 al soslayo®, fuése?, y no hubo nada.
Cervantes.

A Marco Bruto.

Yaces al fin, 6 del valor latino
Ultima gloria, por tu fuerte mano;
Tentado habiendo reducido en vano
La libertad al orbe, de ella indino§.

Tu virtud te guid, perdid el destino;
Pero pudo tu esfuerzo soberano |
Mostrar que fuiste capitan romano,

Y solo sucesor de Bruto dino’.

iO si agena ambicion no te moviera
A desnudar el hierro, 6 ya desnudo,
Siquiera 4 tus hazafias la ventura!

Que ninguno tu igual en Roma hubiera:
Mas trdjote en desprecio el hado1®crudo
Del grave seso y la virtud segura.
Herrera.

 

1 Voacé, obsol. for Vuestra merced. 2 seor == Senor. 3% en
continente, forthwith. 4 fr. calar, he pulled his hat over his brow.
5 chapeo, a hat without brim. 6 mirar al soslayo, to look askance.
7 fuése == se fué, went away. 8 indino, poet. and obsol. form for
indigno, unworthy. 9 dino inst. of digno, worthy. 10 fate.
357

Prosa

Armas y Letras.

Quitenseme! delante los que? dijeron que las letras hacen
ventaja 4 las armas, que les diré, y sean quien se fueren,
que no saben lo que dicen: porque la razon que los tales
suelen decir, y 4 lo que ellos mds se atienen, es que los tra-
bajos del espiritu exceden 4 los del cuerpo, y que las armas
sdlo con el cuerpo se ejercitan, como si fuese su ejercicio
oficio de ganapanes®, para el cual no es menester mds de
buenas fuerzas, 6 como si en esto que llamamos armas los
que las profesamos, no se encerrasen los actos de la forta-
leza, los cuales piden para ejecutallos# mucho entendimiento:
6 como si no trabajase el dnimo del guerrero que tiene 4 su
cargo un-ejército 6 la defensa de una ciudad sitiada, asi con
el espiritu como con el cuerpo. Si no, véase si se alcanza
con las fuerzas corporales 4 saber y conjeturar el intento del
enemigo, los designios, las estratajemas, las dificultades, el
prevenir los dafios que se temen, que todas estas cosas son
acciones del entendimiento en quien no tiene parte alguna
el cuerpo. Siendo pues ansi® que las armas requieren espi-
ritu con las letras, veamos ahora cual de los dos espiritus,
el del letrado 6 el del guerrero, trabaja mds: y esto se vendra®
& conocer por el fin y paradero? 4 que cada uno se encamina,
porque aquella intencion se ha de estimar en més que tiene
por objeto mds noble fin. Es el fin y paradero de las letras
(y no hablo ahora de las divinas8, que tienen por blanco? llevar
y encaminar las almas al cielo, que 4 un fin tan sin fin como
este ninguno otro se le puede igualar), hable de las letras hu-

1 Quitenseme = quiten-se-me, may (they) vanish from my eyes
(those who). 2 los que, those who. 3 drudges. * ejecutallos =
ejecutar-los. 5 ansi = asi. ®se vendrd ad ..., one will, one
shall.... 7 aim. 8la divinas (i. e. letras), theology. 9 tener
por blanco, to aim at...
358 Prosa,

manas, que es su fin poner en su punto la justicia distribu-
tiva, y dar & cada uno lo que es suyo, entender y hacer que
las buenas leyes se guarden: fin por cierto generoso y alto,
y digno de grande alabanza; pero no de tanto como merece
aquel 4 que las armas atienden, las cuales tienen por objeto
y fin la paz, que es el mayor bien que los hombres pueden
desear en esta vida: y asi las~primeras buenas nuevas que
tuvo el mundo y tuvieron los hombres, fueron las que dieron
los angeles la noche que fué nuestro dia, cuando cantaron en
los aires: Gloria sea en las alturas, y paz en la tierra d los
hombres de buena voluntad: y la salutacion que el mejor Maestro
de la tierra y del cielo ensefid 4 sus allegados y favorecidos,
fué decirles que cuando entrasen en alguna casa dijesen: Pag
sea en esta casa; y otras muchas veces les dijo: Mi paz os
doy, mi paz os dejo, pag sea con vosotros: bien como joya y
prenda dada y dejada de tal mano, joya que sin ella en la
tierra nien el cielo puede haber bien alguno. Esta paz es
el verdadero fin de la guerra, que lo mismo es decir armas
que guerra. Presupuesta pues esta verdad, que el fin de la
guerra es la paz, y que en esto hace ventaja al fin de las
letras, vengamos ahora 4 los trabajos del cuerpo del letrado
y & los del profesor! de las armas, y véase cuales son mayores.
De tal manera y por tan buenos términos iba prosiguiendo
en su platica Don Quijote, que obligé 4 que por entdénces nin-
guno de los que escuchdndole estaban le tuviesen por loco:
antes, como todos los mds eran caballeros 4 quien son anexas
las armas, le escuchaban de muy buena gana, y él prosiguid
diciendo: digo pues, que los trabajos del estudiante son estos:
principalmente pobreza, no porque todos sean pobres, sino
por poner este caso en todo el extremo que pueda ser; y en
haber dicho que padece pobreza, me parece que no habia que
decir mds de su mala ventura, porque quien es pobre no tiene
cosa buena: esta pobreza la padece por sus partes, ya en
hambre, ya en frio, ya en desnudez, ya en todo junto; pero
con todo eso no es tanta que no coma, aunque sea un poco
mas tarde de lo que se usa, aunque sea de las sobras de los
ricos, que es la mayor miseria del estudiante esto que entre
ellos llaman andar 4 la sopa®, y no les falta algun ageno
brasero? 6 chimenea que si no calienta, 4 lo ménos entibie su
frio, y en fin la noche duermen debajo de cubierta. No quiero
llegar 4 otras menudencias, conviene 4 saber, de la falta de
camisas y no sobra de zapatos, la raridad y poco pelo del
vestido, ni aquel ahitarse con tanto gusto cuando la buena

1 Profesor de las armas, he who professes arms = the warrior,
the knight. 2 andar da la sopa, to eat the soup dealt out to the
poor at the gates of convents. 3 hrasier.
Prosa. 859

suerte les depara algun banquete. Por este camino que he
pintado, dspero y dificultoso, tropezando aqui, .cayendo alli,
levantandose acullé, tornando 4 caer acd, llegan al grado que
desean; el cual alzando 4 muchos, hemos visto que habiendo
pasado por estas Sirtes, y por estas Scilas y Caribdis, como
llevados en vuelo de la favorable fortuna, digo que los hemos
visto mandar y gobernar el mundo desde una silla, trocada
su hambre en hartura, su frio en refrigerio, su desnudez en
galas, y su dormir en una estera! en reposar en holandas? y
damascos: premio justamente merecido de su virtud; pero
contrapuestos y comparados sus trabajos con los del milite
guerrero, se quedan muy atras en todo. Pues comenzamos en’
el estudiante por la pobreza y sus partes veamos si es mas
rico el soldado, y veremos que no hay ninguno mds pobre en
la misma pobreza, porque estd atenido 4 la miseria de su
paga, que viene 6 tarde 6 nunca, 6 4 lo que garbeare? por
sus manos con notable peligro de su vida y de su conciencia,
y a veces suele ser su desnudez tanta, que un coleto acu-
chillado le sirve de gala y de camisa, y en la mitad del in-
vierno se suele reparar de las inclemencias de cielo, estando
en la campafia rasa‘, con solo el aliento de su boca, que como
sale de lugar vacio, tengo por averiguado que debe de salir
frio contra toda naturaleza. Pues esperad, que espere que
legue la noche, para restaurarse de todas estas incomodidades
en la cama que le aguarda, la cual si no es por su culpa,
jamas pecard de estrecha®, que bien puede medir en la tierra
los piés que quisiere, y revolverse en ella & su sabor®, sin
temor que se le encojan las sdbanas’. Lléguese pues 4 todo
esto el dia y la hora de recibir el grado de su ejercicio, llé-
guese un dia de batalla, que alli le pondran la borla en la
cabeza, hecha de hilas para curarle algun balazo que quiza
le habrd pasado las sienes, 6 le dejard estropeado de brazo 6
pierna: y cuanda esto no suceda, sino que el cielo piadoso le
guarde y conserve sano y vivo, podrdser que se quede en
la mesma® pobreza que antes estaba, y que sea menester que
suceda uno y otro reencuentro, una y otra batalla, y que de
todas salga vencedor para medrar en algo; pero estos milagros
vense? raras veces. Pero decidme, sefiores, si habeis mirado
en ello: gcudn ménos son los premiados por la guerra, que
los que han perecido en ella? Sin duda habeis de responder
que no tienen comparacion, ni se pueden reducir 4 cuenta los

1 Rush-mat (woven with esparto). 2 holandas, fine Dutch
linen. 8 garbear, an Arragonese and slang term: to prig. 4 open
field. 5 jamas pecard de estrecha, will never be too narrow. 8 a
su sabor, to his heart’s content. 7 se le encojan (fr. encojerse, to
shrivel) las sébanas, lest the sheets be too small for him. 8 mesma

= misma. 9% vense = se ven.
360 Prosa.

muertos, y que se podrdin contar los premiados vivos con tres
letras de guarismo!. Todo esto es al reves en los letrados;
porque de faldas, que no quiero decir de mangas, todos tienen
en que entretenerse: asi que, aunque es mayor el trabajo del
soldado, es mucho menor el premio. Pero 4 esto se puede
responder que es mas ficil premiar 4 dos mil letrados, que
4 treinta mil soldados; porque aquellos se premian con darles
oficios que por fuerza se han de dar 4 los de su profesion,
y a estos no se pueden premiar sino con la mesma hacienda
del sefior & quien sirven; y esta imposibilidad fortifica mas
la razon que tengo. Pero dejemos esto aparte, que es labe-
‘into de muy dificultosa salida, sino volvamos 4 la preemi-
nencia de las armas contra las letras: materia que hasta ahora
esta por averiguar?, secun son las razones que cada una de
su parte alega: y entre las que he dicho, dicen las letras que
sin ellas no se podrian sustentar las armas, porque la guerra
tambien tiene sus leyes y estdé sujeta 4 ellas, y que las leyes
caen debajo de lo que son letras y letrados. A esto responden
las armas que las leyes no se podrdn sustentar sin ellas, porque
con las armas se defienden las republicas, se conservan los
reinos, se guardan las ciudades, se aseguran los caminos, se
despojan® los mares de corsarios; y finalmente, si por ellas no
fuese, las republicas, los reinos, las monarquias, las ciudades,
los caminos de mar y tierra estarian sujetos al rigor y 4 la
confusion que trae consigo la guerra el tiempo que dura, y
tiene licencia de usar de sus privilejios y de sus fuerzas: y
es razon averiguada que aquello que mds cuesta, se estima
y debe de estimar en mds. Alcanzar alguno 4 ser eminente
en letras, le cuesta tiempo, vijilias, hambre, desnudez, vaguido
de cabeza, indijestiones de estémago, y otras cosas 4 estas
adherentes, que en parte ya las tengo referidas: mas llegar
uno por sus términos 4 ser buen soldado, le cuesta todo lo
que 4 el estudiante, en tanto mayor grado, que no tienen
comparacion, porque 4 cada paso estd 4 pique* de perder la
vida. ¢Y qué temor de necesidad y pobreza puede legar ni
fatigar al estudiante, que llegue al que tiene un soldado que
hallandose cercado en alguna fuerza y estando de posta 6
guarda en algun rebellin 6 caballero®, siente que los enemigos
estan minando hacia la parte donde él estd, y no puede apar-
tarse de alli por ningun caso, ni huir el peligro que de tan
cerca le amenaza? Solo lo que puede hacer, es dar noticia
& su capitan de lo que pasa para que lo remedie con alguna

1 con tres letras de guarismo, with the slightest notions of
arithmetic. 2 esté por averiguar, is not yet decided. 3 se des-
pojan los mares, the sea is purged of .... 4 estd cd pique, he
is in danger. 5 caballero a cavalier (term used in fortification)
i. e. a mound rising on the rampart of a fortress.
Prosa. 361

contramina, y él estarse quedo temiendo y esperando, cuando
improvisamente ha de subir 4 las nubes sin alas y bajar al
profundo sin su voluntad. Y si este parece pequefio peligro,
veamos si se le iguala 6 hace ventaja el de embestirse dos’
galeras por las proas en mitad del mar espacioso, las cuales
enclavijadas y trabadas, no le queda al soldado mas espacio
del que conceden dos piés de tabla del espolon1; y con todo
esto, viendo que tiene delante de si tantos ministros de la
muerte que le amenaza, cuantos cafiones de artilleria se
asestan de la parte contraria, que no distan de su cuerpo
una lanza, y viendo que al primer deseuido de los piés iria
& visitar los profundos senos de Neptuno, y con todo esto,
con intrépido corazon, levado de la honra que le incita, se
pone 4 ser blanco de tanta arcabuceria, y procura pasar por
tan estrecho paso al bajel contrario: y lo que mds es de
admirar, que apénas uno ha caido donde no se podré levantar
hasta el fin del mundo, cuando otro ocupa su mismo lugar;
y si este tambien cae en el mar, que como 4 enemigo le
aguarda, otro y otro le sucede, sin dar tiempo al tiempo de
sus muertes: valentia y atrevimiento el mayor que se puede
hallar en todos los trances de la guerra. jBien hayan ? aque-
llos benditos siglos que carecieron de la espantable furia de
aquestos endemoniados instrumentos de la artilleria, 4 cuyo
inventor tengo para mi? que en el infierno se le esté dando
el premio de su diabdlica invencion, con la cual did causa
que un infame y cobarde .brazo quite la vida 4 un valeroso
caballero, y que sin saber como 6 por donde, en la mitad
del coraje y brio que enciende y anima 4 los valientes pechos,
llega una desmandada* bala, disparada de quien quizd huy6é
y se espanté del resplandor que hizo el fuego al disparar la
maldita maquina, y corta y acaba en un instante los pensa-
mientos y vida de quien la merecia gozar luengos® siglos!
Cervantes.

Plutareo.

Este gran modelo esté siempre presente para acusar de
temeridad 4 todos los que se atrevan 4 seguir el mismo ca-
mino. En vano se le tacha® de difuso é importuno en sus
digresiones, de creer como una vieja en suefios, ordculos y
prodigios, de dar 4 genealogias, las mds veces” inciertas 6
fabulosas, un valor impropio en la pluma de un fildsofo:
éQué importa todo esto comparado con la animacion que
tienen sus pinturas, y la importancia de los sucesos que re-

1 the beam of the prow of a ship. 2 Bien hayan, happy
those ... 3fengo para mi, I think. 4 spent. 5 luengo,
obsol. for largo, long. & se le tacha, he is charged with being...
7 las mds veces, lit. in most cases: generally, commonly.
362 Prosa.

fiere? Es preciso desengafiarse: Plutarco no ha sido igualado
hasta ahora, y es de creer que no lo sera jamas.

Su libro manifiesta ser de un sabio acostumbrado al
‘espectéculo de las cosas humanas, que no se admira de nada,
y por lo mismo aplaude y condena sin exaltacion; que cuenta
y dice de buena fé todo lo que su memoria le sugiere, y va
esparciendo en su camino mdximas profundas y consejos
excelentes. Se le compara 4 un caudaloso! rio, que lleva
sin ruido y sin esfuerzo por una dilatada campifia, y la riega
y fertiliza toda con sus aguas. Pero esto no bastaria 4 dar
& su obra el grande interes que tiene, sin la naturaleza de
su argumento, unico en su especie. Vénse desde luego luchar
en talentos, en virtudes y en gloria las dos naciones mds
célebres de la antigiiedad, una por las artes y el ingenio,
otra por su fuerza y grandeza. Se fija despues la vista en
los retratos que ofrece aquella vasta galeria, cada uno sor-
prende por el movimiento que imprime en su nacion. Este
le da leyes, el otro costumbres; el uno la defiende de la in-
vasion, el otro la arrebata 4 las conquistas, este quiere salvara
de la corrupcion que la contagia, y aquel enciende la antorcha
que ha de ponerla en combustion: todos ostentando caractéres
eminéntemente dispuestos ya 4 la virtud, ya 4 los talentos,
ya. a los vicios, ya 4 los crimenes; y casi todos en esta con~
tinua agitacion pereciendo violentamente, por el movimiento
y reaccion de que son causa, producen al fin el vértigo. que
los devora 4 ellos mismos. No, la historia moderna no puede
presentar un espectéculo tan enérgico y tan sublime; y 4
pesar de cuantos medios se puedan apurar, ninguno de
nuestros personages, por grandes que se supongan, se ha
encontrado en la situacion de Solon, terminando la anarquia
de Atenas por unas leyes sabias y moderadas, pedidas por
todo un pueblo y obedecidas por él; de Licurgo, arrancando
de un golpe 4 la molicie los ciudadanos de Esparta, y suje-
téndolos 4 un régimen de hierro para que no fuesen sujetados
de nadie; de Temistocles, burlando en el estrecho de Salamina
la arrogante ambicion de Jerces: de Mario enfin, vencedor
de los Cimbros que iban 4 tragarse? la Italia.

Costumbres Francesas,

El pueblo frances es sin disputa el que mds rie de todos
los pueblos de la tierra. Por lo comun se rie de los demas
pueblos. En sus novelas, en sus poemas, en sus folletines 3, en
sus dramas y sobre todo, en sus zarzuelas * 6 vaudevilles siempre
hay algun ingles que toma té, que esta serio, que coge una

1 Powerful. 2 iban d tragarse, were going to devour (to
swallow). 8 feuilletons of newspapers. 4 operette.
\ Prosa, 263

turcal, 6 algun aleman que bebe cerveza, que fuma la pipa,
que revuelve los tizones de la chimenea, 6 que hace cualquiera
de esas cosas que el autor frances ha visto por casualidad2 en
algun individuo de la nacion de que se estdé riendo. Y es
tanta la mania de reir en los franceses, que cuando no se
rien de los extranjeros, se rien de si mismos, y es menester
confesar que en esta parte suelen ser sobresalientes3, por
poco exactos que estén en su retrato. Es que en Francia hay
muchisimo ridiculo; la faz caricaturesca de esta nacion es vasta,
por no decir inmensa, y él que quiera reirse de los franceses
tiene materia de sobra®; la unica dificultad que se presenta es,
como ellos suelen decir, ?embarras du choix.

Ridmonos pues tambien de los franceses; nosotros que, en
su concepto®, somos graves y recogidos como monjes cartujos’,
6 anacoretas tebanos, y ridmonos de sus ridiculeces que son
por cierto dignas y muy dignas de la caricatura.

Negar que el pueblo frances ha tenido y tiene una multi-
tud de hombres grandes en todo género, seria demostrar
practicamente que se ignora de todo punto la historia, 6 que
un ridiculo espiritu de nacionalidad mal entendida extraviaria®
nuestro juicio; pero acaso sea el pueblo que mayor numero
de necios y majaderos® con pretensiones de sabios esta abri-
gando, amen! de una multitud de farsantes que en todas lag
esferas hormiguean, explotando 4 las mil maravillas!! la boba
credulidad de los que tienen la desgracia de escucharlos.
Abre Paris escuelas de toda clase de conocimientos, donde
se recibe sdélida y abonada educacion de profesores beneméri-
tos; pero ese mismo Paris tiene unos 12 Campos Eliseos, donde
se ensefia, mejor diremos, donde se parodia grotescamente la
ensefianza de las aulas. Tan pronto es un descarado Dulea-
mara18 vestido de turco, griego 6 chino, que montado en un
cabriolé, estrafalario14 botiquin!® con visos!® de tienda ambu-
lante de perfumes, llama la atencion del publico con una orques-
tra formada de dos clarinetes, un bombo!’, un tambor y una
trompeta, para anunciarle la curacion radical y momentdnea de
diez enfermedades incurables, por medio de un jabon que ni
las manchas!8 quita, demostrando su portentosa habilidad con
legajos de certificados de academias, de curas parrocos, pre-
fectos, maires19, diputados, pares®°, comadrones y drogueros,

1 Who gets drunk. 2 by chance, by accident. 3 eminent.
4 por poco exactos, however inexact. 5 in abundance. 6 in their
opinion. 7 Carthusian monks. 8 to mislead our judgment. 9 dunce,
dolt. 10 amen; here: besides. 11 dé las mil maravillas, most
excellently. 12 its. 13 Dulcamara, a quack (a personage of Rossini’s
opera Elusire d’amore). 14 queer. 15 medicine-chest. a6 con visos
de, shaped like. 17 kettle-drum. 18 takes out the stains of grease

x.

etc. 19 mayors. 20 peers (of France).
8364 Prosa. '

y deslumbrando 4 la multitud, que atonita le escucha, admira
y aplaude; primero con una arenga fogosa, luego con las
monedas de plata y oro que vacia de una espuerta en otra,
en ostentacion de una insignificante parte del producto de sus
maravillosas curaciones. Tan pronto es un truhan! que ha
colocado encima de una mesa una mala maquina eléctrica,
una botella de Leyden y otros instrumentos fisicos de uso
desconocido para él y su ayudante con cara de fullero? que
hace rodar el disco, ambos 4 dos andan buscando de entre
el concurso 4 los imbéciles que quieran recibir la conmocion
de un formidable chispazo eléctrico para librarse de todos los
males pasados, presentes y venideros, por Ja miserable canti-
dad de un sueldo? 6 sea poco mds de cuatro maravedises.
Aqui un charlatan que con una mala navaja y peores manos
promete arrancar las muelas cariadas* sin mds dificultad ni
dafio que si quitase de la guitarra sus clavijas, arrancandose
sus dientes y los de sus compadres doscientas veces al dia,
como prueba practica y experimental de su extraordinaria
agilidad y maestria. El pobre recluta, el inexperto provincial
y la incauta nifiera que, rabiando de dolor 6 acordandose de
que algun dia lo ha tenido, se abandonan 4 la estupida fero-
cidad del sacamuelas®, adelantando el importe®, ven 4 medio-
“dia las estrellas y en las manos del bérbaro sayon? una muela
sana con un pedazo de quijada® por apéndice, del cual podrian
hacerse dos botones 6 un doble as de domind. El infeliz
mutilado se aguanta, devora su dolor y su vergtienza y se
retira con las manos en la boca, miéntras el asesino impavido
y sereno pasea con triunfo por encima de las cabezas de los
espectadores la muela y el trozo de maxilar® ensangrentado,
asegurando con insolente cinismo que la sacé limpia!, sin
gota de sangre ni miaja!! de dolor.

Aqui se ofrece un teatro ambulante, compuesto de tapices
viejos con un gran cartelon* donde se ve pintada una mujer
de antediluvianas dimensiones, un nifio con siete cabezas y el
combate horrible del primer Alcides, del primer Heércules de
Europa con un tigre feroz de Bengala al cual vence, sujeta
y civiliza!?, Todas estas maravillas son anunciadas por cuatro
histriones indecentemente cubiertos de despojos de teatro, que
llaman 4 los transeuntes al son de un tambor y de una
trompeta. Por un sueldo se ve tanto portento. El inocente
espectador no puede resistir 4 tanta curiosidad; entra y por
de pronto! ve en la mujer Goliat 4 una mujer media pulgada

1 Buffoon. 2 face of « cutpurse. 3 sou (French coin, about
== 1/, d.). 4 carious teeth. 5 tooth-drawer. 6 paying the amount
beforehand or prepaying t. a. 7 tormentor. 8 jaw-bone. 9 maxil-
lary bone. 19 neat, clean. 11 Jit, crumb: without the slightest
pain. 12 tames. 13 immediately.
Prosa. 8365

mds alta que la generalidad de las mujeres; el nifio de las
siete cabezas es un rapaz}, vestido de drabe, que tiene en la
cabeza seis lobanillos? de varia pero ordinaria dimension; el
Heércules, el Aleides es un embustero? sin musculos y sin ner-
vios, feo como un eunuco, pequefio como un lapon, roido de
miseria con mds trazas de momia que de atleta, cuyo raqui-
tico esqueleto se dibuja debajo del pergamino que le tapiza
muy 4 propdsito para ser estudiado por un cursante de ana-
tomia; el tigre de Bengala es un cachorro de leopardo, y el
gran combate consiste en coger las manos 6 patas delanteras
del animal, echarle, ponerle el pié en los hijares y volverle
a la jaula, antes de que se acuerde de que es una fiera y
tenga 4 bien despellejar al gladiator follon* con un zarpazo>.
Concluida la funcion, el Roberto Macaire, director de la com-
pafiia gimndstica, presenta 4 los circunstantes una bandeja
para consultar su generosidad y excitarles 4 estimular al in-
genio privilegiado.

éDiriamos bien si dijéramos que la Francia es 4 la Eu-
ropa lo que los Campos Eliseos 4 Paris? La comparacion
acaso no seria de todo punto exacta, porque al fin y al cabo,
si hay muchos charlatanes en Francia, abundan tambien las
notabilidades de valor real en todo género.

Dejemos 4 las notabilidades y sigamos ocupdndonos en
los farsantes. Haylos de estos de todas clases y en especial
entre los literatos. En Francia todo bicho viviente es escri-
tor. Basta concebir una idea para hacer un libro. La idea
no ocupa més que una pdgina y esto aun porque el autor no
la sabe emitir; y el librero que ha de esplotar esta idea ne-
cesita 6 quiere un volimen. El autor hace el volumen, ro-
bando desapiadadamente 4 los demas lo que ya los demas
robaron 4 sus predecesores. Embadutrnanse® las esquinas con
anuncios colosales, llueven prospectos por todas partes, el
autor se alaba si mismo en todos los periddicos’, y 4 los
quince dias véndese la obra 4 sueldo, perdida entre otras
obras de igual mérito, en los puentes y bulevares.

La moda, tan poderosa en Francia, ha invadido tambien
la literatura. Ningun escritor decente deja de escribir viajes.
Sin moverse de Paris, sin ir més que 4 una biblioteca 6 ga-
binete de lectura®, se escriben viajes 4 Oriente, 4 la India, 4
Greenlandia, al Pert, al rededor del mundo, y se describen
las costumbres de los pueblos con una exactitud maravillosa.

Espafia es uno de los paises que tienen el honor de ser
més & menudo? favorecidos!°. Espafia es hoy en dia para los
franceses un manantial fecundo!! de curiosidad y de interes.

1A little boy. 2 cyst (tumour). 3 humbug. ¢ lazy. 5 stroke
with the paw. 6 to besmear. 7 newspapers, periodicals. 8 circulating-
library. 9% the most frequently. 10 favoured. 11.a fertile source.
366 Prosa.

No hay escritorcillo que no pague un tributo de su pendola!
& la Espafia. Muchos no tienen de la Peninsula idea alguna;
ni siquiera saben donde estd, qué punto geografico ocupa;
sélo conjeturan que se halla mds acd de los Pirineos y aun
esto lo saben porque han leido en los periddicos los partes”
telegraficos de los prefectos de los Pirineos orientales y occi-
dentales relativos 4 la guerra civil. Esto no quita® sin em-
bargo que escriban sobre la Peninsula y hagan de ella
descripciones minuciosas. Espafia es mentada en las memo-
rias, en los viajes, en la historia, en los apuntes, en los dra-
mas, en los poemas, en las novelas etc. etc. Todos los héroes
se llaman Juan; todas las heroinas Juanita. El que de esta
regla sine qua non se aparta, el que sabe mas, da 4 sus héroes,
el nombre de don Suarez, don Osufia y 4 la protagonista el
de dofia Sol, 6 dofia Avellana u otro por el estilo. Ya que
tiene nombres que dar 4 los personajes busca los de los
lugares. Madrid, Cadiz, Barcelona, Zaragoza, Valencia; hasta
aqui llega toda su geografia. El que mejor le suena al oido,
este es escogido para la novela, folletin 6 comedia. Sobre
estos elementos se entreteje el asunto, y urde* un cuento
esmaltado de costumbres propias de un estudiante de Paris,
de un mancebo® de las tiendas de los bulevares, de un comi-
sionista viajero®, de una beldad facil del cuartel Latino 6
de una griseta de la calle Vivienne, Saint-Denis, Saint-Martin,
6 Poissonniére, creyendo candidamente el maldito autor que
tendrdé sabor peninsular su farsa porque los personajes se
llamardn Juan, Juanita, don Suarez, dofia Sol, dofia Avellana,
y serdn las escenas en Madrid, Zaragoza 6 Barcelona. Otro
se cree mds instruido en las costumbres espafiolas, porque ha
visto en los teatros bailar la cachucha, en las tiendas algunas
laminas’ de funciones de toros’, y ha oido hablar de vinos y
jaques® de Andalucia. Todo esto es poético para este desdi-
chado escritor, y hétele!0 en marcha, digno émulo de Cervantes
y del autor de Gil Blas, y en el primer capitulo de su barbara
novela nos describe un famoso baile en los salones de la
Alhambra, donde las hijas de los duques, condes, barones y
marqueses, vestidas como las bailarinas de nuestros teatros,
estan bailando con inimitable gracia é imponderable lascivia
las seguidillas, la cachucha y el bolero. La sefiorita Avellana,
de ojos negros y morena tez!!, es la que mds se distingue en
repicar las castafiuelas, y en el atrevimiento de sus posturas,
Los condes, los duques y demas titulos, todos vestidos de

1 Pen. 2 communications, news, reports. 2 prevents. 4 to
spin out; to frame. 5 clerk. 6 commercial traveller. 7 engraving.
8 bullfight. 9 rowdy. 10 hétele == he-te-le, there he is; now he
is (French: le voila. Ital.: eccotelo). 11 complexion.
Prosa. 367

majo! andaluz, salen 4 descansar en un jardin de palmas y
cocoteros traidos de América por Hernan Cortés, donde matan
el tiempo los unos picando con larguisimas navajas? tabaco
para hacer un cigarro, cuyo papel sujetan con los labios; los
otros tirando la navaja para clavarla en los troncos de las
palmeras, en cuya tarea el conde de las Sardinas, el amante
de dofia Avellana, sobresale tanto que clava cada vez su navaja,
la mds larga y afilada de todas, en las cicatrices de las heridas
que hicieron en los drboles trasplantados las flechas de los
Indios y los venablos? y ballestas* de los soldados de Pizarro.

En otro capitulo hay un magnifico banquete, porque es
fuerza mentar los vinos espafioles y el infeliz autor nos dice
con admirable facundia: alli se veia saltar de las botellas 4
los vasos el vino de Jerez, de Malaga, de Canarias, de Tinto,
de Generoso® y demas pueblos notables de la Peninsula por
su industria vinatera.

Esta exactitud de noticias la deben los autores franceses
a su cuidado especial de tomar apuntes cuando viajan. Sale
de Paris uno de estos autores en diligencia y tiene por com-
pafiero de viaje 4 un espafiol. Toma su cartera® y su lapiz y
se pone en actitud de observador. El espafiol se ha restriado
y estornuda con frecuencia. El solicito observador anota en
su cartera: Los espafoles estornudan continuamente. El espafiol
estornudador. leva & su lado 4 su consorte, cuya nariz poco
audaz y poco emprendedora se quedd casi al nivel de sus
mofletes’?, y el frances de una lapizada condena 4 todas las
narices peninsulares 4 la condicion etiope poniendo: Todas
las mujeres espatiolas son horriblemente chatas®.

En lo pintoresco son los franceses tan exactos como en lo
escrito. ¢Hace ruido la guerra de la Grecia y figura en las
noticias Colocotroni, Canaris, Mauro-Cordato? Se busca en
Paris 4 algun oriundo? de la Grecia. Un limpia-botas!¢ liones!!
se da por griego y presenta una nariz aguilefia y guedejas
negras por documentos: se le da cinco francos, un mal artista
le retrata, litografiase esta embustera copia y se vende 4
franco el retrato de Canaris. Cabrera, Balmaseda, Espartero
se hacen célebres, un carlista tuerto!? de los despdsitos es el
modelo; sdcase la copia como Dios quiere, afiadiéndole un

 

1 Properly: a man of the inferior classes dressed in a showy
manner. Majo is also the so-called Spanish national dress. —
2 Navaja, a large (Spanish) knife. 3 dart. 4 cross-bow. 5 de Tinto;
de Generoso. The author ridicules the ignorance of the French
author, who takes the denominations tinto (i. e. vino —) and
generoso, i. e. “ved wine” and “first-rate wine", for the names
of places like Malaga, Jerez etc. 6 note-book. 7 puffed cheeks.
8 flat-nosed, snub-nosed. ® scion. 10 shoe-black. 1 (pronounced:
lionés) == from Lyons. 12 one-eyed. 13 Como Dios quiere, as God
wills, i. e. as good or as bad as may be.
36S Prosa.

ojo, y el publico admira en la lamina de Cabrera la mirada
centellante de ese guerrillero célebre que indica por si sola
su genio y su violencia.

“Concluiré este articulo refiriendo un hecho auténtico que
acabara de caracterizar 4 los franceses. Un carlista catalan
mostré 4 un frances, redactor de un periddico semanal pinto-
rescol, dos figurines’ de trajes de Catalufia. Agradaronle al
frances y los pidid para su _periddico. Concedido. Mas no
bastando para su idea, pregunté por algunos pueblos del
principado.

éBarcelona? dijo el otro. — No. — ¢Gerona, Tarragona?
— No. — Viendo que los en ona no le agradaban dijo,
éCaldas, Vich. Ripoll? — No. — «Manresa. Villafrancay —
No. — Incomodése el catalan y para mofarse? del frances le
dijo, San Miguel del Fay? — Este, repuso el frances, este
es magnifico, aceptd y se largé.

San Miguel del Fay no es ningun pueblo; es una cueva?
en cuyo fondo hay la imagen de San Mignel en una rustica
capilla, y por encima y delante de esta cueva salta un arreyo
formando una magnifica cascada que embellece este lugar
agreste, montaifioso y hermosamente pintoresco.

Pasdéronse algunos dias y cuando ya no se acordaba el
catalan de los figurines ni del frances recibid su numero del
periddico pintoresco y se encontré con gran sorpresa con una
lamina en cuyo primer término habia los figurines v en lon-
tananza una ciudad populosa con el nombre de San Miguel
del Fay. Despues de la lamina seguia la descripcion en estos
términos. «San Miguel del Fay es una de las ciudades mas
considerables de la antigua Catalufia; cuenta de poblacion
mas de cincuenta mil almas: hay en ella una catedral mag-
nifica, seis bibliotecas, veinte conventos, un museo de pinturas
donde se encuentran varias obras maestras de Murillo y de
Ribera; una sala de armas‘ que guarda la espada vencedora
de Jaime de Aragon y los condes de Berenguer; una univer-
sidad, diez colegios, una bolsa y un puerto muy concurrido®
por desaguar® en él la boca mayor del Ebro. Sus habitantes
son gigantescos y valientes y sus mujeres hermosas € insi-
nuantes con mucha aficion 4 los extranjeros y en particular
a los franceses. Todas las noches se suele asesinar 4 un cen-
tenar de individuos, y las autoridades no hacen caso’. Ne-
gocia en algodon y papel, higos secos y castafias. Los moros
la conquistaron dos veces, y algunos restos romanos anuncian
que estuvo sujeta 4 las érdenes de algun general de Scipion.
Esta célebre ciudad es patria de San Miguel donde le dieron

_ _ 1 Illustrated weekly. 2 to mock. 3 cavern. 4 Arsenal.
> frequented. §to empty into.. 7 no hacen caso, do not mind
that (in French: faire cas de. . .).
Prosa. 369

martirio por los afios! 200 despues de Jesucristo los soldados
del emperador romano.»

Abandono 4 la consideracion de los lectores el efecto que
esta descripcion haria en el dnimo del artista catalan. Como
quiera, el periddico circulé, paséd las fronteras y acaso algun
dia traduzca un editor espafiol esta obra y se vean los cata-
lanes con una ciudad mds en lo mas desierto y escabroso de
sus montafias. Pedro Mata.

Origen del Carnaval.
Repicando castafiuelas,
redoblando el atabal2
se nos viene con las risas
el travieso Carnaval.

Confesemos que es una singularisima cosa el Carnaval.
No hay formalidad® posible en cuanto él aparece. No hay
gravedad que no vacile, ni prudencia que no titubee4. Grandes
y pequefios, hombres y mujers, embéciles y sabios, varones
de reflexion y mozalbetes® evaporados, todos se interesan con
mas 6 ménos ardor en su efimero trdnsito; nadie se le muestra
completamente abyecto. El Carnaval es un periodo de disi-
pacion y de locura: atesora placeres para todas las edades,
diversiones para todos los gustos, distracciones para todas las
clases. Las mdscaras, los bailes, los festines son los primeros
elementos que satisfacen en estos dias toda snerte de exi-
gencias.

La vida del-hombre es un donoso® mosaico, pero compuesto
de piedras falsas: toda ella es una farsa ridicula que miéntras
haya hombres seguird representdndose en este picaro mundo.
Ahi, sin ir mas léjos, tiene usted gentes que durante once
meses y medio del afio cifran toda su atencion y conato en
parecer prudentes, discretos, reservados, sensatos y juiciosos
en fin; que se martirizan acaso para ostentar un esterior que
jamas pueda dejar concebir de ellos ni una idea de atolon-
dramiento’, de ligereza 6 extravagancia. Cuando hablamos,
cuando hablais vosotros mismos, lectores amados, sin que sea.
esto un agravio, cuando hablo yo .... cuando hablan todos,
en una palabra, procuramos hacerlo con moderacion, con toda.
la reflexion posible para que no se nos tenga® por tontos 6-
por escapados de alguna casa de Orates®. Pero héte aquil®
que llega el mes de febrero repartiendo 4 todo bicho viviente:
mascarillas y dominds y .... patatrds!! jDios nos tenga de
su santa mano! todos los andamios de las bellas apariencias
exteriores de prudencia y circunspeccion se desploman??.

1 About the year. 2 timbrel. 3 gravity. 4 to totter. 5 young
jackanapes. 6 beauteous. 7 giddiness. § lest we be thought...
9 Bedlam. 10 héte aqui, lit. look there (see the Note 10, p. 366).
11 pang! 12 come out of joint.

Spanish Grammar. 24
370 Prosa.

Bien conozco que la gravedad de la vida reclama algun
intermedio de desahogo. Es una necesidad confesada y aten-
dida en todos tiempos y por todos los siglos. Un corto pe-
riodo de locura alarga la existencia del hombre: todos los
pueblos han reconocido esta verdad. Los antiguos judios te-
nian su goral, los persas y los babilonios sus saceas, los
griegos sus cronias, los romanos, mas ardientes en todo, te-
nian no solo sus saturnales como los griegos, sino tambien
sus bacanales y lupercales. Los judios modernos tienen su
purim, los musulmanes su beyram, los ingleses su christmas
y los demas pueblos el carnaval: pero observad bien, mis
amados lectores, que la esencia de todas estas fiestas antiguas
y modernas ha sido siempre la mesa, el baile, las mascaras,
las diversiones, la risa.

Celebrais el Carnaval en gracia de Dios; pero ¢sabeis
bien lo que es el Carnaval? El Carnaval es una licencia para
que toda persona decente pueda correr como un loco por esas
calles de Dios con un rabo mas largo que el de Luzbel, y un
pedazo de carton en la cara haciendo el oso delante de todo
el mundo. Los primeros sacerdotes cristianos se desgafitaban!
declamando contra los bacanales; pero las locuras de aquella
época habian echado demasiado hondas raices? en las cos-
tumbres para que las gentes renunciasen 4 ellas. Los cate-
cumenos no tenian inconveniente en someterse al bautismo y
adoptar la nueva ley, con la condicion de que® no se les
privasen aquellas diversiones favoritas. El hombre era inse-
parable del nedfita, y el nedfita apasionado de aquellos pla-
-ceres, 4 los cuales queria hacerle renunciar el bautismo. En
esta lucha entre el ente positivo y el ente de razon, no
siempre se levaba el ultimo la victoria. Se apetecia el
bautismo sin renunciar a las mdscaras. Tertuliano se queja
de esto amargamente; pero hubo que ceder 4 la fuerza de la
costumbre y transigir’. Asi es, que la institucion del aynno
preparatorio 4 la fiesta de la resurreccion, 6 la pascua cristiana,
imponiendo una dura penitencia de cuarenta dias de austeras
privaciones, did motivo 4 que antes de entrar en esta rigorosa
cuarentena, permitiese el cristianismo todas las locuras del
Carnaval. Pero no sdlo eran permitidas en esta época. Los
ministros de la religion eran los que mds se aprovechaban5
de semejante tolerancia para solazarse en cambio de sus pri-
vaciones, y llevaron el delirio hasta el extremo de disfrazarse
en muchas circunstancias solemnes y hasta en las pompas
funebres y entierros. Si no me creeis, consultar podeis los
estatutos sinodales que Hincmar, arzobispo de Reims, dié en

1 Got hoarse with holding forth against... 2 echar raices, to
take root. 3 de que, that. +4 to make concessions, to come to an
agreement. ® to profit.
Prosa. 371

853 4 su iglesia. Este prelado prohibid a los religiosos de
su didcesis el emborracharse! (perdéneseme la expresion) la
vispera del dia de los difuntos, de lo que puede légicamente
deducirse que aquellos santos varones tenian la costumbre de
coger un lobe? como un templo en aquel dia. Prohibidles,
como digo, comer, beber, cantar y bailar la danza del oso.
El Carnaval, jamas autorizado y siempre tolerado por la iglesia,
se celebraba en las comunidades religiosas. Hace ya algunos
siglos que el ultimo domingo de Carnaval se celebraba en
Roma una fiesta 4 la que asistia el papa 4 caballo, rodeado
de todos los cardenales. Las gentes, 4 pié los pobres y los
ricos 4 caballo (esta es costumbre de todas las épocas) iban
en procesion al. monte Testacio, donde se hacia un sacrificio
Solemne. Empezdbase la funcion por inmolar un oso. Era
el simbolo del diablo tentador de nuestra carne. Mataban en
seguida unos becerrillos?, que decian significaban el orgullo
de nuestros placeres. Que el diablo fuese representado por
un oso, facilmente se concibe, su fealdad podia justificar
la comparacion; pero que los inocentes becerritos fuesen el
simbolo de la voluptuosidad y del orgullo, es dificil de concebir.

En el siglo XV tenian tambien los cardenales la costumbre
de disfrazarse y pasearse por las calles de Roma en carrozas
‘triunfales, con la cara tiznada‘4, precedidos de trompetas y
clarines; y como se disfrazaban en las iglesias, lo prohibid
en 1456 el concilio de Soissons; y por ultimo, el concilio de
Toledo prohibid en 1565, que los eclesidsticos se disfrazasen:
pero como los frailes de Espafia han sido siempre alegres y afi-
cionados 4 la zambra®> y gresca® fueron los unicos que continua-
ron en ciertas solemnidades, disfrazindose y bailando en el coro.

En algunos paises se ven durante el moderno Carnaval,
de tener mérito’, ocurrencias felicisimas que divierten sin ofen-
der & la sana moral; pero en esta bendita Espafia, no obstante
de que el Carnaval dura el afio entero porque todo el mundo
anda disfrazado, con mascara de hombres de bien los unos,
de patriotas los otros; de liberales estos, de constitucionales
aquellos, estando muy léjos de ser lo que aparentan; en
Espafia, digo, se reducen las felices ocurrencias de los aficio-
nados8, 4 hacer el oso por las calles, 4 vestirse de esteras y
revolearse por el lodo, 4 pasearse por el sol con pardguas
rotos, 4 ponerse cucuruchos® en la cabeza, y decir cuatro?
picardias al lucero del alba1.

Wenceslao Ayguals de Izco.

17To intoxiate one's self. 2 coger un lobo, to get tipsy. —
.3 sucking calf. 4 blackened. 5 revel. 6 uproar. 7 de tener mérito, if
it (the carnival) is beautiful (lit. well-deserving]. — § amateurs.
9 horns. 10 cuatro, here: some, a few. 11 lucero del alba, morning-star.

24*
372

Alphabetical List of the Irregular Verbs.

Alphabetical List of the Irregular Verbs.

NB. The verbs printed in bolder type are entirely irregular.
Excluded are the verbs with double participles, enumerated at the

end of the J. Part.

A.

Abastecer, to supply with pro-
visions, to victual (a ship);
conjug. 156.

abolir, to abolish 1865.

aborrecer, to abhor 156.

abrir, to open 178.

absolver, to absolve 152.

acaecer, to happen 156.

acertar, to guess 146.

acontecer, to happen 156.

acordar, to agree; —se, to re>
collect 150.

acostar, to convey to bed; —se,
to go to bed 150.

acrecentar, to increase 146.

adestrar, to direct, to put to
rights 146.

adherir, to adhere 162.

adormecer, to lull to sleep 156.

adormecerse, to fall asleep 156.

adquirir, to acquire 166.

aducir (obsol.), to bring about
156.

advertir, to inform 162.

afollar, to blow against, to
breathe at 150.

aforar, to invést, to rent, to
farm 150.

afotar, to enfeoff, to rent 150.

agorar, to foretell 150.

agradecer, to owe 156.

alentar, to breathe 146.

almorzar, to breakfast 150.

amanecer, to dawn 156.

amoblar, to furnish 150.

amolar, to grind, to sharpen 150.

andar, to go 166.

antojarse, to covet 185.

apacentar, to graze, to pasture
146.

apetecer, to desire 156.

aporcar, to cover with earth 150.

aportar, to go ashore 150.

apostar, to bet 150.

apretar, to press together 146.

aprobar, to approve 150.

arguir, to argue 163,
arrecirse, to become numb 1865.
arrendar, to lease, to rent 146.
arrepentirse, to repent 162.
ascender, to ascend 147.
asentar, to set 146.
asentir, to consent 162.
aserrar, to saw 146.
asestar, to point 146.
asir, to seize 167. 185.
asolar, to waste, to desolate 150.
asonar, to accord, to chime in 150.
atender, to wait 147.
atentar, to grope, to fumble 146.
aterrar, to fling down 146.
atestar, to fill with 146.
atravesar, to perforate, to bar, to
block 146.
atribuir, to attribute 164.
aventar, to fan, to kindle; —se,
to run away 146.
avergonzar, to shame 150.
azolar, to work with the axe
150.
B.

Bendecir, to bless 168.

Cc.

Caber, to be contained (there
is room for it in smthg.) 167.

caer, to fall 167.

calentay, to warm 146.

carecer, to want 156.

cegar, to blind, to dazzle 146.

cenir, to gird 157.

cercar, to surround 146.

cerner, to bolt (meal) 147.

cerrar, to shut 146.

cimentar, to cement, to lay the
foundation 146.

cocer, to cook 152. 185.

colar, to filter, to bestow 150.

colegir, to gather 157.

colgar, to hang, to suspend 161.

comedirse, to moderate one’s self
157.

comenzar, to begin 146.
Alphabetical List of the Irregular Verbs.

compadecer, to pity 156.
competir, to emulate 157,
complacer, to please 156.
componer, to compose 173.
comprobar, to prove 151.
concebir, to conceive 157.
concernir, to surround 162. 185.
concertar, to arrange; —se, to
concert 146.
concluir, to conclude 164.
concordar, to accord, to agree 151.
condoler, to condole, to pity 152.
conducir, to lead 156.
conferir, to confer 162.
confesar, to confess 146.
conocer, to know 156.
consolar, to console 151.
consonar, to accord 151.
constituir, to constitute 164.
constrenir, to constrain 157.
construir, to construct 164.
contar, to count, to tell 151.
contradecir, to contradict 168.
contribuir, to contribute 164.
controvertir, to quarrel 162.
convenir, to agree 175.
convertir, to convert 162.
corregir, to correct 157.
costar, to cost 151.
crecer, to grow 152.
cubrir, to cover 178.

D.

Dar, to give 167.

decentar, to cut 146.

decir, to tell 168.

deducir, to deduct 156.

defender, to defend 147.

deferir, to defer 162.

degollar, to behead 151.

demoler, to demolish, to destroy

denegar, to deny 146. 1152.

denostar, to offend, to injure 151.

dentar, to indent, to teeth 146.

deponer, to depose 173.

derrengar, to lame 146.

derretir, to melt 157.

derrocar, to fling down, to render
downcast 151.

desacertar, to cheat 146.

desacordar, to disagree, to put
out of tune 151.

desaforar, to deprive of a right
151.

373

desalentar, to discourage 146.
desapretar, to loose(n) 146.
desaprobar, to disapprove 151.
desasosegar, to trouble 146.
desatentar, to disconcert 146.
descender, to descend 147.
descefiir, to ungird 157.
descolgar, to take down 151.
descollar, to overtop 151.
eee to become naughty

desconcertar, to disconcert 146.
desconocer, not to know 156.
desconsolar, to render disconso-
late 151.
descontar, to discount 151.
descornar, to break off horns 151.
desdecir, to countermand 168.
desempedrar, to unpave (a street
etc.) 146.
desencerrar, to free, to set at
liberty 146.
desengrosar, to diminish 151.
desenterrar, to disinter, to dig
out 146.
desenvolver, to develop 152.
deservir, to be disobliging 157.
desflocar, to unravel 151.
deshelar, to thaw 146.
desherrar, to unfetter, to take
off a horse-shoe 146.
desleir, to dissolve 157.
desmembrar, to dismember 146.
desminuir, to diminish 164.
desmoler (obsol.), to digest 152.
desolar, to desolate, to waste 151.
desollar, to flay, to excoriate 151.
desovar, to lay eggs, to spawn
151.
despedir, to discharge (a servant)
157.
despedirse, to take leave, to say
goodbye 157.
despernar, to cut off a leg, to
lame a leg 146.
despertar, to awake 146.
desplacer, to displease 185.
desplegar, to unfold 146.
despoblar, to depopulate 151.
destenir, to lose colour 157.
desterrar, to banish 146.
destituir, to render destitute 164.
destrocar, to break off a bargain
151.
374

destruir, to destroy 164.
desvergonzarse, to behave in a
shameless manner 151.
devolver, to give back 152.
dezmar, to pay tithe 146.
diferir, to defer 162.
digerir, to digest 162,
discerniv, to distinguish 162.
discordar, to be discordant 151.
disentir, to dissent. 162.
disminuir, to diminish 164.
disolver, to dissolve 152.
disonar, to be dissonant 151.
distribuir, to distribute 164.
divertir, to divert 162.
doler, to ache, to give pain 152.
dormir, to sleep 171.

E.

Elegir, to select 158.
embestir, to attack 158.
emendar (enmendar), to correct,
to mend 146.
empedrar, to pave 146.
empezar, to begin 146.
empobrecer, to become poor 156.
emporcar, to soil 151.
encarecer, to render dear 156.
encender, to light, to set on fire
147.
encensar, to perfume 146.
encerrar, to imprison 146.
enclocar, to fish; to cluck 151.
encobar, to sit on eggs = incubate
151

encoclar, see enclocar.
encomendar, to recommend 146.
encontrar, to encounter, to meet
151.
encorar, to cover with leather 151.
encordar, to string, to chord 151.
encovar, to put in the cellar 151.
encubertar, to cover 146.
engreir, to intrude 158.
engrosar, to become stout 151.
enhambrentar, to starve 146.
ae to raise, to put upright
146.
ennegrecer, to blacken 156.
enriquecer, to enrich 156.
enrodar, to break upon or under
the wheel 151.
ensalmorar, to mingle with salt
151.

Alphabetical List of the Irregular Verbs.

i aa to stain with blood

146.

entender, to understand 147.

enterrar, to inter, to bury 146.

entortar, to render tortuous 151.

envestir, to invest 158.

envolver, to wrap up, to envelop,
to involve 152.

equivaler, to be equivalent 174.

erguir, to erect 185.

errar, to be mistaken (pres.

_ yerro) 146.

escarmentar, to sharpen one’s wit.

escribir, to write 178. (146.

esforzar, to encourage 151.

establecer, to establish 156.

estar, to be 42.

estercar, to manure 146,

estregar, to rub 146,

estrenir, to obstruct 158.

excluir, to exclude 164.

expedir, to forward 158.

extremecer, to tremble 156.

F.
Favorecer, to favour 156.
florecer, to bloom, to flourish
156.
fluir, to flow 164-
follar, to blow with the bellows
151.

forzar, to force, to compel 151.
fregar, to rub, to itch 146,
freir, to fry 158.

G.
Gemir, to lament 158.
governar, to govern 147,
guarnecer, to occupy 156.

HH

Haber, to have 32.

hacer, to do 172.

heder, to stink 147.

helar, to freeze 147.

henchir, to fill 158.

hender, to split 147.

henir, to knead 158.

herir, to wound 162.

herrar, to shoe a horse 147.

hervir, to boil, to seethe 162.

holgar, to repose 151.

hollar, to tread upon, to trample
on 151.

huir, to flee 163,
Alphabetical List of the Irregular Verbs.

I.

Imbuir, to imbue 164,
imprimir, to print 178.
improbar, to disapprove 151.
incensar, to incense, to perfume
imeluir, to include 164, = [147.
imecoar, to begin 185.
inducir, to induce 156.
infervr, to follow 162.
infernar, to send to hell, to

make angry 147,
influir, to influence 164,
ingerir, to intrude 162.
inquirir, to inquire 166.
inscribir, to inscribe 175.
instituir, to institute 164.
mstruir, to instruct 164.
wmtroducir, to introduce 156.
invernar, to spend the winter 147.
wmvertir, to turn round 162.
ir, to go 172.

J.
Jemir (gemir), to lament 158.
jugar, to play 151.

L.
Loar, to praise 185.
lucir, to shine 155.
luir, to free from taxes 164.

Li.
Llover, to rain 152.

M.
Matldecir, to curse 168.
manifestar, to manifest 147,
medir, to measure 158.
mentar, to mention 147.
mentir, to lie 162.
merecer, to merit, to deserve 156.
merendar, to take one’s afternoon

collation 147.

moblar, to furnish 151.
moler, to grind 152.
morder, to bite 152.
mortr, to die 172.
mostrar, to show 151.
mover, to move 152.

N.
Nacer, to be born 156.
negar, to deny 147.
nevar, to snow 147.

375

0.

Obedecer, to obey 156.
obscurecer, to darken 156.
obstruir, to obstruct 164.
ofrecer, to offer 156.
oir, to hear 167,
oler, to smell (pres. huele etc.,

olemos ete.) 152.

P.

Pacer, to pasture 185,
padecer, to suffer 156.
parecer, to seem 156.
pedir, to require, to order 158,
pensar, to think 147.
perder, to lose 147.
perecer, to perish 156.
‘permanecer, to remain 156.
Se enen to break one’s legs

47,
perseguir, to persecute 158.
percertir, to pervert 162.
pesar, to repent, to weigh 185.
placer, to please 185.
plegar, to fold 147.
poblar, to populate 151.
poder, to he able 172.
podrir, to rot 173.
poner, to put 173.
predecir, to predict 168.
preferir, to prefer 162.
presentir, to forebode 162.
pretender, to pretend 145,
prever, to fore-see 175.
probar, to prove 151,
producir, to produce 156.
proferir, to proffer 162.
promover, to promote 152.
proscribir, to proscribe 175.
proseguir, to continue 15.

_prostituir, to prostitute 164.

proveer, to provide 175.

Q.
Quebrar, to break 147.
querer, to wish 173.

R.
Raer, to serape, to grate 1%.
recluir, to include 164.
recomendar, to recommend 147.
reconocer, to recognise 156.
recontar, to count again 151,
376

recordar, to remind, to awake;
—se, to recollect 151.

recostarse, to lie down on one
side 151.

reducir, to reduce 156.

referir, to refer 162.

reforzar, to reinforce 151.

regar, to water 147.

regir, to govern 158.

reir, to laugh 158.

remendar, to mend 147.

remesar, to pull out hair 147,

remover, to remove 152.

renacer, to be born again, to
regenerate 156.

rendir, to render 158.

renegar, to forswear 147.

renovar, to renew 151.

renir, to fight, to scold 158,

repetir, to repeat 158.

reponer, to answer 185.

reprobar, to reprobate, to scold
151.

requebrar, to break into little
pieces, to flirt 147.

requerir, to request 162.

rescontrar, to balance an (ac-
count), to compare 151.

resentirse, to resent 162.

resollar, to breathe, to fan 151.

resolver, to resolve 152. 178,

resonar, to resound 151.

resplandecer, to shine 156,

restituir, to restore 164.

retemblar, to tremble again 147.

retentar, to threaten with a
new fit (of illness etc.) 147.

retenir, to dye again 158.

retorcer, to re-wrap etc.
retuerzo) 152.

retribuir, to reward 164,

revenir, to come back 175,

rever, to meet again 175.

reventar, to burst 147.

reventer, to pour 147.

revestir, to clothe anew 158.

revolar, to fly, to flee again
151.

revolcarse, to welter, to roll, to
wallow 151.

rodar, to roll 151.

roer, to nibble 186.

rogar, to beg 151.

(pres.

Alphabetical List of the Irregular Verbs.

Ss.
Saber, to know 178.
salir, to go out 174.
satisfacer, to satisfy 172. 178.
sarmentar, to gather cut-off
vine-wood 147.
seducir, to seduce 156.
segar, to cut, to mow 147.
seguir, to follow 158.
sembrar, to sow 147.
sentar, to put; —se, to sit down
sentir, to feel 162. (147.
ser, to be 388.
serrar, to saw 147.
servir, to serve 158.
sobresalir, to surpass, like
salir 174.
solar, to sole 152.
soldar, to solder 152.
soler, to use 152. 186.
soltar, to loose(n) 152.
solver, to loosen 152.
sonar, to sound; —se, to blow
one’s nose 152,
sonreir, to smile 158,
sonar, to dream 152.
sosegar, to tranquilize 147.
soterrar, to bury 147. (164.
substitutr (sustituir), to substitute
subvertiy, to subvert 162.
sugerir, to suggest 162.

T.
Taner, to play 186.
temblar, so tremble 147.
tender, to tend, to extend 147.
tener, to hold, to have 34.
tentar, to touch, to try 147.
tenir, to dye 158.
torcer, to turn, to wring (pres.
tuerzo) 152,
tostar, to roast 152.
traducir, to translate 156.
traer, to draw 174.
trascender, to mount over, to
pass 147.
trascolar, to bolt 152.
trascordarse, to forget 152.
trasegar, to pour over, to trans-
fuse 147,
trasferir, to transfer 162.
trasonar, to form a_ visionary
scheme, to dream 152,
Vocabulary.

trocar, to exchange 152.
tronar, to thunder 152.
tropezar, to stumble 147,

Vis

Valer, to be worth 174.
venir, to come 174.
ver, to see 175.

verter, to shed 147.
vestir, to clothe 158.

377

volar, to fly 152.
volear, to upset (a carriage);
—se, to wallow, to welter 152.
volver, to turn back, to do once
more 152.
Y.
Facer, to lie 186.
“4.
Zaherir, to scold 162.

Vocabulary
referring to the Translations and Reading Exercises
contained in the Second Part.

Traduccion 1, (Page 203.)
1. Village, aldea, f.
summer, verano, m.
to live, vivir.
beautiful, hermostsimo, -a.
to resemble, semejar.

too, demasiado, demasiadamente.

cool, fresco, -a.
to bring, traer.

commonly, comunmente, ordina-

riamente.
rain, Uuvia, agua, f.
healthy, sano, -a.
to want, necesitar.
science, ciencia, f.
to practise, ejercitar.
to know, saber.
relation (f.), parienta, f.
2. Venus, Vénus.
heathen, pagano, m.
ancient, antiguo, -a.
to sign, firmar.
order, mandamiento, m.
accomplice, cémplice, f.
protector, protector, m.
chiefly, por la mayor parte.
practice, practica, f.
retreat, retirada, f.
to salute, saludar.
exultation, jubilo, m.
enough, bastante, adv.
discontented, malcontento, m.
entrance, boca, f.
harbour, puerto, m. |
dunce, bobo, m.; bestia, m.

thoughtless, imprudente, aven-
report, relacion, f. [tado, -a.
worked, hecho.

Reading Exercise. (Page 204.)

Luego que, a8 soon as.

dar vista, to come in sight, to
be sighted.

la armada, fleet.

mandar, to order.

enarbolar, to hoist.

la bandera, banner.

el canonazo, cannon-shot.

de que, that.

prevenirse, to prepare.

recorriendo, visiting.

exhortar, to exhort.

pelear, to fight.

tratarse, to be at stake.

la suerte, sort.

la diestra, the right hand.

llevar, to carry, to hold.

el no conseguirla, not obtaining
(winning) it = if they did not
carry the day.

fuerte, brave, gallant.

ser preciso, they must,

vencer, to conquer.

la honra, honour.

les recordé, he reminded them.

la hazafia, deed.

animar, to animate.

la pelea, fight, battle.

otro tanto, the same (words).

publicar, to publish.
378

la indulgencia plenaria, plenary
indulgence.

el sacerdote, priest,

el pontifice, pope.

piadoso, pious.

la empresa, undertaking.

navegar, to navigate.

con viento en popa, keeping the
wind on the poop.

incomodar, to molest.

el rayo, sunbeam.

dar de frente, to have in front.

mandar, to command. ,

el ala f., wing.

el cuerpo de centro, the centre.

servir de auxilio, to form the
reserve.

las fuerzas, forces.

dar el combate, to begin the fight.

advertir, to advertise.

celebrar, to celebrate.

la devocion, fervour.

la fiesta, feast holiday.

Nuestra Senora de los Remedios,
Our Lady of Good Help.

la iglesia, church,

encomendarse, to commend one’s
self.

corresponder, to answer.

disponer, to dispose, to arrange.

encaminarse, to start.

a tiro de caton, within range of
cannon-shot.

descargar, to discharge. (order.

desordenar, to throw into dis-

hacer estrago*), to waste, to rout,
to discomfit.

echar & fondo, to sink (a vessel).

destrozar, to put to flight.

Traduccion 2. (P. 212.)

1. Culprit, delincuente; reo.
head, cabeza, f.

bended bajo, -a.

to proclaim, anunciar.

to swear, jurar.

truth, verdad, f.

hatred, odio, m.

powerful, potente.

motive, motivo, m.

action, accion, f.

Vocabulary.

lead, plomo, m.

heavy, pesado, -a,

iron, hierro, m.

already, ya.

not yet, aun — no.

vain, vano; vanidoso.
author, autor, m.

actor, actor; cémico, m.
situation, situacion, f.
desperate, desesperado, -a.
to condole with, dar el pésame

Gd eicce i

2. To depart, salir, marcharse.

to set sail, hacer vela, hacerse a
la mar.

to bring, traer.

cloth, pago, m.

to beg leave, permitirse (lit. to
allow one’s self).

to doubt, poner en duda.

to be far off, estar léjos.

too, demasiado.

peasant, aldeano, paisano, m.

3. Dauntless, atrevido.

lieutenant, teniente.

capitain, capitan.

warm, caliente.

last year, el aio pasado; el ano

Prague, Praga. {dntes.

to arrive, llegar.

surname, sobrenombre, m.

to end, terminarse.

just, justo.

after, despues de.

fever, calentura, f.

arrival, llegado, f.

awkward, torpe, indiestro.

to cast, echar.

neyer, 20 jamas, no — nunca.

Traduccion 3. (P. 213.)

1. People, gente, f., hombres, pl. m.

after dinner, despues de (haber)
comido.

injury, insulto; ultraje, m.

criminal, delincuwente, reo, m.

when, cuando.

to appear, presentarse.

enthusiasm, entusiasmo, m.

endeavour, empefio, m.

end, destruccion, f.

*) fr. strages (Lat.), defeat, discomfiture.
Vocabulary.

world, mundo, m.

to be confined, estar (ser) for-
zado, obligado de...

for, is either suppressed or ren-
dered by por el espacio de...

young lady, senorita.

long, demasiado.

in order to, para.

to dine, comer. 4

to leave, salir de...

to begin, empezar; ponersed...

to thunder, tronar.

May, mayo.

to hope, esperar.

London, Londres.

2. Lord, lord.

boy, muchacho.

girl, muchacha.

to greet, saludar.

entrance, entrada, f.

castle, castillo, m.

to obtain, obtener.

aulic councillor, consejero dulico.

merit, mérito, m.

to disappear, desaparecer; des-
vanecer.

distrustful, desconfiado ; difidente.

disdain, el desden.

Reading Exercise. (P. 214.)
El impetu, impetuosity, fury.
la Iluvia, shower.
la bala, balla.
caer, to fall.
la escuadra, squadron,
juntarse, to unite.
acometer, to attack.
la griteria, noise, clamour.
el ruido, noise.
trabar, to fight; trabar una pe-

lea, to fall in with, to come

to close quarters.
embestir, to attack.
el estruendo, thundering.
el humo, smoke.
espeso, thick, heavy.
parecer, to seem.
acaecer, to happen.
y fué, and this was.
soplar, to blow [French: souffler].
arrojar, to push.

379

rechazar, to thrust back, to drive
back.

el genizaro, janizary.

la capitana, admiral’s ship.

la mortandad, massacre.

de refresco, anew.

en lugar, instead*),

herido, wounded.

el balazo, a gun-shot.

derribar, to fling down, to cast
down, to abate.

destrozar, to destroy.

el estorbo, impediment.

apoderarse, to seize, to take
possession.

la capital, flag-ship.

acelerar, to hasten.

Uevar, to bring.

clavar, to nail, to broach, to
empale.

el crédito,
worthiness.

cautivo, prisoner.

levantar, to raise.

el clamor, clamour, noise.

atrozmente, vehemently, terribly.

el paraje, place.

lastimoso, lamentable.

el jemido, groaning, wailing.

apresar, to capture.

despedazado, shattered.

echar a fondo, to sink (a vessel),

el remero, rower.

el ojo, eye.

la saeta, arrow.

abatirse los dnimos, to become
faint-hearted.

estar & pique, to be in danger.

tomar, to take.

credibility, trust-

Traduccion 4. (P. 219.)

1. To be seated, estar sentado.

to look at, mirar, with ace.
following.

the amusement, el pasatiempo.

young folks, los jovenes.

empty, desocupado.

box, caja, f.

wood, madera, f

tobecomposed, componerse de. .

*) Lat. locus; Ital. luego; Dante: loco.
380

House of Lords, Ja camara de
los lores.

exactly, d fondo.

to know, conocer.

prosperity la prosperidad.

influence, influjo; influencia,

decay, decadencia.

to obtain, obtener.

box at the theatre, palco.

to care, hacer caso.

strong, sdlido.

extremely, may.

fortress, fortaleza.

to share the lot of ..., correr la
misma fortuna como...

of inferior rank, de clase inferior.

2. To amount, ascender.

to what sum? @ cudnto?

to celebrate, celebrar.

the beginning, origen, m.

to chant (the vespers), tocard...

to return, volver.

to assemble, juntarse; congre-

garse.

to be abroad, estar en el extran-
jero.

to complain, quejarse; hacer
duelo de...

to refuse, rehusar.
to be situated, estar situado.

Reading Exercise. (P. 220.)

El peligro, danger.

acudir, to hasten to...

reprimir, to push back, to beat
back.

derrocar, to put to flight; to
destroy.

reanimarse, to take heart again,
to cheer up again.

el esfuerzo, strength.

mudarse, to change.

huir, to flee, to fly.

encallar, to be stranded or
wrecked.

la playa, shore, coast.

incendiar, to set on fire.

hacer frente, to oppose.

extender, to extend.

rodear, to surround.

nee to deliver, to free one’s
self.

*) Latin: antenna.

Vocabulary.

el alcance (the range), tener
mucho alcance, to range far.

apresar, to take.

tratar, to treat.

la herida, wound.

la bandera. flag.

echarse a huir, to flee.

la presa, booty.

salir al encuentro, to oppose.

quedar, to remain.

la audacia, boldness, temerity.

desigual, unequal.

hallarse, to find one’s self, to be
of...

ponerse en fuga, to fly.

procurar, to try.

seguir el alcance, to have the
start of one, to outstrip.

conseguir, to reach.

recojer, to gather.

los despojos, the booty.

el saqueo, the pillage, sacking.

ocultar, to hide.

apresar, to win, to conquer.

quedar initil, to be useless, to
be of no use.

poner, to set.

constante, constant, here: gene-
ral.

abrasar, to burn.

sumerjido, drowned.

‘pasar, to pass.

sostenerse, to last.

decaer, to lose heart.

la carniceria, massacre.

referirse, to relate, to tell.

tehirse de sangre, to stain with
blood.

la antena, yard (Mar.)*.

el mastil, mast.

el género, kind, sort.

Traduccion 5. (P. 223.)
1. Distinguished, distinguido.
profoundness, profundidad, f.
clearness, claridad, f.
pocket-handkerchief, pafiuelo, m.
ear-rings, pendientes, m. pl.
to owe, deber.
rail-road, ferro-carril, m.
else, 6; si no.
Vocabulary.

arrogance, arrogancia, f., pre-
suncion, f.

to pronounce a judgment, hacer
juicio; juzgar.

to concern, importar.

damage, dafo, m.

good advice, consejo, m.

to follow, seguir.

to succeed, surtir efecto.

by, por.

2. Relation, pariente, m.

levity, lijereza; falta de.reflexion.

prejudice, disgusto, m.

to cause, causar.

behaviour, conducta, f., proce-
der, m.

may be observed by everybody,
no tiene necesidad de ocultarse
de nadie (lit. is not obliged to
hide itself from anybody).

next, proéximo, -a.

to state, establecer.

sale, venta, f.

to paint, pintar.

to provide, cuidar de...; tener
cuidado de

steel-pen, pluma de acero,

haughty, descomedido, -a.

Reading Exercise. (P. 224.)

La comarca, country.

el asiento, situation.

la Wanura, plain.

abastar, to provide with.

el regalo, comforts of life.

el trigo, wheat, corn.

viene de acarreo, must be im-
ported from abroad.

para sustentarse, for the susten-
ance (of the town).

alegre, merry.

el suelo, ground; here: country.

padecer, to suffer.

el estto, summer.

templado, tempered.

el embate, undulation, splashing.

el ciudadano, citizen. ;

de suerte que, so that...

hace poner en olvido, makes...
forget.

 

381

los naturales, natives.

las huertas (in Valencia), irri-
gated fields [Lat. hortus].

vicioso en demasia, too luxuriant.

concertado por.su orden, put in
order, ranged in order.

la agrura, trees with acrid fruits.

el cidral, the so-called Berga-
motte orange.

entretejer, to entwine.

ya — ya, now — now, either —
or.

enlazar, to interlace*).

el aposento, room, bower.

el retrete, room.

la trabazon, complexity, twist;
intricacy, maze.

el ramo, branch.

la vista, conspicuousness.

la muchedumbre, quantity.

la espesura, thickness.

la hoja, leaf [Lat. folia].

cubrir, to cover.

tapar, to hide. ;

la enramada, canopy, bower
framed with branches.

el paraiso, paradise**),

la morada, dwelling-place.

bienaventurado, happy, blessed.

fingir, to devise.

competir, to compete.

banar, to irrigate.

‘pegar, to unite.

el and la puente, bridge.

sangrar, properly: to bleed, to
cup; here: to draw off water
from the river.

la acéquia, canal, channel.

regar, to irrigate.

beber, to supply with water.

criar, to produce.

redondo, thick, round.

las estancias, residence.

la bateria, breach.

el asakto, assault.

el esconce, angle.

 

Traduccion 6. (P. 229.)

1. Profitable, lucrativo, prove-
choso, -a.

*) French: enlacer. *“*) Valparaiso = “Vale of Paradise”.
382

trunk, baul, m.

to .put, poner.

to beatify, beatificar.

instructed, cnstruido, -a.

to begin, empezar.

harbour, puerto, m.

lodging, casa, f.

to suffice, bastar (para. .

to satisfy, satisfacer.

pleasure, gusto, m.

abominable, abominable,

only, no sino.

coat, levita, f.

whim, capricho, m.

2. Wealth, fortuna, f.

to possess, poseer.

fault, falta, f.

to confess, confesar.

knowledge, conocimiento, m.

presumptuous, presuntuoso, -a.

for, para.

distractions (pleasure), diverti-
mento, m.

working, trabajo, m.

to act, to do, hacer, obrar.

to bring, dar.

fruit, fruto, m.

long, largo tiempo; largo rato.

as soon as, luego que...

agreeable, dulce, agradable.

care, cuidado, m.

impudent, descarado, -a.

to follow, seguir.

several, vario, alguno.

street, calle, f.

~

Reading Exercise. (P. 230.)

Lo postrero, end, extremity.

la cabeza, capital.

particular, private.

el arreo, dress.

el arrabal, suburb.

llamar, to call.

acanalar, to embed (a river).

el reparo, bank, embankment,
dike, pier.

el hondo, depth *).

grueso, big, large.

la contratacion, f. communi-
cation.

morar, to reside.

elalcdzar,fortress,fortified castle.

Vocabulary.

que mira al nacimiento del sol,
looking eastward (Jit. that
looks towards the birth of the
sun).

cerca de .. ., near.

el primor, magnificence.

el ladrillo, brick-stone.

sobrepujar, to surpass.

la vara, (Spanish) ell = 3 feet.

en ancho, broad.

blanquear, to whitewash.

a maravilla, wonderfully.

 

Traduccion 7. (P. 236.)

1. To be at ..., estar en...

now, ahora; actualmente.

ice, helado, m.

limon, granizado de limon.

to leave, dejar.

order, la orden, las encomiendas.

by word of mouth, de boca, de
palabra, de viva voz.

to take, tomar.

to recommend, encomendar.

there are, hay.

foreigner, extranjero.

capital, capital, f.

jewels, joya, alhaja, f.

to do one’s duty, cumplir con su
deber.

acquaintance, conocido, m.

here, aqut.

precious, precioso, -a.

2. To say, sostener, decir.

how, pues como.

to cheat, enganar.

excuse, excusa, f.

to proffer, dar.

accident, acontecimiento, m.

travelling, viajante.

attention, atencion, f.

to listen, escuchar.

sensible man, hombre de buena
razon.

to please, agradar, gustar.

to judge, juzgar.

yet, con todo eso. (saber.

to hear (= to learn), Uegar a

nevertheless, con todo eso; sin
embargo.

nurse, nifera, f.

*) Compare Latin: profunditas.
Vocabulary.

to awake, despertarse.
3. To tell, contar.
coachman, cochero, m.
cook, f., cocinera, f.
to get, recibir, tener.
so little, tan poco, -a.
tenderness, ternura, f.
thank you! gracias. ©
proverb, refran; proverbio, m.
to return, volver.
soon, pronto.

Reading Exercise.

Relatar, to relate.

por menudo, detailed.

vago, charming.

el vecino, neighbour, inhabitant.

la parroquia, parish.

la colacion, diocese.

la iglesia mayor, cathedral.

igualar, to equal.

la fdbrica, factory, funds of the
church (fabric).

el arzobispo, archbishop.

Uegar d, to amount to...

la canongia, canonry, dean's pre-
bend.

las dignidades,
dignities.

darse, to thrive.

el esquilmo, produce. _[fitable.

provechoso, advantageous, pro-

la aceituna, olive.

adobado, preserved (fruits).

grueso, thick, big.

el trato, commerce.

la grangeria, cultivation, culture.

-el olivar, olive-garden.

el cortijo, farm, tenement, dairy.

el trapiche, mill (properly: forge,
jron mill).

el aceite, oil.

atestiguar, to attest, to certify.

concurrir, to meet.

increible, incredible.

la flota, fleet.

juntarse, to unite.

(P. 237.)

ecclesiastical

Traduccion 8. (P. 241.)

1. Song, cancion, aria, f.
to bring, dar, traer.

 

 

*) Compare French Ouir, to hear.

883

to draw, dibwar.

to ask, preguntar.

answer, respuesta, f.

to desire, desear.

accident, acontecimiento, m.

to send, enviar; mandar.

to find, hallar.

room, cuarto, m.

governor, administrador, m.

to knock (at a door), Jamar
(tocar) a la puerta.

in order to, para.

to breakfast, almorzar, desayu-
narse. ,

2. Courage, dénimo, valor, m.

boldness, atrevimiento, m.

to resist, resister.

so long, tanto tiempo.

prudent, prudente.

surname, sobrenombre, m.

romance, novela, f.

piece, preza, f.

to visit, ir d ver.

loquacious, locuaz.

ennui, aburrimiento, fastidio, m.

to complain, quejarse de .

reprobate, miserable.

to enter, entrar en. .-

to dare, atreverse, arriesgar.

Reading Exercise. (P. 241.)

Oir, to hear*).

la sentencia, sentence.

reclamar, to protect against...

la iniquidad, iniquity.

sacarse, to take off.

el anillo, ring.

traer, to wear.

arrojar, to throw, to fling.

el concurso, crowd.

la investidura, investiture.

el principe, prince.

vengar, to revenge.

faltar, to fail, to be wanting.

recoger, to take up.

la prenda, pawn, pledge.

la discordia, discord.

traer, to bring.

hacer entender, to make’, under-
stand, to persuade.

la voz, voice, here: word.

recordar, to remind.

Oyez, hear ye.
384

el derecho, right.

el reino, kingdom.

casado, married.

dar peso, to give weight.

codictoso, anxious.

el poderto, power.

quiza, perhaps.

ejercitarse, to give vent.

la conducta, behaviour.

la petulancia, impudence, super-
ciliousness.

avivar, to increase.

el orgullo, pride.

apoyar, to support [Fr. appuyer].

los limites, limits.

el freno, rein (Fr. frein].

abandonarse, to yield.

el lazo, fetter.

el miedo, fear.

ensenar, to teach.

el abatimiento, baseness.

desconocer, to know not, to be
ignorant.

la matanza, massacre,

las cvtsperas, vespers.

quedar, to remain.

el pueblo, place.

de corta consideracion, of little
importance.

Traduccion 9. (P. 245.)

1. Present, presente.

act, hecho, m.

wish, deseo.

to accomplish, colmar.

workman, obrero, m.

wages, salario, m. (Sing.).

abominable, abominable.

2. Ardent, vivo, -a.

to prefer, preferir.

importance, wmportancia, f.

nonsense, tonteria, locura, f.

crime, crimen, m.; delito, m.

meanness, vileza, f.; bajeza, f.

to do, cometer.

deed, accion, f.

charming, encantador, -a.

bank, ribera, f.; orilla, f.

summit, cima, f.; cabeza, f.;
ceja, f.

*) from circa (Lat.), about.

Vocabulary.

Reading Exercise. (P. 246.)
Coger, to come to the ears of...
la alteracion, revolution.
la conquista, conquest.
griego, Greek.
sitiar, to besiege.
embestir, to take by assault.
tratar, to try, to treat.
el enojo, wrath.
el concierto, arrangement.
negarse, to refuse.
rodear, to surround.
el suplicio, tortures.
el verdugo, executioner.
comerse, to eat one another,
primero, sooner.
entregarse, to surrender.
dar lugar, to cause.
el vengador, avenger.
no perdonar, not to spare, not

to omit.
el medio, means.
desvalido, helpless.
confederar, to confederate.
en ruina, to the ruin.
espiritual, spiritual.
la adhesion, adherence.
estorbar, to trouble, to destroy.
acercarse, to approach*).
aportar, to land.
el aprieto, distress.
alzarse, to rise.
corto, feeble...
el refuerzo, support.

la salida, sally, sortie.
ahuyentar, to put to flight.
extremecido, frightened.
seletrueca, turns his back on him.
atreverse, to dare.
medirse, to cope with.

Traduccion 10. (P. 252.)

1. To comply with, Ienar.

to thank, dar gracias ; agradecer.
to treat, tratar.

meal, comida, f.

beginning (of a street), boca-
to flatter, lisonjear. {calle, f.
probably, probablemente,

to cheat, enganar.
Vocabulary.

idleness, pereza, f.

to depict, pintar, representar.

distress, apuro, m.; miseria, f.

2. Tulip, tulipan, m.

brilliant, lustroso, -a; vivo, -a.

smell, olor; agreeable smell, fra-
grancia, f-

godfather, padrino, m.

to observe, mirar.

member, miembro, f.

to count, contar.

joy, alegria, f.; jubilo, m,

doll, mufieca, f.

in the middle, en medio de...

sum, suma, f.

to raise, juntar.

for the moment, momentanea-
mente.

to resolve, resolverse.

to imagine, figurarse.

joy, gozo, m.

to accept, aceptar.

proposition, proposicion, f.

to doubt, dudar.

sincerity, sinceridad, f.

malicious, malicioso, -a.

afflicted, aflijido, -a.

Reading Exercise. (P. 253.)

A vista, in sight of.

dar una batalla, to give battle.

mandar, to command.

a la sazon, then, at this time.

llevar, to hurry on.

Jjuvenil, youthtul, juvenile.

la faccion, battle, fight.

ganar, to conquer.

quitar, to take off.

el mando, order.

nombrar, to nominate, to appoint.

nacer, to be born.

consta, it is evident, it follows.

el privado, favourite.

el ama de leche, f., nurse.

el casamiento, marriage.

criar, to educate.

en la cdmara, in the house.

heredar, to inherit; here: to
bestow an estate.

las mercedes, the dower.

 

*) Fr. défier.

Spanish Grammar.

385

sefalar, to announce.

hecho, deed.

servir al empleo, to procure the
place, to provide with, to
obtain.

presumir, to presume.

la mitad, (the) half.

es. fuerza confesar, one must
confess.

semejante, such.

el lustre, brilliancy.

la hazana, deed.

Traduccion 11.

1. Already, ya.

in the morning, por la mafiana.

task, tarea, f.

assiduity, empefio, m.

at last, al fin; finalmente.

ready, pronto, -a.

demand, pretension, f.

twilight, crepusculo, m.; in the
—, entre dos luces.

to injure, echar d perder.

to forget, olvidar [Fr. oublier].

to enter, entrar.

2. Queer fellow, hombre raro.

to feel sympathy for, interesarse
‘por

yet, pues.

to treat politely and affectio-
nately, agasajar.

unkindly, sin urbanidad; sin cor-
testa.

therefore, por eso, por tal.

franc, franco, m.

(P. 257.)

Reading Exercise. (P. 258.)

Buscar, to search.

atreverse, to dare.

alejar, to remove.

desafiar, to challenge*).

verificarse, to take place.

Burdeos, Bordeaux. ;

adicto, addicted, inclined.

descomulgar, to excommunicate.

poner entredicho, to inflict the
interdict on...

extraho, strange, curious.

conjurar, to conjure.
386

la nube, cloud (of an approaching
thunderstorm).

asegurar, to assure, to render
quiet.

Jaime, James.

guardarse, to be observed.

el armamento, the arming.

hacerse dé la vela, to set sail.

las aguas de ..., the sea near...

aviso, news.

la vuelta de. .., round...

sitiar, to besiege.

encontrar, to meet, to encounter.

descuidado, unsuspecting.

acometer, to attack.

de improviso, unexpectedly, una-
wares.

esperar, to wait for.

el esquife, boat”).

rendwrse, to surrender.

apercibirse, to prepare.

la pelea, fight, battle.

dar crédito, to shine (by . . .).

desdenar, to disdain.

el medio, means,

la astucia, slyness.

el esfuerzo, force.

el éxito, result, success.

absolver de temeraria, to absolve
from the reproach of temerity.

la bizarria, bold feat.

al rayar el (see the infinit.) dia,
at day-break.

el teson, tenacity.

el encarnizamiento, exasperation.

‘

Traduccion 12. (P. 263.)

1. To-night, esta noche.
dog, perro.

before, delante de...
to bark, ladrar.
dressed, vestido, -a.
cherry, cereza, guinda, f.
pound, libra, f.

to find, acertar.

way, camino, m.
supper, cena, f.

to stay, quedarse.
tower, torre, f.

high, alto, -a.

*) Fr. esquif, Engl. skiff.

Vocabulary.

joiner, carpintero, m.

costume, traje, m.

embassy, embajada, f.; legacia, f.

fair, rubio, -a.

2. Marquis, marques.

rogue, picaro.

generous, magndnimo.

to oppress, oprimir.

own, propio, -a.

damage, perjuicio; dano, m.

to deal in. .., tratar en...

sugar, azuecar, m.

oil, aceite.

to give vent to .
CM wee

anger, ira, f.; coraje, m.

danger, peligro, m.

favourite, privado, favorecido.

to arrive, llegar.

return, vuelta, f.

shame, vergiienza, f.

acquainted, versado, -a.

sometimes, d veces.

dangerous, peligroso, -a.

business, cosas, pl. f.; aswntos,
pl. m.

sey descargar

Reading Exercise.

Aun, still.

ceder, to yield, to retire.

inclinarse, to incline.

dotar, to endow.

encendido, inflamed.

la sata, rage, fury.

la flaqueza, cowardice.

aventurar, to stake.

el denuedo, courage.

librar, to free, to make sure,

tomar, to take.

abordar, to grapple, to board (a
ship). .

la proa, head, prow.

el hacha (f.) de armas, pole-axe,
battle-axe.

herir, to wound.

matar, to kill.

salir al encuentro, to hasten to
meet, to sally to encounter,

la refriega, fight.

la azcona, javelin.

(P. 264.)
Vocabulary.

clavar, to nail.

la tabla, board, plank.

derribar, to snatch away.

desclavarse, to tear away, to
pull out,

arrojar, to fling, to throw.

atravesar, to pierce.

la cubierta, deck.

rendidas, after having surren-
dered,

la ventaja, advantage.

costear, to (navigate along the)
coast. ‘

la marina, the shore, coast.

las cercanias, pl., neighbourhood.

ponerse, to cast anchor.

writar, to irritate. —

acercarsé, to approach.

lanzar, to fling.

armas arrojadizas, missiles.

infestar, to destroy, to desolate,
to waste.

saquear, to plunder.

talar, to abate, here: to lay
waste.

el vinedo, vineyard.

la ribera, coast.

ardir, to glow.

la ausencia, absence.

amsioso, anxious.

vengar, to revenge.

la afrenta, affront, offence.

varon, warrior.

Wenar, to fill.

los pertrechos bélicos, instruments
of war, arms.

en busca, in search.

concordar, to agree.

hacerse a@ la vela, to set
sail.

rehusar, to refuse; to avoid.

alejar, to get (them) away from.

acrecentar, to increase,

denostar, to injure.

la soga, cable.

la cuerda, string.

el buque, ship.

sefialar, to manifest, to speak
of...

el despojo, booty.

el aliento, courage.

la destreza, dexterity.

volver d subir, to return to...

387

la ligereza, rapidity.
partir & encontrar, to go to meet.

Traduccion 13. (P. 270.)

1, To betray one’s self, des-
subrirse.

farewell, ad Dios!

Christmas, Navidad, f.

pains (sing.), pena, f.; trabajo, m.

I find, me parece.

prince of the exchange, grande
de lonja.

to earn, ganar.

secrets, reserva, f.

to depart, encaminarse, ponerse
en camino.

esteem, el aprecio.

to sing, cantar.

by heart, de memoria.

correctly, correctamente.

to perform, here: cantar. [queza.

freely, frdncamente, con fran-

to please, gustar, agradar.

it is necessary, es menester, es
preciso.

kind-hearted, bondadoso.

2, Pride, orgullo, m.

superciliousness, arrogancia, $o-
berbia, f.

might think (condic,).

envy, envidia, mala voluntad, f.

to give pleasure, dar gusto.

to impart, notificar, participar.

news (sing.), nueva, noticia, f.

library, libreria, biblioteca, f.

dollar, duro, peso, m.

honest, honrado.

great square, plaza mayor.

to meet, encontrar. ;

tailor, sastre, m.

glass, vaso, m.

inadvertence, inadvertencia, f.

to wound, herir.

blow with the knife, cuchillada, f.

aid-de-camp, ayudante, m.

to invite, invitar, convidar.

dinner, comida, f.

to admire, admirar.

to lend, prestar.

to pretend, decir.

must not take (pres. subj. of
coger, with no). ‘

25%
oy
fh
Ss

tail, cola. f.

to become angry, airarse, en-
colerizarse.

mildness, dulzura, f.

to obtain, conseguir. lograr.

severity, severtdad, f.; rigor, mw.

beer, cerreza, f.

linen, larado, m.; ropa blanca, f.

to dr. secar.

nice, quapo, -a.

downright, recio, -a.

commerce, comercio, trafico, m.

animated, vivo, -a

Reading Exercise.

Trabarse, to begin.

recientemente, recently.

el ansia. f., desire, fervent wish.

la afrenta, affront.

tengar, to revenge.

aferar, to seize.

la cercania, nearness, closeness.

disparar, to fire.

el tiro, shot.

muy desde el principio, from the
very beginning, from the very
first.

Uerar ventaja, to have the ad-
vantage.

la maniobra, manceuvre.

el cortesano, courtier.

ejercitado, expert.

desasirse, to get rid of ...

tomar la vuelta, to return.

lograr, to succeed.

flaquear, to grow tired.

amenazar, to threaten.

ir, here: to be.

apinado, pressed, close, together.

el caudillo, chief.

la industria, endeavour.

poner en balanzas, to balance,
to keep in indecision.

barrenar, to sink (a vessel.’

echar @ pique, to sink, to run
down (a ship).

entregar, to surrender.

la sedicton, revolt.

la novedad, novelty, innovation;
here: revolution.

el morador, inhabitant.

sacudir, to shake off.

(P. 271.)

Vocabulary.

el yugo, yoke.

el afan, trouble.

mandar cortar, to order to be
cut off.

deslucir, to tarnish, to contami-
nate.

el lustre, splendour, renown.

elescarmiento,a warning example.

custodiar en prisis:. to hold in
prison.

disminuir, to diminish.

la humillacion, humiliation.

tergonzoso, shameful.

la comiticva, attendance, suite.

Traduccion 14. (P. 276.)

1. To be mistaken, equirocarse.

maniac, furibundo, m.

quinine, quina. f.

fever, calentura, f.

te marry smb., casurse con...

to suffer, sufrir.

cradle, cuna f,

grave, sepulecro, m.

even, mismo (used as an adjec
tive with the following ladron,
robber).

among, con.

difference. diferencia, f.

suburb, arrabal, m.

room, lugar, m.

enough, bastante.

treaty, tratade, m.

to merit, merecer.

severe, serero, -a.

punishment, castigo, m.; pena, f.

insipid, absurdo.

to exercise, ejercitar.

hunting, caza, f.

fishing, pesca, pesqueria, f.

salary, salario, m

particular, particular.

particularly, @ Beas

payment. paga, f.; pago, m.

2. Messenger, mensajero, m.

to shut, cerrar.

to fix, far, apuntar.

page, paje, m.
to walk before, ir delan’e.

garrison, guarnicion, f.
to surrender, rendirse.
elbow, codo, m.
Vocabulary.

trellis, reja, f.

to confirm, confirmar.

witness, testigo, m.

absence, ausencia, f.

to put, poner.

chest of drawers, cémoda, f.

roof, techo, m.

danger, peligro, m.

to tug, terar; sacar.

bed, cama, f.

thunderstorm, temporal, m.; tem-
pestad, f.

to step forth, adelantarse.

Reading Exercise.

Ultrajar, to offend.

a pesar de, notwithstanding.

conseguir, to obtain.

el abrigo, protection.

el derecho de gentes, law of na-
tions; international law.

amotinarse, to revolt.

romper, to break.

el encierro, prison.

atajar, to hinder.

el alboroto, sedition.

juntarse, to unite.

el sindico, the mayor.

las Cértes generales, the States
General.

el aprieto, distress.

con efecto, indeed.

hacer entender, to make under-
stand.

feroz, ferocious.

trasladar, to transfer, to trans-
port, to bring.

mandar, to order to...

guarecer, to protect.

popular, from the side of the
people.

el siglo, century.

al paso que, whereas.

la derrota, defeat.

alterar, to excite.

indignarse, to become angry,
furious. ,

tener préposito, to have the in-
tention. -

entregar & las lamas, to deliver

* to the flames = to destroy
by fire.

(P. 277.)

389

a ruegos, yielding to the request.

el legado, the Legate (the am-
bassador of the pope).

templarse, to grow calm (quiet).

algun tanto, a little.

hacer perecer en los suplicios, to
cause to be executed.

culpado, -a, guilty.

cobrar, to take again.

la costa, coast.

Traduccion 15. (P. 283.)

1. Official situation, empleo m.

to want, pedir.

subterfuges, chancharras man-
charras.

erudition, erudicion, f.

innate, innato, -a.

to go away, marcharse, irse.

ago, hace (fr. hacer).

to justify an account, aprobar
una cuenta.

2. Lo give back, restituir, devolver.

newspaper, gaceta, f.; diario, m.

any longer, mds.

come to the promenade, pasearse.

to bring fruit, fructificar.

supper, cena, f.

gentleman, caballero.

to go away, irse; partir.

to take, tomar.

chocolate, chocolate, m.

to knock, llamar (3. plur.).

noise, ruido, m.

to fear, temer.

Reading Exercise. (P. 284).

Avistar, to get in sight.

el cabo, cape.

saltar en tierra, to go ashore.

el grueso, the gros (of the fleet).

por parte, from the side, by
order of.

mandar, to govern.

la faccion, deed.

alzar, to establish.

el régulo, a little king.

a principios, at the beginning.

rendido, overwhelmed.

manchar, to stain.

el drbitro, arbiter, umpire.
390

el espanto, horror.

amagar, to aim.

acariciar, to caress, to favour
particularly.

anargo, bitter.

el desabrimiento, vexation; adver-
sity.

van referidos, are related.

resentirse, to resent, to suffer.

el embate, attack.

insigne, great.

acordarse, to remember.

disimular, to dissimulate.

publicar, to publish; here: to
tell, to relate.

ahogar, to choke.

la falta, here: the decease.

por no poder con ..., because he
was not able to conquer bis...

la prenda, quality.

Traduccion 16. (P. 290.)

1. To conquer, conquistar.

siege, sitio, m.

nonsense, desvario, m.

joke, burla, broma, f.

impertinence, groseria, f.

witticism, chiste, m.

captain-general, capitan general.

to confirm, confirmar.

officer, oficial; empleado, m.

to elect, elejir; elejir.

not to speak the truth, faltar
a la verdad.

dress, traje, m.

tasteless, sin gusto.

2. Fortune, dinero, m.; fortuna,
f.; caudal, m.

robber, ladron.

gipsy, gitano, m.

to obtain, conseguir.

in time, a tiempo, & buen tiempo.

entreaty, ruego, m.

unhappy (man), desdichado; in-
feliz.

companion, campafero.

promise, promesa, f.

alms, limosna, f.

to put on, ponerse.

boot, bota, f.

waistcoat, chaleco, m.

to forbid, prohibir, defender.

Vocabulary.

Reading Exercise. (P. 290.)

El transito, march, way.

sangriento, bloody.

el rastro, trace.

el robo, theft.

afligir, to aflict, to damage.

culto, civilised.

el brio, zeal, fervour.

el cuidado, care.

el baluarte, rampart.

el fuerte, fort.

replegarse, to draw back.

ad sangre y fuego, with fire and
sword.

reconocimiento, reconnoitring.

al paso que, whilst, whereas.

cruzar, to cross, to pass.

el impetu, impetuosity.

forzar, to win*by assault.

repeler, to repulse.

la serenidad, coolness, presence
of mind.

burlados ..., as... were cheated.

colocar, to place.

el acierto, ability, dexterity.

poner término, to put an end,
to terminate.

Traduccion 17. (P. 296.)

1. To pay attention, hacer alto.

to show, ensefiar; mostrar.

to have intercourse with, tratar
con, frecuentar ad...

cold frio, -a.

merry, alegre.

acorn, bellota, f.

oak-tree, roble, carvallo, m.

spendthrift, gastador, m.; prd-
digo, m.

to continue, continuar.

banker, banquero, m.

to surprise, sorprender.

spring, primavera, f.

appearance, apariencia, f.

culprit, reo, delincuente, m.

2. To wash, lavar.

the washing, la ropa blanca.

to be engaged, estar impedido.

to paint, pintar.

to go to bed, acostarse; irse a
dormir.
Vocabulary.

to rise, levantarse.
to afflict deeply, aflijir muchi-
simo.

Reading Exercise. (P. 297.)

Sumamente, extremely.

ldbrego, dark, gloomy.

calladamente, silently.

el arojo, boldness.

hasta hallarse, till they found
themselves.

cerca, near.

alumbrar, to illuminates

el fogonazo, flash (of a gun).

los ayes (plur.), groanings (see
p. 12).

espantoso, terrible.

arrimar, to put to.

la escala, ladder*), +

pusieronse (fr. poner), they arri-
ved.

apresurado, quick.

encaramar, to climb up.

estorbar, to hinder.

sin embargo, yet, but, never-
theless,

sembrar, to sow.

eansar, to tire.

rechazar, to thrust back.

la empresa, undertaking.

el somaten, militia man.

la ayuda, help, assistance.

Traduccion 18. (P. 302.)

1. Project, intento, m.

to meet, encontrar.

unfaithful, infel.

wonder, milagro, m.; maravilla, f.

to bore, enfadar.

dreadfully, hasta no mds.

shop, tienda, f.

mind, gana, f.

to scold, gritar, reganar.

2 To be warm, hacer calor.

to comply with a request, atender
a la solicitud de...

to dance, bailar, danzar.

to fence, esgrimir; jugar las
armas.

391

to ride, ir,
caballo.

to get done, acabar.

to be wandering with one’s
thoughts, estar distraido.

never mind, descuide V.

to have bought, tener comprado.

to send back, volver, devolver.

to sell, here: volver & vender
(to sell again).

to get rid of ..., desembarazarse
de...

to make shift without ..., poder
pasar sin...

to dress one’s self, vestirse.
Reading Exercise. (P. 303.):

Pasar por las armas, to put to
the sword **).

proferir, to proffer, pronounce
(an opinion),

la voz, word.

amponer, to order.

el bando, public advertisement.

el teson, tenacity.

ponderar, to value, to prize, to
estimate.

relatar, to relate.

anterior, preceding, foregoing.

calificar, to qualify, to call, to
describe.

comisionar, to order.

reconocer, to reconnoitre.

el juicio, judgment.

prescindir, to set aside.

cuartearse, to become full of
rents or fissures.

cubrir, to cover.

el arbusto, bush.

la maleza, shrubs,

desprovisto,wanting,in wantof...

la fortaleza, strength,

cuesta abajo, slope.

unirse, to unite.

tributario, tributary, affluent.

por debajo, under, underneath.

al nacimiento del sol, eastward.

comunicarse, to communicate.

circuir, obsolete for circundar,
to surround (conjugated like
argitir).

andar, montar &

*) French: escalier (stairs), escalader (to climb); Ital. scala.
**) French: passer par les armes.
el torreon, great tower.

débil, weak, feeble.

el reparo, fence.

mejorar, to mend.

afadir, to add, to join.

el baluarte, rampart.

el foso, ditch.

el camino cubierto, covered way.

dominar, to dominate.

la altura, height.

mirar, to look, to be in the
direction of ...

el reducto, redoubt (fort).

avanzar, to advance.

regar, to water, to irrigate.

abrirse, to extend.

el Mano, plain.

baiar, to irrigate, to water*).

el riachuelo, rivulet.

la acequia, canal.

deleitable, delightful.

la quinta, cottage.

ascender, to amount to...

interino, provisional.

natural, born at ..., native of...

elteniente derey, Lord-Lieutenant.

le acometida, attack.

el coronel, colonel.

el acierto, ability.

Traduccion 19. (P. 308.)

1. As if, como si...

to have rather, preferir; querer.

at all events, en todo caso; en
todo cuento; ad todo ruedo.

news, noticia, f.

telegraph, télegrafo, f.

to find, hallar.

in good health, en sana salud.

superiors, superiores, m. pl.

strict, riguroso, -a.

basket, cestilla; cestica, f.

to keep one’s promise, cumplir
con su promesa.

2. To be cold, hacer frio.

too, demasiado: demesiadamente.

to put to rights, arreglar; poner
en orden.

ready, pronto, listo.

to seek, buscar.

*) French: baigner.

Vocabulary.

favour, favor.

to do, hacer.

room, lugar, m.

here is, hay.

confidence,confianza.franque-a.f.

to fear, temer.

train, tren, m.

3. Duty, obligation, obligacion.

to do, fulfil, cumplir con.

to complain, quejarse.

to blame, reprobar.

to command, order, mandar.

to advise, aconsejar.

twiligh® entre dos luces.

weak, flaco.

proposition, preposicion.

to be silent, callar.

to understand, entender.

to interrupt, interrumptr.

to trust, confiar, descubrir.

chatterer, charlatan, charlador
(charlatan = quack).

to get on one’s way, ponerse en
camino.

Reading Exercise. (P. 309.)

Las fuerzas, forces.

flaco, feeble.

desventajoso, unfavourable.

ensenorear, to dominate.

el agresor, assailant.

ademas, besides.

atender d ..., to consider.

el recinto, circumference, circuit,
extent.

suplir, to supply.

la cruzada, crusade.

apellidar, to call, to name.

la escuadra, squadron.

el cartucho, cartridge.

recoger, to receive.

auziliar, to assist.

circunvalar, to enclose, to encom-
pass (by fortifications).

colocarse, to place one’s self.

la mdrgen, brim; here: bank.

el conjunto, the sum total.

bloquear, to blockade.

estrecho, narrow.

gozar, to enjoy.
Vocabulary.

evar adelante, to bring forward,
to carry on...

el tren de sitio, battering-train.

destacado, detached, separated.

el romper el fuego, the beginning
of the firing.

intimar la rendicion, to urge the
surrender.

tener trato, to treat.

ad metrallazos, with grape-shot.

entrar en habla, to parley.

los lances, circumstances.

llevarse (las cosas), to do things.

loar, to praise. |

empefiar, to pledge; here: to
encourage.

cumplir, to execute.

la toesa, a Spanish measure = a
fathom. [French: toise.]

el ramal, ramification.

el obus, howitzer.

la pulgada, inch.

el mortero, mortar.

cercado, besieged.

ad pesar de, notwithstanding.

impedir, to hinder.

Traduccion 20. (P. 315.)

1. Cage, jaula, f.

command, mandamiento.

to kill, matar.

nap, suefecito, m.

to take by assault, tomar por
asalto.

Corsica, Corcega.

2. Januarius, Jenaro:

to play at cards, jugar a los
naipes [jouer, giwocare, jocus].

amusement, pasatiempo, m.

to go down, bajar.

Reading Exercise. (P. 315.)

La repulsa, refusal, denial.

otro tanto, the same thing.

vecino, inhabitant.

la doncella, virgin, girl.

alistar, to enlist.

sin dar descanso, unceasingly,
continually.

la porfia, exertion.

desalentarse,. to lose heart.

393

estrenarse, to do smth. for the
first time (— en las armas, to
fight for the first time).

la ceniza; ashes.

el menoscabo, damage, detriment.

reponer, to repair.

la junta correjimental, the cor-
poration (of the aldermen).

coadyuvar, to help, to assist.

el buen zelo, zeal.

el cirujano mayor,
major.

el memorial, memory.

el suceso, accident, fact.

apagar, to silence, to dismount
(Mil.).

abrir brecha, to make a breach
I sx

descortinar, to break the curtain.

evacuar, to evacuate.

envalentar, to encourage.

sobrado, too great.

desalojar, to dislodge, to expel.

la guerrilla, the volunteer-corps.

levantar, to raise.

el espaldon, parapet.

tratar, to try.

la salida, sortie (Mil.).

enfermo, sick, ill.

aproximarse, to approach.

el ganado vacuno, a drove (herd)
of oxen.

el abasto, provisions.

sentar, to establish.

el cuartel general, head-quarters.

apoderarse, to occupy, to take
possession of...

el destacamento, detachment.

dntes de acabarse, before the end.

la ventaja, advantage.

la mira, intention.

hasta el ultimo trance, to the
utmost.

alborear, dawn, daybreak.

valerse, to make use of.

aportillarse, to be partly broken
down.

la cara, front.

derribar, to fling down, to cast
down.

tremolar, to wave, to be dis-
played (of colours).

arrojarse, to spring down.

25

surgeon-
394

recobrar, to fetch.

subir, to climb up.

hincar, to fix in the ground.
enarbolar, to plant.

Traduccion 21. (P. 321.)

1. To tranquillize, tranquilizar;
aquietar.

fugitive, fujitivo, m.; préfugo, m.

to begin a conversation, entrar
en conversacion.

to give chase, dar cazad...

2. Colonel, el coronel.

barracks, el cuartel.

easily, fdcilmente, con facilidad.

carefully, dilijyentemente.

to revenge one's self, vengarse;
tomar satisfaccion.

grand square, plaza mayor.

Reading Exercise.

En intentar, to try.

la serenidad, coolness, tran-
quillity.

inutilizar, to render useless.

los contrarios, the enemies.

la columna cerrada, in close
column.

llevar al asalto, to lead to the
assault.

desmayar, to be dismayed, to be
disheartened.

perecer, to perish, to die.

tener en el aire, to let the can-
nons play, to bring the artil-
lery to bear.

el fuego parabélico, missile, pro-
jectile.

esclarecido, glorious.

el mozo, boy, lad.

apostar, to place, to post.

la caja, drum.

el casco, splinter, splint.

el muslo, thigh.

la rodilla, knee.

al quererle, as they wished to...
him.

la pierna, leg.

tocar de caja, to beat the drum,

enturbiar, to trouble.

volar, to blow up.

reparar, to care.

(P. 322.)

Vocabulary.

adelantarse, to advance.

la cresta, crest; here: brim.

el glasis, glacis (free space before
the ramparts).

detener, to retain, to hinder.

ahinco, zeal.

el rebellin, ravelin (Fortif.).

alojarse, to take foot.

bizarro, gallant, brave

sinembargo, yet, however, never-
theless.

dado, permitted.

contestar, to answer.

los escombros, ruins.

dechado, model.

cuerdo, prudent.

desaprovechar, to omit.

acogerse, to retire.

el cementerio, church-yard.

el conato, intention, exertion,
effort.

el paraje, place.

la béveda, vault.

desencavalgar, to dismount.

la pollada, rocket (Milit.).

la trinchera, trench.

el apuro, want, dearth.

socorrer, to succour.

Traduccion 22, (P. 328.)

1. Ability, habilidad; facultad, f.

to babble, susurrar.

injurious, nocivo, -a.

to sow, sembrar.

grain, grano, m.

to take place, hacerse.

harvest, cosecha, f.

peace, paz, f.

2. Priest, sacerdote, 1.

to adorn, adornar.

post. correo, m.

to give a box on the ear, bofe-
tear; dar bofetadas.

impostor, embustero, m.

Reading Exercise. (P. 329.)

Atropellar, to beat back, to put
to flight.

ir de respeto,to form the reserve.

abrigarse de..., to retreat to...

rocoger el fruto, to earn the
fruit.

la acojida, reception.
Vocabulary.

previo, circumspect, cautious.

levantado, high, magnanimous;
superior.

al toque, when beating.

la generala, the assembly (beat
of drums).

el tafido, sound,

lamar ad somaten, to ring the
alarm-bell.

el paisano, citizen, civil person.

froile, monk.

acudir, to hasten.

de antemano, beforehand.

denso, thick, dense (of smoke).

el sexo, Bex.

vislumbrarse, to show one's self.

el semblante, face.

denodado, intrepid..

descollar, to be prominent.

aventajar, to surpass.

sobrepujar, to overtop.

el pecho, breast, courage.

la conduccion, transport.

el acometedor, assailant.

tomar pié, to post one’s self, to
gain a footing.

quedar tendido, to rest on the
battle-field.

arrojadamente, dauntilessly.

largo rato, a long while.

hacer las veces, to discharge the
office, to officiate.

Traduccion 23.
1. Fee, la propina.
to get rid of, desempenarse.
tedious, incémodo, fastidioso.
cathedral, iglesia mayor ; catedral.
2. To lend, here: dejar (to leave).
umbrella, paraguas, m.
to attain the aim, acertar (lograr)
el tiro, alcanzar el término.
careful, exacto, -a.
to teaze, atormentar.
to desist, desistir de...

(P, 332.)

Reading Exercise. (P. 333.)

La funcion, fight.

el despojo, booty.

ad veces, sometimes.
membrudo, nervous.
suelto, -a, loose, adj.

395

arrebatar, to carry on, to hurry
on...

encarecidamente, instantly.

subir @..., to succeed in...

escarmentar, to make wiser.

ad pesar de, notwithstanding.

el bloqueo, blockade.

la senda, path.

atar, to bind.

la cuerda, string.

el cencerro, bell of mules.

atemorizar, to frighten.

la escasez, want, scarcity.

machacar, to pound, to beat with
a pestle.

el almirez, mortar.

aguantar, to support.

acudir, to hasten to...

el empeno, tenacity.

Traduccion 24. (P. 339.)

1. To hand, presentar.

bookbinder, encuadernador, m

to sob, sollozar.

to smoke, fumar.

to chat, platicar.

to ery fire, tocar a fuego.

portrait, retrato, m.

2. Sluggard, holgazan, m.

agent, ajente, m.

to turn round, volverse ad...

to order, mandar.

to give the hand, esér echar (dar)
la mano.

Reading Exercise. (P. 339.)
Excusado, vain, unsuccessful.
st, indeed.
las lastimas, sufferings.
el jumento, donkey, ass.

-echar mano, to put hand to...

apurarse, to be on the decline.

faltos de, for want of ...

entre st, to one another.

las erines, mane.

la codicia, avarice.

inmundo, unclean, impure, foul.

el vellon, copper coin.

divisarse, to perceive.

la calentura, fever.

conceder gracias, to concede fa-
vours.
396

el levantamiento, rising.
llerar & cabo, to execute.

la cria, the young (of animals).
los brutos, the animals.
desplomado, fallen to ruins.
desempedrado, unpaved.
remansado, foul (water).

el hoyo, ditch.

la inmundicia, rubbish, dirt.
el ambiente, air, atmosphere.
el abrigo, shelter.

insepulto, unburied.

los escombros, ruins.

desvalido, poor, helpless, destitute.

Traduccion 25. (P. 344.)

1. Apple, manzana, f.

to consecrate, consagrar, sagrar.

matter, asunto, m.

to take a resolution, tomar un
partido.

to ascend the throne, subir al
trono.

accident, acontectmiento, m.

to inform, informar.

2. Place, lugar, m.

remorse, remordimientos, m. pl.

to torment, atormentar.

guilt, culpa, f.; delito, m.

vanity, vanidad, f.

to offend, ofender.

to reconcile, aplacar.

Vocabulary.

to breed (= to educate), criar;
educar.

to reestablish the peace, ajustar
la paz.

the home, la patria.

to burst forth into, meterse &
hacer.

bill, cuenta, f.

waiter, mozo, m.

trunk, baul, m.

company, tertulia, f.

Reading Exercise. ‘P. 345.)
Recelarse (rezelarse), to fear.
de resultas, in consequence.
ensanchar, to make wide.
atrincherarse, to intrench one’s.

self.
cortar, to cut off.
dudar, to doubt, not to know.
pesar, to weigh.
la estrella, star, fate.
ajustarse, to agree.
asombrarse, to be saddened.
malogrado, become useless.
el morador, inhabitant.
mas alld, far more than...
conforme, as.

valerse, to make use...
el medio, means.
senalar, to offer.
rendir, to surrender.
el dicho, word, saying.

Printed by C. F. Winter, Darmstadt.
Ui

ivi

PC 411

TL

4 026
Nl Apt
ye
alt
LAL
ve

s fae PRES Ne SLM AP ie ME:
ie fife, tf Med HOPE y, Ci diy di Uf fA y Hei a i Ue
if Rie y ; es ih i Mie
Gy Oise Vy fie oe tip He Gee Ue ie Ye j iy
Ly y
ere ae
Pe
Sobre

eT LES
Ife
MEGA Li
aia
bie yawn fui